Many hyperlinks are disabled.
Use anonymous login
to enable hyperlinks.
Changes In Branch core-8-branch Excluding Merge-Ins
This is equivalent to a diff from 5b0bfdb5 to a64fbcd2
2024-12-22
| ||
12:28 | (cherry-pick): Fix [121786c0]: image svg upstream out of bound read nanosvg#262 Leaf check-in: a64fbcd2 user: jan.nijtmans tags: core-8-branch | |
12:24 | (cherry-pick): Spacing/indenting fixes for ttk check-in: e1bf16b0 user: jan.nijtmans tags: core-8-branch | |
12:07 | Fix [121786c0]: image svg upstream out of bound read nanosvg#262 Leaf check-in: c4f6d582 user: jan.nijtmans tags: trunk, main | |
2024-12-05
| ||
07:55 | Remove somewhat more dead code, for macOS < 10.9 check-in: e6f9e644 user: jan.nijtmans tags: trunk, main | |
2024-12-04
| ||
12:31 | Proposed fix for [947bb269ec]: tk::startOfCluster crashes on starting indices greater than string length check-in: e720cce9 user: jan.nijtmans tags: bug-947bb269ec | |
2024-12-03
| ||
11:04 | Merge-mark check-in: 5b0bfdb5 user: jan.nijtmans tags: trunk, main | |
11:03 | Merge 8.6 check-in: b577bce1 user: jan.nijtmans tags: core-8-branch | |
04:04 | Update changes.md check-in: afaaeca2 user: fvogel tags: trunk, main | |
Changes to .github/workflows/linux-build.yml.
︙ | ︙ | |||
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 | uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: path: tk - name: Checkout Tcl 8.6 uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: repository: tcltk/tcl | | | 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 | uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: path: tk - name: Checkout Tcl 8.6 uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: repository: tcltk/tcl ref: core-8-branch path: tcl - name: Setup Environment (compiler=${{ matrix.compiler }}) run: | sudo apt-get install libxss-dev libxft-dev mkdir "$HOME/install dir" touch tk/doc/man.macros tk/generic/tkStubInit.c echo "CFGOPT=$CFGOPT" >> $GITHUB_ENV |
︙ | ︙ | |||
139 140 141 142 143 144 145 | uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: path: tk - name: Checkout Tcl uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: repository: tcltk/tcl | | | 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 | uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: path: tk - name: Checkout Tcl uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: repository: tcltk/tcl ref: core-8-branch path: tcl - name: Setup Environment (compiler=${{ matrix.compiler }}) run: | sudo apt-get install libxss-dev libxft-dev xvfb libicu-dev mkdir "$HOME/install dir" touch tk/doc/man.macros tk/generic/tkStubInit.c echo "CFGOPT=$CFGOPT" >> $GITHUB_ENV |
︙ | ︙ |
Deleted .github/workflows/linux-with-tcl8-build.yml.
|
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < |
Added .github/workflows/linux-with-tcl86-build.yml.
> > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 | name: Linux (with Tcl 8.6) on: push: branches: - "main" - "core-8-branch" - "core-8-6-branch" tags: - "core-**" permissions: contents: read defaults: run: shell: bash working-directory: tk/unix env: ERROR_ON_FAILURES: 1 jobs: build: runs-on: ubuntu-22.04 strategy: matrix: compiler: - "gcc" - "clang" cfgopt: - "" - "CFLAGS=-DTK_NO_DEPRECATED=1" - "--disable-xft" - "--disable-xss" - "--enable-symbols" steps: - name: Checkout uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: path: tk - name: Checkout Tcl uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: repository: tcltk/tcl ref: core-8-6-branch path: tcl - name: Setup Environment (compiler=${{ matrix.compiler }}) run: | sudo apt-get install libxss-dev libxft-dev mkdir "$HOME/install dir" touch tk/doc/man.macros tk/generic/tkStubInit.c echo "CFGOPT=$CFGOPT" >> $GITHUB_ENV echo "CC=$COMPILER" >> $GITHUB_ENV echo "TOOL_DIR=$(cd tcl/tools;pwd)" >> $GITHUB_ENV echo "BUILD_CONFIG_ID=$OPTS" >> $GITHUB_ENV working-directory: "." env: CFGOPT: ${{ matrix.cfgopt }} COMPILER: ${{ matrix.compiler }} OPTS: ${{ matrix.compiler }}${{ matrix.cfgopt }} - name: Configure and Build Tcl run: | ./configure $CFGOPT "--prefix=$HOME/install dir" || { cat config.log echo "::warning::Failure during Tcl Configure" exit 1 } make all install || { echo "::warning::Failure during Tcl Build" exit 1 } echo "TCL_CONFIG_PATH=`pwd`" >> $GITHUB_ENV working-directory: tcl/unix - name: Configure (opts=${{ matrix.cfgopt }}) run: | ./configure $CFGOPT --with-tcl=$TCL_CONFIG_PATH --disable-zipfs "--prefix=$HOME/install dir" || { cat config.log echo "::error::Failure during Configure" exit 1 } - name: Build run: | make binaries libraries || { echo "::error::Failure during Build" exit 1 } - name: Build Test Harness run: | make tktest || { echo "::error::Failure during Build" exit 1 } - name: Test-Drive Installation run: | make install || { echo "::error::Failure during Install" exit 1 } - name: Create Distribution Package run: | make dist || { echo "::error::Failure during Distribute" exit 1 } - name: Convert Documentation to HTML run: | make html-tk TOOL_DIR=$TOOL_DIR || { echo "::error::Failure during Distribute" exit 1 } test: runs-on: ubuntu-22.04 strategy: matrix: compiler: - "gcc" cfgopt: - "" - "--disable-xft" - "--enable-symbols" steps: - name: Checkout uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: path: tk - name: Checkout Tcl uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: repository: tcltk/tcl ref: core-8-6-branch path: tcl - name: Setup Environment (compiler=${{ matrix.compiler }}) run: | sudo apt-get install libxss-dev libxft-dev xvfb libicu-dev mkdir "$HOME/install dir" touch tk/doc/man.macros tk/generic/tkStubInit.c echo "CFGOPT=$CFGOPT" >> $GITHUB_ENV echo "CC=$COMPILER" >> $GITHUB_ENV working-directory: "." env: CFGOPT: ${{ matrix.cfgopt }} COMPILER: ${{ matrix.compiler }} - name: Configure and Build Tcl run: | ./configure $CFGOPT "--prefix=$HOME/install dir" || { cat config.log echo "::warning::Failure during Tcl Configure" exit 1 } make all install || { echo "::warning::Failure during Tcl Build" exit 1 } echo "TCL_CONFIG_PATH=`pwd`" >> $GITHUB_ENV working-directory: tcl/unix - name: Configure ${{ matrix.cfgopt }} run: | ./configure $CFGOPT --with-tcl=$TCL_CONFIG_PATH "--prefix=$HOME/install dir" || { cat config.log echo "::error::Failure during Configure" exit 1 } - name: Build run: | make binaries libraries tktest || { echo "::error::Failure during Build" exit 1 } - name: Run Tests run: | xvfb-run --auto-servernum make test-classic | tee out-classic.txt xvfb-run --auto-servernum make test-ttk | tee out-ttk.txt grep -q "Failed 0" out-classic.txt || { echo "::error::Failure during Test" exit 1 } grep -q "Failed 0" out-ttk.txt || { echo "::error::Failure during Test" exit 1 } timeout-minutes: 15 |
Added .github/workflows/linux-with-tcl9-build.yml.
> > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 | name: Linux (with Tcl 9.0) on: push: branches: - "main" - "core-8-branch" - "core-8-6-branch" tags: - "core-**" permissions: contents: read defaults: run: shell: bash working-directory: tk/unix env: ERROR_ON_FAILURES: 1 jobs: build: runs-on: ubuntu-22.04 strategy: matrix: compiler: - "gcc" - "clang" cfgopt: - "" - "CFLAGS=-DTK_NO_DEPRECATED=1" - "--disable-xft" - "--disable-xss" - "--enable-symbols" steps: - name: Checkout uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: path: tk - name: Checkout Tcl uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: repository: tcltk/tcl ref: main path: tcl - name: Setup Environment (compiler=${{ matrix.compiler }}) run: | sudo apt-get install libxss-dev libxft-dev mkdir "$HOME/install dir" touch tk/doc/man.macros tk/generic/tkStubInit.c echo "CFGOPT=$CFGOPT" >> $GITHUB_ENV echo "CC=$COMPILER" >> $GITHUB_ENV echo "TOOL_DIR=$(cd tcl/tools;pwd)" >> $GITHUB_ENV echo "BUILD_CONFIG_ID=$OPTS" >> $GITHUB_ENV working-directory: "." env: CFGOPT: ${{ matrix.cfgopt }} COMPILER: ${{ matrix.compiler }} OPTS: ${{ matrix.compiler }}${{ matrix.cfgopt }} - name: Configure and Build Tcl run: | ./configure $CFGOPT "--prefix=$HOME/install dir" || { cat config.log echo "::warning::Failure during Tcl Configure" exit 1 } make all install || { echo "::warning::Failure during Tcl Build" exit 1 } echo "TCL_CONFIG_PATH=`pwd`" >> $GITHUB_ENV working-directory: tcl/unix - name: Configure (opts=${{ matrix.cfgopt }}) run: | ./configure $CFGOPT --with-tcl=$TCL_CONFIG_PATH "--prefix=$HOME/install dir" || { cat config.log echo "::error::Failure during Configure" exit 1 } - name: Build run: | make binaries libraries || { echo "::error::Failure during Build" exit 1 } - name: Build Test Harness run: | make tktest || { echo "::error::Failure during Build" exit 1 } - name: Test-Drive Installation run: | make install || { echo "::error::Failure during Install" exit 1 } - name: Create Distribution Package run: | make dist || { echo "::error::Failure during Distribute" exit 1 } - name: Convert Documentation to HTML run: | make html-tk TOOL_DIR=$TOOL_DIR || { echo "::error::Failure during Distribute" exit 1 } test: runs-on: ubuntu-22.04 strategy: matrix: compiler: - "gcc" cfgopt: - "" - "--disable-xft" - "--enable-symbols" steps: - name: Checkout uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: path: tk - name: Checkout Tcl uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: repository: tcltk/tcl ref: main path: tcl - name: Setup Environment (compiler=${{ matrix.compiler }}) run: | sudo apt-get install libxss-dev libxft-dev xvfb libicu-dev mkdir "$HOME/install dir" touch tk/doc/man.macros tk/generic/tkStubInit.c echo "CFGOPT=$CFGOPT" >> $GITHUB_ENV echo "CC=$COMPILER" >> $GITHUB_ENV working-directory: "." env: CFGOPT: ${{ matrix.cfgopt }} COMPILER: ${{ matrix.compiler }} - name: Configure and Build Tcl run: | ./configure $CFGOPT "--prefix=$HOME/install dir" || { cat config.log echo "::warning::Failure during Tcl Configure" exit 1 } make all install || { echo "::warning::Failure during Tcl Build" exit 1 } echo "TCL_CONFIG_PATH=`pwd`" >> $GITHUB_ENV working-directory: tcl/unix - name: Configure ${{ matrix.cfgopt }} run: | ./configure $CFGOPT --with-tcl=$TCL_CONFIG_PATH "--prefix=$HOME/install dir" || { cat config.log echo "::error::Failure during Configure" exit 1 } - name: Build run: | make binaries libraries tktest || { echo "::error::Failure during Build" exit 1 } - name: Run Tests run: | xvfb-run --auto-servernum make test-classic | tee out-classic.txt xvfb-run --auto-servernum make test-ttk | tee out-ttk.txt grep -q "Failed 0" out-classic.txt || { echo "::error::Failure during Test" exit 1 } grep -q "Failed 0" out-ttk.txt || { echo "::error::Failure during Test" exit 1 } timeout-minutes: 15 |
Deleted .github/workflows/linux-with-tcl91-build.yml.
|
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < |
Changes to .github/workflows/mac-build.yml.
︙ | ︙ | |||
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | shell: bash working-directory: tk/macosx steps: - name: Checkout Tk uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: path: tk | | | | 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 | shell: bash working-directory: tk/macosx steps: - name: Checkout Tk uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: path: tk - name: Checkout Tcl uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: repository: tcltk/tcl ref: core-8-branch path: tcl - name: Prepare checked out repositories run: | touch tk/generic/tkStubInit.c mkdir build echo "BUILD_DIR=`cd build && pwd`" >> $GITHUB_ENV echo "DESTDIR=`cd build && pwd`" >> $GITHUB_ENV |
︙ | ︙ | |||
71 72 73 74 75 76 77 | shell: bash working-directory: tk/unix steps: - name: Checkout Tk uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: path: tk | | | | 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 | shell: bash working-directory: tk/unix steps: - name: Checkout Tk uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: path: tk - name: Checkout Tcl uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: repository: tcltk/tcl ref: core-8-branch path: tcl - name: Prepare checked out repositories env: SET_DISPLAY: ${{ contains(matrix.options, '--disable-aqua') }} run: | touch tkStubInit.c mkdir "$HOME/install dir" |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to .github/workflows/onefiledist.yml.
︙ | ︙ | |||
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 | CC: gcc CFGOPT: --disable-symbols --disable-shared steps: - name: Checkout Tk uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: path: tk | | | | 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 | CC: gcc CFGOPT: --disable-symbols --disable-shared steps: - name: Checkout Tk uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: path: tk - name: Checkout Tcl 8.7 uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: repository: tcltk/tcl ref: core-8-branch path: tcl - name: Setup Environment run: | sudo apt-get install libxss-dev libxft-dev touch tcl/generic/tclStubInit.c tcl/generic/tclOOStubInit.c touch tk/generic/tkStubInit.c echo "INST_DIR=$(cd install;pwd)" >> $GITHUB_ENV |
︙ | ︙ | |||
54 55 56 57 58 59 60 | - name: Build & Install Tk run: | make binaries libraries install working-directory: tk/unix # TODO: need the Tk version separately for distro naming below - name: Package run: | | | | 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 | - name: Build & Install Tk run: | make binaries libraries install working-directory: tk/unix # TODO: need the Tk version separately for distro naming below - name: Package run: | cp bin/wish8.7 ${BUILD_NAME} chmod +x ${BUILD_NAME} tar -cf ${BUILD_NAME}.tar ${BUILD_NAME} working-directory: ${{ env.INST_DIR }} env: BUILD_NAME: wish${{ env.TCL_PATCHLEVEL }}_snapshot - name: Upload uses: actions/upload-artifact@v4 |
︙ | ︙ | |||
84 85 86 87 88 89 90 | CC: gcc CFGOPT: --disable-symbols --disable-shared steps: - name: Checkout Tk uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: path: tk | | | | 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 | CC: gcc CFGOPT: --disable-symbols --disable-shared steps: - name: Checkout Tk uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: path: tk - name: Checkout Tcl 8.7 uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: repository: tcltk/tcl ref: core-8-branch path: tcl - name: Checkout create-dmg uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: repository: create-dmg/create-dmg ref: v1.0.8 path: create-dmg |
︙ | ︙ | |||
172 173 174 175 176 177 178 | with: msystem: MINGW64 install: git mingw-w64-x86_64-toolchain make zip - name: Checkout Tk uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: path: tk | | | | 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 | with: msystem: MINGW64 install: git mingw-w64-x86_64-toolchain make zip - name: Checkout Tk uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: path: tk - name: Checkout Tcl 8.7 uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: repository: tcltk/tcl ref: core-8-branch path: tcl - name: Setup Environment run: | mkdir -p install/combined touch tcl/generic/tclStubInit.c tcl/generic/tclOOStubInit.c touch tk/generic/tkStubInit.c echo "INST_DIR=$(cd install;pwd)" >> $GITHUB_ENV |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to .github/workflows/win-build.yml.
︙ | ︙ | |||
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 | working-directory: tk/win # Using powershell means we need to explicitly stop on failure strategy: matrix: config: - "" - "OPTS=symbols" - "OPTS=static" steps: - name: Checkout Tk uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: path: tk | > | | | 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 | working-directory: tk/win # Using powershell means we need to explicitly stop on failure strategy: matrix: config: - "" - "OPTS=symbols" - "OPTS=symbols STATS=compdbg,memdbg" - "OPTS=static" steps: - name: Checkout Tk uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: path: tk - name: Checkout Tcl 8.7 uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: repository: tcltk/tcl ref: core-8-branch path: tcl - name: Init MSVC uses: ilammy/msvc-dev-cmd@v1 - name: Make Install Location working-directory: tcl run: | echo "TCLDIR=`pwd`" >> $GITHUB_ENV |
︙ | ︙ | |||
116 117 118 119 120 121 122 | - name: Install MSYS2 uses: msys2/setup-msys2@v2 with: msystem: MINGW64 install: git mingw-w64-x86_64-toolchain make zip - name: Checkout Tk uses: actions/checkout@v4 | | | | 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 | - name: Install MSYS2 uses: msys2/setup-msys2@v2 with: msystem: MINGW64 install: git mingw-w64-x86_64-toolchain make zip - name: Checkout Tk uses: actions/checkout@v4 - name: Checkout Tcl 8.7 uses: actions/checkout@v4 with: repository: tcltk/tcl ref: core-8-branch path: tcl - name: Prepare run: | touch tkStubInit.c touch "${HOME}/forWinDialog-5.12.7" mkdir "${HOME}/install_dir" echo "INSTALL_DIR=${HOME}/install_dir" >> $GITHUB_ENV |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to .project.
1 2 | <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <projectDescription> | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 | <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <projectDescription> <name>tk8.7</name> <comment></comment> <projects> </projects> <buildSpec> </buildSpec> <natures> </natures> |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to README.md.
1 2 | # README: Tk | | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 | # README: Tk This is the **Tk 8.7b1** source distribution. You can get any source release of Tk from [our distribution site](https://sourceforge.net/projects/tcl/files/Tcl/). 9.0 (production release, daily build) [![Build Status](https://github.com/tcltk/tk/actions/workflows/linux-build.yml/badge.svg?branch=main)](https://github.com/tcltk/tk/actions/workflows/linux-build.yml?query=branch%3Amain) [![Build Status](https://github.com/tcltk/tk/actions/workflows/win-build.yml/badge.svg?branch=main)](https://github.com/tcltk/tk/actions/workflows/win-build.yml?query=branch%3Amain) [![Build Status](https://github.com/tcltk/tk/actions/workflows/mac-build.yml/badge.svg?branch=main)](https://github.com/tcltk/tk/actions/workflows/mac-build.yml?query=branch%3Amain) <br> 8.7 (in development, daily build) [![Build Status](https://github.com/tcltk/tk/actions/workflows/linux-build.yml/badge.svg?branch=core-8-branch)](https://github.com/tcltk/tk/actions/workflows/linux-build.yml?query=branch%3Acore-8-branch) [![Build Status](https://github.com/tcltk/tk/actions/workflows/win-build.yml/badge.svg?branch=core-8-branch)](https://github.com/tcltk/tk/actions/workflows/win-build.yml?query=branch%3Acore-8-branch) [![Build Status](https://github.com/tcltk/tk/actions/workflows/mac-build.yml/badge.svg?branch=core-8-branch)](https://github.com/tcltk/tk/actions/workflows/mac-build.yml?query=branch%3Acore-8-branch) ## <a id="intro">1.</a> Introduction This directory contains the sources and documentation for Tk, a cross-platform GUI toolkit implemented with the Tcl scripting language. For details on features, incompatibilities, and potential problems with this release, see [the Tcl/Tk 8.7 Web page](https://www.tcl-lang.org/software/tcltk/8.7.html) or refer to the "changes" file in this directory, which contains a historical record of all changes to Tk. Tk is maintained, enhanced, and distributed freely by the Tcl community. Source code development and tracking of bug reports and feature requests take place at [core.tcl-lang.org](https://core.tcl-lang.org/). Tcl/Tk release and mailing list services are [hosted by |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to changes.md.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | The source code for Tk is managed by fossil. Tk developers coordinate all changes to the Tk source code at > [Tk Source Code](https://core.tcl-lang.org/tk/) | | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | The source code for Tk is managed by fossil. Tk developers coordinate all changes to the Tk source code at > [Tk Source Code](https://core.tcl-lang.org/tk/) Release Tk 8.7b1 arises from the check-in with tag core-8-7-b1. Highlighted differences between Tk 8.7 and Tk 8.6 are summarized below, with focus on changes important to programmers using the Tk library and writing Tcl scripts containing Tk commands. ## Many improvements to use of platform features and conventions. - Built-in widgets and themes are scaling-aware. - Improved support of two-finger gestures, where available - The `tk windowingsystem` "aqua" needs macOS 10.9 or later |
︙ | ︙ | |||
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 | ## Improved widget appearance - `ttk::notebook` with nondefault tab positions ## Images - Partial SVG support - Read/write access to photo image metadata | < < < < < < < < < < < | 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 | ## Improved widget appearance - `ttk::notebook` with nondefault tab positions ## Images - Partial SVG support - Read/write access to photo image metadata |
Changes to doc/AddOption.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 | \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp void \fBTk_AddOption\fR(\fItkwin, name, value, priority\fR) .sp Tcl_Obj * \fBTk_GetSystemDefault\fR(\fItkwin, dbName, className\fR) | < | 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp void \fBTk_AddOption\fR(\fItkwin, name, value, priority\fR) .sp Tcl_Obj * \fBTk_GetSystemDefault\fR(\fItkwin, dbName, className\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window. .AP "const char" *name in Multi-element name of option. .AP "const char" *value in Value of option. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/BindTable.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | .SH NAME Tk_CreateBindingTable, Tk_DeleteBindingTable, Tk_CreateBinding, Tk_DeleteBinding, Tk_GetBinding, Tk_GetAllBindings, Tk_DeleteAllBindings, Tk_BindEvent \- invoke scripts in response to X events .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Tk_BindingTable | | | | | | | | | < | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 | .SH NAME Tk_CreateBindingTable, Tk_DeleteBindingTable, Tk_CreateBinding, Tk_DeleteBinding, Tk_GetBinding, Tk_GetAllBindings, Tk_DeleteAllBindings, Tk_BindEvent \- invoke scripts in response to X events .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Tk_BindingTable \fBTk_CreateBindingTable(\fIinterp\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_DeleteBindingTable(\fIbindingTable\fB)\fR .sp unsigned long \fBTk_CreateBinding(\fIinterp, bindingTable, object, eventString, script, append\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_DeleteBinding(\fIinterp, bindingTable, object, eventString\fB)\fR .sp const char * \fBTk_GetBinding(\fIinterp, bindingTable, object, eventString\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_GetAllBindings(\fIinterp, bindingTable, object\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_DeleteAllBindings(\fIbindingTable, object\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_BindEvent(\fIbindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_BindingTable bindingTable .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use when invoking bindings in binding table. Also used for returning results and errors from binding procedures. .AP Tk_BindingTable bindingTable in Token for binding table; must have been returned by some previous |
︙ | ︙ | |||
52 53 54 55 56 57 58 | Non-zero means append \fIscript\fR to existing script for binding, if any; zero means replace existing script with new one. .AP XEvent *eventPtr in X event to match against bindings in \fIbindingTable\fR. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Identifier for any window on the display where the event occurred. Used to find display-related information such as key maps. | | | 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 | Non-zero means append \fIscript\fR to existing script for binding, if any; zero means replace existing script with new one. .AP XEvent *eventPtr in X event to match against bindings in \fIbindingTable\fR. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Identifier for any window on the display where the event occurred. Used to find display-related information such as key maps. .AP int numObjects in Number of object identifiers pointed to by \fIobjectPtr\fR. .AP "void **" objectPtr in Points to an array of object identifiers: bindings will be considered for each of these objects in order from first to last. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/CanvPsY.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 | int \fBTk_CanvasPsFont\fR(\fIinterp, canvas, tkFont\fR) .sp \fBTk_CanvasPsPath\fR(\fIinterp, canvas, coordPtr, numPoints\fR) .sp int \fBTk_CanvasPsStipple\fR(\fIinterp, canvas, bitmap\fR) | < | | 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 | int \fBTk_CanvasPsFont\fR(\fIinterp, canvas, tkFont\fR) .sp \fBTk_CanvasPsPath\fR(\fIinterp, canvas, coordPtr, numPoints\fR) .sp int \fBTk_CanvasPsStipple\fR(\fIinterp, canvas, bitmap\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS int "numPoints" .AP Tk_Canvas canvas in A token that identifies a canvas widget for which Postscript is being generated. .AP double canvasY in Y-coordinate in the space of the canvas. .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in/out A Tcl interpreter; Postscript is appended to its result, or the |
︙ | ︙ | |||
55 56 57 58 59 60 61 | .AP Tk_Font tkFont in Font for which Postscript is to be generated. .AP double *coordPtr in Pointer to an array of coordinates for one or more points specified in canvas coordinates. The order of values in \fIcoordPtr\fR is x1, y1, x2, y2, x3, y3, and so on. | | | 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 | .AP Tk_Font tkFont in Font for which Postscript is to be generated. .AP double *coordPtr in Pointer to an array of coordinates for one or more points specified in canvas coordinates. The order of values in \fIcoordPtr\fR is x1, y1, x2, y2, x3, y3, and so on. .AP int numPoints in Number of points at \fIcoordPtr\fR. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP These procedures are called by canvas type managers to carry out common functions related to generating Postscript. Most of the procedures take a \fIcanvas\fR argument, which |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/CanvTkwin.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 | \fBTk_CanvasWindowCoords\fR(\fIcanvas, x, y, screenXPtr, screenYPtr\fR) .sp \fBTk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw\fR(\fIcanvas, x1, y1, x2, y2\fR) .sp Tk_OptionParseProc *\fBTk_CanvasTagsParseProc\fR; .sp Tk_OptionPrintProc *\fBTk_CanvasTagsPrintProc\fR; | < | 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 | \fBTk_CanvasWindowCoords\fR(\fIcanvas, x, y, screenXPtr, screenYPtr\fR) .sp \fBTk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw\fR(\fIcanvas, x1, y1, x2, y2\fR) .sp Tk_OptionParseProc *\fBTk_CanvasTagsParseProc\fR; .sp Tk_OptionPrintProc *\fBTk_CanvasTagsPrintProc\fR; .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_ItemType *drawableXPtr .AP Tk_Canvas canvas in A token that identifies a canvas widget. .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in/out Interpreter to use for error reporting. .AP "const char" *string in |
︙ | ︙ | |||
146 147 148 149 150 151 152 | .CS static const Tk_CustomOption tagsOption = {Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc, Tk_CanvasTagsPrintProc, NULL }; static const Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = { ... | | | 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 | .CS static const Tk_CustomOption tagsOption = {Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc, Tk_CanvasTagsPrintProc, NULL }; static const Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = { ... {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "\-tags", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &tagsOption}, ... }; .CE .SH KEYWORDS canvas, focus, item type, redisplay, selection, type manager |
Changes to doc/CanvTxtInfo.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | Tk_CanvasTextInfo \- additional information for managing text items in canvases .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Tk_CanvasTextInfo * \fBTk_CanvasGetTextInfo\fR(\fIcanvas\fR) | < | | | | | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 | Tk_CanvasTextInfo \- additional information for managing text items in canvases .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Tk_CanvasTextInfo * \fBTk_CanvasGetTextInfo\fR(\fIcanvas\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Canvas canvas .AP Tk_Canvas canvas in A token that identifies a particular canvas widget. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP Textual canvas items are somewhat more complicated to manage than other items, due to things like the selection and the input focus. \fBTk_CanvasGetTextInfo\fR may be invoked by a type manager to obtain additional information needed for items that display text. The return value from \fBTk_CanvasGetTextInfo\fR is a pointer to a structure that is shared between Tk and all the items that display text. The structure has the following form: .CS typedef struct Tk_CanvasTextInfo { Tk_3DBorder \fIselBorder\fR; int \fIselBorderWidth\fR; XColor *\fIselFgColorPtr\fR; Tk_Item *\fIselItemPtr\fR; int \fIselectFirst\fR; int \fIselectLast\fR; Tk_Item *\fIanchorItemPtr\fR; int \fIselectAnchor\fR; Tk_3DBorder \fIinsertBorder\fR; int \fIinsertWidth\fR; int \fIinsertBorderWidth\fR; Tk_Item *\fIfocusItemPtr\fR; int \fIgotFocus\fR; int \fIcursorOn\fR; } \fBTk_CanvasTextInfo\fR; |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/Clipboard.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 | \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int \fBTk_ClipboardClear\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin\fR) .sp int \fBTk_ClipboardAppend\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, target, format, buffer\fR) | < | 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 | \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int \fBTk_ClipboardClear\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin\fR) .sp int \fBTk_ClipboardAppend\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, target, format, buffer\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_ClipboardClear tkwin .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for reporting errors. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Window that determines which display's clipboard to manipulate. .AP Atom target in |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ClrSelect.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | .SH NAME Tk_ClearSelection \- Deselect a selection .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_ClearSelection\fR(\fItkwin, selection\fR) | < | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 | .SH NAME Tk_ClearSelection \- Deselect a selection .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_ClearSelection\fR(\fItkwin, selection\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window tkwin .AP Tk_Window tkwin in The selection will be cleared from the display containing this window. .AP Atom selection in The name of selection to be cleared. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ConfigWidg.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | .SH NAME Tk_ConfigureWidget, Tk_ConfigureInfo, Tk_ConfigureValue, Tk_FreeOptions \- process configuration options for widgets .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int | | | | | | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 | .SH NAME Tk_ConfigureWidget, Tk_ConfigureInfo, Tk_ConfigureValue, Tk_FreeOptions \- process configuration options for widgets .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, specs, argc, argv, widgRec, flags\fR) .sp int \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, specs, widgRec, argvName, flags\fR) .sp int \fBTk_ConfigureValue\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, specs, widgRec, argvName, flags\fR) .sp \fBTk_FreeOptions\fR(\fIspecs, widgRec, display, flags\fR) .fi .SH ARGUMENTS .AS void *widgRec in/out .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for returning error messages. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Window used to represent widget (needed to set up X resources). .AP "const Tk_ConfigSpec" *specs in Pointer to table specifying legal configuration options for this widget. .AP int argc in Number of arguments in \fIargv\fR. .AP "const char" **argv in Command-line options for configuring widget. .AP char *widgRec in/out Points to widget record structure. Fields in this structure get modified by \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR to hold configuration information. .AP int flags in If non-zero, then it specifies an OR-ed combination of flags that control the processing of configuration information. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
72 73 74 75 76 77 78 | It is intended as a convenience procedure to reduce the amount of code that must be written in individual widget managers to handle configuration information. It is typically invoked when widgets are created, and again when the \fBconfigure\fR command is invoked for a widget. Although intended primarily for widgets, \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR | | | | | | 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 | It is intended as a convenience procedure to reduce the amount of code that must be written in individual widget managers to handle configuration information. It is typically invoked when widgets are created, and again when the \fBconfigure\fR command is invoked for a widget. Although intended primarily for widgets, \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR can be used in other situations where \fIargc-argv\fR information is to be used to fill in a record structure, such as configuring graphical elements for a canvas widget or entries of a menu. .PP \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR processes a table specifying the configuration options that are supported (\fIspecs\fR) and a collection of command-line arguments (\fIargc\fR and \fIargv\fR) to fill in fields of a record (\fIwidgRec\fR). It uses the option database and defaults specified in \fIspecs\fR to fill in fields of \fIwidgRec\fR that are not specified in \fIargv\fR. \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR normally returns the value \fBTCL_OK\fR; in this case it does not modify \fIinterp\fR. If an error occurs then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR will leave an error message in interpreter \fIinterp\fR's result in the standard Tcl fashion. In the event of an error return, some of the fields of \fIwidgRec\fR |
︙ | ︙ | |||
104 105 106 107 108 109 110 | .CS typedef struct { int \fItype\fR; const char *\fIargvName\fR; const char *\fIdbName\fR; const char *\fIdbClass\fR; const char *\fIdefValue\fR; | | | | | | | | 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 | .CS typedef struct { int \fItype\fR; const char *\fIargvName\fR; const char *\fIdbName\fR; const char *\fIdbClass\fR; const char *\fIdefValue\fR; int \fIoffset\fR; int \fIspecFlags\fR; const Tk_CustomOption *\fIcustomPtr\fR; } \fBTk_ConfigSpec\fR; .CE The \fItype\fR field indicates what type of configuration option this is (e.g. \fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR\fR for a color value, or \fBTK_CONFIG_INT\fR for an integer value). The \fItype\fR field indicates how to use the value of the option (more on this below). The \fIargvName\fR field is a string such as .QW \-font or .QW \-bg , which is compared with the values in \fIargv\fR (if \fIargvName\fR is NULL it means this is a grouped entry; see \fBGROUPED ENTRIES\fR below). The \fIdbName\fR and \fIdbClass\fR fields are used to look up a value for this option in the option database. The \fIdefValue\fR field specifies a default value for this configuration option if no value is specified in either \fIargv\fR or the option database. \fIOffset\fR indicates where in \fIwidgRec\fR to store information about this option, and \fIspecFlags\fR contains additional information to control the processing of this configuration option (see FLAGS below). The last field, \fIcustomPtr\fR, is only used if \fItype\fR is \fBTK_CONFIG_CUSTOM\fR; see CUSTOM OPTION TYPES below. .PP \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR first processes \fIargv\fR to see which (if any) configuration options are specified there. \fIArgv\fR must contain an even number of fields; the first of each pair of fields must match the \fIargvName\fR of some entry in \fIspecs\fR (unique abbreviations are acceptable), and the second field of the pair contains the value for that configuration option. If there are entries in \fIspec\fR for which there were no matching entries in \fIargv\fR, \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR uses the \fIdbName\fR and \fIdbClass\fR fields of the \fIspecs\fR entry to probe the option database; if a value is found, then it is used as the value for the option. Finally, if no entry is found in the option database, the \fIdefValue\fR field of the \fIspecs\fR entry is used as the value for the configuration option. If the \fIdefValue\fR is NULL, or if the \fBTK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT\fR bit is set in \fIflags\fR, then there is no default value and this \fIspecs\fR entry will be ignored if no value is specified in \fIargv\fR or the option database. .PP Once a string value has been determined for a configuration option, \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR translates the string value into a more useful form, such as a color if \fItype\fR is \fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR\fR or an integer if \fItype\fR is \fBTK_CONFIG_INT\fR. This value is then stored in the record pointed to by \fIwidgRec\fR. This record is assumed to |
︙ | ︙ | |||
349 350 351 352 353 354 355 | may be an empty string, in which case the target will be set to NULL. If the previous value of the target was not NULL, then it is freed by passing it to \fBTcl_Free\fR. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_SYNONYM\fR . This \fItype\fR value identifies special entries in \fIspecs\fR that | | | | | 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 | may be an empty string, in which case the target will be set to NULL. If the previous value of the target was not NULL, then it is freed by passing it to \fBTcl_Free\fR. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_SYNONYM\fR . This \fItype\fR value identifies special entries in \fIspecs\fR that are synonyms for other entries. If an \fIargv\fR value matches the \fIargvName\fR of a \fBTK_CONFIG_SYNONYM\fR entry, the entry is not used directly. Instead, \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR searches \fIspecs\fR for another entry whose \fIargvName\fR is the same as the \fIdbName\fR field in the \fBTK_CONFIG_SYNONYM\fR entry; this new entry is used just as if its \fIargvName\fR had matched the \fIargv\fR value. The synonym mechanism allows multiple \fIargv\fR values to be used for a single configuration option, such as .QW \-background and .QW \-bg . .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_UID\fR . |
︙ | ︙ | |||
403 404 405 406 407 408 409 | described below. .PP First, if the \fIflags\fR argument to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR has the \fBTK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY\fR bit set (i.e., \fIflags\fR | \fBTK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY\fR != 0), then the option database and \fIdefValue\fR fields are not used. In this case, if an entry in | | | 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 | described below. .PP First, if the \fIflags\fR argument to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR has the \fBTK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY\fR bit set (i.e., \fIflags\fR | \fBTK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY\fR != 0), then the option database and \fIdefValue\fR fields are not used. In this case, if an entry in \fIspecs\fR does not match a field in \fIargv\fR then nothing happens: the corresponding target is not modified. This feature is useful when the goal is to modify certain configuration options while leaving others in their current state, such as when a \fBconfigure\fR widget command is being processed. .PP Second, the \fIspecFlags\fR field of an entry in \fIspecs\fR may be used to control the processing of that entry. Each \fIspecFlags\fR |
︙ | ︙ | |||
451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 | In calls to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR no default will be supplied for entries with this flag set; it is assumed that the caller has already supplied a default value in the target location. This flag provides a performance optimization where it is expensive to process the default string: the client can compute the default once, save the value, and provide it before calling \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR. .PP The \fBTK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY\fR and \fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY\fR flags are typically used to specify different default values for monochrome and color displays. This is done by creating two entries in \fIspecs\fR that are identical except for their \fIdefValue\fR and \fIspecFlags\fR fields. One entry should have the value \fBTK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY\fR in its \fIspecFlags\fR and the | > > > > > > > > | 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 | In calls to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR no default will be supplied for entries with this flag set; it is assumed that the caller has already supplied a default value in the target location. This flag provides a performance optimization where it is expensive to process the default string: the client can compute the default once, save the value, and provide it before calling \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_OPTION_SPECIFIED\fR This bit is deprecated. It used to be set and cleared by \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR so that callers could detect what entries were specified in \fIargv\fR, but it was removed because it was inherently thread-unsafe. Code that wishes to detect what options were specified should use \fBTk_SetOptions\fR instead. .PP The \fBTK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY\fR and \fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY\fR flags are typically used to specify different default values for monochrome and color displays. This is done by creating two entries in \fIspecs\fR that are identical except for their \fIdefValue\fR and \fIspecFlags\fR fields. One entry should have the value \fBTK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY\fR in its \fIspecFlags\fR and the |
︙ | ︙ | |||
548 549 550 551 552 553 554 | corresponding field of the widget record to null. .SH "CUSTOM OPTION TYPES" .PP Applications can extend the built-in configuration types with additional configuration types by writing procedures to parse and print options of the a type and creating a structure pointing to those procedures: .CS | | | | | | 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 | corresponding field of the widget record to null. .SH "CUSTOM OPTION TYPES" .PP Applications can extend the built-in configuration types with additional configuration types by writing procedures to parse and print options of the a type and creating a structure pointing to those procedures: .CS typedef struct Tk_CustomOption { Tk_OptionParseProc *\fIparseProc\fR; Tk_OptionPrintProc *\fIprintProc\fR; void *\fIclientData\fR; } \fBTk_CustomOption\fR; typedef int \fBTk_OptionParseProc\fR( void *\fIclientData\fR, Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR, Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR, const char *\fIvalue\fR, char *\fIwidgRec\fR, int \fIoffset\fR); typedef const char *\fBTk_OptionPrintProc\fR( void *\fIclientData\fR, Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR, char *\fIwidgRec\fR, int \fIoffset\fR, Tcl_FreeProc **\fIfreeProcPtr\fR); .CE The Tk_CustomOption structure contains three fields, which are pointers to the two procedures and a \fIclientData\fR value to be passed to those procedures when they are invoked. The \fIclientData\fR value typically points to a structure containing information that is needed by the procedures when they are parsing and printing options. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ConfigWind.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 | \fBTk_SetWindowBorderPixmap\fR(\fItkwin, pixmap\fR) .sp \fBTk_SetWindowColormap\fR(\fItkwin, colormap\fR) .sp \fBTk_DefineCursor\fR(\fItkwin, cursor\fR) .sp \fBTk_UndefineCursor\fR(\fItkwin\fR) | < | 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 | \fBTk_SetWindowBorderPixmap\fR(\fItkwin, pixmap\fR) .sp \fBTk_SetWindowColormap\fR(\fItkwin, colormap\fR) .sp \fBTk_DefineCursor\fR(\fItkwin, cursor\fR) .sp \fBTk_UndefineCursor\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS XSetWindowAttributes borderWidth .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window. .AP "unsigned int" valueMask in OR-ed mask of values like \fBCWX\fR or \fBCWBorderPixel\fR, indicating which fields of \fI*valuePtr\fR or \fI*attsPtr\fR to use. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/CoordToWin.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 | Tk_CoordsToWindow \- Find window containing a point .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Tk_Window \fBTk_CoordsToWindow\fR(\fIrootX, rootY, tkwin\fR) | < | 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | Tk_CoordsToWindow \- Find window containing a point .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Tk_Window \fBTk_CoordsToWindow\fR(\fIrootX, rootY, tkwin\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window tkwin .AP int rootX in X-coordinate (in root window coordinates). .AP int rootY in Y-coordinate (in root window coordinates). .AP Tk_Window tkwin in |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/CrtCmHdlr.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 | .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_CreateClientMessageHandler\fR(\fIproc\fR) .sp \fBTk_DeleteClientMessageHandler\fR(\fIproc\fR) | < | 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_CreateClientMessageHandler\fR(\fIproc\fR) .sp \fBTk_DeleteClientMessageHandler\fR(\fIproc\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AP Tk_ClientMessageProc *proc in Procedure to invoke whenever a ClientMessage X event occurs on any display. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_CreateClientMessageHandler\fR arranges for \fIproc\fR to be invoked |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/CrtConsoleChan.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | .SH NAME Tk_InitConsoleChannels \- Install the console channels as standard channels .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_InitConsoleChannels\fR(\fIinterp\fR) | < | 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 | .SH NAME Tk_InitConsoleChannels \- Install the console channels as standard channels .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_InitConsoleChannels\fR(\fIinterp\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tcl_Interp *interp in .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter in which the console channels are created. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/CrtErrHdlr.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 | .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Tk_ErrorHandler \fBTk_CreateErrorHandler\fR(\fIdisplay, error, request, minor, proc, clientData\fR) .sp \fBTk_DeleteErrorHandler\fR(\fIhandler\fR) | < | 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 | .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Tk_ErrorHandler \fBTk_CreateErrorHandler\fR(\fIdisplay, error, request, minor, proc, clientData\fR) .sp \fBTk_DeleteErrorHandler\fR(\fIhandler\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "Tk_ErrorHandler" clientData .AP Display *display in Display whose errors are to be handled. .AP int error in Match only error events with this value in the \fIerror_code\fR field. If \-1, then match any \fIerror_code\fR value. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/CrtGenHdlr.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 | .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_CreateGenericHandler\fR(\fIproc, clientData\fR) .sp \fBTk_DeleteGenericHandler\fR(\fIproc, clientData\fR) | < | 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 | .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_CreateGenericHandler\fR(\fIproc, clientData\fR) .sp \fBTk_DeleteGenericHandler\fR(\fIproc, clientData\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "Tk_GenericProc" clientData .AP Tk_GenericProc *proc in Procedure to invoke whenever any X event occurs on any display. .AP void *clientData in Arbitrary one-word value to pass to \fIproc\fR. .BE |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/CrtImgType.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH Tk_CreateImageType 3 8.5 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .so man.macros .BS .SH NAME | | | > > > | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH Tk_CreateImageType 3 8.5 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .so man.macros .BS .SH NAME Tk_CreateImageType, Tk_GetImageModelData, Tk_InitImageArgs \- define new kind of image .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_CreateImageType\fR(\fItypePtr\fR) .sp void * \fBTk_GetImageModelData\fR(\fIinterp, name, typePtrPtr\fR) .sp \fBTk_InitImageArgs\fR(\fIinterp, argc, argvPtr\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "const Tk_ImageType" *typePtrPtr .AP "const Tk_ImageType" *typePtr in Structure that defines the new type of image. For Tk 8.4 and earlier this must be static: a pointer to this structure is retained by the image code. In Tk 8.5, this limitation was relaxed. .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter in which image was created. .AP "const char" *name in Name of existing image. .AP Tk_ImageType **typePtrPtr out Points to word in which to store a pointer to type information for the given image, if it exists. .AP int argc in Number of arguments .AP char ***argvPtr in/out Pointer to argument list .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_CreateImageType\fR is invoked to define a new kind of image. An image type corresponds to a particular value of the \fItype\fR |
︙ | ︙ | |||
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 | \fIimage manager\fR. It consists of a collection of procedures plus three different kinds of data structures. The first data structure is a Tk_ImageType structure, which contains the name of the image type and pointers to five procedures provided by the image manager to deal with images of this type: .CS | | | 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 | \fIimage manager\fR. It consists of a collection of procedures plus three different kinds of data structures. The first data structure is a Tk_ImageType structure, which contains the name of the image type and pointers to five procedures provided by the image manager to deal with images of this type: .CS typedef struct Tk_ImageType { const char *\fIname\fR; Tk_ImageCreateProc *\fIcreateProc\fR; Tk_ImageGetProc *\fIgetProc\fR; Tk_ImageDisplayProc *\fIdisplayProc\fR; Tk_ImageFreeProc *\fIfreeProc\fR; Tk_ImageDeleteProc *\fIdeleteProc\fR; } \fBTk_ImageType\fR; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 | in the interpreter given by \fIinterp\fR, then \fI*typePtrPtr\fR is filled in with type information for the image (the \fItypePtr\fR value passed to \fBTk_CreateImageType\fR when the image type was registered) and the return value is the clientData value returned by the \fIcreateProc\fR when the image was created (this is typically a pointer to the image model data structure). If no such image exists then NULL is returned and NULL is stored at \fI*typePtrPtr\fR. .SH "SEE ALSO" Tk_ImageChanged, Tk_GetImage, Tk_FreeImage, Tk_RedrawImage, Tk_SizeOfImage .SH KEYWORDS image manager, image type, instance, model | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 | in the interpreter given by \fIinterp\fR, then \fI*typePtrPtr\fR is filled in with type information for the image (the \fItypePtr\fR value passed to \fBTk_CreateImageType\fR when the image type was registered) and the return value is the clientData value returned by the \fIcreateProc\fR when the image was created (this is typically a pointer to the image model data structure). If no such image exists then NULL is returned and NULL is stored at \fI*typePtrPtr\fR. .SH "LEGACY INTERFACE SUPPORT" .PP In Tk 8.2 and earlier, the definition of \fBTk_ImageCreateProc\fR was incompatibly different, with the following prototype: .CS typedef int \fBTk_ImageCreateProc\fR( Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR, char *\fIname\fR, int \fIargc\fR, char **\fIargv\fR, Tk_ImageType *\fItypePtr\fR, Tk_ImageModel \fImodel\fR, void **\fImodelDataPtr\fR); .CE Legacy programs and libraries dating from those days may still contain code that defines extended Tk image types using the old interface. The Tk header file will still support this legacy interface if the code is compiled with the macro \fBUSE_OLD_IMAGE\fR defined. .PP When the \fBUSE_OLD_IMAGE\fR legacy support is enabled, you may see the routine \fBTk_InitImageArgs\fR in use. This was a migration tool used to create stub-enabled extensions that could be loaded into interps containing all versions of Tk 8.1 and later. Tk 8.5 no longer provides this routine, but uses a macro to convert any attempted calls of this routine into an empty comment. Any stub-enabled extension providing an extended image type via the legacy interface that is compiled against Tk 8.5 headers and linked against the Tk 8.5 stub library will produce a file that can be loaded only into interps with Tk 8.5 or later; that is, the normal stub-compatibility rules. If a developer needs to generate from such code a file that is loadable into interps with Tk 8.4 or earlier, they must use Tk 8.4 headers and stub libraries to do so. .PP Any new code written today should not make use of the legacy interfaces. Expect their support to go away in Tk 9. .SH "SEE ALSO" Tk_ImageChanged, Tk_GetImage, Tk_FreeImage, Tk_RedrawImage, Tk_SizeOfImage .SH KEYWORDS image manager, image type, instance, model |
Changes to doc/CrtItemType.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 | .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_CreateItemType\fR(\fItypePtr\fR) .sp Tk_ItemType * \fBTk_GetItemTypes\fR() | < < | 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 | .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_CreateItemType\fR(\fItypePtr\fR) .sp Tk_ItemType * \fBTk_GetItemTypes\fR() .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_ItemType *typePtr .AP Tk_ItemType *typePtr in Structure that defines the new type of canvas item. .BE .SH INTRODUCTION .PP \fBTk_CreateItemType\fR is invoked to define a new kind of canvas item described by the \fItypePtr\fR argument. An item type corresponds to a particular value of the \fItype\fR argument to the \fBcreate\fR widget command for canvases, and |
︙ | ︙ | |||
69 70 71 72 73 74 75 | size_t \fIitemSize\fR; Tk_ItemCreateProc *\fIcreateProc\fR; const Tk_ConfigSpec *\fIconfigSpecs\fR; Tk_ItemConfigureProc *\fIconfigProc\fR; Tk_ItemCoordProc *\fIcoordProc\fR; Tk_ItemDeleteProc *\fIdeleteProc\fR; Tk_ItemDisplayProc *\fIdisplayProc\fR; | | | | 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 | size_t \fIitemSize\fR; Tk_ItemCreateProc *\fIcreateProc\fR; const Tk_ConfigSpec *\fIconfigSpecs\fR; Tk_ItemConfigureProc *\fIconfigProc\fR; Tk_ItemCoordProc *\fIcoordProc\fR; Tk_ItemDeleteProc *\fIdeleteProc\fR; Tk_ItemDisplayProc *\fIdisplayProc\fR; int \fIalwaysRedraw\fR; Tk_ItemPointProc *\fIpointProc\fR; Tk_ItemAreaProc *\fIareaProc\fR; Tk_ItemPostscriptProc *\fIpostscriptProc\fR; Tk_ItemScaleProc *\fIscaleProc\fR; Tk_ItemTranslateProc *\fItranslateProc\fR; Tk_ItemIndexProc *\fIindexProc\fR; Tk_ItemCursorProc *\fIicursorProc\fR; Tk_ItemSelectionProc *\fIselectionProc\fR; Tk_ItemInsertProc *\fIinsertProc\fR; Tk_ItemDCharsProc *\fIdCharsProc\fR; Tk_ItemType *\fInextPtr\fR; .VS "8.7, TIP164" Tk_ItemRotateProc *\fIrotateProc\fR; .VE "8.7, TIP164" } \fBTk_ItemType\fR; .CE .PP The fields of a Tk_ItemType structure are described in more detail |
︙ | ︙ | |||
111 112 113 114 115 116 117 | defined by Tk via the type Tk_Item; the rest of the item record is defined by the type manager. A type manager must define its item records with a Tk_Item as the first field. For example, the item record for bitmap items is defined as follows: .PP .CS | | | 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 | defined by Tk via the type Tk_Item; the rest of the item record is defined by the type manager. A type manager must define its item records with a Tk_Item as the first field. For example, the item record for bitmap items is defined as follows: .PP .CS typedef struct BitmapItem { Tk_Item \fIheader\fR; double \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR; Tk_Anchor \fIanchor\fR; Pixmap \fIbitmap\fR; XColor *\fIfgColor\fR; XColor *\fIbgColor\fR; GC \fIgc\fR; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
167 168 169 170 171 172 173 | Once \fBTk_CreateImageType\fR returns, this name may be used in \fBcreate\fR widget commands to create items of the new type. If there already existed an item type by this name then the new item type replaces the old one. .SS "FLAGS (IN ALWAYSREDRAW)" .PP | | > > > > > > > > | 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 | Once \fBTk_CreateImageType\fR returns, this name may be used in \fBcreate\fR widget commands to create items of the new type. If there already existed an item type by this name then the new item type replaces the old one. .SS "FLAGS (IN ALWAYSREDRAW)" .PP The \fItypePtr\->alwaysRedraw\fR field (so named for historic reasons) contains a collection of flag bits that modify how the canvas core interacts with the item. The following bits are defined: .TP \fBTK_ALWAYS_REDRAW\fR . Indicates that the item should always be redrawn when any part of the canvas is redrawn, rather than only when the bounding box of the item overlaps the area being redrawn. This is used by window items, for example, which need to unmap subwindows that are not on the screen. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_OBJS\fR . Indicates that operations which would otherwise take a string (or array of strings) actually take a Tcl_Obj reference (or an array of such references). The operations to which this applies are the \fIconfigProc\fR, the \fIcoordProc\fR, the \fIcreateProc\fR, the \fIindexProc\fR and the \fIinsertProc\fR. .TP \fBTK_MOVABLE_POINTS\fR .VS 8.6 Indicates that the item supports the \fIdCharsProc\fR, \fIindexProc\fR and \fIinsertProc\fR with the same semantics as Tk's built-in line and polygon types, and that hence individual coordinate points can be moved. Must not be set if any of the above methods is NULL. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 | \fIitemPtr\fR is a pointer to a newly-allocated item of size \fItypePtr\->itemSize\fR. Tk has already initialized the item's header (the first \fBsizeof(Tk_ItemType)\fR bytes). The \fIobjc\fR and \fIobjv\fR arguments describe all of the arguments to the \fBcreate\fR command after the \fItype\fR argument. For example, in the widget command: .PP .CS \fB\&.c create rectangle 10 20 50 50 \-fill black\fR .CE .PP \fIobjc\fR will be \fB6\fR and \fIobjv\fR[0] will contain the | > > > | 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 | \fIitemPtr\fR is a pointer to a newly-allocated item of size \fItypePtr\->itemSize\fR. Tk has already initialized the item's header (the first \fBsizeof(Tk_ItemType)\fR bytes). The \fIobjc\fR and \fIobjv\fR arguments describe all of the arguments to the \fBcreate\fR command after the \fItype\fR argument. Note that if \fBTK_CONFIG_OBJS\fR is not set in the \fItypePtr\->alwaysRedraw\fR field, the \fIobjv\fR parameter will actually contain a pointer to an array of constant strings. For example, in the widget command: .PP .CS \fB\&.c create rectangle 10 20 50 50 \-fill black\fR .CE .PP \fIobjc\fR will be \fB6\fR and \fIobjv\fR[0] will contain the |
︙ | ︙ | |||
248 249 250 251 252 253 254 | \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR. This table will normally be used by \fItypePtr\->createProc\fR and \fItypePtr\->configProc\fR, but Tk also uses it directly to retrieve option information in the \fBitemcget\fR and \fBitemconfigure\fR widget commands. \fItypePtr\->configSpecs\fR must point to the configuration table for this type. | < | | 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 | \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR. This table will normally be used by \fItypePtr\->createProc\fR and \fItypePtr\->configProc\fR, but Tk also uses it directly to retrieve option information in the \fBitemcget\fR and \fBitemconfigure\fR widget commands. \fItypePtr\->configSpecs\fR must point to the configuration table for this type. Note: Tk provides a custom option type \fBtk_CanvasTagsOption\fR for implementing the \fB\-tags\fR option; see an existing type manager for an example of how to use it in \fIconfigSpecs\fR. .SS CONFIGPROC .PP \fItypePtr\->configProc\fR is called by Tk whenever the \fBitemconfigure\fR widget command is invoked to change the configuration options for a canvas item. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 | int \fIflags\fR); .CE .PP The \fIinterp\fR argument identifies the interpreter in which the widget command was invoked, \fIcanvas\fR is a handle for the canvas widget, and \fIitemPtr\fR is a pointer to the item being configured. \fIobjc\fR and \fIobjv\fR contain the configuration options. For example, if the following command is invoked: .PP .CS \fB\&.c itemconfigure 2 \-fill red \-outline black\fR .CE .PP \fIobjc\fR is \fB4\fR and \fIobjv\fR contains the string objects \fB\-fill\fR | > > > | 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 | int \fIflags\fR); .CE .PP The \fIinterp\fR argument identifies the interpreter in which the widget command was invoked, \fIcanvas\fR is a handle for the canvas widget, and \fIitemPtr\fR is a pointer to the item being configured. \fIobjc\fR and \fIobjv\fR contain the configuration options. Note that if \fBTK_CONFIG_OBJS\fR is not set in the \fItypePtr\->alwaysRedraw\fR field, the \fIobjv\fR parameter will actually contain a pointer to an array of constant strings. For example, if the following command is invoked: .PP .CS \fB\&.c itemconfigure 2 \-fill red \-outline black\fR .CE .PP \fIobjc\fR is \fB4\fR and \fIobjv\fR contains the string objects \fB\-fill\fR |
︙ | ︙ | |||
309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 | int \fIobjc\fR, Tcl_Obj *const \fIobjv\fR[]); .CE .PP The arguments \fIinterp\fR, \fIcanvas\fR, and \fIitemPtr\fR all have the standard meanings, and \fIobjc\fR and \fIobjv\fR describe the coordinate arguments. For example, if the following widget command is invoked: .PP .CS \fB\&.c coords 2 30 90\fR .CE .PP \fIobjc\fR will be \fB2\fR and \fBobjv\fR will contain the integer objects | > > > | 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 | int \fIobjc\fR, Tcl_Obj *const \fIobjv\fR[]); .CE .PP The arguments \fIinterp\fR, \fIcanvas\fR, and \fIitemPtr\fR all have the standard meanings, and \fIobjc\fR and \fIobjv\fR describe the coordinate arguments. Note that if \fBTK_CONFIG_OBJS\fR is not set in the \fItypePtr\->alwaysRedraw\fR field, the \fIobjv\fR parameter will actually contain a pointer to an array of constant strings. For example, if the following widget command is invoked: .PP .CS \fB\&.c coords 2 30 90\fR .CE .PP \fIobjc\fR will be \fB2\fR and \fBobjv\fR will contain the integer objects |
︙ | ︙ | |||
383 384 385 386 387 388 389 | will not necessarily be the same as those in the canvas. \fIdisplayProc\fR should call \fBTk_CanvasDrawableCoords\fR to transform coordinates from those of the canvas to those of \fIdst\fR. .PP Normally an item's \fIdisplayProc\fR is only invoked if the item overlaps the area being displayed. | | | | 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 | will not necessarily be the same as those in the canvas. \fIdisplayProc\fR should call \fBTk_CanvasDrawableCoords\fR to transform coordinates from those of the canvas to those of \fIdst\fR. .PP Normally an item's \fIdisplayProc\fR is only invoked if the item overlaps the area being displayed. However, if bit zero of \fItypePtr\->alwaysRedraw\fR is 1, (i.e.\| .QW "\fItypePtr\->alwaysRedraw & 1 == 1\fR" ) then \fIdisplayProc\fR is invoked during every redisplay operation, even if the item does not overlap the area of redisplay; this is useful for cases such as window items, where the subwindow needs to be unmapped when it is off the screen. .SS POINTPROC .PP \fItypePtr\->pointProc\fR is invoked by Tk to find out how close |
︙ | ︙ | |||
559 560 561 562 563 564 565 | the item is to be rotated, and \fIangleRad\fR gives the anticlockwise rotation to be applied in radians. The item should adjust the coordinates of its control points so that where they used to have coordinates \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR, they will have new coordinates \fIx\(fm\fR and \fIy\(fm\fR, where .PP .CS | | | | 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 | the item is to be rotated, and \fIangleRad\fR gives the anticlockwise rotation to be applied in radians. The item should adjust the coordinates of its control points so that where they used to have coordinates \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR, they will have new coordinates \fIx\(fm\fR and \fIy\(fm\fR, where .PP .CS \fIrelX\fR = \fIx\fR - \fIoriginX\fR \fIrelY\fR = \fIy\fR - \fIoriginY\fR \fIx\(fm\fR = \fIoriginX\fR + \fIrelX\fR \(mu cos(\fIangleRad\fR) + \fIrelY\fR \(mu sin(\fIangleRad\fR) \fIy\(fm\fR = \fIoriginY\fR \(mi \fIrelX\fR \(mu sin(\fIangleRad\fR) + \fIrelY\fR \(mu cos(\fIangleRad\fR) .CE .PP The control points for an item are not necessarily the coordinates provided to the item when it is created (or via the \fItypePtr\->coordProc\fR), but could instead be derived from them. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 | .CE .PP The \fIinterp\fR, \fIcanvas\fR, and \fIitemPtr\fR arguments all have the usual meaning. \fIindexObj\fR contains a textual description of an index, and \fIindexPtr\fR points to an integer value that should be filled in with a numerical index. It is up to the type manager to decide what forms of index are supported (e.g., numbers, \fBinsert\fR, \fBsel.first\fR, \fBend\fR, etc.). \fIindexProc\fR should return a Tcl completion code and set the interpreter result in the event of an error. .SS ICURSORPROC .PP | > > > | 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 | .CE .PP The \fIinterp\fR, \fIcanvas\fR, and \fIitemPtr\fR arguments all have the usual meaning. \fIindexObj\fR contains a textual description of an index, and \fIindexPtr\fR points to an integer value that should be filled in with a numerical index. Note that if \fBTK_CONFIG_OBJS\fR is not set in the \fItypePtr\->alwaysRedraw\fR field, the \fIindexObj\fR parameter will actually contain a pointer to a constant string. It is up to the type manager to decide what forms of index are supported (e.g., numbers, \fBinsert\fR, \fBsel.first\fR, \fBend\fR, etc.). \fIindexProc\fR should return a Tcl completion code and set the interpreter result in the event of an error. .SS ICURSORPROC .PP |
︙ | ︙ | |||
681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 | .CE .PP \fIcanvas\fR and \fIitemPtr\fR have the usual meanings. \fIindex\fR is an index into the item's text, as returned by a previous call to \fItypePtr\->insertProc\fR, and \fIobj\fR contains new text to insert just before the character given by \fIindex\fR. If the item supports modification of the coordinates list by this .PP The type manager should insert the text and recompute the bounding box in the item's header. .SS DCHARSPROC .PP \fItypePtr\->dCharsProc\fR is invoked by Tk during the \fBdchars\fR | > > > | 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 | .CE .PP \fIcanvas\fR and \fIitemPtr\fR have the usual meanings. \fIindex\fR is an index into the item's text, as returned by a previous call to \fItypePtr\->insertProc\fR, and \fIobj\fR contains new text to insert just before the character given by \fIindex\fR. Note that if \fBTK_CONFIG_OBJS\fR is not set in the \fItypePtr\->alwaysRedraw\fR field, the \fIobj\fR parameter will actually contain a pointer to a constant string to be inserted. If the item supports modification of the coordinates list by this .PP The type manager should insert the text and recompute the bounding box in the item's header. .SS DCHARSPROC .PP \fItypePtr\->dCharsProc\fR is invoked by Tk during the \fBdchars\fR |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/CrtPhImgFmt.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Australian National University '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" Author: Paul Mackerras (paulus@cs.anu.edu.au), '\" Department of Computer Science, '\" Australian National University. '\" | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Australian National University '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" Author: Paul Mackerras (paulus@cs.anu.edu.au), '\" Department of Computer Science, '\" Australian National University. '\" .TH Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat 3 8.7 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .so man.macros .BS .SH NAME Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat \- define new file format for photo images .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR |
︙ | ︙ | |||
54 55 56 57 58 59 60 | An image file format handler consists of a collection of procedures plus a \fBTk_PhotoImageFormatVersion3\fR structure, which contains the name of the image file format and pointers to six procedures provided by the handler to deal with files and strings in this format. The Tk_PhotoImageFormatVersion3 structure contains the following fields: .VS 8.7 .CS | | | 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 | An image file format handler consists of a collection of procedures plus a \fBTk_PhotoImageFormatVersion3\fR structure, which contains the name of the image file format and pointers to six procedures provided by the handler to deal with files and strings in this format. The Tk_PhotoImageFormatVersion3 structure contains the following fields: .VS 8.7 .CS typedef struct Tk_PhotoImageFormatVersion3 { const char *\fIname\fR; Tk_ImageFileMatchProcVersion3 *\fIfileMatchProc\fR; Tk_ImageStringMatchProcVersion3 *\fIstringMatchProc\fR; Tk_ImageFileReadProcVersion3 *\fIfileReadProc\fR; Tk_ImageStringReadProcVersion3 *\fIstringReadProc\fR; Tk_ImageFileWriteProcVersion3 *\fIfileWriteProc\fR; Tk_ImageStringWriteProcVersion3 *\fIstringWriteProc\fR; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
147 148 149 150 151 152 153 | return 0. .SS FILEREADPROC .PP \fIformatPtr->fileReadProc\fR provides the address of a procedure for Tk to call to read data from an image file into a photo image. \fIformatPtr->fileReadProc\fR must match the following prototype: .CS | | | 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 | return 0. .SS FILEREADPROC .PP \fIformatPtr->fileReadProc\fR provides the address of a procedure for Tk to call to read data from an image file into a photo image. \fIformatPtr->fileReadProc\fR must match the following prototype: .CS typedef int \fBTk_ImageFileReadProc\fR( Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR, Tcl_Channel \fIchan\fR, const char *\fIfileName\fR, Tcl_Obj *\fIformat\fR, Tcl_Obj *\fImetadataIn\fR, PhotoHandle \fIimageHandle\fR, int \fIdestX\fR, int \fIdestY\fR, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
180 181 182 183 184 185 186 | The return value is a standard Tcl return value. .SS STRINGREADPROC .PP \fIformatPtr->stringReadProc\fR provides the address of a procedure for Tk to call to read data from a string into a photo image. \fIformatPtr->stringReadProc\fR must match the following prototype: .CS | | | 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 | The return value is a standard Tcl return value. .SS STRINGREADPROC .PP \fIformatPtr->stringReadProc\fR provides the address of a procedure for Tk to call to read data from a string into a photo image. \fIformatPtr->stringReadProc\fR must match the following prototype: .CS typedef int \fBTk_ImageStringReadProc\fR( Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR, Tcl_Obj *\fIdata\fR, Tcl_Obj *\fIformat\fR, Tcl_Obj *\fImetadataIn\fR, PhotoHandle \fIimageHandle\fR, int \fIdestX\fR, int \fIdestY\fR, int \fIwidth\fR, int \fIheight\fR, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
212 213 214 215 216 217 218 | The return value is a standard Tcl return value. .SS FILEWRITEPROC .PP \fIformatPtr->fileWriteProc\fR provides the address of a procedure for Tk to call to write data from a photo image to a file. \fIformatPtr->fileWriteProc\fR must match the following prototype: .CS | | | 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 | The return value is a standard Tcl return value. .SS FILEWRITEPROC .PP \fIformatPtr->fileWriteProc\fR provides the address of a procedure for Tk to call to write data from a photo image to a file. \fIformatPtr->fileWriteProc\fR must match the following prototype: .CS typedef int \fBTk_ImageFileWriteProc\fR( Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR, const char *\fIfileName\fR, Tcl_Obj *\fIformat\fR, Tcl_Obj *\fImetadataIn\fR, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *\fIblockPtr\fR); .CE The \fIinterp\fR argument is the interpreter in which the command was |
︙ | ︙ | |||
241 242 243 244 245 246 247 | .SS STRINGWRITEPROC .PP \fIformatPtr->stringWriteProc\fR provides the address of a procedure for Tk to call to translate image data from a photo image into a string. \fIformatPtr->stringWriteProc\fR must match the following prototype: .CS | | | 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 | .SS STRINGWRITEPROC .PP \fIformatPtr->stringWriteProc\fR provides the address of a procedure for Tk to call to translate image data from a photo image into a string. \fIformatPtr->stringWriteProc\fR must match the following prototype: .CS typedef int \fBTk_ImageStringWriteProc\fR( Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR, Tcl_Obj *\fIformat\fR, Tcl_Obj *\fImetadataIn\fR, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *\fIblockPtr\fR); .CE The \fIinterp\fR argument is the interpreter in which the command was invoked to convert the image; it should be used for reporting errors. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 | .PP Image formats contain a description of the image bitmap and may contain additional information like image resolution or comments. Image metadata may be read from image files and passed to the script level by including dictionary keys into the metadata property of the image. Image metadata may be written to image data on file write or image data output. .PP .SS "METADATA KEYS" .PP The metadata may contain any key. A driver will handle only a set of dictionary keys documented in the documentation. See the photo image manual page for currently defined keys for the system drivers. .PP The following rules may give guidance to name metadata keys: | > | | | > | > > | < < < | | | | | | | | | < < | 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 | .PP Image formats contain a description of the image bitmap and may contain additional information like image resolution or comments. Image metadata may be read from image files and passed to the script level by including dictionary keys into the metadata property of the image. Image metadata may be written to image data on file write or image data output. .PP .PP .SS "METADATA KEYS" .PP The metadata may contain any key. A driver will handle only a set of dictionary keys documented in the documentation. See the photo image manual page for currently defined keys for the system drivers. .PP The following rules may give guidance to name metadata keys: .RS Abreviation are in upper case .RE .RS Words are in US English in small case (except proper nouns) .RE .RS Vertical DPI is expressed as DPI/aspect. The reason is, that some image formats may feature aspect and no resolution value. .RE .SS "METADATA INPUT" .PP Each driver function gets a Tcl object pointer \fBmetadataIn\fR as parameter. This parameter serves to input a metadata dict to the driver function. It may be NULL to flag that the metadata dict is empty. .PP A typical driver code snipped to check for a metadata key is: .CS if (NULL != metadataIn) { Tcl_Obj *itemData; Tcl_DictObjGet(interp, metadataIn, Tcl_NewStringObj("Comment",-1), &itemData)); .CE .PP The \-metadata command option data of the following commands is passed to the driver: \fBimage create\fR, \fBconfigure\fR, \fBput\fR, \fBread\fR, \fBdata\fR and \fBwrite\fR. If no \-metadata command option available or not given, the metadata property of the image is passed to the driver using the following commands: \fBcget\fR, \fBconfigure\fR, \fBdata\fR and \fBwrite\fR. .PP Note that setting the \-metadata property of an image using \fBconfigure\fR without any other option does not invoke any driver function. .PP The metadata dictionary is not suited to pass options to the driver related to the bitmap representation, as the image bitmap is not recreated on a metadata change. The format string should be used for this purpose. .PP .SS "METADATA OUTPUT" .PP The image match and read driver functions may set keys in a prepared matadata dict to return them. Those functions get a Tcl object pointer \fBmetadataOut\fR as parameter. metadataOut may be NULL to indicate, that no metadata return is attended(\fBput\fR, \fBread\fR subcommands). \fBmetadataOut\fR is initialized to an empty unshared dict object if metadata return is attended (\fBimage create\fR command, \fBconfigure\fR subcommand). The driver may set dict keys in this object to return metadata. If a match function succeeds, the metadataOut pointer is passed to the corresponding read function. .PP A sample driver code snippet is: .CS if (NULL != metadataOut) { Tcl_DictObjPut(NULL, metadataOut, Tcl_NewStringObj("XMP",-1), Tcl_NewStringObj(xmpMetadata); .CE .PP The metadata keys returned by the driver are merged into the present metadata property of the image or into the metadata dict given by the \fB\-metadata\fR command line option. At the script level, the command \fBimage create\fR and the \fBconfigure\fR method may return metadata from the driver. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
373 374 375 376 377 378 379 | Structure that defines the new file format. .BE .SS DESCRIPTION A driver using the version 2 interface invokes \fBTk_CreatePhotoImageFormat\fR for driver registration. The Tk_PhotoImageFormat structure contains the following fields: .CS | | | 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 | Structure that defines the new file format. .BE .SS DESCRIPTION A driver using the version 2 interface invokes \fBTk_CreatePhotoImageFormat\fR for driver registration. The Tk_PhotoImageFormat structure contains the following fields: .CS typedef struct Tk_PhotoImageFormat { const char *\fIname\fR; Tk_ImageFileMatchProc *\fIfileMatchProc\fR; Tk_ImageStringMatchProc *\fIstringMatchProc\fR; Tk_ImageFileReadProc *\fIfileReadProc\fR; Tk_ImageStringReadProc *\fIstringReadProc\fR; Tk_ImageFileWriteProc *\fIfileWriteProc\fR; Tk_ImageStringWriteProc *\fIstringWriteProc\fR; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 | \fIformatPtr->stringWriteProc\fR must match the following prototype: .CS typedef int \fBTk_ImageStringWriteProc\fR( Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR, Tcl_Obj *\fIformat\fR, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *\fIblockPtr\fR); .CE .SH "SEE ALSO" Tk_FindPhoto, Tk_PhotoPutBlock .SH KEYWORDS photo image, image file | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 | \fIformatPtr->stringWriteProc\fR must match the following prototype: .CS typedef int \fBTk_ImageStringWriteProc\fR( Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR, Tcl_Obj *\fIformat\fR, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *\fIblockPtr\fR); .CE .PP .SH "LEGACY INTERFACE SUPPORT" .PP In Tk 8.2 and earlier, the definition of all the function pointer types stored in fields of a \fBTk_PhotoImageFormat\fR struct were incompatibly different. Legacy programs and libraries dating from those days may still contain code that defines extended Tk photo image formats using the old interface. The Tk header file will still support this legacy interface if the code is compiled with the macro \fBUSE_OLD_IMAGE\fR defined. Alternatively, the legacy interfaces are used if the first character of \fIformatPtr->name\fR is an uppercase ASCII character (\fBA\fR-\fBZ\fR), and explicit casts are used to forgive the type mismatch. For example, .CS static Tk_PhotoImageFormat myFormat = { "MyFormat", (Tk_ImageFileMatchProc *) FileMatch, NULL, (Tk_ImageFileReadProc *) FileRead, NULL, NULL, NULL }; .CE would define a minimal \fBTk_PhotoImageFormat\fR that operates provide only file reading capability, where \fBFileMatch\fR and \fBFileRead\fR are written according to the legacy interfaces of Tk 8.2 or earlier. .PP Any stub-enabled extension providing an extended photo image format via the legacy interface enabled by the \fBUSE_OLD_IMAGE\fR macro that is compiled against Tk 8.5 headers and linked against the Tk 8.5 stub library will produce a file that can be loaded only into interps with Tk 8.5 or later; that is, the normal stub-compatibility rules. If a developer needs to generate from such code a file that is loadable into interps with Tk 8.4 or earlier, they must use Tk 8.4 headers and stub libraries to do so. .PP Any new code written today should not make use of the legacy interfaces. Expect their support to go away in Tk 9. .SH "SEE ALSO" Tk_FindPhoto, Tk_PhotoPutBlock .SH KEYWORDS photo image, image file |
Changes to doc/CrtSelHdlr.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 | .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_CreateSelHandler\fR(\fItkwin, selection, target, proc, clientData, format\fR) .sp \fBTk_DeleteSelHandler\fR(\fItkwin, selection, target\fR) | < | 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 | .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_CreateSelHandler\fR(\fItkwin, selection, target, proc, clientData, format\fR) .sp \fBTk_DeleteSelHandler\fR(\fItkwin, selection, target\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_SelectionProc clientData .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Window for which \fIproc\fR will provide selection information. .AP Atom selection in The name of the selection for which \fIproc\fR will provide selection information. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 | X Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual (ICCCM) or any other form in which an application is willing to present the selection. The most common form is STRING. .PP \fIProc\fR should have arguments and result that match the type \fBTk_SelectionProc\fR: .CS | | | | | 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 | X Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual (ICCCM) or any other form in which an application is willing to present the selection. The most common form is STRING. .PP \fIProc\fR should have arguments and result that match the type \fBTk_SelectionProc\fR: .CS typedef int \fBTk_SelectionProc\fR( void *\fIclientData\fR, int \fIoffset\fR, char *\fIbuffer\fR, int \fImaxBytes\fR); .CE The \fIclientData\fR parameter to \fIproc\fR is a copy of the \fIclientData\fR argument given to \fBTk_CreateSelHandler\fR. Typically, \fIclientData\fR points to a data structure containing application-specific information that is needed to retrieve the selection. \fIOffset\fR specifies an offset position into the selection, \fIbuffer\fR specifies a |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/CrtWindow.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 | .sp Tk_Window \fBTk_CreateWindowFromPath\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, pathName, topLevScreen\fR) .sp \fBTk_DestroyWindow\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp \fBTk_MakeWindowExist\fR(\fItkwin\fR) | < | 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 | .sp Tk_Window \fBTk_CreateWindowFromPath\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, pathName, topLevScreen\fR) .sp \fBTk_DestroyWindow\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp \fBTk_MakeWindowExist\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tcl_Interp *topLevScreen .AP Tcl_Interp *interp out Tcl interpreter to use for error reporting. If no error occurs, then \fI*interp\fR is not modified. .AP Tk_Window parent in Token for the window that is to serve as the logical parent of |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/DeleteImg.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | .SH NAME Tk_DeleteImage \- Destroy an image. .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_DeleteImage\fR(\fIinterp, name\fR) | < | 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 | .SH NAME Tk_DeleteImage \- Destroy an image. .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_DeleteImage\fR(\fIinterp, name\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tcl_Interp *interp .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter for which the image was created. .AP "const char" *name in Name of the image. .BE |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/DrawFocHlt.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 | .BS .SH NAME Tk_DrawFocusHighlight \- draw the traversal highlight ring for a widget .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp | | < | 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 | .BS .SH NAME Tk_DrawFocusHighlight \- draw the traversal highlight ring for a widget .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_DrawFocusHighlight(\fItkwin, gc, width, drawable\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "Tcl_Interp" *joinPtr .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Window for which the highlight is being drawn. Used to retrieve the window's dimensions, among other things. .AP GC gc in Graphics context to use for drawing the highlight. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/EventHndlr.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 | .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "unsigned long" clientData .AP unsigned button in Button number. .AP "const char" *eventName in The name of the virtual event. .AP Tcl_Obj *detail in | | | 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 | .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "unsigned long" clientData .AP unsigned button in Button number. .AP "const char" *eventName in The name of the virtual event. .AP Tcl_Obj *detail in Detail information for the virtual event. May be NULL. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window in which events may occur. .AP "unsigned long" mask in Bit-mask of events (such as \fBButtonPressMask\fR) for which \fIproc\fR should be called. .AP Tk_EventProc *proc in Procedure to invoke whenever an event in \fImask\fR occurs |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/FindPhoto.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 | int \fBTk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock\fR(\fIinterp, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height,\ zoomX, zoomY, subsampleX, subsampleY, compRule\fR) .sp int \fBTk_PhotoGetImage\fR(\fIhandle, blockPtr\fR) .sp \fBTk_PhotoBlank\fR(\fIhandle\fR) .sp int \fBTk_PhotoExpand\fR(\fIinterp, handle, width, height\fR) .sp \fBTk_PhotoGetSize\fR(\fIhandle, widthPtr, heightPtr\fR) .sp int \fBTk_PhotoSetSize\fR(\fIinterp. handle, width, height\fR) | > > < | 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 | int \fBTk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock\fR(\fIinterp, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height,\ zoomX, zoomY, subsampleX, subsampleY, compRule\fR) .sp int \fBTk_PhotoGetImage\fR(\fIhandle, blockPtr\fR) .sp void \fBTk_PhotoBlank\fR(\fIhandle\fR) .sp int \fBTk_PhotoExpand\fR(\fIinterp, handle, width, height\fR) .sp void \fBTk_PhotoGetSize\fR(\fIhandle, widthPtr, heightPtr\fR) .sp int \fBTk_PhotoSetSize\fR(\fIinterp. handle, width, height\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_PhotoImageBlock window_path .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter in which image was created and in which error reporting is to be done. .AP "const char" *imageName in Name of the photo image. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/FontId.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | Tk_FontId, Tk_GetFontMetrics, Tk_PostscriptFontName \- accessor functions for fonts .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Font | | | | < | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 | Tk_FontId, Tk_GetFontMetrics, Tk_PostscriptFontName \- accessor functions for fonts .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Font \fBTk_FontId(\fItkfont\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_GetFontMetrics(\fItkfont, fmPtr\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_PostscriptFontName(\fItkfont, dsPtr\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_FontMetrics *dsPtr .AP Tk_Font tkfont in Opaque font token being queried. Must have been returned by a previous call to \fBTk_GetFont\fR. .AP Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr out Pointer to structure in which the font metrics for \fItkfont\fR will |
︙ | ︙ | |||
66 67 68 69 70 71 72 | Any other font families may not print correctly because the computed Postscript font name may be incorrect or not exist on the printer. .SH "DATA STRUCTURES" .PP The \fBTk_FontMetrics\fR data structure is used by \fBTk_GetFontMetrics\fR to return information about a font and is defined as follows: .CS | | | 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 | Any other font families may not print correctly because the computed Postscript font name may be incorrect or not exist on the printer. .SH "DATA STRUCTURES" .PP The \fBTk_FontMetrics\fR data structure is used by \fBTk_GetFontMetrics\fR to return information about a font and is defined as follows: .CS typedef struct Tk_FontMetrics { int \fIascent\fR; int \fIdescent\fR; int \fIlinespace\fR; } \fBTk_FontMetrics\fR; .CE .PP The \fIascent\fR field is the amount in pixels that the tallest |
︙ | ︙ |
Added doc/FreeXId.3.
> > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH Tk_FreeXId 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .so man.macros .BS .SH NAME Tk_FreeXId \- make X resource identifier available for reuse .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_FreeXId(\fIdisplay, id\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Display *display out .AP Display *display in Display for which \fIid\fR was allocated. .AP XID id in Identifier of X resource (window, font, pixmap, cursor, graphics context, or colormap) that is no longer in use. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP This function is deprecated, it doesn't do anything since 2008-08-19. .SH KEYWORDS resource identifier |
Changes to doc/GeomReq.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 | \fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR(\fItkwin, reqWidth, reqHeight\fR) .sp \fBTk_SetMinimumRequestSize\fR(\fItkwin, minWidth, minHeight\fR) .sp \fBTk_SetInternalBorder\fR(\fItkwin, width\fR) .sp \fBTk_SetInternalBorderEx\fR(\fItkwin, left, right, top, bottom\fR) | < | < | < | < | < | 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 | \fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR(\fItkwin, reqWidth, reqHeight\fR) .sp \fBTk_SetMinimumRequestSize\fR(\fItkwin, minWidth, minHeight\fR) .sp \fBTk_SetInternalBorder\fR(\fItkwin, width\fR) .sp \fBTk_SetInternalBorderEx\fR(\fItkwin, left, right, top, bottom\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS baseHeight clientData .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Window for which geometry is being requested. .AP int reqWidth in Desired width for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units. .AP int reqHeight in Desired height for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units. .AP int minWidth in Desired minimum requested width for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units. .AP int minHeight in Desired minimum requested height for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units. .AP int width in Space to leave for internal border for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units. .AP int left in Space to leave for left side of internal border for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units. .AP int right in Space to leave for right side of internal border for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units. .AP int top in Space to leave for top side of internal border for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units. .AP int bottom in Space to leave for bottom side of internal border for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR is called by widget code to indicate its preference for the dimensions of a particular window. The arguments to \fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR are made available to the geometry manager for the window, which then decides on the actual geometry |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/GetAnchor.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | .SH NAME Tk_GetAnchorFromObj, Tk_GetAnchor, Tk_NameOfAnchor \- translate between strings and anchor positions .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int | | | | < | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 | .SH NAME Tk_GetAnchorFromObj, Tk_GetAnchor, Tk_NameOfAnchor \- translate between strings and anchor positions .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int \fBTk_GetAnchorFromObj(\fIinterp, objPtr, anchorPtr\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_GetAnchor(\fIinterp, string, anchorPtr\fB)\fR .sp const char * \fBTk_NameOfAnchor(\fIanchor\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "Tk_Anchor" *anchorPtr .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for error reporting, or NULL. .AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out String value contains name of anchor point: .QW \fBn\fR , |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/GetBitmap.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | .SH NAME Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj, Tk_GetBitmap, Tk_GetBitmapFromObj, Tk_DefineBitmap, Tk_NameOfBitmap, Tk_SizeOfBitmap, Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj, Tk_FreeBitmap \- maintain database of single-plane pixmaps .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Pixmap | | | | | | | | | < | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 | .SH NAME Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj, Tk_GetBitmap, Tk_GetBitmapFromObj, Tk_DefineBitmap, Tk_NameOfBitmap, Tk_SizeOfBitmap, Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj, Tk_FreeBitmap \- maintain database of single-plane pixmaps .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Pixmap \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR .sp Pixmap \fBTk_GetBitmap(\fIinterp, tkwin, info\fB)\fR .sp Pixmap \fBTk_GetBitmapFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_DefineBitmap(\fIinterp, name, source, width, height\fB)\fR .sp const char * \fBTk_NameOfBitmap(\fIdisplay, bitmap\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_SizeOfBitmap(\fIdisplay, bitmap, widthPtr, heightPtr\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_FreeBitmapFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_FreeBitmap(\fIdisplay, bitmap\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "unsigned long" *pixelPtr .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for error reporting; if NULL then no error message is left after errors. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window in which the bitmap will be used. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
77 78 79 80 81 82 83 | \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR returns a Pixmap identifier for a bitmap that matches the description in \fIobjPtr\fR and is suitable for use in \fItkwin\fR. It re-uses an existing bitmap, if possible, and creates a new one otherwise. \fIObjPtr\fR's value must have one of the following forms: .TP 20 \fB@\fIfileName\fR | < < > | > | > | > | > | > | > | > | > | > | > | > | > | > | > | > | > | > | > | > | > | > | > | > | > | > | | 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 | \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR returns a Pixmap identifier for a bitmap that matches the description in \fIobjPtr\fR and is suitable for use in \fItkwin\fR. It re-uses an existing bitmap, if possible, and creates a new one otherwise. \fIObjPtr\fR's value must have one of the following forms: .TP 20 \fB@\fIfileName\fR \fIFileName\fR must be the name of a file containing a bitmap description in the standard X11 format. .TP 20 \fIname\fR \fIName\fR must be the name of a bitmap defined previously with a call to \fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR. The following names are pre-defined by Tk: .RS .TP 12 \fBerror\fR The international .QW don't symbol: a circle with a diagonal line across it. .TP 12 \fBgray75\fR 75% gray: a checkerboard pattern where three out of four bits are on. .TP 12 \fBgray50\fR 50% gray: a checkerboard pattern where every other bit is on. .TP 12 \fBgray25\fR 25% gray: a checkerboard pattern where one out of every four bits is on. .TP 12 \fBgray12\fR 12.5% gray: a pattern where one-eighth of the bits are on, consisting of every fourth pixel in every other row. .TP 12 \fBhourglass\fR An hourglass symbol. .TP 12 \fBinfo\fR A large letter .QW i . .TP 12 \fBquesthead\fR The silhouette of a human head, with a question mark in it. .TP 12 \fBquestion\fR A large question-mark. .TP 12 \fBwarning\fR A large exclamation point. .PP In addition, the following pre-defined names are available only on the \fBMacintosh\fR platform: .TP 12 \fBdocument\fR A generic document. .TP 12 \fBstationery\fR Document stationery. .TP 12 \fBedition\fR The \fIedition\fR symbol. .TP 12 \fBapplication\fR Generic application icon. .TP 12 \fBaccessory\fR A desk accessory. .TP 12 \fBfolder\fR Generic folder icon. .TP 12 \fBpfolder\fR A locked folder. .TP 12 \fBtrash\fR A trash can. .TP 12 \fBfloppy\fR A floppy disk. .TP 12 \fBramdisk\fR A floppy disk with chip. .TP 12 \fBcdrom\fR A cd disk icon. .TP 12 \fBpreferences\fR A folder with prefs symbol. .TP 12 \fBquerydoc\fR A database document icon. .TP 12 \fBstop\fR A stop sign. .TP 12 \fBnote\fR A face with balloon words. .TP 12 \fBcaution\fR A triangle with an exclamation point. .RE .LP Under normal conditions, \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR returns an identifier for the requested bitmap. If an error occurs in creating the bitmap, such as when \fIobjPtr\fR refers to a non-existent file, then \fBNone\fR is returned and an error |
︙ | ︙ | |||
183 184 185 186 187 188 189 | have been used in a call to \fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR. The arguments \fIsource\fR, \fIwidth\fR, and \fIheight\fR describe the bitmap. \fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR normally returns \fBTCL_OK\fR; if an error occurs (e.g. a bitmap named \fInameId\fR has already been defined) then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and an error message is left in interpreter \fIinterp\fR's result. | | | 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 | have been used in a call to \fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR. The arguments \fIsource\fR, \fIwidth\fR, and \fIheight\fR describe the bitmap. \fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR normally returns \fBTCL_OK\fR; if an error occurs (e.g. a bitmap named \fInameId\fR has already been defined) then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and an error message is left in interpreter \fIinterp\fR's result. Note: \fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR expects the memory pointed to by \fIsource\fR to be static: \fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR does not make a private copy of this memory, but uses the bytes pointed to by \fIsource\fR later in calls to \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR or \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR. .PP Typically \fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR is used by \fB#include\fR-ing a bitmap file directly into a C program and then referencing |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/GetCapStyl.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | .SH NAME Tk_GetCapStyle, Tk_NameOfCapStyle \- translate between strings and cap styles .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int | | | < | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 | .SH NAME Tk_GetCapStyle, Tk_NameOfCapStyle \- translate between strings and cap styles .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int \fBTk_GetCapStyle(\fIinterp, string, capPtr\fB)\fR .sp const char * \fBTk_NameOfCapStyle(\fIcap\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "Tcl_Interp" *capPtr .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for error reporting. .AP "const char" *string in String containing name of cap style \- one of .QW \fBbutt\fR , |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/GetClrmap.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | .SH NAME Tk_GetColormap, Tk_PreserveColormap, Tk_FreeColormap \- allocate and free colormaps .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Colormap | | | | < | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 | .SH NAME Tk_GetColormap, Tk_PreserveColormap, Tk_FreeColormap \- allocate and free colormaps .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Colormap \fBTk_GetColormap(\fIinterp, tkwin, string\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_PreserveColormap(\fIdisplay, colormap\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_FreeColormap(\fIdisplay, colormap\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "Colormap" colormap .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for error reporting. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window in which colormap will be used. .AP "const char" *string in |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/GetCursor.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
53 54 55 56 57 58 59 | Width of \fIsource\fR and \fImask\fR. .AP "int" height in Height of \fIsource\fR and \fImask\fR. .AP "int" xHot in X-location of cursor hot-spot. .AP "int" yHot in Y-location of cursor hot-spot. | | | | 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 | Width of \fIsource\fR and \fImask\fR. .AP "int" height in Height of \fIsource\fR and \fImask\fR. .AP "int" xHot in X-location of cursor hot-spot. .AP "int" yHot in Y-location of cursor hot-spot. .AP Tk_Uid fg in Textual description of foreground color for cursor. .AP Tk_Uid bg in Textual description of background color for cursor. .AP Display *display in Display for which \fIcursor\fR was allocated. .AP Tk_Cursor cursor in Opaque Tk identifier for cursor. If passed to \fBTk_FreeCursor\fR, must have been returned by some previous call to \fBTk_GetCursor\fR or \fBTk_GetCursorFromData\fR. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
170 171 172 173 174 175 176 | the following example: .CS Tk_Cursor cursor; #include "source.cursor" #include "mask.cursor" cursor = Tk_GetCursorFromData(interp, tkwin, source_bits, mask_bits, source_width, source_height, source_x_hot, | | | 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 | the following example: .CS Tk_Cursor cursor; #include "source.cursor" #include "mask.cursor" cursor = Tk_GetCursorFromData(interp, tkwin, source_bits, mask_bits, source_width, source_height, source_x_hot, source_y_hot, Tk_GetUid("red"), Tk_GetUid("blue")); .CE .PP Under normal conditions \fBTk_GetCursorFromData\fR will return an identifier for the requested cursor. If an error occurs in creating the cursor then \fBNone\fR is returned and an error message will be stored in \fIinterp\fR's result. .PP |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/GetFont.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | .SH NAME Tk_AllocFontFromObj, Tk_GetFont, Tk_GetFontFromObj, Tk_NameOfFont, Tk_FontGetDescription, Tk_FreeFontFromObj, Tk_FreeFont \- maintain database of fonts .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Tk_Font | | | | | | | > | < | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 | .SH NAME Tk_AllocFontFromObj, Tk_GetFont, Tk_GetFontFromObj, Tk_NameOfFont, Tk_FontGetDescription, Tk_FreeFontFromObj, Tk_FreeFont \- maintain database of fonts .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Tk_Font \fBTk_AllocFontFromObj(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR .sp Tk_Font \fBTk_GetFont(\fIinterp, tkwin, string\fB)\fR .sp Tk_Font \fBTk_GetFontFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR .sp Tcl_Obj * \fBTk_FontGetDescription(\fItkfont\fB)\fR .sp const char * \fBTk_NameOfFont(\fItkfont\fB)\fR .sp Tk_Font \fBTk_FreeFontFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR .sp void \fBTk_FreeFont(\fItkfont\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "const char" *tkfont .AP "Tcl_Interp" *interp in Interpreter to use for error reporting. If \fBNULL\fR, then no error messages are left after errors. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window in which font will be used. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
88 89 90 91 92 93 94 | a database of all fonts they have allocated. If the same font is requested multiple times (e.g. by different windows or for different purposes), then a single Tk_Font will be shared for all uses. The underlying resources will be freed automatically when no-one is using the font anymore. .PP The procedure \fBTk_FontGetDescription\fR returns information about the font | | < | 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 | a database of all fonts they have allocated. If the same font is requested multiple times (e.g. by different windows or for different purposes), then a single Tk_Font will be shared for all uses. The underlying resources will be freed automatically when no-one is using the font anymore. .PP The procedure \fBTk_FontGetDescription\fR returns information about the font description as a Tcl list. One possible result is "{{DejaVu Sans} -16 bold underline}". .PP The procedure \fBTk_NameOfFont\fR is roughly the inverse of \fBTk_GetFont\fR. Given a \fItkfont\fR that was created by \fBTk_GetFont\fR (or \fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR), the return value is the \fIstring\fR argument that was passed to \fBTk_GetFont\fR to create the font. The string returned by \fBTk_NameOfFont\fR is only guaranteed to persist until the \fItkfont\fR |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/GetGC.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 | .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp GC \fBTk_GetGC\fR(\fItkwin, valueMask, valuePtr\fR) .sp | | < | 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 | .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp GC \fBTk_GetGC\fR(\fItkwin, valueMask, valuePtr\fR) .sp \fBTk_FreeGC(\fIdisplay, gc\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "unsigned long" valueMask .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window in which the graphics context will be used. .AP "unsigned long" valueMask in Mask of bits (such as \fBGCForeground\fR or \fBGCStipple\fR) indicating which fields of \fI*valuePtr\fR are valid. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/GetHINSTANCE.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 | Tk_GetHINSTANCE \- retrieve the global application instance handle .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tkPlatDecls.h>\fR .sp HINSTANCE \fBTk_GetHINSTANCE\fR() | < | 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | Tk_GetHINSTANCE \- retrieve the global application instance handle .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tkPlatDecls.h>\fR .sp HINSTANCE \fBTk_GetHINSTANCE\fR() .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_GetHINSTANCE\fR returns the Windows application instance handle for the Tk application. This function is only available on Windows platforms. .SH KEYWORDS identifier, instance |
Changes to doc/GetHWND.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 | \fB#include <tkPlatDecls.h>\fR .sp HWND \fBTk_GetHWND\fR(\fIwindow\fR) .sp Window \fBTk_AttachHWND\fR(\fItkwin, hwnd\fR) | < | 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | \fB#include <tkPlatDecls.h>\fR .sp HWND \fBTk_GetHWND\fR(\fIwindow\fR) .sp Window \fBTk_AttachHWND\fR(\fItkwin, hwnd\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AP Window window in X token for window. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Tk window for window. .AP HWND hwnd in Windows HWND for window. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/GetImage.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 | \fBTk_GetImage\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, name, changeProc, clientData\fR) .sp \fBTk_RedrawImage\fR(\fIimage, imageX, imageY, width, height, drawable, drawableX, drawableY\fR) .sp \fBTk_SizeOfImage\fR(\fIimage, widthPtr, heightPtr\fR) .sp \fBTk_FreeImage\fR(\fIimage\fR) | < | 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 | \fBTk_GetImage\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, name, changeProc, clientData\fR) .sp \fBTk_RedrawImage\fR(\fIimage, imageX, imageY, width, height, drawable, drawableX, drawableY\fR) .sp \fBTk_SizeOfImage\fR(\fIimage, widthPtr, heightPtr\fR) .sp \fBTk_FreeImage\fR(\fIimage\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_ImageChangedProc *changeProc .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Place to leave error message. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Window in which image will be used. .AP "const char" *name in |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/GetJoinStl.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | .SH NAME Tk_GetJoinStyle, Tk_NameOfJoinStyle \- translate between strings and join styles .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int | | | < | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 | .SH NAME Tk_GetJoinStyle, Tk_NameOfJoinStyle \- translate between strings and join styles .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int \fBTk_GetJoinStyle(\fIinterp, string, joinPtr\fB)\fR .sp const char * \fBTk_NameOfJoinStyle(\fIjoin\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "Tcl_Interp" *joinPtr .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for error reporting. .AP "const char" *string in String containing name of join style \- one of .QW \fBbevel\fR , |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/GetJustify.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | .SH NAME Tk_GetJustifyFromObj, Tk_GetJustify, Tk_NameOfJustify \- translate between strings and justification styles .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int | | | | < | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 | .SH NAME Tk_GetJustifyFromObj, Tk_GetJustify, Tk_NameOfJustify \- translate between strings and justification styles .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int \fBTk_GetJustifyFromObj(\fIinterp, objPtr, justifyPtr\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_GetJustify(\fIinterp, string, justifyPtr\fB)\fR .sp const char * \fBTk_NameOfJustify(\fIjustify\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "Tk_Justify" *justifyPtr .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for error reporting, or NULL. .AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out String value contains name of justification style \- one of .QW \fBleft\fR , |
︙ | ︙ | |||
45 46 47 48 49 50 51 | Justification style (one of the values listed below). .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_GetJustifyFromObj\fR places in \fI*justifyPtr\fR the justify value corresponding to \fIobjPtr\fR's value. This value will be one of the following: | > | > | > | | 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 | Justification style (one of the values listed below). .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_GetJustifyFromObj\fR places in \fI*justifyPtr\fR the justify value corresponding to \fIobjPtr\fR's value. This value will be one of the following: .TP \fBTK_JUSTIFY_LEFT\fR Means that the text on each line should start at the left edge of the line; as a result, the right edges of lines may be ragged. .TP \fBTK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT\fR Means that the text on each line should end at the right edge of the line; as a result, the left edges of lines may be ragged. .TP \fBTK_JUSTIFY_CENTER\fR Means that the text on each line should be centered; as a result, both the left and right edges of lines may be ragged. .PP Under normal circumstances the return value is \fBTCL_OK\fR and \fIinterp\fR is unused. If \fIobjPtr\fR does not contain a valid justification style or an abbreviation of one of these names, \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned, |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/GetOption.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 | Tk_GetOption \- retrieve an option from the option database .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Tk_Uid \fBTk_GetOption\fR(\fItkwin, name, class\fR) | < | 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | Tk_GetOption \- retrieve an option from the option database .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Tk_Uid \fBTk_GetOption\fR(\fItkwin, name, class\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window *class .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window. .AP "const char" *name in Name of desired option. .AP "const char" *class in |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/GetPixels.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | .SH NAME Tk_GetPixelsFromObj, Tk_GetPixels, Tk_GetMMFromObj, Tk_GetScreenMM, Tk_GetDoublePixelsFromObj \- translate between strings and screen units .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int | | | | | | < | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 | .SH NAME Tk_GetPixelsFromObj, Tk_GetPixels, Tk_GetMMFromObj, Tk_GetScreenMM, Tk_GetDoublePixelsFromObj \- translate between strings and screen units .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int \fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr, intPtr\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_GetDoublePixelsFromObj(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr, doublePtr\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_GetPixels(\fIinterp, tkwin, string, intPtr\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_GetMMFromObj(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr, doublePtr\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_GetScreenMM(\fIinterp, tkwin, string, doublePtr\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "Tcl_Interp" *joinPtr .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for error reporting. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Window whose screen geometry determines the conversion between absolute units and pixels. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
53 54 55 56 57 58 59 | the screen (\fIobjPtr\fR or \fIstring\fR) and compute the corresponding distance either in integer pixels or floating-point millimeters. In either case, \fIobjPtr\fR or \fIstring\fR specifies a screen distance as a floating-point number followed by one of the following characters that indicates units: | > | > | > | > | > | | 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 | the screen (\fIobjPtr\fR or \fIstring\fR) and compute the corresponding distance either in integer pixels or floating-point millimeters. In either case, \fIobjPtr\fR or \fIstring\fR specifies a screen distance as a floating-point number followed by one of the following characters that indicates units: .TP <none> The number specifies a distance in pixels. .TP \fBc\fR The number specifies a distance in centimeters on the screen. .TP \fBi\fR The number specifies a distance in inches on the screen. .TP \fBm\fR The number specifies a distance in millimeters on the screen. .TP \fBp\fR The number specifies a distance in printer's points (1/72 inch) on the screen. .PP \fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR converts the value of \fIobjPtr\fR to the nearest even number of pixels and stores that value at \fI*intPtr\fR. It returns \fBTCL_OK\fR under normal circumstances. If an error occurs (e.g. \fIobjPtr\fR contains a number followed |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/GetPixmap.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | .SH NAME Tk_GetPixmap, Tk_FreePixmap \- allocate and free pixmaps .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Pixmap | | | < | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 | .SH NAME Tk_GetPixmap, Tk_FreePixmap \- allocate and free pixmaps .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Pixmap \fBTk_GetPixmap(\fIdisplay, d, width, height, depth\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_FreePixmap(\fIdisplay, pixmap\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "Drawable" *pixelPtr .AP Display *display in X display for the pixmap. .AP Drawable d in Pixmap or window where the new pixmap will be used for drawing. .AP "int" width in |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/GetRootCrd.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | .SH NAME Tk_GetRootCoords \- Compute root-window coordinates of window .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_GetRootCoords\fR(\fItkwin, xPtr, yPtr\fR) | < | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 | .SH NAME Tk_GetRootCoords \- Compute root-window coordinates of window .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_GetRootCoords\fR(\fItkwin, xPtr, yPtr\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window tkwin .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window. .AP int *xPtr out Pointer to location in which to store root-window x-coordinate corresponding to left edge of \fItkwin\fR's border. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/GetScroll.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | .SH NAME Tk_GetScrollInfoObj, Tk_GetScrollInfo \- parse arguments for scrolling commands .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int | | | < | | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 | .SH NAME Tk_GetScrollInfoObj, Tk_GetScrollInfo \- parse arguments for scrolling commands .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int \fBTk_GetScrollInfoObj(\fIinterp, objc, objv, fractionPtr, stepsPtr\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_GetScrollInfo(\fIinterp, argc, argv, fractionPtr, stepsPtr\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "Tcl_Interp" *fractionPtr .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for error reporting. .AP int objc in Number of Tcl_Obj's in \fIobjv\fR array. .AP "Tcl_Obj *const *" objv in Argument objects. These represent the entire widget command, of which the first word is typically the widget name and the second word is typically \fBxview\fR or \fByview\fR. .AP int argc in Number of strings in \fIargv\fR array. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/GetSelect.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 | Tk_GetSelection \- retrieve the contents of a selection .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int \fBTk_GetSelection\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, selection, target, proc, clientData\fR) | < | 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | Tk_GetSelection \- retrieve the contents of a selection .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int \fBTk_GetSelection\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, selection, target, proc, clientData\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_GetSelProc clientData .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for reporting errors. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Window on whose behalf to retrieve the selection (determines display from which to retrieve). |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/GetUid.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 | Tk_GetUid, Tk_Uid \- convert from string to unique identifier .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Tk_Uid \fBTk_GetUid\fR(\fIstring\fR) | < | 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | Tk_GetUid, Tk_Uid \- convert from string to unique identifier .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Tk_Uid \fBTk_GetUid\fR(\fIstring\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AP char *string in String for which the corresponding unique identifier is desired. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/GetVRoot.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | .BS .SH NAME Tk_GetVRootGeometry \- Get location and size of virtual root for window .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp | | < | 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 | .BS .SH NAME Tk_GetVRootGeometry \- Get location and size of virtual root for window .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_GetVRootGeometry(\fItkwin, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window heightPtr .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window whose virtual root is to be queried. .AP int xPtr out Points to word in which to store x-offset of virtual root. .AP int yPtr out |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/GetVisual.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | .SH NAME Tk_GetVisual \- translate from string to visual .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Visual * | | < | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | .SH NAME Tk_GetVisual \- translate from string to visual .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Visual * \fBTk_GetVisual(\fIinterp, tkwin, string, depthPtr, colormapPtr\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "Tcl_Interp" *colormapPtr .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for error reporting. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window in which the visual will be used. .AP "const char" *string in |
︙ | ︙ | |||
45 46 47 48 49 50 51 | also locates an appropriate colormap for use with the result visual and stores its X identifier at \fI*colormapPtr\fR. .PP The \fIstring\fR argument specifies the desired visual in one of the following ways: .TP 15 \fIclass depth\fR | < < < < < | 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 | also locates an appropriate colormap for use with the result visual and stores its X identifier at \fI*colormapPtr\fR. .PP The \fIstring\fR argument specifies the desired visual in one of the following ways: .TP 15 \fIclass depth\fR The string consists of a class name followed by an integer depth, with any amount of white space (including none) in between. \fIclass\fR selects what sort of visual is desired and must be one of \fBdirectcolor\fR, \fBgrayscale\fR, \fBgreyscale\fR, \fBpseudocolor\fR, \fBstaticcolor\fR, \fBstaticgray\fR, \fBstaticgrey\fR, or \fBtruecolor\fR, or a unique abbreviation. \fIdepth\fR specifies how many bits per pixel are needed for the visual. If possible, \fBTk_GetVisual\fR will return a visual with this depth; if there is no visual of the desired depth then \fBTk_GetVisual\fR looks first for a visual with greater depth, then one with less depth. .TP 15 \fBdefault\fR Use the default visual for \fItkwin\fR's screen. .TP 15 \fIpathName\fR Use the visual for the window given by \fIpathName\fR. \fIpathName\fR must be the name of a window on the same screen as \fItkwin\fR. .TP 15 \fInumber\fR Use the visual whose X identifier is \fInumber\fR. .TP 15 \fBbest\fR ?\fIdepth\fR? Choose the .QW "best possible" visual, using the following rules, in decreasing order of priority: .RS .IP (a) a visual that has exactly the desired depth is best, followed by a visual with greater depth than requested (but as little extra |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/Grab.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int \fBTk_Grab\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, grabGlobal\fR) .sp \fBTk_Ungrab\fR(\fItkwin\fR) | > < | 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int \fBTk_Grab\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, grabGlobal\fR) .sp void \fBTk_Ungrab\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for error reporting .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Window on whose behalf the pointer is to be grabbed or released .AP int grabGlobal in Boolean indicating whether the grab is global or application local |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/HWNDToWindow.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 | Tk_HWNDToWindow \- Find Tk's window information for a Windows window .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tkPlatDecls.h>\fR .sp Tk_Window \fBTk_HWNDToWindow\fR(\fIhwnd\fR) | < | 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | Tk_HWNDToWindow \- Find Tk's window information for a Windows window .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tkPlatDecls.h>\fR .sp Tk_Window \fBTk_HWNDToWindow\fR(\fIhwnd\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AP HWND hwnd in Windows handle for the window. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP Given a Windows HWND window identifier, this procedure returns the |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/HandleEvent.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | .SH NAME Tk_HandleEvent \- invoke event handlers for window system events .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR(\fIeventPtr\fR) | < | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 | .SH NAME Tk_HandleEvent \- invoke event handlers for window system events .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR(\fIeventPtr\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS XEvent *eventPtr .AP XEvent *eventPtr in Pointer to X event to dispatch to relevant handler(s). It is important that all unused fields of the structure be set to zero. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/IdToWindow.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | Tk_IdToWindow \- Find Tk's window information for an X window .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Tk_Window \fBTk_IdToWindow\fR(\fIdisplay, window\fR) | < | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 | Tk_IdToWindow \- Find Tk's window information for an X window .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Tk_Window \fBTk_IdToWindow\fR(\fIdisplay, window\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window display .AP Display *display in X display containing the window. .AP Window window in X id for window. .BE |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ImgChanged.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | .SH NAME Tk_ImageChanged \- notify widgets that image needs to be redrawn .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_ImageChanged\fR(\fImodel, x, y, width, height, imageWidth, imageHeight\fR) | < | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 | .SH NAME Tk_ImageChanged \- notify widgets that image needs to be redrawn .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_ImageChanged\fR(\fImodel, x, y, width, height, imageWidth, imageHeight\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_ImageModel imageHeight .AP Tk_ImageModel model in Token for image, which was passed to image's \fIcreateProc\fR when the image was created. .AP int x in X-coordinate of upper-left corner of region that needs redisplay (measured |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/Inactive.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .SH NAME Tk_GetUserInactiveTime, Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime \- discover user inactivity time .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp long | | | < | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 | .SH NAME Tk_GetUserInactiveTime, Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime \- discover user inactivity time .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp long \fBTk_GetUserInactiveTime(\fIdisplay\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_ResetUserInactiveTime(\fIdisplay\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Display *display .AP Display *display in The display on which the user inactivity timer is to be queried or reset. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/InternAtom.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | .SH NAME Tk_InternAtom, Tk_GetAtomName \- manage cache of X atoms .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Atom | | | < | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 | .SH NAME Tk_InternAtom, Tk_GetAtomName \- manage cache of X atoms .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Atom \fBTk_InternAtom(\fItkwin, name\fR) .sp const char * \fBTk_GetAtomName(\fItkwin, atom\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window parent .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window. Used to map atom or name relative to a particular display. .AP "const char" *name in String name for which atom is desired. .AP Atom atom in |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/MainLoop.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | .SH NAME Tk_MainLoop \- loop for events until all windows are deleted .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_MainLoop\fR() | < | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 | .SH NAME Tk_MainLoop \- loop for events until all windows are deleted .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_MainLoop\fR() .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_MainLoop\fR is a procedure that loops repeatedly calling \fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR. It returns only when there are no applications left in this process (i.e. no main windows exist anymore). Most windowing applications will call \fBTk_MainLoop\fR after |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/MainWin.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Tk_Window \fBTk_MainWindow\fR(\fIinterp\fR) .sp \fBTk_SetMainMenubar\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, menuName\fR) .sp \fBTk_SetWindowMenubar\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, oldMenuName, menuName\fR) .sp int \fBTk_GetNumMainWindows\fR() | > > < | 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 | .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Tk_Window \fBTk_MainWindow\fR(\fIinterp\fR) .sp void \fBTk_SetMainMenubar\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, menuName\fR) .sp void \fBTk_SetWindowMenubar\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, oldMenuName, menuName\fR) .sp int \fBTk_GetNumMainWindows\fR() .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tcl_Interp *pathName .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in/out Interpreter associated with the application. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for main window. .AP const char *menuName in |
︙ | ︙ | |||
47 48 49 50 51 52 53 | associated with \fIinterp\fR then \fBTk_MainWindow\fR returns NULL and leaves an error message in interpreter \fIinterp\fR's result. .PP \fBTk_GetNumMainWindows\fR returns a count of the number of main windows currently open in the current thread. \fBTk_SetMainMenubar\fR Called when a toplevel widget is brought to front. On the Macintosh, | | | 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 | associated with \fIinterp\fR then \fBTk_MainWindow\fR returns NULL and leaves an error message in interpreter \fIinterp\fR's result. .PP \fBTk_GetNumMainWindows\fR returns a count of the number of main windows currently open in the current thread. \fBTk_SetMainMenubar\fR Called when a toplevel widget is brought to front. On the Macintosh, sets up the menubar that goes accross the top of the main monitor. On other platforms, nothing is necessary. \fBTk_SetWindowMenubar\fR associates a menu with a window. The old menu clones for the menubar are thrown away, and a handler is set up to allocate the new ones. .SH KEYWORDS application, main window |
Changes to doc/MaintGeom.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 | .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_MaintainGeometry\fR(\fIwindow, container, x, y, width, height\fR) .sp \fBTk_UnmaintainGeometry\fR(\fIwindow, container\fR) | < | 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 | .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_MaintainGeometry\fR(\fIwindow, container, x, y, width, height\fR) .sp \fBTk_UnmaintainGeometry\fR(\fIwindow, container\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window container .AP Tk_Window window in Window whose geometry is to be controlled. .AP Tk_Window container in Window relative to which \fIwindow\fR's geometry will be controlled. .AP int x in |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ManageGeom.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | .SH NAME Tk_ManageGeometry \- arrange to handle geometry requests for a window .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_ManageGeometry\fR(\fItkwin, mgrPtr, clientData\fR) | < | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 | .SH NAME Tk_ManageGeometry \- arrange to handle geometry requests for a window .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_ManageGeometry\fR(\fItkwin, mgrPtr, clientData\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_GeometryProc clientData .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window to be managed. .AP "const Tk_GeomMgr" *mgrPtr in Pointer to data structure containing information about the geometry manager, or NULL to indicate that \fItkwin\fR's geometry |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/MapWindow.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 | .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Tk_Window \fBTk_MapWindow\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp \fBTk_UnmapWindow\fR(\fItkwin\fR) | < | 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 | .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Tk_Window \fBTk_MapWindow\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp \fBTk_UnmapWindow\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window parent .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/MeasureChar.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH Tk_MeasureChars 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .so man.macros .BS .SH NAME | > | > > > > > > > | > > > > > > > | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH Tk_MeasureChars 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .so man.macros .BS .SH NAME Tk_MeasureChars, Tk_MeasureCharsInContext, Tk_TextWidth, Tk_DrawChars, Tk_DrawCharsInContext, Tk_UnderlineChars, Tk_UnderlineCharsInContext \- routines to measure and display simple single-line strings. .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int \fBTk_MeasureChars\fR(\fItkfont, string, numBytes, maxPixels, flags, lengthPtr\fR) .sp int \fBTk_MeasureCharsInContext\fR(\fItkfont, string, numBytes, rangeStart, rangeLength, maxPixels, flags, lengthPtr\fR) .sp int \fBTk_TextWidth\fR(\fItkfont, string, numBytes\fR) .sp \fBTk_DrawChars\fR(\fIdisplay, drawable, gc, tkfont, string, numBytes, x, y\fR) .sp \fBTk_DrawCharsInContext\fR(\fIdisplay, drawable, gc, tkfont, string, numBytes, rangeStart, rangeLength, x, y\fR) .sp \fBTk_UnderlineChars\fR(\fIdisplay, drawable, gc, tkfont, string, x, y, firstByte, lastByte\fR) .sp \fBTk_UnderlineCharsInContext\fR(\fIdisplay, drawable, gc, tkfont, string, numBytes, x, y, firstByte, lastByte\fR) .fi .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "const char" firstChar .AP Tk_Font tkfont in Token for font in which text is to be drawn or measured. Must have been returned by a previous call to \fBTk_GetFont\fR. .AP "const char" *string in Text to be measured or displayed. Need not be null terminated. Any non-printing meta-characters in the string (such as tabs, newlines, and other control characters) will be measured or displayed in a platform-dependent manner. .AP int numBytes in The maximum number of bytes to consider when measuring or drawing \fIstring\fR. Must be greater than or equal to 0. .AP int maxPixels in If \fImaxPixels\fR is >= 0, it specifies the longest permissible line length in pixels. Characters from \fIstring\fR are processed only until this many pixels have been covered. If \fImaxPixels\fR is < 0, then the line length is unbounded and the \fIflags\fR argument is ignored. .AP int flags in Various flag bits OR-ed together: \fBTK_PARTIAL_OK\fR means include a character as long as any part of it fits in the length given by \fImaxPixels\fR; otherwise, a character must fit completely to be considered. \fBTK_WHOLE_WORDS\fR means stop on a word boundary, if possible. If \fBTK_AT_LEAST_ONE\fR is set, it means return at least one character even if no characters could fit in the length given by \fImaxPixels\fR. If \fBTK_AT_LEAST_ONE\fR is set and \fBTK_WHOLE_WORDS\fR is also set, it means that if not even one word fits on the line, return the first few letters of the word that did fit; if not even one letter of the word fit, then the first letter will still be returned. \fBTK_ISOLATE_END\fR means that the last character should not be considered in context with the rest of the string (used for breaking lines, with the Tk_*InContext variants of the functions only). .AP int *lengthPtr out Filled with the number of pixels occupied by the number of characters returned as the result of \fBTk_MeasureChars\fR. .AP Display *display in Display on which to draw. .AP Drawable drawable in Window or pixmap in which to draw. .AP GC gc in Graphics context for drawing characters. The font selected into this GC must be the same as the \fItkfont\fR. .AP int "x, y" in Coordinates at which to place the left edge of the baseline when displaying \fIstring\fR. .AP int firstByte in The index of the first byte of the first character to underline in the \fIstring\fR. Underlining begins at the left edge of this character. .AP int lastByte in The index of the first byte of the last character up to which the underline will be drawn. The character specified by \fIlastByte\fR will not itself be underlined. .AP int rangeStart in Index of first byte to draw or to measure. .AP int rangeLength in Length of range to draw or to measure, in bytes. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP These routines are for measuring and displaying simple single-font, single-line strings. To measure and display single-font, multi-line, justified text, refer to the documentation for \fBTk_ComputeTextLayout\fR. There is no programming interface in the core of Tk that supports |
︙ | ︙ | |||
117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 | .PP \fBTk_UnderlineChars\fR underlines the given range of characters in the given \fIstring\fR. It does not draw the characters (which are assumed to have been displayed previously by \fBTk_DrawChars\fR); it just draws the underline. This procedure is used to underline a few characters without having to construct an underlined font. To produce natively underlined text, the appropriate underlined font should be constructed and used. .SH "SEE ALSO" font(n), FontId(3) .SH KEYWORDS font, measurement | > > > > > > > | 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 | .PP \fBTk_UnderlineChars\fR underlines the given range of characters in the given \fIstring\fR. It does not draw the characters (which are assumed to have been displayed previously by \fBTk_DrawChars\fR); it just draws the underline. This procedure is used to underline a few characters without having to construct an underlined font. To produce natively underlined text, the appropriate underlined font should be constructed and used. .PP \fBTk_MeasureCharsInContext\fR, \fBTk_DrawCharsInContext\fR, \fBTk_UnderlineCharsInContext\fR are variants of respectively \fBTk_MeasureChars\fR, \fBTk_DrawChars\fR and \fBTk_UnderlineChars\fR, but with access to all the characters on the line for context. Except on macOS, this context isn't actually consulted (meaning the out of context variants are called). .SH "SEE ALSO" font(n), FontId(3) .SH KEYWORDS font, measurement |
Changes to doc/MoveToplev.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | .BS .SH NAME Tk_MoveToplevelWindow \- Adjust the position of a top-level window .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp | | < | 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 | .BS .SH NAME Tk_MoveToplevelWindow \- Adjust the position of a top-level window .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_MoveToplevelWindow(\fItkwin, x, y\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window tkwin .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for top-level window to move. .AP int x in New x-coordinate for the top-left pixel of \fItkwin\fR's border, or the top-left pixel of the decorative border supplied for \fItkwin\fR by the |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/Name.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 | \fBTk_Name\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp char * \fBTk_PathName\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp Tk_Window \fBTk_NameToWindow\fR(\fIinterp, pathName, tkwin\fR) | < | 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 | \fBTk_Name\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp char * \fBTk_PathName\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp Tk_Window \fBTk_NameToWindow\fR(\fIinterp, pathName, tkwin\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tcl_Interp *pathName .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window. .AP Tcl_Interp *interp out Interpreter to use for error reporting. .AP "const char" *pathName in |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/NameOfImg.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | Tk_NameOfImage \- Return name of image. .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp const char * \fBTk_NameOfImage\fR(\fIimageModel\fR) | < | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 | Tk_NameOfImage \- Return name of image. .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp const char * \fBTk_NameOfImage\fR(\fIimageModel\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_ImageModel imageModel .AP Tk_ImageModel imageModel in Token for image, which was passed to image manager's \fIcreateProc\fR when the image was created. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/OwnSelect.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | .SH NAME Tk_OwnSelection \- make a window the owner of the primary selection .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_OwnSelection\fR(\fItkwin, selection, proc, clientData\fR) | < | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 | .SH NAME Tk_OwnSelection \- make a window the owner of the primary selection .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_OwnSelection\fR(\fItkwin, selection, proc, clientData\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_LostSelProc clientData .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Window that is to become new selection owner. .AP Atom selection in The name of the selection to be owned, such as XA_PRIMARY. .AP Tk_LostSelProc *proc in |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ParseArgv.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 | Tk_ParseArgv \- process command-line options .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, argcPtr, argv, argTable, flags\fR) | < | 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | Tk_ParseArgv \- process command-line options .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, argcPtr, argv, argTable, flags\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_ArgvInfo *argTable .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for returning error messages. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Window to use when arguments specify Tk options. If NULL, then no Tk options will be processed. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 | .QW "the matching argument" in the descriptions below. As part of the processing, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR may also use the next argument in \fIargv\fR after the matching argument, which is called .QW "the following argument" . The legal values for \fItype\fR, and the processing that they cause, are as follows: | > | > | > | > | > | > | > | > | > | > | > | > | | 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 | .QW "the matching argument" in the descriptions below. As part of the processing, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR may also use the next argument in \fIargv\fR after the matching argument, which is called .QW "the following argument" . The legal values for \fItype\fR, and the processing that they cause, are as follows: .TP \fBTK_ARGV_END\fR Marks the end of the table. The last entry in \fIargTable\fR must have this type; all of its other fields are ignored and it will never match any arguments. .TP \fBTK_ARGV_CONSTANT\fR \fISrc\fR is treated as an integer and \fIdst\fR is treated as a pointer to an integer. \fISrc\fR is stored at \fI*dst\fR. The matching argument is discarded. .TP \fBTK_ARGV_INT\fR The following argument must contain an integer string in the format accepted by \fBstrtol\fR (e.g. .QW 0 and .QW 0x prefixes may be used to specify octal or hexadecimal numbers, respectively). \fIDst\fR is treated as a pointer to an integer; the following argument is converted to an integer value and stored at \fI*dst\fR. \fISrc\fR is ignored. The matching and following arguments are discarded from \fIargv\fR. .TP \fBTK_ARGV_FLOAT\fR The following argument must contain a floating-point number in the format accepted by \fBstrtol\fR. \fIDst\fR is treated as the address of a double-precision floating point value; the following argument is converted to a double-precision value and stored at \fI*dst\fR. The matching and following arguments are discarded from \fIargv\fR. .TP \fBTK_ARGV_STRING\fR In this form, \fIdst\fR is treated as a pointer to a (char *); \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR stores at \fI*dst\fR a pointer to the following argument, and discards the matching and following arguments from \fIargv\fR. \fISrc\fR is ignored. .TP \fBTK_ARGV_UID\fR This form is similar to \fBTK_ARGV_STRING\fR, except that the argument is turned into a Tk_Uid by calling \fBTk_GetUid\fR. \fIDst\fR is treated as a pointer to a Tk_Uid; \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR stores at \fI*dst\fR the Tk_Uid corresponding to the following argument, and discards the matching and following arguments from \fIargv\fR. \fISrc\fR is ignored. .TP \fBTK_ARGV_CONST_OPTION\fR This form causes a Tk option to be set (as if the \fBoption\fR command had been invoked). The \fIsrc\fR field is treated as a pointer to a string giving the value of an option, and \fIdst\fR is treated as a pointer to the name of the option. The matching argument is discarded. If \fItkwin\fR is NULL, then argument specifiers of this type are ignored (as if they did not exist). .TP \fBTK_ARGV_OPTION_VALUE\fR This form is similar to \fBTK_ARGV_CONST_OPTION\fR, except that the value of the option is taken from the following argument instead of from \fIsrc\fR. \fIDst\fR is used as the name of the option. \fISrc\fR is ignored. The matching and following arguments are discarded. If \fItkwin\fR is NULL, then argument specifiers of this type are ignored (as if they did not exist). .TP \fBTK_ARGV_OPTION_NAME_VALUE\fR In this case the following argument is taken as the name of a Tk option and the argument after that is taken as the value for that option. Both \fIsrc\fR and \fIdst\fR are ignored. All three arguments are discarded from \fIargv\fR. If \fItkwin\fR is NULL, then argument specifiers of this type are ignored (as if they did not exist). .TP \fBTK_ARGV_HELP\fR When this kind of option is encountered, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR uses the \fIhelp\fR fields of \fIargTable\fR to format a message describing all the valid arguments. The message is placed in interpreter \fIinterp\fR's result and \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR returns \fBTCL_ERROR\fR. When this happens, the caller normally prints the help message and aborts. If the \fIkey\fR field of a \fBTK_ARGV_HELP\fR specifier is NULL, then the specifier will never match any arguments; in this case the specifier simply provides extra documentation, which will be included when some other \fBTK_ARGV_HELP\fR entry causes help information to be returned. .TP \fBTK_ARGV_REST\fR This option is used by programs or commands that allow the last several of their options to be the name and/or options for some other program. If a \fBTK_ARGV_REST\fR argument is found, then \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR does not process any of the remaining arguments; it returns them all at the beginning of \fIargv\fR (along with any other unprocessed arguments). In addition, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR treats \fIdst\fR as the address of an integer value, and stores at \fI*dst\fR the index of the first of the \fBTK_ARGV_REST\fR options in the returned \fIargv\fR. This allows the program to distinguish the \fBTK_ARGV_REST\fR options from other unprocessed options that preceded the \fBTK_ARGV_REST\fR. .TP \fBTK_ARGV_FUNC\fR For this kind of argument, \fIsrc\fR is treated as the address of a procedure, which is invoked to process the following argument. The procedure should have the following structure: .RS .CS int \fIfunc\fR(\fIdst\fR, \fIkey\fR, \fInextArg\fR) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
217 218 219 220 221 222 223 | (or NULL if there are not any more arguments left in \fIargv\fR). If \fIfunc\fR uses \fInextArg\fR (so that \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR should discard it), then it should return 1. Otherwise it should return 0 and \fBTkParseArgv\fR will process the following argument in the normal fashion. In either event the matching argument is discarded. .RE | > | | 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 | (or NULL if there are not any more arguments left in \fIargv\fR). If \fIfunc\fR uses \fInextArg\fR (so that \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR should discard it), then it should return 1. Otherwise it should return 0 and \fBTkParseArgv\fR will process the following argument in the normal fashion. In either event the matching argument is discarded. .RE .TP \fBTK_ARGV_GENFUNC\fR This form provides a more general procedural escape. It treats \fIsrc\fR as the address of a procedure, and passes that procedure all of the remaining arguments. The procedure should have the following form: .RS .CS int |
︙ | ︙ | |||
250 251 252 253 254 255 256 | \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR will process them. If \fIgenfunc\fR encounters an error then it should leave an error message in interpreter \fIinterp\fR's result, in the usual Tcl fashion, and return \-1; when this happens \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR will abort its processing and return \fBTCL_ERROR\fR. .RE .SS "FLAGS" | > | > | > | > | | 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 | \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR will process them. If \fIgenfunc\fR encounters an error then it should leave an error message in interpreter \fIinterp\fR's result, in the usual Tcl fashion, and return \-1; when this happens \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR will abort its processing and return \fBTCL_ERROR\fR. .RE .SS "FLAGS" .TP \fBTK_ARGV_DONT_SKIP_FIRST_ARG\fR \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR normally treats \fIargv[0]\fR as a program or command name, and returns it to the caller just as if it had not matched \fIargTable\fR. If this flag is given, then \fIargv[0]\fR is not given special treatment. .TP \fBTK_ARGV_NO_ABBREV\fR Normally, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR accepts unique abbreviations for \fIkey\fR values in \fIargTable\fR. If this flag is given then only exact matches will be acceptable. .TP \fBTK_ARGV_NO_LEFTOVERS\fR Normally, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR returns unrecognized arguments to the caller. If this bit is set in \fIflags\fR then \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR will return an error if it encounters any argument that does not match \fIargTable\fR. The only exception to this rule is \fIargv[0]\fR, which will be returned to the caller with no errors as long as \fBTK_ARGV_DONT_SKIP_FIRST_ARG\fR is not specified. .TP \fBTK_ARGV_NO_DEFAULTS\fR Normally, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR searches an internal table of standard argument specifiers in addition to \fIargTable\fR. If this bit is set in \fIflags\fR, then \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR will use only \fIargTable\fR and not its default table. .SH EXAMPLE .PP Here is an example definition of an \fIargTable\fR and |
︙ | ︙ | |||
292 293 294 295 296 297 298 | char *fileName = defaultFileName; Boolean exec = FALSE; /* * Define option descriptions. */ Tk_ArgvInfo argTable[] = { | | | | > > | | | | | 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 | char *fileName = defaultFileName; Boolean exec = FALSE; /* * Define option descriptions. */ Tk_ArgvInfo argTable[] = { {"\-X", TK_ARGV_CONSTANT, (char *) 1, &debugFlag, "Turn on debugging printfs"}, {"\-N", TK_ARGV_INT, NULL, &numReps, "Number of repetitions"}, {"\-of", TK_ARGV_STRING, NULL, &fileName, "Name of file for output"}, {"x", TK_ARGV_REST, NULL, &exec, "File to exec, followed by any arguments (must be last argument)."}, {NULL, TK_ARGV_END, NULL, NULL, NULL} }; main(argc, argv) int argc; char *argv[]; { \&... if (Tk_ParseArgv(interp, tkwin, &argc, argv, argTable, 0) != TCL_OK) { fprintf(stderr, "%s\en", Tcl_GetString(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp))); exit(1); } /* * Remainder of the program. */ } .CE .PP Note that default values can be assigned to variables named in \fIargTable\fR: the variables will only be overwritten if the particular arguments are present in \fIargv\fR. Here are some example command lines and their effects. .CS prog \-N 200 infile # just sets the numReps variable to 200 prog \-of out200 infile # sets fileName to reference "out200" prog \-XN 10 infile # sets the debug flag, also sets numReps .CE In all of the above examples, \fIargc\fR will be set by \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR to 2, \fIargv\fR[0] will be .QW prog , \fIargv\fR[1] will be .QW infile , and \fIargv\fR[2] will be NULL. .SH KEYWORDS arguments, command line, options |
Changes to doc/QWinEvent.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 | .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int \fBTk_CollapseMotionEvents\fR(\fIdisplay, collapse\fR) .sp \fBTk_QueueWindowEvent\fR(\fIeventPtr, position\fR) | < | 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 | .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int \fBTk_CollapseMotionEvents\fR(\fIdisplay, collapse\fR) .sp \fBTk_QueueWindowEvent\fR(\fIeventPtr, position\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tcl_QueuePosition position .AP Display *display in Display for which to control motion event collapsing. .AP int collapse in Indicates whether motion events should be collapsed or not. .AP XEvent *eventPtr in |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/Restack.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 | Tk_RestackWindow \- Change a window's position in the stacking order .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int \fBTk_RestackWindow\fR(\fItkwin, aboveBelow, other\fR) | < | 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | Tk_RestackWindow \- Change a window's position in the stacking order .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int \fBTk_RestackWindow\fR(\fItkwin, aboveBelow, other\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window aboveBelow .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window to restack. .AP int aboveBelow in Indicates new position of \fItkwin\fR relative to \fIother\fR; must be \fBAbove\fR or \fBBelow\fR. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/RestrictEv.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 | Tk_RestrictEvents \- filter and selectively delay X events .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Tk_RestrictProc * \fBTk_RestrictEvents\fR(\fIproc, arg, prevArgPtr\fR) | < | 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | Tk_RestrictEvents \- filter and selectively delay X events .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Tk_RestrictProc * \fBTk_RestrictEvents\fR(\fIproc, arg, prevArgPtr\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_RestrictProc **prevArgPtr .AP Tk_RestrictProc *proc in Predicate procedure to call to filter incoming X events. NULL means do not restrict events at all. .AP void *arg in Arbitrary argument to pass to \fIproc\fR. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/SetAppName.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 | Tk_SetAppName \- Set the name of an application for 'send' commands .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp const char * \fBTk_SetAppName\fR(\fItkwin, name\fR) | < | 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | Tk_SetAppName \- Set the name of an application for 'send' commands .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp const char * \fBTk_SetAppName\fR(\fItkwin, name\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window parent .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window in application. Used only to select a particular application. .AP "const char" *name in Name under which to register the application. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/SetCaret.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | Tk_SetCaretPos \- set the display caret location .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int \fBTk_SetCaretPos\fR(\fItkwin, x, y, height\fR) | < | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 | Tk_SetCaretPos \- set the display caret location .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int \fBTk_SetCaretPos\fR(\fItkwin, x, y, height\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window. .AP int x in Window-relative x coordinate. .AP int y in Window-relative y coordinate. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/SetClass.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 | .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_SetClass\fR(\fItkwin, class\fR) .sp Tk_Uid \fBTk_Class\fR(\fItkwin\fR) | < | 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 | .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_SetClass\fR(\fItkwin, class\fR) .sp Tk_Uid \fBTk_Class\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window parent .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window. .AP char *class in New class name for window. .BE |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/SetClassProcs.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | .SH NAME Tk_SetClassProcs \- register widget specific procedures .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_SetClassProcs\fR(\fItkwin, procs, instanceData\fR) | < | | 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 | .SH NAME Tk_SetClassProcs \- register widget specific procedures .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_SetClassProcs\fR(\fItkwin, procs, instanceData\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_ClassProc instanceData .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window to modify. .AP "const Tk_ClassProcs" *procs in Pointer to data structure containing widget specific procedures. The data structure pointed to by \fIprocs\fR must be static: Tk keeps a reference to it as long as the window exists. .AP void *instanceData in Arbitrary one-word value to pass to widget callbacks. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_SetClassProcs\fR is called to register a set of procedures that are used as callbacks in different places. .PP The structure pointed to by \fIprocs\fR contains the following: .CS typedef struct Tk_ClassProcs { size_t \fIsize\fR; Tk_ClassWorldChangedProc *\fIworldChangedProc\fR; Tk_ClassCreateProc *\fIcreateProc\fR; Tk_ClassModalProc *\fImodalProc\fR; } \fBTk_ClassProcs\fR; .CE The \fIsize\fR field is used to simplify future expansion of the |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/SetGrid.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 | .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_SetGrid\fR(\fItkwin, reqWidth, reqHeight, widthInc, heightInc\fR) .sp \fBTk_UnsetGrid\fR(\fItkwin\fR) | < | 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 | .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_SetGrid\fR(\fItkwin, reqWidth, reqHeight, widthInc, heightInc\fR) .sp \fBTk_UnsetGrid\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window heightInc .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window. .AP int reqWidth in Width in grid units that corresponds to the pixel dimension \fItkwin\fR has requested via \fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/SetOptions.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
55 56 57 58 59 60 61 | fields of this record are modified by procedures such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR and read by procedures such as \fBTk_GetOptionValue\fR. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in For options such as \fBTK_OPTION_COLOR\fR, this argument indicates the window in which the option will be used. If \fIoptionTable\fR uses no window-dependent options, then a NULL value may be supplied for this argument. | | | 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 | fields of this record are modified by procedures such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR and read by procedures such as \fBTk_GetOptionValue\fR. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in For options such as \fBTK_OPTION_COLOR\fR, this argument indicates the window in which the option will be used. If \fIoptionTable\fR uses no window-dependent options, then a NULL value may be supplied for this argument. .AP int objc in Number of values in \fIobjv\fR. .AP Tcl_Obj "*const *objv" in Command-line arguments for setting configuring options. .AP Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr out If not NULL, the structure pointed to by this argument is filled in with the old values of any options that were modified and old values are restored automatically if an error occurs in \fBTk_SetOptions\fR. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
527 528 529 530 531 532 533 | .SH "CUSTOM OPTION TYPES" .PP Applications can extend the built-in configuration types with additional configuration types by writing procedures to parse, print, free, and restore saved copies of the type and creating a structure pointing to those procedures: .CS | | | 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 | .SH "CUSTOM OPTION TYPES" .PP Applications can extend the built-in configuration types with additional configuration types by writing procedures to parse, print, free, and restore saved copies of the type and creating a structure pointing to those procedures: .CS typedef struct Tk_ObjCustomOption { const char *\fIname\fR; Tk_CustomOptionSetProc *\fIsetProc\fR; Tk_CustomOptionGetProc *\fIgetProc\fR; Tk_CustomOptionRestoreProc *\fIrestoreProc\fR; Tk_CustomOptionFreeProc *\fIfreeProc\fR; void *\fIclientData\fR; } \fBTk_ObjCustomOption\fR; |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/SetVisual.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 | Tk_SetWindowVisual \- change visual characteristics of window .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int \fBTk_SetWindowVisual\fR(\fItkwin, visual, depth, colormap\fR) | < | 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | Tk_SetWindowVisual \- change visual characteristics of window .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int \fBTk_SetWindowVisual\fR(\fItkwin, visual, depth, colormap\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "Tk_Window int" colormap .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window. .AP Visual *visual in New visual type to use for \fItkwin\fR. .AP "int" depth in |
︙ | ︙ | |||
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 | The safest thing is to call \fBTk_SetWindowVisual\fR immediately after calling \fBTk_CreateWindow\fR. If \fItkwin\fR has already been created before \fBTk_SetWindowVisual\fR is called then it returns 0 and does not make any changes; otherwise it returns 1 to signify that the operation completed successfully. .PP | | | 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 | The safest thing is to call \fBTk_SetWindowVisual\fR immediately after calling \fBTk_CreateWindow\fR. If \fItkwin\fR has already been created before \fBTk_SetWindowVisual\fR is called then it returns 0 and does not make any changes; otherwise it returns 1 to signify that the operation completed successfully. .PP Note: \fBTk_SetWindowVisual\fR should not be called if you just want to change a window's colormap without changing its visual or depth; call \fBTk_SetWindowColormap\fR instead. .SH KEYWORDS colormap, depth, visual |
Changes to doc/StrictMotif.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | Tk_StrictMotif \- Return value of tk_strictMotif variable .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int \fBTk_StrictMotif\fR(\fItkwin\fR) | < | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 | Tk_StrictMotif \- Return value of tk_strictMotif variable .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int \fBTk_StrictMotif\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window tkwin .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/TextLayout.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | .SH NAME Tk_ComputeTextLayout, Tk_FreeTextLayout, Tk_DrawTextLayout, Tk_UnderlineTextLayout, Tk_PointToChar, Tk_CharBbox, Tk_DistanceToTextLayout, Tk_IntersectTextLayout, Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript \- routines to measure and display single-font, multi-line, justified text. .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Tk_TextLayout | | > | > | > | | | | | > | < | 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 | .SH NAME Tk_ComputeTextLayout, Tk_FreeTextLayout, Tk_DrawTextLayout, Tk_UnderlineTextLayout, Tk_PointToChar, Tk_CharBbox, Tk_DistanceToTextLayout, Tk_IntersectTextLayout, Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript \- routines to measure and display single-font, multi-line, justified text. .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Tk_TextLayout \fBTk_ComputeTextLayout(\fItkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags, widthPtr, heightPtr\fB)\fR .sp void \fBTk_FreeTextLayout(\fIlayout\fB)\fR .sp void \fBTk_DrawTextLayout(\fIdisplay, drawable, gc, layout, x, y, firstChar, lastChar\fB)\fR .sp void \fBTk_UnderlineTextLayout(\fIdisplay, drawable, gc, layout, x, y, underline\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_PointToChar(\fIlayout, x, y\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_CharBbox(\fIlayout, index, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_DistanceToTextLayout(\fIlayout, x, y\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_IntersectTextLayout(\fIlayout, x, y, width, height\fB)\fR .sp void \fBTk_TextLayoutToPostscript(\fIinterp, layout\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_TextLayout "*xPtr, *yPtr" .AP Tk_Font tkfont in Font to use when constructing and displaying a text layout. The \fItkfont\fR must remain valid for the lifetime of the text layout. Must have been returned by a previous call to \fBTk_GetFont\fR. .AP "const char" *string in |
︙ | ︙ | |||
93 94 95 96 97 98 99 | this GC must correspond to the \fItkfont\fR used when constructing the text layout. .AP int "x, y" in Point, in pixels, at which to place the upper-left hand corner of the text layout when it is being drawn, or the coordinates of a point (with respect to the upper-left hand corner of the text layout) to check against the text layout. | | | | | 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 | this GC must correspond to the \fItkfont\fR used when constructing the text layout. .AP int "x, y" in Point, in pixels, at which to place the upper-left hand corner of the text layout when it is being drawn, or the coordinates of a point (with respect to the upper-left hand corner of the text layout) to check against the text layout. .AP int firstChar in The index of the first character to draw from the given text layout. The number 0 means to draw from the beginning. .AP int lastChar in The index of the last character up to which to draw. The character specified by \fIlastChar\fR itself will not be drawn. A number less than 0 means to draw all characters in the text layout. .AP int underline in Index of the single character to underline in the text layout, or a negative number counting backwards from the end of the string. Any out-of-range number (e.g. INT_MIN) means no underline. .AP int index in The index of the character whose bounding box is desired. The bounding box is computed with respect to the upper-left hand corner of the text layout. .AP int "*xPtr, *yPtr" out Filled with the upper-left hand corner, in pixels, of the bounding box for the character specified by \fIindex\fR. Either or both \fIxPtr\fR and \fIyPtr\fR may be NULL, in which case the corresponding value is not calculated. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/TkInitStubs.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | Tk_InitStubs \- initialize the Tk stubs mechanism .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp const char * \fBTk_InitStubs\fR(\fIinterp, version, exact\fR) | < | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 | Tk_InitStubs \- initialize the Tk stubs mechanism .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp const char * \fBTk_InitStubs\fR(\fIinterp, version, exact\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tcl_Interp *interp in .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Tcl interpreter handle. .AP char *version in A version string consisting of one or more decimal numbers separated by dots. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/Tk_Init.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
43 44 45 46 47 48 49 | its command-line arguments). .PP \fBTk_SafeInit\fR is identical to \fBTk_Init\fR except that it removes all Tk commands that are considered unsafe. Those commands and the reasons for their exclusion are: .TP \fBbell\fR | < < < < < < < < < < | 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 | its command-line arguments). .PP \fBTk_SafeInit\fR is identical to \fBTk_Init\fR except that it removes all Tk commands that are considered unsafe. Those commands and the reasons for their exclusion are: .TP \fBbell\fR Continuous ringing of the bell is a nuisance. .TP \fBclipboard\fR A malicious script could replace the contents of the clipboard with the string .QW "\fBrm \-r *\fR" and lead to surprises when the contents of the clipboard are pasted. .TP \fBgrab\fR Grab can be used to block the user from using any other applications. .TP \fBmenu\fR Menus can be used to cover the entire screen and to steal input from the user. .TP \fBselection\fR See clipboard. .TP \fBsend\fR Send can be used to cause unsafe interpreters to execute commands. .TP \fBtk\fR The tk command recreates the send command, which is unsafe. .TP \fBtkwait\fR Tkwait can block the containing process forever .TP \fBtoplevel\fR Toplevels can be used to cover the entire screen and to steal input from the user. .TP \fBwm\fR If toplevels are ever allowed, wm can be used to remove decorations, move windows around, etc. .SH KEYWORDS safe, application, initialization, load, main window |
Changes to doc/Tk_Main.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 | .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_Main\fR(\fIargc, argv, appInitProc\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc | | | 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 | .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_Main\fR(\fIargc, argv, appInitProc\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc .AP int argc in Number of elements in \fIargv\fR. .AP char *argv[] in Array of strings containing command-line arguments. On Windows, when using -DUNICODE, the parameter type changes to wchar_t *. .AP Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc in Address of an application-specific initialization procedure. The value for this argument is usually \fBTcl_AppInit\fR. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/WinUtil.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | .SH NAME Tk_GetOtherWindow, Tk_MakeContainer, Tk_MakeWindow, Tk_UseWindow \- window utility functions .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Tk_Window | | | | | < | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 | .SH NAME Tk_GetOtherWindow, Tk_MakeContainer, Tk_MakeWindow, Tk_UseWindow \- window utility functions .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Tk_Window \fBTk_GetOtherWindow(\fItkwin\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_MakeContainer(\fItkwin\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_MakeWindow(\fItkwin, parent\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_UseWindow(\fIinterp, tkwin, string\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS XSetWindowAttributes borderWidth .AP Tcl_Interp * interp in Interpreter associated with the application. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window. .AP Window parent in |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/WindowId.3.
︙ | ︙ | |||
99 100 101 102 103 104 105 | \fBTk_Colormap\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp Tcl_Interp * \fBTk_Interp\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp Tcl_Obj * \fBTk_NewWindowObj\fR(\fItkwin\fR) | < | 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 | \fBTk_Colormap\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp Tcl_Interp * \fBTk_Interp\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp Tcl_Obj * \fBTk_NewWindowObj\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window tkwin .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP |
︙ | ︙ | |||
144 145 146 147 148 149 150 | The width and height information refers to the interior size of the window, not including any border. \fBTk_Changes\fR returns a pointer to a structure containing all of the above information plus a few other fields. \fBTk_Attributes\fR returns a pointer to an XSetWindowAttributes structure describing all of the attributes of the \fItkwin\fR's window, such as background pixmap, event mask, and so on (Tk keeps track of all this information | | | 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 | The width and height information refers to the interior size of the window, not including any border. \fBTk_Changes\fR returns a pointer to a structure containing all of the above information plus a few other fields. \fBTk_Attributes\fR returns a pointer to an XSetWindowAttributes structure describing all of the attributes of the \fItkwin\fR's window, such as background pixmap, event mask, and so on (Tk keeps track of all this information as it is changed by the application). Note: it is essential that applications use Tk procedures like \fBTk_ResizeWindow\fR instead of X procedures like \fBXResizeWindow\fR, so that Tk can keep its data structures up-to-date. .PP \fBTk_IsContainer\fR returns a non-zero value if \fItkwin\fR is a container, and that some other application may be embedding itself inside \fItkwin\fR. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/bind.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
145 146 147 148 149 150 151 | times, and also place a time and space requirement on the sequence: for a sequence of events to match a \fBDouble\fR, \fBTriple\fR or \fBQuadruple\fR pattern, all of the events must occur close together in time and without substantial mouse motion in between. For example, \fB<Double\-Button\-1>\fR is equivalent to \fB<Button\-1><Button\-1>\fR with the extra time and space requirement. .PP | | < | | 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 | times, and also place a time and space requirement on the sequence: for a sequence of events to match a \fBDouble\fR, \fBTriple\fR or \fBQuadruple\fR pattern, all of the events must occur close together in time and without substantial mouse motion in between. For example, \fB<Double\-Button\-1>\fR is equivalent to \fB<Button\-1><Button\-1>\fR with the extra time and space requirement. .PP The \fBCommand\fR, \fBOption\fR, \fBNum\fR and \fBFn\fRmodifiers are equivalents of \fBMod1\fR up to \fBMod4\fR, they correspond to Macintosh-specific modifier keys. .PP The \fBExtended\fR modifier is, at present, specific to Windows. It appears on events that are associated with the keys on the .QW "extended keyboard" . On a US keyboard, the extended keys include the \fBAlt\fR and \fBControl\fR keys at the right of the keyboard, the cursor keys in the cluster to the left of the numeric pad, the \fBNumLock\fR key, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
646 647 648 649 650 651 652 | appended scripts, is terminated but Tk will continue processing binding scripts associated with other \fItag\fR's. If the \fBbreak\fR command is invoked within a binding script, then that script terminates and no other scripts will be invoked for the event. .PP Within a script called from the binding script, \fBreturn\fR | | | | 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 | appended scripts, is terminated but Tk will continue processing binding scripts associated with other \fItag\fR's. If the \fBbreak\fR command is invoked within a binding script, then that script terminates and no other scripts will be invoked for the event. .PP Within a script called from the binding script, \fBreturn\fR \fB-code ok\fR may be used to continue processing (including .QW + appended scripts), or \fBreturn\fR \fB-code break\fR may be used to stop processing all other binding scripts. .PP If more than one binding matches a particular event and they have the same \fItag\fR, then the most specific binding is chosen and its script is evaluated. The following tests are applied, in order, to determine which of several matching sequences is more specific: |
︙ | ︙ | |||
736 737 738 739 740 741 742 | The \fBbgerror\fR command will be executed at global level (outside the context of any Tcl procedure). .SH "EXAMPLES" .PP Arrange for a string describing the motion of the mouse to be printed out when the mouse is double-clicked: .CS | | | | 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 | The \fBbgerror\fR command will be executed at global level (outside the context of any Tcl procedure). .SH "EXAMPLES" .PP Arrange for a string describing the motion of the mouse to be printed out when the mouse is double-clicked: .CS \fBbind\fR . <Double\-1> { puts "hi from (%x,%y)" } .CE .PP A little GUI that displays what the keysym name of the last key pressed is: .CS set keysym "Press any key" pack [label .l \-textvariable keysym \-padx 2m \-pady 1m] \fBbind\fR . <Key> { set keysym "You pressed %K" } .CE .SH "SEE ALSO" bgerror(n), bindtags(n), event(n), focus(n), grab(n), keysyms(n) .SH KEYWORDS binding, event '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/bitmap.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME bitmap \- Images that display two colors .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fBimage create bitmap \fR?\fIname\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR? | | | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME bitmap \- Images that display two colors .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fBimage create bitmap \fR?\fIname\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR? \fIimageName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR \fIimageName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? .fi .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP A bitmap is an image whose pixels can display either of two colors or be transparent. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 | the source data is one and the background color if the source data is zero. .SH "CREATING BITMAPS" .PP Like all images, bitmaps are created using the \fBimage create\fR command. Bitmaps support the following \fIoptions\fR: | < < < < < < < | < | 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 | the source data is one and the background color if the source data is zero. .SH "CREATING BITMAPS" .PP Like all images, bitmaps are created using the \fBimage create\fR command. Bitmaps support the following \fIoptions\fR: .TP \fB\-background \fIcolor\fR . Specifies a background color for the image in any of the standard ways accepted by Tk. If this option is set to an empty string then the background pixels will be transparent. This effect is achieved by using the source bitmap as the mask bitmap, ignoring any \fB\-maskdata\fR or \fB\-maskfile\fR options. .TP \fB\-data \fIstring\fR . Specifies the contents of the source bitmap as a string. The string must adhere to X11 bitmap format (e.g., as generated by the \fBbitmap\fR program). If both the \fB\-data\fR and \fB\-file\fR options are specified, the \fB\-data\fR option takes precedence. .TP \fB\-file \fIname\fR . \fIname\fR gives the name of a file whose contents define the source bitmap. The file must adhere to X11 bitmap format (e.g., as generated by the \fBbitmap\fR program). .TP \fB\-foreground \fIcolor\fR . Specifies a foreground color for the image in any of the standard ways accepted by Tk. .TP \fB\-maskdata \fIstring\fR . Specifies the contents of the mask as a string. The string must adhere to X11 bitmap format (e.g., as generated by the \fBbitmap\fR program). If both the \fB\-maskdata\fR and \fB\-maskfile\fR options are specified, the \fB\-maskdata\fR option takes precedence. .TP \fB\-maskfile \fIname\fR . \fIname\fR gives the name of a file whose contents define the mask. The file must adhere to X11 bitmap format (e.g., as generated by the \fBbitmap\fR program). .SH "IMAGE COMMAND" .PP When a bitmap image is created, Tk also creates a new command whose name is the same as the image. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the image. It has the following general form: .CS \fIimageName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for bitmap images: .TP \fIimageName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR . Returns the current value of the configuration option given by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBimage create\fR \fBbitmap\fR command. .TP \fIimageName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? . Query or modify the configuration options for the image. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for \fIimageName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/canvas.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 | .TH canvas n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME canvas \- Create and manipulate 'canvas' hypergraphics drawing surface widgets .SH SYNOPSIS | | | 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 | .TH canvas n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME canvas \- Create and manipulate 'canvas' hypergraphics drawing surface widgets .SH SYNOPSIS \fBcanvas\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .SO \-background \-borderwidth \-cursor \-highlightbackground \-highlightcolor \-highlightthickness \-insertbackground \-insertborderwidth \-insertofftime \-insertontime \-insertwidth \-relief \-selectbackground \-selectborderwidth \-selectforeground \-takefocus \-xscrollcommand \-yscrollcommand |
︙ | ︙ | |||
252 253 254 255 256 257 258 | support as many of these forms as practical. Note that it is possible to refer to the character just after the last one in the text item; this is necessary for such tasks as inserting new text at the end of the item. Lines and Polygons do not support the insertion cursor and the selection. Their indices are supposed to be even always, because coordinates always appear in pairs. | > | > > | > > | > > | > > | > > | > | 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 | support as many of these forms as practical. Note that it is possible to refer to the character just after the last one in the text item; this is necessary for such tasks as inserting new text at the end of the item. Lines and Polygons do not support the insertion cursor and the selection. Their indices are supposed to be even always, because coordinates always appear in pairs. .TP 10 \fInumber\fR . A decimal number giving the position of the desired character within the text item. 0 refers to the first character, 1 to the next character, and so on. If indexes are odd for lines and polygons, they will be automatically decremented by one. A negative number is treated as if it were zero, and a number greater than the length of the text item is treated as if it were equal to the length of the text item. For polygons, negative numbers or numbers greater than the length of the coordinate list will be adjusted by adding or subtracting the length until the result is between zero and the length, inclusive. .TP 10 \fBend\fR . Refers to the character or coordinate just after the last one in the item (same as the number of characters or coordinates in the item). .TP 10 \fBinsert\fR . Refers to the character just before which the insertion cursor is drawn in this item. Not valid for lines and polygons. .TP 10 \fBsel.first\fR . Refers to the first selected character in the item. If the selection is not in this item then this form is illegal. .TP 10 \fBsel.last\fR . Refers to the last selected character in the item. If the selection is not in this item then this form is illegal. .TP 10 \fB@\fIx,y\fR . Refers to the character or coordinate at the point given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR, where \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are specified in the coordinate system of the canvas. If \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR lie outside the coordinates covered by the text item, then they refer to the first or last character in the line that is closest to the given point. .SH "DASH PATTERNS" |
︙ | ︙ | |||
337 338 339 340 341 342 343 | operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following widget commands are possible for canvas widgets: | < > | > > | > > | > > | > > | > > | > > | > < < | 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 | operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following widget commands are possible for canvas widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBaddtag \fItag searchSpec \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? . For each item that meets the constraints specified by \fIsearchSpec\fR and the \fIarg\fRs, add \fItag\fR to the list of tags associated with the item if it is not already present on that list. It is possible that no items will satisfy the constraints given by \fIsearchSpec\fR and \fIarg\fRs, in which case the command has no effect. This command returns an empty string as result. \fISearchSpec\fR and \fIarg\fR's may take any of the following forms: .RS .TP \fBabove \fItagOrId\fR . Selects the item just after (above) the one given by \fItagOrId\fR in the display list. If \fItagOrId\fR denotes more than one item, then the last (topmost) of these items in the display list is used. .TP \fBall\fR . Selects all the items in the canvas. .TP \fBbelow \fItagOrId\fR . Selects the item just before (below) the one given by \fItagOrId\fR in the display list. If \fItagOrId\fR denotes more than one item, then the first (lowest) of these items in the display list is used. .TP \fBclosest \fIx y \fR?\fIhalo\fR? ?\fIstart\fR? . Selects the item closest to the point given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR. If more than one item is at the same closest distance (e.g. two items overlap the point), then the top-most of these items (the last one in the display list) is used. If \fIhalo\fR is specified, then it must be a non-negative value. Any item closer than \fIhalo\fR to the point is considered to overlap it. The \fIstart\fR argument may be used to step circularly through all the closest items. If \fIstart\fR is specified, it names an item using a tag or id (if by tag, it selects the first item in the display list with the given tag). Instead of selecting the topmost closest item, this form will select the topmost closest item that is below \fIstart\fR in the display list; if no such item exists, then the selection behaves as if the \fIstart\fR argument had not been specified. .TP \fBenclosed\fR \fIx1\fR \fIy1\fR \fIx2\fR \fIy2\fR . Selects all the items completely enclosed within the rectangular region given by \fIx1\fR, \fIy1\fR, \fIx2\fR, and \fIy2\fR. \fIX1\fR must be no greater than \fIx2\fR and \fIy1\fR must be no greater than \fIy2\fR. .TP \fBoverlapping\fR \fIx1\fR \fIy1\fR \fIx2\fR \fIy2\fR . Selects all the items that overlap or are enclosed within the rectangular region given by \fIx1\fR, \fIy1\fR, \fIx2\fR, and \fIy2\fR. \fIX1\fR must be no greater than \fIx2\fR and \fIy1\fR must be no greater than \fIy2\fR. .TP \fBwithtag \fItagOrId\fR . Selects all the items given by \fItagOrId\fR. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBbbox \fItagOrId\fR ?\fItagOrId tagOrId ...\fR? . Returns a list with four elements giving an approximate bounding box for all the items named by the \fItagOrId\fR arguments. The list has the form .QW "\fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR" such that the drawn areas of all the named elements are within the region bounded by \fIx1\fR on the left, \fIx2\fR on the right, \fIy1\fR on the top, and \fIy2\fR on the bottom. The return value may overestimate the actual bounding box by a few pixels. If no items match any of the \fItagOrId\fR arguments or if the matching items have empty bounding boxes (i.e. they have nothing to display) then an empty string is returned. .TP \fIpathName \fBbind \fItagOrId\fR ?\fIsequence\fR? ?\fIcommand\fR? . This command associates \fIcommand\fR with all the items given by \fItagOrId\fR such that whenever the event sequence given by \fIsequence\fR occurs for one of the items the command will be invoked. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
476 477 478 479 480 481 482 | .PP If bindings have been created for a canvas window using the \fBbind\fR command, then they are invoked in addition to bindings created for the canvas's items using the \fBbind\fR widget command. The bindings for items will be invoked before any of the bindings for the window as a whole. .RE | < < < | < < | | < < < < < < | 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 | .PP If bindings have been created for a canvas window using the \fBbind\fR command, then they are invoked in addition to bindings created for the canvas's items using the \fBbind\fR widget command. The bindings for items will be invoked before any of the bindings for the window as a whole. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBcanvasx \fIscreenx\fR ?\fIgridspacing\fR? . Given a window x-coordinate in the canvas \fIscreenx\fR, this command returns the canvas x-coordinate that is displayed at that location. If \fIgridspacing\fR is specified, then the canvas coordinate is rounded to the nearest multiple of \fIgridspacing\fR units. .TP \fIpathName \fBcanvasy \fIscreeny\fR ?\fIgridspacing\fR? . Given a window y-coordinate in the canvas \fIscreeny\fR this command returns the canvas y-coordinate that is displayed at that location. If \fIgridspacing\fR is specified, then the canvas coordinate is rounded to the nearest multiple of \fIgridspacing\fR units. .TP \fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR . Returns the current value of the configuration option given by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBcanvas\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBconfigure ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR? . Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBcanvas\fR command. .TP \fIpathName\fR \fBcoords \fItagOrId \fR?\fIx0 y0 ...\fR? .TP \fIpathName\fR \fBcoords \fItagOrId \fR?\fIcoordList\fR? . Query or modify the coordinates that define an item. If no coordinates are specified, this command returns a list whose elements are the coordinates of the item named by \fItagOrId\fR. If coordinates are specified, then they replace the current coordinates for the named item. If \fItagOrId\fR refers to multiple items, then the first one in the display list is used. .RS .PP Note that for rectangles, ovals and arcs the returned list of coordinates has a fixed order, namely the left, top, right and bottom coordinates, which may not be the order originally given. Also the coordinates are always returned in screen units with no units (that is, in pixels). So if the original coordinates were specified for instance in centimeters or inches, the returned values will nevertheless be in pixels. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBcreate \fItype x y \fR?\fIx y ...\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR? .TP \fIpathName \fBcreate \fItype coordList \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR? . Create a new item in \fIpathName\fR of type \fItype\fR. The exact format of the arguments after \fItype\fR depends on \fItype\fR, but usually they consist of the coordinates for one or more points, followed by specifications for zero or more item options. See the subsections on individual item types below for more on the syntax of this command. This command returns the id for the new item. .TP \fIpathName \fBdchars \fItagOrId first \fR?\fIlast\fR? . For each item given by \fItagOrId\fR, delete the characters, or coordinates, in the range given by \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR, inclusive. If some of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR do not support indexing operations then they ignore this operation. Text items interpret \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR as indices to a character, line and polygon items interpret them as indices to a coordinate (an x,y pair). Indices are described in \fBINDICES\fR above. If \fIlast\fR is omitted, it defaults to \fIfirst\fR. This command returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBdelete \fR?\fItagOrId tagOrId ...\fR? . Delete each of the items given by each \fItagOrId\fR, and return an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBdtag \fItagOrId \fR?\fItagToDelete\fR? . For each of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR, delete the tag given by \fItagToDelete\fR from the list of those associated with the item. If an item does not have the tag \fItagToDelete\fR then the item is unaffected by the command. If \fItagToDelete\fR is omitted then it defaults to \fItagOrId\fR. This command returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBfind \fIsearchCommand \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? . This command returns a list consisting of all the items that meet the constraints specified by \fIsearchCommand\fR and \fIarg\fR's. \fISearchCommand\fR and \fIargs\fR have any of the forms accepted by the \fBaddtag\fR command. The items are returned in stacking order, with the lowest item first. .TP \fIpathName \fBfocus \fR?\fItagOrId\fR? . Set the keyboard focus for the canvas widget to the item given by \fItagOrId\fR. If \fItagOrId\fR refers to several items, then the focus is set to the first such item in the display list that supports the |
︙ | ︙ | |||
623 624 625 626 627 628 629 | a given item does not actually have the input focus unless (a) its canvas is the focus window and (b) the item is the focus item within the canvas. In most cases it is advisable to follow the \fBfocus\fR widget command with the \fBfocus\fR command to set the focus window to the canvas (if it was not there already). .RE | < | < < < | < < < | | | < | | < < < | | | | | < < < < < < < < < < | < | 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 | a given item does not actually have the input focus unless (a) its canvas is the focus window and (b) the item is the focus item within the canvas. In most cases it is advisable to follow the \fBfocus\fR widget command with the \fBfocus\fR command to set the focus window to the canvas (if it was not there already). .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBgettags\fR \fItagOrId\fR . Return a list whose elements are the tags associated with the item given by \fItagOrId\fR. If \fItagOrId\fR refers to more than one item, then the tags are returned from the first such item in the display list. If \fItagOrId\fR does not refer to any items, or if the item contains no tags, then an empty string is returned. .TP \fIpathName \fBicursor \fItagOrId index\fR . Set the position of the insertion cursor for the item(s) given by \fItagOrId\fR to just before the character whose position is given by \fIindex\fR. If some or all of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR do not support an insertion cursor then this command has no effect on them. See \fBINDICES\fR above for a description of the legal forms for \fIindex\fR. Note: the insertion cursor is only displayed in an item if that item currently has the keyboard focus (see the \fBfocus\fR widget command, above), but the cursor position may be set even when the item does not have the focus. This command returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBimage \fIimagename\fR ?\fIsubsample\fR? ?\fIzoom\fR? . Draw the canvas into the Tk photo image named \fIimagename\fR. If a \fB-scrollregion\fR has been defined then this will be the boundaries of the canvas region drawn and the final size of the photo image. Otherwise the widget width and height with an origin of 0,0 will be the size of the canvas region drawn and the final size of the photo image. Optionally an integer \fIsubsample\fR factor may be given and the photo image will be reduced in size. In addition to the \fIsubsample\fR an integer \fIzoom\fR factor can also be given and the photo image will be enlarged. The image background will be filled with the canvas background colour. The canvas widget does not need to be mapped for this widget command to work, but at least one of it's ancestors must be mapped. This command returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBimove \fItagOrId index x y\fR . This command causes the \fIindex\fR'th coordinate of each of the items indicated by \fItagOrId\fR to be relocated to the location (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR). Each item interprets \fIindex\fR independently according to the rules described in \fBINDICES\fR above. Out of the standard set of items, only line and polygon items may have their coordinates relocated this way. .TP \fIpathName \fBindex \fItagOrId index\fR . This command returns a decimal string giving the numerical index within \fItagOrId\fR corresponding to \fIindex\fR. \fIIndex\fR gives a textual description of the desired position as described in \fBINDICES\fR above. Text items interpret \fIindex\fR as an index to a character, line and polygon items interpret it as an index to a coordinate (an x,y pair). The return value is guaranteed to lie between 0 and the number of characters, or coordinates, within the item, inclusive. If \fItagOrId\fR refers to multiple items, then the index is processed in the first of these items that supports indexing operations (in display list order). .TP \fIpathName \fBinsert \fItagOrId beforeThis string\fR . For each of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR, if the item supports text or coordinate, insertion then \fIstring\fR is inserted into the item's text just before the character, or coordinate, whose index is \fIbeforeThis\fR. Text items interpret \fIbeforeThis\fR as an index to a character, line and polygon items interpret it as an index to a coordinate (an x,y pair). For lines and polygons the \fIstring\fR must be a valid coordinate sequence. See \fBINDICES\fR above for information about the forms allowed for \fIbeforeThis\fR. This command returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBitemcget\fR \fItagOrId\fR \fIoption\fR . Returns the current value of the configuration option for the item given by \fItagOrId\fR whose name is \fIoption\fR. This command is similar to the \fBcget\fR widget command except that it applies to a particular item rather than the widget as a whole. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBcreate\fR widget command when the item was created. If \fItagOrId\fR is a tag that refers to more than one item, the first (lowest) such item is used. .TP \fIpathName \fBitemconfigure \fItagOrId\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR? . This command is similar to the \fBconfigure\fR widget command except that it modifies item-specific options for the items given by \fItagOrId\fR instead of modifying options for the overall canvas widget. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
750 751 752 753 754 755 756 | modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s) in each of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR; in this case the command returns an empty string. The \fIoption\fRs and \fIvalue\fRs are the same as those permissible in the \fBcreate\fR widget command when the item(s) were created; see the sections describing individual item types below for details on the legal options. | < | < < < | 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 | modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s) in each of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR; in this case the command returns an empty string. The \fIoption\fRs and \fIvalue\fRs are the same as those permissible in the \fBcreate\fR widget command when the item(s) were created; see the sections describing individual item types below for details on the legal options. .TP \fIpathName \fBlower \fItagOrId \fR?\fIbelowThis\fR? . Move all of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR to a new position in the display list just before the item given by \fIbelowThis\fR. If \fItagOrId\fR refers to more than one item then all are moved but the relative order of the moved items will not be changed. \fIBelowThis\fR is a tag or id; if it refers to more than one item then the first (lowest) of these items in the display list is used as the destination location for the moved items. Note: this command has no effect on window items. Window items always obscure other item types, and the stacking order of window items is determined by the \fBraise\fR command and \fBlower\fR command, not the \fBraise\fR widget command and \fBlower\fR widget command for canvases. This command returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBmove \fItagOrId xAmount yAmount\fR . Move each of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR in the canvas coordinate space by adding \fIxAmount\fR to the x-coordinate of each point associated with the item and \fIyAmount\fR to the y-coordinate of each point associated with the item. This command returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBmoveto \fItagOrId xPos yPos\fR . Move the items given by \fItagOrId\fR in the canvas coordinate space so that the first coordinate pair (the upper-left corner of the bounding box) of the first item (the lowest in the display list) with tag \fItagOrId\fR is located at position (\fIxPos\fR,\fIyPos\fR). \fIxPos\fR and \fIyPos\fR may be the empty string, in which case the corresponding coordinate will be unchanged. All items matching \fItagOrId\fR remain in the same positions relative to each other. This command returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBpostscript \fR?\fIoption value option value ...\fR? . Generate a Postscript representation for part or all of the canvas. If the \fB\-file\fR option is specified then the Postscript is written to a file and an empty string is returned; otherwise the Postscript is returned as the result of the command. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
815 816 817 818 819 820 821 | either invoke the \fBupdate\fR command to wait for the canvas window to reach its final size, or else use the \fB\-width\fR and \fB\-height\fR options to specify the area of the canvas to print. The \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR argument pairs provide additional information to control the generation of Postscript. The following options are supported: .RS | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | < < | 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 | either invoke the \fBupdate\fR command to wait for the canvas window to reach its final size, or else use the \fB\-width\fR and \fB\-height\fR options to specify the area of the canvas to print. The \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR argument pairs provide additional information to control the generation of Postscript. The following options are supported: .RS .TP \fB\-channel \fIchannelName\fR . Specifies the name of the channel to which to write the Postscript. If this option and the \fB\-file\fR option are not specified then the Postscript is returned as the result of the command. .TP \fB\-colormap \fIvarName\fR . \fIVarName\fR must be the name of an array variable that specifies a color mapping to use in the Postscript. Each element of \fIvarName\fR must consist of Postscript code to set a particular color value (e.g. .QW "\fB1.0 1.0 0.0 setrgbcolor\fR" ). When outputting color information in the Postscript, Tk checks to see if there is an element of \fIvarName\fR with the same name as the color. If so, Tk uses the value of the element as the Postscript command to set the color. If this option has not been specified, or if there is no entry in \fIvarName\fR for a given color, then Tk uses the red, green, and blue intensities from the X color. .TP \fB\-colormode \fImode\fR . Specifies how to output color information. \fIMode\fR must be either \fBcolor\fR (for full color output), \fBgray\fR (convert all colors to their gray-scale equivalents) or \fBmono\fR (convert all colors to black or white). .TP \fB\-file \fIfileName\fR . Specifies the name of the file in which to write the Postscript. If this option and the \fB\-channel\fR option are not specified then the Postscript is returned as the result of the command. .TP \fB\-fontmap \fIvarName\fR . \fIVarName\fR must be the name of an array variable that specifies a font mapping to use in the Postscript. Each element of \fIvarName\fR must consist of a Tcl list with two elements, which are the name and point size of a Postscript font. When outputting Postscript commands for a particular font, Tk checks to see if \fIvarName\fR contains an element with the same name as the font. If there is such an element, then the font information contained in that element is used in the Postscript. Otherwise Tk attempts to guess what Postscript font to use. Tk's guesses generally only work for well-known fonts such as Times and Helvetica and Courier, and only if the X font name does not omit any dashes up through the point size. For example, \fB\-*\-Courier\-Bold\-R\-Normal\-\-*\-120\-*\fR will work but \fB*Courier\-Bold\-R\-Normal*120*\fR will not; Tk needs the dashes to parse the font name). .TP \fB\-height \fIsize\fR . Specifies the height of the area of the canvas to print. Defaults to the height of the canvas window. .TP \fB\-pageanchor \fIanchor\fR . Specifies which point of the printed area of the canvas should appear over the positioning point on the page (which is given by the \fB\-pagex\fR and \fB\-pagey\fR options). For example, \fB\-pageanchor n\fR means that the top center of the area of the canvas being printed (as it appears in the canvas window) should be over the positioning point. Defaults to \fBcenter\fR. .TP \fB\-pageheight \fIsize\fR . Specifies that the Postscript should be scaled in both x and y so that the printed area is \fIsize\fR high on the Postscript page. \fISize\fR consists of a floating-point number followed by \fBc\fR for centimeters, \fBi\fR for inches, \fBm\fR for millimeters, or \fBp\fR or nothing for printer's points (1/72 inch). Defaults to the height of the printed area on the screen. If both \fB\-pageheight\fR and \fB\-pagewidth\fR are specified then the scale factor from \fB\-pagewidth\fR is used (non-uniform scaling is not implemented). .TP \fB\-pagewidth \fIsize\fR . Specifies that the Postscript should be scaled in both x and y so that the printed area is \fIsize\fR wide on the Postscript page. \fISize\fR has the same form as for \fB\-pageheight\fR. Defaults to the width of the printed area on the screen. If both \fB\-pageheight\fR and \fB\-pagewidth\fR are specified then the scale factor from \fB\-pagewidth\fR is used (non-uniform scaling is not implemented). .TP \fB\-pagex \fIposition\fR . \fIPosition\fR gives the x-coordinate of the positioning point on the Postscript page, using any of the forms allowed for \fB\-pageheight\fR. Used in conjunction with the \fB\-pagey\fR and \fB\-pageanchor\fR options to determine where the printed area appears on the Postscript page. Defaults to the center of the page. .TP \fB\-pagey \fIposition\fR . \fIPosition\fR gives the y-coordinate of the positioning point on the Postscript page, using any of the forms allowed for \fB\-pageheight\fR. Used in conjunction with the \fB\-pagex\fR and \fB\-pageanchor\fR options to determine where the printed area appears on the Postscript page. Defaults to the center of the page. .TP \fB\-rotate \fIboolean\fR . \fIBoolean\fR specifies whether the printed area is to be rotated 90 degrees. In non-rotated output the x-axis of the printed area runs along the short dimension of the page .PQ portrait " orientation" ; in rotated output the x-axis runs along the long dimension of the page .PQ landscape " orientation" . Defaults to non-rotated. .TP \fB\-width \fIsize\fR . Specifies the width of the area of the canvas to print. Defaults to the width of the canvas window. .TP \fB\-x \fIposition\fR . Specifies the x-coordinate of the left edge of the area of the canvas that is to be printed, in canvas coordinates, not window coordinates. Defaults to the coordinate of the left edge of the window. .TP \fB\-y \fIposition\fR . Specifies the y-coordinate of the top edge of the area of the canvas that is to be printed, in canvas coordinates, not window coordinates. Defaults to the coordinate of the top edge of the window. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBraise \fItagOrId \fR?\fIaboveThis\fR? . Move all of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR to a new position in the display list just after the item given by \fIaboveThis\fR. If \fItagOrId\fR refers to more than one item then all are moved but the relative order of the moved items will not be changed. \fIAboveThis\fR is a tag or id; if it refers to more than one item then the last (topmost) of these items in the display list is used as the destination location for the moved items. This command returns an empty string. .RS .PP Note: this command has no effect on window items. Window items always obscure other item types, and the stacking order of window items is determined by the \fBraise\fR command and \fBlower\fR command, not the \fBraise\fR widget command and \fBlower\fR widget command for canvases. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBrchars \fItagOrId first last string\fR . This command causes the text or coordinates between \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR for each of the items indicated by \fItagOrId\fR to be replaced by \fIstring\fR. Each item interprets \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR independently according to the rules described in \fBINDICES\fR above. Out of the standard set of items, text items support this operation by altering their text as directed, and line and polygon items support this operation by altering their coordinate list (in which case \fIstring\fR should be a list of coordinates to use as a replacement). The other items ignore this operation. .TP \fIpathName \fBrotate \fItagOrId xOrigin yOrigin angle\fR .VS "8.7, TIP164" Rotate the coordinates of all of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR in canvas coordinate space. \fIXOrigin\fR and \fIyOrigin\fR identify the origin for the rotation operation and \fIangle\fR identifies the amount to rotate the coordinates |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 | points, and the \fBarc\fR, \fBoval\fR and \fBrectangle\fR types rotate about a computed center point instead of moving the bounding box coordinates directly. .PP Some items (currently \fBarc\fR and\fB text\fR) have angles in their options; this command \fIdoes not\fR affect those options. .RE .VE "8.7, TIP164" | < | 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 | points, and the \fBarc\fR, \fBoval\fR and \fBrectangle\fR types rotate about a computed center point instead of moving the bounding box coordinates directly. .PP Some items (currently \fBarc\fR and\fB text\fR) have angles in their options; this command \fIdoes not\fR affect those options. .RE .VE "8.7, TIP164" .TP \fIpathName \fBscale \fItagOrId xOrigin yOrigin xScale yScale\fR . Rescale the coordinates of all of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR in canvas coordinate space. \fIXOrigin\fR and \fIyOrigin\fR identify the origin for the scaling operation and \fIxScale\fR and \fIyScale\fR identify the scale |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 | This command returns an empty string. .RS .PP Note that some items have only a single pair of coordinates (e.g., text, images and windows) and so scaling of them by this command can only move them around. .RE | < | | 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 | This command returns an empty string. .RS .PP Note that some items have only a single pair of coordinates (e.g., text, images and windows) and so scaling of them by this command can only move them around. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBscan\fR \fIoption args\fR . This command is used to implement scanning on canvases. It has two forms, depending on \fIoption\fR: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBscan mark \fIx y\fR . |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 | It then adjusts the view by \fIgain\fR times the difference in coordinates, where \fIgain\fR defaults to 10. This command is typically associated with mouse motion events in the widget, to produce the effect of dragging the canvas at high speed through its window. The return value is an empty string. .RE | < | 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 | It then adjusts the view by \fIgain\fR times the difference in coordinates, where \fIgain\fR defaults to 10. This command is typically associated with mouse motion events in the widget, to produce the effect of dragging the canvas at high speed through its window. The return value is an empty string. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBselect \fIoption\fR ?\fItagOrId arg\fR? . Manipulates the selection in one of several ways, depending on \fIoption\fR. The command may take any of the forms described below. In all of the descriptions below, \fItagOrId\fR must refer to |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 | The anchor point is determined by the most recent \fBselect adjust\fR or \fBselect from\fR command for this widget. If the selection anchor point for the widget is not currently in \fItagOrId\fR, then it is set to the same character given by \fIindex\fR. Returns an empty string. .RE | < < | 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 | The anchor point is determined by the most recent \fBselect adjust\fR or \fBselect from\fR command for this widget. If the selection anchor point for the widget is not currently in \fItagOrId\fR, then it is set to the same character given by \fIindex\fR. Returns an empty string. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBtype\fI tagOrId\fR . Returns the type of the item given by \fItagOrId\fR, such as \fBrectangle\fR or \fBtext\fR. If \fItagOrId\fR refers to more than one item, then the type of the first item in the display list is returned. If \fItagOrId\fR does not refer to any items at all then an empty string is returned. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview \fR?\fIargs\fR? . This command is used to query and change the horizontal position of the information displayed in the canvas's window. It can take any of the following forms: .RS |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 | If \fInumber\fR is negative then information farther to the left becomes visible; if it is positive then information farther to the right becomes visible. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right in units of the \fBxScrollIncrement\fR option, if it is greater than zero, or in units of one-tenth the window's width otherwise. .RE | < | 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 | If \fInumber\fR is negative then information farther to the left becomes visible; if it is positive then information farther to the right becomes visible. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right in units of the \fBxScrollIncrement\fR option, if it is greater than zero, or in units of one-tenth the window's width otherwise. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fByview ?\fIargs\fR? . This command is used to query and change the vertical position of the information displayed in the canvas's window. It can take any of the following forms: .RS |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 | At present, text, line and polygon items provide this support. For lines and polygons the indexing facility is used to manipulate the coordinates of the item. .SS "COMMON ITEM OPTIONS" .PP Many items share a common set of options. These options are explained here, and then referred to be each widget type for brevity. | < < < < | < < < < | < < < | < < < < | < < < < | < < < < < | | | < | 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 1360 1361 1362 1363 1364 1365 1366 1367 1368 1369 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 1375 | At present, text, line and polygon items provide this support. For lines and polygons the indexing facility is used to manipulate the coordinates of the item. .SS "COMMON ITEM OPTIONS" .PP Many items share a common set of options. These options are explained here, and then referred to be each widget type for brevity. .TP \fB\-anchor \fIanchorPos\fR . \fIAnchorPos\fR tells how to position the item relative to the positioning point for the item; it may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetAnchor\fR. For example, if \fIanchorPos\fR is \fBcenter\fR then the item is centered on the point; if \fIanchorPos\fR is \fBn\fR then the item will be drawn so that its top center point is at the positioning point. This option defaults to \fBcenter\fR. .TP \fB\-dash \fIpattern\fR .TP \fB\-activedash \fIpattern\fR .TP \fB\-disableddash \fIpattern\fR . This option specifies dash patterns for the normal, active state, and disabled state of an item. \fIpattern\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetDash\fR. If the dash options are omitted then the default is a solid outline. See \fBDASH PATTERNS\fR for more information. .TP \fB\-dashoffset \fIoffset\fR . The starting \fIoffset\fR in pixels into the pattern provided by the \fB\-dash\fR option. \fB\-dashoffset\fR is ignored if there is no \fB\-dash\fR pattern. The \fIoffset\fR may have any of the forms described in the \fBCOORDINATES\fR section above. .TP \fB\-fill \fIcolor\fR .TP \fB\-activefill \fIcolor\fR .TP \fB\-disabledfill \fIcolor\fR . Specifies the color to be used to fill item's area. in its normal, active, and disabled states. The even-odd fill rule is used. \fIColor\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. For the line item, it specifies the color of the line drawn. For the text item, it specifies the foreground color of the text. If \fIcolor\fR is an empty string (the default for all canvas items except line and text), then the item will not be filled. .TP \fB\-outline \fIcolor\fR .TP \fB\-activeoutline \fIcolor\fR .TP \fB\-disabledoutline \fIcolor\fR . This option specifies the color that should be used to draw the outline of the item in its normal, active and disabled states. \fIColor\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. If \fIcolor\fR is specified as an empty string then no outline is drawn for the item. .TP \fB\-offset \fIoffset\fR . Specifies the offset of stipples. The offset value can be of the form \fBx,y\fR or \fIside\fR, where side can be \fBn\fR, \fBne\fR, \fBe\fR, \fBse\fR, \fBs\fR, \fBsw\fR, \fBw\fR, \fBnw\fR, or \fBcenter\fR. In the first case the origin is the origin of the toplevel of the current window. For the canvas itself and canvas objects the origin is the canvas origin, but putting \fB#\fR in front of the coordinate pair indicates using the toplevel origin instead. For canvas objects, the \fB\-offset\fR option is used for stippling as well. For the line and polygon canvas items you can also specify an index as argument, which connects the stipple origin to one of the coordinate points of the line/polygon. Note that stipple offsets are \fIonly supported on X11\fR; they are silently ignored on other platforms. .TP \fB\-outlinestipple \fIbitmap\fR .TP \fB\-activeoutlinestipple \fIbitmap\fR .TP \fB\-disabledoutlinestipple \fIbitmap\fR . This option specifies stipple patterns that should be used to draw the outline of the item in its normal, active and disabled states. Indicates that the outline for the item should be drawn with a stipple pattern; \fIbitmap\fR specifies the stipple pattern to use, in any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR. If the \fB\-outline\fR option has not been specified then this option has no effect. If \fIbitmap\fR is an empty string (the default), then the outline is drawn in a solid fashion. \fINote that stipples are not well supported on platforms that do not use X11 as their drawing API.\fR .TP \fB\-outlineoffset \fIoffset\fR . Specifies the offset of the stipple pattern used for outlines, in the same way that the \fB\-outline\fR option controls fill stipples. (See the \fB\-outline\fR option for a description of the syntax of \fIoffset\fR.) .TP \fB\-stipple \fIbitmap\fR .TP \fB\-activestipple \fIbitmap\fR .TP \fB\-disabledstipple \fIbitmap\fR . This option specifies stipple patterns that should be used to fill the item in its normal, active and disabled states. \fIbitmap\fR specifies the stipple pattern to use, in any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR. If the \fB\-fill\fR option has not been specified then this option has no effect. If \fIbitmap\fR is an empty string (the default), then filling is done in a solid fashion. For the text item, it affects the actual text. \fINote that stipples are not well supported on platforms that do not use X11 as their drawing API.\fR .TP \fB\-state \fIstate\fR . This allows an item to override the canvas widget's global \fIstate\fR option. It takes the same values: \fInormal\fR, \fIdisabled\fR or \fIhidden\fR. .TP \fB\-tags \fItagList\fR . Specifies a set of tags to apply to the item. \fITagList\fR consists of a list of tag names, which replace any existing tags for the item. \fITagList\fR may be an empty list. .TP \fB\-width \fIoutlineWidth\fR .TP \fB\-activewidth \fIoutlineWidth\fR .TP \fB\-disabledwidth \fIoutlineWidth\fR . Specifies the width of the outline to be drawn around the item's region, in its normal, active and disabled states. \fIoutlineWidth\fR may be in any of the forms described in the \fBCOORDINATES\fR section above. If the \fB\-outline\fR option has been specified as an empty string then this option has no effect. This option defaults to 1.0. For arcs, wide outlines will be drawn centered on the edges of the arc's region. .SH "STANDARD ITEM TYPES" .SS "ARC ITEMS" .PP Items of type \fBarc\fR appear on the display as arc-shaped regions. An arc is a section of an oval delimited by two angles (specified by either the \fB\-start\fR and \fB\-extent\fR options or the \fB\-height\fR option) and displayed in one of several ways (specified by the \fB\-style\fR option). Arcs are created with widget commands of the following form: .CS \fIpathName \fBcreate arc \fIx1 y1 x2 y2 \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR? \fIpathName \fBcreate arc \fIcoordList\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR? .CE The arguments \fIx1\fR, \fIy1\fR, \fIx2\fR, and \fIy2\fR or \fIcoordList\fR give the coordinates of two diagonally opposite corners of a |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1469 1470 1471 1472 1473 1474 1475 | \fB\-disabledoutlinestipple\fR \fB\-stipple\fR \fB\-activestipple\fR \fB\-disabledstipple\fR \fB\-state\fR \fB\-tags\fR \fB\-width\fR \fB\-activewidth\fR \fB\-disabledwidth\fR .DE The following extra options are supported for arcs: | < < < < < < | | 1397 1398 1399 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 1422 1423 1424 1425 1426 1427 1428 1429 1430 | \fB\-disabledoutlinestipple\fR \fB\-stipple\fR \fB\-activestipple\fR \fB\-disabledstipple\fR \fB\-state\fR \fB\-tags\fR \fB\-width\fR \fB\-activewidth\fR \fB\-disabledwidth\fR .DE The following extra options are supported for arcs: .TP \fB\-extent \fIdegrees\fR Specifies the size of the angular range occupied by the arc. The arc's range extends for \fIdegrees\fR degrees counter-clockwise from the starting angle given by the \fB\-start\fR option. \fIDegrees\fR may be negative. If it is greater than 360 or less than \-360, then \fIdegrees\fR modulo 360 is used as the extent. .TP \fB\-start \fIdegrees\fR Specifies the beginning of the angular range occupied by the arc. \fIDegrees\fR is given in units of degrees measured counter-clockwise from the 3-o'clock position; it may be either positive or negative. .TP \fB\-height \fIdistance\fR Provides a shortcut for creating a circular arc segment by defining the distance of the mid-point of the arc from its chord. When this option is used the coordinates are interpreted as the start and end coordinates of the chord, and the options \fB\-start\fR and \fB-extent\fR are ignored. The value of \fIdistance\fR has the following meaning: .RS .PP .RS \fIdistance\fR > 0 creates a clockwise arc .br \fIdistance\fR < 0 creates an counter-clockwise arc |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1517 1518 1519 1520 1521 1522 1523 | .RE .PP choosing the minus sign for the minor arc and the plus sign for the major arc. .PP Note that \fBitemcget \-height\fR always returns 0 so that introspection code can be kept simple. .RE | < < | 1439 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 1445 1446 1447 1448 1449 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 | .RE .PP choosing the minus sign for the minor arc and the plus sign for the major arc. .PP Note that \fBitemcget \-height\fR always returns 0 so that introspection code can be kept simple. .RE .TP \fB\-style \fItype\fR Specifies how to draw the arc. If \fItype\fR is \fBpieslice\fR (the default) then the arc's region is defined by a section of the oval's perimeter plus two line segments, one between the center of the oval and each end of the perimeter section. If \fItype\fR is \fBchord\fR then the arc's region is defined by a section of the oval's perimeter plus a single line segment connecting the two end points of the perimeter section. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 | The following standard options are supported by bitmaps: .DS .ta 3i \fB\-anchor\fR \fB\-state\fR \fB\-tags\fR .DE The following extra options are supported for bitmaps: | < < < < < < < < | | < < < < | | 1478 1479 1480 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 1493 1494 1495 1496 1497 1498 1499 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 1520 | The following standard options are supported by bitmaps: .DS .ta 3i \fB\-anchor\fR \fB\-state\fR \fB\-tags\fR .DE The following extra options are supported for bitmaps: .TP \fB\-background \fIcolor\fR .TP \fB\-activebackground \fIcolor\fR .TP \fB\-disabledbackground \fIcolor\fR Specifies the color to use for each of the bitmap's .QW 0 valued pixels in its normal, active and disabled states. \fIColor\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. If this option is not specified, or if it is specified as an empty string, then nothing is displayed where the bitmap pixels are 0; this produces a transparent effect. .TP \fB\-bitmap \fIbitmap\fR .TP \fB\-activebitmap \fIbitmap\fR .TP \fB\-disabledbitmap \fIbitmap\fR Specifies the bitmaps to display in the item in its normal, active and disabled states. \fIBitmap\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR. .TP \fB\-foreground \fIcolor\fR .TP \fB\-activeforeground \fIcolor\fR .TP \fB\-disabledforeground \fIcolor\fR Specifies the color to use for each of the bitmap's .QW 1 valued pixels in its normal, active and disabled states. \fIColor\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. .SS "IMAGE ITEMS" .PP Items of type \fBimage\fR are used to display images on a canvas. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 | The following standard options are supported by images: .DS .ta 3i \fB\-anchor\fR \fB\-state\fR \fB\-tags\fR .DE The following extra options are supported for images: | < < < < | 1536 1537 1538 1539 1540 1541 1542 1543 1544 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 1555 | The following standard options are supported by images: .DS .ta 3i \fB\-anchor\fR \fB\-state\fR \fB\-tags\fR .DE The following extra options are supported for images: .TP \fB\-image \fIname\fR .TP \fB\-activeimage \fIname\fR .TP \fB\-disabledimage \fIname\fR Specifies the name of the images to display in the item in is normal, active and disabled states. This image must have been created previously with the \fBimage create\fR command. .SS "LINE ITEMS" .PP Items of type \fBline\fR appear on the display as one or more connected |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1677 1678 1679 1680 1681 1682 1683 | \fB\-disabledfill\fR \fB\-stipple\fR \fB\-activestipple\fR \fB\-disabledstipple\fR \fB\-state\fR \fB\-tags\fR \fB\-width\fR \fB\-activewidth\fR \fB\-disabledwidth\fR .DE The following extra options are supported for lines: | < < < < < < < < < < | < < < | 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 1592 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 1623 1624 1625 1626 1627 1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 1645 1646 1647 1648 1649 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 1655 1656 1657 1658 1659 1660 1661 1662 1663 1664 1665 | \fB\-disabledfill\fR \fB\-stipple\fR \fB\-activestipple\fR \fB\-disabledstipple\fR \fB\-state\fR \fB\-tags\fR \fB\-width\fR \fB\-activewidth\fR \fB\-disabledwidth\fR .DE The following extra options are supported for lines: .TP \fB\-arrow \fIwhere\fR Indicates whether or not arrowheads are to be drawn at one or both ends of the line. \fIWhere\fR must have one of the values \fBnone\fR (for no arrowheads), \fBfirst\fR (for an arrowhead at the first point of the line), \fBlast\fR (for an arrowhead at the last point of the line), or \fBboth\fR (for arrowheads at both ends). This option defaults to \fBnone\fR. When requested to draw an arrowhead, Tk internally adjusts the corresponding line end point so that the rendered line ends at the neck of the arrowhead rather than at its tip so that the line doesn't extend past the edge of the arrowhead. This may trigger a \fBLeave\fR event if the mouse is hovering this line end. Conversely, when removing an arrowhead Tk adjusts the corresponding line point the other way round, which may trigger an \fBEnter\fR event. .TP \fB\-arrowshape \fIshape\fR This option indicates how to draw arrowheads. The \fIshape\fR argument must be a list with three elements, each specifying a distance in any of the forms described in the \fBCOORDINATES\fR section above. The first element of the list gives the distance along the line from the neck of the arrowhead to its tip. The second element gives the distance along the line from the trailing points of the arrowhead to the tip, and the third element gives the distance from the outside edge of the line to the trailing points. If this option is not specified then Tk picks a .QW reasonable shape. .TP \fB\-capstyle \fIstyle\fR Specifies the ways in which caps are to be drawn at the endpoints of the line. \fIStyle\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetCapStyle\fR (\fBbutt\fR, \fBprojecting\fR, or \fBround\fR). If this option is not specified then it defaults to \fBbutt\fR. Where arrowheads are drawn the cap style is ignored. .TP \fB\-joinstyle \fIstyle\fR Specifies the ways in which joints are to be drawn at the vertices of the line. \fIStyle\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetJoinStyle\fR (\fBbevel\fR, \fBmiter\fR, or \fBround\fR). If this option is not specified then it defaults to \fBround\fR. If the line only contains two points then this option is irrelevant. .TP \fB\-smooth \fIsmoothMethod\fR \fIsmoothMethod\fR must have one of the forms accepted by \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR or a line smoothing method. Only \fBtrue\fR and \fBraw\fR are supported in the core (with \fBbezier\fR being an alias for \fBtrue\fR), but more can be added at runtime. If a boolean false value or empty string is given, no smoothing is applied. A boolean truth value assumes \fBtrue\fR smoothing. If the smoothing method is \fBtrue\fR, this indicates that the line should be drawn as a curve, rendered as a set of quadratic splines: one spline is drawn for the first and second line segments, one for the second and third, and so on. Straight-line segments can be generated within a curve by duplicating the end-points of the desired line segment. If the smoothing method is \fBraw\fR, this indicates that the line should also be drawn as a curve but where the list of coordinates is such that the first coordinate pair (and every third coordinate pair thereafter) is a knot point on a cubic Bezier curve, and the other coordinates are control points on the cubic Bezier curve. Straight line segments can be generated within a curve by making control points equal to their neighbouring knot points. If the last point is a control point and not a knot point, the point is repeated (one or two times) so that it also becomes a knot point. .TP \fB\-splinesteps \fInumber\fR Specifies the degree of smoothness desired for curves: each spline will be approximated with \fInumber\fR line segments. This option is ignored unless the \fB\-smooth\fR option is true or \fBraw\fR. .SS "OVAL ITEMS" .PP Items of type \fBoval\fR appear as circular or oval regions on the display. Each oval may have an outline, a fill, or |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1817 1818 1819 1820 1821 1822 1823 | Polygon items support coordinate indexing operations using the \fBdchars\fR, \fBindex\fR and \fBinsert\fR widget commands. Polygons are created with widget commands of the following form: .CS \fIpathName \fBcreate polygon \fIx1 y1 ... xn yn \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR? \fIpathName \fBcreate polygon \fIcoordList\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR? .CE | | | | 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 | Polygon items support coordinate indexing operations using the \fBdchars\fR, \fBindex\fR and \fBinsert\fR widget commands. Polygons are created with widget commands of the following form: .CS \fIpathName \fBcreate polygon \fIx1 y1 ... xn yn \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR? \fIpathName \fBcreate polygon \fIcoordList\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR? .CE The arguments \fIx1\fR through \fIyn\fR or \fIcoordList\fR specify the coordinates for three or more points that define a polygon. The first point should not be repeated as the last to close the shape; Tk will automatically close the periphery between the first and last points. After the coordinates there may be any number of \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options for the item. These same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be used in \fBitemconfigure\fR widget commands to change the item's |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1847 1848 1849 1850 1851 1852 1853 | \fB\-disabledoutlinestipple\fR \fB\-stipple\fR \fB\-activestipple\fR \fB\-disabledstipple\fR \fB\-state\fR \fB\-tags\fR \fB\-width\fR \fB\-activewidth\fR \fB\-disabledwidth\fR .DE The following extra options are supported for polygons: | < < < < | < < < | 1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765 1766 1767 1768 1769 1770 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 | \fB\-disabledoutlinestipple\fR \fB\-stipple\fR \fB\-activestipple\fR \fB\-disabledstipple\fR \fB\-state\fR \fB\-tags\fR \fB\-width\fR \fB\-activewidth\fR \fB\-disabledwidth\fR .DE The following extra options are supported for polygons: .TP \fB\-joinstyle \fIstyle\fR Specifies the ways in which joints are to be drawn at the vertices of the outline. \fIStyle\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetJoinStyle\fR (\fBbevel\fR, \fBmiter\fR, or \fBround\fR). If this option is not specified then it defaults to \fBround\fR. .TP \fB\-smooth \fIboolean\fR \fIBoolean\fR must have one of the forms accepted by \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR or a line smoothing method. Only \fBtrue\fR and \fBraw\fR are supported in the core (with \fBbezier\fR being an alias for \fBtrue\fR), but more can be added at runtime. If a boolean false value or empty string is given, no smoothing is applied. A boolean truth value assumes \fBtrue\fR smoothing. If the smoothing method is \fBtrue\fR, this indicates that the polygon should be drawn as a curve, rendered as a set of quadratic splines: one spline is drawn for the first and second line segments, one for the second and third, and so on. Straight-line segments can be generated within a curve by duplicating the end-points of the desired line segment. If the smoothing method is \fBraw\fR, this indicates that the polygon should also be drawn as a curve but where the list of coordinates is such that the first coordinate pair (and every third coordinate pair thereafter) is a knot point on a cubic Bezier curve, and the other coordinates are control points on the cubic Bezier curve. Straight line segments can be generated within a curve by making control points equal to their neighbouring knot points. If the last point is not the second point of a pair of control points, the point is repeated (one or two times) so that it also becomes the second point of a pair of control points (the associated knot point will be the first control point). .TP \fB\-splinesteps \fInumber\fR Specifies the degree of smoothness desired for curves: each spline will be approximated with \fInumber\fR line segments. This option is ignored unless the \fB\-smooth\fR option is true or \fBraw\fR. .PP Polygon items are different from other items such as rectangles, ovals and arcs in that interior points are considered to be .QW inside |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1975 1976 1977 1978 1979 1980 1981 | \fB\-anchor\fR \fB\-fill\fR \fB\-activefill\fR \fB\-disabledfill\fR \fB\-stipple\fR \fB\-activestipple\fR \fB\-disabledstipple\fR \fB\-state\fR \fB\-tags\fR .DE The following extra options are supported for text items: | < < < < < < < < | < < < | 1859 1860 1861 1862 1863 1864 1865 1866 1867 1868 1869 1870 1871 1872 1873 1874 1875 1876 1877 1878 1879 1880 1881 1882 1883 1884 1885 1886 1887 1888 1889 1890 1891 1892 1893 1894 1895 1896 1897 1898 1899 1900 1901 1902 1903 1904 1905 1906 1907 1908 1909 1910 | \fB\-anchor\fR \fB\-fill\fR \fB\-activefill\fR \fB\-disabledfill\fR \fB\-stipple\fR \fB\-activestipple\fR \fB\-disabledstipple\fR \fB\-state\fR \fB\-tags\fR .DE The following extra options are supported for text items: .TP \fB\-angle \fIrotationDegrees\fR . \fIRotationDegrees\fR tells how many degrees to rotate the text anticlockwise about the positioning point for the text; it may have any floating-point value from 0.0 to 360.0. For example, if \fIrotationDegrees\fR is \fB90\fR, then the text will be drawn vertically from bottom to top. This option defaults to \fB0.0\fR. .TP \fB\-font \fIfontName\fR Specifies the font to use for the text item. \fIFontName\fR may be any string acceptable to \fBTk_GetFont\fR. If this option is not specified, it defaults to a system-dependent font. .TP \fB\-justify \fIhow\fR Specifies how to justify the text within its bounding region. \fIHow\fR must be one of the values \fBleft\fR, \fBright\fR, or \fBcenter\fR. This option will only matter if the text is displayed as multiple lines. If the option is omitted, it defaults to \fBleft\fR. .TP \fB\-text \fIstring\fR \fIString\fR specifies the characters to be displayed in the text item. Newline characters cause line breaks. The characters in the item may also be changed with the \fBinsert\fR and \fBdelete\fR widget commands. This option defaults to an empty string. .TP \fB\-underline \fI\fR Specifies the integer index of a character within the text to be underlined. 0 corresponds to the first character of the text displayed, 1 to the next character, and so on. \-1 means that no underline should be drawn (if the whole text item is to be underlined, the appropriate font should be used instead). .TP \fB\-width \fIlineLength\fR Specifies a maximum line length for the text, in any of the forms described in the \fBCOORDINATES\fR section above. If this option is zero (the default) the text is broken into lines only at newline characters. However, if this option is non-zero then any line that would be longer than \fIlineLength\fR is broken just before a space character to make the line shorter than \fIlineLength\fR; the |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2062 2063 2064 2065 2066 2067 2068 | The following standard options are supported by window items: .DS .ta 3i \fB\-anchor\fR \fB\-state\fR \fB\-tags\fR .DE The following extra options are supported for window items: | < < < | | 1935 1936 1937 1938 1939 1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 1946 1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 1968 1969 1970 1971 1972 1973 | The following standard options are supported by window items: .DS .ta 3i \fB\-anchor\fR \fB\-state\fR \fB\-tags\fR .DE The following extra options are supported for window items: .TP \fB\-height \fIpixels\fR . Specifies the height to assign to the item's window. \fIPixels\fR may have any of the forms described in the \fBCOORDINATES\fR section above. If this option is not specified, or if it is specified as zero, then the window is given whatever height it requests internally. .TP \fB\-width \fIpixels\fR . Specifies the width to assign to the item's window. \fIPixels\fR may have any of the forms described in the \fBCOORDINATES\fR section above. If this option is not specified, or if it is specified as zero, then the window is given whatever width it requests internally. .TP \fB\-window \fIpathName\fR . Specifies the window to associate with this item. The window specified by \fIpathName\fR must either be a child of the canvas widget or a child of some ancestor of the canvas widget. \fIPathName\fR may not refer to a top-level window. .PP Note: due to restrictions in the ways that windows are managed, it is not possible to draw other graphical items (such as lines and images) on top of window items. A window item always obscures any graphics that overlap it, regardless of their order in the display list. Also note that window items, unlike other canvas items, are not clipped for display by their containing canvas's border, and are instead clipped by the parent widget of the window specified by the \fB\-window\fR option; when the parent widget is the canvas, this means that the window item can overlap the canvas's border. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/checkbutton.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
193 194 195 196 197 198 199 | operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for checkbutton widgets: | < | < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 | operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for checkbutton widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR Returns the current value of the configuration option given by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBcheckbutton\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBcheckbutton\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBdeselect\fR Deselects the checkbutton and sets the associated variable to its .QW off value. .TP \fIpathName \fBflash\fR Flashes the checkbutton. This is accomplished by redisplaying the checkbutton several times, alternating between active and normal colors. At the end of the flash the checkbutton is left in the same normal/active state as when the command was invoked. This command is ignored if the checkbutton's state is \fBdisabled\fR. .TP \fIpathName \fBinvoke\fR Does just what would have happened if the user invoked the checkbutton with the mouse: toggle the selection state of the button and invoke the Tcl command associated with the checkbutton, if there is one. The return value is the return value from the Tcl command, or an empty string if there is no command associated with the checkbutton. This command is ignored if the checkbutton's state is \fBdisabled\fR. .TP \fIpathName \fBselect\fR Selects the checkbutton and sets the associated variable to its .QW on value. .TP \fIpathName \fBtoggle\fR Toggles the selection state of the button, redisplaying it and modifying its associated variable to reflect the new state. .SH BINDINGS .PP Tk automatically creates class bindings for checkbuttons that give them the following default behavior: .IP [1] |
︙ | ︙ | |||
287 288 289 290 291 292 293 | The behavior of checkbuttons can be changed by defining new bindings for individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings. .SH EXAMPLE .PP This example shows a group of uncoupled checkbuttons. .PP .CS | | | | | | | 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 | The behavior of checkbuttons can be changed by defining new bindings for individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings. .SH EXAMPLE .PP This example shows a group of uncoupled checkbuttons. .PP .CS labelframe .lbl \-text "Steps:" \fBcheckbutton\fR .c1 \-text Lights \-variable lights \fBcheckbutton\fR .c2 \-text Cameras \-variable cameras \fBcheckbutton\fR .c3 \-text Action! \-variable action pack .c1 .c2 .c3 \-in .lbl pack .lbl .CE .SH "SEE ALSO" button(n), options(n), radiobutton(n), ttk::checkbutton(n) .SH KEYWORDS checkbutton, widget '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/chooseColor.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 | \fBtk_chooseColor \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The procedure \fBtk_chooseColor\fR pops up a dialog box for the user to select a color. The following \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are possible as command line arguments: | < | < < | < < | < | | 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 | \fBtk_chooseColor \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The procedure \fBtk_chooseColor\fR pops up a dialog box for the user to select a color. The following \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are possible as command line arguments: .TP \fB\-initialcolor\fR \fIcolor\fR Specifies the color to display in the color dialog when it pops up. \fIcolor\fR must be in a form acceptable to the \fBTk_GetColor\fR function. .TP \fB\-parent\fR \fIwindow\fR Makes \fIwindow\fR the logical parent of the color dialog. The color dialog is displayed on top of its parent window. .TP \fB\-title\fR \fItitleString\fR Specifies a string to display as the title of the dialog box. If this option is not specified, then a default title will be displayed. .LP If the user selects a color, \fBtk_chooseColor\fR will return the name of the color in a form acceptable to \fBTk_GetColor\fR. If the user cancels the operation, both commands will return the empty string. .SH EXAMPLE .PP .CS button .b \-bg [tk_chooseColor \-initialcolor gray \-title "Choose color"] .CE .SH KEYWORDS color, color selection, dialog '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/clipboard.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 | be called, followed by a sequence of one or more calls to \fBclipboard append\fR. To ensure that the clipboard is updated atomically, all appends should be completed before returning to the event loop. .PP The first argument to \fBclipboard\fR determines the format of the rest of the arguments and the behavior of the command. The following forms are currently supported: | < | | 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 | be called, followed by a sequence of one or more calls to \fBclipboard append\fR. To ensure that the clipboard is updated atomically, all appends should be completed before returning to the event loop. .PP The first argument to \fBclipboard\fR determines the format of the rest of the arguments and the behavior of the command. The following forms are currently supported: .TP \fBclipboard append\fR ?\fB\-displayof\fR \fIwindow\fR? ?\fB\-format\fR \fIformat\fR? ?\fB\-type\fR \fItype\fR? ?\fB\-\|\-\fR? \fIdata\fR . Appends \fIdata\fR to the clipboard on \fIwindow\fR's display in the form given by \fItype\fR with the representation given by \fIformat\fR and claims ownership of the clipboard on \fIwindow\fR's display. .RS .PP |
︙ | ︙ | |||
68 69 70 71 72 73 74 | irrelevant. .PP A \fB\-\|\-\fR argument may be specified to mark the end of options: the next argument will always be used as \fIdata\fR. This feature may be convenient if, for example, \fIdata\fR starts with a \fB\-\fR. .RE | < | < | | 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 | irrelevant. .PP A \fB\-\|\-\fR argument may be specified to mark the end of options: the next argument will always be used as \fIdata\fR. This feature may be convenient if, for example, \fIdata\fR starts with a \fB\-\fR. .RE .TP \fBclipboard clear\fR ?\fB\-displayof\fR \fIwindow\fR? . Claims ownership of the clipboard on \fIwindow\fR's display and removes any previous contents. \fIWindow\fR defaults to .QW . . Returns an empty string. .TP \fBclipboard get\fR ?\fB\-displayof\fR \fIwindow\fR? ?\fB\-type\fR \fItype\fR? . Retrieve data from the clipboard on \fIwindow\fR's display. \fIWindow\fR defaults to .QW . . \fIType\fR specifies the form in which the data is to be returned and should be an atom name such as \fBSTRING\fR or \fBFILE_NAME\fR. \fIType\fR defaults to \fBSTRING\fR. This command is |
︙ | ︙ | |||
121 122 123 124 125 126 127 | # it produces a script that recreates the item(s) when executed proc getItemConfig {canvas tag} { set script {} foreach item [$canvas find withtag $tag] { append script {$canvas create } [$canvas type $item] append script { } [$canvas coords $item] { } foreach config [$canvas itemconf $item] { | | | | | | 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 | # it produces a script that recreates the item(s) when executed proc getItemConfig {canvas tag} { set script {} foreach item [$canvas find withtag $tag] { append script {$canvas create } [$canvas type $item] append script { } [$canvas coords $item] { } foreach config [$canvas itemconf $item] { lassign $config name \- \- \- value append script [list $name $value] { } } append script \en } return [string trim $script] } # Set up a binding on a canvas to cut and paste an item set c [canvas .c] pack $c $c create text 150 30 \-text "cut and paste me" bind $c <<Cut>> { \fBclipboard clear\fR \fBclipboard append \-type\fR TkCanvasItem \e [getItemConfig %W current] # Delete because this is cut, not copy. %W delete current } bind $c <<Paste>> { catch { set canvas %W eval [\fBclipboard get \-type\fR TkCanvasItem] } } .CE .SH "SEE ALSO" interp(n), selection(n) .SH KEYWORDS clear, format, clipboard, append, selection, type '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/console.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 2001 Donal K. Fellows '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH console n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME console \- Control the console on systems without a real console .SH SYNOPSIS | | | | < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 2001 Donal K. Fellows '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH console n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME console \- Control the console on systems without a real console .SH SYNOPSIS \fBconsole\fR \fIsubcommand\fR ?\fIarg ...\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The console window is a replacement for a real console to allow input and output on the standard I/O channels on platforms that do not have a real console. It is implemented as a separate interpreter with the Tk toolkit loaded, and control over this interpreter is given through the \fBconsole\fR command. The behaviour of the console window is defined mainly through the contents of the \fIconsole.tcl\fR file in the Tk library. Except for TkAqua, this command is not available when Tk is loaded into a tclsh interpreter with .QW "\fBpackage require tk\fR" , as a conventional terminal is expected to be present in that case. In TkAqua, this command is disabled when there is a startup script and stdin is \fB/dev/null\fR (as is the case e.g. when a bundled application embedding Tk is started by the macOS Launcher). To enable the command in that case, define the environment variable \fBTK_CONSOLE\fR. This can be done by modifying the Info.plist file by adding the LSEnvironment key to the main dict and setting its value to be a dict with the key \fBTK_CONSOLE\fR. .PP .TP \fBconsole eval \fIscript\fR Evaluate the \fIscript\fR argument as a Tcl script in the console interpreter. The normal interpreter is accessed through the \fBconsoleinterp\fR command in the console interpreter. .TP \fBconsole hide\fR Hide the console window from view. Precisely equivalent to withdrawing the \fB.\fR window in the console interpreter. .TP \fBconsole show\fR Display the console window. Precisely equivalent to deiconifying the \fB.\fR window in the console interpreter. .TP \fBconsole title \fR?\fIstring\fR? Query or modify the title of the console window. If \fIstring\fR is not specified, queries the title of the console window, and sets the title of the console window to \fIstring\fR otherwise. Precisely equivalent to using the \fBwm title\fR command in the console interpreter. .SH "ACCESS TO THE MAIN INTERPRETER" .PP The \fBconsoleinterp\fR command in the console interpreter allows scripts to be evaluated in the main interpreter. It supports two subcommands: \fBeval\fR and \fBrecord\fR. .PP .TP \fBconsoleinterp eval \fIscript\fR Evaluates \fIscript\fR as a Tcl script at the global level in the main interpreter. .TP \fBconsoleinterp record \fIscript\fR Records and evaluates \fIscript\fR as a Tcl script at the global level in the main interpreter as if \fIscript\fR had been typed in at the console. .SH "ADDITIONAL TRAP CALLS" .PP There are several additional commands in the console interpreter that are called in response to activity in the main interpreter. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/dialog.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 | \fBtk_dialog \fIwindow title text bitmap default string string ...\fR .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP This procedure is part of the Tk script library. It is largely \fIdeprecated\fR by the \fBtk_messageBox\fR. Its arguments describe a dialog box: | > | > | > | > | > | > | | 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 | \fBtk_dialog \fIwindow title text bitmap default string string ...\fR .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP This procedure is part of the Tk script library. It is largely \fIdeprecated\fR by the \fBtk_messageBox\fR. Its arguments describe a dialog box: .TP \fIwindow\fR Name of top-level window to use for dialog. Any existing window by this name is destroyed. .TP \fItitle\fR Text to appear in the window manager's title bar for the dialog. .TP \fItext\fR Message to appear in the top portion of the dialog box. .TP \fIbitmap\fR If non-empty, specifies a bitmap (in a form suitable for Tk_GetBitmap) to display in the top portion of the dialog, to the left of the text. If this is an empty string then no bitmap is displayed in the dialog. .TP \fIdefault\fR If this is an integer greater than or equal to zero, then it gives the index of the button that is to be the default button for the dialog (0 for the leftmost button, and so on). If negative or an empty string then there will not be any default button. .TP \fIstring\fR There will be one button for each of these arguments. Each \fIstring\fR specifies text to display in a button, in order from left to right. .PP After creating a dialog box, \fBtk_dialog\fR waits for the user to select one of the buttons either by clicking on the button with the mouse or by typing return to invoke the default button (if any). |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/entry.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 | .TH entry n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME entry \- Create and manipulate 'entry' one-line text entry widgets .SH SYNOPSIS | | | 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 | .TH entry n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME entry \- Create and manipulate 'entry' one-line text entry widgets .SH SYNOPSIS \fBentry\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .SO \-background \-highlightthickness \-selectbackground \-borderwidth \-insertbackground \-selectborderwidth \-cursor \-insertborderwidth \-selectforeground \-exportselection \-insertofftime \-takefocus \-font \-insertontime \-textvariable \-foreground \-insertwidth \-xscrollcommand |
︙ | ︙ | |||
172 173 174 175 176 177 178 | \fB\-invalidcommand\fR encounters an error in its script while evaluating or \fB\-validatecommand\fR does not return a valid Tcl boolean value. The \fB\-validate\fR option will also set itself to \fBnone\fR when you edit the entry widget from within either the \fB\-validatecommand\fR or the \fB\-invalidcommand\fR. Such editions will override the one that was being validated. If you wish to edit the entry widget (for example set it to {}) during validation and still have the \fB\-validate\fR option set, you should | | | | 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 | \fB\-invalidcommand\fR encounters an error in its script while evaluating or \fB\-validatecommand\fR does not return a valid Tcl boolean value. The \fB\-validate\fR option will also set itself to \fBnone\fR when you edit the entry widget from within either the \fB\-validatecommand\fR or the \fB\-invalidcommand\fR. Such editions will override the one that was being validated. If you wish to edit the entry widget (for example set it to {}) during validation and still have the \fB\-validate\fR option set, you should include the command .CS after idle {%W config \-validate %v} .CE in the \fB\-validatecommand\fR or \fB\-invalidcommand\fR (whichever one you were editing the entry widget from). It is also recommended to not set an associated \fB\-textvariable\fR during validation, as that can cause the entry widget to become out of sync with the \fB\-textvariable\fR. .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP |
︙ | ︙ | |||
197 198 199 200 201 202 203 | .SS INDICES .PP Many of the widget commands for entries take one or more indices as arguments. An index specifies a particular character in the entry's string, in any of the following ways: .TP 12 \fInumber\fR | < < < < < < < < < < | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | < < < < < < < < < | < < < < < < < | < < < | 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 | .SS INDICES .PP Many of the widget commands for entries take one or more indices as arguments. An index specifies a particular character in the entry's string, in any of the following ways: .TP 12 \fInumber\fR Specifies the character as a numerical index, where 0 corresponds to the first character in the string. .TP 12 \fBanchor\fR Indicates the anchor point for the selection, which is set with the \fBselect from\fR and \fBselect adjust\fR widget commands. .TP 12 \fBend\fR Indicates the character just after the last one in the entry's string. This is equivalent to specifying a numerical index equal to the length of the entry's string. .TP 12 \fBinsert\fR Indicates the character adjacent to and immediately following the insertion cursor. .TP 12 \fBsel.first\fR Indicates the first character in the selection. It is an error to use this form if the selection is not in the entry window. .TP 12 \fBsel.last\fR Indicates the character just after the last one in the selection. It is an error to use this form if the selection is not in the entry window. .TP 12 \fB@\fInumber\fR In this form, \fInumber\fR is treated as an x-coordinate in the entry's window; the character spanning that x-coordinate is used. For example, .QW \fB@0\fR indicates the left-most character in the window. .LP Abbreviations may be used for any of the forms above, e.g. .QW \fBe\fR or .QW \fBsel.f\fR . In general, out-of-range indices are automatically rounded to the nearest legal value. Indexes support the same simple interpretation as for the command \fBstring index\fR, with simple integer index arithmetic and indexing relative to \fBend\fR. .SS SUBCOMMANDS .PP The following commands are possible for entry widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBbbox \fIindex\fR Returns a list of four numbers describing the bounding box of the character given by \fIindex\fR. The first two elements of the list give the x and y coordinates of the upper-left corner of the screen area covered by the character (in pixels relative to the widget) and the last two elements give the width and height of the character, in pixels. The bounding box may refer to a region outside the visible area of the window. .TP \fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR Returns the current value of the configuration option given by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBentry\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBentry\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBdelete \fIfirst \fR?\fIlast\fR? Delete one or more elements of the entry. \fIFirst\fR is the index of the first character to delete, and \fIlast\fR is the index of the character just after the last one to delete. If \fIlast\fR is not specified it defaults to \fIfirst\fR+1, i.e. a single character is deleted. This command returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBget\fR Returns the entry's string. .TP \fIpathName \fBicursor \fIindex\fR Arrange for the insertion cursor to be displayed just before the character given by \fIindex\fR. Returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBindex\fI index\fR Returns the numerical index corresponding to \fIindex\fR. .TP \fIpathName \fBinsert \fIindex string\fR Insert the characters of \fIstring\fR just before the character indicated by \fIindex\fR. Returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBscan\fR \fIoption args\fR This command is used to implement scanning on entries. It has two forms, depending on \fIoption\fR: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBscan mark \fIx\fR Records \fIx\fR and the current view in the entry window; used in conjunction with later \fBscan dragto\fR commands. Typically this command is associated with a mouse button press in the widget. It returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBscan dragto \fIx\fR This command computes the difference between its \fIx\fR argument and the \fIx\fR argument to the last \fBscan mark\fR command for the widget. It then adjusts the view left or right by 10 times the difference in x-coordinates. This command is typically associated with mouse motion events in the widget, to produce the effect of dragging the entry at high speed through the window. The return value is an empty string. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBselection \fIoption arg\fR This command is used to adjust the selection within an entry. It has several forms, depending on \fIoption\fR: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBselection adjust \fIindex\fR Locate the end of the selection nearest to the character given by \fIindex\fR, and adjust that end of the selection to be at \fIindex\fR (i.e. including but not going beyond \fIindex\fR). The other end of the selection is made the anchor point for future \fBselect to\fR commands. If the selection is not currently in the entry, then a new selection is created to include the characters between \fIindex\fR and the most recent selection anchor point, inclusive. Returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBselection clear\fR Clear the selection if it is currently in this widget. If the selection is not in this widget then the command has no effect. Returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBselection from \fIindex\fR Set the selection anchor point to just before the character given by \fIindex\fR. Does not change the selection. Returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBselection present\fR Returns 1 if there is are characters selected in the entry, 0 if nothing is selected. .TP \fIpathName \fBselection range \fIstart\fR \fIend\fR Sets the selection to include the characters starting with the one indexed by \fIstart\fR and ending with the one just before \fIend\fR. If \fIend\fR refers to the same character as \fIstart\fR or an earlier one, then the entry's selection is cleared. .TP \fIpathName \fBselection to \fIindex\fR If \fIindex\fR is before the anchor point, set the selection to the characters from \fIindex\fR up to but not including the anchor point. If \fIindex\fR is the same as the anchor point, do nothing. If \fIindex\fR is after the anchor point, set the selection to the characters from the anchor point up to but not including \fIindex\fR. The anchor point is determined by the most recent \fBselect from\fR or \fBselect adjust\fR command in this widget. If the selection is not in this widget then a new selection is created using the most recent anchor point specified for the widget. Returns an empty string. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBvalidate\fR This command is used to force an evaluation of the \fB\-validatecommand\fR independent of the conditions specified by the \fB\-validate\fR option. This is done by temporarily setting the \fB\-validate\fR option to \fBall\fR. It returns 0 or 1. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview \fIargs\fR This command is used to query and change the horizontal position of the text in the widget's window. It can take any of the following forms: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBxview\fR Returns a list containing two elements. Each element is a real fraction between 0 and 1; together they describe the horizontal span that is visible in the window. For example, if the first element is .2 and the second element is .6, 20% of the entry's text is off-screen to the left, the middle 40% is visible in the window, and 40% of the text is off-screen to the right. These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR option. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview\fR \fIindex\fR Adjusts the view in the window so that the character given by \fIindex\fR is displayed at the left edge of the window. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview moveto\fI fraction\fR Adjusts the view in the window so that the character \fIfraction\fR of the way through the text appears at the left edge of the window. \fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fINumber\fR must be an integer or a float, but if it is a float then it is converted to an integer, rounded away from 0. \fIWhat\fR must be either \fBpages\fR or \fBunits\fR or an abbreviation of one of these. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/event.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBevent\fR command provides several facilities for dealing with window system events, such as defining virtual events and synthesizing events. The command has several different forms, determined by the first argument. The following forms are currently supported: | < < < | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 | .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBevent\fR command provides several facilities for dealing with window system events, such as defining virtual events and synthesizing events. The command has several different forms, determined by the first argument. The following forms are currently supported: .TP \fBevent add <<\fIvirtual\fB>>\fI sequence \fR?\fIsequence ...\fR? Associates the virtual event \fIvirtual\fR with the physical event sequence(s) given by the \fIsequence\fR arguments, so that the virtual event will trigger whenever any one of the \fIsequence\fRs occurs. \fIVirtual\fR may be any string value and \fIsequence\fR may have any of the values allowed for the \fIsequence\fR argument to the \fBbind\fR command. If \fIvirtual\fR is already defined, the new physical event sequences add to the existing sequences for the event. .TP \fBevent delete <<\fIvirtual\fB>> \fR?\fIsequence\fR \fIsequence ...\fR? Deletes each of the \fIsequence\fRs from those associated with the virtual event given by \fIvirtual\fR. \fIVirtual\fR may be any string value and \fIsequence\fR may have any of the values allowed for the \fIsequence\fR argument to the \fBbind\fR command. Any \fIsequence\fRs not currently associated with \fIvirtual\fR are ignored. If no \fIsequence\fR argument is provided, all physical event sequences are removed for \fIvirtual\fR, so that the virtual event will not trigger anymore. .TP \fBevent generate \fIwindow event \fR?\fIoption value option value ...\fR? Generates a window event and arranges for it to be processed just as if it had come from the window system. \fIWindow\fR gives the path name of the window for which the event will be generated; it may also be an identifier (such as returned by \fBwinfo id\fR) as long as it is for a window in the current application. \fIEvent\fR provides a basic description of the event, such as \fB<Shift-Button-2>\fR or \fB<<Paste>>\fR. If \fIWindow\fR is empty the whole screen is meant, and coordinates are relative to the screen. \fIEvent\fR may have any of the forms allowed for the \fIsequence\fR argument of the \fBbind\fR command except that it must consist of a single event pattern, not a sequence. \fIOption-value\fR pairs may be used to specify additional attributes of the event, such as the x and y mouse position; see \fBEVENT FIELDS\fR below. If the \fB\-when\fR option is not specified, the event is processed immediately: all of the handlers for the event will complete before the \fBevent generate\fR command returns. If the \fB\-when\fR option is specified then it determines when the event is processed. Certain events, such as key events, require that the window has focus to receive the event properly. .TP \fBevent info \fR?\fB<<\fIvirtual\fB>>\fR? Returns information about virtual events. If the \fB<<\fIvirtual\fB>>\fR argument is omitted, the return value is a list of all the virtual events that are currently defined. If \fB<<\fIvirtual\fB>>\fR is specified then the return value is a list whose elements are the physical event sequences currently defined for the given virtual event; if the virtual event is not defined then an empty string is returned. .RS .PP Note that virtual events that are not bound to physical event sequences are \fInot\fR returned by \fBevent info\fR. .RE .SH "EVENT FIELDS" .PP The following options are supported for the \fBevent generate\fR command. These correspond to the .QW % expansions allowed in binding scripts for the \fBbind\fR command. .TP \fB\-above\fI window\fR \fIWindow\fR specifies the \fIabove\fR field for the event, either as a window path name or as an integer window id. Valid for \fBConfigure\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%a\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-borderwidth\fI size\fR \fISize\fR must be a screen distance; it specifies the \fIborder_width\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBConfigure\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%B\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-button\fI number\fR \fINumber\fR must be an integer; it specifies the \fIdetail\fR field for a \fBButton\fR or \fBButtonRelease\fR event, overriding any button number provided in the base \fIevent\fR argument. Corresponds to the \fB%b\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-count\fI number\fR \fINumber\fR must be an integer; it specifies the \fIcount\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBExpose\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%c\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-data\fI string\fR \fIString\fR may be any value; it specifies the \fIuser_data\fR field for the event. Only valid for virtual events. Corresponds to the \fB%d\fR substitution for virtual events in binding scripts. .TP \fB\-delta\fI number\fR \fINumber\fR must be an integer; it specifies the \fIdelta\fR field for the \fBMouseWheel\fR event. The \fIdelta\fR refers to the direction and magnitude the mouse wheel was rotated. Note the value is not a screen distance but are units of motion in the mouse wheel. Typically these values are multiples of 120. For example, 120 should scroll the text widget up 4 lines and \-240 would scroll the text widget down 8 lines. Of course, other widgets may define different behaviors for mouse wheel motion. This field corresponds to the \fB%D\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-detail\fI detail\fR \fIDetail\fR specifies the \fIdetail\fR field for the event and must be one of the following: .RS .DS .ta 6c \fBNotifyAncestor\fR \fBNotifyNonlinearVirtual\fR \fBNotifyDetailNone\fR \fBNotifyPointer\fR \fBNotifyInferior\fR \fBNotifyPointerRoot\fR \fBNotifyNonlinear\fR \fBNotifyVirtual\fR .DE Valid for \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, \fBFocusIn\fR and \fBFocusOut\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%d\fR substitution for binding scripts. .RE .TP \fB\-focus\fI boolean\fR \fIBoolean\fR must be a boolean value; it specifies the \fIfocus\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBEnter\fR and \fBLeave\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%f\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-height\fI size\fR \fISize\fR must be a screen distance; it specifies the \fIheight\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBConfigure\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%h\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-keycode\fI number\fR \fINumber\fR must be an integer; it specifies the \fIkeycode\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBKey\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%k\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-keysym\fI name\fR \fIName\fR must be the name of a valid keysym, such as \fBg\fR, \fBspace\fR, or \fBReturn\fR; its corresponding keycode value is used as the \fIkeycode\fR field for event, overriding any detail specified in the base \fIevent\fR argument. Valid for \fBKey\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%K\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-mode\fI notify\fR \fINotify\fR specifies the \fImode\fR field for the event and must be one of \fBNotifyNormal\fR, \fBNotifyGrab\fR, \fBNotifyUngrab\fR, or \fBNotifyWhileGrabbed\fR. Valid for \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, \fBFocusIn\fR, and \fBFocusOut\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%m\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-override\fI boolean\fR \fIBoolean\fR must be a boolean value; it specifies the \fIoverride_redirect\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBMap\fR, \fBReparent\fR, and \fBConfigure\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%o\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-place\fI where\fR \fIWhere\fR specifies the \fIplace\fR field for the event; it must be either \fBPlaceOnTop\fR or \fBPlaceOnBottom\fR. Valid for \fBCirculate\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%p\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-root\fI window\fR \fIWindow\fR must be either a window path name or an integer window identifier; it specifies the \fIroot\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBKey\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButton\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%R\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-rootx\fI coord\fR \fICoord\fR must be a screen distance; it specifies the \fIx_root\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBKey\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButton\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%X\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-rooty\fI coord\fR \fICoord\fR must be a screen distance; it specifies the \fIy_root\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBKey\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButton\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%Y\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-sendevent\fI boolean\fR \fIBoolean\fR must be a boolean value; it specifies the \fIsend_event\fR field for the event. Valid for all events. Corresponds to the \fB%E\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-serial\fI number\fR \fINumber\fR must be an integer; it specifies the \fIserial\fR field for the event. Valid for all events. Corresponds to the \fB%#\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-state\fI state\fR \fIState\fR specifies the \fIstate\fR field for the event. For \fBKey\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButtons\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events it must be an integer value. For \fBVisibility\fR events it must be one of \fBVisibilityUnobscured\fR, \fBVisibilityPartiallyObscured\fR, or \fBVisibilityFullyObscured\fR. This option overrides any modifiers such as \fBMeta\fR or \fBControl\fR specified in the base \fIevent\fR. Corresponds to the \fB%s\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-subwindow\fI window\fR \fIWindow\fR specifies the \fIsubwindow\fR field for the event, either as a path name for a Tk widget or as an integer window identifier. Valid for \fBKey\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButton\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events. Similar to \fB%S\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-time\fI integer\fR \fIInteger\fR must be an integer value; it specifies the \fItime\fR field for the event. Additonally the special value \fBcurrent\fR is allowed, this value will be substituted by the current event time. Valid for \fBKey\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButton\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, \fBMotion\fR, and \fBProperty\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%t\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-warp\fI boolean\fR \fIboolean\fR must be a boolean value; it specifies whether the screen pointer should be warped as well. Valid for \fBKey\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButton\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events. The pointer will only warp to a window if it is mapped. .TP \fB\-width\fI size\fR \fISize\fR must be a screen distance; it specifies the \fIwidth\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBConfigure\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%w\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-when\fI when\fR \fIWhen\fR determines when the event will be processed; it must have one of the following values: .RS .IP \fBnow\fR 10 Process the event immediately, before the command returns. This also happens if the \fB\-when\fR option is omitted. .IP \fBtail\fR 10 Place the event on Tcl's event queue behind any events already queued for this application. .IP \fBhead\fR 10 Place the event at the front of Tcl's event queue, so that it will be handled before any other events already queued. .IP \fBmark\fR 10 Place the event at the front of Tcl's event queue but behind any other events already queued with \fB\-when mark\fR. This option is useful when generating a series of events that should be processed in order but at the front of the queue. .RE .TP \fB\-x\fI coord\fR \fICoord\fR must be a screen distance; it specifies the \fIx\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBKey\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButton\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBMotion\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, \fBExpose\fR, \fBConfigure\fR, \fBGravity\fR, and \fBReparent\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%x\fR substitution for binding scripts. If \fIWindow\fR is empty the coordinate is relative to the screen, and this option corresponds to the \fB%X\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-y\fI coord\fR \fICoord\fR must be a screen distance; it specifies the \fIy\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBKey\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButton\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBMotion\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, \fBExpose\fR, \fBConfigure\fR, \fBGravity\fR, and \fBReparent\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%y\fR substitution for binding scripts. If \fIWindow\fR is empty the coordinate is relative to the screen, and this option corresponds to the \fB%Y\fR substitution for binding scripts. .PP Any options that are not specified when generating an event are filled with the value 0, except for \fIserial\fR, which is filled with the next X event serial number. .SH "PREDEFINED VIRTUAL EVENTS" .PP Tk defines the following virtual events for the purposes of notification: .TP \fB<<AltUnderlined>>\fR This is sent to widget to notify it that the letter it has underlined (as an accelerator indicator) with the \fB\-underline\fR option has been pressed in combination with the Alt key. The usual response to this is to either focus into the widget (or some related widget) or to invoke the widget. .TP \fB<<Invoke>>\fR This can be sent to some widgets (e.g. button, listbox, menu) as an alternative to <space>. .TP \fB<<ListboxSelect>>\fR This is sent to a listbox when the set of selected item(s) in the listbox is updated. .TP \fB<<MenuSelect>>\fR This is sent to a menu when the currently selected item in the menu changes. It is intended for use with context-sensitive help systems. .TP \fB<<Modified>>\fR This is sent to a text widget when the contents of the widget are changed. .TP \fB<<Selection>>\fR This is sent to a text widget when the selection in the widget is changed. .TP \fB<<ThemeChanged>>\fR This is sent to all widgets when the ttk theme changed. The ttk widgets listen to this event and redisplay themselves when it fires. The legacy widgets ignore this event. .TP \fB<<TkWorldChanged>>\fR . This event is sent to all widgets when a font is changed, for example, by the use of [font configure]. The user_data field (%d) will have the value "FontChanged". For other system wide changes, this event will be sent to all widgets, and the user_data field will indicate the cause of the change. NOTE: all tk and ttk widgets already handle this event internally. .TP \fB<<TraverseIn>>\fR This is sent to a widget when the focus enters the widget because of a user-driven .QW "tab to widget" action. .TP \fB<<TraverseOut>>\fR This is sent to a widget when the focus leaves the widget because of a user-driven .QW "tab to widget" action. .TP \fB<<UndoStack>>\fR This is sent to a text widget when its undo stack or redo stack becomes empty or unempty. .TP \fB<<WidgetViewSync>>\fR This is sent to a text widget when its internal data become obsolete, and again when these internal data are back in sync with the widget view. The detail field (%d substitution) is either true (when the widget is in sync) or false (when it is not). .PP Tk defines the following virtual events for the purposes of unifying bindings across multiple platforms. Users expect them to behave in the following way: .TP \fB<<Clear>>\fR Delete the currently selected widget contents. .TP \fB<<Copy>>\fR Copy the currently selected widget contents to the clipboard. .TP \fB<<Cut>>\fR Move the currently selected widget contents to the clipboard. .TP \fB<<LineEnd>>\fR . Move to the end of the line in the current widget while deselecting any selected contents. .TP |
︙ | ︙ | |||
490 491 492 493 494 495 496 | .TP \fB<<NextWord>>\fR . Move to the next group of items (i.e., visible word) in the current widget while deselecting any selected contents. .TP \fB<<Paste>>\fR | < < < < | 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 | .TP \fB<<NextWord>>\fR . Move to the next group of items (i.e., visible word) in the current widget while deselecting any selected contents. .TP \fB<<Paste>>\fR Replace the currently selected widget contents with the contents of the clipboard. .TP \fB<<PasteSelection>>\fR Insert the contents of the selection at the mouse location. (This event has meaningful \fB%x\fR and \fB%y\fR substitutions). .TP \fB<<PrevChar>>\fR . Move to the previous item (i.e., visible character) in the current widget while deselecting any selected contents. .TP \fB<<PrevLine>>\fR . Move to the previous line in the current widget while deselecting any selected contents. .TP \fB<<PrevPara>>\fR . Move to the previous paragraph in the current widget while deselecting any selected contents. .TP \fB<<PrevWindow>>\fR Traverse to the previous window. .TP \fB<<PrevWord>>\fR . Move to the previous group of items (i.e., visible word) in the current widget while deselecting any selected contents. .TP \fB<<Redo>>\fR Redo one undone action. .TP \fB<<SelectAll>>\fR . Set the range of selected contents to the complete widget. .TP \fB<<SelectLineEnd>>\fR |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/focus.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 | implement a focus order among the windows of a top-level; they are used in the default bindings for Tab and Shift-Tab, among other things. .PP The \fBfocus\fR command can take any of the following forms: .TP \fBfocus\fR | < < | < < | < | 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 | implement a focus order among the windows of a top-level; they are used in the default bindings for Tab and Shift-Tab, among other things. .PP The \fBfocus\fR command can take any of the following forms: .TP \fBfocus\fR Returns the path name of the focus window on the display containing the application's main window, or an empty string if no window in this application has the focus on that display. Note: it is better to specify the display explicitly using \fB\-displayof\fR (see below) so that the code will work in applications using multiple displays. .TP \fBfocus \fIwindow\fR If the application currently has the input focus on \fIwindow\fR's display, this command resets the input focus for \fIwindow\fR's display to \fIwindow\fR and returns an empty string. If the application does not currently have the input focus on \fIwindow\fR's display, \fIwindow\fR will be remembered as the focus for its top-level; the next time the focus arrives at the top-level, Tk will redirect it to \fIwindow\fR. If \fIwindow\fR is an empty string then the command does nothing. .TP \fBfocus \-displayof\fR \fIwindow\fR Returns the name of the focus window on the display containing \fIwindow\fR. If the focus window for \fIwindow\fR's display is not in this application, the return value is an empty string. .TP \fBfocus \-force \fIwindow\fR Sets the focus of \fIwindow\fR's display to \fIwindow\fR, even if the application does not currently have the input focus for the display. This command should be used sparingly, if at all. In normal usage, an application should not claim the focus for itself; instead, it should wait for the window manager to give it the focus. If \fIwindow\fR is an empty string then the command does nothing. .TP \fBfocus \-lastfor\fR \fIwindow\fR Returns the name of the most recent window to have the input focus among all the windows in the same top-level as \fIwindow\fR. If no window in that top-level has ever had the input focus, or if the most recent focus window has been deleted, then the name of the top-level is returned. The return value is the window that will receive the input focus the next time the window manager gives the focus to the top-level. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 | the fact that the X focus is on the top-level is invisible unless you use C code to query the X server directly. .SH "EXAMPLE" .PP To make a window that only participates in the focus traversal ring when a variable is set, add the following bindings to the widgets \fIbefore\fR and \fIafter\fR it in that focus ring: | < | | | | | | | 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 | the fact that the X focus is on the top-level is invisible unless you use C code to query the X server directly. .SH "EXAMPLE" .PP To make a window that only participates in the focus traversal ring when a variable is set, add the following bindings to the widgets \fIbefore\fR and \fIafter\fR it in that focus ring: .CS button .before \-text "Before" button .middle \-text "Middle" button .after \-text "After" checkbutton .flag \-variable traverseToMiddle \-takefocus 0 pack .flag \-side left pack .before .middle .after bind .before <Tab> { if {!$traverseToMiddle} { \fBfocus\fR .after break } } bind .after <Shift\-Tab> { if {!$traverseToMiddle} { \fBfocus\fR .before break } } \fBfocus\fR .before .CE .SH KEYWORDS events, focus, keyboard, top-level, window manager '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/focusNext.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH tk_focusNext n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME tk_focusNext, tk_focusPrev, tk_focusFollowsMouse \- Utility procedures for managing the input focus. .SH SYNOPSIS | < > > < | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 | .TH tk_focusNext n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME tk_focusNext, tk_focusPrev, tk_focusFollowsMouse \- Utility procedures for managing the input focus. .SH SYNOPSIS \fBtk_focusNext \fIwindow\fR .sp \fBtk_focusPrev \fIwindow\fR .sp \fBtk_focusFollowsMouse\fR .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBtk_focusNext\fR is a utility procedure used for keyboard traversal. It returns the .QW next window after \fIwindow\fR in focus order. The focus order is determined by |
︙ | ︙ | |||
45 46 47 48 49 50 51 | \fBtk_focusFollowsMouse\fR changes the focus model for the application to an implicit one where the window under the mouse gets the focus. After this procedure is called, whenever the mouse enters a window Tk will automatically give it the input focus. The \fBfocus\fR command may be used to move the focus to a window other than the one under the mouse, but as soon as the mouse moves into a new window the focus will jump to that window. | < | | 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 | \fBtk_focusFollowsMouse\fR changes the focus model for the application to an implicit one where the window under the mouse gets the focus. After this procedure is called, whenever the mouse enters a window Tk will automatically give it the input focus. The \fBfocus\fR command may be used to move the focus to a window other than the one under the mouse, but as soon as the mouse moves into a new window the focus will jump to that window. Note: at present there is no built-in support for returning the application to an explicit focus model; to do this you will have to write a script that deletes the bindings created by \fBtk_focusFollowsMouse\fR. .SH KEYWORDS focus, keyboard traversal, top-level '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/frame.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH frame n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME frame \- Create and manipulate 'frame' simple container widgets .SH SYNOPSIS | | | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | .TH frame n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME frame \- Create and manipulate 'frame' simple container widgets .SH SYNOPSIS \fBframe\fR \fIpathName\fR ?\fIoptions\fR? .SO \-borderwidth \-highlightcolor \-pady \-cursor \-highlightthickness \-relief \-highlightbackground \-padx \-takefocus .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-background background Background |
︙ | ︙ | |||
123 124 125 126 127 128 129 | \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .CE .PP \fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as the frame widget's path name. \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for frame widgets: | < | < | 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 | \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .CE .PP \fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as the frame widget's path name. \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for frame widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR . Returns the current value of the configuration option given by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBframe\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? . Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/grab.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH grab n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME grab \- Confine pointer and keyboard events to a window sub-tree .SH SYNOPSIS | < > < | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 | .TH grab n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME grab \- Confine pointer and keyboard events to a window sub-tree .SH SYNOPSIS \fBgrab \fR?\fB\-global\fR? \fIwindow\fR .sp \fBgrab \fIoption \fR?\fIarg \fR...? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP This command implements simple pointer and keyboard grabs for Tk. Tk's grabs are different than the grabs described in the Xlib documentation. When a grab is set for a particular window, Tk restricts all pointer |
︙ | ︙ | |||
80 81 82 83 84 85 86 | It is possible for different applications on a single display to have simultaneous local grabs, but only one application can have a global grab on a given display at once. .PP The \fBgrab\fR command can take any of the following forms: .TP \fBgrab \fR?\fB\-global\fR? \fIwindow\fR | < < < < < < < < < | 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 | It is possible for different applications on a single display to have simultaneous local grabs, but only one application can have a global grab on a given display at once. .PP The \fBgrab\fR command can take any of the following forms: .TP \fBgrab \fR?\fB\-global\fR? \fIwindow\fR Same as \fBgrab set\fR, described below. .TP \fBgrab current \fR?\fIwindow\fR? If \fIwindow\fR is specified, returns the name of the current grab window in this application for \fIwindow\fR's display, or an empty string if there is no such window. If \fIwindow\fR is omitted, the command returns a list whose elements are all of the windows grabbed by this application for all displays, or an empty string if the application has no grabs. .TP \fBgrab release \fIwindow\fR Releases the grab on \fIwindow\fR if there is one, otherwise does nothing. Returns an empty string. .TP \fBgrab set \fR?\fB\-global\fR? \fIwindow\fR Sets a grab on \fIwindow\fR. If \fB\-global\fR is specified then the grab is global, otherwise it is local. If a grab was already in effect for this application on \fIwindow\fR's display then it is automatically released. If there is already a grab on \fIwindow\fR and it has the same global/local form as the requested grab, then the command does nothing. Returns an empty string. .TP \fBgrab status \fIwindow\fR Returns \fBnone\fR if no grab is currently set on \fIwindow\fR, \fBlocal\fR if a local grab is set on \fIwindow\fR, and \fBglobal\fR if a global grab is set. .SH WARNING .PP It is very easy to use global grabs to render a display completely unusable (e.g. by setting a grab on a widget which does not respond to |
︙ | ︙ | |||
142 143 144 145 146 147 148 | processes, this restriction does not exist. .SH EXAMPLE .PP Set a grab so that only one button may be clicked out of a group. The other buttons are unresponsive to the mouse until the middle button is clicked. .CS | | | | | 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 | processes, this restriction does not exist. .SH EXAMPLE .PP Set a grab so that only one button may be clicked out of a group. The other buttons are unresponsive to the mouse until the middle button is clicked. .CS pack [button .b1 \-text "Click me! #1" \-command {destroy .b1}] pack [button .b2 \-text "Click me! #2" \-command {destroy .b2}] pack [button .b3 \-text "Click me! #3" \-command {destroy .b3}] \fBgrab\fR .b2 .CE .SH "SEE ALSO" busy(n) .SH KEYWORDS grab, keyboard events, pointer events, window '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/grid.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 | \fBgrid \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR? . If the first argument to \fBgrid\fR is suitable as the first window argument to \fBgrid configure\fR, either a window name (any value starting with \fB.\fR) or one of the characters \fBx\fR or \fB^\fR (see the \fBRELATIVE PLACEMENT\fR section below), then the command is processed in the same way as \fBgrid configure\fR. | < < < | 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 | \fBgrid \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR? . If the first argument to \fBgrid\fR is suitable as the first window argument to \fBgrid configure\fR, either a window name (any value starting with \fB.\fR) or one of the characters \fBx\fR or \fB^\fR (see the \fBRELATIVE PLACEMENT\fR section below), then the command is processed in the same way as \fBgrid configure\fR. .TP \fBgrid anchor \fIwindow\fR ?\fIanchor\fR? . The anchor value controls how to place the grid within the container window when no row/column has any weight. See \fBTHE GRID ALGORITHM\fR below for further details. The default \fIanchor\fR is \fInw\fR. .TP \fBgrid bbox \fIwindow\fR ?\fIcolumn row\fR? ?\fIcolumn2 row2\fR? . With no arguments, the bounding box (in pixels) of the grid is returned. The return value consists of 4 integers. The first two are the pixel offset from the container window (x then y) of the top-left corner of the grid, and the second two integers are the width and height of the grid, also in pixels. If a single \fIcolumn\fR and \fIrow\fR is specified on the command line, then the bounding box for that cell is returned, where the top left cell is numbered from zero. If both \fIcolumn\fR and \fIrow\fR arguments are specified, then the bounding box spanning the rows and columns indicated is returned. .TP \fBgrid columnconfigure \fIwindow index \fR?\fI\-option value...\fR? . Query or set the column properties of the \fIindex\fR column of the geometry container, \fIwindow\fR. The valid options are \fB\-minsize\fR, \fB\-weight\fR, \fB\-uniform\fR and \fB\-pad\fR. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
81 82 83 84 85 86 87 | The \fB\-pad\fR option specifies the number of screen units that will be added to the largest window contained completely in that column when the grid geometry manager requests a size from the containing window. If only an option is specified, with no value, the current value of that option is returned. If only the container window and index is specified, all the current settings are returned in a list of | | < < < < < < < < < < < | 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 | The \fB\-pad\fR option specifies the number of screen units that will be added to the largest window contained completely in that column when the grid geometry manager requests a size from the containing window. If only an option is specified, with no value, the current value of that option is returned. If only the container window and index is specified, all the current settings are returned in a list of .QW "\-option value" pairs. .TP \fBgrid configure \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR? . The arguments consist of the names of one or more content windows followed by pairs of arguments that specify how to manage the content. The characters \fB\-\fR, \fBx\fR and \fB^\fR, can be specified instead of a window name to alter the default location of a \fIwindow\fR, as described in the \fBRELATIVE PLACEMENT\fR section, below. The following options are supported: .RS .TP \fB\-column \fIn\fR . Insert the window so that it occupies the \fIn\fRth column in the grid. Column numbers start with 0. If this option is not supplied, then the window is arranged just to the right of previous window specified on this call to \fBgrid\fR, or column .QW 0 if it is the first window. For each \fBx\fR that immediately precedes the \fIwindow\fR, the column position is incremented by one. Thus the \fBx\fR represents a blank column for this row in the grid. .TP \fB\-columnspan \fIn\fR . Insert the window so that it occupies \fIn\fR columns in the grid. The default is one column, unless the window name is followed by a \fB\-\fR, in which case the columnspan is incremented once for each immediately following \fB\-\fR. .TP \fB\-in \fIcontainer\fR . Insert the window(s) in the container window given by \fIcontainer\fR. The default is the first window's parent window. .TP \fB\-ipadx \fIamount\fR . The \fIamount\fR specifies how much horizontal internal padding to leave on each side of the content. This is space is added inside the content border. The \fIamount\fR must be a valid screen distance, such as \fB2\fR or \fB.5c\fR. It defaults to 0. .TP \fB\-ipady \fIamount\fR . The \fIamount\fR specifies how much vertical internal padding to leave on the top and bottom of the content. This space is added inside the content border. The \fIamount\fR defaults to 0. .TP \fB\-padx \fIamount\fR . The \fIamount\fR specifies how much horizontal external padding to leave on each side of the content, in screen units. \fIAmount\fR may be a list of two values to specify padding for left and right separately. The \fIamount\fR defaults to 0. This space is added outside the content border. .TP \fB\-pady \fIamount\fR . The \fIamount\fR specifies how much vertical external padding to leave on the top and bottom of the content, in screen units. \fIAmount\fR may be a list of two values to specify padding for top and bottom separately. The \fIamount\fR defaults to 0. This space is added outside the content border. .TP \fB\-row \fIn\fR . Insert the content so that it occupies the \fIn\fRth row in the grid. Row numbers start with 0. If this option is not supplied, then the content is arranged on the same row as the previous content specified on this call to \fBgrid\fR, or the next row after the highest occupied row if this is the first content. .TP \fB\-rowspan \fIn\fR . Insert the content so that it occupies \fIn\fR rows in the grid. The default is one row. If the next \fBgrid\fR command contains \fB^\fR characters instead of \fIcontent\fR that line up with the columns of this \fIcontent\fR, then the \fBrowspan\fR of this \fIcontent\fR is extended by one. .TP \fB\-sticky \fIstyle\fR . If a content's cell is larger than its requested dimensions, this option may be used to position (or stretch) the content within its cell. \fIStyle\fR is a string that contains zero or more of the characters \fBn\fR, \fBs\fR, \fBe\fR or \fBw\fR. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
203 204 205 206 207 208 209 | .QW "" , which causes the content to be centered in its cavity, at its requested size. .LP If any of the content is already managed by the geometry manager then any unspecified options for them retain their previous values rather than receiving default values. .RE | < < < < < < < < < < | | < < | | | | < < < < < | | | | 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 | .QW "" , which causes the content to be centered in its cavity, at its requested size. .LP If any of the content is already managed by the geometry manager then any unspecified options for them retain their previous values rather than receiving default values. .RE .TP \fBgrid forget \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR? . Removes each of the \fIwindow\fRs from grid for its container and unmaps their windows. The content will no longer be managed by the grid geometry manager. The configuration options for that window are forgotten, so that if the window is managed once more by the grid geometry manager, the initial default settings are used. .RS .PP .VS "TIP 518" If the last content window of the container becomes unmanaged, this will also send the virtual event \fB<<NoManagedChild>>\fR to the container; the container may choose to resize itself (or otherwise respond) to such a change. .VE "TIP 518" .RE .TP \fBgrid info \fIwindow\fR . Returns a list whose elements are the current configuration state of the content given by \fIwindow\fR in the same option-value form that might be specified to \fBgrid configure\fR. The first two elements of the list are .QW "\fB\-in \fIcontainer\fR" where \fIcontainer\fR is the windows's container window. .TP \fBgrid location \fIwindow x y\fR . Given \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR values in screen units relative to the container window, the column and row number at that \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR location is returned. For locations that are above or to the left of the grid, \fB\-1\fR is returned. .TP \fBgrid propagate \fIwindow\fR ?\fIboolean\fR? . If \fIboolean\fR has a true boolean value such as \fB1\fR or \fBon\fR then propagation is enabled for \fIwindow\fR, which must be a window name (see \fBGEOMETRY PROPAGATION\fR below). If \fIboolean\fR has a false boolean value then propagation is disabled for \fIwindow\fR. In either of these cases an empty string is returned. If \fIboolean\fR is omitted then the command returns \fB0\fR or \fB1\fR to indicate whether propagation is currently enabled for \fIwindow\fR. Propagation is enabled by default. .TP \fBgrid rowconfigure \fIwindow index \fR?\fI\-option value...\fR? . Query or set the row properties of the \fIindex\fR row of the geometry container, \fIwindow\fR. The valid options are \fB\-minsize\fR, \fB\-weight\fR, \fB\-uniform\fR and \fB\-pad\fR. If one or more options are provided, then \fIindex\fR may be given as a list of row indices to which the configuration options will operate on. Indices may be integers, window names or the keyword \fIall\fR. For \fIall\fR the options apply to all rows currently occupied by content windows. For a window name, that window must be a content window of this container and the options apply to all rows currently occupied by the container window. The \fB\-minsize\fR option sets the minimum size, in screen units, that will be permitted for this row. The \fB\-weight\fR option (an integer value) sets the relative weight for apportioning any extra spaces among rows. A weight of zero (0) indicates the row will not deviate from its requested |
︙ | ︙ | |||
303 304 305 306 307 308 309 | grid geometry manager requests a size from the containing window. If only an option is specified, with no value, the current value of that option is returned. If only the container window and index is specified, all the current settings are returned in a list of .QW "-option value" pairs. | < | | | < | > > > > > > > > | > | | | > | > > | > | | | 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 | grid geometry manager requests a size from the containing window. If only an option is specified, with no value, the current value of that option is returned. If only the container window and index is specified, all the current settings are returned in a list of .QW "-option value" pairs. .TP \fBgrid remove \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR? . Removes each of the \fIwindow\fRs from grid for its container and unmaps their windows. The content will no longer be managed by the grid geometry manager. However, the configuration options for that window are remembered, so that if the content window is managed once more by the grid geometry manager, the previous values are retained. .RS .PP .VS "TIP 518" If the last content window of the container becomes unmanaged, this will also send the virtual event \fB<<NoManagedChild>>\fR to the container; the container may choose to resize itself (or otherwise respond) to such a change. .VE "TIP 518" .RE .TP \fBgrid size \fIcontainer\fR . Returns the size of the grid (in columns then rows) for \fIcontainer\fR. The size is determined either by the \fIcontent\fR occupying the largest row or column, or the largest column or row with a \fB\-minsize\fR, \fB\-weight\fR, or \fB\-pad\fR that is non-zero. .TP \fBgrid content \fIwindow\fR ?\fI\-option value\fR? . If no options are supplied, a list of all of the content in \fIwindow\fR is returned, most recently managed first. \fIOption\fR can be either \fB\-row\fR or \fB\-column\fR which causes only the content in the row (or column) specified by \fIvalue\fR to be returned. .TP \fBgrid slaves \fIwindow\fR ?\fI\-option value\fR? . Synonym for \fBgrid content \fIwindow\fR ?\fI\-option value\fR?. .SH "RELATIVE PLACEMENT" .PP The \fBgrid\fR command contains a limited set of capabilities that permit layouts to be created without specifying the row and column information for each content. This permits content to be rearranged, added, or removed without the need to explicitly specify row and column information. When no column or row information is specified for a \fIcontent\fR, default values are chosen for \fB\-column\fR, \fB\-row\fR, \fB\-columnspan\fR and \fB\-rowspan\fR at the time the \fIcontent\fR is managed. The values are chosen based upon the current layout of the grid, the position of the \fIcontent\fR relative to other \fIcontent\fRs in the same grid command, and the presence of the characters \fB\-\fR, \fBx\fR, and \fB^\fR in \fBgrid\fR command where \fIcontent\fR names are normally expected. .RS .TP \fB\-\fR . This increases the \fB\-columnspan\fR of the \fIcontent\fR to the left. Several \fB\-\fR's in a row will successively increase the number of columns spanned. A \fB\-\fR may not follow a \fB^\fR or a \fBx\fR, nor may it be the first \fIcontent\fR argument to \fBgrid configure\fR. .TP \fBx\fR . This leaves an empty column between the \fIcontent\fR on the left and the \fIcontent\fR on the right. .TP \fB^\fR . This extends the \fB\-rowspan\fR of the \fIcontent\fR above the \fB^\fR's in the grid. The number of \fB^\fR's in a row must match the number of columns spanned by the \fIcontent\fR above it. .RE .SH "THE GRID ALGORITHM" .PP The grid geometry manager lays out its content in three steps. In the first step, the minimum size needed to fit all of the content is computed, then (if propagation is turned on), a request is made of the container window to become that size. In the second step, the requested size is compared against the actual size of the container. If the sizes are different, then spaces is added to or taken away from the layout as needed. For the final step, each content is positioned in its row(s) and column(s) based on the setting of its \fIsticky\fR flag. .PP To compute the minimum size of a layout, the grid geometry manager first looks at all content whose \fB\-columnspan\fR and \fB\-rowspan\fR values are one, and computes the nominal size of each row or column to be either the \fIminsize\fR for that row or column, or the sum of the \fIpad\fRding plus the size of the largest content, whichever is greater. After that the rows or columns in each uniform group adapt to each other. Then the content whose row-spans or column-spans are greater than one are examined. If a group of rows or columns need to be increased in size in order to accommodate these content, then extra space is added to each |
︙ | ︙ | |||
457 458 459 460 461 462 463 | .SH EXAMPLES .PP A toplevel window containing a text widget and two scrollbars: .PP .CS # Make the widgets toplevel .t | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 | .SH EXAMPLES .PP A toplevel window containing a text widget and two scrollbars: .PP .CS # Make the widgets toplevel .t text .t.txt \-wrap none \-xscroll {.t.h set} \-yscroll {.t.v set} scrollbar .t.v \-orient vertical \-command {.t.txt yview} scrollbar .t.h \-orient horizontal \-command {.t.txt xview} # Lay them out \fBgrid\fR .t.txt .t.v \-sticky nsew \fBgrid\fR .t.h \-sticky nsew # Tell the text widget to take all the extra room \fBgrid rowconfigure\fR .t .t.txt \-weight 1 \fBgrid columnconfigure\fR .t .t.txt \-weight 1 .CE .PP Three widgets of equal width, despite their different .QW natural widths: .PP .CS button .b \-text "Foo" entry .e \-textvariable foo ; set foo "Hello World!" label .l \-text "This is a fairly long piece of text" \fBgrid\fR .b .e .l \-sticky ew \fBgrid columnconfigure\fR . "all" \-uniform allTheSame .CE .SH "SEE ALSO" pack(n), place(n) .SH KEYWORDS geometry manager, location, grid, cell, propagation, size, pack '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/image.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH image n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME image \- Create and manipulate images .SH SYNOPSIS | | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < > | > | > | | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 | .TH image n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME image \- Create and manipulate images .SH SYNOPSIS \fBimage\fR \fIoption \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBimage\fR command is used to create, delete, and query images. It can take several different forms, depending on the \fIoption\fR argument. The legal forms are: .TP \fBimage create \fItype \fR?\fIname\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR? Creates a new image and a command with the same name and returns its name. \fItype\fR specifies the type of the image, which must be one of the types currently defined (e.g., \fBbitmap\fR). \fIname\fR specifies the name for the image; if it is omitted then Tk picks a name of the form \fBimage\fIx\fR, where \fIx\fR is an integer. There may be any number of \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs, which provide configuration options for the new image. The legal set of options is defined separately for each image type; see below for details on the options for built-in image types. If an image already exists by the given name then it is replaced with the new image and any instances of that image will redisplay with the new contents. It is important to note that the image command will silently overwrite any procedure that may currently be defined by the given name, so choose the name wisely. It is recommended to use a separate namespace for image names (e.g., \fB::img::logo\fR, \fB::img::large\fR). .TP \fBimage delete \fR?\fIname name\fR ...? Deletes each of the named images and returns an empty string. If there are instances of the images displayed in widgets, the images will not actually be deleted until all of the instances are released. However, the association between the instances and the image manager will be dropped. Existing instances will retain their sizes but redisplay as empty areas. If a deleted image is recreated with another call to \fBimage create\fR, the existing instances will use the new image. .TP \fBimage height \fIname\fR Returns a decimal string giving the height of image \fIname\fR in pixels. .TP \fBimage inuse \fIname\fR Returns a boolean value indicating whether or not the image given by \fIname\fR is in use by any widgets. .TP \fBimage names\fR Returns a list containing the names of all existing images. .TP \fBimage type \fIname\fR Returns the type of image \fIname\fR (the value of the \fItype\fR argument to \fBimage create\fR when the image was created). .TP \fBimage types\fR Returns a list whose elements are all of the valid image types (i.e., all of the values that may be supplied for the \fItype\fR argument to \fBimage create\fR). .TP \fBimage width \fIname\fR Returns a decimal string giving the width of image \fIname\fR in pixels. .PP Additional operations (e.g. writing the image to a file) may be available as subcommands of the image instance command. See the manual page for the particular image type for details. .SH "BUILT-IN IMAGE TYPES" .PP The following image types are defined by Tk so they will be available in any Tk application. Individual applications or extensions may define additional types. .TP \fBbitmap\fR Each pixel in the image displays a foreground color, a background color, or nothing. See the \fBbitmap\fR manual entry for more information. .TP \fBphoto\fR Displays a variety of full-color images, using dithering to approximate colors on displays with limited color capabilities. See the \fBphoto\fR manual entry for more information. .TP \fBnsimage\fR This type is only available in the Aqua platform. It is a full-color image which may be created from a named system image. It has options designed to facilitate the use of these images in buttons. An \fBnsimage\fR can be based on an a \fItemplate image\fR, which is an anti-aliased 2-color image format that automatically interchanges black and white in response to changes between the light and dark modes on macOS. An \fBnsimage\fR can also generate an alternate |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/keysyms.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
569 570 571 572 573 574 575 | Greek_DELTA 1988 0x7C4 Greek_EPSILON 1989 0x7C5 Greek_ZETA 1990 0x7C6 Greek_ETA 1991 0x7C7 Greek_THETA 1992 0x7C8 Greek_IOTA 1993 0x7C9 Greek_KAPPA 1994 0x7CA | | | 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 | Greek_DELTA 1988 0x7C4 Greek_EPSILON 1989 0x7C5 Greek_ZETA 1990 0x7C6 Greek_ETA 1991 0x7C7 Greek_THETA 1992 0x7C8 Greek_IOTA 1993 0x7C9 Greek_KAPPA 1994 0x7CA Greek_LAMDA 1995 0x7CB Greek_MU 1996 0x7CC Greek_NU 1997 0x7CD Greek_XI 1998 0x7CE Greek_OMICRON 1999 0x7CF Greek_PI 2000 0x7D0 Greek_RHO 2001 0x7D1 Greek_SIGMA 2002 0x7D2 |
︙ | ︙ | |||
593 594 595 596 597 598 599 | Greek_delta 2020 0x7E4 Greek_epsilon 2021 0x7E5 Greek_zeta 2022 0x7E6 Greek_eta 2023 0x7E7 Greek_theta 2024 0x7E8 Greek_iota 2025 0x7E9 Greek_kappa 2026 0x7EA | | | 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 | Greek_delta 2020 0x7E4 Greek_epsilon 2021 0x7E5 Greek_zeta 2022 0x7E6 Greek_eta 2023 0x7E7 Greek_theta 2024 0x7E8 Greek_iota 2025 0x7E9 Greek_kappa 2026 0x7EA Greek_lamda 2027 0x7EB Greek_mu 2028 0x7EC Greek_nu 2029 0x7ED Greek_xi 2030 0x7EE Greek_omicron 2031 0x7EF Greek_pi 2032 0x7F0 Greek_rho 2033 0x7F1 Greek_sigma 2034 0x7F2 |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 | Pause 65299 0xFF13 Scroll_Lock 65300 0xFF14 Sys_Req 65301 0xFF15 Escape 65307 0xFF1B Multi_key 65312 0xFF20 Kanji 65313 0xFF21 Muhenkan 65314 0xFF22 | | | 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 | Pause 65299 0xFF13 Scroll_Lock 65300 0xFF14 Sys_Req 65301 0xFF15 Escape 65307 0xFF1B Multi_key 65312 0xFF20 Kanji 65313 0xFF21 Muhenkan 65314 0xFF22 Henkan_Mode 65315 0xFF23 Romaji 65316 0xFF24 Hiragana 65317 0xFF25 Katakana 65318 0xFF26 Hiragana_Katakana 65319 0xFF27 Zenkaku 65320 0xFF28 Hankaku 65321 0xFF29 Zenkaku_Hankaku 65322 0xFF2A |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/label.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH label n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME label \- Create and manipulate 'label' non-interactive text or image widgets .SH SYNOPSIS | | | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | .TH label n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME label \- Create and manipulate 'label' non-interactive text or image widgets .SH SYNOPSIS \fBlabel\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .SO \-activebackground \-disabledforeground \-padx \-activeforeground \-font \-pady \-anchor \-foreground \-relief \-background \-highlightbackground \-takefocus \-bitmap \-highlightcolor \-text \-borderwidth \-highlightthickness \-textvariable |
︙ | ︙ | |||
76 77 78 79 80 81 82 | operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for label widgets: | < | < < < | | | | | | | | | | 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 | operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for label widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR Returns the current value of the configuration option given by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBlabel\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBlabel\fR command. .SH BINDINGS .PP When a new label is created, it has no default event bindings: labels are not intended to be interactive. .SH EXAMPLE .PP .CS # Make the widgets \fBlabel\fR .t \-text "This widget is at the top" \-bg red \fBlabel\fR .b \-text "This widget is at the bottom" \-bg green \fBlabel\fR .l \-text "Left\enHand\enSide" \fBlabel\fR .r \-text "Right\enHand\enSide" text .mid \&.mid insert end "This layout is like Java's BorderLayout" # Lay them out pack .t \-side top \-fill x pack .b \-side bottom \-fill x pack .l \-side left \-fill y pack .r \-side right \-fill y pack .mid \-expand 1 \-fill both .CE .SH "SEE ALSO" labelframe(n), button(n), ttk::label(n) .SH KEYWORDS label, widget '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/labelframe.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH labelframe n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME labelframe \- Create and manipulate 'labelframe' labelled container widgets .SH SYNOPSIS | | | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | .TH labelframe n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME labelframe \- Create and manipulate 'labelframe' labelled container widgets .SH SYNOPSIS \fBlabelframe\fR \fIpathName\fR ?\fIoptions\fR? .SO \-borderwidth \-highlightbackground \-pady \-cursor \-highlightcolor \-relief \-font \-highlightthickness \-takefocus \-foreground \-padx \-text .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" |
︙ | ︙ | |||
97 98 99 100 101 102 103 | .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .CE \fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as the labelframe widget's path name. \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for frame widgets: | < | < < < | 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 | .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .CE \fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as the labelframe widget's path name. \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for frame widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR Returns the current value of the configuration option given by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBlabelframe\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If |
︙ | ︙ | |||
132 133 134 135 136 137 138 | .SH EXAMPLE .PP This shows how to build part of a GUI for a hamburger vendor. The \fBlabelframe\fR widgets are used to organize the available choices by the kinds of things that the choices are being made over. .PP .CS | | | | | | 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 | .SH EXAMPLE .PP This shows how to build part of a GUI for a hamburger vendor. The \fBlabelframe\fR widgets are used to organize the available choices by the kinds of things that the choices are being made over. .PP .CS grid [\fBlabelframe\fR .burger \-text "Burger"] \e [\fBlabelframe\fR .bun \-text "Bun"] \-sticky news grid [\fBlabelframe\fR .cheese \-text "Cheese Option"] \e [\fBlabelframe\fR .pickle \-text "Pickle Option"] \-sticky news foreach {type name val} { burger Beef beef burger Lamb lamb burger Vegetarian beans bun Plain white bun Sesame seeds |
︙ | ︙ | |||
157 158 159 160 161 162 163 | cheese "Monterey Jack" jack pickle None none pickle Gherkins gherkins pickle Onions onion pickle Chili chili } { | | | | | 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 | cheese "Monterey Jack" jack pickle None none pickle Gherkins gherkins pickle Onions onion pickle Chili chili } { set w [radiobutton .$type.$val \-text $name \-anchor w \e \-variable $type \-value $val] pack $w \-side top \-fill x } set burger beef set bun white set cheese none set pickle none .CE .SH "SEE ALSO" frame(n), label(n), ttk::labelframe(n) .SH KEYWORDS labelframe, widget '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/listbox.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH listbox n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME listbox \- Create and manipulate 'listbox' item list widgets .SH SYNOPSIS | | | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | .TH listbox n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME listbox \- Create and manipulate 'listbox' item list widgets .SH SYNOPSIS \fBlistbox\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .SO \-background \-borderwidth \-cursor \-disabledforeground \-exportselection \-font \-foreground \-highlightbackground \-highlightcolor \-highlightthickness \-justify \-relief \-selectbackground \-selectborderwidth \-selectforeground \-setgrid \-takefocus \-xscrollcommand |
︙ | ︙ | |||
91 92 93 94 95 96 97 | They also support scanning, as described below. .SH "INDICES" .PP Many of the widget commands for listboxes take one or more indices as arguments. An index specifies a particular element of the listbox, in any of the following ways: | > | > > | > > | > > | > > | | < | < | < | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | | 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 | They also support scanning, as described below. .SH "INDICES" .PP Many of the widget commands for listboxes take one or more indices as arguments. An index specifies a particular element of the listbox, in any of the following ways: .TP 12 \fInumber\fR . Specifies the element as a numerical index, where 0 corresponds to the first element in the listbox. .TP 12 \fBactive\fR . Indicates the element that has the location cursor. This element will be displayed as specified by \fB\-activestyle\fR when the listbox has the keyboard focus, and it is specified with the \fBactivate\fR widget command. .TP 12 \fBanchor\fR . Indicates the anchor point for the selection, which is set with the \fBselection anchor\fR widget command. .TP 12 \fBend\fR . Indicates the end of the listbox. For most commands this refers to the last element in the listbox, but for a few commands such as \fBindex\fR and \fBinsert\fR it refers to the element just after the last one. .TP 12 \fB@\fIx\fB,\fIy\fR Indicates the element that covers the point in the listbox window specified by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR (in pixel coordinates). If no element covers that point, then the closest element to that point is used. .LP Indexes support the same simple interpretation as for the command \fBstring index\fR, with simple integer index arithmetic and indexing relative to \fBend\fR. In the widget command descriptions below, arguments named \fIindex\fR, \fIfirst\fR, and \fIlast\fR always contain text indices in one of the above forms. .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBlistbox\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for listbox widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBactivate\fR \fIindex\fR . Sets the active element to the one indicated by \fIindex\fR. If \fIindex\fR is outside the range of elements in the listbox then the closest element is activated. The active element is drawn as specified by \fB\-activestyle\fR when the widget has the input focus, and its index may be retrieved with the index \fBactive\fR. .TP \fIpathName \fBbbox\fR \fIindex\fR . Returns a list of four numbers describing the bounding box of the text in the element given by \fIindex\fR. The first two elements of the list give the x and y coordinates of the upper-left corner of the screen area covered by the text (specified in pixels relative to the widget) and the last two elements give the width and height of the area, in pixels. If no part of the element given by \fIindex\fR is visible on the screen, or if \fIindex\fR refers to a non-existent element, then the result is an empty string; if the element is partially visible, the result gives the full area of the element, including any parts that are not visible. .TP \fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR . Returns the current value of the configuration option given by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBlistbox\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? . Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBlistbox\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBcurselection\fR . Returns a list containing the numerical indices of all of the elements in the listbox that are currently selected. If there are no elements selected in the listbox then an empty string is returned. .TP \fIpathName \fBdelete \fIfirst \fR?\fIlast\fR? . Deletes one or more elements of the listbox. \fIFirst\fR and \fIlast\fR are indices specifying the first and last elements in the range to delete. If \fIlast\fR is not specified it defaults to \fIfirst\fR, i.e. a single element is deleted. .TP \fIpathName \fBget \fIfirst\fR ?\fIlast\fR? . If \fIlast\fR is omitted, returns the contents of the listbox element indicated by \fIfirst\fR, or an empty string if \fIfirst\fR refers to a non-existent element. If \fIlast\fR is specified, the command returns a list whose elements are all of the listbox elements between \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR, inclusive. Both \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR may have any of the standard forms for indices. .TP \fIpathName \fBindex \fIindex\fR . Returns the integer index value that corresponds to \fIindex\fR. If \fIindex\fR is \fBend\fR the return value is a count of the number of elements in the listbox (not the index of the last element). .TP \fIpathName \fBinsert \fIindex \fR?\fIelement element ...\fR? . Inserts zero or more new elements in the list just before the element given by \fIindex\fR. If \fIindex\fR is specified as \fBend\fR then the new elements are added to the end of the list. Returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBitemcget \fIindex option\fR . Returns the current value of the item configuration option given by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBitemconfigure\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBitemconfigure \fIindex\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR? . Query or modify the configuration options of an item in the listbox. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for the item (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. The following options are currently supported for items: .RS .TP \fB\-background \fIcolor\fR . \fIColor\fR specifies the background color to use when displaying the item. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. .TP \fB\-foreground \fIcolor\fR . \fIColor\fR specifies the foreground color to use when displaying the item. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. .TP \fB\-selectbackground \fIcolor\fR . \fIcolor\fR specifies the background color to use when displaying the item while it is selected. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. .TP \fB\-selectforeground \fIcolor\fR . \fIcolor\fR specifies the foreground color to use when displaying the item while it is selected. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBnearest \fIy\fR . Given a y-coordinate within the listbox window, this command returns the index of the (visible) listbox element nearest to that y-coordinate. .TP \fIpathName \fBscan\fR \fIoption args\fR . This command is used to implement scanning on listboxes. It has two forms, depending on \fIoption\fR: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBscan mark \fIx y\fR . |
︙ | ︙ | |||
306 307 308 309 310 311 312 | \fBscan mark\fR command for the widget. It then adjusts the view by 10 times the difference in coordinates. This command is typically associated with mouse motion events in the widget, to produce the effect of dragging the list at high speed through the window. The return value is an empty string. .RE | < < | 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 | \fBscan mark\fR command for the widget. It then adjusts the view by 10 times the difference in coordinates. This command is typically associated with mouse motion events in the widget, to produce the effect of dragging the list at high speed through the window. The return value is an empty string. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBsee \fIindex\fR . Adjust the view in the listbox so that the element given by \fIindex\fR is visible. If the element is already visible then the command has no effect; if the element is near one edge of the window then the listbox scrolls to bring the element into view at the edge; otherwise the listbox scrolls to center the element. .TP \fIpathName \fBselection \fIoption arg\fR . This command is used to adjust the selection within a listbox. It has several forms, depending on \fIoption\fR: .RS .TP |
︙ | ︙ | |||
352 353 354 355 356 357 358 | .TP \fIpathName \fBselection set \fIfirst \fR?\fIlast\fR? . Selects all of the elements in the range between \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR, inclusive, without affecting the selection state of elements outside that range. .RE | < < | 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 | .TP \fIpathName \fBselection set \fIfirst \fR?\fIlast\fR? . Selects all of the elements in the range between \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR, inclusive, without affecting the selection state of elements outside that range. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBsize\fR . Returns a decimal string indicating the total number of elements in the listbox. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview \fR?\fIargs\fR . This command is used to query and change the horizontal position of the information in the widget's window. It can take any of the following forms: .RS |
︙ | ︙ | |||
407 408 409 410 411 412 413 | If \fInumber\fR is negative then characters farther to the left become visible; if it is positive then characters farther to the right become visible. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right by \fInumber\fR character units (the width of the \fB0\fR character) on the display. .RE | < < | 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 | If \fInumber\fR is negative then characters farther to the left become visible; if it is positive then characters farther to the right become visible. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right by \fInumber\fR character units (the width of the \fB0\fR character) on the display. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fByview \fR?\fIargs\fR? . This command is used to query and change the vertical position of the text in the widget's window. It can take any of the following forms: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fByview\fR Returns a list containing two elements, both of which are real fractions between 0 and 1. The first element gives the position of the listbox element at the top of the window, relative to the listbox as a whole (0.5 means it is halfway through the listbox, for example). The second element gives the position of the listbox element just after the last one in the window, relative to the listbox as a whole. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/loadTk.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH "Safe Tk" n 8.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME safe::loadTk \- Load Tk into a safe interpreter. .SH SYNOPSIS | | | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH "Safe Tk" n 8.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME safe::loadTk \- Load Tk into a safe interpreter. .SH SYNOPSIS \fBsafe::loadTk \fIchild\fR ?\fB\-use\fR \fIwindowId\fR? ?\fB\-display\fR \fIdisplayName\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP Safe Tk is based on Safe Tcl, which provides a mechanism that allows restricted and mediated access to auto-loading and packages for safe interpreters. Safe Tk adds the ability to configure the interpreter for safe Tk operations and load Tk into safe interpreters. .PP The \fBsafe::loadTk\fR command initializes the required data structures in the named safe interpreter and then loads Tk into it. The interpreter must have been created with \fBsafe::interpCreate\fR or have been initialized with \fBsafe::interpInit\fR. The command returns the name of the safe interpreter. If \fB\-use\fR is specified, the window identified by the specified system dependent identifier \fIwindowId\fR is used to contain the .QW . window of the safe interpreter; it can be any valid id, eventually referencing a window belonging to another application. As a convenience, if the window you plan to use is a Tk Window of the application you can use the window name (e.g., .QW \fB.x.y\fR ) instead of its window Id (e.g., from \fBwinfo id\fR \fB.x.y\fR). When \fB\-use\fR is not specified, a new toplevel window is created for the .QW . window of the safe interpreter. On X11 if you want the embedded window to use another display than the default one, specify it with \fB\-display\fR. See the \fBSECURITY ISSUES\fR section below for implementation details. .SH "SECURITY ISSUES" .PP Please read the \fBsafe\fR manual page for Tcl to learn about the basic security considerations for Safe Tcl. .PP \fBsafe::loadTk\fR adds the value of \fBtk_library\fR taken from the parent interpreter to the virtual access path of the safe interpreter so that auto-loading will work in the safe interpreter. .PP Tk initialization is now safe with respect to not trusting the child's state for startup. \fBsafe::loadTk\fR registers the child's name so when the Tk initialization (\fBTk_SafeInit\fR) is called and in turn calls the parent's \fBsafe::InitTk\fR it will return the desired \fBargv\fR equivalent (\fB\-use\fR \fIwindowId\fR, correct \fB\-display\fR, etc.) .PP When \fB\-use\fR is not used, the new toplevel created is specially decorated so the user is always aware that the user interface presented comes from a potentially unsafe code and can easily delete the corresponding interpreter. .PP On X11, conflicting \fB\-use\fR and \fB\-display\fR are likely to generate a fatal X error. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/menu.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
281 282 283 284 285 286 287 | Alt+Spacebar. Due to limitations in the Windows API, any font changes, colors, images, bitmaps, or tearoff images will not appear in the system menu. .PP When Tk sees a Help menu on X Windows and Motif menu compatibility is enabled the menu is moved to be last in the menubar and is right justified. Motif menu compatibility is enabled by setting the Tk option | | > | 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 | Alt+Spacebar. Due to limitations in the Windows API, any font changes, colors, images, bitmaps, or tearoff images will not appear in the system menu. .PP When Tk sees a Help menu on X Windows and Motif menu compatibility is enabled the menu is moved to be last in the menubar and is right justified. Motif menu compatibility is enabled by setting the Tk option \fB*Menu.useMotifHelp\fR to true or by calling \fBtk::classic::restore menu\fR. .SH "CLONES" .PP When a menu is set as a menubar for a toplevel window, or when a menu is torn off, a clone of the menu is made. This clone is a menu widget in its own right, but it is a child of the original. Changes in the configuration of the original are reflected in the clone. Additionally, any cascades that are pointed to are also cloned |
︙ | ︙ | |||
325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 | .IP \fB{}\fR 12 Indicates .QW "no entry at all" ; this is used most commonly with the \fBactivate\fR option to deactivate all the entries in the menu. In most cases the specification of \fB{}\fR causes nothing to happen in the widget command. .IP \fB@\fIx\fB,\fIy\fR 12 Indicates the entry that covers the point in the menu's window specified by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR (in pixel coordinates). If no entry covers that point, then this form is equivalent to \fB{}\fR. If only a single number is specified, it is treated as the y-coordinate. .IP \fInumber\fR 12 Specifies the entry numerically, where 0 corresponds | > > > > > | 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 | .IP \fB{}\fR 12 Indicates .QW "no entry at all" ; this is used most commonly with the \fBactivate\fR option to deactivate all the entries in the menu. In most cases the specification of \fB{}\fR causes nothing to happen in the widget command. .TP 12 \fBnone\fR . Same as \fB{}\fR This form is deprecated and may not be abbreviated. .IP \fB@\fIx\fB,\fIy\fR 12 Indicates the entry that covers the point in the menu's window specified by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR (in pixel coordinates). If no entry covers that point, then this form is equivalent to \fB{}\fR. If only a single number is specified, it is treated as the y-coordinate. .IP \fInumber\fR 12 Specifies the entry numerically, where 0 corresponds |
︙ | ︙ | |||
358 359 360 361 362 363 364 | .\" METHOD: activate .TP \fIpathName \fBactivate \fIindex\fR . Change the state of the entry indicated by \fIindex\fR to \fBactive\fR and redisplay it using its active colors. Any previously-active entry is deactivated. If \fIindex\fR | | | 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 | .\" METHOD: activate .TP \fIpathName \fBactivate \fIindex\fR . Change the state of the entry indicated by \fIindex\fR to \fBactive\fR and redisplay it using its active colors. Any previously-active entry is deactivated. If \fIindex\fR is specified as \fB{}\fR or \fBnone\fR, or if the specified entry is disabled, then the menu ends up with no active entry. Returns an empty string. .\" METHOD: add .TP \fIpathName \fBadd \fItype \fR?\fIid\fR? ?\fIoption value option value ...\fR? . Add a new entry to the bottom of the menu. The new entry's type |
︙ | ︙ | |||
454 455 456 457 458 459 460 | Returns an empty string for the tear-off entry, or if \fIindex\fR is equivalent to \fB{}\fR. .\" METHOD: index .TP \fIpathName \fBindex \fIindex\fR . Returns the numerical index corresponding to \fIindex\fR, or | | | 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 | Returns an empty string for the tear-off entry, or if \fIindex\fR is equivalent to \fB{}\fR. .\" METHOD: index .TP \fIpathName \fBindex \fIindex\fR . Returns the numerical index corresponding to \fIindex\fR, or \fB{}\fR if \fIindex\fR was specified as \fB{}\fR or \fBnone\fR. .\" METHOD: insert .TP \fIpathName \fBinsert \fIindex type \fR?\fIid\fR? ?\fIoption value option value ...\fR? . Same as the \fBadd\fR widget command except that it inserts the new entry just before the entry given by \fIindex\fR, instead of appending to the end of the menu. The \fItype\fR, \fIid\fR, \fIoption\fR, and |
︙ | ︙ | |||
555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 | .TP \fB\-activeforeground \fIvalue\fR . Specifies a foreground color to use for displaying this entry when it is active. This option is ignored on Aqua/macOS. If this option is specified as an empty string (the default), then the \fB\-activeforeground\fR option for the overall menu is used. .\" OPTION: -accelerator .TP \fB\-accelerator \fIvalue\fR . Specifies a string to display at the right side of the menu entry. Normally describes an accelerator keystroke sequence that may be used to invoke the same function as the menu entry. This is a display | > | 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 | .TP \fB\-activeforeground \fIvalue\fR . Specifies a foreground color to use for displaying this entry when it is active. This option is ignored on Aqua/macOS. If this option is specified as an empty string (the default), then the \fB\-activeforeground\fR option for the overall menu is used. This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries. .\" OPTION: -accelerator .TP \fB\-accelerator \fIvalue\fR . Specifies a string to display at the right side of the menu entry. Normally describes an accelerator keystroke sequence that may be used to invoke the same function as the menu entry. This is a display |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/message.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH message n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME message \- Create and manipulate 'message' non-interactive text widgets .SH SYNOPSIS | | | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | .TH message n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME message \- Create and manipulate 'message' non-interactive text widgets .SH SYNOPSIS \fBmessage\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .SO \-anchor \-background \-borderwidth \-cursor \-font \-foreground \-highlightbackground \-highlightcolor \-highlightthickness \-padx \-pady \-relief \-takefocus \-text \-textvariable .SE |
︙ | ︙ | |||
107 108 109 110 111 112 113 | operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for message widgets: | < < | 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 | operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for message widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR . Returns the current value of the configuration option given by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBmessage\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? . Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/messageBox.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | application-specified message, an icon and a set of buttons. Each of the buttons in the message window is identified by a unique symbolic name (see the \fB\-type\fR options). After the message window is popped up, \fBtk_messageBox\fR waits for the user to select one of the buttons. Then it returns the symbolic name of the selected button. .PP The following option-value pairs are supported: | < | < < | < | < | < | < | < | < | > | > > | > > | > > | > > | > > | > | | | | | | | 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 | application-specified message, an icon and a set of buttons. Each of the buttons in the message window is identified by a unique symbolic name (see the \fB\-type\fR options). After the message window is popped up, \fBtk_messageBox\fR waits for the user to select one of the buttons. Then it returns the symbolic name of the selected button. .PP The following option-value pairs are supported: .TP \fB\-command\fR \fIstring\fR Specifies the prefix of a Tcl command to invoke when the user closes the dialog. The actual command consists of \fIstring\fR followed by a space and the name of the button clicked by the user to close the dialog. This is only available on macOS. .TP \fB\-default\fR \fIname\fR . \fIName\fR gives the symbolic name of the default button for this message window ( .QW ok , .QW cancel , and so on). See \fB\-type\fR for a list of the symbolic names. If this option is not specified, the first button in the dialog will be made the default. .TP \fB\-detail\fR \fIstring\fR . Specifies an auxiliary message to the main message given by the \fB\-message\fR option. The message detail will be presented beneath the main message and, where supported by the OS, in a less emphasized font than the main message. .TP \fB\-icon\fR \fIiconImage\fR . Specifies an icon to display. \fIIconImage\fR must be one of the following: \fBerror\fR, \fBinfo\fR, \fBquestion\fR or \fBwarning\fR. If this option is not specified, then the info icon will be displayed. .TP \fB\-message\fR \fIstring\fR . Specifies the message to display in this message box. The default value is an empty string. .TP \fB\-parent\fR \fIwindow\fR . Makes \fIwindow\fR the logical parent of the message box. The message box is displayed on top of its parent window. .TP \fB\-title\fR \fItitleString\fR . Specifies a string to display as the title of the message box. The default value is an empty string. .TP \fB\-type\fR \fIpredefinedType\fR . Arranges for a predefined set of buttons to be displayed. The following values are possible for \fIpredefinedType\fR: .RS .TP 18 \fBabortretryignore\fR . Displays three buttons whose symbolic names are \fBabort\fR, \fBretry\fR and \fBignore\fR. .TP 18 \fBok\fR . Displays one button whose symbolic name is \fBok\fR. This is the default. .TP 18 \fBokcancel\fR . Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are \fBok\fR and \fBcancel\fR. .TP 18 \fBretrycancel\fR . Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are \fBretry\fR and \fBcancel\fR. .TP 18 \fByesno\fR . Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are \fByes\fR and \fBno\fR. .TP 18 \fByesnocancel\fR . Displays three buttons whose symbolic names are \fByes\fR, \fBno\fR and \fBcancel\fR. .RE .PP .SH EXAMPLE .PP .CS set answer [\fBtk_messageBox\fR \-message "Really quit?" \e \-icon question \-type yesno \e \-detail "Select \e"Yes\e" to make the application exit"] switch \-\- $answer { yes exit no {\fBtk_messageBox\fR \-message "I know you like this application!" \e \-type ok} } .CE .SH KEYWORDS message box '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/nsimage.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 2022 Marc Culler '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 2022 Marc Culler '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH nsimage n 8.7 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME nsimage \- A Tk image type for macOS based on the NSImage class. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION |
︙ | ︙ | |||
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 | \fBimage create nsimage \fR?\fIname\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR? .PP creates a new nsimage and a command with the same name and returns its name. .SH OPTIONS .PP Valid \fIoptions\fR are: | < | < | | | | > | | | > > | > > | > < < | < | < | < | < | | < | < | | 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 | \fBimage create nsimage \fR?\fIname\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR? .PP creates a new nsimage and a command with the same name and returns its name. .SH OPTIONS .PP Valid \fIoptions\fR are: .TP \fB\-source\fR .PP The value of the \fB\-source\fR option is a string describing an NSimage. There are several ways to interpret this string, and the interpretation is determined by the value of the \fB\-as\fR option. This option is required. .PP .TP \fB\-as\fR .PP There are four possible values for the \fB-as\fR option which specify how the source string should be interpreted. The allowed values and their meanings are: .IP \fBname\fR .IP The source should be interpreted as the name of a named NSImage provided by the system. This is the default if the -as option is not specified. .IP \fBfile\fR .IP The source should be interpreted as a path to an image file in one of the formats understood by the NSImage class. .IP \fBpath\fR .IP The source should be interpreted as a path to an arbitrary file. The type of the file will be examined and the resulting image will be the system icon for files of that type. .IP \fBfiletype\fR .IP The source is interpreted as a string identifying a particular file type. It may be a filename extension, an Apple Uniform Type Identifier or a 4-character OSType value as used in the HFS filesystem. .TP \fB\-width\fR .PP The value of the \fIwidth\fR option is an integer specifying the width in pixels of the nsimage. If the width is not specified it will be computed from the height so as to preserve the aspect ration. If neither width nor height are specified then the width and height of the underlying NSImage will be used. .TP \fB\-height\fR .PP The value of the \fIheight\fR option is an integer specifying the height in pixels of the nsimage. If the height is not specified it will be computed from the height so as to preserve the aspect ration. If neither width nor height are specified then the width and height of the underlying NSImage will be used. .TP \fB\-radius\fR .PP The value of the \fIradius\fR option is an integer. If non-zero the image will be clipped to a rounded rectangle with the same width and height as the image, but with circular arcs of the specified radius cutting off the corners of the rectangle. .TP \fB\-ring\fR .PP The value of the \fIring\fR option is an integer. If non-zero then it specifies the thickness of a focus ring which will be drawn around the image using the control accent color specified in the System Preferences. The image is resized to reduce its width and height by twice the thickness of the ring. Note that this may create a small amount of distortion. The aspect ration of a non-square image will change slightly. .TP \fB\-alpha\fR .PP The value of the \fIalpha\fR option should be a floating point number between 0.0 and 1.0. This alpha value will be applied to each pixel of the nsimage, producing a partially transparent image. The default value is 1,0, which makes the image opaque. .TP \fB\-pressed\fR .PP The \fIpressed\fR option takes a boolean value. If the value is true or 1 then the image will be algorithmically modified to become darker in light mode or lighter in dark mode. The default is false. For an image button, the primary image should use the value false while the pressed image should be the same image but with the \fIpressed\fR option set to true. .TP \fB\-template\fR .PP The \fItemplate\fR option takes a boolean value. If the value is true or 1 then the image will be marked as being a template image. This means that the system will algorithmically convert the image to a light colored image when in dark mode. For the algorithm to work correctly the image must consist only of black pixels with alpha values. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/option.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 | \fBoption get \fIwindow name class\fR \fBoption readfile \fIfileName \fR?\fIpriority\fR? .fi .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBoption\fR command allows you to add entries to the Tk option | | < | < < < > | > | > | > | | 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 | \fBoption get \fIwindow name class\fR \fBoption readfile \fIfileName \fR?\fIpriority\fR? .fi .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBoption\fR command allows you to add entries to the Tk option database or to retrieve options from the database. The \fBadd\fR form of the command adds a new option to the database. \fIPattern\fR contains the option being specified, and consists of names and/or classes separated by asterisks or dots, in the usual X format (see \fBPATTERN FORMAT\fR). \fIValue\fR contains a text string to associate with \fIpattern\fR; this is the value that will be returned in calls to \fBTk_GetOption\fR or by invocations of the \fBoption get\fR command. If \fIpriority\fR is specified, it indicates the priority level for this option (see below for legal values); it defaults to \fBinteractive\fR. This command always returns an empty string. .PP The \fBoption clear\fR command clears the option database. Default options (from the \fBRESOURCE_MANAGER\fR property or the \fB.Xdefaults\fR file) will be reloaded automatically the next time an option is added to the database or removed from it. This command always returns an empty string. .PP The \fBoption get\fR command returns the value of the option specified for \fIwindow\fR under \fIname\fR and \fIclass\fR. If several entries in the option database match \fIwindow\fR, \fIname\fR, and \fIclass\fR, then the command returns whichever was created with highest \fIpriority\fR level. If there are several matching entries at the same priority level, then it returns whichever entry was most recently entered into the option database. If there are no matching entries, then the empty string is returned. .PP The \fBreadfile\fR form of the command reads \fIfileName\fR, which should have the standard format for an X resource database such as \fB.Xdefaults\fR, and adds all the options specified in that file to the option database. If \fIpriority\fR is specified, it indicates the priority level at which to enter the options; \fIpriority\fR defaults to \fBinteractive\fR. .PP The file is read through a channel which is in "utf-8" encoding, invalid byte sequences are automatically converted to valid ones. This means that encodings like ISO 8859-1 or cp1252 with high probability will work as well, but this cannot be guaranteed. This cannot be changed, setting the [encoding system] has no effect. .PP The \fIpriority\fR arguments to the \fBoption\fR command are normally specified symbolically using one of the following values: .TP \fBwidgetDefault\fR Level 20. Used for default values hard-coded into widgets. .TP \fBstartupFile\fR Level 40. Used for options specified in application-specific startup files. .TP \fBuserDefault\fR Level 60. Used for options specified in user-specific defaults files, such as \fB.Xdefaults\fR, resource databases loaded into the X server, or user-specific startup files. .TP \fBinteractive\fR Level 80. Used for options specified interactively after the application starts running. If \fIpriority\fR is not specified, it defaults to this level. .PP Any of the above keywords may be abbreviated. In addition, priorities may be specified numerically using integers between 0 and 100, inclusive. The numeric form is probably a bad idea except for new priority |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/options.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
56 57 58 59 60 61 62 | This option is typically only available in widgets displaying more than one element at a time (e.g. menus but not buttons). .OP \-activeforeground activeForeground Background Specifies foreground color to use when drawing active elements. See above for definition of active elements. .OP \-activerelief activeRelief Relief Specifies the 3-D effect desired for the active item of the widget. | | | 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 | This option is typically only available in widgets displaying more than one element at a time (e.g. menus but not buttons). .OP \-activeforeground activeForeground Background Specifies foreground color to use when drawing active elements. See above for definition of active elements. .OP \-activerelief activeRelief Relief Specifies the 3-D effect desired for the active item of the widget. See the \fB-relief\fR option for details. .OP \-anchor anchor Anchor Specifies how the information in a widget (e.g. text or a bitmap) is to be displayed in the widget. Must be one of the values \fBn\fR, \fBne\fR, \fBe\fR, \fBse\fR, \fBs\fR, \fBsw\fR, \fBw\fR, \fBnw\fR, or \fBcenter\fR. For example, \fBnw\fR means display the information such that its top-left corner is at the top-left corner of the widget. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
288 289 290 291 292 293 294 | If the value has any other form, then the traversal scripts take the value, append the name of the window to it (with a separator space), and evaluate the resulting string as a Tcl script. The script must return \fB0\fR, \fB1\fR, or an empty string: a \fB0\fR or \fB1\fR value specifies whether the window will receive the input focus, and an empty string results in the default decision described above. | | | 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 | If the value has any other form, then the traversal scripts take the value, append the name of the window to it (with a separator space), and evaluate the resulting string as a Tcl script. The script must return \fB0\fR, \fB1\fR, or an empty string: a \fB0\fR or \fB1\fR value specifies whether the window will receive the input focus, and an empty string results in the default decision described above. Note: this interpretation of the option is defined entirely by the Tcl scripts that implement traversal: the widget implementations ignore the option entirely, so you can change its meaning if you redefine the keyboard traversal scripts. .OP \-text text Text Specifies a string to be displayed inside the widget. The way in which the string is displayed depends on the particular widget and may be determined by other options, such as \fB\-anchor\fR or \fB\-justify\fR. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/pack.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | The \fBpack\fR command is used to communicate with the packer, a geometry manager that arranges the children of a parent by packing them in order around the edges of the parent. The \fBpack\fR command can have any of several forms, depending on the \fIoption\fR argument: .TP \fBpack \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR? | < < < < < < < < < < < < < > | > | > | > | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | | | < < < < | > > > > > | 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 | The \fBpack\fR command is used to communicate with the packer, a geometry manager that arranges the children of a parent by packing them in order around the edges of the parent. The \fBpack\fR command can have any of several forms, depending on the \fIoption\fR argument: .TP \fBpack \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR? If the first argument to \fBpack\fR is a window name (any value starting with .QW . ), then the command is processed in the same way as \fBpack configure\fR. .TP \fBpack configure \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR? The arguments consist of the names of one or more content windows followed by pairs of arguments that specify how to manage the content. See \fBTHE PACKER ALGORITHM\fR below for details on how the options are used by the packer. The following options are supported: .RS .TP \fB\-after \fIother\fR \fIOther\fR must the name of another window. Use its container as the container for the content, and insert the content just after \fIother\fR in the packing order. .TP \fB\-anchor \fIanchor\fR \fIAnchor\fR must be a valid anchor position such as \fBn\fR or \fBsw\fR; it specifies where to position each content in its parcel. Defaults to \fBcenter\fR. .TP \fB\-before \fIother\fR \fIOther\fR must the name of another window. Use its container as the container for the content, and insert the content just before \fIother\fR in the packing order. .TP \fB\-expand \fIboolean\fR Specifies whether the content should be expanded to consume extra space in their container. \fIBoolean\fR may have any proper boolean value, such as \fB1\fR or \fBno\fR. Defaults to 0. .TP \fB\-fill \fIstyle\fR If a content's parcel is larger than its requested dimensions, this option may be used to stretch the content. \fIStyle\fR must have one of the following values: .RS .TP \fBnone\fR Give the content its requested dimensions plus any internal padding requested with \fB\-ipadx\fR or \fB\-ipady\fR. This is the default. .TP \fBx\fR Stretch the content horizontally to fill the entire width of its parcel (except leave external padding as specified by \fB\-padx\fR). .TP \fBy\fR Stretch the content vertically to fill the entire height of its parcel (except leave external padding as specified by \fB\-pady\fR). .TP \fBboth\fR Stretch the content both horizontally and vertically. .RE .TP \fB\-in \fIcontainer\fR Insert the window at the end of the packing order for the container window given by \fIcontainer\fR. .TP \fB\-ipadx \fIamount\fR \fIAmount\fR specifies how much horizontal internal padding to leave on each side of the content. \fIAmount\fR must be a valid screen distance, such as \fB2\fR or \fB.5c\fR. It defaults to 0. .TP \fB\-ipady \fIamount\fR \fIAmount\fR specifies how much vertical internal padding to leave on each side of the content. \fIAmount\fR defaults to 0. .TP \fB\-padx \fIamount\fR \fIAmount\fR specifies how much horizontal external padding to leave on each side of the content. \fIAmount\fR may be a list of two values to specify padding for left and right separately. \fIAmount\fR defaults to 0. .TP \fB\-pady \fIamount\fR \fIAmount\fR specifies how much vertical external padding to leave on each side of the content. \fIAmount\fR may be a list of two values to specify padding for top and bottom separately. \fIAmount\fR defaults to 0. .TP \fB\-side \fIside\fR Specifies which side of the container the content will be packed against. Must be \fBleft\fR, \fBright\fR, \fBtop\fR, or \fBbottom\fR. Defaults to \fBtop\fR. .LP If no \fB\-in\fR, \fB\-after\fR or \fB\-before\fR option is specified then each of the content will be inserted at the end of the packing list for its parent unless it is already managed by the packer (in which case it will be left where it is). If one of these options is specified then all the content will be inserted at the specified point. If any of the content are already managed by the geometry manager then any unspecified options for them retain their previous values rather than receiving default values. .RE .TP \fBpack forget \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR? Removes each of the \fIwindow\fRs from the packing order for its container and unmaps their windows. The content will no longer be managed by the packer. .RS .PP .VS "TIP 518" If the last content window of the container becomes unmanaged, this will also send the virtual event \fB<<NoManagedChild>>\fR to the container; the container may choose to resize itself (or otherwise respond) to such a change. .VE "TIP 518" .RE .TP \fBpack info \fIwindow\fR Returns a list whose elements are the current configuration state of the window given by \fIwindow\fR in the same option-value form that might be specified to \fBpack configure\fR. The first two elements of the list are .QW "\fB\-in \fIcontainer\fR" where \fIcontainer\fR is the window's container. .TP \fBpack propagate \fIcontainer\fR ?\fIboolean\fR? If \fIboolean\fR has a true boolean value such as \fB1\fR or \fBon\fR then propagation is enabled for \fIcontainer\fR, which must be a window name (see \fBGEOMETRY PROPAGATION\fR below). If \fIboolean\fR has a false boolean value then propagation is disabled for \fIcontainer\fR. In either of these cases an empty string is returned. If \fIboolean\fR is omitted then the command returns \fB0\fR or \fB1\fR to indicate whether propagation is currently enabled for \fIcontainer\fR. Propagation is enabled by default. .TP \fBpack content \fIwindow\fR Returns a list of all of the content windows in the packing order for \fIwindow\fR. The order of the content windows in the list is the same as their order in the packing order. If \fIwindow\fR has no content then an empty string is returned. .TP \fBpack slaves \fIwindow\fR . Synonym for \fBpack content \fIwindow\fR. .SH "THE PACKER ALGORITHM" .PP For each container the packer maintains an ordered list of content |
︙ | ︙ | |||
299 300 301 302 303 304 305 | will be highest in the stacking order. Or, you can use the \fBraise\fR and \fBlower\fR commands to change the stacking order of either the container or the content. .SH EXAMPLE .PP .CS # Make the widgets | | | | | | | | | | | 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 | will be highest in the stacking order. Or, you can use the \fBraise\fR and \fBlower\fR commands to change the stacking order of either the container or the content. .SH EXAMPLE .PP .CS # Make the widgets label .t \-text "This widget is at the top" \-bg red label .b \-text "This widget is at the bottom" \-bg green label .l \-text "Left\enHand\enSide" label .r \-text "Right\enHand\enSide" text .mid \&.mid insert end "This layout is like Java's BorderLayout" # Lay them out \fBpack\fR .t \-side top \-fill x \fBpack\fR .b \-side bottom \-fill x \fBpack\fR .l \-side left \-fill y \fBpack\fR .r \-side right \-fill y \fBpack\fR .mid \-expand 1 \-fill both .CE .SH "SEE ALSO" grid(n), place(n) .SH KEYWORDS geometry manager, location, packer, parcel, propagation, size '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/palette.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH tk_setPalette n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME tk_setPalette, tk_bisque \- Modify the Tk color palette .SH SYNOPSIS | < > > < | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH tk_setPalette n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME tk_setPalette, tk_bisque \- Modify the Tk color palette .SH SYNOPSIS \fBtk_setPalette \fIbackground\fR .sp \fBtk_setPalette \fIname value \fR?\fIname value ...\fR? .sp \fBtk_bisque\fR .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBtk_setPalette\fR procedure changes the color scheme for Tk. It does this by modifying the colors of existing widgets and by changing the option database so that future widgets will use the new color scheme. If \fBtk_setPalette\fR is invoked with a single argument, the |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/panedwindow.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH panedwindow n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME panedwindow \- Create and manipulate 'panedwindow' split container widgets .SH SYNOPSIS | | | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | .TH panedwindow n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME panedwindow \- Create and manipulate 'panedwindow' split container widgets .SH SYNOPSIS \fBpanedwindow\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .SO \-background \-borderwidth \-cursor \-orient \-relief .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-handlepad handlePad HandlePad When sash handles are drawn, specifies the distance from the top or |
︙ | ︙ | |||
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 | or if resizing should be deferred until the sash is placed (false). In the latter case, a .QW ghost version of the sash is displayed during the resizing to show where the panes will be resized to when releasing the mouse button. This .QW ghost version of the sash is the proxy. It's rendering can be configured | | | | | | 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 | or if resizing should be deferred until the sash is placed (false). In the latter case, a .QW ghost version of the sash is displayed during the resizing to show where the panes will be resized to when releasing the mouse button. This .QW ghost version of the sash is the proxy. It's rendering can be configured using the \fB-proxybackground\fR, \fB-proxyborderwidth\fR and \fB-proxyrelief\fR options. .OP \-proxybackground proxyBackground ProxyBackground Background color to use when drawing the proxy. If an empty string, the value of the \fB-background\fR option will be used. .OP \-proxyborderwidth proxyBorderWidth ProxyBorderWidth Specifies the borderwidth of the proxy. May be any value accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. .OP \-proxyrelief proxyRelief ProxyRelief Relief to use when drawing the proxy. May be any of the standard Tk relief values. If an empty string, the value of the \fB-sashrelief\fR option will be used. .OP \-sashcursor sashCursor SashCursor Mouse cursor to use when over a sash. If null, \fBsb_h_double_arrow\fR will be used for horizontal panedwindows, and \fBsb_v_double_arrow\fR will be used for vertical panedwindows. .OP \-sashpad sashPad SashPad Specifies the amount of padding to leave of each side of a sash. May |
︙ | ︙ | |||
94 95 96 97 98 99 100 | .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .CE \fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as the panedwindow widget's path name. \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for panedwindow widgets: | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < > | > > | > > | > > | > > | > < < < | 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 | .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .CE \fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as the panedwindow widget's path name. \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for panedwindow widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBadd \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR? . Add one or more windows to the panedwindow, each in a separate pane. The arguments consist of the names of one or more windows followed by pairs of arguments that specify how to manage the windows. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBconfigure\fR subcommand. .TP \fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR . Returns the current value of the configuration option given by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBpanedwindow\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBconfigure \fR?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? . Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBpanedwindow\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBforget \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR? . Remove the pane containing \fIwindow\fR from the panedwindow. All geometry management options for \fIwindow\fR will be forgotten. .TP \fIpathName \fBidentify \fIx y\fR . Identify the panedwindow component underneath the point given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR, in window coordinates. If the point is over a sash or a sash handle, the result is a two element list containing the index of the sash or handle, and a word indicating whether it is over a sash or a handle, such as {0 sash} or {2 handle}. If the point is over any other part of the panedwindow, the result is an empty list. .TP \fIpathName \fBpanecget \fIwindow option\fR . Query a management option for \fIwindow\fR. \fIOption\fR may be any value allowed by the \fBpaneconfigure\fR subcommand. .TP \fIpathName \fBpaneconfigure \fIwindow \fR?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? . Query or modify the management options for \fIwindow\fR. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. The following options are supported: .RS .TP \fB\-after \fIwindow\fR . Insert the window after the window specified. \fIwindow\fR should be the name of a window already managed by \fIpathName\fR. .TP \fB\-before \fIwindow\fR . Insert the window before the window specified. \fIwindow\fR should be the name of a window already managed by \fIpathName\fR. .TP \fB\-height \fIsize\fR . Specify a height for the window. The height will be the outer dimension of the window including its border, if any. If \fIsize\fR is an empty string, or if \fB\-height\fR is not specified, then the height requested internally by the window will be used initially; the height may later be adjusted by the movement of sashes in the panedwindow. \fISize\fR may be any value accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. .TP \fB\-hide \fIboolean\fR . Controls the visibility of a pane. When the \fIboolean\fR is true (according to \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR) the pane will not be visible, but it will still be maintained in the list of panes. .TP \fB\-minsize \fIn\fR . Specifies that the size of the window cannot be made less than \fIn\fR. This constraint only affects the size of the widget in the paned dimension \(em the x dimension for horizontal panedwindows, the y dimension for vertical panedwindows. May be any value accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. .TP \fB\-padx \fIn\fR . Specifies a non-negative value indicating how much extra space to leave on each side of the window in the X-direction. The value may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. .TP \fB\-pady \fIn\fR . Specifies a non-negative value indicating how much extra space to leave on each side of the window in the Y-direction. The value may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. .TP \fB\-sticky \fIstyle\fR . If a window's pane is larger than the requested dimensions of the window, this option may be used to position (or stretch) the window within its pane. \fIStyle\fR is a string that contains zero or more of the characters \fBn\fR, \fBs\fR, \fBe\fR or \fBw\fR. The string can optionally contains spaces or commas, but they are ignored. Each letter refers to a side (north, south, east, or west) that the window will .QW stick to. If both \fBn\fR and \fBs\fR (or \fBe\fR and \fBw\fR) are specified, the window will be stretched to fill the entire height (or width) of its cavity. .TP \fB\-stretch \fIwhen\fR . Controls how extra space is allocated to each of the panes. \fIWhen\fR is one of \fBalways\fR, \fBfirst\fR, \fBlast\fR, \fBmiddle\fR, and \fBnever\fR. The panedwindow will calculate the required size of all its panes. Any remaining (or deficit) space will be distributed to those panes marked for stretching. The space will be distributed based on each panes current ratio of the whole. The \fIwhen\fR values have the following definition: .RS .TP \fBalways\fR . This pane will always stretch. .TP \fBfirst\fR . Only if this pane is the first pane (left-most or top-most) will it stretch. .TP \fBlast\fR . Only if this pane is the last pane (right-most or bottom-most) will it stretch. This is the default value. .TP \fBmiddle\fR . Only if this pane is not the first or last pane will it stretch. .TP \fBnever\fR . This pane will never stretch. .RE .TP \fB\-width \fIsize\fR . Specify a width for the window. The width will be the outer dimension of the window including its border, if any. If \fIsize\fR is an empty string, or if \fB\-width\fR is not specified, then the width requested internally by the window will be used initially; the width may later be adjusted by the movement of sashes in the panedwindow. \fISize\fR may be any value accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBpanes\fR . Returns an ordered list of the widgets managed by \fIpathName\fR. .TP \fIpathName \fBproxy \fR?\fIargs\fR? . This command is used to query and change the position of the sash proxy, used for rubberband-style pane resizing. It can take any of the following forms: .RS |
︙ | ︙ | |||
294 295 296 297 298 299 300 | . Remove the proxy from the display. .TP \fIpathName \fBproxy place \fIx y\fR . Place the proxy at the given \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR coordinates. .RE | < < | 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 | . Remove the proxy from the display. .TP \fIpathName \fBproxy place \fIx y\fR . Place the proxy at the given \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR coordinates. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBsash \fR?\fIargs\fR? This command is used to query and change the position of sashes in the panedwindow. It can take any of the following forms: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBsash coord \fIindex\fR . Return the current x and y coordinate pair for the sash given by |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/photo.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
39 40 41 42 43 44 45 | internally in full color (32 bits per pixel), and is displayed using dithering if necessary. Image data for a photo image can be obtained from a file or a string, or it can be supplied from C code through a procedural interface. At present, only .VS 8.6 PNG, .VE 8.6 | < < < < | | < < | < < < < < < | 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 | internally in full color (32 bits per pixel), and is displayed using dithering if necessary. Image data for a photo image can be obtained from a file or a string, or it can be supplied from C code through a procedural interface. At present, only .VS 8.6 PNG, .VE 8.6 GIF and PPM/PGM formats are supported, but an interface exists to allow additional image file formats to be added easily. A photo image is (semi)transparent if the image data it was obtained from had transparency informaton. In regions where no image data has been supplied, it is fully transparent. Transparency may also be modified with the \fBtransparency set\fR subcommand. .SH "CREATING PHOTOS" .PP Like all images, photos are created using the \fBimage create\fR command. Photos support the following \fIoptions\fR: .TP \fB\-data \fIstring\fR . Specifies the contents of the image as a string. .VS 8.7 The string should contain data in the default list-of-lists form, .VE 8.7 binary data or, for some formats, base64-encoded data (this is currently guaranteed to be supported for PNG and GIF images). The format of the string must be one of those for which there is an image file format handler that will accept string data. If both the \fB\-data\fR and \fB\-file\fR options are specified, the \fB\-file\fR option takes precedence. .TP \fB\-format\fR {\fIformat-name\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR?} . Specifies the name of the file format for the data specified with the \fB\-data\fR or \fB\-file\fR option and optional arguments passed to the format handler. Note: the value of this option must be a Tcl list. This means that the braces may be omitted if the argument has only one word. Also, instead of braces, double quotes may be used for quoting. .TP \fB\-file \fIname\fR . \fIname\fR gives the name of a file that is to be read to supply data for the photo image. The file format must be one of those for which there is an image file format handler that can read data. .TP \fB\-gamma \fIvalue\fR . Specifies that the colors allocated for displaying this image in a window should be corrected for a non-linear display with the specified gamma exponent value. (The intensity produced by most CRT displays is a power function of the input value, to a good approximation; gamma is the exponent and is typically around 2). The value specified must be greater than zero. The default value is one (no correction). In general, values greater than one will make the image lighter, and values less than one will make it darker. .TP \fB\-height \fInumber\fR . Specifies the height of the image, in pixels. This option is useful primarily in situations where the user wishes to build up the contents of the image piece by piece. A value of zero (the default) allows the image to expand or shrink vertically to fit the data stored in it. .VS 8.7 .TP \fB\-metadata \fImetadata\fR . Set the metadata dictionary of the image. Additional keys may be set within the metadata dictionary of the image, if image data is processed due to a \fB\-file\fR or \fB\-data\fR options and the driver outputs any metadata keys. See section \fBMETADATA DICTIONARY\fR below. .VE 8.7 .TP \fB\-palette \fIpalette-spec\fR . Specifies the resolution of the color cube to be allocated for displaying this image, and thus the number of colors used from the colormaps of the windows where it is displayed. The \fIpalette-spec\fR string may be either a single decimal number, specifying the number of shades of gray to use, or three decimal numbers separated by slashes (/), specifying the number of shades of red, green and blue to use, respectively. If the first form (a single number) is used, the image will be displayed in monochrome (i.e., grayscale). .TP \fB\-width \fInumber\fR . Specifies the width of the image, in pixels. This option is useful primarily in situations where the user wishes to build up the contents of the image piece by piece. A value of zero (the default) allows the image to expand or shrink horizontally to fit the data stored in it. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
159 160 161 162 163 164 165 | of the image, if necessary, to accommodate the data written to the image, unless the user has specified non-zero values for the \fB\-width\fR and/or \fB\-height\fR configuration options, in which case the width and/or height, respectively, of the image will not be changed. .PP The following commands are possible for photo images: | < | < < | < | < | < < < < < < < | < < | < < < | < < | | | | < | < | | < | < | < | < < | | < < < < > | < > | > > | < > | < < < | < < < | | | | 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 | of the image, if necessary, to accommodate the data written to the image, unless the user has specified non-zero values for the \fB\-width\fR and/or \fB\-height\fR configuration options, in which case the width and/or height, respectively, of the image will not be changed. .PP The following commands are possible for photo images: .TP \fIimageName \fBblank\fR . Blank the image; that is, set the entire image to have no data, so it will be displayed as transparent, and the background of whatever window it is displayed in will show through. The metadata dict of the image is not changed. .TP \fIimageName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR . Returns the current value of the configuration option given by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBimage create\fR \fBphoto\fR command. .TP \fIimageName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? . Query or modify the configuration options for the image. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for \fIimageName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBimage create\fR \fBphoto\fR command. .VS 8.7 Note: setting the \fB\-metadata\fR option without any other option will not invoke the image format driver to recreate the bitmap. .VE 8.7 .TP \fIimageName \fBcopy\fR \fIsourceImage\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR? . Copies a region from the image called \fIsourceImage\fR (which must be a photo image) to the image called \fIimageName\fR, possibly with pixel zooming and/or subsampling. If no options are specified, this command copies the whole of \fIsourceImage\fR into \fIimageName\fR, starting at coordinates (0,0) in \fIimageName\fR. The following options may be specified: .RS .TP \fB\-from \fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR . Specifies a rectangular sub-region of the source image to be copied. (\fIx1,y1\fR) and (\fIx2,y2\fR) specify diagonally opposite corners of the rectangle. If \fIx2\fR and \fIy2\fR are not specified, the default value is the bottom-right corner of the source image. The pixels copied will include the left and top edges of the specified rectangle but not the bottom or right edges. If the \fB\-from\fR option is not given, the default is the whole source image. .TP \fB\-to \fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR . Specifies a rectangular sub-region of the destination image to be affected. (\fIx1,y1\fR) and (\fIx2,y2\fR) specify diagonally opposite corners of the rectangle. If \fIx2\fR and \fIy2\fR are not specified, the default value is (\fIx1,y1\fR) plus the size of the source region (after subsampling and zooming, if specified). If \fIx2\fR and \fIy2\fR are specified, the source region will be replicated if necessary to fill the destination region in a tiled fashion. .TP \fB\-shrink\fR . Specifies that the size of the destination image should be reduced, if necessary, so that the region being copied into is at the bottom-right corner of the image. This option will not affect the width or height of the image if the user has specified a non-zero value for the \fB\-width\fR or \fB\-height\fR configuration option, respectively. .TP \fB\-zoom \fIx y\fR . Specifies that the source region should be magnified by a factor of \fIx\fR in the X direction and \fIy\fR in the Y direction. If \fIy\fR is not given, the default value is the same as \fIx\fR. With this option, each pixel in the source image will be expanded into a block of \fIx\fR x \fIy\fR pixels in the destination image, all the same color. \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR must be greater than 0. .TP \fB\-subsample \fIx y\fR . Specifies that the source image should be reduced in size by using only every \fIx\fRth pixel in the X direction and \fIy\fRth pixel in the Y direction. Negative values will cause the image to be flipped about the Y or X axes, respectively. If \fIy\fR is not given, the default value is the same as \fIx\fR. .TP \fB\-compositingrule \fIrule\fR . Specifies how transparent pixels in the source image are combined with the destination image. When a compositing rule of \fIoverlay\fR is set, the old contents of the destination image are visible, as if the source image were printed on a piece of transparent film and placed over the top of the destination. When a compositing rule of \fIset\fR is set, the old contents of the destination image are discarded and the source image is used as-is. The default compositing rule is \fIoverlay\fR. .RE .TP \fIimageName \fBdata\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR? . Returns image data in the form of a string. .VS 8.7 The format of the string depends on the format handler. By default, a human readable format as a list of lists of pixel data is used, other formats can be chosen with the \fB-format\fR option. See \fBIMAGE FORMATS\fR below for details. .VE 8.7 The following options may be specified: .RS .TP \fB\-background\fI color\fR . If the color is specified, the data will not contain any transparency information. In all transparent pixels the color will be replaced by the specified color. .TP \fB\-format\fR {\fIformat-name\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR?} . Specifies the name of the image file format handler to use and, optionally, arguments to the format handler. Specifically, this subcommand searches for the first handler whose name matches an initial substring of \fIformat-name\fR and which has the capability to write a string containing this image data. .VS 8.7 If this option is not given, this subcommand uses the default format that consists of a list (one element per row) of lists (one element per pixel/column) of colors in .QW \fB#\fIrrggbb\fR format (see \fBIMAGE FORMATS\fR below). .VE 8.7 Note: the value of this option must be a Tcl list. This means that the braces may be omitted if the argument has only one word. Also, instead of braces, double quotes may be used for quoting. .TP \fB\-from \fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR . Specifies a rectangular region of \fIimageName\fR to be returned. If only \fIx1\fR and \fIy1\fR are specified, the region extends from \fI(x1,y1)\fR to the bottom-right corner of \fIimageName\fR. If all four coordinates are given, they specify diagonally opposite corners of the rectangular region, including x1,y1 and excluding x2,y2. The default, if this option is not given, is the whole image. .TP \fB\-grayscale\fR . If this options is specified, the data will not contain color information. All pixel data will be transformed into grayscale. .VS 8.7 .TP \fB\-metadata\fR \fImetadata\fR . Image format handler may use metadata to be included in the returned data string. The specified \fImetadata\fR is passed to the driver for inclusion in the data. If no \fB\-metadata\fR option is given, the current metadata of the image is used. .VE 8.7 .RE \fIimageName \fBget\fR \fIx y\fR ?\fB-withalpha\fR? . Returns the color of the pixel at coordinates (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR) in the image as a list of three integers between 0 and 255, representing the red, green and blue components respectively. If the \fB-withalpha\fR option is specified, the returned list will have a fourth element representing the alpha value of the pixel as an integer between 0 and 255. .VE 8.7 .TP \fIimageName \fBput\fR \fIdata\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR? . Sets pixels in \fI imageName\fR to the data specified in \fIdata\fR. .VS 8.7 This command searches the list of image file format handlers for a handler that can interpret the data in \fIdata\fR, and then reads the image encoded within into \fIimageName\fR (the destination image). See \fBIMAGE FORMATS\fR below for details on formats for image data. .VE 8.7 The following options may be specified: .RS .TP \fB\-format\fR {\fIformat-name\fR ?\fIoption value ..\fR?} . Specifies the format of the image data in \fIdata\fR and, optionally, arguments to be passed to the format handler. Specifically, only image file format handlers whose names begin with \fIformat-name\fR will be used while searching for an image data format handler to read the data. Note: the value of this option must be a Tcl list. This means that the braces may be omitted if the argument has only one word. Also, instead of braces, double quotes may be used for quoting. .VS 8.7 .TP \fB\-metadata\fR \fImetadata\fR . A specified \fImetadata\fR is passed to the image format driver when interpreting the data. Note: The current metadata of the image is not passed to the format driver and is not changed by the command. .VE 8.7 .TP \fB\-to \fIx1 y1\fR ?\fIx2 y2\fR? . Specifies the coordinates of the top-left corner (\fIx1\fR,\fIy1\fR) of the region of \fIimageName\fR into which the image data will be copied. The default position is (0,0). If \fIx2\fR,\fIy2\fR is given and \fIdata\fR is not large enough to cover the rectangle specified by this option, the image data extracted will be tiled so it covers the entire destination rectangle. If the region specified with this opion is smaller than the supplied \fIdata\fR, the exceeding data is silently discarded. Note that if \fIdata\fR specifies a single color value, then a region extending to the bottom-right corner represented by (\fIx2\fR,\fIy2\fR) will be filled with that color. .RE .TP \fIimageName \fBread\fR \fIfilename\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR? . Reads image data from the file named \fIfilename\fR into the image. This command first searches the list of image file format handlers for a handler that can interpret the data in \fIfilename\fR, and then reads the image in \fIfilename\fR into \fIimageName\fR (the destination image). The following options may be specified: .RS .TP \fB\-format {\fIformat-name\fR ?\fIoption value ..\fR?} . Specifies the format of the image data in \fIfilename\fR and, optionally, additional options to the format handler. Specifically, only image file format handlers whose names begin with \fIformat-name\fR will be used while searching for an image data format handler to read the data. Note: the value of this option must be a Tcl list. This means that the braces may be omitted if the argument has only one word. Also, instead of braces, double quotes may be used for quoting. .TP \fB\-from \fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR . Specifies a rectangular sub-region of the image file data to be copied to the destination image. If only \fIx1\fR and \fIy1\fR are specified, the region extends from (\fIx1,y1\fR) to the bottom-right corner of the image in the image file. If all four coordinates are specified, they specify diagonally opposite corners or the region. The default, if this option is not specified, is the whole of the image in the image file. .VS 8.7 .TP \fB\-metadata\fR \fImetadata\fR . A specified \fImetadata\fR is passed to the image format driver when interpreting the data. Note: The current metadata of the image is not passed to the format driver and is not changed by the command. .VE 8.7 .TP \fB\-shrink\fR . If this option, the size of \fIimageName\fR will be reduced, if necessary, so that the region into which the image file data are read is at the bottom-right corner of the \fIimageName\fR. This option will not affect the width or height of the image if the user has specified a non-zero value for the \fB\-width\fR or \fB\-height\fR configuration option, respectively. .TP \fB\-to \fIx y\fR . Specifies the coordinates of the top-left corner of the region of \fIimageName\fR into which data from \fIfilename\fR are to be read. The default is (0,0). .RE .TP \fIimageName \fBredither\fR . The dithering algorithm used in displaying photo images propagates quantization errors from one pixel to its neighbors. If the image data for \fIimageName\fR is supplied in pieces, the dithered image may not be exactly correct. Normally the difference is not noticeable, but if it is a problem, this command can be used to recalculate the dithered image in each window where the image is displayed. .TP \fIimageName \fBtransparency \fIsubcommand \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? . Allows examination and manipulation of the transparency information in the photo image. Several subcommands are available: .RS .VS 8.7 .TP \fIimageName \fBtransparency get \fIx y\fR ?\fB-alpha\fR? . Returns true if the pixel at (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR) is fully transparent, false otherwise. If the option \fB-alpha\fR is passed, returns the alpha value of the pixel instead, as an integer in the range 0 to 255. .VE 8.7 .VS 8.7 .TP \fIimageName \fBtransparency set \fIx y\fR \fInewVal\fR ?\fB-alpha\fR? . Change the transparency of the pixel at (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR) to \fInewVal.\fR If no additional option is passed, \fInewVal\fR is interpreted as a boolean and the pixel is made fully transparent if that value is true, fully opaque otherwise. If the \fB-alpha\fR option is passed, \fInewVal\fR is interpreted as an integral alpha value for the pixel, which must be in the range 0 to 255. .VE 8.7 .RE .TP \fIimageName \fBwrite \fIfilename\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR? . Writes image data from \fIimageName\fR to a file named \fIfilename\fR. The following options may be specified: .RS .TP \fB\-background\fI color\fR . If the color is specified, the data will not contain any transparency information. In all transparent pixels the color will be replaced by the specified color. .TP \fB\-format\fR {\fIformat-name\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR?} . Specifies the name of the image file format handler to be used to write the data to the file and, optionally, options to pass to the format handler. Specifically, this subcommand searches for the first handler whose name matches an initial substring of \fIformat-name\fR and which has the capability to write an image file. If this option is not given, the format is guessed from the file extension. If that cannot be determined, this subcommand uses the first handler that has the capability to write an image file. Note: the value of this option must be a Tcl list. This means that the braces may be omitted if the argument has only one word. Also, instead of braces, double quotes may be used for quoting. .TP \fB\-from \fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR . Specifies a rectangular region of \fIimageName\fR to be written to the image file. If only \fIx1\fR and \fIy1\fR are specified, the region extends from \fI(x1,y1)\fR to the bottom-right corner of \fIimageName\fR. If all four coordinates are given, they specify diagonally opposite corners of the rectangular region. The default, if this option is not given, is the whole image. .TP \fB\-grayscale\fR . If this options is specified, the data will not contain color information. All pixel data will be transformed into grayscale. .VS 8.7 .TP \fB\-metadata\fR \fBmetadata\fR . Image format handler may use metadata to be included in the written file. The specified \fImetadata\fR is passed to the driver for inclusion in the file. If no \fB\-metadata\fR option is given, the current metadata of the image is used. .VE 8.7 .RE .SH "IMAGE FORMATS" .PP The photo image code is structured to allow handlers for additional image file formats to be added easily. The photo image code maintains a list of these handlers. Handlers are added to the list by registering them with a call to \fBTk_CreatePhotoImageFormat\fR. The standard Tk distribution comes with handlers for PPM/PGM, PNG and GIF formats, .VS 8.7 as well as the \fBdefault\fR handler to encode/decode image data in a human readable form. .VE 8.7 These handlers are automatically registered on initialization. .PP When reading an image file or processing string data specified with |
︙ | ︙ | |||
596 597 598 599 600 601 602 | .SS "THE DEFAULT IMAGE HANDLER" .PP The \fBdefault\fR image handler cannot be used to read or write data from/to a file. Its sole purpose is to encode and decode image data in string form in a clear text, human readable, form. The \fIimageName\fR \fBdata\fR subcommand uses this handler when no other format is specified. When reading image data from a string with \fIimageName\fR | | | < | < < < < < < | < < | < < > | < < | | < < | | | | | < < | | < < | | < < | | < < < < | < < | | < < | | < < > < | 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 | .SS "THE DEFAULT IMAGE HANDLER" .PP The \fBdefault\fR image handler cannot be used to read or write data from/to a file. Its sole purpose is to encode and decode image data in string form in a clear text, human readable, form. The \fIimageName\fR \fBdata\fR subcommand uses this handler when no other format is specified. When reading image data from a string with \fIimageName\fR \fBput\fR or the \fB-data\fR option, the default handler is treated as the other handlers. .PP Image data in the \fBdefault\fR string format is a (top-to-bottom) list of scan-lines, with each scan-line being a (left-to-right) list of pixel data. Every scan-line has the same length. The color and, optionally, alpha value of each pixel is specified in any of the forms described in the \fBCOLOR FORMATS\fR section below. .VE 8.7 .SS "FORMAT SUBOPTIONS" .PP .VS 8.6 Image formats may support sub-options, wich ahre specified using additional words in the value to the \fB\-format\fR option. These suboptions can affect how image data is read or written to file or string. The nature and values of these options is up to the format handler. The built-in handlers support these suboptions: .VS 8.7 .TP \fBdefault \-colorformat\fI formatType\fR . The option is allowed when writing image data to a string with \fIimageName\fR \fBdata\fR. Specifies the format to use for the color string of each pixel. \fIformatType\fR may be one of: \fBrgb\fR to encode pixel data in the form \fB#\fIRRGGBB\fR, \fBrgba\fR to encode pixel data in the form \fB#\fIRRGGBBAA\fR or \fBlist\fR to encode pixel data as a list with four elements. See \fBCOLOR FORMATS\fR below for details. The default is \fBrgb\fR. .VE 8.7 .TP \fBgif \-index\fI indexValue\fR . The option has effect when reading image data from a file. When parsing a multi-part GIF image, Tk normally only accesses the first image. By giving the \fB\-index\fR sub-option, the \fIindexValue\fR'th value may be used instead. The \fIindexValue\fR must be an integer from 0 up to the number of image parts in the GIF data. .TP \fBpng \-alpha\fI alphaValue\fR . The option has effect when reading image data from a file. Specifies an additional alpha filtering for the overall image, which allows the background on which the image is displayed to show through. This usually also has the effect of desaturating the image. The \fIalphaValue\fR must be between 0.0 and 1.0. .TP \fBsvg \-dpi\fI dpiValue\fB \-scale\fI scaleValue\fB \-scaletowidth \fI width\fB \-scaletoheight\fI height\fR . \fIdpiValue\fR is used in conversion between given coordinates and screen resolution. The value must be greater than 0 and the default value is 96. \fIscaleValue\fR is used to scale the resulting image. The value must be greater than 0 and the default value is 1. \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are the width or height that the image will be adjusted to. Only one parameter among \fB\-scale\fR, \fB\-scaletowidth\fR and \fB\-scaletoheight\fR can be given at a time and the aspect ratio of the original image is always preserved. The svg format supports a wide range of SVG features, but the full SVG standard is not available, for instance the 'text' feature is missing and silently ignored when reading the SVG data. The supported SVG features are: . .RS \fB elements:\fR g, path, rect, circle, ellipse, line, polyline, polygon, linearGradient, radialGradient, stop, defs, svg, style .PP \fB attributes:\fR width, height, viewBox, preserveAspectRatio with none, xMin, xMid, xMax, yMin, yMid, yMax, slice .PP \fB gradient attributes:\fR gradientUnits with objectBoundingBox, gradientTransform, cx, cy, r fx, fy x1, y1, x2, y2 spreadMethod with pad, reflect or repeat, xlink:href .PP \fB poly attributes: \fR points .PP \fB line attributes: \fR x1, y1, x2, y2 .PP \fB ellipse attributes: \fR cx, cy, rx, ry .PP \fB circle attributes: \fR cx, cy, r .PP \fB rectangle attributes: \fR x, y, width, height, rx, ry .PP \fB path attributes: \fR d with m, M, l, L, h, H, v, V, c, C, s, S, q, Q, t, T, a, A, z, Z .PP \fB style attributes: \fR display with none, visibility, hidden, visible, fill with nonzero and evenodd, opacity, fill-opacity, stroke, stroke-width, stroke-dasharray, stroke-dashoffset, stroke-opacity, stroke-linecap with butt, round and square, stroke-linejoin with miter, round and bevel, stroke-miterlimit fill-rule, font-size, transform with matrix, translate, scale, rotate, skewX and skewY, stop-color, stop-opacity, offset, id, class .RE . Currently only SVG images reading and conversion into (pixel-based format) photos is supported: Tk does not (yet) support bundling photo images in SVG vector graphics. .VE 8.6 .VS 8.7 .SH "COLOR FORMATS" .PP The default image handler can represent/parse color and alpha values of a pixel in one of the formats listed below. If a color format does not contain transparency information, full opacity is assumed. The |
︙ | ︙ | |||
817 818 819 820 821 822 823 | comments. Image format drivers may output metadata when image data is parsed, or may use metadata to be included in image files or formats. .SS "METADATA KEYS (MULTIPLE FORMATS)" .PP Each image format driver supports an individual set of metadata dictionary keys. Predefined keys are: | > | > > | > > | > | | | | | < | | < | | | | | | | | | 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 | comments. Image format drivers may output metadata when image data is parsed, or may use metadata to be included in image files or formats. .SS "METADATA KEYS (MULTIPLE FORMATS)" .PP Each image format driver supports an individual set of metadata dictionary keys. Predefined keys are: .TP DPI . Horizontal image resolution in DPI as a double value. Supported by format \fBpng\fR. .TP aspect . Aspect ratio horizontal divided by vertical as double value. Supported by formats \fBgif\fR and \fBpng\fR. .TP comment . Image text comment. Supported by formats \fBgif\fR and \fBpng\fR. .PP It is valid to set any key in the metadata dict. A format driver will ignore keys it does not handle. .SS "METADATA KEYS FOR ANIMATED GIF INFORMATION" .PP The following metadata keys are reported when reading a \fBgif\fR format file. They are typically used in conjunction with the \fI-index\fR option of an animated \fBgif\fR file to properly display the subimage sequence. The options are linked to each subimage selected by \fI-index\fR. .TP \fBdelay time\fR \fItime\fR . Update delay time in 10ms unit. This key is only present, if delay time is not 0. .TP \fBdisposal method\fR \fImethod\fR . Disposal method of the preceeding image, if given for the current image. Possible values are: \fIdo not dispose\fR, \fIrestore to background color\fR, \fIrestore to previous\fR. .TP \fBuser interaction\fR \fIbool\fR . The key is present with a value of 1, if user interaction is specified. Otherwise, the key is not present. .TP \fBupdate region\fR \fIX0\fR, \fIY0\fR, \fIwidth\fR, \fIheight\fR . Update region of the current subimage, if subimage has not the same size as the full image. The pixel outside of this box are all fully transparent. .PP .VE 8.7 .SH CREDITS .PP The photo image type was designed and implemented by Paul Mackerras, based on his earlier photo widget and some suggestions from John Ousterhout. .SH EXAMPLE .PP Load an image from a file and tile it to the size of a window, which is useful for producing a tiled background: .PP .CS # These lines should be called once \fBimage create photo\fR untiled \-file "theFile.ppm" \fBimage create photo\fR tiled # These lines should be called whenever .someWidget changes # size; a <Configure> binding is useful here set width [winfo width .someWidget] set height [winfo height .someWidget] tiled \fBcopy\fR untiled \-to 0 0 $width $height \-shrink .CE .PP .VS 8.6 The PNG image loader allows the application of an additional alpha factor during loading, which is useful for generating images suitable for disabled buttons: .PP .CS \fBimage create photo\fR icon \-file "icon.png" \fBimage create photo\fR iconDisabled \-file "icon.png" \e \-format "png \-alpha 0.5" button .b \-image icon \-disabledimage iconDisabled .CE .VE 8.6 .PP .VS 8.7 Create a green box with a simple shadow effect .PP .CS |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/place.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 | in response to changes in the size of the container. Lastly, the placer allows you to mix these styles of placement so that, for example, the content has a fixed width and height but is centered inside the container. .PP .TP \fBplace \fIwindow option value \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR? | < < < < < < < | 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 | in response to changes in the size of the container. Lastly, the placer allows you to mix these styles of placement so that, for example, the content has a fixed width and height but is centered inside the container. .PP .TP \fBplace \fIwindow option value \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR? Arrange for the placer to manage the geometry of a content whose pathName is \fIwindow\fR. The remaining arguments consist of one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs that specify the way in which \fIwindow\fR's geometry is managed. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBplace configure\fR command. .TP \fBplace configure \fIwindow \fR?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? Query or modify the geometry options of the content given by \fIwindow\fR. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, this command returns a list describing the available options (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. .RS .PP The following \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are supported: .TP \fB\-anchor \fIwhere\fR \fIWhere\fR specifies which point of \fIwindow\fR is to be positioned at the (x,y) location selected by the \fB\-x\fR, \fB\-y\fR, \fB\-relx\fR, and \fB\-rely\fR options. The anchor point is in terms of the outer area of \fIwindow\fR including its border, if any. Thus if \fIwhere\fR is \fBse\fR then the lower-right corner of \fIwindow\fR's border will appear at the given (x,y) location in the container. The anchor position defaults to \fBnw\fR. .TP \fB\-bordermode \fImode\fR \fIMode\fR determines the degree to which borders within the container are used in determining the placement of the content. The default and most common value is \fBinside\fR. In this case the placer considers the area of the container to be the innermost area of the container, inside any border: an option of \fB\-x 0\fR corresponds to an x-coordinate just inside the border and an option of \fB\-relwidth 1.0\fR |
︙ | ︙ | |||
87 88 89 90 91 92 93 | outside its container, as with the options \fB\-x 0 \-y 0 \-anchor ne\fR. Lastly, \fImode\fR may be specified as \fBignore\fR, in which case borders are ignored: the area of the container is considered to be its official X area, which includes any internal border but no external border. A bordermode of \fBignore\fR is probably not very useful. .RE | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | > > > | 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 | outside its container, as with the options \fB\-x 0 \-y 0 \-anchor ne\fR. Lastly, \fImode\fR may be specified as \fBignore\fR, in which case borders are ignored: the area of the container is considered to be its official X area, which includes any internal border but no external border. A bordermode of \fBignore\fR is probably not very useful. .RE .TP \fB\-height \fIsize\fR \fISize\fR specifies the height for \fIwindow\fR in screen units (i.e. any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR). The height will be the outer dimension of \fIwindow\fR including its border, if any. If \fIsize\fR is an empty string, or if no \fB\-height\fR or \fB\-relheight\fR option is specified, then the height requested internally by the window will be used. .TP \fB\-in \fIcontainer\fR \fIContainer\fR specifies the path name of the window relative to which \fIwindow\fR is to be placed. \fIContainer\fR must either be \fIwindow\fR's parent or a descendant of \fIwindow\fR's parent. In addition, \fIcontainer\fR and \fIwindow\fR must both be descendants of the same top-level window. These restrictions are necessary to guarantee that \fIwindow\fR is visible whenever \fIcontainer\fR is visible. If this option is not specified then the other window defaults to \fIwindow\fR's parent. .TP \fB\-relheight \fIsize\fR \fISize\fR specifies the height for \fIwindow\fR. In this case the height is specified as a floating-point number relative to the height of the container: 0.5 means \fIwindow\fR will be half as high as the container, 1.0 means \fIwindow\fR will have the same height as the container, and so on. If both \fB\-height\fR and \fB\-relheight\fR are specified for a content, their values are summed. For example, \fB\-relheight 1.0 \-height \-2\fR makes the content 2 pixels shorter than the container. .TP \fB\-relwidth \fIsize\fR \fISize\fR specifies the width for \fIwindow\fR. In this case the width is specified as a floating-point number relative to the width of the container: 0.5 means \fIwindow\fR will be half as wide as the container, 1.0 means \fIwindow\fR will have the same width as the container, and so on. If both \fB\-width\fR and \fB\-relwidth\fR are specified for a content, their values are summed. For example, \fB\-relwidth 1.0 \-width 5\fR makes the content 5 pixels wider than the container. .TP \fB\-relx \fIlocation\fR \fILocation\fR specifies the x-coordinate within the container window of the anchor point for \fIwindow\fR. In this case the location is specified in a relative fashion as a floating-point number: 0.0 corresponds to the left edge of the container and 1.0 corresponds to the right edge of the container. \fILocation\fR need not be in the range 0.0\-1.0. If both \fB\-x\fR and \fB\-relx\fR are specified for a content then their values are summed. For example, \fB\-relx 0.5 \-x \-2\fR positions the left edge of the content 2 pixels to the left of the center of its container. .TP \fB\-rely \fIlocation\fR \fILocation\fR specifies the y-coordinate within the container window of the anchor point for \fIwindow\fR. In this case the value is specified in a relative fashion as a floating-point number: 0.0 corresponds to the top edge of the container and 1.0 corresponds to the bottom edge of the container. \fILocation\fR need not be in the range 0.0\-1.0. If both \fB\-y\fR and \fB\-rely\fR are specified for a content then their values are summed. For example, \fB\-rely 0.5 \-x 3\fR positions the top edge of the content 3 pixels below the center of its container. .TP \fB\-width \fIsize\fR \fISize\fR specifies the width for \fIwindow\fR in screen units (i.e. any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR). The width will be the outer width of \fIwindow\fR including its border, if any. If \fIsize\fR is an empty string, or if no \fB\-width\fR or \fB\-relwidth\fR option is specified, then the width requested internally by the window will be used. .TP \fB\-x \fIlocation\fR \fILocation\fR specifies the x-coordinate within the container window of the anchor point for \fIwindow\fR. The location is specified in screen units (i.e. any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR) and need not lie within the bounds of the container window. .TP \fB\-y \fIlocation\fR \fILocation\fR specifies the y-coordinate within the container window of the anchor point for \fIwindow\fR. The location is specified in screen units (i.e. any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR) and need not lie within the bounds of the container window. .PP If the same value is specified separately with two different options, such as \fB\-x\fR and \fB\-relx\fR, then the most recent option is used and the older one is ignored. .RE .TP \fBplace forget \fIwindow\fR Causes the placer to stop managing the geometry of \fIwindow\fR. As a side effect of this command \fIwindow\fR will be unmapped so that it does not appear on the screen. If \fIwindow\fR is not currently managed by the placer then the command has no effect. This command returns an empty string. .TP \fBplace info \fIwindow\fR Returns a list giving the current configuration of \fIwindow\fR. The list consists of \fIoption\-value\fR pairs in exactly the same form as might be specified to the \fBplace configure\fR command. .TP \fBplace content \fIwindow\fR Returns a list of all the content windows for which \fIwindow\fR is the container. If there is no content for \fIwindow\fR then an empty string is returned. .TP \fBplace slaves \fIwindow\fR . Synonym for \fBplace content \fIwindow\fR. .PP If the configuration of a window has been retrieved with \fBplace info\fR, that configuration can be restored later by |
︙ | ︙ | |||
276 277 278 279 280 281 282 | To control the sizes of these windows, make them windows like frames and canvases that provide configuration options for this purpose. .SH EXAMPLE .PP Make the label occupy the middle bit of the toplevel, no matter how it is resized: .CS | | | | < | 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 | To control the sizes of these windows, make them windows like frames and canvases that provide configuration options for this purpose. .SH EXAMPLE .PP Make the label occupy the middle bit of the toplevel, no matter how it is resized: .CS label .l \-text "In the\enMiddle!" \-bg black \-fg white \fBplace\fR .l \-relwidth .3 \-relx .35 \-relheight .3 \-rely .35 .CE .SH "SEE ALSO" grid(n), pack(n) .SH KEYWORDS geometry manager, height, location, container, place, rubber sheet, content, width '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/popup.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 | the given point. .SH EXAMPLE .PP How to attach a simple popup menu to a widget. .CS # Create a menu set m [menu .popupMenu] | | | | | 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 | the given point. .SH EXAMPLE .PP How to attach a simple popup menu to a widget. .CS # Create a menu set m [menu .popupMenu] $m add command \-label "Example 1" \-command bell $m add command \-label "Example 2" \-command bell # Create something to attach it to pack [label .l \-text "Click me!"] # Arrange for the menu to pop up when the label is clicked bind .l <Button-1> {\fBtk_popup\fR .popupMenu %X %Y} .CE .SH "SEE ALSO" bind(n), menu(n), tk_optionMenu(n) .SH KEYWORDS |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/radiobutton.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH radiobutton n 4.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME radiobutton \- Create and manipulate 'radiobutton' pick-one widgets .SH SYNOPSIS | | | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | .TH radiobutton n 4.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME radiobutton \- Create and manipulate 'radiobutton' pick-one widgets .SH SYNOPSIS \fBradiobutton\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .SO \-activebackground \-disabledforeground \-padx \-activeforeground \-font \-pady \-anchor \-foreground \-relief \-background \-highlightbackground \-takefocus \-bitmap \-highlightcolor \-text \-borderwidth \-highlightthickness \-textvariable |
︙ | ︙ | |||
61 62 63 64 65 66 67 | raised\fR. If the value of this option is the empty string, then no alternative relief is used when the mouse cursor is over the radiobutton. The empty string is the default value. .OP \-selectcolor selectColor Background Specifies a background color to use when the button is selected. If \fBindicatorOn\fR is true then the color is used as the background for the indicator regardless of the select state. | | | | 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 | raised\fR. If the value of this option is the empty string, then no alternative relief is used when the mouse cursor is over the radiobutton. The empty string is the default value. .OP \-selectcolor selectColor Background Specifies a background color to use when the button is selected. If \fBindicatorOn\fR is true then the color is used as the background for the indicator regardless of the select state. If \fB\-indicatoron\fR is false, this color is used as the background for the entire widget, in place of \fB\-background\fR or \fB\-activeBackground\fR, whenever the widget is selected. If specified as an empty string then no special color is used for displaying when the widget is selected. .OP \-selectimage selectImage SelectImage Specifies an image to display (in place of the \fB\-image\fR option) when the radiobutton is selected. This option is ignored unless the \fB\-image\fR option has been |
︙ | ︙ | |||
177 178 179 180 181 182 183 | operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for radiobutton widgets: | < | < < < < < | 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 | operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for radiobutton widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR . Returns the current value of the configuration option given by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBradiobutton\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? . Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, the command returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, the command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBradiobutton\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBdeselect\fR . Deselects the radiobutton and sets the associated variable to an empty string. If this radiobutton was not currently selected, the command has no effect. .TP \fIpathName \fBflash\fR . Flashes the radiobutton. This is accomplished by redisplaying the radiobutton several times, alternating between active and normal colors. At the end of the flash the radiobutton is left in the same normal/active state as when the command was invoked. This command is ignored if the radiobutton's state is \fBdisabled\fR. .TP \fIpathName \fBinvoke\fR . Does just what would have happened if the user invoked the radiobutton with the mouse: selects the button and invokes its associated Tcl command, if there is one. The return value is the return value from the Tcl command, or an empty string if there is no command associated with the radiobutton. This command is ignored if the radiobutton's state is \fBdisabled\fR. .TP \fIpathName \fBselect\fR . Selects the radiobutton and sets the associated variable to the value corresponding to this widget. .SH BINDINGS .PP |
︙ | ︙ | |||
259 260 261 262 263 264 265 | .PP If the radiobutton's state is \fBdisabled\fR then none of the above actions occur: the radiobutton is completely non-responsive. .PP The behavior of radiobuttons can be changed by defining new bindings for individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings. .SH "SEE ALSO" | | < | 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 | .PP If the radiobutton's state is \fBdisabled\fR then none of the above actions occur: the radiobutton is completely non-responsive. .PP The behavior of radiobuttons can be changed by defining new bindings for individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings. .SH "SEE ALSO" checkbutton(n), labelframe(n), listbox(n), options(n), scale(n), ttk::radiobutton(n) .SH KEYWORDS radiobutton, widget '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/raise.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 | .SH EXAMPLE .PP Make a button appear to be in a sibling frame that was created after it. This is is often necessary when building GUIs in the style where you create your activity widgets first before laying them out on the display: .CS | | | | | | | 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 | .SH EXAMPLE .PP Make a button appear to be in a sibling frame that was created after it. This is is often necessary when building GUIs in the style where you create your activity widgets first before laying them out on the display: .CS button .b \-text "Hi there!" pack [frame .f \-background blue] pack [label .f.l1 \-text "This is above"] pack .b \-in .f pack [label .f.l2 \-text "This is below"] \fBraise\fR .b .CE .SH "SEE ALSO" lower(n) .SH KEYWORDS obscure, raise, stacking order '\" Local Variables: |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/scale.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH scale n 4.1 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME scale \- Create and manipulate 'scale' value-controlled slider widgets .SH SYNOPSIS | | | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | .TH scale n 4.1 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME scale \- Create and manipulate 'scale' value-controlled slider widgets .SH SYNOPSIS \fBscale\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .SO \-activebackground \-foreground \-relief \-background \-highlightbackground \-repeatdelay \-borderwidth \-highlightcolor \-repeatinterval \-cursor \-highlightthickness \-takefocus \-font \-orient \-troughcolor .SE |
︙ | ︙ | |||
74 75 76 77 78 79 80 | If the scale is disabled then the value may not be changed and the scale will not activate. If the scale is active, the slider is displayed using the color specified by the \fB\-activebackground\fR option. .OP \-tickinterval tickInterval TickInterval Must be a real value. Determines the spacing between numerical | | < < | 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 | If the scale is disabled then the value may not be changed and the scale will not activate. If the scale is active, the slider is displayed using the color specified by the \fB\-activebackground\fR option. .OP \-tickinterval tickInterval TickInterval Must be a real value. Determines the spacing between numerical tick marks displayed below or to the left of the slider. The values will all be displayed with the same number of decimal places, which will be enough to ensure they are all accurate to within 20% of a tick interval. If 0, no tick marks will be displayed. .OP \-to to To Specifies a real value corresponding to the right or bottom end of the scale. This value may be either less than or greater than the \fB\-from\fR option. .OP \-variable variable Variable Specifies the name of a global variable to link to the scale. Whenever the |
︙ | ︙ | |||
141 142 143 144 145 146 147 | operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for scale widgets: | < | < < < < < | 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 | operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for scale widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR . Returns the current value of the configuration option given by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBscale\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? . Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBscale\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBcoords \fR?\fIvalue\fR? . Returns a list whose elements are the x and y coordinates of the point along the centerline of the trough that corresponds to \fIvalue\fR. If \fIvalue\fR is omitted then the scale's current value is used. .TP \fIpathName \fBget\fR ?\fIx y\fR? . If \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are omitted, returns the current value of the scale. If \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are specified, they give pixel coordinates within the widget; the command returns the scale value corresponding to the given pixel. Only one of \fIx\fR or \fIy\fR is used: for horizontal scales \fIy\fR is ignored, and for vertical scales \fIx\fR is ignored. .TP \fIpathName \fBidentify \fIx y\fR . Returns a string indicating what part of the scale lies under the coordinates given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR. A return value of \fBslider\fR means that the point is over the slider; \fBtrough1\fR means that the point is over the portion of the slider above or to the left of the slider; and \fBtrough2\fR means that the point is over the portion of the slider below or to the right of the slider. If the point is not over one of these elements, an empty string is returned. .TP \fIpathName \fBset \fIvalue\fR . This command is invoked to change the current value of the scale, and hence the position at which the slider is displayed. \fIValue\fR gives the new value for the scale. The command has no effect if the scale is disabled. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/scrollbar.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
38 39 40 41 42 43 44 | All scrollable widgets have \fBxview\fR and \fByview\fR commands that take exactly the additional arguments appended by the scrollbar as described in \fBSCROLLING COMMANDS\fR below. .OP \-elementborderwidth elementBorderWidth BorderWidth Specifies the width of borders drawn around the internal elements of the scrollbar (the two arrows and the slider). The value may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. | | | 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 | All scrollable widgets have \fBxview\fR and \fByview\fR commands that take exactly the additional arguments appended by the scrollbar as described in \fBSCROLLING COMMANDS\fR below. .OP \-elementborderwidth elementBorderWidth BorderWidth Specifies the width of borders drawn around the internal elements of the scrollbar (the two arrows and the slider). The value may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. If this value is negative (the default is -1), the value of the \fB\-borderwidth\fR option is used in its place. .OP \-width width Width Specifies the desired narrow dimension of the scrollbar window, not including 3-D border, if any. For vertical scrollbars this will be the width and for horizontal scrollbars this will be the height. The value may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/selection.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 | .PP Note that for management of the \fBCLIPBOARD\fR selection (see below), the \fBclipboard\fR command may also be used. .PP The first argument to \fBselection\fR determines the format of the rest of the arguments and the behavior of the command. The following forms are currently supported: | < | < | | 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 | .PP Note that for management of the \fBCLIPBOARD\fR selection (see below), the \fBclipboard\fR command may also be used. .PP The first argument to \fBselection\fR determines the format of the rest of the arguments and the behavior of the command. The following forms are currently supported: .TP \fBselection clear\fR ?\fB\-displayof\fR \fIwindow\fR? ?\fB\-selection\fR \fIselection\fR? . If \fIselection\fR exists anywhere on \fIwindow\fR's display, clear it so that no window owns the selection anymore. \fISelection\fR specifies the X selection that should be cleared, and should be an atom name such as \fBPRIMARY\fR or \fBCLIPBOARD\fR; see the Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual for complete details. \fISelection\fR defaults to \fBPRIMARY\fR and \fIwindow\fR defaults to .QW . . Returns an empty string. .TP \fBselection get\fR ?\fB\-displayof\fR \fIwindow\fR? ?\fB\-selection\fR \fIselection\fR? ?\fB\-type\fR \fItype\fR? . Retrieves the value of \fIselection\fR from \fIwindow\fR's display and returns it as a result. \fISelection\fR defaults to \fBPRIMARY\fR and \fIwindow\fR defaults to .QW . . \fIType\fR specifies the form in which the selection is to be returned (the desired |
︙ | ︙ | |||
59 60 61 62 63 64 65 | than the selection type; see the ICCCM for all the confusing details). If the selection is returned in a non-string format, such as \fBINTEGER\fR or \fBATOM\fR, the \fBselection\fR command converts it to string format as a collection of fields separated by spaces: atoms are converted to their textual names, and anything else is converted to hexadecimal integers. Note that \fBselection get\fR does not retrieve the selection in the \fBUTF8_STRING\fR format unless told to. | < | | 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 | than the selection type; see the ICCCM for all the confusing details). If the selection is returned in a non-string format, such as \fBINTEGER\fR or \fBATOM\fR, the \fBselection\fR command converts it to string format as a collection of fields separated by spaces: atoms are converted to their textual names, and anything else is converted to hexadecimal integers. Note that \fBselection get\fR does not retrieve the selection in the \fBUTF8_STRING\fR format unless told to. .TP \fBselection handle\fR ?\fB\-selection\fR \fIs\fR? ?\fB\-type\fR \fIt\fR? ?\fB\-format\fR \fIf\fR? \fIwindow command\fR . Creates a handler for selection requests, such that \fIcommand\fR will be executed whenever selection \fIs\fR is owned by \fIwindow\fR and someone attempts to retrieve it in the form given by type \fIt\fR (e.g. \fIt\fR is specified in the \fBselection get\fR command). \fIS\fR defaults to \fBPRIMARY\fR, \fIt\fR defaults to \fBSTRING\fR, and \fIf\fR defaults to \fBSTRING\fR. If \fIcommand\fR is an empty string |
︙ | ︙ | |||
118 119 120 121 122 123 124 | .PP The \fIformat\fR argument is needed only for compatibility with selection requesters that do not use Tk. If Tk is being used to retrieve the selection then the value is converted back to a string at the requesting end, so \fIformat\fR is irrelevant. .RE | < | | | < < < < | < < < | < | < < < < < | < < | < < | < < | | | | | 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 | .PP The \fIformat\fR argument is needed only for compatibility with selection requesters that do not use Tk. If Tk is being used to retrieve the selection then the value is converted back to a string at the requesting end, so \fIformat\fR is irrelevant. .RE .TP \fBselection own\fR ?\fB\-displayof\fR \fIwindow\fR? ?\fB\-selection\fR \fIselection\fR? .TP \fBselection own\fR ?\fB\-command\fR \fIcommand\fR? ?\fB\-selection\fR \fIselection\fR? \fIwindow\fR . The first form of \fBselection own\fR returns the path name of the window in this application that owns \fIselection\fR on the display containing \fIwindow\fR, or an empty string if no window in this application owns the selection. \fISelection\fR defaults to \fBPRIMARY\fR and \fIwindow\fR defaults to .QW . . .RS .PP The second form of \fBselection own\fR causes \fIwindow\fR to become the new owner of \fIselection\fR on \fIwindow\fR's display, returning an empty string as result. The existing owner, if any, is notified that it has lost the selection. If \fIcommand\fR is specified, it is a Tcl script to execute when some other window claims ownership of the selection away from \fIwindow\fR. \fISelection\fR defaults to PRIMARY. .RE .SH WIDGET FACILITIES .PP The \fBtext\fR, \fBentry\fR, \fBttk::entry\fR, \fBlistbox\fR, \fBspinbox\fR and \fBttk::spinbox\fR widgets have the option \fB\-exportselection\fR. If a widget has this option set to boolean \fBtrue\fR, then (in an unsafe interpreter) a selection made in the widget is automatically written to the \fBPRIMARY\fR selection. .PP A GUI event, for example \fB<<PasteSelection>>\fR, can copy the \fBPRIMARY\fR selection to certain widgets. This copy is implemented by a widget binding to the event. The binding script makes appropriate calls to the \fBselection\fR command. .PP .SH PORTABILITY ISSUES .PP On X11, the \fBPRIMARY\fR selection is a system-wide feature of the X server, allowing communication between different processes that are X11 clients. .PP On Windows, the \fBPRIMARY\fR selection is not provided by the system, but only by Tk, and so it is shared only between windows of a parent interpreter and its child interpreters. It is not shared between interpreters in different processes or different threads. Each parent interpreter has a separate \fBPRIMARY\fR selection that is shared only with its child interpreters which are not safe interpreters. .PP .SH SECURITY .PP A safe interpreter cannot read from the \fBPRIMARY\fR selection because its \fBselection\fR command is hidden. For this reason the \fBPRIMARY\fR selection cannot be written to the Tk widgets of a safe interpreter. .PP A Tk widget can have its option \fB\-exportselection\fR set to boolean \fBtrue\fR, but in a safe interpreter this option has no effect: writing from the widget to the \fBPRIMARY\fR selection is disabled. .PP These are security features. A safe interpreter may run untrusted code, and it is a security risk if this untrusted code can read or write the \fBPRIMARY\fR selection used by other interpreters. .PP .SH EXAMPLES .PP On X11 platforms, one of the standard selections available is the \fBSECONDARY\fR selection. Hardly anything uses it, but here is how to read it using Tk: .PP .CS set selContents [\fBselection get\fR \-selection SECONDARY] .CE .PP Many different types of data may be available for a selection; the special type \fBTARGETS\fR allows you to get a list of available types: .PP .CS foreach type [\fBselection get\fR \-type TARGETS] { puts "Selection PRIMARY supports type $type" } .CE .PP To claim the selection, you must first set up a handler to supply the data for the selection. Then you have to claim the selection... .CS # Set up the data handler ready for incoming requests set foo "This is a string with some data in it... blah blah" \fBselection handle\fR \-selection SECONDARY . getData proc getData {offset maxChars} { puts "Retrieving selection starting at $offset" return [string range $::foo $offset [expr {$offset+$maxChars-1}]] } # Now we grab the selection itself puts "Claiming selection" \fBselection own\fR \-command lost \-selection SECONDARY . proc lost {} { puts "Lost selection" } .CE .SH "SEE ALSO" clipboard(n) .SH KEYWORDS clear, format, handler, ICCCM, own, selection, target, type '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/send.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 | contained entirely within the \fIcmd\fR argument. If one or more \fIarg\fRs are present, they are concatenated to form the command to be executed, just as for the \fBeval\fR command. .PP If the initial arguments of the command begin with .QW \- they are treated as options. The following options are currently defined: | < < < | < < < | 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 | contained entirely within the \fIcmd\fR argument. If one or more \fIarg\fRs are present, they are concatenated to form the command to be executed, just as for the \fBeval\fR command. .PP If the initial arguments of the command begin with .QW \- they are treated as options. The following options are currently defined: .TP \fB\-async\fR Requests asynchronous invocation. In this case the \fBsend\fR command will complete immediately without waiting for \fIcmd\fR to complete in the target application; no result will be available and errors in the sent command will be ignored. If the target application is in the same process as the sending application then the \fB\-async\fR option is ignored. .TP \fB\-displayof\fR \fIpathName\fR Specifies that the target application's main window is on the display of the window given by \fIpathName\fR, instead of the display containing the application's main window. .TP \fB\-\|\-\fR Serves no purpose except to terminate the list of options. This option is needed only if \fIapp\fR could contain a leading .QW \- character. .SH "APPLICATION NAMES" .PP The name of an application is set initially from the name of the |
︙ | ︙ | |||
92 93 94 95 96 97 98 | functionality is provided by the \fBdde\fR command instead. .SH EXAMPLE .PP This script fragment can be used to make an application that only runs once on a particular display. .CS if {[tk appname FoobarApp] ne "FoobarApp"} { | | | 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 | functionality is provided by the \fBdde\fR command instead. .SH EXAMPLE .PP This script fragment can be used to make an application that only runs once on a particular display. .CS if {[tk appname FoobarApp] ne "FoobarApp"} { \fBsend\fR \-async FoobarApp RemoteStart $argv exit } # The command that will be called remotely, which raises # the application main window and opens the requested files proc RemoteStart args { raise . foreach filename $args { |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/spinbox.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH spinbox n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME spinbox \- Create and manipulate 'spinbox' value spinner widgets .SH SYNOPSIS | | | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | .TH spinbox n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME spinbox \- Create and manipulate 'spinbox' value spinner widgets .SH SYNOPSIS \fBspinbox\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .SO \-activebackground \-highlightthickness \-repeatinterval \-background \-insertbackground \-selectbackground \-borderwidth \-insertborderwidth \-selectborderwidth \-cursor \-insertontime \-selectforeground \-exportselection \-insertwidth \-takefocus \-font \-insertofftime \-textvariable |
︙ | ︙ | |||
164 165 166 167 168 169 170 | The \fB\-validatecommand\fR will be called when the spinbox loses focus. .IP \fBkey\fR 10 The \fB\-validatecommand\fR will be called when the spinbox is edited. .IP \fBall\fR 10 The \fB\-validatecommand\fR will be called for all above conditions. .PP It is possible to perform percent substitutions on the \fB\-validatecommand\fR | | | | 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 | The \fB\-validatecommand\fR will be called when the spinbox loses focus. .IP \fBkey\fR 10 The \fB\-validatecommand\fR will be called when the spinbox is edited. .IP \fBall\fR 10 The \fB\-validatecommand\fR will be called for all above conditions. .PP It is possible to perform percent substitutions on the \fB\-validatecommand\fR and \fB\-invalidcommand\fR scripts, just as you would in a \fBbind\fR script. The following substitutions are recognized: .PP .IP \fB%d\fR 5 Type of action: 1 for \fBinsert\fR, 0 for \fBdelete\fR, or \-1 for focus, forced or textvariable validation. .IP \fB%i\fR 5 Index of char string to be inserted/deleted, if any, otherwise \-1. .IP \fB%P\fR 5 |
︙ | ︙ | |||
209 210 211 212 213 214 215 | \fB\-validate\fR option will also set itself to \fBnone\fR when you edit the spinbox widget from within either the \fB\-validatecommand\fR or the \fB\-invalidcommand\fR. Such editions will override the one that was being validated. If you wish to edit the value of the widget during validation and still have the \fB\-validate\fR option set, you should include the command .CS | | | | | | | | | < < < < < < < < < < | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 | \fB\-validate\fR option will also set itself to \fBnone\fR when you edit the spinbox widget from within either the \fB\-validatecommand\fR or the \fB\-invalidcommand\fR. Such editions will override the one that was being validated. If you wish to edit the value of the widget during validation and still have the \fB\-validate\fR option set, you should include the command .CS \fI%W config \-validate %v\fR .CE in the \fB\-validatecommand\fR or \fB\-invalidcommand\fR (whichever one you were editing the spinbox widget from). It is also recommended to not set an associated \fB\-textvariable\fR during validation, as that can cause the spinbox widget to become out of sync with the \fB\-textvariable\fR. .PP Also, the \fB-validate\fR option will set itself to \fBnone\fR when the spinbox value gets changed because of adjustment of \fB-from\fR or \fB-to\fR and the \fB-validatecommand\fR returns false. For instance .CS \fIspinbox pathName \-from 1 \-to 10 \-validate all \-validatecommand {return 0}\fR .CE will in fact set the \fB-validate\fR option to \fBnone\fR because the default value for the spinbox gets changed (due to the \fB-from\fR and \fB-to\fR options) to a value not accepted by the validation script. .PP Moreover, forced validation is performed when invoking any spinbutton of the spinbox. If the validation script returns false in this situation, then the \fB-validate\fR option will be automatically set to \fBnone\fR. .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBspinbox\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. .SS INDICES .PP Many of the widget commands for spinboxes take one or more indices as arguments. An index specifies a particular character in the spinbox's string, in any of the following ways: .TP 12 \fInumber\fR Specifies the character as a numerical index, where 0 corresponds to the first character in the string. .TP 12 \fBanchor\fR Indicates the anchor point for the selection, which is set with the \fBselect from\fR and \fBselect adjust\fR widget commands. .TP 12 \fBend\fR Indicates the character just after the last one in the spinbox's string. This is equivalent to specifying a numerical index equal to the length of the spinbox's string. .TP 12 \fBinsert\fR Indicates the character adjacent to and immediately following the insertion cursor. .TP 12 \fBsel.first\fR Indicates the first character in the selection. It is an error to use this form if the selection is not in the spinbox window. .TP 12 \fBsel.last\fR Indicates the character just after the last one in the selection. It is an error to use this form if the selection is not in the spinbox window. .TP 12 \fB@\fInumber\fR In this form, \fInumber\fR is treated as an x-coordinate in the spinbox's window; the character spanning that x-coordinate is used. For example, .QW \fB@0\fR indicates the left-most character in the window. .LP Abbreviations may be used for any of the forms above, e.g. .QW \fBe\fR or .QW \fBsel.f\fR . In general, out-of-range indices are automatically rounded to the nearest legal value. Indexes support the same simple interpretation as for the command \fBstring index\fR, with simple integer index arithmetic and indexing relative to \fBend\fR. .SS SUBCOMMANDS .PP The following commands are possible for spinbox widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBbbox \fIindex\fR Returns a list of four numbers describing the bounding box of the character given by \fIindex\fR. The first two elements of the list give the x and y coordinates of the upper-left corner of the screen area covered by the character (in pixels relative to the widget) and the last two elements give the width and height of the character, in pixels. The bounding box may refer to a region outside the visible area of the window. .TP \fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR Returns the current value of the configuration option given by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBspinbox\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBspinbox\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBdelete \fIfirst \fR?\fIlast\fR? Delete one or more elements of the spinbox. \fIFirst\fR is the index of the first character to delete, and \fIlast\fR is the index of the character just after the last one to delete. If \fIlast\fR is not specified it defaults to \fIfirst\fR+1, i.e. a single character is deleted. This command returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBget\fR Returns the spinbox's string. .TP \fIpathName \fBicursor \fIindex\fR Arrange for the insertion cursor to be displayed just before the character given by \fIindex\fR. Returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBidentify\fI x y\fR Returns the name of the window element corresponding to coordinates \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR in the spinbox. Return value is one of: \fBnone\fR, \fBbuttondown\fR, \fBbuttonup\fR, \fBentry\fR. .TP \fIpathName \fBindex\fI index\fR Returns the numerical index corresponding to \fIindex\fR. .TP \fIpathName \fBinsert \fIindex string\fR Insert the characters of \fIstring\fR just before the character indicated by \fIindex\fR. Returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBinvoke\fI element\fR Causes the specified element, either \fBbuttondown\fR or \fBbuttonup\fR, to be invoked, triggering the action associated with it. .TP \fIpathName \fBscan\fR \fIoption args\fR This command is used to implement scanning on spinboxes. It has two forms, depending on \fIoption\fR: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBscan mark \fIx\fR Records \fIx\fR and the current view in the spinbox window; used in conjunction with later \fBscan dragto\fR commands. Typically this command is associated with a mouse button press in the widget. It returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBscan dragto \fIx\fR This command computes the difference between its \fIx\fR argument and the \fIx\fR argument to the last \fBscan mark\fR command for the widget. It then adjusts the view left or right by 10 times the difference in x-coordinates. This command is typically associated with mouse motion events in the widget, to produce the effect of dragging the spinbox at high speed through the window. The return value is an empty string. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBselection \fIoption arg\fR This command is used to adjust the selection within a spinbox. It has several forms, depending on \fIoption\fR: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBselection adjust \fIindex\fR Locate the end of the selection nearest to the character given by \fIindex\fR, and adjust that end of the selection to be at \fIindex\fR (i.e. including but not going beyond \fIindex\fR). The other end of the selection is made the anchor point for future \fBselect to\fR commands. If the selection is not currently in the spinbox, then a new selection is created to include the characters between \fIindex\fR and the most recent selection anchor point, inclusive. Returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBselection clear\fR Clear the selection if it is currently in this widget. If the selection is not in this widget then the command has no effect. Returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBselection element\fR ?\fIelement\fR? Sets or gets the currently selected element. If a spinbutton element is specified, it will be displayed depressed. .TP \fIpathName \fBselection from \fIindex\fR Set the selection anchor point to just before the character given by \fIindex\fR. Does not change the selection. Returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBselection present\fR Returns 1 if there is are characters selected in the spinbox, 0 if nothing is selected. .TP \fIpathName \fBselection range \fIstart end\fR Sets the selection to include the characters starting with the one indexed by \fIstart\fR and ending with the one just before \fIend\fR. If \fIend\fR refers to the same character as \fIstart\fR or an earlier one, then the spinbox's selection is cleared. .TP \fIpathName \fBselection to \fIindex\fR If \fIindex\fR is before the anchor point, set the selection to the characters from \fIindex\fR up to but not including the anchor point. If \fIindex\fR is the same as the anchor point, do nothing. If \fIindex\fR is after the anchor point, set the selection to the characters from the anchor point up to but not including \fIindex\fR. The anchor point is determined by the most recent \fBselect from\fR or \fBselect adjust\fR command in this widget. If the selection is not in this widget then a new selection is created using the most recent anchor point specified for the widget. Returns an empty string. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBset\fR ?\fIstring\fR? If \fIstring\fR is specified, the spinbox will try and set it to this value, otherwise it just returns the spinbox's string. If validation is on, it will occur when setting the string. .TP \fIpathName \fBvalidate\fR This command is used to force an evaluation of the \fB\-validatecommand\fR independent of the conditions specified by the \fB\-validate\fR option. This is done by temporarily setting the \fB\-validate\fR option to \fBall\fR. It returns 0 or 1. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview \fIargs\fR This command is used to query and change the horizontal position of the text in the widget's window. It can take any of the following forms: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBxview\fR Returns a list containing two elements. Each element is a real fraction between 0 and 1; together they describe the horizontal span that is visible in the window. For example, if the first element is .2 and the second element is .6, 20% of the spinbox's text is off-screen to the left, the middle 40% is visible in the window, and 40% of the text is off-screen to the right. These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR option. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview \fIindex\fR Adjusts the view in the window so that the character given by \fIindex\fR is displayed at the left edge of the window. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview moveto\fI fraction\fR Adjusts the view in the window so that the character \fIfraction\fR of the way through the text appears at the left edge of the window. \fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fINumber\fR must be an integer or a float, but if it is a float then it is converted to an integer, rounded away from 0. \fIWhat\fR must be either \fBpages\fR or \fBunits\fR or an abbreviation of one of these. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/sysnotify.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | .\" Text automatically generated by txt2man '\" '\" Copyright (c) 2020 Kevin Walzer/WordTech Communications LLC. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH tk sysnotify n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros | < | | < < | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 | .\" Text automatically generated by txt2man '\" '\" Copyright (c) 2020 Kevin Walzer/WordTech Communications LLC. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH tk sysnotify n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .SH NAME sysnotify \- Creates a notification window with a title and message. .SH SYNOPSIS \fBtk sysnotify\fR \fItitle\fR \fImessage\fR .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBtk sysnotify\fR command creates a platform-specific system notification alert. Its intent is to provide a brief, unobtrusive notification to the user by popping up a window that briefly appears in a corner of the screen. .SH EXAMPLE .PP Here is an example of the \fBtk sysnotify\fR code: .PP .CS tk sysnotify "Alert" \e "This is just a test of the Tk System Notification Code." |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/systray.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | .\" Text automatically generated by txt2man '\" '\" Copyright (c) 2020 Kevin Walzer/WordTech Communications LLC. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH tk systray n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros | < > | < > > | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 | .\" Text automatically generated by txt2man '\" '\" Copyright (c) 2020 Kevin Walzer/WordTech Communications LLC. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH tk systray n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .SH NAME systray \- Creates an icon display in the platform-specific system tray. .SH SYNOPSIS \fBtk systray create \fI\-image image\fR \fI?\-text text\fR? \fI?\-button1 callback?\fR \fI?\-button3 callback?\fR .sp \fBtk systray configure \fI?option? ?value option value ...?\fR .sp \fBtk systray exists\fR .sp \fBtk systray destroy\fR .BE .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP .\" METHOD: create The \fBtk systray create\fR command creates an icon in the platform-specific tray. The widget is configured with a Tk image for the icon display, an optional string for display in a tooltip, and optional callbacks that are |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/text.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 | .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME text, tk_textCopy, tk_textCut, tk_textPaste \- Create and manipulate 'text' hypertext editing widgets .SH SYNOPSIS .nf | | | | | < | 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 | .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME text, tk_textCopy, tk_textCut, tk_textPaste \- Create and manipulate 'text' hypertext editing widgets .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fBtext\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? \fBtk_textCopy\fR \fIpathName\fR \fBtk_textCut\fR \fIpathName\fR \fBtk_textPaste\fR \fIpathName\fR .SO \-background \-highlightthickness \-relief \-borderwidth \-insertbackground \-selectbackground \-cursor \-insertborderwidth \-selectborderwidth \-exportselection \-insertofftime \-selectforeground \-font \-insertontime \-setgrid \-foreground \-insertwidth \-takefocus |
︙ | ︙ | |||
413 414 415 416 417 418 419 | as determined by the \fB\-background\fR, \fB\-font\fR, and \fB\-foreground\fR options for the text widget. However, display options may be associated with individual tags using the .QW "\fIpathName \fBtag configure\fR" widget command. If a character has been tagged, then the display options associated with the tag override the default display style. The following options are currently supported for tags: | < < < < < < < < < < < | | < < < < < < | | < < < < < < < < < < < < | 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 | as determined by the \fB\-background\fR, \fB\-font\fR, and \fB\-foreground\fR options for the text widget. However, display options may be associated with individual tags using the .QW "\fIpathName \fBtag configure\fR" widget command. If a character has been tagged, then the display options associated with the tag override the default display style. The following options are currently supported for tags: .TP \fB\-background \fIcolor\fR . \fIColor\fR specifies the background color to use for characters associated with the tag. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. .TP \fB\-bgstipple \fIbitmap\fR . \fIBitmap\fR specifies a bitmap that is used as a stipple pattern for the background. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR. If \fIbitmap\fR has not been specified, or if it is specified as an empty string, then a solid fill will be used for the background. .TP \fB\-borderwidth \fIpixels\fR . \fIPixels\fR specifies the width of a border to draw around the tag using any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. This option should be used in conjunction with the \fB\-relief\fR option to provide the desired border. .TP \fB\-elide \fIboolean\fR . \fIElide\fR specifies whether the data should be elided. Elided data (characters, images, embedded windows, etc.) is not displayed and takes no space on screen, but further on behaves just as normal data. .TP \fB\-fgstipple \fIbitmap\fR . \fIBitmap\fR specifies a bitmap that is used as a stipple pattern when drawing text and other foreground information such as underlines. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR. If \fIbitmap\fR has not been specified, or if it is specified as an empty string, then a solid fill will be used. .TP \fB\-font \fIfontName\fR . \fIFontName\fR is the name of a font to use for drawing characters. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetFont\fR. .TP \fB\-foreground \fIcolor\fR . \fIColor\fR specifies the color to use when drawing text and other foreground information such as underlines. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. .TP \fB\-justify \fIjustify\fR . If the first non-elided character of a display line has a tag for which this option has been specified, then \fIjustify\fR determines how to justify the line. It must be one of \fBleft\fR, \fBright\fR, or \fBcenter\fR. If a line wraps, then the justification for each line on the display is determined by the first non-elided character of that display line. .TP \fB\-lmargin1 \fIpixels\fR . If the first non-elided character of a text line has a tag for which this option has been specified, then \fIpixels\fR specifies how much the line should be indented from the left edge of the window. \fIPixels\fR may have any of the standard forms for screen distances. If a line of text wraps, this option only applies to the first line on the display; the \fB\-lmargin2\fR option controls the indentation for subsequent lines. .TP \fB\-lmargin2 \fIpixels\fR . If the first non-elided character of a display line has a tag for which this option has been specified, and if the display line is not the first for its text line (i.e., the text line has wrapped), then \fIpixels\fR specifies how much the line should be indented from the left edge of the window. \fIPixels\fR may have any of the standard forms for screen distances. This option is only used when wrapping is enabled, and it only applies to the second and later display lines for a text line. .TP \fB\-lmargincolor \fIcolor\fR . \fIColor\fR specifies the background color to use in regions that do not contain characters because they are indented by \fB\-lmargin1\fR or \fB\-lmargin2\fR. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. If \fIcolor\fR has not been specified, or if it is specified as an empty string, then the color used is specified by the \fB-background\fR tag option (or, if this is also unspecified, by the \fB-background\fR widget option). .TP \fB\-offset \fIpixels\fR . \fIPixels\fR specifies an amount by which the text's baseline should be offset vertically from the baseline of the overall line, in pixels. For example, a positive offset can be used for superscripts and a negative offset can be used for subscripts. \fIPixels\fR may have any of the standard forms for screen distances. .TP \fB\-overstrike \fIboolean\fR . Specifies whether or not to draw a horizontal rule through the middle of characters. \fIBoolean\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR. .TP \fB\-overstrikefg \fIcolor\fR . \fIColor\fR specifies the color to use when displaying the overstrike. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. If \fIcolor\fR has not been specified, or if it is specified as an empty string, then the color specified by the \fB\-foreground\fR tag option is used. .TP \fB\-relief \fIrelief\fR . \fIRelief\fR specifies the relief style to use for drawing the border, in any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetRelief\fR. This option is used in conjunction with the \fB\-borderwidth\fR option to enable to the desired border appearance. .TP \fB\-rmargin \fIpixels\fR . If the first non-elided character of a display line has a tag for which this option has been specified, then \fIpixels\fR specifies how wide a margin to leave between the end of the line and the right edge of the window. \fIPixels\fR may have any of the standard forms for screen distances. This option is only used when wrapping is enabled. If a text line wraps, the right margin for each line on the display is determined by the first non-elided character of that display line. .TP \fB\-rmargincolor \fIcolor\fR . \fIColor\fR specifies the background color to use in regions that do not contain characters because they are indented by \fB\-rmargin\fR. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. If \fIcolor\fR has not been specified, or if it is specified as an empty string, then the color used is specified by the \fB-background\fR tag option (or, if this is also unspecified, by the \fB-background\fR widget option). .TP \fB\-selectbackground \fIcolor\fR \fIColor\fR specifies the background color to use when displaying selected items. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. If \fIcolor\fR has not been specified, or if it is specified as an empty string, then the color specified by the \fB\-background\fR tag option is used. .TP \fB\-selectforeground \fIcolor\fR \fIColor\fR specifies the foreground color to use when displaying selected items. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. If \fIcolor\fR has not been specified, or if it is specified as an empty string, then the color specified by the \fB\-foreground\fR tag option is used. .TP \fB\-spacing1 \fIpixels\fR . \fIPixels\fR specifies how much additional space should be left above each text line, using any of the standard forms for screen distances. If a line wraps, this option only applies to the first line on the display. .TP \fB\-spacing2 \fIpixels\fR . For lines that wrap, this option specifies how much additional space to leave between the display lines for a single text line. \fIPixels\fR may have any of the standard forms for screen distances. .TP \fB\-spacing3 \fIpixels\fR . \fIPixels\fR specifies how much additional space should be left below each text line, using any of the standard forms for screen distances. If a line wraps, this option only applies to the last line on the display. .TP \fB\-tabs \fItabList\fR . \fITabList\fR specifies a set of tab stops in the same form as for the \fB\-tabs\fR option for the text widget. This option only applies to a display line if it applies to the first non-elided character on that display line. If this option is specified as an empty string, it cancels the option, leaving it unspecified for the tag (the default). If the option is specified as a non-empty string that is an empty list, such as \fB\-tags\0{\0}\fR, then it requests default 8-character tabs as described for the \fB\-tags\fR widget option. .TP \fB\-tabstyle \fIstyle\fR . \fIStyle\fR specifies either the \fItabular\fR or \fIwordprocessor\fR style of tabbing to use for the text widget. This option only applies to a display line if it applies to the first non-elided character on that display line. If this option is specified as an empty string, it cancels the option, leaving it unspecified for the tag (the default). .TP \fB\-underline \fIboolean\fR . \fIBoolean\fR specifies whether or not to draw an underline underneath characters. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR. .TP \fB\-underlinefg \fIcolor\fR . \fIColor\fR specifies the color to use when displaying the underline. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. If \fIcolor\fR has not been specified, or if it is specified as an empty string, then the color specified by the \fB\-foreground\fR tag option is used. .TP \fB\-wrap \fImode\fR . \fIMode\fR specifies how to handle lines that are wider than the text's window. This option only applies to a display line if it applies to the first non-elided character on that display line. It has the same legal values as the \fB\-wrap\fR option for the text widget: \fBnone\fR, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
722 723 724 725 726 727 728 | unit's worth of index space in the text widget, and it may be referred to either by the name of its embedded window or by its position in the widget's index space. If the range of text containing the embedded window is deleted then the window is destroyed. Similarly if the text widget as a whole is deleted, then the window is destroyed. .PP Eliding an embedded window immediately after scheduling it for creation via | | | < < < < < < | 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 | unit's worth of index space in the text widget, and it may be referred to either by the name of its embedded window or by its position in the widget's index space. If the range of text containing the embedded window is deleted then the window is destroyed. Similarly if the text widget as a whole is deleted, then the window is destroyed. .PP Eliding an embedded window immediately after scheduling it for creation via \fIpathName \fBwindow create \fIindex \fB-create\fR will prevent it from being effectively created. Uneliding an elided embedded window scheduled for creation via \fIpathName \fBwindow create \fIindex \fB-create\fR will automatically trigger the associated creation script. After destroying an elided embedded window, the latter won't get automatically recreated. .PP When an embedded window is added to a text widget with the \fIpathName \fBwindow create\fR widget command, several configuration options may be associated with it. These options may be modified later with the \fIpathName \fBwindow configure\fR widget command. The following options are currently supported: .TP \fB\-align \fIwhere\fR . If the window is not as tall as the line in which it is displayed, this option determines where the window is displayed in the line. \fIWhere\fR must have one of the values \fBtop\fR (align the top of the window with the top of the line), \fBcenter\fR (center the window within the range of the line), \fBbottom\fR (align the bottom of the window with the bottom of the line's area), or \fBbaseline\fR (align the bottom of the window with the baseline of the line). .TP \fB\-create \fIscript\fR . Specifies a Tcl script that may be evaluated to create the window for the annotation. If no \fB\-window\fR option has been specified for the annotation this script will be evaluated when the annotation is about to be displayed on the screen. \fIScript\fR must create a window for the annotation and return the name of that window as its result. Two substitutions will be performed in \fIscript\fR before evaluation. \fI%W\fR will be substituted by the name of the parent text widget, and \fI%%\fR will be substituted by a single \fI%\fR. If the annotation's window should ever be deleted, \fIscript\fR will be evaluated again the next time the annotation is displayed. .TP \fB\-padx \fIpixels\fR . \fIPixels\fR specifies the amount of extra space to leave on each side of the embedded window. It may have any of the usual forms defined for a screen distance. .TP \fB\-pady \fIpixels\fR . \fIPixels\fR specifies the amount of extra space to leave on the top and on the bottom of the embedded window. It may have any of the usual forms defined for a screen distance. .TP \fB\-stretch \fIboolean\fR . If the requested height of the embedded window is less than the height of the line in which it is displayed, this option can be used to specify whether the window should be stretched vertically to fill its line. If the \fB\-pady\fR option has been specified as well, then the requested padding will be retained even if the window is stretched. .TP \fB\-window \fIpathName\fR . Specifies the name of a window to display in the annotation. Note that if a \fIpathName\fR has been set, then later configuring a window to the empty string will not delete the widget corresponding to the old \fIpathName\fR. Rather it will remove the association between the old \fIpathName\fR and the |
︙ | ︙ | |||
807 808 809 810 811 812 813 | space in the text widget, and it may be referred to either by its position in the widget's index space, or the name it is assigned when the image is inserted into the text widget with \fIpathName \fBimage create\fR. If the range of text containing the embedded image is deleted then that copy of the image is removed from the screen. .PP Eliding an embedded image immediately after scheduling it for creation via | | | < < < < < | 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 | space in the text widget, and it may be referred to either by its position in the widget's index space, or the name it is assigned when the image is inserted into the text widget with \fIpathName \fBimage create\fR. If the range of text containing the embedded image is deleted then that copy of the image is removed from the screen. .PP Eliding an embedded image immediately after scheduling it for creation via \fIpathName \fBimage create \fIindex \fB-create\fR will prevent it from being effectively created. Uneliding an elided embedded image scheduled for creation via \fIpathName \fBimage create \fIindex \fB-create\fR will automatically trigger the associated creation script. After destroying an elided embedded image, the latter won't get automatically recreated. .PP When an embedded image is added to a text widget with the \fIpathName \fBimage create\fR widget command, a name unique to this instance of the image is returned. This name may then be used to refer to this image instance. The name is taken to be the value of the \fB\-name\fR option (described below). If the \fB\-name\fR option is not provided, the \fB\-image\fR name is used instead. If the \fIimageName\fR is already in use in the text widget, then \fB#\fInn\fR is added to the end of the \fIimageName\fR, where \fInn\fR is an arbitrary integer. This insures the \fIimageName\fR is unique. Once this name is assigned to this instance of the image, it does not change, even though the \fB\-image\fR or \fB\-name\fR values can be changed with \fIpathName \fBimage configure\fR. .PP When an embedded image is added to a text widget with the \fIpathName \fBimage create\fR widget command, several configuration options may be associated with it. These options may be modified later with the \fIpathName \fBimage configure\fR widget command. The following options are currently supported: .TP \fB\-align \fIwhere\fR . If the image is not as tall as the line in which it is displayed, this option determines where the image is displayed in the line. \fIWhere\fR must have one of the values \fBtop\fR (align the top of the image with the top of the line), \fBcenter\fR (center the image within the range of the line), \fBbottom\fR (align the bottom of the image with the bottom of the line's area), or \fBbaseline\fR (align the bottom of the image with the baseline of the line). .TP \fB\-image \fIimage\fR . Specifies the name of the Tk image to display in the annotation. If \fIimage\fR is not a valid Tk image, then an error is returned. .TP \fB\-name \fIImageName\fR . Specifies the name by which this image instance may be referenced in the text widget. If \fIImageName\fR is not supplied, then the name of the Tk image is used instead. If the \fIimageName\fR is already in use, \fI#nn\fR is appended to the end of the name as described above. .TP \fB\-padx \fIpixels\fR . \fIPixels\fR specifies the amount of extra space to leave on each side of the embedded image. It may have any of the usual forms defined for a screen distance. .TP \fB\-pady \fIpixels\fR . \fIPixels\fR specifies the amount of extra space to leave on the top and on the bottom of the embedded image. It may have any of the usual forms defined for a screen distance. .SH "THE SELECTION" |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 | creation of peer widgets. .SH "ASYNCHRONOUS UPDATE OF LINE HEIGHTS" .PP In order to maintain a responsive user-experience, the text widget calculates lines metrics (line heights in pixels) asynchronously. Because of this, some commands of the text widget may return wrong results if the asynchronous calculations are not finished at the time of calling. This applies to | | | 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 | creation of peer widgets. .SH "ASYNCHRONOUS UPDATE OF LINE HEIGHTS" .PP In order to maintain a responsive user-experience, the text widget calculates lines metrics (line heights in pixels) asynchronously. Because of this, some commands of the text widget may return wrong results if the asynchronous calculations are not finished at the time of calling. This applies to \fIpathName \fBcount -ypixels\fR and \fIpathName \fByview\fR. .PP Again for performance reasons, it would not be appropriate to let these commands always wait for the end of the update calculation each time they are called. In most use cases of these commands a more or less inaccurate result does not really matter compared to execution speed. .PP In case accurate result is needed (and if the text widget is managed by a |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 | operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .CE \fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as the text widget's path name. \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for text widgets: | < < | < | < < | 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 | operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .CE \fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as the text widget's path name. \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for text widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBbbox \fIindex\fR . Returns a list of four elements describing the screen area of the character given by \fIindex\fR. The first two elements of the list give the x and y coordinates of the upper-left corner of the area occupied by the character, and the last two elements give the width and height of the area. If the character is only partially visible on the screen, then the return value reflects just the visible part. If the character is not visible on the screen then the return value is an empty list. .TP \fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR . Returns the current value of the configuration option given by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBtext\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBcompare\fR \fIindex1 op index2\fR . Compares the indices given by \fIindex1\fR and \fIindex2\fR according to the relational operator given by \fIop\fR, and returns 1 if the relationship is satisfied and 0 if it is not. \fIOp\fR must be one of the operators <, <=, ==, >=, >, or !=. If \fIop\fR is == then 1 is returned if the two indices refer to the same character, if \fIop\fR is < then 1 is returned if \fIindex1\fR refers to an earlier character in the text than \fIindex2\fR, and so on. .TP \fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? . Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBtext\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBcount\fR ?\fIoptions\fR? \fIindex1 index2\fR . Counts the number of relevant things between the two indices. If \fIindex1\fR is after \fIindex2\fR, the result will be a negative number (and this holds for each of the possible options). The actual items which are counted depend on the options given. The result is a list of integers, one for the result of |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 | The command returns a positive or negative integer corresponding to the number of items counted between the two indices. One such integer is returned for each counting option given, so a list is returned if more than one option was supplied. For example .QW ".text count \-xpixels \-ypixels 1.3 4.5" is perfectly valid and will return a list of two elements. .RE | < < | 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 | The command returns a positive or negative integer corresponding to the number of items counted between the two indices. One such integer is returned for each counting option given, so a list is returned if more than one option was supplied. For example .QW ".text count \-xpixels \-ypixels 1.3 4.5" is perfectly valid and will return a list of two elements. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBdebug \fR?\fIboolean\fR? . If \fIboolean\fR is specified, then it must have one of the true or false values accepted by Tcl_GetBoolean. If the value is a true one then internal consistency checks will be turned on in the B-tree code associated with text widgets. If \fIboolean\fR has a false value then the debugging checks will be turned off. In either case the command returns an empty string. If \fIboolean\fR is not specified then the command returns \fBon\fR or \fBoff\fR to indicate whether or not debugging is turned on. There is a single debugging switch shared by all text widgets: turning debugging on or off in any widget turns it on or off for all widgets. For widgets with large amounts of text, the consistency checks may cause a noticeable slow-down. .RS .PP When debugging is turned on, the drawing routines of the text widget set the global variables \fBtk_textRedraw\fR and \fBtk_textRelayout\fR to the lists of indices that are redrawn. The values of these variables are tested by Tk's test suite. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBdelete \fIindex1 \fR?\fIindex2 ...\fR? . Delete a range of characters from the text. If both \fIindex1\fR and \fIindex2\fR are specified, then delete all the characters starting with the one given by \fIindex1\fR and stopping just before \fIindex2\fR (i.e. the character at |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 | All indices are first checked for validity before any deletions are made. They are sorted and the text is removed from the last range to the first range so deleted text does not cause an undesired index shifting side-effects. If multiple ranges with the same start index are given, then the longest range is used. If overlapping ranges are given, then they will be merged into spans that do not cause deletion of text outside the given ranges due to text shifted during deletion. | < < < < < < < < < < | 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 | All indices are first checked for validity before any deletions are made. They are sorted and the text is removed from the last range to the first range so deleted text does not cause an undesired index shifting side-effects. If multiple ranges with the same start index are given, then the longest range is used. If overlapping ranges are given, then they will be merged into spans that do not cause deletion of text outside the given ranges due to text shifted during deletion. .TP \fIpathName \fBdlineinfo \fIindex\fR . Returns a list with five elements describing the area occupied by the display line containing \fIindex\fR. The first two elements of the list give the x and y coordinates of the upper-left corner of the area occupied by the line, the third and fourth elements give the width and height of the area, and the fifth element gives the position of the baseline for the line, measured down from the top of the area. All of this information is measured in pixels. If the current wrap mode is \fBnone\fR and the line extends beyond the boundaries of the window, the area returned reflects the entire area of the line, including the portions that are out of the window. If the line is shorter than the full width of the window then the area returned reflects just the portion of the line that is occupied by characters and embedded windows. If the display line containing \fIindex\fR is not visible on the screen then the return value is an empty list. .TP \fIpathName \fBdump \fR?\fIswitches\fR? \fIindex1 \fR?\fIindex2\fR? . Return the contents of the text widget from \fIindex1\fR up to, but not including \fIindex2\fR, including the text and information about marks, tags, and embedded windows. If \fIindex2\fR is not specified, then it defaults to one character past \fIindex1\fR. The information is returned in the following format: .RS .LP \fIkey1 value1 index1 key2 value2 index2\fR ... .LP The possible \fIkey\fR values are \fBtext\fR, \fBmark\fR, \fBtagon\fR, \fBtagoff\fR, \fBimage\fR, and \fBwindow\fR. The corresponding \fIvalue\fR is the text, mark name, tag name, image name, or window name. The \fIindex\fR information is the index of the start of the text, mark, tag transition, image or window. One or more of the following switches (or abbreviations thereof) may be specified to control the dump: .TP \fB\-all\fR . Return information about all elements: text, marks, tags, images and windows. This is the default. .TP \fB\-command \fIcommand\fR . Instead of returning the information as the result of the dump operation, invoke the \fIcommand\fR on each element of the text widget within the range. The command has three arguments appended to it before it is evaluated: the \fIkey\fR, \fIvalue\fR, and \fIindex\fR. .TP \fB\-image\fR . Include information about images in the dump results. .TP \fB\-mark\fR . Include information about marks in the dump results. .TP \fB\-tag\fR . Include information about tag transitions in the dump results. Tag information is returned as \fBtagon\fR and \fBtagoff\fR elements that indicate the begin and end of each range of each tag, respectively. .TP \fB\-text\fR . Include information about text in the dump results. The value is the text up to the next element or the end of range indicated by \fIindex2\fR. A text element does not span newlines. A multi-line block of text that contains no marks or tag transitions will still be dumped as a set of text segments that each end with a newline. The newline is part of the value. .TP \fB\-window\fR . Include information about embedded windows in the dump results. The value of a window is its Tk pathname, unless the window has not been created yet. (It must have a create script.) In this case an empty string is returned, and you must query the window by its index position to get more information. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBedit \fIoption \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? . This command controls the undo mechanism and the modified flag. The exact behavior of the command depends on the \fIoption\fR argument that follows the \fBedit\fR argument. The following forms of the command are currently supported: |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1388 1389 1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 | . Undoes the last edit action when the \fB\-undo\fR option is true, and returns a list of indices indicating what ranges were changed by the undo operation. An edit action is defined as all the insert and delete commands that are recorded on the undo stack in between two separators. Generates an error when the undo stack is empty. Does nothing when the \fB\-undo\fR option is false. .RE | < < | 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 1360 1361 | . Undoes the last edit action when the \fB\-undo\fR option is true, and returns a list of indices indicating what ranges were changed by the undo operation. An edit action is defined as all the insert and delete commands that are recorded on the undo stack in between two separators. Generates an error when the undo stack is empty. Does nothing when the \fB\-undo\fR option is false. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBget\fR ?\fB\-displaychars\fR? ?\fB\-\-\fR? \fIindex1\fR ?\fIindex2 ...\fR? . Return a range of characters from the text. The return value will be all the characters in the text starting with the one whose index is \fIindex1\fR and ending just before the one whose index is \fIindex2\fR (the character at \fIindex2\fR will not be returned). If \fIindex2\fR is omitted then the single character at \fIindex1\fR is returned. If there are no characters in the specified range (e.g. \fIindex1\fR is past the end of the file or \fIindex2\fR is less than or equal to \fIindex1\fR) then an empty string is returned. If the specified range contains embedded windows, no information about them is included in the returned string. If multiple index pairs are given, multiple ranges of text will be returned in a list. Invalid ranges will not be represented with empty strings in the list. The ranges are returned in the order passed to \fIpathName \fBget\fR. If the \fB\-displaychars\fR option is given, then, within each range, only those characters which are not elided will be returned. This may have the effect that some of the returned ranges are empty strings. .TP \fIpathName \fBimage \fIoption \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? . This command is used to manipulate embedded images. The behavior of the command depends on the \fIoption\fR argument that follows the \fBimage\fR argument. The following forms of the command are currently supported: .RS |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 | identifier returned. .TP \fIpathName \fBimage names\fR . Returns a list whose elements are the names of all image instances currently embedded in \fIwindow\fR. .RE | < < < | 1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 1395 1396 1397 1398 1399 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 1422 1423 1424 1425 1426 | identifier returned. .TP \fIpathName \fBimage names\fR . Returns a list whose elements are the names of all image instances currently embedded in \fIwindow\fR. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBindex \fIindex\fR . Returns the position corresponding to \fIindex\fR in the form \fIline.char\fR where \fIline\fR is the line number and \fIchar\fR is the character number. \fIIndex\fR may have any of the forms described under \fBINDICES\fR above. .TP \fIpathName \fBinsert \fIindex chars \fR?\fItagList chars tagList ...\fR? . Inserts all of the \fIchars\fR arguments just before the character at \fIindex\fR. If \fIindex\fR refers to the end of the text (the character after the last newline) then the new text is inserted just before the last newline instead. If there is a single \fIchars\fR argument and no \fItagList\fR, then the new text will receive any tags that are present on both the character before and the character after the insertion point; if a tag is present on only one of these characters then it will not be applied to the new text. If \fItagList\fR is specified then it consists of a list of tag names; the new characters will receive all of the tags in this list and no others, regardless of the tags present around the insertion point. If multiple \fIchars\fR\-\fItagList\fR argument pairs are present, they produce the same effect as if a separate \fIpathName \fBinsert\fR widget command had been issued for each pair, in order. The last \fItagList\fR argument may be omitted. .TP \fIpathName \fBmark \fIoption \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? . This command is used to manipulate marks. The exact behavior of the command depends on the \fIoption\fR argument that follows the \fBmark\fR argument. The following forms of the command are currently supported: .RS |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1506 1507 1508 1509 1510 1511 1512 | specified in numerical form, then the search for the next mark begins at that index. If \fIindex\fR is the name of a mark, then the search for the next mark begins immediately after that mark. This can still return a mark at the same position if there are multiple marks at the same index. These semantics mean that the \fBmark next\fR operation can be used to step through all the marks in a text widget in the same order as the mark information returned by the \fIpathName \fBdump\fR operation. If a mark has been set to the special | | | 1443 1444 1445 1446 1447 1448 1449 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 1457 | specified in numerical form, then the search for the next mark begins at that index. If \fIindex\fR is the name of a mark, then the search for the next mark begins immediately after that mark. This can still return a mark at the same position if there are multiple marks at the same index. These semantics mean that the \fBmark next\fR operation can be used to step through all the marks in a text widget in the same order as the mark information returned by the \fIpathName \fBdump\fR operation. If a mark has been set to the special \fBend\fR index, then it appears to be \fIafter\fR \fBend\fR with respect to the \fIpathName \fBmark next\fR operation. An empty string is returned if there are no marks after \fIindex\fR. .TP \fIpathName \fBmark previous \fIindex\fR . Returns the name of the mark at or before \fIindex\fR. If \fIindex\fR is specified in numerical form, then the search for the previous mark begins with |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1538 1539 1540 1541 1542 1543 1544 | . Remove the mark corresponding to each of the \fImarkName\fR arguments. The removed marks will not be usable in indices and will not be returned by future calls to .QW "\fIpathName \fBmark names\fR" . This command returns an empty string. .RE | < < < < | < < | 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 1480 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 1493 1494 1495 1496 1497 1498 1499 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 1525 1526 | . Remove the mark corresponding to each of the \fImarkName\fR arguments. The removed marks will not be usable in indices and will not be returned by future calls to .QW "\fIpathName \fBmark names\fR" . This command returns an empty string. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBpeer \fIoption args\fR . This command is used to create and query widget peers. It has two forms, depending on \fIoption\fR: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBpeer create \fInewPathName\fR ?\fIoptions\fR? . Creates a peer text widget with the given \fInewPathName\fR, and any optional standard configuration options (as for the \fItext\fR command). By default the peer will have the same start and end line as the parent widget, but these can be overridden with the standard configuration options. .TP \fIpathName \fBpeer names\fR . Returns a list of peers of this widget (this does not include the widget itself). The order within this list is undefined. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBpendingsync\fR Returns 1 if the line heights calculations are not up-to-date, 0 otherwise. .TP \fIpathName \fBreplace\fR \fIindex1 index2 chars\fR ?\fItagList chars tagList ...\fR? Replaces the range of characters between \fIindex1\fR and \fIindex2\fR with the given characters and tags. See the section on \fIpathName \fBinsert\fR for an explanation of the handling of the \fItagList...\fR arguments, and the section on \fIpathName \fBdelete\fR for an explanation of the handling of the indices. If \fIindex2\fR corresponds to an index earlier in the text than \fIindex1\fR, an error will be generated. .RS .PP The deletion and insertion are arranged so that no unnecessary scrolling of the window or movement of insertion cursor occurs. In addition the undo/redo stack are correctly modified, if undo operations are active in the text widget. The command returns an empty string. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBscan \fIoption args\fR . This command is used to implement scanning on texts. It has two forms, depending on \fIoption\fR: .RS .TP |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 | This command computes the difference between its \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR arguments and the \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR arguments to the last \fIpathName \fBscan mark\fR command for the widget. It then adjusts the view by 10 times the difference in coordinates. This command is typically associated with mouse motion events in the widget, to produce the effect of dragging the text at high speed through the window. The return value is an empty string. .RE | < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 1536 1537 1538 1539 1540 1541 1542 1543 1544 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 1592 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 1623 1624 1625 1626 1627 1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 1645 1646 1647 1648 1649 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 1655 1656 1657 1658 | This command computes the difference between its \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR arguments and the \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR arguments to the last \fIpathName \fBscan mark\fR command for the widget. It then adjusts the view by 10 times the difference in coordinates. This command is typically associated with mouse motion events in the widget, to produce the effect of dragging the text at high speed through the window. The return value is an empty string. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBsearch \fR?\fIswitches\fR? \fIpattern index \fR?\fIstopIndex\fR? . Searches the text in \fIpathName\fR starting at \fIindex\fR for a range of characters that matches \fIpattern\fR. If a match is found, the index of the first character in the match is returned as result; otherwise an empty string is returned. One or more of the following switches (or abbreviations thereof) may be specified to control the search: .RS .TP \fB\-forwards\fR . The search will proceed forward through the text, finding the first matching range starting at or after the position given by \fIindex\fR. This is the default. .TP \fB\-backwards\fR . The search will proceed backward through the text, finding the matching range closest to \fIindex\fR whose first character is before \fIindex\fR (it is not allowed to be at \fIindex\fR). Note that, for a variety of reasons, backwards searches can be substantially slower than forwards searches (particularly when using \fB\-regexp\fR), so it is recommended that performance-critical code use forward searches. .TP \fB\-exact\fR . Use exact matching: the characters in the matching range must be identical to those in \fIpattern\fR. This is the default. .TP \fB\-regexp\fR . Treat \fIpattern\fR as a regular expression and match it against the text using the rules for regular expressions (see the \fBregexp\fR command and the \fBre_syntax\fR page for details). The default matching automatically passes both the \fB\-lineanchor\fR and \fB\-linestop\fR options to the regexp engine (unless \fB\-nolinestop\fR is used), so that \fI^$\fR match beginning and end of line, and \fI.\fR, \fI[^\fR sequences will never match the newline character \fI\en\fR. .TP \fB\-nolinestop\fR . This allows \fI.\fR and \fI[^\fR sequences to match the newline character \fI\en\fR, which they will otherwise not do (see the \fBregexp\fR command for details). This option is only meaningful if \fB\-regexp\fR is also given, and an error will be thrown otherwise. For example, to match the entire text, use .QW "\fIpathName \fBsearch \-nolinestop \-regexp\fR \N'34'.*\N'34' 1.0" . .TP \fB\-nocase\fR . Ignore case differences between the pattern and the text. .TP \fB\-count\fI varName\fR . The argument following \fB\-count\fR gives the name of a variable; if a match is found, the number of index positions between beginning and end of the matching range will be stored in the variable. If there are no embedded images or windows in the matching range (and there are no elided characters if \fB\-elide\fR is not given), this is equivalent to the number of characters matched. In either case, the range \fImatchIdx\fR to \fImatchIdx + $count chars\fR will return the entire matched text. .TP \fB\-all\fR . Find all matches in the given range and return a list of the indices of the first character of each match. If a \fB\-count\fI varName\fR switch is given, then \fIvarName\fR is also set to a list containing one element for each successful match. Note that, even for exact searches, the elements of this list may be different, if there are embedded images, windows or hidden text. Searches with \fB\-all\fR behave very similarly to the Tcl command \fBregexp \-all\fR, in that overlapping matches are not normally returned. For example, applying an \fB\-all\fR search of the pattern .QW \ew+ against .QW "hello there" will just match twice, once for each word, and matching .QW "Z[a\-z]+Z" against .QW ZooZooZoo will just match once. .TP \fB\-overlap\fR . When performing \fB\-all\fR searches, the normal behaviour is that matches which overlap an already-found match will not be returned. This switch changes that behaviour so that all matches which are not totally enclosed within another match are returned. For example, applying an \fB\-overlap\fR search of the pattern .QW \ew+ against .QW "hello there" will just match twice (i.e. no different to just \fB\-all\fR), but matching .QW Z[a\-z]+Z against .QW ZooZooZoo will now match twice. An error will be thrown if this switch is used without \fB\-all\fR. .TP \fB\-strictlimits\fR . When performing any search, the normal behaviour is that the start and stop limits are checked with respect to the start of the matching text. With the \fB\-strictlimits\fR flag, the entire matching range must lie inside the start and stop limits specified for the match to be valid. .TP \fB\-elide\fR . Find elided (hidden) text as well. By default only displayed text is searched. .TP \fB\-\|\-\fR . This switch has no effect except to terminate the list of switches: the next argument will be treated as \fIpattern\fR even if it starts with \fB\-\fR. .PP The matching range may be within a single line of text, or run across multiple |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1749 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 | beginning or end of the text is reached, the search continues at the other end until the starting location is reached again; if \fIstopIndex\fR is specified, no wrap-around will occur. This means that, for example, if the search is \fB\-forwards\fR but \fIstopIndex\fR is earlier in the text than \fIstartIndex\fR, nothing will ever be found. See \fBKNOWN BUGS\fR below for a number of minor limitations of the \fIpathName \fBsearch\fR command. .RE | < < | < < | < < | 1667 1668 1669 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 1676 1677 1678 1679 1680 1681 1682 1683 1684 1685 1686 1687 1688 1689 1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 1697 1698 1699 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 1705 1706 | beginning or end of the text is reached, the search continues at the other end until the starting location is reached again; if \fIstopIndex\fR is specified, no wrap-around will occur. This means that, for example, if the search is \fB\-forwards\fR but \fIstopIndex\fR is earlier in the text than \fIstartIndex\fR, nothing will ever be found. See \fBKNOWN BUGS\fR below for a number of minor limitations of the \fIpathName \fBsearch\fR command. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBsee \fIindex\fR . Adjusts the view in the window so that the character given by \fIindex\fR is completely visible. If \fIindex\fR is already visible then the command does nothing. If \fIindex\fR is a short distance out of view, the command adjusts the view just enough to make \fIindex\fR visible at the edge of the window. If \fIindex\fR is far out of view, then the command centers \fIindex\fR in the window. .TP \fIpathName \fBsync\fR ?\fB-command \fIcommand\fR? Controls the synchronization of the view of the text widget. .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBsync\fR Immediately brings the line metrics up-to-date by forcing computation of any outdated line heights. The command returns immediately if there is no such outdated line heights, otherwise it returns only at the end of the computation. The command returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBsync -command \fIcommand\fR Schedules \fIcommand\fR to be executed (by the event loop) exactly once as soon as all line heights are up-to-date. If there are no pending line metrics calculations, the scheduling is immediate. The command returns the empty string. \fBbgerror\fR is called on \fIcommand\fR failure. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBtag \fIoption \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? . This command is used to manipulate tags. The exact behavior of the command depends on the \fIoption\fR argument that follows the \fBtag\fR argument. The following forms of the command are currently supported: .RS |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1922 1923 1924 1925 1926 1927 1928 | starting at \fIindex2\fR will be considered). If several matching ranges exist, the one closest to \fIindex1\fR is chosen. The command's return value is a list containing two elements, which are the index of the first character of the range and the index of the character just after the last one in the range. If no matching range is found then the return value is an empty string. If \fIindex2\fR is not given then it defaults to the beginning of the text. .TP | | | 1834 1835 1836 1837 1838 1839 1840 1841 1842 1843 1844 1845 1846 1847 1848 | starting at \fIindex2\fR will be considered). If several matching ranges exist, the one closest to \fIindex1\fR is chosen. The command's return value is a list containing two elements, which are the index of the first character of the range and the index of the character just after the last one in the range. If no matching range is found then the return value is an empty string. If \fIindex2\fR is not given then it defaults to the beginning of the text. .TP \fIpathName\fB tag raise \fItagName \fR?\fIaboveThis\fR? . Changes the priority of tag \fItagName\fR so that it is just higher in priority than the tag whose name is \fIaboveThis\fR. If \fIaboveThis\fR is omitted, then \fItagName\fR's priority is changed to make it highest priority of all tags. .TP \fIpathName \fBtag ranges \fItagName\fR |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 | \fIindex2\fR is not affected). A single command may contain any number of \fIindex1\fR\-\fIindex2\fR pairs. If the last \fIindex2\fR is omitted then the tag is removed from the single character at \fIindex1\fR. If there are no characters in the specified range (e.g. \fIindex1\fR is past the end of the file or \fIindex2\fR is less than or equal to \fIindex1\fR) then the command has no effect. This command returns an empty string. .RE | < | 1862 1863 1864 1865 1866 1867 1868 1869 1870 1871 1872 1873 1874 1875 | \fIindex2\fR is not affected). A single command may contain any number of \fIindex1\fR\-\fIindex2\fR pairs. If the last \fIindex2\fR is omitted then the tag is removed from the single character at \fIindex1\fR. If there are no characters in the specified range (e.g. \fIindex1\fR is past the end of the file or \fIindex2\fR is less than or equal to \fIindex1\fR) then the command has no effect. This command returns an empty string. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBwindow \fIoption \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? . This command is used to manipulate embedded windows. The behavior of the command depends on the \fIoption\fR argument that follows the \fBwindow\fR argument. The following forms of the command are currently supported: .RS |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 | information on the options that are supported. Returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBwindow names\fR . Returns a list whose elements are the names of all windows currently embedded in \fIwindow\fR. .RE | < | 1902 1903 1904 1905 1906 1907 1908 1909 1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 | information on the options that are supported. Returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBwindow names\fR . Returns a list whose elements are the names of all windows currently embedded in \fIwindow\fR. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBxview \fIoption args\fR . This command is used to query and change the horizontal position of the text in the widget's window. It can take any of the following forms: .RS .TP |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2037 2038 2039 2040 2041 2042 2043 | pixels are assumed). If \fIwhat\fR is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls; if it is \fBpixels\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR pixels; if it is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right by \fInumber\fR average-width characters on the display. If \fInumber\fR is negative then characters farther to the left become visible; if it is positive then characters farther to the right become visible. .RE | < | 1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 | pixels are assumed). If \fIwhat\fR is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls; if it is \fBpixels\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR pixels; if it is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right by \fInumber\fR average-width characters on the display. If \fInumber\fR is negative then characters farther to the left become visible; if it is positive then characters farther to the right become visible. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fByview \fR?\fIargs\fR? . This command is used to query and change the vertical position of the text in the widget's window. It can take any of the following forms: .RS .TP |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2342 2343 2344 2345 2346 2347 2348 | means in the case where the first extra line added results in no match and Tcl's regexp system returns the incorrect code and adding a second extra line would actually match, the text widget will return the wrong result. In practice this is a rare problem, but it can occur, for example: .CS pack [\fBtext\fR .t] \&.t insert 1.0 "aaaa\enbbbb\encccc\enbbbb\enaaaa\en" | | | | 2251 2252 2253 2254 2255 2256 2257 2258 2259 2260 2261 2262 2263 2264 2265 2266 2267 2268 2269 2270 2271 2272 2273 2274 2275 2276 2277 2278 2279 2280 2281 | means in the case where the first extra line added results in no match and Tcl's regexp system returns the incorrect code and adding a second extra line would actually match, the text widget will return the wrong result. In practice this is a rare problem, but it can occur, for example: .CS pack [\fBtext\fR .t] \&.t insert 1.0 "aaaa\enbbbb\encccc\enbbbb\enaaaa\en" \&.t search \-regexp \-\- {(a+|b+\enc+\enb+)+\ena+} 1.0 .CE will not find a match when one exists of 19 characters starting from the first .QW b . .PP Whenever one possible match is fully enclosed in another, the search command will attempt to ensure only the larger match is returned. When performing backwards regexp searches it is possible that Tcl will not always achieve this, in the case where a match is preceded by one or more short, non-overlapping matches, all of which are preceded by a large match which actually encompasses all of them. The search algorithm used by the widget does not look back arbitrarily far for a possible match which might cover large portions of the widget. For example: .CS pack [\fBtext\fR .t] \&.t insert 1.0 "aaaa\enbbbb\enbbbb\enbbbb\enbbbb\\n" \&.t search \-regexp \-backward \-\- {b+\en|a+\en(b+\en)+} end .CE matches at .QW 5.0 when a true greedy match would match at .QW 1.0 . Similarly if we add \fB\-all\fR to this case, it matches at all of .QW 5.0 , |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/tkerror.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 | .SH SYNOPSIS \fBtkerror \fImessage\fR .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP Note: as of Tk 4.1 the \fBtkerror\fR command has been renamed to \fBbgerror\fR because the event loop (which is what usually invokes | < < | | | 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 | .SH SYNOPSIS \fBtkerror \fImessage\fR .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP Note: as of Tk 4.1 the \fBtkerror\fR command has been renamed to \fBbgerror\fR because the event loop (which is what usually invokes it) is now part of Tcl. For backward compatibility the \fBbgerror\fR provided by the current Tk version still tries to call \fBtkerror\fR if there is one (or an auto loadable one), so old script defining that error handler should still work, but you should anyhow modify your scripts to use \fBbgerror\fR instead of \fBtkerror\fR because that support for the old name might vanish in the near future. If that call fails, \fBbgerror\fR posts a dialog showing the error and offering to see the stack trace to the user. If you want your own error management you should directly override \fBbgerror\fR instead of \fBtkerror\fR. Documentation for \fBbgerror\fR is available as part of Tcl's documentation. .SH KEYWORDS background error, reporting |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/tkvars.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 | .SH NAME geometry, tk_library, tk_patchLevel, tk::scalingPct, tk_strictMotif, tk::svgFmt, tk_version \- Variables used or set by Tk .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The following Tcl variables are either set or used by Tk at various times in its execution: | < | 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | .SH NAME geometry, tk_library, tk_patchLevel, tk::scalingPct, tk_strictMotif, tk::svgFmt, tk_version \- Variables used or set by Tk .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The following Tcl variables are either set or used by Tk at various times in its execution: .TP 15 \fBtk_library\fR . This variable holds the file name for a directory containing a library of Tcl scripts related to Tk. These scripts include an initialization file that is normally processed whenever a Tk application starts up, plus other files containing procedures that implement default behaviors |
︙ | ︙ | |||
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 | compiled-in default location, the location of the Tcl library directory, the location of the binary containing the application, and the current working directory. .PP The variable can be modified by an application to switch to a different library. .RE | < < | 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 | compiled-in default location, the location of the Tcl library directory, the location of the binary containing the application, and the current working directory. .PP The variable can be modified by an application to switch to a different library. .RE .TP \fBtk_patchLevel\fR . Contains a dot-separated sequence of decimal integers giving the current patch level for Tk. The patch level is incremented for each new release or patch, and it uniquely identifies an official version of Tk. .RS .PP This value is normally the same as the result of .QW "\fBpackage require\fR \fBtk\fR" . .RE .TP \fBtk::scalingPct\fR . Tk sets this variable at initialization time to the scaling percentage corresponding to the display's DPI scaling level. This value is at least 100 and is restricted to multiples of 25 (100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, ...). The sizes and various attributes of the Tk core and Ttk |
︙ | ︙ | |||
86 87 88 89 90 91 92 | 150, or 175 when running GNOME on Xorg or the Cinnamon desktop). On \fBx11\fR the scaling percentage is computed mostly (but not exclusively) from the value of the X resource Xft.dpi, and, as an additional step, Tk synchronizes the scaling factor used to convert between physical units and pixels with the scaling percentage, with the aid of the \fBtk scaling\fR command. .RE | < < | 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 | 150, or 175 when running GNOME on Xorg or the Cinnamon desktop). On \fBx11\fR the scaling percentage is computed mostly (but not exclusively) from the value of the X resource Xft.dpi, and, as an additional step, Tk synchronizes the scaling factor used to convert between physical units and pixels with the scaling percentage, with the aid of the \fBtk scaling\fR command. .RE .TP \fBtk_strictMotif\fR . This variable is set to zero by default. If an application sets it to one, then Tk attempts to adhere as closely as possible to Motif look-and-feel standards. For example, active elements such as buttons and scrollbar sliders will not change color when the pointer passes over them. Modern applications should not normally set this variable. .TP \fBtk::svgFmt\fR . This variable is set at Tk initialization time to .RS .RS 4 .PP |
︙ | ︙ | |||
120 121 122 123 124 125 126 | DPI scaling level. .PP Note that any access to this variable is supposed to be strictly read-only! Note also that whenever the scaling factor used to convert between physical units and pixels is changed via \fBtk scaling\fR, the value of the variable \fBtk::svgFmt\fR is automatically updated. .RE | < < < < < | 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 | DPI scaling level. .PP Note that any access to this variable is supposed to be strictly read-only! Note also that whenever the scaling factor used to convert between physical units and pixels is changed via \fBtk scaling\fR, the value of the variable \fBtk::svgFmt\fR is automatically updated. .RE .TP \fBtk_version\fR . Tk sets this variable in the interpreter for each application. The variable holds the current version number of the Tk library in the form \fImajor\fR.\fIminor\fR. \fIMajor\fR and \fIminor\fR are integers. The major version number increases in any Tk release that includes changes that are not backward compatible (i.e. whenever existing Tk applications and scripts may have to change to work with the new release). The minor version number increases with each new release of Tk, except that it resets to zero whenever the major version number changes. .SS "INTERNAL AND DEBUGGING VARIABLES" .PP These variables should not normally be set by user code. .TP \fBtk::Priv\fR . This variable is an array containing several pieces of information that are private to Tk. The elements of \fBtk::Priv\fR are used by Tk library procedures and default bindings. They should not be accessed by any code outside Tk. .TP \fBtk_textRedraw\fR .TP \fBtk_textRelayout\fR . These variables are set by text widgets when they have debugging turned on. The values written to these variables can be used to test or debug text widget operations. These variables are mostly used by Tk's test suite. .SH "OTHER GLOBAL VARIABLES" The following variables are only guaranteed to exist in \fBwish\fR executables; the Tk library does not define them itself but many Tk environments do. .TP \fBgeometry\fR . If set, contains the user-supplied geometry specification to use for the main Tk window. .SH "SEE ALSO" package(n), tclvars(n), wish(1) .SH KEYWORDS environment, text, variables, version '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/tkwait.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH tkwait n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME tkwait \- Wait for variable to change or window to be destroyed .SH SYNOPSIS | < > > < < < < | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 | .TH tkwait n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME tkwait \- Wait for variable to change or window to be destroyed .SH SYNOPSIS \fBtkwait variable \fIname\fR .sp \fBtkwait visibility \fIname\fR .sp \fBtkwait window \fIname\fR .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBtkwait\fR command waits for one of several things to happen, then it returns without taking any other actions. The return value is always an empty string. If the first argument is \fBvariable\fR (or any abbreviation of it) then the second argument is the name of a global variable and the command waits for that variable to be modified. If the first argument is \fBvisibility\fR (or any abbreviation of it) then the second argument is the name of a window and the \fBtkwait\fR command waits for a change in its visibility state (as indicated by the arrival of a VisibilityNotify event). This form is typically used to wait for a newly-created window to appear on the screen before taking some action. If the first argument is \fBwindow\fR (or any abbreviation of it) then the second argument is the name of a window and the \fBtkwait\fR command waits for that window to be destroyed. This form is typically used to wait for a user to finish interacting with a dialog box before using the result of that interaction. .PP While the \fBtkwait\fR command is waiting it processes events in |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/toplevel.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH toplevel n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME toplevel \- Create and manipulate 'toplevel' main and popup window widgets .SH SYNOPSIS | | | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | .TH toplevel n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME toplevel \- Create and manipulate 'toplevel' main and popup window widgets .SH SYNOPSIS \fBtoplevel\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .SO \-borderwidth \-highlightcolor \-pady \-cursor \-highlightthickness \-relief \-highlightbackground \-padx \-takefocus .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-background background Background |
︙ | ︙ | |||
144 145 146 147 148 149 150 | \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .CE .PP \fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as the toplevel widget's path name. \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for toplevel widgets: | < < | 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 | \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .CE .PP \fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as the toplevel widget's path name. \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for toplevel widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR . Returns the current value of the configuration option given by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBtoplevel\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? . Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_panedwindow.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
142 143 144 145 146 147 148 | \fBSash\fP styling options configurable with \fBttk::style\fP are: .PP \fB\-background\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-bordercolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br | | | 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 | \fBSash\fP styling options configurable with \fBttk::style\fP are: .PP \fB\-background\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-bordercolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-gripcount\fP \fIcount\fP .br \fB\-handlepad\fP \fIamount\fP .br \fB\-handlesize\fP \fIamount\fP .br \fB\-lightcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_scrollbar.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
173 174 175 176 177 178 179 | .br \fB\-bordercolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-darkcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP (color of the dark part of the 3D relief) .br \fB\-foreground\fP \fIcolor\fP .br | | | 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 | .br \fB\-bordercolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-darkcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP (color of the dark part of the 3D relief) .br \fB\-foreground\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-gripcount\fP \fIcount\fP (number of lines on the thumb) .br \fB\-lightcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP (color of the light part of the 3D relief) .br \fB\-troughcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .PP Some options are only available for specific themes. .PP |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_treeview.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
321 322 323 324 325 326 327 | .\" METHOD: identify .TP \fIpathname \fBidentify \fIcomponent x y\fR . Returns a description of the specified \fIcomponent\fR under the point given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR, or the empty string if no such \fIcomponent\fR is present at that position. | < < | 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 | .\" METHOD: identify .TP \fIpathname \fBidentify \fIcomponent x y\fR . Returns a description of the specified \fIcomponent\fR under the point given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR, or the empty string if no such \fIcomponent\fR is present at that position. The following subcommands are supported: .RS .TP \fIpathname \fBidentify region \fIx y\fR .RS Returns one of: .IP heading |
︙ | ︙ | |||
715 716 717 718 719 720 721 | .br \fB\-font\fP \fIfont\fP .br \fB\-foreground\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-indent\fP \fIamount\fP .RS | | < | < < < < | | < | 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 | .br \fB\-font\fP \fIfont\fP .br \fB\-foreground\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-indent\fP \fIamount\fP .RS Specifies how many pixels items are indented from their parents. Defaults to 20. .RE .br \fB\-columnseparatorwidth\fP \fIpixels\fP .br \fB\-rowheight\fP \fIpixels\fP .RS This is the standard height for an item. If \fB\-rowheight\fP is not set by the style, it is set by measuring an item and a cell layout with the style's settings. This thus picks up the font and any focus ring or padding from the theme's layout. The \fB\-rowheight\fP may need to be set to make sure that a row is large enough to contain any images. .PP |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/winfo.n.
︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH winfo n 4.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME winfo \- Return window-related information .SH SYNOPSIS | | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 | .TH winfo n 4.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME winfo \- Return window-related information .SH SYNOPSIS \fBwinfo\fR \fIoption \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBwinfo\fR command is used to retrieve information about windows managed by Tk. It can take any of a number of different forms, depending on the \fIoption\fR argument. The legal forms are: .TP \fBwinfo atom \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? \fIname\fR Returns a decimal string giving the integer identifier for the atom whose name is \fIname\fR. If no atom exists with the name \fIname\fR then a new one is created. If the \fB\-displayof\fR option is given then the atom is looked up on the display of \fIwindow\fR; otherwise it is looked up on the display of the application's main window. .TP \fBwinfo atomname \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? \fIid\fR Returns the textual name for the atom whose integer identifier is \fIid\fR. If the \fB\-displayof\fR option is given then the identifier is looked up on the display of \fIwindow\fR; otherwise it is looked up on the display of the application's main window. This command is the inverse of the \fBwinfo atom\fR command. It generates an error if no such atom exists. .TP \fBwinfo cells \fIwindow\fR Returns a decimal string giving the number of cells in the color map for \fIwindow\fR. .TP \fBwinfo children \fIwindow\fR Returns a list containing the path names of all the children of \fIwindow\fR. Top-level windows are returned as children of their logical parents. The list is in stacking order, with the lowest window first, except for Top-level windows which are not returned in stacking order. Use the \fBwm stackorder\fR command to query the stacking order of Top-level windows. .TP \fBwinfo class \fIwindow\fR Returns the class name for \fIwindow\fR. .TP \fBwinfo colormapfull \fIwindow\fR Returns 1 if the colormap for \fIwindow\fR is known to be full, 0 otherwise. The colormap for a window is .QW known to be full if the last attempt to allocate a new color on that window failed and this application has not freed any colors in the colormap since the failed allocation. .TP \fBwinfo containing \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? \fIrootX rootY\fR Returns the path name for the window containing the point given by \fIrootX\fR and \fIrootY\fR. \fIRootX\fR and \fIrootY\fR are specified in screen units (i.e. any form acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR) in the coordinate system of the root window (if a virtual-root window manager is in use then the coordinate system of the virtual root window is used). If the \fB\-displayof\fR option is given then the coordinates refer to the screen containing \fIwindow\fR; otherwise they refer to the screen of the application's main window. If no window in this application contains the point then an empty string is returned. An empty string is also returned if the point lies in the title bar or border of its highest containing toplevel in this application. (Note that with some window managers the borders may be invisible.) In selecting the containing window, children are given higher priority than parents and among siblings the highest one in the stacking order is chosen. .TP \fBwinfo depth \fIwindow\fR Returns a decimal string giving the depth of \fIwindow\fR (number of bits per pixel). .TP \fBwinfo exists \fIwindow\fR Returns 1 if there exists a window named \fIwindow\fR, 0 if no such window exists. .TP \fBwinfo fpixels \fIwindow\fR \fInumber\fR Returns a floating-point value giving the number of pixels in \fIwindow\fR corresponding to the distance given by \fInumber\fR. \fINumber\fR may be specified in any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetScreenMM\fR, such as .QW 2.0c or .QW 1i . The return value may be fractional; for an integer value, use \fBwinfo pixels\fR. .TP \fBwinfo geometry \fIwindow\fR Returns the geometry for \fIwindow\fR, in the form \fIwidth\fBx\fIheight\fB+\fIx\fB+\fIy\fR. All dimensions are in pixels. .TP \fBwinfo height \fIwindow\fR Returns a decimal string giving \fIwindow\fR's height in pixels. When a window is first created its height will be 1 pixel; the height will eventually be changed by a geometry manager to fulfil the window's needs. If you need the true height immediately after creating a widget, invoke \fBupdate\fR to force the geometry manager to arrange it, or use \fBwinfo reqheight\fR to get the window's requested height instead of its actual height. .TP \fBwinfo id \fIwindow\fR Returns a hexadecimal string giving a low-level platform-specific identifier for \fIwindow\fR. On Unix platforms, this is the X window identifier. Under Windows, this is the Windows HWND. On the Macintosh the value has no meaning outside Tk. .TP \fBwinfo interps \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? Returns a list whose members are the names of all Tcl interpreters (e.g. all Tk-based applications) currently registered for a particular display. If the \fB\-displayof\fR option is given then the return value refers to the display of \fIwindow\fR; otherwise it refers to the display of the application's main window. .TP \fBwinfo ismapped \fIwindow\fR Returns \fB1\fR if \fIwindow\fR is currently mapped, \fB0\fR otherwise. .TP \fBwinfo manager \fIwindow\fR Returns the name of the geometry manager currently responsible for \fIwindow\fR, or an empty string if \fIwindow\fR is not managed by any geometry manager. The name is usually the name of the Tcl command for the geometry manager, such as \fBpack\fR or \fBplace\fR. If the geometry manager is a widget, such as canvases or text, the name is the widget's class command, such as \fBcanvas\fR. .TP \fBwinfo name \fIwindow\fR Returns \fIwindow\fR's name (i.e. its name within its parent, as opposed to its full path name). The command \fBwinfo name .\fR will return the name of the application. .TP \fBwinfo parent \fIwindow\fR Returns the path name of \fIwindow\fR's parent, or an empty string if \fIwindow\fR is the main window of the application. .TP \fBwinfo pathname \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? \fIid\fR Returns the path name of the window whose X identifier is \fIid\fR. \fIId\fR must be a decimal, hexadecimal, or octal integer and must correspond to a window in the invoking application. If the \fB\-displayof\fR option is given then the identifier is looked up on the display of \fIwindow\fR; otherwise it is looked up on the display of the application's main window. .TP \fBwinfo pixels \fIwindow\fR \fInumber\fR Returns the number of pixels in \fIwindow\fR corresponding to the distance given by \fInumber\fR. \fINumber\fR may be specified in any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR, such as .QW 2.0c or .QW 1i . The result is rounded to the nearest integer value; for a fractional result, use \fBwinfo fpixels\fR. .TP \fBwinfo pointerx \fIwindow\fR If the mouse pointer is on the same screen as \fIwindow\fR, returns the pointer's x coordinate, measured in pixels in the screen's root window. If a virtual root window is in use on the screen, the position is measured in the virtual root. If the mouse pointer is not on the same screen as \fIwindow\fR then -1 is returned. .TP \fBwinfo pointerxy \fIwindow\fR If the mouse pointer is on the same screen as \fIwindow\fR, returns a list with two elements, which are the pointer's x and y coordinates measured in pixels in the screen's root window. If a virtual root window is in use on the screen, the position is computed in the virtual root. If the mouse pointer is not on the same screen as \fIwindow\fR then both of the returned coordinates are \-1. .TP \fBwinfo pointery \fIwindow\fR If the mouse pointer is on the same screen as \fIwindow\fR, returns the pointer's y coordinate, measured in pixels in the screen's root window. If a virtual root window is in use on the screen, the position is computed in the virtual root. If the mouse pointer is not on the same screen as \fIwindow\fR then -1 is returned. .TP \fBwinfo reqheight \fIwindow\fR Returns a decimal string giving \fIwindow\fR's requested height, in pixels. This is the value used by \fIwindow\fR's geometry manager to compute its geometry. .TP \fBwinfo reqwidth \fIwindow\fR Returns a decimal string giving \fIwindow\fR's requested width, in pixels. This is the value used by \fIwindow\fR's geometry manager to compute its geometry. .TP \fBwinfo rgb \fIwindow color\fR Returns a list containing three decimal values in the range 0 to 65535, which are the red, green, and blue intensities that correspond to \fIcolor\fR in the window given by \fIwindow\fR. \fIColor\fR may be specified in any of the forms acceptable for a color option. .TP \fBwinfo rootx \fIwindow\fR Returns a decimal string giving the x-coordinate, in the root window of the screen, of the upper-left corner of \fIwindow\fR's border (or \fIwindow\fR if it has no border). .TP \fBwinfo rooty \fIwindow\fR Returns a decimal string giving the y-coordinate, in the root window of the screen, of the upper-left corner of \fIwindow\fR's border (or \fIwindow\fR if it has no border). .TP \fBwinfo screen \fIwindow\fR Returns the name of the screen associated with \fIwindow\fR, in the form \fIdisplayName\fR.\fIscreenIndex\fR. .TP \fBwinfo screencells \fIwindow\fR Returns a decimal string giving the number of cells in the default color map for \fIwindow\fR's screen. .TP \fBwinfo screendepth \fIwindow\fR Returns a decimal string giving the depth of the root window of \fIwindow\fR's screen (number of bits per pixel). .TP \fBwinfo screenheight \fIwindow\fR Returns a decimal string giving the height of \fIwindow\fR's screen, in pixels. .TP \fBwinfo screenmmheight \fIwindow\fR Returns a decimal string giving the height of \fIwindow\fR's screen, in millimeters. .TP \fBwinfo screenmmwidth \fIwindow\fR Returns a decimal string giving the width of \fIwindow\fR's screen, in millimeters. .TP \fBwinfo screenvisual \fIwindow\fR Returns one of the following strings to indicate the default visual class for \fIwindow\fR's screen: \fBdirectcolor\fR, \fBgrayscale\fR, \fBpseudocolor\fR, \fBstaticcolor\fR, \fBstaticgray\fR, or \fBtruecolor\fR. .TP \fBwinfo screenwidth \fIwindow\fR Returns a decimal string giving the width of \fIwindow\fR's screen, in pixels. .TP \fBwinfo server \fIwindow\fR Returns a string containing information about the server for \fIwindow\fR's display. The exact format of this string may vary from platform to platform. For X servers the string has the form .QW "\fBX\fImajor\fBR\fIminor vendor vendorVersion\fR" where \fImajor\fR and \fIminor\fR are the version and revision numbers provided by the server (e.g., \fBX11R5\fR), \fIvendor\fR is the name of the vendor for the server, and \fIvendorRelease\fR is an integer release number provided by the server. .TP \fBwinfo toplevel \fIwindow\fR Returns the path name of the top-of-hierarchy window containing \fIwindow\fR. In standard Tk this will always be a \fBtoplevel\fR widget, but extensions may create other kinds of top-of-hierarchy widgets. .TP \fBwinfo viewable \fIwindow\fR Returns 1 if \fIwindow\fR and all of its ancestors up through the nearest toplevel window are mapped. Returns 0 if any of these windows are not mapped. .TP \fBwinfo visual \fIwindow\fR Returns one of the following strings to indicate the visual class for \fIwindow\fR: \fBdirectcolor\fR, \fBgrayscale\fR, \fBpseudocolor\fR, \fBstaticcolor\fR, \fBstaticgray\fR, or \fBtruecolor\fR. .TP \fBwinfo visualid \fIwindow\fR Returns the X identifier for the visual for \fIwindow\fR. .TP \fBwinfo visualsavailable \fIwindow\fR ?\fBincludeids\fR? Returns a list whose elements describe the visuals available for \fIwindow\fR's screen. Each element consists of a visual class followed by an integer depth. The class has the same form as returned by \fBwinfo visual\fR. The depth gives the number of bits per pixel in the visual. In addition, if the \fBincludeids\fR argument is provided, then the depth is followed by the X identifier for the visual. .TP \fBwinfo vrootheight \fIwindow\fR Returns the height of the virtual root window associated with \fIwindow\fR if there is one; otherwise returns the height of \fIwindow\fR's screen. .TP \fBwinfo vrootwidth \fIwindow\fR Returns the width of the virtual root window associated with \fIwindow\fR if there is one; otherwise returns the width of \fIwindow\fR's screen. .TP \fBwinfo vrootx \fIwindow\fR Returns the x-offset of the virtual root window associated with \fIwindow\fR, relative to the root window of its screen. This is normally either zero or negative. Returns 0 if there is no virtual root window for \fIwindow\fR. .TP \fBwinfo vrooty \fIwindow\fR Returns the y-offset of the virtual root window associated with \fIwindow\fR, relative to the root window of its screen. This is normally either zero or negative. Returns 0 if there is no virtual root window for \fIwindow\fR. .TP \fBwinfo width \fIwindow\fR Returns a decimal string giving \fIwindow\fR's width in pixels. When a window is first created its width will be 1 pixel; the width will eventually be changed by a geometry manager to fulfil the window's needs. If you need the true width immediately after creating a widget, invoke \fBupdate\fR to force the geometry manager to arrange it, or use \fBwinfo reqwidth\fR to get the window's requested width instead of its actual width. .TP \fBwinfo x \fIwindow\fR Returns a decimal string giving the x-coordinate, in \fIwindow\fR's parent, of the upper-left corner of \fIwindow\fR's border (or \fIwindow\fR if it has no border). .TP \fBwinfo y \fIwindow\fR Returns a decimal string giving the y-coordinate, in \fIwindow\fR's parent, of the upper-left corner of \fIwindow\fR's border (or \fIwindow\fR if it has no border). .SH EXAMPLE .PP Print where the mouse pointer is and what window it is currently over: .CS lassign [\fBwinfo pointerxy\fR .] x y puts \-nonewline "Mouse pointer at ($x,$y) which is " set win [\fBwinfo containing\fR $x $y] if {$win eq ""} { puts "over no window" } else { puts "over $win" } .CE .SH KEYWORDS atom, children, class, geometry, height, identifier, information, interpreters, mapped, parent, path name, screen, virtual root, width, window '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/wish.1.
︙ | ︙ | |||
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME wish \- Simple windowing shell .SH SYNOPSIS \fBwish\fR ?\fB\-encoding \fIname\fR? ?\fIfileName arg ...\fR? .SH OPTIONS | < < < < < < < < < | 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 | .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME wish \- Simple windowing shell .SH SYNOPSIS \fBwish\fR ?\fB\-encoding \fIname\fR? ?\fIfileName arg ...\fR? .SH OPTIONS .IP "\fB\-encoding \fIname\fR" 20 Specifies the encoding of the text stored in \fIfileName\fR. This option is only recognized prior to the \fIfileName\fR argument. .IP "\fB\-colormap \fInew\fR" 20 Specifies that the window should have a new private colormap instead of using the default colormap for the screen. .IP "\fB\-display \fIdisplay\fR" 20 Display (and screen) on which to display window. .IP "\fB\-geometry \fIgeometry\fR" 20 Initial geometry to use for window. If this option is specified, its value is stored in the \fBgeometry\fR global variable of the application's Tcl interpreter. .IP "\fB\-name \fIname\fR" 20 Use \fIname\fR as the title to be displayed in the window, and as the name of the interpreter for \fBsend\fR commands. .IP "\fB\-sync\fR" 20 Execute all X server commands synchronously, so that errors are reported immediately. This will result in much slower execution, but it is useful for debugging. .IP "\fB\-use\fR \fIid\fR" 20 Specifies that the main window for the application is to be embedded in the window whose identifier is \fIid\fR, instead of being created as an independent toplevel window. \fIId\fR must be specified in the same way as the value for the \fB\-use\fR option for toplevel widgets (i.e. it has a form like that returned by the \fBwinfo id\fR command). .RS Note that on some platforms this will only work correctly if \fIid\fR refers to a Tk \fBframe\fR or \fBtoplevel\fR that has its \fB\-container\fR option enabled. .RE .IP "\fB\-visual \fIvisual\fR" 20 Specifies the visual to use for the window. \fIVisual\fR may have any of the forms supported by the \fBTk_GetVisual\fR procedure. .IP "\fB\-\|\-\fR" 20 Pass all remaining arguments through to the script's \fBargv\fR variable without interpreting them. This provides a mechanism for passing arguments such as \fB\-name\fR to a script instead of having \fBwish\fR interpret them. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION |
︙ | ︙ | |||
122 123 124 125 126 127 128 | .PP The class of the application, which is used for purposes such as specifying options with a \fBRESOURCE_MANAGER\fR property or .Xdefaults file, is the same as its name except that the first letter is capitalized. .SH "VARIABLES" .PP | | < < < < < < < < < < | 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 | .PP The class of the application, which is used for purposes such as specifying options with a \fBRESOURCE_MANAGER\fR property or .Xdefaults file, is the same as its name except that the first letter is capitalized. .SH "VARIABLES" .PP \fBWish\fR sets the following Tcl variables: .TP 15 \fBargc\fR Contains a count of the number of \fIarg\fR arguments (0 if none), not including the options described above. .TP 15 \fBargv\fR Contains a Tcl list whose elements are the \fIarg\fR arguments that follow a \fB\-\|\-\fR option or do not match any of the options described in \fBOPTIONS\fR above, in order, or an empty string if there are no such arguments. .TP 15 \fBargv0\fR Contains \fIfileName\fR if it was specified. Otherwise, contains the name by which \fBwish\fR was invoked. .TP 15 \fBgeometry\fR If the \fB\-geometry\fR option is specified, \fBwish\fR copies its value into this variable. If the variable still exists after \fIfileName\fR has been evaluated, \fBwish\fR uses the value of the variable in a \fBwm geometry\fR command to set the main window's geometry. .TP 15 \fBtcl_interactive\fR Contains 1 if \fBwish\fR is reading commands interactively (\fIfileName\fR was not specified and standard input is a terminal-like device), 0 otherwise. .SH "SCRIPT FILES" .PP If you create a Tcl script in a file whose first line is .CS |
︙ | ︙ | |||
226 227 228 229 230 231 232 | \fBtcl_prompt1\fR exists then it must consist of a Tcl script to output a prompt; instead of outputting a prompt \fBwish\fR will evaluate the script in \fBtcl_prompt1\fR. The variable \fBtcl_prompt2\fR is used in a similar way when a newline is typed but the current command is not yet complete; if \fBtcl_prompt2\fR is not set then no prompt is output for incomplete commands. | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | | 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 | \fBtcl_prompt1\fR exists then it must consist of a Tcl script to output a prompt; instead of outputting a prompt \fBwish\fR will evaluate the script in \fBtcl_prompt1\fR. The variable \fBtcl_prompt2\fR is used in a similar way when a newline is typed but the current command is not yet complete; if \fBtcl_prompt2\fR is not set then no prompt is output for incomplete commands. .SH "SEE ALSO" tclsh(1), toplevel(n), Tk_Main(3), Tk_MainLoop(3), Tk_MainWindow(3) .SH KEYWORDS application, argument, interpreter, prompt, script file, shell, toolkit, toplevel |
Changes to generic/ks_names.h.
︙ | ︙ | |||
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | { "Pause", 0xFF13 }, { "Scroll_Lock", 0xFF14 }, { "Sys_Req", 0xFF15 }, { "Escape", 0xFF1B }, { "Multi_key", 0xFF20 }, { "Kanji", 0xFF21 }, { "Muhenkan", 0xFF22 }, | < > | 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 | { "Pause", 0xFF13 }, { "Scroll_Lock", 0xFF14 }, { "Sys_Req", 0xFF15 }, { "Escape", 0xFF1B }, { "Multi_key", 0xFF20 }, { "Kanji", 0xFF21 }, { "Muhenkan", 0xFF22 }, { "Henkan_Mode", 0xFF23 }, { "Henkan", 0xFF23 }, { "Romaji", 0xFF24 }, { "Hiragana", 0xFF25 }, { "Katakana", 0xFF26 }, { "Hiragana_Katakana", 0xFF27 }, { "Zenkaku", 0xFF28 }, { "Hankaku", 0xFF29 }, { "Zenkaku_Hankaku", 0xFF2A }, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 | { "Greek_DELTA", 0x7C4 }, { "Greek_EPSILON", 0x7C5 }, { "Greek_ZETA", 0x7C6 }, { "Greek_ETA", 0x7C7 }, { "Greek_THETA", 0x7C8 }, { "Greek_IOTA", 0x7C9 }, { "Greek_KAPPA", 0x7CA }, | < > | 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 | { "Greek_DELTA", 0x7C4 }, { "Greek_EPSILON", 0x7C5 }, { "Greek_ZETA", 0x7C6 }, { "Greek_ETA", 0x7C7 }, { "Greek_THETA", 0x7C8 }, { "Greek_IOTA", 0x7C9 }, { "Greek_KAPPA", 0x7CA }, { "Greek_LAMDA", 0x7CB }, { "Greek_LAMBDA", 0x7CB }, { "Greek_MU", 0x7CC }, { "Greek_NU", 0x7CD }, { "Greek_XI", 0x7CE }, { "Greek_OMICRON", 0x7CF }, { "Greek_PI", 0x7D0 }, { "Greek_RHO", 0x7D1 }, { "Greek_SIGMA", 0x7D2 }, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 | { "Greek_delta", 0x7E4 }, { "Greek_epsilon", 0x7E5 }, { "Greek_zeta", 0x7E6 }, { "Greek_eta", 0x7E7 }, { "Greek_theta", 0x7E8 }, { "Greek_iota", 0x7E9 }, { "Greek_kappa", 0x7EA }, | < > | 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 | { "Greek_delta", 0x7E4 }, { "Greek_epsilon", 0x7E5 }, { "Greek_zeta", 0x7E6 }, { "Greek_eta", 0x7E7 }, { "Greek_theta", 0x7E8 }, { "Greek_iota", 0x7E9 }, { "Greek_kappa", 0x7EA }, { "Greek_lamda", 0x7EB }, { "Greek_lambda", 0x7EB }, { "Greek_mu", 0x7EC }, { "Greek_nu", 0x7ED }, { "Greek_xi", 0x7EE }, { "Greek_omicron", 0x7EF }, { "Greek_pi", 0x7F0 }, { "Greek_rho", 0x7F1 }, { "Greek_sigma", 0x7F2 }, |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/nanosvg.h.
︙ | ︙ | |||
1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 | while (*str && nsvg__isdigit(*str)) str++; /* skip integer part */ if (*str == '.') { str++; if (!nsvg__isdigit(*str)) break; /* error: no digit after '.' */ while (*str && nsvg__isdigit(*str)) str++; /* skip fractional part */ } if (*str == '%') str++; else break; | | | 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 | while (*str && nsvg__isdigit(*str)) str++; /* skip integer part */ if (*str == '.') { str++; if (!nsvg__isdigit(*str)) break; /* error: no digit after '.' */ while (*str && nsvg__isdigit(*str)) str++; /* skip fractional part */ } if (*str == '%') str++; else break; while (*str && nsvg__isspace(*str)) str++; if (*str == delimiter[i]) str++; else break; } if (i == 3) { rgbi[0] = roundf(rgbf[0] * 2.55f); rgbi[1] = roundf(rgbf[1] * 2.55f); rgbi[2] = roundf(rgbf[2] * 2.55f); |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tk.decls.
︙ | ︙ | |||
142 143 144 145 146 147 148 | int Tk_ConfigureValue(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, void *widgRec, const char *argvName, int flags) } declare 29 { int Tk_ConfigureWidget(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, | | | 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 | int Tk_ConfigureValue(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, void *widgRec, const char *argvName, int flags) } declare 29 { int Tk_ConfigureWidget(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, Tcl_Size argc, const char **argv, void *widgRec, int flags) } declare 30 { void Tk_ConfigureWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned int valueMask, XWindowChanges *valuePtr) } declare 31 { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 | } declare 75 { void Tk_FreePixmap(Display *display, Pixmap pixmap) } declare 76 { void Tk_FreeTextLayout(Tk_TextLayout textLayout) } declare 78 { GC Tk_GCForColor(XColor *colorPtr, Drawable drawable) } declare 79 { void Tk_GeometryRequest(Tk_Window tkwin, int reqWidth, int reqHeight) } declare 80 { | > > > | 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 | } declare 75 { void Tk_FreePixmap(Display *display, Pixmap pixmap) } declare 76 { void Tk_FreeTextLayout(Tk_TextLayout textLayout) } declare 77 {deprecated {function does nothing, call can be removed}} { void Tk_FreeXId(Display *display, XID xid) } declare 78 { GC Tk_GCForColor(XColor *colorPtr, Drawable drawable) } declare 79 { void Tk_GeometryRequest(Tk_Window tkwin, int reqWidth, int reqHeight) } declare 80 { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
376 377 378 379 380 381 382 | Tk_Cursor Tk_GetCursor(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *str) } declare 92 { Tk_Cursor Tk_GetCursorFromData(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *source, const char *mask, int width, int height, int xHot, int yHot, | | | 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 | Tk_Cursor Tk_GetCursor(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *str) } declare 92 { Tk_Cursor Tk_GetCursorFromData(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *source, const char *mask, int width, int height, int xHot, int yHot, Tk_Uid fg, Tk_Uid bg) } declare 93 { Tk_Font Tk_GetFont(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *str) } declare 94 { Tk_Font Tk_GetFontFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 | declare 116 { Tk_Window Tk_IdToWindow(Display *display, Window window) } declare 117 { void Tk_ImageChanged(Tk_ImageModel model, int x, int y, int width, int height, int imageWidth, int imageHeight) } declare 119 { Atom Tk_InternAtom(Tk_Window tkwin, const char *name) } declare 120 { int Tk_IntersectTextLayout(Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y, int width, int height) } | > > > | 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 | declare 116 { Tk_Window Tk_IdToWindow(Display *display, Window window) } declare 117 { void Tk_ImageChanged(Tk_ImageModel model, int x, int y, int width, int height, int imageWidth, int imageHeight) } declare 118 { int Tk_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp) } declare 119 { Atom Tk_InternAtom(Tk_Window tkwin, const char *name) } declare 120 { int Tk_IntersectTextLayout(Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y, int width, int height) } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 | void *clientData) } declare 143 { int Tk_ParseArgv(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, int *argcPtr, const char **argv, const Tk_ArgvInfo *argTable, int flags) } declare 146 { int Tk_PhotoGetImage(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr) } declare 147 { void Tk_PhotoBlank(Tk_PhotoHandle handle) } declare 149 { void Tk_PhotoGetSize(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr) } declare 151 { int Tk_PointToChar(Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y) } declare 152 { int Tk_PostscriptFontName(Tk_Font tkfont, Tcl_DString *dsPtr) } declare 153 { | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 | void *clientData) } declare 143 { int Tk_ParseArgv(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, int *argcPtr, const char **argv, const Tk_ArgvInfo *argTable, int flags) } declare 144 {deprecated {function signature changed}} { void Tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height) } declare 145 {deprecated {function signature changed}} { void Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int zoomX, int zoomY, int subsampleX, int subsampleY) } declare 146 { int Tk_PhotoGetImage(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr) } declare 147 { void Tk_PhotoBlank(Tk_PhotoHandle handle) } declare 148 {deprecated {function signature changed}} { void Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height ) } declare 149 { void Tk_PhotoGetSize(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr) } declare 150 {deprecated {function signature changed}} { void Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height) } declare 151 { int Tk_PointToChar(Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y) } declare 152 { int Tk_PostscriptFontName(Tk_Font tkfont, Tcl_DString *dsPtr) } declare 153 { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 | declare 157 { int Tk_RestackWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, int aboveBelow, Tk_Window other) } declare 158 { Tk_RestrictProc *Tk_RestrictEvents(Tk_RestrictProc *proc, void *arg, void **prevArgPtr) } declare 160 { const char *Tk_SetAppName(Tk_Window tkwin, const char *name) } declare 161 { void Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_3DBorder border) } declare 162 { | > > > | 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 | declare 157 { int Tk_RestackWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, int aboveBelow, Tk_Window other) } declare 158 { Tk_RestrictProc *Tk_RestrictEvents(Tk_RestrictProc *proc, void *arg, void **prevArgPtr) } declare 159 { int Tk_SafeInit(Tcl_Interp *interp) } declare 160 { const char *Tk_SetAppName(Tk_Window tkwin, const char *name) } declare 161 { void Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_3DBorder border) } declare 162 { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 | int Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], double *dblPtr, int *intPtr) } declare 211 { int Tk_InitOptions(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionToken, Tk_Window tkwin) } declare 213 { void Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr) } declare 214 { int Tk_SetOptions(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionTable, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr, int *maskPtr) } declare 215 { void Tk_InitConsoleChannels(Tcl_Interp *interp) } declare 217 { void Tk_CreateSmoothMethod(Tcl_Interp *interp, const Tk_SmoothMethod *method) } #declare 218 { # void Tk_CreateCanvasVisitor(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *typePtr) #} #declare 219 { | > > > > > > > | 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 | int Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], double *dblPtr, int *intPtr) } declare 211 { int Tk_InitOptions(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionToken, Tk_Window tkwin) } declare 212 {nostub {Don't use this function in a stub-enabled extension}} { void Tk_MainEx(Tcl_Size argc, char **argv, Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc, Tcl_Interp *interp) } declare 213 { void Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr) } declare 214 { int Tk_SetOptions(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionTable, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr, int *maskPtr) } declare 215 { void Tk_InitConsoleChannels(Tcl_Interp *interp) } declare 216 { int Tk_CreateConsoleWindow(Tcl_Interp *interp) } declare 217 { void Tk_CreateSmoothMethod(Tcl_Interp *interp, const Tk_SmoothMethod *method) } #declare 218 { # void Tk_CreateCanvasVisitor(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *typePtr) #} #declare 219 { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 | } # New in 8.4a5 # declare 245 { void Tk_SetCaretPos(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int height) } declare 248 { int Tk_CollapseMotionEvents(Display *display, int collapse) } # Style engine declare 249 { Tk_StyleEngine Tk_RegisterStyleEngine(const char *name, | > > > > > > > > > > > | 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 | } # New in 8.4a5 # declare 245 { void Tk_SetCaretPos(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int height) } declare 246 {deprecated {function signature changed}} { void Tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int compRule) } declare 247 {deprecated {function signature changed}} { void Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int zoomX, int zoomY, int subsampleX, int subsampleY, int compRule) } declare 248 { int Tk_CollapseMotionEvents(Display *display, int collapse) } # Style engine declare 249 { Tk_StyleEngine Tk_RegisterStyleEngine(const char *name, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 | } declare 256 { const char *Tk_NameOfStyle(Tk_Style style) } declare 257 { Tk_Style Tk_AllocStyleFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr) } declare 260 { Tk_StyledElement Tk_GetStyledElement(Tk_Style style, Tcl_Size elementId, Tk_OptionTable optionTable) } declare 261 { void Tk_GetElementSize(Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element, void *recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, int width, int height, | > > > > > > | 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 | } declare 256 { const char *Tk_NameOfStyle(Tk_Style style) } declare 257 { Tk_Style Tk_AllocStyleFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr) } declare 258 { Tk_Style Tk_GetStyleFromObj(Tcl_Obj *objPtr) } declare 259 { void Tk_FreeStyleFromObj(Tcl_Obj *objPtr) } declare 260 { Tk_StyledElement Tk_GetStyledElement(Tk_Style style, Tcl_Size elementId, Tk_OptionTable optionTable) } declare 261 { void Tk_GetElementSize(Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element, void *recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, int width, int height, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 | void Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime(Display *dpy) } # TIP #264 declare 271 { Tcl_Interp *Tk_Interp(Tk_Window tkwin) } # TIP#580 declare 274 { int Tk_AlwaysShowSelection(Tk_Window tkwin) } declare 275 { unsigned Tk_GetButtonMask(unsigned button) | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 | void Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime(Display *dpy) } # TIP #264 declare 271 { Tcl_Interp *Tk_Interp(Tk_Window tkwin) } # Now that the Tk 8.2 -> 8.3 transition is long past, use more conventional # means to continue support for extensions using the USE_OLD_IMAGE to # continue use of their string-based Tcl_ImageTypes and Tcl_PhotoImageFormats. # # Note that this restores the usual rules for stub compatibility. Stub-enabled # extensions compiled against 8.5 headers and linked to the 8.5 stub library # will produce a file [load]able into an interp with Tk 8.X, for X >= 5. # It will *not* be [load]able into interps with Tk 8.4 (or Tk 8.2!). # Developers who need to produce a file [load]able into legacy interps must # build against legacy sources. declare 272 { void Tk_CreateOldImageType(const Tk_ImageType *typePtr) } declare 273 { void Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat(const Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr) } # ----- BASELINE -- FOR -- 8.6.0 ----- # # TIP#580 declare 274 { int Tk_AlwaysShowSelection(Tk_Window tkwin) } declare 275 { unsigned Tk_GetButtonMask(unsigned button) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 | void Tk_Get3DBorderColors(Tk_3DBorder border, XColor *bgColorPtr, XColor *darkColorPtr, XColor *lightColorPtr) } declare 290 { Window Tk_MakeWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, Window parent) } # Define the platform specific public Tk interface. These functions are # only available on the designated platform. interface tkPlat ################################ | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 | void Tk_Get3DBorderColors(Tk_3DBorder border, XColor *bgColorPtr, XColor *darkColorPtr, XColor *lightColorPtr) } declare 290 { Window Tk_MakeWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, Window parent) } # ----- BASELINE -- FOR -- 9.0.0 ----- # # TIP#706 declare 291 { void Tk_UnderlineCharsInContext(Display *display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_Font tkfont, const char *string, Tcl_Size numBytes, int x, int y, Tcl_Size firstByte, Tcl_Size lastByte) } declare 292 { void Tk_DrawCharsInContext(Display * display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_Font tkfont, const char *string, Tcl_Size numBytes, Tcl_Size rangeStart, Tcl_Size rangeLength, int x, int y) } declare 293 { int Tk_MeasureCharsInContext(Tk_Font tkfont, const char *string, Tcl_Size numBytes, Tcl_Size rangeStart, Tcl_Size rangeLength, int maxPixels, int flags, int *lengthPtr) } # ----- BASELINE -- FOR -- 8.7.0 / 9.0.1 ----- # declare 294 { void TkUnusedStubEntry(void) } # Define the platform specific public Tk interface. These functions are # only available on the designated platform. interface tkPlat ################################ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 | } declare 2 win { HWND Tk_GetHWND(Window window) } declare 3 win { Tk_Window Tk_HWNDToWindow(HWND hwnd) } ################################ # Aqua specific functions declare 4 aqua { void TkMacOSXInitAppleEvents(Tcl_Interp *interp) } declare 6 aqua { void TkMacOSXInvalClipRgns(Tk_Window tkwin) } # Stub removed because it just returned NULL. #declare 7 aqua { # void *TkMacOSXGetDrawablePort(Drawable drawable) #} | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 | } declare 2 win { HWND Tk_GetHWND(Window window) } declare 3 win { Tk_Window Tk_HWNDToWindow(HWND hwnd) } declare 4 win { void Tk_PointerEvent(HWND hwnd, int x, int y) } declare 5 win { int Tk_TranslateWinEvent(HWND hwnd, UINT message, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam, LRESULT *result) } ################################ # Aqua specific functions # Stub removed because the function no longer exists. #declare 3 aqua { # void TkMacOSXInitMenus(Tcl_Interp *interp) #} declare 4 aqua { void TkMacOSXInitAppleEvents(Tcl_Interp *interp) } declare 5 aqua { void TkGenWMConfigureEvent_(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int width, int height, int flags) } declare 6 aqua { void TkMacOSXInvalClipRgns(Tk_Window tkwin) } # Stub removed because it just returned NULL. #declare 7 aqua { # void *TkMacOSXGetDrawablePort(Drawable drawable) #} |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tk.h.
︙ | ︙ | |||
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 | * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #ifndef _TK #define _TK #include <tcl.h> | | | | 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 | * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #ifndef _TK #define _TK #include <tcl.h> #if (TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 8) || (defined(TCL_MINOR_VERSION) && (TCL_MAJOR_VERSION == 8) && (TCL_MINOR_VERSION < 6)) # error Tk 8.7 must be compiled with tcl.h from Tcl 8.6 or better #endif #ifndef EXTERN # define EXTERN extern TCL_STORAGE_CLASS #endif /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
61 62 63 64 65 66 67 | * win/tcl.m4 (not patchlevel) * * You may also need to update some of these files when the numbers change for * the version of Tcl that this release of Tk is compiled against. */ #ifndef TK_MAJOR_VERSION | | | > > | | | | | < | 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 | * win/tcl.m4 (not patchlevel) * * You may also need to update some of these files when the numbers change for * the version of Tcl that this release of Tk is compiled against. */ #ifndef TK_MAJOR_VERSION # define TK_MAJOR_VERSION 8 #endif #if TK_MAJOR_VERSION != 8 # error "This header-file is for Tk 8 only" #endif #define TK_MINOR_VERSION 7 #define TK_RELEASE_LEVEL TCL_BETA_RELEASE #define TK_RELEASE_SERIAL 1 #define TK_VERSION "8.7" #define TK_PATCH_LEVEL "8.7b1" /* * A special definition used to allow this header file to be included from * windows or mac resource files so that they can obtain version information. * RC_INVOKED is defined by default by the windows RC tool and manually set * for macintosh. * |
︙ | ︙ | |||
140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 | typedef struct Tk_StyledElement_ *Tk_StyledElement; /* * Additional types exported to clients. */ typedef const char *Tk_Uid; /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * The enum below defines the valid types for Tk configuration options as * implemented by Tk_InitOptions, Tk_SetOptions, etc. */ | > > > > > > > > > | 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 | typedef struct Tk_StyledElement_ *Tk_StyledElement; /* * Additional types exported to clients. */ typedef const char *Tk_Uid; #if (TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9) && defined(TCL_MINOR_VERSION) && (TCL_MINOR_VERSION < 7) # ifndef Tcl_Size # define Tcl_Size int # endif # define TCL_SIZE_MAX INT_MAX # define TCL_SIZE_MODIFIER "" # define TCL_ENCODING_PROFILE_TCL8 0x01000000 #endif /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * The enum below defines the valid types for Tk configuration options as * implemented by Tk_InitOptions, Tk_SetOptions, etc. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 | Tk_CustomOptionFreeProc *freeProc; /* Function to use to free the internal * representation of an option. */ void *clientData; /* Arbitrary one-word value passed to the * handling procs. */ } Tk_ObjCustomOption; /* * The following two structures are used for error handling. When config * options are being modified, the old values are saved in a Tk_SavedOptions * structure. If an error occurs, then the contents of the structure can be * used to restore all of the old values. The contents of this structure are * for the private use Tk. No-one outside Tk should ever read or write any of * the fields of these structures. */ typedef struct Tk_SavedOption { struct TkOption *optionPtr; /* Points to information that describes the * option. */ Tcl_Obj *valuePtr; /* The old value of the option, in the form of * a Tcl object; may be NULL if the value was * not saved as an object. */ | > > > > > > > > > | | | | 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 | Tk_CustomOptionFreeProc *freeProc; /* Function to use to free the internal * representation of an option. */ void *clientData; /* Arbitrary one-word value passed to the * handling procs. */ } Tk_ObjCustomOption; /* * Macro to use to fill in "offset" fields of the Tk_OptionSpec structure. * Computes number of bytes from beginning of structure to a given field. */ #if !defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) && (TK_MAJOR_VERSION < 9) && !defined(BUILD_tk) # define Tk_Offset(type, field) ((int) offsetof(type, field)) #endif /* * The following two structures are used for error handling. When config * options are being modified, the old values are saved in a Tk_SavedOptions * structure. If an error occurs, then the contents of the structure can be * used to restore all of the old values. The contents of this structure are * for the private use Tk. No-one outside Tk should ever read or write any of * the fields of these structures. */ typedef struct Tk_SavedOption { struct TkOption *optionPtr; /* Points to information that describes the * option. */ Tcl_Obj *valuePtr; /* The old value of the option, in the form of * a Tcl object; may be NULL if the value was * not saved as an object. */ #if TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 double internalForm; /* The old value of the option, in some * internal representation such as an int or * (XColor *). Valid only if the field * optionPtr->specPtr->objOffset is -1. The * space must be large enough to accommodate a * long double, a double, a long, or a pointer; * right now it looks like a long double (i.e., 16 * bytes) is big enough. Also, using a long double * guarantees that the field is properly aligned * for storing large values. */ #else long double internalForm; #endif } Tk_SavedOption; #ifdef TCL_MEM_DEBUG # define TK_NUM_SAVED_OPTIONS 2 #else # define TK_NUM_SAVED_OPTIONS 20 |
︙ | ︙ | |||
411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 | * Before changing any values here, coordinate with tkOldConfig.c * (internal-use-only flags are defined there). */ #define TK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY (1 << 1) #define TK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY (1 << 2) #define TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT (1 << 3) #if TCL_MAJOR_VERSION > 8 # define TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK TCL_NULL_OK #else # define TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK (1 << 0) #endif #define TK_CONFIG_USER_BIT 0x100 #endif /* __NO_OLD_CONFIG */ | > > > | 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 | * Before changing any values here, coordinate with tkOldConfig.c * (internal-use-only flags are defined there). */ #define TK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY (1 << 1) #define TK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY (1 << 2) #define TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT (1 << 3) #ifndef TK_NO_DEPRECATED # define TK_CONFIG_OPTION_SPECIFIED (1 << 4) #endif /* !TK_NO_DEPRECATED */ #if TCL_MAJOR_VERSION > 8 # define TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK TCL_NULL_OK #else # define TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK (1 << 0) #endif #define TK_CONFIG_USER_BIT 0x100 #endif /* __NO_OLD_CONFIG */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 | /* * Flags passed to Tk_MeasureChars: */ #define TK_WHOLE_WORDS 1 #define TK_AT_LEAST_ONE 2 #define TK_PARTIAL_OK 4 /* * Flags passed to Tk_ComputeTextLayout: */ #define TK_IGNORE_TABS 8 #define TK_IGNORE_NEWLINES 16 | > | 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 | /* * Flags passed to Tk_MeasureChars: */ #define TK_WHOLE_WORDS 1 #define TK_AT_LEAST_ONE 2 #define TK_PARTIAL_OK 4 #define TK_ISOLATE_END 32 /* * Flags passed to Tk_ComputeTextLayout: */ #define TK_IGNORE_TABS 8 #define TK_IGNORE_NEWLINES 16 |
︙ | ︙ | |||
752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 | (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->flags & TK_WIN_MANAGED) #define Tk_TopWinHierarchy(tkwin) \ (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->flags & TK_TOP_HIERARCHY) #define Tk_IsManageable(tkwin) \ (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->flags & TK_WM_MANAGEABLE) #define Tk_ReqWidth(tkwin) (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->reqWidth) #define Tk_ReqHeight(tkwin) (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->reqHeight) #define Tk_InternalBorderLeft(tkwin) \ (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->internalBorderLeft) #define Tk_InternalBorderRight(tkwin) \ (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->internalBorderRight) #define Tk_InternalBorderTop(tkwin) \ (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->internalBorderTop) #define Tk_InternalBorderBottom(tkwin) \ | > > > > | 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 | (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->flags & TK_WIN_MANAGED) #define Tk_TopWinHierarchy(tkwin) \ (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->flags & TK_TOP_HIERARCHY) #define Tk_IsManageable(tkwin) \ (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->flags & TK_WM_MANAGEABLE) #define Tk_ReqWidth(tkwin) (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->reqWidth) #define Tk_ReqHeight(tkwin) (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->reqHeight) #ifndef TK_NO_DEPRECATED #define Tk_InternalBorderWidth(tkwin) \ (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->internalBorderLeft) #endif /* !TK_NO_DEPRECATED */ #define Tk_InternalBorderLeft(tkwin) \ (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->internalBorderLeft) #define Tk_InternalBorderRight(tkwin) \ (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->internalBorderRight) #define Tk_InternalBorderTop(tkwin) \ (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->internalBorderTop) #define Tk_InternalBorderBottom(tkwin) \ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 | #define TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW 2 /* * Records of the following type are used to describe a type of item (e.g. * lines, circles, etc.) that can form part of a canvas widget. */ typedef int (Tk_ItemCreateProc)(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); typedef int (Tk_ItemConfigureProc)(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], int flags); typedef int (Tk_ItemCoordProc)(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); typedef void (Tk_ItemInsertProc)(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Tcl_Size beforeThis, Tcl_Obj *string); typedef int (Tk_ItemIndexProc)(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Tcl_Obj *indexString, Tcl_Size *indexPtr); typedef void (Tk_ItemDeleteProc)(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display); typedef void (Tk_ItemDisplayProc)(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display, Drawable dst, int x, int y, int width, int height); typedef double (Tk_ItemPointProc)(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *pointPtr); | > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 | #define TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW 2 /* * Records of the following type are used to describe a type of item (e.g. * lines, circles, etc.) that can form part of a canvas widget. */ #if defined(USE_OLD_CANVAS) && TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 typedef int (Tk_ItemCreateProc)(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Tcl_Size argc, char **argv); typedef int (Tk_ItemConfigureProc)(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Tcl_Size argc, char **argv, int flags); typedef int (Tk_ItemCoordProc)(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Tcl_Size argc, char **argv); typedef void (Tk_ItemInsertProc)(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int beforeThis, char *string); typedef int (Tk_ItemIndexProc)(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, char *indexString, int *indexPtr); #else typedef int (Tk_ItemCreateProc)(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); typedef int (Tk_ItemConfigureProc)(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], int flags); typedef int (Tk_ItemCoordProc)(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); typedef void (Tk_ItemInsertProc)(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Tcl_Size beforeThis, Tcl_Obj *string); typedef int (Tk_ItemIndexProc)(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Tcl_Obj *indexString, Tcl_Size *indexPtr); #endif /* USE_OLD_CANVAS */ typedef void (Tk_ItemDeleteProc)(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display); typedef void (Tk_ItemDisplayProc)(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display, Drawable dst, int x, int y, int width, int height); typedef double (Tk_ItemPointProc)(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *pointPtr); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 | Tk_ItemCoordProc *coordProc;/* Procedure to call to get and set the item's * coordinates. */ Tk_ItemDeleteProc *deleteProc; /* Procedure to delete existing item of this * type. */ Tk_ItemDisplayProc *displayProc; /* Procedure to display items of this type. */ | | > > | 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 | Tk_ItemCoordProc *coordProc;/* Procedure to call to get and set the item's * coordinates. */ Tk_ItemDeleteProc *deleteProc; /* Procedure to delete existing item of this * type. */ Tk_ItemDisplayProc *displayProc; /* Procedure to display items of this type. */ int alwaysRedraw; /* Non-zero means displayProc should be called * even when the item has been moved * off-screen. */ Tk_ItemPointProc *pointProc;/* Computes distance from item to a given * point. */ Tk_ItemAreaProc *areaProc; /* Computes whether item is inside, outside, * or overlapping an area. */ Tk_ItemPostscriptProc *postscriptProc; /* Procedure to write a Postscript description * for items of this type. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 | * about a point. */ int reserved2; /* Carefully compatible with */ char *reserved3; /* Jan Nijtmans dash patch */ char *reserved4; } Tk_ItemType; /* | | > | 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 | * about a point. */ int reserved2; /* Carefully compatible with */ char *reserved3; /* Jan Nijtmans dash patch */ char *reserved4; } Tk_ItemType; /* * Flag (used in the alwaysRedraw field) to say whether an item supports * point-level manipulation like the line and polygon items. */ #define TK_ALWAYS_REDRAW 1 /* item should be redrawn always*/ #define TK_MOVABLE_POINTS 2 /* item supports point-level manipulation */ #endif /* __NO_OLD_CONFIG */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 | Tk_Item *focusItemPtr; /* Item that currently has the input focus, or * NULL if no such item. Read-only to items. */ int gotFocus; /* Non-zero means that the canvas widget has * the input focus. Read-only to items.*/ int cursorOn; /* Non-zero means that an insertion cursor * should be displayed in focusItemPtr. * Read-only to items.*/ | < < < < < | 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 | Tk_Item *focusItemPtr; /* Item that currently has the input focus, or * NULL if no such item. Read-only to items. */ int gotFocus; /* Non-zero means that the canvas widget has * the input focus. Read-only to items.*/ int cursorOn; /* Non-zero means that an insertion cursor * should be displayed in focusItemPtr. * Read-only to items.*/ } Tk_CanvasTextInfo; /* * Structures used for Dashing and Outline. */ typedef struct Tk_Dash { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 | * * Procedure prototypes and structures used for managing images: * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ typedef struct Tk_ImageType Tk_ImageType; typedef int (Tk_ImageCreateProc) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], const Tk_ImageType *typePtr, Tk_ImageModel model, void **clientDataPtr); typedef void *(Tk_ImageGetProc) (Tk_Window tkwin, void *clientData); typedef void (Tk_ImageDisplayProc) (void *clientData, Display *display, Drawable drawable, int imageX, int imageY, int width, int height, int drawableX, int drawableY); typedef void (Tk_ImageFreeProc) (void *clientData, Display *display); typedef void (Tk_ImageDeleteProc) (void *clientData); typedef void (Tk_ImageChangedProc) (void *clientData, int x, int y, | > > > > > > | 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 | * * Procedure prototypes and structures used for managing images: * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ typedef struct Tk_ImageType Tk_ImageType; #if !defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) && TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 && defined(USE_OLD_IMAGE) typedef int (Tk_ImageCreateProc) (Tcl_Interp *interp, char *name, Tcl_Size argc, char **argv, Tk_ImageType *typePtr, Tk_ImageModel model, void **clientDataPtr); #else typedef int (Tk_ImageCreateProc) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], const Tk_ImageType *typePtr, Tk_ImageModel model, void **clientDataPtr); #endif /* USE_OLD_IMAGE */ typedef void *(Tk_ImageGetProc) (Tk_Window tkwin, void *clientData); typedef void (Tk_ImageDisplayProc) (void *clientData, Display *display, Drawable drawable, int imageX, int imageY, int width, int height, int drawableX, int drawableY); typedef void (Tk_ImageFreeProc) (void *clientData, Display *display); typedef void (Tk_ImageDeleteProc) (void *clientData); typedef void (Tk_ImageChangedProc) (void *clientData, int x, int y, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1317 1318 1319 1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 | /* * Procedure prototypes and structures used in reading and writing photo * images: */ typedef struct Tk_PhotoImageFormat Tk_PhotoImageFormat; typedef int (Tk_ImageFileMatchProc) (Tcl_Channel chan, const char *fileName, Tcl_Obj *format, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp); typedef int (Tk_ImageStringMatchProc) (Tcl_Obj *dataObj, Tcl_Obj *format, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp); typedef int (Tk_ImageFileReadProc) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Channel chan, const char *fileName, Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle, int destX, int destY, int width, int height, int srcX, int srcY); typedef int (Tk_ImageStringReadProc) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *dataObj, Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle, int destX, int destY, int width, int height, int srcX, int srcY); typedef int (Tk_ImageFileWriteProc) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *fileName, Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr); typedef int (Tk_ImageStringWriteProc) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr); /* * The following alternate definitions are used with the Tk8.7 file format * supporting a metadata dict, internal dstring and close file flag */ typedef struct Tk_PhotoImageFormatVersion3 Tk_PhotoImageFormatVersion3; | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1361 1362 1363 1364 1365 1366 1367 1368 1369 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 1375 1376 1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 1395 1396 1397 1398 1399 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 | /* * Procedure prototypes and structures used in reading and writing photo * images: */ typedef struct Tk_PhotoImageFormat Tk_PhotoImageFormat; #ifdef USE_OLD_IMAGE typedef int (Tk_ImageFileMatchProc) (Tcl_Channel chan, char *fileName, char *formatString, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr); typedef int (Tk_ImageStringMatchProc) (char *string, char *formatString, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr); typedef int (Tk_ImageFileReadProc) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Channel chan, char *fileName, char *formatString, Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle, int destX, int destY, int width, int height, int srcX, int srcY); typedef int (Tk_ImageStringReadProc) (Tcl_Interp *interp, char *string, char *formatString, Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle, int destX, int destY, int width, int height, int srcX, int srcY); typedef int (Tk_ImageFileWriteProc) (Tcl_Interp *interp, char *fileName, char *formatString, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr); typedef int (Tk_ImageStringWriteProc) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_DString *dataPtr, char *formatString, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr); #else typedef int (Tk_ImageFileMatchProc) (Tcl_Channel chan, const char *fileName, Tcl_Obj *format, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp); typedef int (Tk_ImageStringMatchProc) (Tcl_Obj *dataObj, Tcl_Obj *format, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp); typedef int (Tk_ImageFileReadProc) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Channel chan, const char *fileName, Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle, int destX, int destY, int width, int height, int srcX, int srcY); typedef int (Tk_ImageStringReadProc) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *dataObj, Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle, int destX, int destY, int width, int height, int srcX, int srcY); typedef int (Tk_ImageFileWriteProc) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *fileName, Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr); typedef int (Tk_ImageStringWriteProc) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr); #endif /* USE_OLD_IMAGE */ /* * The following alternate definitions are used with the Tk8.7 file format * supporting a metadata dict, internal dstring and close file flag */ typedef struct Tk_PhotoImageFormatVersion3 Tk_PhotoImageFormatVersion3; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1503 1504 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 | *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * The definitions below provide backward compatibility for functions and * types that used to be in Tk but have moved to Tcl. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ /* Removed Tk_Main, use macro instead */ #if defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__) #define Tk_Main(argc, argv, proc) Tk_MainEx(argc, argv, proc, \ (Tcl_FindExecutable(0), (Tcl_CreateInterp)())) #else #define Tk_Main(argc, argv, proc) Tk_MainEx(argc, argv, proc, \ | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1564 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 1592 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 | *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * The definitions below provide backward compatibility for functions and * types that used to be in Tk but have moved to Tcl. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ #if !defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) && TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 #define TK_READABLE TCL_READABLE #define TK_WRITABLE TCL_WRITABLE #define TK_EXCEPTION TCL_EXCEPTION #define TK_DONT_WAIT TCL_DONT_WAIT #define TK_X_EVENTS TCL_WINDOW_EVENTS #define TK_WINDOW_EVENTS TCL_WINDOW_EVENTS #define TK_FILE_EVENTS TCL_FILE_EVENTS #define TK_TIMER_EVENTS TCL_TIMER_EVENTS #define TK_IDLE_EVENTS TCL_IDLE_EVENTS #define TK_ALL_EVENTS TCL_ALL_EVENTS #define Tk_IdleProc Tcl_IdleProc #define Tk_FileProc Tcl_FileProc #define Tk_TimerProc Tcl_TimerProc #define Tk_TimerToken Tcl_TimerToken #define Tk_BackgroundError Tcl_BackgroundError #define Tk_CancelIdleCall Tcl_CancelIdleCall #define Tk_CreateFileHandler Tcl_CreateFileHandler #define Tk_CreateTimerHandler Tcl_CreateTimerHandler #define Tk_DeleteFileHandler Tcl_DeleteFileHandler #define Tk_DeleteTimerHandler Tcl_DeleteTimerHandler #define Tk_DoOneEvent Tcl_DoOneEvent #define Tk_DoWhenIdle Tcl_DoWhenIdle #define Tk_Sleep Tcl_Sleep /* Additional stuff that has moved to Tcl: */ #define Tk_EventuallyFree Tcl_EventuallyFree #define Tk_FreeProc Tcl_FreeProc #define Tk_Preserve Tcl_Preserve #define Tk_Release Tcl_Release /* Related to USE_OLD_IMAGE: */ #define Tk_InitImageArgs(interp, argc, argv) /**/ #endif /* Removed Tk_Main, use macro instead */ #if defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__) #define Tk_Main(argc, argv, proc) Tk_MainEx(argc, argv, proc, \ (Tcl_FindExecutable(0), (Tcl_CreateInterp)())) #else #define Tk_Main(argc, argv, proc) Tk_MainEx(argc, argv, proc, \ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1552 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 1565 | * Platform independent exported procedures and variables. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ #include "tkDecls.h" #undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS #define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT #endif /* RC_INVOKED */ /* * end block for C++ | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1653 1654 1655 1656 1657 1658 1659 1660 1661 1662 1663 1664 1665 1666 1667 1668 1669 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 1676 1677 1678 1679 1680 1681 1682 1683 1684 1685 1686 1687 1688 1689 1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 1697 1698 1699 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 | * Platform independent exported procedures and variables. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ #include "tkDecls.h" #ifdef USE_OLD_IMAGE #undef Tk_CreateImageType #define Tk_CreateImageType Tk_CreateOldImageType #undef Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat #define Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat #endif /* USE_OLD_IMAGE */ /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * Allow users to say that they don't want to alter their source to add extra * arguments to Tk_PhotoPutBlock() et al. * * This goes after the inclusion of the stubbed-decls so that the declarations * of what is actually there can be correct. */ #if !defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) && TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 #ifdef USE_COMPOSITELESS_PHOTO_PUT_BLOCK # ifdef Tk_PhotoPutBlock # undef Tk_PhotoPutBlock # endif # define Tk_PhotoPutBlock Tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite # ifdef Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock # undef Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock # endif # define Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite # define USE_PANIC_ON_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE #else /* !USE_COMPOSITELESS_PHOTO_PUT_BLOCK */ # ifdef USE_PANIC_ON_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE # ifdef Tk_PhotoPutBlock # undef Tk_PhotoPutBlock # endif # define Tk_PhotoPutBlock Tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic # ifdef Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock # undef Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock # endif # define Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic # endif /* USE_PANIC_ON_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE */ #endif /* USE_COMPOSITELESS_PHOTO_PUT_BLOCK */ #ifdef USE_PANIC_ON_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE # ifdef Tk_PhotoExpand # undef Tk_PhotoExpand # endif # define Tk_PhotoExpand Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic # ifdef Tk_PhotoSetSize # undef Tk_PhotoSetSize # endif # define Tk_PhotoSetSize Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic #endif /* USE_PANIC_ON_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE */ #endif /* !TK_NO_DEPRECATED */ #undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS #define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT #endif /* RC_INVOKED */ /* * end block for C++ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tk3d.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
180 181 182 183 184 185 186 | */ Tk_3DBorder Tk_Get3DBorder( Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Place to store an error message. */ Tk_Window tkwin, /* Token for window in which border will be * drawn. */ | | | 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 | */ Tk_3DBorder Tk_Get3DBorder( Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Place to store an error message. */ Tk_Window tkwin, /* Token for window in which border will be * drawn. */ const char *colorName) /* String giving name of color for window * background. */ { Tcl_HashEntry *hashPtr; TkBorder *borderPtr, *existingBorderPtr; int isNew; XGCValues gcValues; XColor *bgColorPtr; |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkBind.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
45 46 47 48 49 50 51 | * Tcl "event" command implementation, plus helpers. * * Package-specific common helpers. * * Non-package-specific helpers. */ | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 | * Tcl "event" command implementation, plus helpers. * * Package-specific common helpers. * * Non-package-specific helpers. */ /* * The output for motion events is of the type <B1-Motion>. This can be changed to become * <Motion-1> instead by setting PRINT_SHORT_MOTION_SYNTAX to 1, however this would be a * backwards incompatibility. */ #ifndef PRINT_SHORT_MOTION_SYNTAX # define PRINT_SHORT_MOTION_SYNTAX 0 /* set to 1 if wanted */ #endif /* * For debugging only, normally set to zero. */ #ifdef SUPPORT_DEBUGGING # undef SUPPORT_DEBUGGING #endif |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2127 2128 2129 2130 2131 2132 2133 | if (!sndMatchPtr) { return 0; } if (!fstMatchPtr) { return 1; } diff = CountSpecialized(fstMatchPtr, sndMatchPtr); if (diff > 0) { return 1; } if (diff < 0) { return 0; } | < | | | | | 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 2105 2106 2107 2108 2109 2110 2111 2112 2113 2114 2115 2116 2117 2118 2119 | if (!sndMatchPtr) { return 0; } if (!fstMatchPtr) { return 1; } diff = CountSpecialized(fstMatchPtr, sndMatchPtr); if (diff > 0) { return 1; } if (diff < 0) { return 0; } { /* local scope */ #define M 1000000ULL static const unsigned long long weight[5] = { 0, 1, M, M*M, M*M*M }; #undef M unsigned long long fstCount = 0; unsigned long long sndCount = 0; unsigned i; /* * Count the most high-ordered patterns. * * (This computation assumes that a sequence does not contain more than * 1,000,000 single patterns. It can be precluded that in practice this |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2155 2156 2157 2158 2159 2160 2161 | for (i = 0; i < sndMatchPtr->numPats; ++i) { assert(GetCount(sndMatchPtr, i) < SIZE_OF_ARRAY(weight)); sndCount += weight[GetCount(sndMatchPtr, i)]; } if (sndCount > fstCount) { return 1; } if (sndCount < fstCount) { return 0; } } | < | 2127 2128 2129 2130 2131 2132 2133 2134 2135 2136 2137 2138 2139 2140 | for (i = 0; i < sndMatchPtr->numPats; ++i) { assert(GetCount(sndMatchPtr, i) < SIZE_OF_ARRAY(weight)); sndCount += weight[GetCount(sndMatchPtr, i)]; } if (sndCount > fstCount) { return 1; } if (sndCount < fstCount) { return 0; } } return sndMatchPtr->number > fstMatchPtr->number; } void Tk_BindEvent( Tk_BindingTable bindPtr, /* Table in which to look for bindings. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3025 3026 3027 3028 3029 3030 3031 | * Find everything up to the next % character and append it to the * result string. */ for (string = before; *string && *string != '%'; ++string) ; if (string != before) { | | | 2996 2997 2998 2999 3000 3001 3002 3003 3004 3005 3006 3007 3008 3009 3010 | * Find everything up to the next % character and append it to the * result string. */ for (string = before; *string && *string != '%'; ++string) ; if (string != before) { Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, before, string - before); before = string; } if (!*before) { break; } /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5001 5002 5003 5004 5005 5006 5007 5008 5009 5010 5011 5012 5013 5014 5015 5016 5017 | } p = SkipFieldDelims(p); } eventFlags = 0; if ((hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&eventTable, field))) { const EventInfo *eiPtr = (const EventInfo *)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr); patPtr->eventType = eiPtr->type; eventFlags = flagArray[eiPtr->type]; eventMask = eiPtr->eventMask; p = GetField(SkipFieldDelims(p), field, sizeof(field)); } if (*field) { unsigned button = GetButtonNumber(field); if ((eventFlags & BUTTON) || (button && eventFlags == 0) | > | | 4972 4973 4974 4975 4976 4977 4978 4979 4980 4981 4982 4983 4984 4985 4986 4987 4988 4989 4990 4991 4992 4993 4994 4995 4996 4997 | } p = SkipFieldDelims(p); } eventFlags = 0; if ((hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&eventTable, field))) { const EventInfo *eiPtr = (const EventInfo *)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr); patPtr->eventType = eiPtr->type; eventFlags = flagArray[eiPtr->type]; eventMask = eiPtr->eventMask; p = GetField(SkipFieldDelims(p), field, sizeof(field)); } if (*field) { unsigned button = GetButtonNumber(field); if ((eventFlags & BUTTON) || (button && eventFlags == 0) || ((eventFlags & MOTION) && button == 0)) { /* This must be a button (or bad motion) event. */ if (button == 0) { return FinalizeParseEventDescription( interp, patPtr, 0, Tcl_ObjPrintf("bad button number \"%s\"", field), "BUTTON"); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5038 5039 5040 5041 5042 5043 5044 | Tcl_ObjPrintf("bad event type or keysym \"%s\"", field), "KEYSYM"); } if (!(eventFlags & KEY)) { patPtr->eventType = KeyPress; eventMask = KeyPressMask; } } else if (button) { | | < < | 5010 5011 5012 5013 5014 5015 5016 5017 5018 5019 5020 5021 5022 5023 5024 5025 5026 5027 5028 5029 5030 5031 5032 5033 5034 5035 5036 5037 5038 5039 5040 5041 5042 5043 | Tcl_ObjPrintf("bad event type or keysym \"%s\"", field), "KEYSYM"); } if (!(eventFlags & KEY)) { patPtr->eventType = KeyPress; eventMask = KeyPressMask; } } else if (button) { if (patPtr->eventType != MotionNotify) { return FinalizeParseEventDescription( interp, patPtr, 0, Tcl_ObjPrintf("specified button \"%s\" for non-button event", field), "NON_BUTTON"); } patPtr->modMask |= Tk_GetButtonMask(button); p = SkipFieldDelims(p); while (*p && *p != '>') { p = SkipFieldDelims(GetField(p, field, sizeof(field))); if ((button = GetButtonNumber(field)) == 0) { return FinalizeParseEventDescription( interp, patPtr, 0, Tcl_ObjPrintf("bad button number \"%s\"", field), "BUTTON"); } patPtr->modMask |= Tk_GetButtonMask(button); } patPtr->info = ButtonNumberFromState(patPtr->modMask); } else { return FinalizeParseEventDescription( interp, patPtr, 0, Tcl_ObjPrintf("specified keysym \"%s\" for non-key event", field), "NON_KEY"); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5205 5206 5207 5208 5209 5210 5211 | case 3: Tcl_AppendToObj(patternObj, "Triple-", 7); break; case 4: Tcl_AppendToObj(patternObj, "Quadruple-", 10); break; } modMask = patPtr->modMask; #if PRINT_SHORT_MOTION_SYNTAX if (patPtr->eventType == MotionNotify) { | | | 5175 5176 5177 5178 5179 5180 5181 5182 5183 5184 5185 5186 5187 5188 5189 | case 3: Tcl_AppendToObj(patternObj, "Triple-", 7); break; case 4: Tcl_AppendToObj(patternObj, "Quadruple-", 10); break; } modMask = patPtr->modMask; #if PRINT_SHORT_MOTION_SYNTAX if (patPtr->eventType == MotionNotify) { modMask &= ~(unsigned)ALL_BUTTONS; } #endif for (modPtr = modArray; modMask; ++modPtr) { if (modPtr->mask & modMask) { modMask &= ~modPtr->mask; Tcl_AppendPrintfToObj(patternObj, "%s-", modPtr->name); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5283 5284 5285 5286 5287 5288 5289 | const char *name) /* Name of a keysym. */ { #ifdef REDO_KEYSYM_LOOKUP Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr; #endif /* REDO_KEYSYM_LOOKUP */ int keysym; | | | 5253 5254 5255 5256 5257 5258 5259 5260 5261 5262 5263 5264 5265 5266 5267 | const char *name) /* Name of a keysym. */ { #ifdef REDO_KEYSYM_LOOKUP Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr; #endif /* REDO_KEYSYM_LOOKUP */ int keysym; size_t len = TkUtfToUniChar(name, &keysym); if (name[len] == '\0') { if (!Tcl_UniCharIsPrint(keysym)) { /* This form not supported */ } else if ((unsigned)(keysym - 0x21) <= 0x5D) { return (KeySym)keysym; } else if ((unsigned)(keysym - 0xA1) <= 0x5E) { return (KeySym)keysym; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5367 5368 5369 5370 5371 5372 5373 | } else if (keysym == 0x20AC) { keysym += 0x1000000; } if ((keysym >= 0x1000020) && (keysym <= 0x110FFFF) && ((unsigned)(keysym - 0x100007F) > 0x20)) { char buf[10]; if (Tcl_UniCharIsPrint(keysym-0x1000000)) { | | | 5337 5338 5339 5340 5341 5342 5343 5344 5345 5346 5347 5348 5349 5350 5351 | } else if (keysym == 0x20AC) { keysym += 0x1000000; } if ((keysym >= 0x1000020) && (keysym <= 0x110FFFF) && ((unsigned)(keysym - 0x100007F) > 0x20)) { char buf[10]; if (Tcl_UniCharIsPrint(keysym-0x1000000)) { buf[TkUniCharToUtf(keysym - 0x1000000, buf)] = '\0'; } else if (keysym >= 0x1010000) { snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf), "U%08X", (int)(keysym - 0x1000000)); } else { snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf), "U%04X", (int)(keysym - 0x1000000)); } return Tk_GetUid(buf); } |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkButton.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
75 76 77 78 79 80 81 | NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-borderwidth", 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-background", 0}, {TK_OPTION_BITMAP, "-bitmap", "bitmap", "Bitmap", DEF_BUTTON_BITMAP, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, bitmap), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 | NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-borderwidth", 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-background", 0}, {TK_OPTION_BITMAP, "-bitmap", "bitmap", "Bitmap", DEF_BUTTON_BITMAP, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, bitmap), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", tkDefButtonBorderWidth, offsetof(TkButton, borderWidthPtr), offsetof(TkButton, borderWidth), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-compound", "compound", "Compound", DEF_BUTTON_COMPOUND, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, compound), 0, tkCompoundStrings, 0}, {TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor", DEF_BUTTON_CURSOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, cursor), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-disabledforeground", "disabledForeground", "DisabledForeground", DEF_BUTTON_DISABLED_FG_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, disabledFg), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, DEF_BUTTON_DISABLED_FG_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-foreground", 0}, {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font", DEF_BUTTON_FONT, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, tkfont), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground", DEF_LABEL_FG, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, normalFg), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-height", "height", "Height", DEF_BUTTON_HEIGHT, offsetof(TkButton, heightPtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground", "HighlightBackground", DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_BG_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, highlightBorder), 0, DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_BG_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor", DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, highlightColorPtr), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness", "HighlightThickness", tkDefLabelHighlightWidth, offsetof(TkButton, highlightWidthPtr), offsetof(TkButton, highlightWidth), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-image", "image", "Image", DEF_BUTTON_IMAGE, offsetof(TkButton, imagePtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify", DEF_BUTTON_JUSTIFY, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, justify), TK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", "padX", "Pad", tkDefLabelPadx, offsetof(TkButton, padXPtr), offsetof(TkButton, padX), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", "padY", "Pad", tkDefLabelPady, offsetof(TkButton, padYPtr), offsetof(TkButton, padY), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief", DEF_LABCHKRAD_RELIEF, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, relief), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-state", "state", "State", DEF_BUTTON_STATE, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, state), TK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR, tkStateStrings, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus", DEF_LABEL_TAKE_FOCUS, offsetof(TkButton, takeFocusPtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-text", "text", "Text", DEF_BUTTON_TEXT, offsetof(TkButton, textPtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-textvariable", "textVariable", "Variable", DEF_BUTTON_TEXT_VARIABLE, offsetof(TkButton, textVarNamePtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_INDEX, "-underline", "underline", "Underline", TK_OPTION_UNDERLINE_DEF(TkButton, underline), 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-width", "width", "Width", DEF_BUTTON_WIDTH, offsetof(TkButton, widthPtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-wraplength", "wrapLength", "WrapLength", DEF_BUTTON_WRAP_LENGTH, offsetof(TkButton, wrapLengthPtr), offsetof(TkButton, wrapLength), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0} }; static const Tk_OptionSpec buttonOptionSpecs[] = { {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-activebackground", "activeBackground", "Foreground", DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, activeBorder), 0, DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_MONO, 0}, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
160 161 162 163 164 165 166 | NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-borderwidth", 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-background", 0}, {TK_OPTION_BITMAP, "-bitmap", "bitmap", "Bitmap", DEF_BUTTON_BITMAP, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, bitmap), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", | | | | 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 | NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-borderwidth", 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-background", 0}, {TK_OPTION_BITMAP, "-bitmap", "bitmap", "Bitmap", DEF_BUTTON_BITMAP, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, bitmap), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", tkDefButtonBorderWidth, offsetof(TkButton, borderWidthPtr), offsetof(TkButton, borderWidth), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-command", "command", "Command", DEF_BUTTON_COMMAND, offsetof(TkButton, commandPtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-compound", "compound", "Compound", DEF_BUTTON_COMPOUND, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, compound), 0, tkCompoundStrings, 0}, {TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor", |
︙ | ︙ | |||
185 186 187 188 189 190 191 | {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-foreground", 0}, {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font", DEF_BUTTON_FONT, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, tkfont), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground", DEF_BUTTON_FG, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, normalFg), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-height", "height", "Height", | | | | | | | | | 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 | {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-foreground", 0}, {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font", DEF_BUTTON_FONT, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, tkfont), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground", DEF_BUTTON_FG, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, normalFg), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-height", "height", "Height", DEF_BUTTON_HEIGHT, offsetof(TkButton, heightPtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground", "HighlightBackground", DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_BG_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, highlightBorder), 0, DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_BG_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor", DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, highlightColorPtr), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness", "HighlightThickness", tkDefButtonHighlightWidth, offsetof(TkButton, highlightWidthPtr), offsetof(TkButton, highlightWidth), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-image", "image", "Image", DEF_BUTTON_IMAGE, offsetof(TkButton, imagePtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify", DEF_BUTTON_JUSTIFY, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, justify), TK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-overrelief", "overRelief", "OverRelief", DEF_BUTTON_OVER_RELIEF, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, overRelief), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", "padX", "Pad", tkDefButtonPadx, offsetof(TkButton, padXPtr), offsetof(TkButton, padX), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", "padY", "Pad", tkDefButtonPady, offsetof(TkButton, padYPtr), offsetof(TkButton, padY), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief", DEF_BUTTON_RELIEF, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, relief), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_INT, "-repeatdelay", "repeatDelay", "RepeatDelay", DEF_BUTTON_REPEAT_DELAY, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, repeatDelay), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_INT, "-repeatinterval", "repeatInterval", "RepeatInterval", |
︙ | ︙ | |||
234 235 236 237 238 239 240 | DEF_BUTTON_TEXT, offsetof(TkButton, textPtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-textvariable", "textVariable", "Variable", DEF_BUTTON_TEXT_VARIABLE, offsetof(TkButton, textVarNamePtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_INDEX, "-underline", "underline", "Underline", TK_OPTION_UNDERLINE_DEF(TkButton, underline), 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-width", "width", "Width", | | | | | 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 | DEF_BUTTON_TEXT, offsetof(TkButton, textPtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-textvariable", "textVariable", "Variable", DEF_BUTTON_TEXT_VARIABLE, offsetof(TkButton, textVarNamePtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_INDEX, "-underline", "underline", "Underline", TK_OPTION_UNDERLINE_DEF(TkButton, underline), 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-width", "width", "Width", DEF_BUTTON_WIDTH, offsetof(TkButton, widthPtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-wraplength", "wrapLength", "WrapLength", DEF_BUTTON_WRAP_LENGTH, offsetof(TkButton, wrapLengthPtr), offsetof(TkButton, wrapLength), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, 0, 0} }; static const Tk_OptionSpec checkbuttonOptionSpecs[] = { {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-activebackground", "activeBackground", "Foreground", DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, activeBorder), 0, DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_MONO, 0}, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
261 262 263 264 265 266 267 | NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-borderwidth", 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-background", 0}, {TK_OPTION_BITMAP, "-bitmap", "bitmap", "Bitmap", DEF_BUTTON_BITMAP, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, bitmap), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", | | | | | | | | | | | 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 | NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-borderwidth", 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-background", 0}, {TK_OPTION_BITMAP, "-bitmap", "bitmap", "Bitmap", DEF_BUTTON_BITMAP, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, bitmap), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", tkDefButtonBorderWidth, offsetof(TkButton, borderWidthPtr), offsetof(TkButton, borderWidth), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-command", "command", "Command", DEF_BUTTON_COMMAND, offsetof(TkButton, commandPtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-compound", "compound", "Compound", DEF_BUTTON_COMPOUND, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, compound), 0, tkCompoundStrings, 0}, {TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor", DEF_BUTTON_CURSOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, cursor), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-disabledforeground", "disabledForeground", "DisabledForeground", DEF_BUTTON_DISABLED_FG_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, disabledFg), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, DEF_BUTTON_DISABLED_FG_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-foreground", 0}, {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font", DEF_BUTTON_FONT, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, tkfont), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground", DEF_CHKRAD_FG, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, normalFg), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-height", "height", "Height", DEF_BUTTON_HEIGHT, offsetof(TkButton, heightPtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground", "HighlightBackground", DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_BG_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, highlightBorder), 0, DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_BG_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor", DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, highlightColorPtr), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness", "HighlightThickness", tkDefButtonHighlightWidth, offsetof(TkButton, highlightWidthPtr), offsetof(TkButton, highlightWidth), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-image", "image", "Image", DEF_BUTTON_IMAGE, offsetof(TkButton, imagePtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-indicatoron", "indicatorOn", "IndicatorOn", DEF_BUTTON_INDICATOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, indicatorOn), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify", DEF_BUTTON_JUSTIFY, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, justify), TK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-offrelief", "offRelief", "OffRelief", DEF_BUTTON_RELIEF, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, offRelief), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-offvalue", "offValue", "Value", DEF_BUTTON_OFF_VALUE, offsetof(TkButton, offValuePtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-onvalue", "onValue", "Value", DEF_BUTTON_ON_VALUE, offsetof(TkButton, onValuePtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-overrelief", "overRelief", "OverRelief", DEF_BUTTON_OVER_RELIEF, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, overRelief), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", "padX", "Pad", tkDefLabelPadx, offsetof(TkButton, padXPtr), offsetof(TkButton, padX), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", "padY", "Pad", tkDefLabelPady, offsetof(TkButton, padYPtr), offsetof(TkButton, padY), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief", DEF_LABCHKRAD_RELIEF, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, relief), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-selectcolor", "selectColor", "Background", DEF_BUTTON_SELECT_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, selectBorder), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, DEF_BUTTON_SELECT_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-selectimage", "selectImage", "SelectImage", DEF_BUTTON_SELECT_IMAGE, offsetof(TkButton, selectImagePtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
347 348 349 350 351 352 353 | DEF_BUTTON_TRISTATE_VALUE, offsetof(TkButton, tristateValuePtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_INDEX, "-underline", "underline", "Underline", TK_OPTION_UNDERLINE_DEF(TkButton, underline), 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-variable", "variable", "Variable", DEF_CHECKBUTTON_VARIABLE, offsetof(TkButton, selVarNamePtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-width", "width", "Width", | | | | | 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 | DEF_BUTTON_TRISTATE_VALUE, offsetof(TkButton, tristateValuePtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_INDEX, "-underline", "underline", "Underline", TK_OPTION_UNDERLINE_DEF(TkButton, underline), 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-variable", "variable", "Variable", DEF_CHECKBUTTON_VARIABLE, offsetof(TkButton, selVarNamePtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-width", "width", "Width", DEF_BUTTON_WIDTH, offsetof(TkButton, widthPtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-wraplength", "wrapLength", "WrapLength", DEF_BUTTON_WRAP_LENGTH, offsetof(TkButton, wrapLengthPtr), offsetof(TkButton, wrapLength), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, 0, 0} }; static const Tk_OptionSpec radiobuttonOptionSpecs[] = { {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-activebackground", "activeBackground", "Foreground", DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, activeBorder), 0, DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_MONO, 0}, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
374 375 376 377 378 379 380 | NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-borderwidth", 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-background", 0}, {TK_OPTION_BITMAP, "-bitmap", "bitmap", "Bitmap", DEF_BUTTON_BITMAP, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, bitmap), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", | | | | | | | | | | | 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 | NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-borderwidth", 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-background", 0}, {TK_OPTION_BITMAP, "-bitmap", "bitmap", "Bitmap", DEF_BUTTON_BITMAP, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, bitmap), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", tkDefButtonBorderWidth, offsetof(TkButton, borderWidthPtr), offsetof(TkButton, borderWidth), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-command", "command", "Command", DEF_BUTTON_COMMAND, offsetof(TkButton, commandPtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-compound", "compound", "Compound", DEF_BUTTON_COMPOUND, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, compound), 0, tkCompoundStrings, 0}, {TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor", DEF_BUTTON_CURSOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, cursor), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-disabledforeground", "disabledForeground", "DisabledForeground", DEF_BUTTON_DISABLED_FG_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, disabledFg), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, DEF_BUTTON_DISABLED_FG_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-foreground", 0}, {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font", DEF_BUTTON_FONT, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, tkfont), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground", DEF_CHKRAD_FG, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, normalFg), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-height", "height", "Height", DEF_BUTTON_HEIGHT, offsetof(TkButton, heightPtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground", "HighlightBackground", DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_BG_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, highlightBorder), 0, DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_BG_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor", DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, highlightColorPtr), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness", "HighlightThickness", tkDefButtonHighlightWidth, offsetof(TkButton, highlightWidthPtr), offsetof(TkButton, highlightWidth), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-image", "image", "Image", DEF_BUTTON_IMAGE, offsetof(TkButton, imagePtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-indicatoron", "indicatorOn", "IndicatorOn", DEF_BUTTON_INDICATOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, indicatorOn), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify", DEF_BUTTON_JUSTIFY, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, justify), TK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-offrelief", "offRelief", "OffRelief", DEF_BUTTON_RELIEF, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, offRelief), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-overrelief", "overRelief", "OverRelief", DEF_BUTTON_OVER_RELIEF, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, overRelief), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", "padX", "Pad", tkDefLabelPadx, offsetof(TkButton, padXPtr), offsetof(TkButton, padX), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", "padY", "Pad", tkDefLabelPady, offsetof(TkButton, padYPtr), offsetof(TkButton, padY), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief", DEF_LABCHKRAD_RELIEF, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, relief), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-selectcolor", "selectColor", "Background", DEF_BUTTON_SELECT_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkButton, selectBorder), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, DEF_BUTTON_SELECT_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-selectimage", "selectImage", "SelectImage", DEF_BUTTON_SELECT_IMAGE, offsetof(TkButton, selectImagePtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
459 460 461 462 463 464 465 | TK_OPTION_UNDERLINE_DEF(TkButton, underline), 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-value", "value", "Value", DEF_BUTTON_VALUE, offsetof(TkButton, onValuePtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-variable", "variable", "Variable", DEF_RADIOBUTTON_VARIABLE, offsetof(TkButton, selVarNamePtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-width", "width", "Width", | | | | | 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 | TK_OPTION_UNDERLINE_DEF(TkButton, underline), 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-value", "value", "Value", DEF_BUTTON_VALUE, offsetof(TkButton, onValuePtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-variable", "variable", "Variable", DEF_RADIOBUTTON_VARIABLE, offsetof(TkButton, selVarNamePtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-width", "width", "Width", DEF_BUTTON_WIDTH, offsetof(TkButton, widthPtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-wraplength", "wrapLength", "WrapLength", DEF_BUTTON_WRAP_LENGTH, offsetof(TkButton, wrapLengthPtr), offsetof(TkButton, wrapLength), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, 0, 0} }; /* * The following table maps from one of the type values defined in tkButton.h, * such as TYPE_LABEL, to the option template for that class of widgets. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
683 684 685 686 687 688 689 | butPtr->selectImagePtr = NULL; butPtr->selectImage = NULL; butPtr->tristateImagePtr = NULL; butPtr->tristateImage = NULL; butPtr->state = STATE_NORMAL; butPtr->normalBorder = NULL; butPtr->activeBorder = NULL; | | > | > > | > | | > > | > | | 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 | butPtr->selectImagePtr = NULL; butPtr->selectImage = NULL; butPtr->tristateImagePtr = NULL; butPtr->tristateImage = NULL; butPtr->state = STATE_NORMAL; butPtr->normalBorder = NULL; butPtr->activeBorder = NULL; butPtr->borderWidthPtr = NULL; butPtr->borderWidth = 0; butPtr->relief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT; butPtr->highlightWidthPtr = NULL; butPtr->highlightWidth = 0; butPtr->highlightBorder = NULL; butPtr->highlightColorPtr = NULL; butPtr->inset = 0; butPtr->tkfont = NULL; butPtr->normalFg = NULL; butPtr->activeFg = NULL; butPtr->disabledFg = NULL; butPtr->normalTextGC = NULL; butPtr->activeTextGC = NULL; butPtr->disabledGC = NULL; butPtr->stippleGC = NULL; butPtr->gray = None; butPtr->copyGC = NULL; butPtr->widthPtr = NULL; butPtr->width = 0; butPtr->heightPtr = NULL; butPtr->height = 0; butPtr->wrapLengthPtr = NULL; butPtr->wrapLength = 0; butPtr->padXPtr = NULL; butPtr->padX = 0; butPtr->padYPtr = NULL; butPtr->padY = 0; butPtr->anchor = TK_ANCHOR_CENTER; butPtr->justify = TK_JUSTIFY_CENTER; butPtr->indicatorOn = 0; butPtr->selectBorder = NULL; butPtr->textWidth = 0; butPtr->textHeight = 0; butPtr->textLayout = NULL; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 | Tcl_Size objc, /* Number of arguments. */ Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument values. */ { Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions; Tcl_Obj *errorResult = NULL; int error, haveImage; Tk_Image image; | < < | 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 | Tcl_Size objc, /* Number of arguments. */ Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument values. */ { Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions; Tcl_Obj *errorResult = NULL; int error, haveImage; Tk_Image image; /* * Eliminate any existing trace on variables monitored by the button. */ if (butPtr->textVarNamePtr != NULL) { Tcl_UntraceVar2(interp, Tcl_GetString(butPtr->textVarNamePtr), |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 | if ((butPtr->state == STATE_ACTIVE) && !Tk_StrictMotif(butPtr->tkwin)) { Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(butPtr->tkwin, butPtr->activeBorder); } else { Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(butPtr->tkwin, butPtr->normalBorder); } | < | | | | | < | | | | | < | | | | | < | | | | | < | | | | | | 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 | if ((butPtr->state == STATE_ACTIVE) && !Tk_StrictMotif(butPtr->tkwin)) { Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(butPtr->tkwin, butPtr->activeBorder); } else { Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(butPtr->tkwin, butPtr->normalBorder); } if (butPtr->wrapLength < 0) { butPtr->wrapLength = 0; Tcl_DecrRefCount(butPtr->wrapLengthPtr); butPtr->wrapLengthPtr = Tcl_NewIntObj(0); Tcl_IncrRefCount(butPtr->wrapLengthPtr); } if (butPtr->borderWidth < 0) { butPtr->borderWidth = 0; Tcl_DecrRefCount(butPtr->borderWidthPtr); butPtr->borderWidthPtr = Tcl_NewIntObj(0); Tcl_IncrRefCount(butPtr->borderWidthPtr); } if (butPtr->highlightWidth < 0) { butPtr->highlightWidth = 0; Tcl_DecrRefCount(butPtr->highlightWidthPtr); butPtr->highlightWidthPtr = Tcl_NewIntObj(0); Tcl_IncrRefCount(butPtr->highlightWidthPtr); } if (butPtr->padX < 0) { butPtr->padX = 0; Tcl_DecrRefCount(butPtr->padXPtr); butPtr->padXPtr = Tcl_NewIntObj(0); Tcl_IncrRefCount(butPtr->padXPtr); } if (butPtr->padY < 0) { butPtr->padY = 0; Tcl_DecrRefCount(butPtr->padYPtr); butPtr->padYPtr = Tcl_NewIntObj(0); Tcl_IncrRefCount(butPtr->padYPtr); } if (butPtr->type >= TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON) { Tcl_Obj *valuePtr, *namePtr; if (butPtr->selVarNamePtr == NULL) { butPtr->selVarNamePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj( |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 | } if ((butPtr->bitmap != None) || (butPtr->imagePtr != NULL)) { /* * The button must display the contents of an image or bitmap. */ | | | | | | | | 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304 | } if ((butPtr->bitmap != None) || (butPtr->imagePtr != NULL)) { /* * The button must display the contents of an image or bitmap. */ if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, butPtr->tkwin, butPtr->widthPtr, &butPtr->width) != TCL_OK) { widthError: Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, "\n (processing \"-width\" option)"); continue; } if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, butPtr->tkwin, butPtr->heightPtr, &butPtr->height) != TCL_OK) { heightError: Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, "\n (processing \"-height\" option)"); continue; } } else { /* * The button displays an ordinary text string. */ if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, butPtr->widthPtr, &butPtr->width) != TCL_OK) { goto widthError; } if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, butPtr->heightPtr, &butPtr->height) != TCL_OK) { goto heightError; } } break; } if (!error) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1463 1464 1465 1466 1467 1468 1469 | static void ButtonEventProc( void *clientData, /* Information about window. */ XEvent *eventPtr) /* Information about event. */ { TkButton *butPtr = (TkButton *)clientData; | < < | | | | | 1463 1464 1465 1466 1467 1468 1469 1470 1471 1472 1473 1474 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 1480 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 1493 1494 1495 1496 1497 1498 1499 1500 | static void ButtonEventProc( void *clientData, /* Information about window. */ XEvent *eventPtr) /* Information about event. */ { TkButton *butPtr = (TkButton *)clientData; if ((eventPtr->type == Expose) && (eventPtr->xexpose.count == 0)) { goto redraw; } else if (eventPtr->type == ConfigureNotify) { /* * Must redraw after size changes, since layout could have changed and * borders will need to be redrawn. */ goto redraw; } else if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) { DestroyButton(butPtr); } else if (eventPtr->type == FocusIn) { if (eventPtr->xfocus.detail != NotifyInferior) { butPtr->flags |= GOT_FOCUS; Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, butPtr->tkwin, butPtr->highlightWidthPtr, &butPtr->highlightWidth); if (butPtr->highlightWidth > 0) { goto redraw; } } } else if (eventPtr->type == FocusOut) { if (eventPtr->xfocus.detail != NotifyInferior) { butPtr->flags &= ~GOT_FOCUS; Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, butPtr->tkwin, butPtr->highlightWidthPtr, &butPtr->highlightWidth); if (butPtr->highlightWidth > 0) { goto redraw; } } } return; redraw: |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkCanvArc.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
126 127 128 129 130 131 132 | {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-activewidth", NULL, NULL, "0.0", offsetof(ArcItem, outline.activeWidth), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &pixelOption}, {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-dash", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(ArcItem, outline.dash), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &dashOption}, {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-dashoffset", NULL, NULL, | | | 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 | {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-activewidth", NULL, NULL, "0.0", offsetof(ArcItem, outline.activeWidth), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &pixelOption}, {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-dash", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(ArcItem, outline.dash), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &dashOption}, {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-dashoffset", NULL, NULL, "0", offsetof(ArcItem, outline.offset), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-disableddash", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(ArcItem, outline.disabledDash), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &dashOption}, {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledfill", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(ArcItem, disabledFillColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledoutline", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(ArcItem, outline.disabledColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL}, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
230 231 232 233 234 235 236 | sizeof(ArcItem), /* itemSize */ CreateArc, /* createProc */ configSpecs, /* configSpecs */ ConfigureArc, /* configureProc */ ArcCoords, /* coordProc */ DeleteArc, /* deleteProc */ DisplayArc, /* displayProc */ | | | 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 | sizeof(ArcItem), /* itemSize */ CreateArc, /* createProc */ configSpecs, /* configSpecs */ ConfigureArc, /* configureProc */ ArcCoords, /* coordProc */ DeleteArc, /* deleteProc */ DisplayArc, /* displayProc */ TK_CONFIG_OBJS, /* flags */ ArcToPoint, /* pointProc */ ArcToArea, /* areaProc */ ArcToPostscript, /* postscriptProc */ ScaleArc, /* scaleProc */ TranslateArc, /* translateProc */ NULL, /* indexProc */ NULL, /* icursorProc */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
448 449 450 451 452 453 454 | Tk_TSOffset *tsoffset; XColor *color; Pixmap stipple; Tk_State state; tkwin = Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas); if (TCL_OK != Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, tkwin, configSpecs, objc, | | | 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 | Tk_TSOffset *tsoffset; XColor *color; Pixmap stipple; Tk_State state; tkwin = Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas); if (TCL_OK != Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, tkwin, configSpecs, objc, (const char **) objv, (char *) arcPtr, flags|TK_CONFIG_OBJS)) { return TCL_ERROR; } state = itemPtr->state; /* * A few of the options require additional processing, such as style and |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkCanvBmap.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
124 125 126 127 128 129 130 | sizeof(BitmapItem), /* itemSize */ TkcCreateBitmap, /* createProc */ configSpecs, /* configSpecs */ ConfigureBitmap, /* configureProc */ BitmapCoords, /* coordProc */ DeleteBitmap, /* deleteProc */ DisplayBitmap, /* displayProc */ | | | 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 | sizeof(BitmapItem), /* itemSize */ TkcCreateBitmap, /* createProc */ configSpecs, /* configSpecs */ ConfigureBitmap, /* configureProc */ BitmapCoords, /* coordProc */ DeleteBitmap, /* deleteProc */ DisplayBitmap, /* displayProc */ TK_CONFIG_OBJS, /* flags */ BitmapToPoint, /* pointProc */ BitmapToArea, /* areaProc */ BitmapToPostscript, /* postscriptProc */ ScaleBitmap, /* scaleProc */ TranslateBitmap, /* translateProc */ NULL, /* indexProc */ NULL, /* icursorProc */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
320 321 322 323 324 325 326 | XColor *fgColor; XColor *bgColor; Pixmap bitmap; Tk_State state; tkwin = Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas); if (TCL_OK != Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, tkwin, configSpecs, objc, | | | 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 | XColor *fgColor; XColor *bgColor; Pixmap bitmap; Tk_State state; tkwin = Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas); if (TCL_OK != Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, tkwin, configSpecs, objc, (const char **) objv, (char *) bmapPtr, flags|TK_CONFIG_OBJS)) { return TCL_ERROR; } /* * A few of the options require additional processing, such as those that * determine the graphics context. */ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkCanvImg.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
111 112 113 114 115 116 117 | sizeof(ImageItem), /* itemSize */ CreateImage, /* createProc */ configSpecs, /* configSpecs */ ConfigureImage, /* configureProc */ ImageCoords, /* coordProc */ DeleteImage, /* deleteProc */ DisplayImage, /* displayProc */ | | | 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 | sizeof(ImageItem), /* itemSize */ CreateImage, /* createProc */ configSpecs, /* configSpecs */ ConfigureImage, /* configureProc */ ImageCoords, /* coordProc */ DeleteImage, /* deleteProc */ DisplayImage, /* displayProc */ TK_CONFIG_OBJS, /* flags */ ImageToPoint, /* pointProc */ ImageToArea, /* areaProc */ ImageToPostscript, /* postscriptProc */ ScaleImage, /* scaleProc */ TranslateImage, /* translateProc */ NULL, /* indexProc */ NULL, /* icursorProc */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
297 298 299 300 301 302 303 | { ImageItem *imgPtr = (ImageItem *) itemPtr; Tk_Window tkwin; Tk_Image image; tkwin = Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas); if (TCL_OK != Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, tkwin, configSpecs, objc, | | | 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 | { ImageItem *imgPtr = (ImageItem *) itemPtr; Tk_Window tkwin; Tk_Image image; tkwin = Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas); if (TCL_OK != Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, tkwin, configSpecs, objc, (const char **)objv, (char *)imgPtr, flags|TK_CONFIG_OBJS)) { return TCL_ERROR; } /* * Create the image. Save the old image around and don't free it until * after the new one is allocated. This keeps the reference count from * going to zero so the image doesn't have to be recreated if it hasn't |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkCanvLine.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
183 184 185 186 187 188 189 | "butt", offsetof(LineItem, capStyle), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-fill", NULL, NULL, DEF_CANVITEM_OUTLINE, offsetof(LineItem, outline.color), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-dash", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(LineItem, outline.dash), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &dashOption}, {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-dashoffset", NULL, NULL, | | | 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 | "butt", offsetof(LineItem, capStyle), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-fill", NULL, NULL, DEF_CANVITEM_OUTLINE, offsetof(LineItem, outline.color), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-dash", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(LineItem, outline.dash), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &dashOption}, {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-dashoffset", NULL, NULL, "0", offsetof(LineItem, outline.offset), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-disableddash", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(LineItem, outline.disabledDash), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &dashOption}, {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledfill", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(LineItem, outline.disabledColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-disabledstipple", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(LineItem, outline.disabledStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL}, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
230 231 232 233 234 235 236 | sizeof(LineItem), /* itemSize */ CreateLine, /* createProc */ configSpecs, /* configSpecs */ ConfigureLine, /* configureProc */ LineCoords, /* coordProc */ DeleteLine, /* deleteProc */ DisplayLine, /* displayProc */ | | | 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 | sizeof(LineItem), /* itemSize */ CreateLine, /* createProc */ configSpecs, /* configSpecs */ ConfigureLine, /* configureProc */ LineCoords, /* coordProc */ DeleteLine, /* deleteProc */ DisplayLine, /* displayProc */ TK_CONFIG_OBJS | TK_MOVABLE_POINTS, /* flags */ LineToPoint, /* pointProc */ LineToArea, /* areaProc */ LineToPostscript, /* postscriptProc */ ScaleLine, /* scaleProc */ TranslateLine, /* translateProc */ GetLineIndex, /* indexProc */ NULL, /* icursorProc */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
481 482 483 484 485 486 487 | GC newGC, arrowGC; unsigned long mask; Tk_Window tkwin; Tk_State state; tkwin = Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas); if (TCL_OK != Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, tkwin, configSpecs, objc, | | | 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 | GC newGC, arrowGC; unsigned long mask; Tk_Window tkwin; Tk_State state; tkwin = Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas); if (TCL_OK != Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, tkwin, configSpecs, objc, (const char **)objv, (char *)linePtr, flags|TK_CONFIG_OBJS)) { return TCL_ERROR; } /* * A few of the options require additional processing, such as graphics * contexts. */ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkCanvPoly.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
91 92 93 94 95 96 97 | {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-activewidth", NULL, NULL, "0.0", offsetof(PolygonItem, outline.activeWidth), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &pixelOption}, {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-dash", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(PolygonItem, outline.dash), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &dashOption}, {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-dashoffset", NULL, NULL, | | > | 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 | {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-activewidth", NULL, NULL, "0.0", offsetof(PolygonItem, outline.activeWidth), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &pixelOption}, {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-dash", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(PolygonItem, outline.dash), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &dashOption}, {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-dashoffset", NULL, NULL, "0", offsetof(PolygonItem, outline.offset), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-disableddash", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(PolygonItem, outline.disabledDash), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &dashOption}, {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledfill", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(PolygonItem, disabledFillColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledoutline", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(PolygonItem, outline.disabledColor), |
︙ | ︙ | |||
194 195 196 197 198 199 200 | sizeof(PolygonItem), /* itemSize */ CreatePolygon, /* createProc */ configSpecs, /* configSpecs */ ConfigurePolygon, /* configureProc */ PolygonCoords, /* coordProc */ DeletePolygon, /* deleteProc */ DisplayPolygon, /* displayProc */ | | | 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 | sizeof(PolygonItem), /* itemSize */ CreatePolygon, /* createProc */ configSpecs, /* configSpecs */ ConfigurePolygon, /* configureProc */ PolygonCoords, /* coordProc */ DeletePolygon, /* deleteProc */ DisplayPolygon, /* displayProc */ TK_CONFIG_OBJS | TK_MOVABLE_POINTS, /* flags */ PolygonToPoint, /* pointProc */ PolygonToArea, /* areaProc */ PolygonToPostscript, /* postscriptProc */ ScalePolygon, /* scaleProc */ TranslatePolygon, /* translateProc */ GetPolygonIndex, /* indexProc */ NULL, /* icursorProc */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
441 442 443 444 445 446 447 | Tk_Window tkwin; XColor *color; Pixmap stipple; Tk_State state; tkwin = Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas); if (TCL_OK != Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, tkwin, configSpecs, objc, | | | 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 | Tk_Window tkwin; XColor *color; Pixmap stipple; Tk_State state; tkwin = Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas); if (TCL_OK != Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, tkwin, configSpecs, objc, (const char **) objv, (char *) polyPtr, flags|TK_CONFIG_OBJS)) { return TCL_ERROR; } /* * A few of the options require additional processing, such as graphics * contexts. */ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkCanvPs.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
229 230 231 232 233 234 235 | psInfo.fileNameObj = NULL; psInfo.channelNameObj = NULL; psInfo.chan = NULL; psInfo.prepass = 0; psInfo.prolog = 1; psInfo.tkwin = tkwin; Tcl_InitHashTable(&psInfo.fontTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS); | | | | 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 | psInfo.fileNameObj = NULL; psInfo.channelNameObj = NULL; psInfo.chan = NULL; psInfo.prepass = 0; psInfo.prolog = 1; psInfo.tkwin = tkwin; Tcl_InitHashTable(&psInfo.fontTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS); result = Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, tkwin, configSpecs, objc-2, (const char **)objv+2, (char *)&psInfo, TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY|TK_CONFIG_OBJS); if (result != TCL_OK) { goto cleanup; } if (psInfo.width == -1) { psInfo.width = Tk_Width(tkwin); } |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkCanvText.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 | XColor *activeColor; /* Color for text. */ XColor *disabledColor; /* Color for text. */ Tk_Font tkfont; /* Font for drawing text. */ Tk_Justify justify; /* Justification mode for text. */ Pixmap stipple; /* Stipple bitmap for text, or None. */ Pixmap activeStipple; /* Stipple bitmap for text, or None. */ Pixmap disabledStipple; /* Stipple bitmap for text, or None. */ | | | > > | 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 | XColor *activeColor; /* Color for text. */ XColor *disabledColor; /* Color for text. */ Tk_Font tkfont; /* Font for drawing text. */ Tk_Justify justify; /* Justification mode for text. */ Pixmap stipple; /* Stipple bitmap for text, or None. */ Pixmap activeStipple; /* Stipple bitmap for text, or None. */ Pixmap disabledStipple; /* Stipple bitmap for text, or None. */ char *text; /* Text for item (malloc-ed). */ int width; /* Width of lines for word-wrap, pixels. Zero * means no word-wrap. */ int underline; /* Index of character to put underline beneath * or INT_MIN for no underlining. */ double angle; /* What angle, in degrees, to draw the text * at. */ /* * Fields whose values are derived from the current values of the * configuration settings above. */ Tcl_Size numChars; /* Length of text in characters. */ Tcl_Size numBytes; /* Length of text in bytes. */ Tk_TextLayout textLayout; /* Cached text layout information. */ int actualWidth; /* Width of text as computed. Used to make * selections of wrapped text display * right. */ double drawOrigin[2]; /* Where we start drawing from. */ GC gc; /* Graphics context for drawing text. */ GC selTextGC; /* Graphics context for selected text. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 | * information about how to reclaim storage * for return string. */ { int underline = *(int *)(widgRec + offset); char *p; if (underline == INT_MIN) { p = (char *)""; *freeProcPtr = TCL_STATIC; return p; } else if (underline == INT_MAX) { p = (char *)"end+1"; *freeProcPtr = TCL_STATIC; return p; } else if (underline == -1) { | > > > > | 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 | * information about how to reclaim storage * for return string. */ { int underline = *(int *)(widgRec + offset); char *p; if (underline == INT_MIN) { #if !defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) && TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 p = (char *)"-1"; #else p = (char *)""; #endif *freeProcPtr = TCL_STATIC; return p; } else if (underline == INT_MAX) { p = (char *)"end+1"; *freeProcPtr = TCL_STATIC; return p; } else if (underline == -1) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
199 200 201 202 203 204 205 | {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-state", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(Tk_Item, state), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &stateOption}, {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-stipple", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(TextItem, stipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-tags", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &tagsOption}, {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-text", NULL, NULL, | | | | 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 | {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-state", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(Tk_Item, state), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &stateOption}, {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-stipple", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(TextItem, stipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-tags", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &tagsOption}, {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-text", NULL, NULL, "", offsetof(TextItem, text), 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-underline", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(TextItem, underline), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &underlineOption}, {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-width", NULL, NULL, "0", offsetof(TextItem, width), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, NULL} }; /* * Prototypes for functions defined in this file: */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
266 267 268 269 270 271 272 | sizeof(TextItem), /* itemSize */ CreateText, /* createProc */ configSpecs, /* configSpecs */ ConfigureText, /* configureProc */ TextCoords, /* coordProc */ DeleteText, /* deleteProc */ DisplayCanvText, /* displayProc */ | | | 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 | sizeof(TextItem), /* itemSize */ CreateText, /* createProc */ configSpecs, /* configSpecs */ ConfigureText, /* configureProc */ TextCoords, /* coordProc */ DeleteText, /* deleteProc */ DisplayCanvText, /* displayProc */ TK_CONFIG_OBJS, /* flags */ TextToPoint, /* pointProc */ TextToArea, /* areaProc */ TextToPostscript, /* postscriptProc */ ScaleText, /* scaleProc */ TranslateText, /* translateProc */ GetTextIndex, /* indexProc */ SetTextCursor, /* icursorProc */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
339 340 341 342 343 344 345 | textPtr->activeColor = NULL; textPtr->disabledColor = NULL; textPtr->tkfont = NULL; textPtr->justify = TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT; textPtr->stipple = None; textPtr->activeStipple = None; textPtr->disabledStipple = None; | | | > > | 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 | textPtr->activeColor = NULL; textPtr->disabledColor = NULL; textPtr->tkfont = NULL; textPtr->justify = TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT; textPtr->stipple = None; textPtr->activeStipple = None; textPtr->disabledStipple = None; textPtr->text = NULL; textPtr->width = 0; textPtr->underline = INT_MIN; textPtr->angle = 0.0; textPtr->numChars = 0; textPtr->numBytes = 0; textPtr->textLayout = NULL; textPtr->actualWidth = 0; textPtr->drawOrigin[0] = textPtr->drawOrigin[1] = 0.0; textPtr->gc = NULL; textPtr->selTextGC = NULL; textPtr->cursorOffGC = NULL; textPtr->sine = 0.0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
486 487 488 489 490 491 492 | XColor *selBgColorPtr; XColor *color; Pixmap stipple; Tk_State state; tkwin = Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas); if (TCL_OK != Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, tkwin, configSpecs, objc, | | | 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 | XColor *selBgColorPtr; XColor *color; Pixmap stipple; Tk_State state; tkwin = Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas); if (TCL_OK != Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, tkwin, configSpecs, objc, (const char **) objv, (char *) textPtr, flags|TK_CONFIG_OBJS)) { return TCL_ERROR; } /* * A few of the options require additional processing, such as graphics * contexts. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
581 582 583 584 585 586 587 | textPtr->cursorOffGC = newGC; /* * If the text was changed, move the selection and insertion indices to * keep them inside the item. */ | | > | | | | | | | | 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 | textPtr->cursorOffGC = newGC; /* * If the text was changed, move the selection and insertion indices to * keep them inside the item. */ textPtr->numBytes = strlen(textPtr->text); textPtr->numChars = TkNumUtfChars(textPtr->text, textPtr->numBytes); if (textInfoPtr->selItemPtr == itemPtr) { if (textInfoPtr->selectFirst >= textPtr->numChars) { textInfoPtr->selItemPtr = NULL; } else { if (textInfoPtr->selectLast >= textPtr->numChars) { textInfoPtr->selectLast = textPtr->numChars - 1; } if ((textInfoPtr->anchorItemPtr == itemPtr) && (textInfoPtr->selectAnchor >= textPtr->numChars)) { textInfoPtr->selectAnchor = textPtr->numChars - 1; } } } if (textPtr->insertPos >= textPtr->numChars) { textPtr->insertPos = textPtr->numChars; } /* * Restrict so that 0.0 <= angle < 360.0, and then recompute the cached * sine and cosine of the angle. Note that fmod() can produce negative * results, and we try to avoid negative zero as well. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
664 665 666 667 668 669 670 | } if (textPtr->activeStipple != None) { Tk_FreeBitmap(display, textPtr->activeStipple); } if (textPtr->disabledStipple != None) { Tk_FreeBitmap(display, textPtr->disabledStipple); } | | | | 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 | } if (textPtr->activeStipple != None) { Tk_FreeBitmap(display, textPtr->activeStipple); } if (textPtr->disabledStipple != None) { Tk_FreeBitmap(display, textPtr->disabledStipple); } if (textPtr->text != NULL) { ckfree(textPtr->text); } Tk_FreeTextLayout(textPtr->textLayout); if (textPtr->gc != NULL) { Tk_FreeGC(display, textPtr->gc); } if (textPtr->selTextGC != NULL) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
715 716 717 718 719 720 721 | double x[4], y[4], dx[4], dy[4], sinA, cosA, tmp; if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) { state = Canvas(canvas)->canvas_state; } Tk_FreeTextLayout(textPtr->textLayout); | < < < < < | | 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 | double x[4], y[4], dx[4], dy[4], sinA, cosA, tmp; if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) { state = Canvas(canvas)->canvas_state; } Tk_FreeTextLayout(textPtr->textLayout); textPtr->textLayout = Tk_ComputeTextLayout(textPtr->tkfont, textPtr->text, textPtr->numChars, textPtr->width, textPtr->justify, 0, &width, &height); if (state == TK_STATE_HIDDEN || textPtr->color == NULL) { width = height = 0; } /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
791 792 793 794 795 796 797 | /* * Last of all, update the bounding box for the item. The item's bounding * box includes the bounding box of all its lines, plus an extra fudge * factor for the cursor border (which could potentially be quite large). */ textInfoPtr = textPtr->textInfoPtr; | < < | 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 | /* * Last of all, update the bounding box for the item. The item's bounding * box includes the bounding box of all its lines, plus an extra fudge * factor for the cursor border (which could potentially be quite large). */ textInfoPtr = textPtr->textInfoPtr; fudge = (textInfoPtr->insertWidth + 1) / 2; if (textInfoPtr->selBorderWidth > fudge) { fudge = textInfoPtr->selBorderWidth; } /* * Apply the rotation before computing the bounding box. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
913 914 915 916 917 918 919 | } selFirstChar = TCL_INDEX_NONE; selLastChar = 0; Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords(canvas, textPtr->drawOrigin[0], textPtr->drawOrigin[1], &drawableX, &drawableY); | < | | | 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 | } selFirstChar = TCL_INDEX_NONE; selLastChar = 0; Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords(canvas, textPtr->drawOrigin[0], textPtr->drawOrigin[1], &drawableX, &drawableY); if (textInfoPtr->selItemPtr == itemPtr) { selFirstChar = textInfoPtr->selectFirst; selLastChar = textInfoPtr->selectLast; if (selLastChar > textPtr->numChars) { selLastChar = textPtr->numChars - 1; } if ((selFirstChar >= 0) && (selFirstChar <= selLastChar)) { int xFirst, yFirst, hFirst; int xLast, yLast, wLast; /* * Draw a special background under the selection. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
942 943 944 945 946 947 948 | * selection background all the way to the end of the line. * However, for the last line we only want to display up to the * last character, not the end of the line. */ x = xFirst; height = hFirst; | < | 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 | * selection background all the way to the end of the line. * However, for the last line we only want to display up to the * last character, not the end of the line. */ x = xFirst; height = hFirst; for (y = yFirst ; y <= yLast; y += height) { int dx1, dy1, dx2, dy2; double s = textPtr->sine, c = textPtr->cosine; XPoint points[4]; if (y == yLast) { width = xLast + wLast - x; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
989 990 991 992 993 994 995 | if ((textInfoPtr->focusItemPtr == itemPtr) && (textInfoPtr->gotFocus)) { if (Tk_CharBbox(textPtr->textLayout, textPtr->insertPos, &x, &y, NULL, &height)) { int dx1, dy1, dx2, dy2; double s = textPtr->sine, c = textPtr->cosine; XPoint points[4]; | < < | 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 | if ((textInfoPtr->focusItemPtr == itemPtr) && (textInfoPtr->gotFocus)) { if (Tk_CharBbox(textPtr->textLayout, textPtr->insertPos, &x, &y, NULL, &height)) { int dx1, dy1, dx2, dy2; double s = textPtr->sine, c = textPtr->cosine; XPoint points[4]; dx1 = x - (textInfoPtr->insertWidth / 2); dy1 = y; dx2 = textInfoPtr->insertWidth; dy2 = height; points[0].x = (short)(drawableX + dx1*c + dy1*s); points[0].y = (short)(drawableY + dy1*c - dx1*s); points[1].x = (short)(drawableX + (dx1+dx2)*c + dy1*s); points[1].y = (short)(drawableY + dy1*c - (dx1+dx2)*s); points[2].x = (short)(drawableX + (dx1+dx2)*c + (dy1+dy2)*s); points[2].y = (short)(drawableY + (dy1+dy2)*c - (dx1+dx2)*s); points[3].x = (short)(drawableX + dx1*c + (dy1+dy2)*s); points[3].y = (short)(drawableY + (dy1+dy2)*c - dx1*s); Tk_SetCaretPos(Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas), points[0].x, points[0].y, height); if (textInfoPtr->cursorOn) { Tk_Fill3DPolygon(Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas), drawable, textInfoPtr->insertBorder, points, 4, textInfoPtr->insertBorderWidth, TK_RELIEF_RAISED); } else if (textPtr->cursorOffGC != NULL) { /* * Redraw the background over the area of the cursor, even * though the cursor is turned off. This guarantees that the |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 | TkDrawAngledTextLayout(display, drawable, textPtr->gc, textPtr->textLayout, drawableX, drawableY, textPtr->angle, 0, selFirstChar); } TkDrawAngledTextLayout(display, drawable, textPtr->selTextGC, textPtr->textLayout, drawableX, drawableY, textPtr->angle, selFirstChar, selLastChar + 1); | | | | | 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 | TkDrawAngledTextLayout(display, drawable, textPtr->gc, textPtr->textLayout, drawableX, drawableY, textPtr->angle, 0, selFirstChar); } TkDrawAngledTextLayout(display, drawable, textPtr->selTextGC, textPtr->textLayout, drawableX, drawableY, textPtr->angle, selFirstChar, selLastChar + 1); if (selLastChar + 1 < textPtr->numChars) { TkDrawAngledTextLayout(display, drawable, textPtr->gc, textPtr->textLayout, drawableX, drawableY, textPtr->angle, selLastChar + 1, textPtr->numChars); } } else { TkDrawAngledTextLayout(display, drawable, textPtr->gc, textPtr->textLayout, drawableX, drawableY, textPtr->angle, 0, textPtr->numChars); } TkUnderlineAngledTextLayout(display, drawable, textPtr->gc, textPtr->textLayout, drawableX, drawableY, textPtr->angle, textPtr->underline); if (stipple != None) { XSetTSOrigin(display, textPtr->gc, 0, 0); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 | Tcl_Size index, /* Character index before which string is to * be inserted. */ Tcl_Obj *obj) /* New characters to be inserted. */ { TextItem *textPtr = (TextItem *) itemPtr; int byteIndex, charsAdded; Tcl_Size byteCount; | > | > > < < | | | < | | | < < | > | | | > | 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 | Tcl_Size index, /* Character index before which string is to * be inserted. */ Tcl_Obj *obj) /* New characters to be inserted. */ { TextItem *textPtr = (TextItem *) itemPtr; int byteIndex, charsAdded; Tcl_Size byteCount; char *newStr, *text; const char *string; Tk_CanvasTextInfo *textInfoPtr = textPtr->textInfoPtr; string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(obj, &byteCount); text = textPtr->text; if (index < 0) { index = 0; } if (index > textPtr->numChars) { index = textPtr->numChars; } byteIndex = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(text, index) - text; byteCount = strlen(string); if (byteCount == 0) { return; } newStr = (char *)ckalloc(textPtr->numBytes + byteCount + 1); memcpy(newStr, text, byteIndex); strcpy(newStr + byteIndex, string); strcpy(newStr + byteIndex + byteCount, text + byteIndex); ckfree(text); textPtr->text = newStr; charsAdded = TkNumUtfChars(string, byteCount); textPtr->numChars += charsAdded; textPtr->numBytes += byteCount; /* * Inserting characters invalidates indices such as those for the * selection and cursor. Update the indices appropriately. */ if (textInfoPtr->selItemPtr == itemPtr) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 | Tcl_Size first, /* Character index of first character to * delete. */ Tcl_Size last) /* Character index of last character to delete * (inclusive). */ { TextItem *textPtr = (TextItem *) itemPtr; int byteIndex, byteCount, charsRemoved; | | > < | | < | | > | < | | | > | | > | 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 | Tcl_Size first, /* Character index of first character to * delete. */ Tcl_Size last) /* Character index of last character to delete * (inclusive). */ { TextItem *textPtr = (TextItem *) itemPtr; int byteIndex, byteCount, charsRemoved; char *newStr, *text; Tk_CanvasTextInfo *textInfoPtr = textPtr->textInfoPtr; text = textPtr->text; if (first < 0) { first = 0; } if (last >= textPtr->numChars) { last = textPtr->numChars - 1; } if (first > last) { return; } charsRemoved = last + 1 - first; byteIndex = TkUtfAtIndex(text, first) - text; byteCount = TkUtfAtIndex(text + byteIndex, charsRemoved) - (text + byteIndex); newStr = (char *)ckalloc(textPtr->numBytes + 1 - byteCount); memcpy(newStr, text, byteIndex); strcpy(newStr + byteIndex, text + byteIndex + byteCount); ckfree(text); textPtr->text = newStr; textPtr->numChars -= charsRemoved; textPtr->numBytes -= byteCount; /* * Update indexes for the selection and cursor to reflect the renumbering * of the remaining characters. */ if (textInfoPtr->selItemPtr == itemPtr) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 | px = pointPtr[0] - textPtr->drawOrigin[0]; py = pointPtr[1] - textPtr->drawOrigin[1]; value = (double) Tk_DistanceToTextLayout(textPtr->textLayout, (int) (px*textPtr->cosine - py*textPtr->sine), (int) (py*textPtr->cosine + px*textPtr->sine)); if ((state == TK_STATE_HIDDEN) || (textPtr->color == NULL) || | | | 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 | px = pointPtr[0] - textPtr->drawOrigin[0]; py = pointPtr[1] - textPtr->drawOrigin[1]; value = (double) Tk_DistanceToTextLayout(textPtr->textLayout, (int) (px*textPtr->cosine - py*textPtr->sine), (int) (py*textPtr->cosine + px*textPtr->sine)); if ((state == TK_STATE_HIDDEN) || (textPtr->color == NULL) || (textPtr->text == NULL) || (*textPtr->text == 0)) { value = 1.0e36; } return value; } /* *-------------------------------------------------------------- |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1462 1463 1464 1465 1466 1467 1468 | { TextItem *textPtr = (TextItem *) itemPtr; Tcl_Size length, idx; int c; Tk_CanvasTextInfo *textInfoPtr = textPtr->textInfoPtr; const char *string; | < | | | | 1461 1462 1463 1464 1465 1466 1467 1468 1469 1470 1471 1472 1473 1474 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 | { TextItem *textPtr = (TextItem *) itemPtr; Tcl_Size length, idx; int c; Tk_CanvasTextInfo *textInfoPtr = textPtr->textInfoPtr; const char *string; if (TCL_OK == TkGetIntForIndex(obj, textPtr->numChars - 1, 1, &idx)) { if (idx < 0) { idx = 0; } else if (idx > textPtr->numChars) { idx = textPtr->numChars; } *indexPtr = idx; return TCL_OK; } string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(obj, &length); c = string[0]; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 1565 | Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Text item in which cursor position is to be * set. */ Tcl_Size index) /* Character index of character just before * which cursor is to be positioned. */ { TextItem *textPtr = (TextItem *) itemPtr; | < | | | 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 | Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Text item in which cursor position is to be * set. */ Tcl_Size index) /* Character index of character just before * which cursor is to be positioned. */ { TextItem *textPtr = (TextItem *) itemPtr; if (index < 0) { textPtr->insertPos = 0; } else if (index > textPtr->numChars) { textPtr->insertPos = textPtr->numChars; } else { textPtr->insertPos = index; } } /* *-------------------------------------------------------------- |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 | char *buffer, /* Location in which to place selection. */ Tcl_Size maxBytes) /* Maximum number of bytes to place at buffer, * not including terminating NULL * character. */ { TextItem *textPtr = (TextItem *) itemPtr; Tcl_Size byteCount; const char *selStart, *selEnd; Tk_CanvasTextInfo *textInfoPtr = textPtr->textInfoPtr; if ((textInfoPtr->selectFirst < 0) || (textInfoPtr->selectFirst > textInfoPtr->selectLast)) { return 0; } | > > | | | 1599 1600 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 1623 | char *buffer, /* Location in which to place selection. */ Tcl_Size maxBytes) /* Maximum number of bytes to place at buffer, * not including terminating NULL * character. */ { TextItem *textPtr = (TextItem *) itemPtr; Tcl_Size byteCount; char *text; const char *selStart, *selEnd; Tk_CanvasTextInfo *textInfoPtr = textPtr->textInfoPtr; if ((textInfoPtr->selectFirst < 0) || (textInfoPtr->selectFirst > textInfoPtr->selectLast)) { return 0; } text = textPtr->text; selStart = TkUtfAtIndex(text, textInfoPtr->selectFirst); selEnd = TkUtfAtIndex(selStart, textInfoPtr->selectLast + 1 - textInfoPtr->selectFirst); if (selEnd <= selStart + offset) { return 0; } byteCount = selEnd - selStart - offset; if (byteCount > maxBytes) { byteCount = maxBytes; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1668 1669 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 | if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) { state = Canvas(canvas)->canvas_state; } color = textPtr->color; stipple = textPtr->stipple; if (state == TK_STATE_HIDDEN || textPtr->color == NULL || | | | 1667 1668 1669 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 1676 1677 1678 1679 1680 1681 | if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) { state = Canvas(canvas)->canvas_state; } color = textPtr->color; stipple = textPtr->stipple; if (state == TK_STATE_HIDDEN || textPtr->color == NULL || textPtr->text == NULL || *textPtr->text == 0) { return TCL_OK; } else if (Canvas(canvas)->currentItemPtr == itemPtr) { if (textPtr->activeColor != NULL) { color = textPtr->activeColor; } if (textPtr->activeStipple != None) { stipple = textPtr->activeStipple; |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkCanvUtil.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 | Pixmap stipple; Tk_State state = item->state; width = outline->width; if (width < 1.0) { width = 1.0; } | | | | | | 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 | Pixmap stipple; Tk_State state = item->state; width = outline->width; if (width < 1.0) { width = 1.0; } if (outline->offsetObj && Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, Canvas(canvas)->tkwin, outline->offsetObj, &outline->offset) != TCL_OK) { outline->offset = 0; } dash = &(outline->dash); color = outline->color; stipple = outline->stipple; if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) { state = Canvas(canvas)->canvas_state; } if (Canvas(canvas)->currentItemPtr == item) { |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkCanvWind.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
116 117 118 119 120 121 122 | sizeof(WindowItem), /* itemSize */ CreateWinItem, /* createProc */ configSpecs, /* configSpecs */ ConfigureWinItem, /* configureProc */ WinItemCoords, /* coordProc */ DeleteWinItem, /* deleteProc */ DisplayWinItem, /* displayProc */ | | | 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 | sizeof(WindowItem), /* itemSize */ CreateWinItem, /* createProc */ configSpecs, /* configSpecs */ ConfigureWinItem, /* configureProc */ WinItemCoords, /* coordProc */ DeleteWinItem, /* deleteProc */ DisplayWinItem, /* displayProc */ TK_ALWAYS_REDRAW|TK_CONFIG_OBJS, /* flags */ WinItemToPoint, /* pointProc */ WinItemToArea, /* areaProc */ WinItemToPostscript, /* postscriptProc */ ScaleWinItem, /* scaleProc */ TranslateWinItem, /* translateProc */ NULL, /* indexProc */ NULL, /* cursorProc */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
312 313 314 315 316 317 318 | WindowItem *winItemPtr = (WindowItem *) itemPtr; Tk_Window oldWindow; Tk_Window canvasTkwin; oldWindow = winItemPtr->tkwin; canvasTkwin = Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas); if (TCL_OK != Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, canvasTkwin, configSpecs, objc, | | | 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 | WindowItem *winItemPtr = (WindowItem *) itemPtr; Tk_Window oldWindow; Tk_Window canvasTkwin; oldWindow = winItemPtr->tkwin; canvasTkwin = Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas); if (TCL_OK != Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, canvasTkwin, configSpecs, objc, (const char **) objv, (char *) winItemPtr, flags|TK_CONFIG_OBJS)) { return TCL_ERROR; } /* * A few of the options require additional processing. */ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkCanvas.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
97 98 99 100 101 102 103 | TK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background", DEF_CANVAS_BG_MONO, offsetof(TkCanvas, bgBorder), TK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_SYNONYM, "-bd", "borderWidth", NULL, NULL, 0, 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_SYNONYM, "-bg", "background", NULL, NULL, 0, 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 | TK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background", DEF_CANVAS_BG_MONO, offsetof(TkCanvas, bgBorder), TK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_SYNONYM, "-bd", "borderWidth", NULL, NULL, 0, 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_SYNONYM, "-bg", "background", NULL, NULL, 0, 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", DEF_CANVAS_BORDER_WIDTH, offsetof(TkCanvas, borderWidth), 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_DOUBLE, "-closeenough", "closeEnough", "CloseEnough", DEF_CANVAS_CLOSE_ENOUGH, offsetof(TkCanvas, closeEnough), 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_BOOLEAN, "-confine", "confine", "Confine", DEF_CANVAS_CONFINE, offsetof(TkCanvas, confine), 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_ACTIVE_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor", DEF_CANVAS_CURSOR, offsetof(TkCanvas, cursor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-height", "height", "Height", DEF_CANVAS_HEIGHT, offsetof(TkCanvas, height), 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground", "HighlightBackground", DEF_CANVAS_HIGHLIGHT_BG, offsetof(TkCanvas, highlightBgColorPtr), 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor", DEF_CANVAS_HIGHLIGHT, offsetof(TkCanvas, highlightColorPtr), 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness", "HighlightThickness", DEF_CANVAS_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH, offsetof(TkCanvas, highlightWidth), 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_BORDER, "-insertbackground", "insertBackground", "Foreground", DEF_CANVAS_INSERT_BG, offsetof(TkCanvas, textInfo.insertBorder), 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-insertborderwidth", "insertBorderWidth", "BorderWidth", DEF_CANVAS_INSERT_BD_COLOR, offsetof(TkCanvas, textInfo.insertBorderWidth), TK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-insertborderwidth", "insertBorderWidth", "BorderWidth", DEF_CANVAS_INSERT_BD_MONO, offsetof(TkCanvas, textInfo.insertBorderWidth), TK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_INT, "-insertofftime", "insertOffTime", "OffTime", DEF_CANVAS_INSERT_OFF_TIME, offsetof(TkCanvas, insertOffTime), 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_INT, "-insertontime", "insertOnTime", "OnTime", DEF_CANVAS_INSERT_ON_TIME, offsetof(TkCanvas, insertOnTime), 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-insertwidth", "insertWidth", "InsertWidth", DEF_CANVAS_INSERT_WIDTH, offsetof(TkCanvas, textInfo.insertWidth), 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-offset", "offset", "Offset", "0,0", offsetof(TkCanvas, tsoffset),TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &offsetOption}, {TK_CONFIG_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief", DEF_CANVAS_RELIEF, offsetof(TkCanvas, relief), 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-scrollregion", "scrollRegion", "ScrollRegion", DEF_CANVAS_SCROLL_REGION, offsetof(TkCanvas, regionObj), TK_CONFIG_OBJS|TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_BORDER, "-selectbackground", "selectBackground", "Foreground", DEF_CANVAS_SELECT_COLOR, offsetof(TkCanvas, textInfo.selBorder), TK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_BORDER, "-selectbackground", "selectBackground", "Foreground", DEF_CANVAS_SELECT_MONO, offsetof(TkCanvas, textInfo.selBorder), TK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-selectborderwidth", "selectBorderWidth", "BorderWidth", DEF_CANVAS_SELECT_BD_COLOR, offsetof(TkCanvas, textInfo.selBorderWidth), TK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-selectborderwidth", "selectBorderWidth", "BorderWidth", DEF_CANVAS_SELECT_BD_MONO, offsetof(TkCanvas, textInfo.selBorderWidth), TK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-selectforeground", "selectForeground", "Background", DEF_CANVAS_SELECT_FG_COLOR, offsetof(TkCanvas, textInfo.selFgColorPtr), TK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY|TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-selectforeground", "selectForeground", "Background", DEF_CANVAS_SELECT_FG_MONO, offsetof(TkCanvas, textInfo.selFgColorPtr), TK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY|TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-state", "state", "State", "normal", offsetof(TkCanvas, canvas_state), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &stateOption}, {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus", DEF_CANVAS_TAKE_FOCUS, offsetof(TkCanvas, takeFocusObj), TK_CONFIG_OBJS|TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-width", "width", "Width", DEF_CANVAS_WIDTH, offsetof(TkCanvas, width), 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-xscrollcommand", "xScrollCommand", "ScrollCommand", DEF_CANVAS_X_SCROLL_CMD, offsetof(TkCanvas, xScrollCmdObj), TK_CONFIG_OBJS|TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-xscrollincrement", "xScrollIncrement", "ScrollIncrement", DEF_CANVAS_X_SCROLL_INCREMENT, offsetof(TkCanvas, xScrollIncrement), 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-yscrollcommand", "yScrollCommand", "ScrollCommand", DEF_CANVAS_Y_SCROLL_CMD, offsetof(TkCanvas, yScrollCmdObj), TK_CONFIG_OBJS|TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-yscrollincrement", "yScrollIncrement", "ScrollIncrement", DEF_CANVAS_Y_SCROLL_INCREMENT, offsetof(TkCanvas, yScrollIncrement), 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, NULL} }; /* * List of all the item types known at present. This is *global* and is * protected by typeListMutex. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 | static int FindItems(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkCanvas *canvasPtr, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const *objv, Tcl_Obj *newTagObj, Tcl_Size first, TagSearch **searchPtrPtr); static int FindArea(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkCanvas *canvasPtr, Tcl_Obj *const *objv, Tk_Uid uid, int enclosed); static double GridAlign(double coord, double spacing); static void InitCanvas(void); static void PickCurrentItem(TkCanvas *canvasPtr, XEvent *eventPtr); static Tcl_Obj * ScrollFractions(int screen1, int screen2, int object1, int object2); static int RelinkItems(TkCanvas *canvasPtr, Tcl_Obj *tag, Tk_Item *prevPtr, TagSearch **searchPtrPtr); static void TagSearchExprInit(TagSearchExpr **exprPtrPtr); | > > > | 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 | static int FindItems(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkCanvas *canvasPtr, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const *objv, Tcl_Obj *newTagObj, Tcl_Size first, TagSearch **searchPtrPtr); static int FindArea(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkCanvas *canvasPtr, Tcl_Obj *const *objv, Tk_Uid uid, int enclosed); static double GridAlign(double coord, double spacing); #if !defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) && (TK_MAJOR_VERSION < 9) static const char** TkGetStringsFromObjs(Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const *objv); #endif static void InitCanvas(void); static void PickCurrentItem(TkCanvas *canvasPtr, XEvent *eventPtr); static Tcl_Obj * ScrollFractions(int screen1, int screen2, int object1, int object2); static int RelinkItems(TkCanvas *canvasPtr, Tcl_Obj *tag, Tk_Item *prevPtr, TagSearch **searchPtrPtr); static void TagSearchExprInit(TagSearchExpr **exprPtrPtr); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
321 322 323 324 325 326 327 | * ---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static inline int AlwaysRedraw( Tk_Item *itemPtr) { | | > > | | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 | * ---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static inline int AlwaysRedraw( Tk_Item *itemPtr) { return itemPtr->typePtr->alwaysRedraw & 1; } static inline int ItemConfigure( TkCanvas *canvasPtr, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) { Tcl_Interp *interp = canvasPtr->interp; int result; if (itemPtr->typePtr->alwaysRedraw & TK_CONFIG_OBJS) { result = itemPtr->typePtr->configProc(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr, objc, objv, TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY); } else { #if defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) || (TK_MAJOR_VERSION > 8) Tcl_Panic("Flag TK_CONFIG_OBJS is mandatory"); #else const char **args = TkGetStringsFromObjs(objc, objv); result = itemPtr->typePtr->configProc(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr, objc, (Tcl_Obj **) args, TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY); if (args != NULL) { ckfree(args); } #endif } return result; } static inline int ItemConfigInfo( TkCanvas *canvasPtr, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Tcl_Obj *fieldName) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 | Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) { Tcl_Interp *interp = canvasPtr->interp; int result; if (itemPtr->typePtr->coordProc == NULL) { result = TCL_OK; } else { result = itemPtr->typePtr->coordProc(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, | > > > > > > > > | > > > > > > | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 | Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) { Tcl_Interp *interp = canvasPtr->interp; int result; if (itemPtr->typePtr->coordProc == NULL) { result = TCL_OK; } else if (itemPtr->typePtr->alwaysRedraw & TK_CONFIG_OBJS) { result = itemPtr->typePtr->coordProc(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr, objc, objv); } else { #if defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) || (TK_MAJOR_VERSION > 8) Tcl_Panic("Flag TK_CONFIG_OBJS is mandatory"); #else const char **args = TkGetStringsFromObjs(objc, objv); result = itemPtr->typePtr->coordProc(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr, objc, (Tcl_Obj **) args); if (args != NULL) { ckfree(args); } #endif } return result; } static inline int ItemCreate( TkCanvas *canvasPtr, Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Warning: incomplete! typePtr field must be * set by this point. */ Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) { Tcl_Interp *interp = canvasPtr->interp; int result; if (itemPtr->typePtr->alwaysRedraw & TK_CONFIG_OBJS) { result = itemPtr->typePtr->createProc(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr, objc-3, objv+3); } else { #if defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) || (TK_MAJOR_VERSION > 8) Tcl_Panic("Flag TK_CONFIG_OBJS is mandatory"); #else const char **args = TkGetStringsFromObjs(objc-3, objv+3); result = itemPtr->typePtr->createProc(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr, objc-3, (Tcl_Obj **) args); if (args != NULL) { ckfree(args); } #endif } return result; } static inline void ItemCursor( TkCanvas *canvasPtr, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int index) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
443 444 445 446 447 448 449 | Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Tcl_Size *indexPtr) { Tcl_Interp *interp = canvasPtr->interp; if (itemPtr->typePtr->indexProc == NULL) { return TCL_OK; | | | | > > > > > > > > > > | | > > > > > > > > | 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 | Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Tcl_Size *indexPtr) { Tcl_Interp *interp = canvasPtr->interp; if (itemPtr->typePtr->indexProc == NULL) { return TCL_OK; } else if (itemPtr->typePtr->alwaysRedraw & TK_CONFIG_OBJS) { return itemPtr->typePtr->indexProc(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr, objPtr, indexPtr); } else { #if defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Flag TK_CONFIG_OBJS is mandatory", (char *)NULL); return TCL_ERROR; #else return itemPtr->typePtr->indexProc(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr, (Tcl_Obj *) Tcl_GetString(objPtr), indexPtr); #endif } } static inline void ItemInsert( TkCanvas *canvasPtr, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int beforeThis, Tcl_Obj *toInsert) { if (itemPtr->typePtr->alwaysRedraw & TK_CONFIG_OBJS) { itemPtr->typePtr->insertProc((Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr, beforeThis, toInsert); } else { #if defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) || (TK_MAJOR_VERSION > 8) Tcl_Panic("Flag TK_CONFIG_OBJS is mandatory"); #else itemPtr->typePtr->insertProc((Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr, beforeThis, (Tcl_Obj *) Tcl_GetString(toInsert)); #endif } } static inline int ItemOverlap( TkCanvas *canvasPtr, Tk_Item *itemPtr, double rect[]) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
674 675 676 677 678 679 680 | canvasPtr->display = Tk_Display(newWin); canvasPtr->interp = interp; canvasPtr->widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, Tk_PathName(canvasPtr->tkwin), CanvasWidgetCmd, canvasPtr, CanvasCmdDeletedProc); canvasPtr->firstItemPtr = NULL; canvasPtr->lastItemPtr = NULL; | | | | | < < < | 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 | canvasPtr->display = Tk_Display(newWin); canvasPtr->interp = interp; canvasPtr->widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, Tk_PathName(canvasPtr->tkwin), CanvasWidgetCmd, canvasPtr, CanvasCmdDeletedProc); canvasPtr->firstItemPtr = NULL; canvasPtr->lastItemPtr = NULL; canvasPtr->borderWidth = 0; canvasPtr->bgBorder = NULL; canvasPtr->relief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT; canvasPtr->highlightWidth = 0; canvasPtr->highlightBgColorPtr = NULL; canvasPtr->highlightColorPtr = NULL; canvasPtr->inset = 0; canvasPtr->pixmapGC = NULL; canvasPtr->width = 0; canvasPtr->height = 0; canvasPtr->confine = 0; canvasPtr->textInfo.selBorder = NULL; canvasPtr->textInfo.selBorderWidth = 0; canvasPtr->textInfo.selFgColorPtr = NULL; canvasPtr->textInfo.selItemPtr = NULL; canvasPtr->textInfo.selectFirst = TCL_INDEX_NONE; canvasPtr->textInfo.selectLast = TCL_INDEX_NONE; canvasPtr->textInfo.anchorItemPtr = NULL; canvasPtr->textInfo.selectAnchor = 0; canvasPtr->textInfo.insertBorder = NULL; canvasPtr->textInfo.insertWidth = 0; canvasPtr->textInfo.insertBorderWidth = 0; canvasPtr->textInfo.focusItemPtr = NULL; canvasPtr->textInfo.gotFocus = 0; canvasPtr->textInfo.cursorOn = 0; canvasPtr->insertOnTime = 0; canvasPtr->insertOffTime = 0; canvasPtr->insertBlinkHandler = NULL; canvasPtr->xOrigin = canvasPtr->yOrigin = 0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
722 723 724 725 726 727 728 | canvasPtr->xScrollCmdObj = NULL; canvasPtr->yScrollCmdObj = NULL; canvasPtr->scrollX1 = 0; canvasPtr->scrollY1 = 0; canvasPtr->scrollX2 = 0; canvasPtr->scrollY2 = 0; canvasPtr->regionObj = NULL; | | | | 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 | canvasPtr->xScrollCmdObj = NULL; canvasPtr->yScrollCmdObj = NULL; canvasPtr->scrollX1 = 0; canvasPtr->scrollY1 = 0; canvasPtr->scrollX2 = 0; canvasPtr->scrollY2 = 0; canvasPtr->regionObj = NULL; canvasPtr->xScrollIncrement = 0; canvasPtr->yScrollIncrement = 0; canvasPtr->scanX = 0; canvasPtr->scanXOrigin = 0; canvasPtr->scanY = 0; canvasPtr->scanYOrigin = 0; canvasPtr->hotPtr = NULL; canvasPtr->hotPrevPtr = NULL; canvasPtr->cursor = NULL; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 | /* * The TK_MOVABLE_POINTS flag should only be set for types that * support the same semantics of index, dChars and insert methods * as lines and canvases. */ if (itemPtr == NULL || | | | 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 | /* * The TK_MOVABLE_POINTS flag should only be set for types that * support the same semantics of index, dChars and insert methods * as lines and canvases. */ if (itemPtr == NULL || !(itemPtr->typePtr->alwaysRedraw & TK_MOVABLE_POINTS)) { continue; } result = ItemIndex(canvasPtr, itemPtr, objv[3], &index); if (result != TCL_OK) { break; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2055 2056 2057 2058 2059 2060 2061 | + (int) (fraction * (canvasPtr->scrollX2 - canvasPtr->scrollX1) + 0.5); break; case TK_SCROLL_PAGES: newX = (int) (canvasPtr->xOrigin + count * .9 * (Tk_Width(canvasPtr->tkwin) - 2 * canvasPtr->inset)); break; | | < < | | < | 2117 2118 2119 2120 2121 2122 2123 2124 2125 2126 2127 2128 2129 2130 2131 2132 2133 2134 2135 2136 2137 2138 | + (int) (fraction * (canvasPtr->scrollX2 - canvasPtr->scrollX1) + 0.5); break; case TK_SCROLL_PAGES: newX = (int) (canvasPtr->xOrigin + count * .9 * (Tk_Width(canvasPtr->tkwin) - 2 * canvasPtr->inset)); break; case TK_SCROLL_UNITS: if (canvasPtr->xScrollIncrement > 0) { newX = canvasPtr->xOrigin + count * canvasPtr->xScrollIncrement; } else { newX = (int) (canvasPtr->xOrigin + count * .1 * (Tk_Width(canvasPtr->tkwin) - 2 * canvasPtr->inset)); } break; default: result = TCL_ERROR; goto done; } CanvasSetOrigin(canvasPtr, newX, canvasPtr->yOrigin); break; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2098 2099 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 | newY = canvasPtr->scrollY1 - canvasPtr->inset + (int) ( fraction*(canvasPtr->scrollY2-canvasPtr->scrollY1) + 0.5); break; case TK_SCROLL_PAGES: newY = (int) (canvasPtr->yOrigin + count * .9 * (Tk_Height(canvasPtr->tkwin) - 2 * canvasPtr->inset)); break; | | < < | | < | 2157 2158 2159 2160 2161 2162 2163 2164 2165 2166 2167 2168 2169 2170 2171 2172 2173 2174 2175 2176 2177 2178 | newY = canvasPtr->scrollY1 - canvasPtr->inset + (int) ( fraction*(canvasPtr->scrollY2-canvasPtr->scrollY1) + 0.5); break; case TK_SCROLL_PAGES: newY = (int) (canvasPtr->yOrigin + count * .9 * (Tk_Height(canvasPtr->tkwin) - 2 * canvasPtr->inset)); break; case TK_SCROLL_UNITS: if (canvasPtr->yScrollIncrement > 0) { newY = canvasPtr->yOrigin + count * canvasPtr->yScrollIncrement; } else { newY = (int) (canvasPtr->yOrigin + count * .1 * (Tk_Height(canvasPtr->tkwin) - 2 * canvasPtr->inset)); } break; default: result = TCL_ERROR; goto done; } CanvasSetOrigin(canvasPtr, canvasPtr->xOrigin, newY); break; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2264 2265 2266 2267 2268 2269 2270 | Tcl_Size objc, /* Number of valid entries in objv. */ Tcl_Obj *const objv[], /* Argument objects. */ int flags) /* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */ { XGCValues gcValues; GC newGC; Tk_State old_canvas_state=canvasPtr->canvas_state; | < < | | < < < < < < < < < | < < | < | < < | < | < < | < | < < | < | < < | < | < < | < | < < < < < < < < < | 2320 2321 2322 2323 2324 2325 2326 2327 2328 2329 2330 2331 2332 2333 2334 2335 2336 2337 2338 2339 2340 2341 2342 2343 2344 2345 2346 2347 2348 2349 2350 2351 2352 2353 2354 2355 2356 2357 2358 2359 2360 2361 2362 2363 2364 2365 2366 2367 2368 2369 2370 2371 2372 2373 2374 | Tcl_Size objc, /* Number of valid entries in objv. */ Tcl_Obj *const objv[], /* Argument objects. */ int flags) /* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */ { XGCValues gcValues; GC newGC; Tk_State old_canvas_state=canvasPtr->canvas_state; if (Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, canvasPtr->tkwin, configSpecs, objc, (const char **) objv, (char *) canvasPtr, flags|TK_CONFIG_OBJS) != TCL_OK) { return TCL_ERROR; } /* * A few options need special processing, such as setting the background * from a 3-D border and creating a GC for copying bits to the screen. */ Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(canvasPtr->tkwin, canvasPtr->bgBorder); if (canvasPtr->borderWidth < 0) { canvasPtr->borderWidth = 0; } if (canvasPtr->height < 0) { canvasPtr->height = 0; } if (canvasPtr->highlightWidth < 0) { canvasPtr->highlightWidth = 0; } if (canvasPtr->width < 0) { canvasPtr->width = 0; } if (canvasPtr->xScrollIncrement < 0) { canvasPtr->xScrollIncrement = 0; } if (canvasPtr->yScrollIncrement < 0) { canvasPtr->yScrollIncrement = 0; } canvasPtr->inset = canvasPtr->borderWidth + canvasPtr->highlightWidth; if (canvasPtr->textInfo.insertBorderWidth < 0) { canvasPtr->textInfo.insertBorderWidth = 0; } if (canvasPtr->textInfo.insertWidth < 0) { canvasPtr->textInfo.insertWidth = 0; } if (canvasPtr->textInfo.selBorderWidth < 0) { canvasPtr->textInfo.selBorderWidth = 0; } gcValues.function = GXcopy; gcValues.graphics_exposures = False; gcValues.foreground = Tk_3DBorderColor(canvasPtr->bgBorder)->pixel; newGC = Tk_GetGC(canvasPtr->tkwin, GCFunction|GCGraphicsExposures|GCForeground, &gcValues); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2380 2381 2382 2383 2384 2385 2386 | } } /* * Reset the desired dimensions for the window. */ | | | | 2398 2399 2400 2401 2402 2403 2404 2405 2406 2407 2408 2409 2410 2411 2412 2413 | } } /* * Reset the desired dimensions for the window. */ Tk_GeometryRequest(canvasPtr->tkwin, canvasPtr->width + 2 * canvasPtr->inset, canvasPtr->height + 2 * canvasPtr->inset); /* * Restart the cursor timing sequence in case the on-time or off-time just * changed. */ if (canvasPtr->textInfo.gotFocus) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2435 2436 2437 2438 2439 2440 2441 | ckfree(argv2); } flags = canvasPtr->tsoffset.flags; if (flags & TK_OFFSET_LEFT) { canvasPtr->tsoffset.xoffset = 0; } else if (flags & TK_OFFSET_CENTER) { | | | | | | 2453 2454 2455 2456 2457 2458 2459 2460 2461 2462 2463 2464 2465 2466 2467 2468 2469 2470 2471 2472 2473 2474 2475 2476 | ckfree(argv2); } flags = canvasPtr->tsoffset.flags; if (flags & TK_OFFSET_LEFT) { canvasPtr->tsoffset.xoffset = 0; } else if (flags & TK_OFFSET_CENTER) { canvasPtr->tsoffset.xoffset = canvasPtr->width / 2; } else if (flags & TK_OFFSET_RIGHT) { canvasPtr->tsoffset.xoffset = canvasPtr->width; } if (flags & TK_OFFSET_TOP) { canvasPtr->tsoffset.yoffset = 0; } else if (flags & TK_OFFSET_MIDDLE) { canvasPtr->tsoffset.yoffset = canvasPtr->height / 2; } else if (flags & TK_OFFSET_BOTTOM) { canvasPtr->tsoffset.yoffset = canvasPtr->height; } /* * Reset the canvas's origin (this is a no-op unless confine mode has just * been turned on or the scroll region has changed). */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2488 2489 2490 2491 2492 2493 2494 | static void CanvasWorldChanged( void *instanceData) /* Information about widget. */ { TkCanvas *canvasPtr = (TkCanvas *)instanceData; Tk_Item *itemPtr; | < < < < | 2506 2507 2508 2509 2510 2511 2512 2513 2514 2515 2516 2517 2518 2519 | static void CanvasWorldChanged( void *instanceData) /* Information about widget. */ { TkCanvas *canvasPtr = (TkCanvas *)instanceData; Tk_Item *itemPtr; itemPtr = canvasPtr->firstItemPtr; for ( ; itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = itemPtr->nextPtr) { if (ItemConfigure(canvasPtr, itemPtr, 0, NULL) != TCL_OK) { Tcl_ResetResult(canvasPtr->interp); } } canvasPtr->flags |= REPICK_NEEDED; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3063 3064 3065 3066 3067 3068 3069 | void *clientData) /* Information about widget. */ { TkCanvas *canvasPtr = (TkCanvas *)clientData; Tk_Window tkwin = canvasPtr->tkwin; Tk_Item *itemPtr; Pixmap pixmap; int screenX1, screenX2, screenY1, screenY2, width, height; | < | 3077 3078 3079 3080 3081 3082 3083 3084 3085 3086 3087 3088 3089 3090 | void *clientData) /* Information about widget. */ { TkCanvas *canvasPtr = (TkCanvas *)clientData; Tk_Window tkwin = canvasPtr->tkwin; Tk_Item *itemPtr; Pixmap pixmap; int screenX1, screenX2, screenY1, screenY2, width, height; if (canvasPtr->tkwin == NULL) { return; } if (!Tk_IsMapped(tkwin)) { goto done; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3241 3242 3243 3244 3245 3246 3247 | } /* * Draw the window borders, if needed. */ borders: | < < | | > | | | | | | | 3254 3255 3256 3257 3258 3259 3260 3261 3262 3263 3264 3265 3266 3267 3268 3269 3270 3271 3272 3273 3274 3275 3276 3277 3278 3279 3280 3281 3282 3283 3284 3285 3286 3287 3288 3289 3290 | } /* * Draw the window borders, if needed. */ borders: if (canvasPtr->flags & REDRAW_BORDERS) { canvasPtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_BORDERS; if (canvasPtr->borderWidth > 0) { Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), canvasPtr->bgBorder, canvasPtr->highlightWidth, canvasPtr->highlightWidth, Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2 * canvasPtr->highlightWidth, Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2 * canvasPtr->highlightWidth, canvasPtr->borderWidth, canvasPtr->relief); } if (canvasPtr->highlightWidth > 0) { GC fgGC, bgGC; bgGC = Tk_GCForColor(canvasPtr->highlightBgColorPtr, Tk_WindowId(tkwin)); if (canvasPtr->textInfo.gotFocus) { fgGC = Tk_GCForColor(canvasPtr->highlightColorPtr, Tk_WindowId(tkwin)); Tk_DrawHighlightBorder(tkwin, fgGC, bgGC, canvasPtr->highlightWidth, Tk_WindowId(tkwin)); } else { Tk_DrawHighlightBorder(tkwin, bgGC, bgGC, canvasPtr->highlightWidth, Tk_WindowId(tkwin)); } } } done: canvasPtr->flags &= ~(REDRAW_PENDING|BBOX_NOT_EMPTY); canvasPtr->redrawX1 = canvasPtr->redrawX2 = 0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3356 3357 3358 3359 3360 3361 3362 | CanvasFocusProc(canvasPtr, 0); } } else if (eventPtr->type == UnmapNotify) { Tk_Item *itemPtr; /* * Special hack: if the canvas is unmapped, then must notify all items | | | | 3368 3369 3370 3371 3372 3373 3374 3375 3376 3377 3378 3379 3380 3381 3382 3383 | CanvasFocusProc(canvasPtr, 0); } } else if (eventPtr->type == UnmapNotify) { Tk_Item *itemPtr; /* * Special hack: if the canvas is unmapped, then must notify all items * with "alwaysRedraw" set, so that they know that they are no longer * displayed. */ for (itemPtr = canvasPtr->firstItemPtr; itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = itemPtr->nextPtr) { if (AlwaysRedraw(itemPtr)) { ItemDisplay(canvasPtr, itemPtr, None, 0, 0, 0, 0); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5638 5639 5640 5641 5642 5643 5644 | static void CanvasFocusProc( TkCanvas *canvasPtr, /* Canvas that just got or lost focus. */ int gotFocus) /* 1 means window is getting focus, 0 means * it's losing it. */ { | < < < | | 5650 5651 5652 5653 5654 5655 5656 5657 5658 5659 5660 5661 5662 5663 5664 5665 5666 5667 5668 5669 5670 5671 5672 5673 5674 5675 5676 5677 5678 | static void CanvasFocusProc( TkCanvas *canvasPtr, /* Canvas that just got or lost focus. */ int gotFocus) /* 1 means window is getting focus, 0 means * it's losing it. */ { Tcl_DeleteTimerHandler(canvasPtr->insertBlinkHandler); if (gotFocus) { canvasPtr->textInfo.gotFocus = 1; canvasPtr->textInfo.cursorOn = 1; if (canvasPtr->insertOffTime != 0) { canvasPtr->insertBlinkHandler = Tcl_CreateTimerHandler( canvasPtr->insertOffTime, CanvasBlinkProc, canvasPtr); } } else { canvasPtr->textInfo.gotFocus = 0; canvasPtr->textInfo.cursorOn = 0; canvasPtr->insertBlinkHandler = NULL; } EventuallyRedrawItem(canvasPtr, canvasPtr->textInfo.focusItemPtr); if (canvasPtr->highlightWidth > 0) { canvasPtr->flags |= REDRAW_BORDERS; if (!(canvasPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) { Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayCanvas, canvasPtr); canvasPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING; } } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5997 5998 5999 6000 6001 6002 6003 | * corresponding to left edge of canvas * window). */ int yOrigin) /* New Y origin for canvas (canvas y-coord * corresponding to top edge of canvas * window). */ { int left, right, top, bottom, delta; | < < < | | | | | | | | | | | 6006 6007 6008 6009 6010 6011 6012 6013 6014 6015 6016 6017 6018 6019 6020 6021 6022 6023 6024 6025 6026 6027 6028 6029 6030 6031 6032 6033 6034 6035 6036 6037 6038 6039 6040 6041 6042 6043 6044 6045 6046 | * corresponding to left edge of canvas * window). */ int yOrigin) /* New Y origin for canvas (canvas y-coord * corresponding to top edge of canvas * window). */ { int left, right, top, bottom, delta; /* * If scroll increments have been set, round the window origin to the * nearest multiple of the increments. Remember, the origin is the place * just inside the borders, not the upper left corner. */ if (canvasPtr->xScrollIncrement > 0) { if (xOrigin >= 0) { xOrigin += canvasPtr->xScrollIncrement/2; xOrigin -= (xOrigin + canvasPtr->inset) % canvasPtr->xScrollIncrement; } else { xOrigin = (-xOrigin) + canvasPtr->xScrollIncrement/2; xOrigin = -(xOrigin - (xOrigin - canvasPtr->inset) % canvasPtr->xScrollIncrement); } } if (canvasPtr->yScrollIncrement > 0) { if (yOrigin >= 0) { yOrigin += canvasPtr->yScrollIncrement/2; yOrigin -= (yOrigin + canvasPtr->inset) % canvasPtr->yScrollIncrement; } else { yOrigin = (-yOrigin) + canvasPtr->yScrollIncrement/2; yOrigin = -(yOrigin - (yOrigin - canvasPtr->inset) % canvasPtr->yScrollIncrement); } } /* * Adjust the origin if necessary to keep as much as possible of the * canvas in the view. The variables left, right, etc. keep track of how * much extra space there is on each side of the view before it will stick |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6050 6051 6052 6053 6054 6055 6056 | right = canvasPtr->scrollX2 - (xOrigin + Tk_Width(canvasPtr->tkwin) - canvasPtr->inset); top = yOrigin + canvasPtr->inset - canvasPtr->scrollY1; bottom = canvasPtr->scrollY2 - (yOrigin + Tk_Height(canvasPtr->tkwin) - canvasPtr->inset); if ((left < 0) && (right > 0)) { delta = (right > -left) ? -left : right; | | | | | | | | | | 6056 6057 6058 6059 6060 6061 6062 6063 6064 6065 6066 6067 6068 6069 6070 6071 6072 6073 6074 6075 6076 6077 6078 6079 6080 6081 6082 6083 6084 6085 6086 6087 6088 6089 6090 | right = canvasPtr->scrollX2 - (xOrigin + Tk_Width(canvasPtr->tkwin) - canvasPtr->inset); top = yOrigin + canvasPtr->inset - canvasPtr->scrollY1; bottom = canvasPtr->scrollY2 - (yOrigin + Tk_Height(canvasPtr->tkwin) - canvasPtr->inset); if ((left < 0) && (right > 0)) { delta = (right > -left) ? -left : right; if (canvasPtr->xScrollIncrement > 0) { delta -= delta % canvasPtr->xScrollIncrement; } xOrigin += delta; } else if ((right < 0) && (left > 0)) { delta = (left > -right) ? -right : left; if (canvasPtr->xScrollIncrement > 0) { delta -= delta % canvasPtr->xScrollIncrement; } xOrigin -= delta; } if ((top < 0) && (bottom > 0)) { delta = (bottom > -top) ? -top : bottom; if (canvasPtr->yScrollIncrement > 0) { delta -= delta % canvasPtr->yScrollIncrement; } yOrigin += delta; } else if ((bottom < 0) && (top > 0)) { delta = (top > -bottom) ? -bottom : top; if (canvasPtr->yScrollIncrement > 0) { delta -= delta % canvasPtr->yScrollIncrement; } yOrigin -= delta; } } if ((xOrigin == canvasPtr->xOrigin) && (yOrigin == canvasPtr->yOrigin)) { return; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6100 6101 6102 6103 6104 6105 6106 | canvasPtr->yOrigin = yOrigin; canvasPtr->flags |= UPDATE_SCROLLBARS; Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw((Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, canvasPtr->xOrigin, canvasPtr->yOrigin, canvasPtr->xOrigin + Tk_Width(canvasPtr->tkwin), canvasPtr->yOrigin + Tk_Height(canvasPtr->tkwin)); } | | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 6106 6107 6108 6109 6110 6111 6112 6113 6114 6115 6116 6117 6118 6119 6120 6121 6122 6123 6124 6125 6126 6127 6128 6129 6130 6131 6132 6133 6134 6135 6136 6137 6138 6139 6140 6141 6142 6143 6144 6145 6146 6147 6148 6149 6150 6151 6152 6153 6154 6155 6156 | canvasPtr->yOrigin = yOrigin; canvasPtr->flags |= UPDATE_SCROLLBARS; Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw((Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, canvasPtr->xOrigin, canvasPtr->yOrigin, canvasPtr->xOrigin + Tk_Width(canvasPtr->tkwin), canvasPtr->yOrigin + Tk_Height(canvasPtr->tkwin)); } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * TkGetStringsFromObjs -- * * Results: * Converts object list into string list. * * Side effects: * Memory is allocated for the objv array, which must be freed using * ckfree() when no longer needed. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ #if !defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) && (TK_MAJOR_VERSION < 9) static const char ** TkGetStringsFromObjs( Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) { Tcl_Size i; const char **argv; if (objc <= 0) { return NULL; } argv = (const char **)ckalloc((objc+1) * sizeof(char *)); for (i = 0; i < objc; i++) { argv[i] = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]); } argv[objc] = 0; return argv; } #endif /* *-------------------------------------------------------------- * * Tk_CanvasPsColor -- * * This function is called by individual canvas items when they want to * set a color value for output. Given information about an X color, this |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkCmds.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
452 453 454 455 456 457 458 | p = (const char *)winPtr->tagPtr[i]; if (*p == '.') { /* * Names starting with "." are malloced rather than Uids, so they * have to be freed. */ | | | 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 | p = (const char *)winPtr->tagPtr[i]; if (*p == '.') { /* * Names starting with "." are malloced rather than Uids, so they * have to be freed. */ ckfree((char *)p); } } ckfree(winPtr->tagPtr); winPtr->numTags = 0; winPtr->tagPtr = NULL; } |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkColor.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
148 149 150 151 152 153 154 | } } /* * Still no luck. Call Tk_GetColor to allocate a new TkColor object. */ | | | 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 | } } /* * Still no luck. Call Tk_GetColor to allocate a new TkColor object. */ tkColPtr = (TkColor *)Tk_GetColor(interp, tkwin, Tcl_GetString(objPtr)); objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = tkColPtr; if (tkColPtr != NULL) { /* The resourceRefCount is incremented by Tk_GetColor. */ tkColPtr->objRefCount++; } return (XColor *) tkColPtr; } |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkConsole.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
218 219 220 221 222 223 224 | ConsoleInfo *info; Tcl_Channel consoleChannel; /* * Ensure that we are getting a compatible version of Tcl. */ | | | 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 | ConsoleInfo *info; Tcl_Channel consoleChannel; /* * Ensure that we are getting a compatible version of Tcl. */ if (Tcl_InitStubs(interp, "8.6-", 0) == NULL) { return; } consoleInitPtr = (int *)Tcl_GetThreadData(&consoleInitKey, (int) sizeof(int)); if (*consoleInitPtr) { /* * We've already initialized console channels in this thread. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
437 438 439 440 441 442 443 | if (mainWindow) { Tk_CreateEventHandler(mainWindow, StructureNotifyMask, ConsoleEventProc, info); info->refCount++; } Tcl_Preserve(consoleInterp); | | | 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 | if (mainWindow) { Tk_CreateEventHandler(mainWindow, StructureNotifyMask, ConsoleEventProc, info); info->refCount++; } Tcl_Preserve(consoleInterp); result = Tcl_EvalEx(consoleInterp, "source -encoding utf-8 $tk_library/console.tcl", TCL_INDEX_NONE, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL); if (result == TCL_ERROR) { Tcl_SetReturnOptions(interp, Tcl_GetReturnOptions(consoleInterp, result)); Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_GetObjResult(consoleInterp)); } Tcl_Release(consoleInterp); |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkCursor.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
317 318 319 320 321 322 323 | Tk_GetCursorFromData( Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */ Tk_Window tkwin, /* Window in which cursor will be used. */ const char *source, /* Bitmap data for cursor shape. */ const char *mask, /* Bitmap data for cursor mask. */ int width, int height, /* Dimensions of cursor. */ int xHot, int yHot, /* Location of hot-spot in cursor. */ | | | | | | 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 | Tk_GetCursorFromData( Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */ Tk_Window tkwin, /* Window in which cursor will be used. */ const char *source, /* Bitmap data for cursor shape. */ const char *mask, /* Bitmap data for cursor mask. */ int width, int height, /* Dimensions of cursor. */ int xHot, int yHot, /* Location of hot-spot in cursor. */ Tk_Uid fg, /* Foreground color for cursor. */ Tk_Uid bg) /* Background color for cursor. */ { DataKey dataKey; Tcl_HashEntry *dataHashPtr; TkCursor *cursorPtr; int isNew; XColor fgColor, bgColor; TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr; if (!dispPtr->cursorInit) { CursorInit(dispPtr); } dataKey.source = source; dataKey.mask = mask; dataKey.width = width; dataKey.height = height; dataKey.xHot = xHot; dataKey.yHot = yHot; dataKey.fg = fg; dataKey.bg = bg; dataKey.display = Tk_Display(tkwin); dataHashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->cursorDataTable, (char *) &dataKey, &isNew); if (!isNew) { cursorPtr = (TkCursor *)Tcl_GetHashValue(dataHashPtr); cursorPtr->resourceRefCount++; return cursorPtr->cursor; |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkDList.h.
︙ | ︙ | |||
436 437 438 439 440 441 442 | } \ \ __TK_DLIST_UNUSED \ static void \ LT##_Free(struct ElemType *elem) \ { \ LT##_Remove(elem); \ | | | 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 | } \ \ __TK_DLIST_UNUSED \ static void \ LT##_Free(struct ElemType *elem) \ { \ LT##_Remove(elem); \ ckfree((char *)elem); \ } \ \ __TK_DLIST_UNUSED \ static void \ LT##_RemoveHead(LT *head) \ { \ assert(!LT##_IsEmpty(head)); \ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
504 505 506 507 508 509 510 | LT##_Clear(LT *head) \ { \ struct ElemType *p; \ struct ElemType *next; \ assert(head); \ for (p = head->first; p; p = next) { \ next = LT##_Next(p); \ | | | 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 | LT##_Clear(LT *head) \ { \ struct ElemType *p; \ struct ElemType *next; \ assert(head); \ for (p = head->first; p; p = next) { \ next = LT##_Next(p); \ ckfree((char *)p); \ } \ LT##_Init(head); \ } \ \ __TK_DLIST_UNUSED \ static void \ LT##_Traverse(LT *head, LT##_Func func) \ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkDecls.h.
︙ | ︙ | |||
138 139 140 141 142 143 144 | EXTERN int Tk_ConfigureValue(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, void *widgRec, const char *argvName, int flags); /* 29 */ EXTERN int Tk_ConfigureWidget(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, | | | 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 | EXTERN int Tk_ConfigureValue(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, void *widgRec, const char *argvName, int flags); /* 29 */ EXTERN int Tk_ConfigureWidget(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, Tcl_Size argc, const char **argv, void *widgRec, int flags); /* 30 */ EXTERN void Tk_ConfigureWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned int valueMask, XWindowChanges *valuePtr); /* 31 */ EXTERN Tk_TextLayout Tk_ComputeTextLayout(Tk_Font font, const char *str, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
284 285 286 287 288 289 290 | EXTERN void Tk_FreeOptions(const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, void *widgRec, Display *display, int needFlags); /* 75 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreePixmap(Display *display, Pixmap pixmap); /* 76 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeTextLayout(Tk_TextLayout textLayout); | | > > | 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 | EXTERN void Tk_FreeOptions(const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, void *widgRec, Display *display, int needFlags); /* 75 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreePixmap(Display *display, Pixmap pixmap); /* 76 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeTextLayout(Tk_TextLayout textLayout); /* 77 */ TK_DEPRECATED("function does nothing, call can be removed") void Tk_FreeXId(Display *display, XID xid); /* 78 */ EXTERN GC Tk_GCForColor(XColor *colorPtr, Drawable drawable); /* 79 */ EXTERN void Tk_GeometryRequest(Tk_Window tkwin, int reqWidth, int reqHeight); /* 80 */ EXTERN Tk_3DBorder Tk_Get3DBorder(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
330 331 332 333 334 335 336 | /* 91 */ EXTERN Tk_Cursor Tk_GetCursor(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *str); /* 92 */ EXTERN Tk_Cursor Tk_GetCursorFromData(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *source, const char *mask, int width, int height, | | < | 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 | /* 91 */ EXTERN Tk_Cursor Tk_GetCursor(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *str); /* 92 */ EXTERN Tk_Cursor Tk_GetCursorFromData(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *source, const char *mask, int width, int height, int xHot, int yHot, Tk_Uid fg, Tk_Uid bg); /* 93 */ EXTERN Tk_Font Tk_GetFont(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *str); /* 94 */ EXTERN Tk_Font Tk_GetFontFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 95 */ EXTERN void Tk_GetFontMetrics(Tk_Font font, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
408 409 410 411 412 413 414 | EXTERN void Tk_HandleEvent(XEvent *eventPtr); /* 116 */ EXTERN Tk_Window Tk_IdToWindow(Display *display, Window window); /* 117 */ EXTERN void Tk_ImageChanged(Tk_ImageModel model, int x, int y, int width, int height, int imageWidth, int imageHeight); | | > | 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 | EXTERN void Tk_HandleEvent(XEvent *eventPtr); /* 116 */ EXTERN Tk_Window Tk_IdToWindow(Display *display, Window window); /* 117 */ EXTERN void Tk_ImageChanged(Tk_ImageModel model, int x, int y, int width, int height, int imageWidth, int imageHeight); /* 118 */ EXTERN int Tk_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 119 */ EXTERN Atom Tk_InternAtom(Tk_Window tkwin, const char *name); /* 120 */ EXTERN int Tk_IntersectTextLayout(Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y, int width, int height); /* 121 */ EXTERN void Tk_MaintainGeometry(Tk_Window window, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
470 471 472 473 474 475 476 | /* 142 */ EXTERN void Tk_OwnSelection(Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Tk_LostSelProc *proc, void *clientData); /* 143 */ EXTERN int Tk_ParseArgv(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, int *argcPtr, const char **argv, const Tk_ArgvInfo *argTable, int flags); | | > > > > | > > > > > > | > > > | > > > | 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 | /* 142 */ EXTERN void Tk_OwnSelection(Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Tk_LostSelProc *proc, void *clientData); /* 143 */ EXTERN int Tk_ParseArgv(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, int *argcPtr, const char **argv, const Tk_ArgvInfo *argTable, int flags); /* 144 */ TK_DEPRECATED("function signature changed") void Tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height); /* 145 */ TK_DEPRECATED("function signature changed") void Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite( Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int zoomX, int zoomY, int subsampleX, int subsampleY); /* 146 */ EXTERN int Tk_PhotoGetImage(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr); /* 147 */ EXTERN void Tk_PhotoBlank(Tk_PhotoHandle handle); /* 148 */ TK_DEPRECATED("function signature changed") void Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height); /* 149 */ EXTERN void Tk_PhotoGetSize(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr); /* 150 */ TK_DEPRECATED("function signature changed") void Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height); /* 151 */ EXTERN int Tk_PointToChar(Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y); /* 152 */ EXTERN int Tk_PostscriptFontName(Tk_Font tkfont, Tcl_DString *dsPtr); /* 153 */ EXTERN void Tk_PreserveColormap(Display *display, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
507 508 509 510 511 512 513 | int height); /* 157 */ EXTERN int Tk_RestackWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, int aboveBelow, Tk_Window other); /* 158 */ EXTERN Tk_RestrictProc * Tk_RestrictEvents(Tk_RestrictProc *proc, void *arg, void **prevArgPtr); | | > | 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 | int height); /* 157 */ EXTERN int Tk_RestackWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, int aboveBelow, Tk_Window other); /* 158 */ EXTERN Tk_RestrictProc * Tk_RestrictEvents(Tk_RestrictProc *proc, void *arg, void **prevArgPtr); /* 159 */ EXTERN int Tk_SafeInit(Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 160 */ EXTERN const char * Tk_SetAppName(Tk_Window tkwin, const char *name); /* 161 */ EXTERN void Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_3DBorder border); /* 162 */ EXTERN void Tk_SetClass(Tk_Window tkwin, const char *className); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
656 657 658 659 660 661 662 | /* 210 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], double *dblPtr, int *intPtr); /* 211 */ EXTERN int Tk_InitOptions(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionToken, Tk_Window tkwin); | | > > > | > | 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 | /* 210 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], double *dblPtr, int *intPtr); /* 211 */ EXTERN int Tk_InitOptions(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionToken, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 212 */ EXTERN void Tk_MainEx(Tcl_Size argc, char **argv, Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc, Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 213 */ EXTERN void Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr); /* 214 */ EXTERN int Tk_SetOptions(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionTable, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr, int *maskPtr); /* 215 */ EXTERN void Tk_InitConsoleChannels(Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 216 */ EXTERN int Tk_CreateConsoleWindow(Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 217 */ EXTERN void Tk_CreateSmoothMethod(Tcl_Interp *interp, const Tk_SmoothMethod *method); /* Slot 218 is reserved */ /* Slot 219 is reserved */ /* 220 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetDash(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *value, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
758 759 760 761 762 763 764 | int right, int top, int bottom); /* 244 */ EXTERN void Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize(Tk_Window tkwin, int minWidth, int minHeight); /* 245 */ EXTERN void Tk_SetCaretPos(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int height); | | > > > > | > > > > > | 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 | int right, int top, int bottom); /* 244 */ EXTERN void Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize(Tk_Window tkwin, int minWidth, int minHeight); /* 245 */ EXTERN void Tk_SetCaretPos(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int height); /* 246 */ TK_DEPRECATED("function signature changed") void Tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int compRule); /* 247 */ TK_DEPRECATED("function signature changed") void Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int zoomX, int zoomY, int subsampleX, int subsampleY, int compRule); /* 248 */ EXTERN int Tk_CollapseMotionEvents(Display *display, int collapse); /* 249 */ EXTERN Tk_StyleEngine Tk_RegisterStyleEngine(const char *name, Tk_StyleEngine parent); /* 250 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
785 786 787 788 789 790 791 | /* 255 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeStyle(Tk_Style style); /* 256 */ EXTERN const char * Tk_NameOfStyle(Tk_Style style); /* 257 */ EXTERN Tk_Style Tk_AllocStyleFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); | | > | > | 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 | /* 255 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeStyle(Tk_Style style); /* 256 */ EXTERN const char * Tk_NameOfStyle(Tk_Style style); /* 257 */ EXTERN Tk_Style Tk_AllocStyleFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 258 */ EXTERN Tk_Style Tk_GetStyleFromObj(Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 259 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeStyleFromObj(Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 260 */ EXTERN Tk_StyledElement Tk_GetStyledElement(Tk_Style style, Tcl_Size elementId, Tk_OptionTable optionTable); /* 261 */ EXTERN void Tk_GetElementSize(Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element, void *recordPtr, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
834 835 836 837 838 839 840 | Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height); /* 269 */ EXTERN long Tk_GetUserInactiveTime(Display *dpy); /* 270 */ EXTERN void Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime(Display *dpy); /* 271 */ EXTERN Tcl_Interp * Tk_Interp(Tk_Window tkwin); | | > | > > | 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 | Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height); /* 269 */ EXTERN long Tk_GetUserInactiveTime(Display *dpy); /* 270 */ EXTERN void Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime(Display *dpy); /* 271 */ EXTERN Tcl_Interp * Tk_Interp(Tk_Window tkwin); /* 272 */ EXTERN void Tk_CreateOldImageType(const Tk_ImageType *typePtr); /* 273 */ EXTERN void Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat( const Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr); /* 274 */ EXTERN int Tk_AlwaysShowSelection(Tk_Window tkwin); /* 275 */ EXTERN unsigned Tk_GetButtonMask(unsigned button); /* 276 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetDoublePixelsFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 | EXTERN Tk_Window Tk_GetOtherWindow(Tk_Window tkwin); /* 289 */ EXTERN void Tk_Get3DBorderColors(Tk_3DBorder border, XColor *bgColorPtr, XColor *darkColorPtr, XColor *lightColorPtr); /* 290 */ EXTERN Window Tk_MakeWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, Window parent); typedef struct { const struct TkPlatStubs *tkPlatStubs; const struct TkIntStubs *tkIntStubs; const struct TkIntPlatStubs *tkIntPlatStubs; const struct TkIntXlibStubs *tkIntXlibStubs; } TkStubHooks; | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 | EXTERN Tk_Window Tk_GetOtherWindow(Tk_Window tkwin); /* 289 */ EXTERN void Tk_Get3DBorderColors(Tk_3DBorder border, XColor *bgColorPtr, XColor *darkColorPtr, XColor *lightColorPtr); /* 290 */ EXTERN Window Tk_MakeWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, Window parent); /* 291 */ EXTERN void Tk_UnderlineCharsInContext(Display *display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_Font tkfont, const char *string, Tcl_Size numBytes, int x, int y, Tcl_Size firstByte, Tcl_Size lastByte); /* 292 */ EXTERN void Tk_DrawCharsInContext(Display *display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_Font tkfont, const char *string, Tcl_Size numBytes, Tcl_Size rangeStart, Tcl_Size rangeLength, int x, int y); /* 293 */ EXTERN int Tk_MeasureCharsInContext(Tk_Font tkfont, const char *string, Tcl_Size numBytes, Tcl_Size rangeStart, Tcl_Size rangeLength, int maxPixels, int flags, int *lengthPtr); /* 294 */ EXTERN void TkUnusedStubEntry(void); typedef struct { const struct TkPlatStubs *tkPlatStubs; const struct TkIntStubs *tkIntStubs; const struct TkIntPlatStubs *tkIntPlatStubs; const struct TkIntXlibStubs *tkIntXlibStubs; } TkStubHooks; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
925 926 927 928 929 930 931 | void (*tk_ChangeWindowAttributes) (Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned long valueMask, XSetWindowAttributes *attsPtr); /* 22 */ int (*tk_CharBbox) (Tk_TextLayout layout, Tcl_Size index, int *xPtr, int *yPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr); /* 23 */ void (*tk_ClearSelection) (Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection); /* 24 */ int (*tk_ClipboardAppend) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Atom target, Atom format, const char *buffer); /* 25 */ int (*tk_ClipboardClear) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 26 */ int (*tk_ConfigureInfo) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, void *widgRec, const char *argvName, int flags); /* 27 */ int (*tk_ConfigureValue) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, void *widgRec, const char *argvName, int flags); /* 28 */ | | | 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 | void (*tk_ChangeWindowAttributes) (Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned long valueMask, XSetWindowAttributes *attsPtr); /* 22 */ int (*tk_CharBbox) (Tk_TextLayout layout, Tcl_Size index, int *xPtr, int *yPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr); /* 23 */ void (*tk_ClearSelection) (Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection); /* 24 */ int (*tk_ClipboardAppend) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Atom target, Atom format, const char *buffer); /* 25 */ int (*tk_ClipboardClear) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 26 */ int (*tk_ConfigureInfo) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, void *widgRec, const char *argvName, int flags); /* 27 */ int (*tk_ConfigureValue) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, void *widgRec, const char *argvName, int flags); /* 28 */ int (*tk_ConfigureWidget) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, Tcl_Size argc, const char **argv, void *widgRec, int flags); /* 29 */ void (*tk_ConfigureWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned int valueMask, XWindowChanges *valuePtr); /* 30 */ Tk_TextLayout (*tk_ComputeTextLayout) (Tk_Font font, const char *str, Tcl_Size numChars, int wrapLength, Tk_Justify justify, int flags, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr); /* 31 */ Tk_Window (*tk_CoordsToWindow) (int rootX, int rootY, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 32 */ unsigned long (*tk_CreateBinding) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, void *object, const char *eventStr, const char *script, int append); /* 33 */ Tk_BindingTable (*tk_CreateBindingTable) (Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 34 */ Tk_ErrorHandler (*tk_CreateErrorHandler) (Display *display, int errNum, int request, int minorCode, Tk_ErrorProc *errorProc, void *clientData); /* 35 */ void (*tk_CreateEventHandler) (Tk_Window token, unsigned long mask, Tk_EventProc *proc, void *clientData); /* 36 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
973 974 975 976 977 978 979 | void (*tk_FreeCursor) (Display *display, Tk_Cursor cursor); /* 70 */ void (*tk_FreeFont) (Tk_Font f); /* 71 */ void (*tk_FreeGC) (Display *display, GC gc); /* 72 */ void (*tk_FreeImage) (Tk_Image image); /* 73 */ void (*tk_FreeOptions) (const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, void *widgRec, Display *display, int needFlags); /* 74 */ void (*tk_FreePixmap) (Display *display, Pixmap pixmap); /* 75 */ void (*tk_FreeTextLayout) (Tk_TextLayout textLayout); /* 76 */ | | | | 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 | void (*tk_FreeCursor) (Display *display, Tk_Cursor cursor); /* 70 */ void (*tk_FreeFont) (Tk_Font f); /* 71 */ void (*tk_FreeGC) (Display *display, GC gc); /* 72 */ void (*tk_FreeImage) (Tk_Image image); /* 73 */ void (*tk_FreeOptions) (const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, void *widgRec, Display *display, int needFlags); /* 74 */ void (*tk_FreePixmap) (Display *display, Pixmap pixmap); /* 75 */ void (*tk_FreeTextLayout) (Tk_TextLayout textLayout); /* 76 */ TCL_DEPRECATED_API("function does nothing, call can be removed") void (*tk_FreeXId) (Display *display, XID xid); /* 77 */ GC (*tk_GCForColor) (XColor *colorPtr, Drawable drawable); /* 78 */ void (*tk_GeometryRequest) (Tk_Window tkwin, int reqWidth, int reqHeight); /* 79 */ Tk_3DBorder (*tk_Get3DBorder) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *colorName); /* 80 */ void (*tk_GetAllBindings) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, void *object); /* 81 */ int (*tk_GetAnchor) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *str, Tk_Anchor *anchorPtr); /* 82 */ const char * (*tk_GetAtomName) (Tk_Window tkwin, Atom atom); /* 83 */ const char * (*tk_GetBinding) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, void *object, const char *eventStr); /* 84 */ Pixmap (*tk_GetBitmap) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *str); /* 85 */ Pixmap (*tk_GetBitmapFromData) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const void *source, int width, int height); /* 86 */ int (*tk_GetCapStyle) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *str, int *capPtr); /* 87 */ XColor * (*tk_GetColor) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *name); /* 88 */ XColor * (*tk_GetColorByValue) (Tk_Window tkwin, XColor *colorPtr); /* 89 */ Colormap (*tk_GetColormap) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *str); /* 90 */ Tk_Cursor (*tk_GetCursor) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *str); /* 91 */ Tk_Cursor (*tk_GetCursorFromData) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *source, const char *mask, int width, int height, int xHot, int yHot, Tk_Uid fg, Tk_Uid bg); /* 92 */ Tk_Font (*tk_GetFont) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *str); /* 93 */ Tk_Font (*tk_GetFontFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 94 */ void (*tk_GetFontMetrics) (Tk_Font font, Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr); /* 95 */ GC (*tk_GetGC) (Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned long valueMask, XGCValues *valuePtr); /* 96 */ Tk_Image (*tk_GetImage) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *name, Tk_ImageChangedProc *changeProc, void *clientData); /* 97 */ void * (*tk_GetImageModelData) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name, const Tk_ImageType **typePtrPtr); /* 98 */ Tk_ItemType * (*tk_GetItemTypes) (void); /* 99 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 | Tk_Uid (*tk_GetUid) (const char *str); /* 111 */ Visual * (*tk_GetVisual) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *str, int *depthPtr, Colormap *colormapPtr); /* 112 */ void (*tk_GetVRootGeometry) (Tk_Window tkwin, int *xPtr, int *yPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr); /* 113 */ int (*tk_Grab) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, int grabGlobal); /* 114 */ void (*tk_HandleEvent) (XEvent *eventPtr); /* 115 */ Tk_Window (*tk_IdToWindow) (Display *display, Window window); /* 116 */ void (*tk_ImageChanged) (Tk_ImageModel model, int x, int y, int width, int height, int imageWidth, int imageHeight); /* 117 */ | | | 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 | Tk_Uid (*tk_GetUid) (const char *str); /* 111 */ Visual * (*tk_GetVisual) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *str, int *depthPtr, Colormap *colormapPtr); /* 112 */ void (*tk_GetVRootGeometry) (Tk_Window tkwin, int *xPtr, int *yPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr); /* 113 */ int (*tk_Grab) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, int grabGlobal); /* 114 */ void (*tk_HandleEvent) (XEvent *eventPtr); /* 115 */ Tk_Window (*tk_IdToWindow) (Display *display, Window window); /* 116 */ void (*tk_ImageChanged) (Tk_ImageModel model, int x, int y, int width, int height, int imageWidth, int imageHeight); /* 117 */ int (*tk_Init) (Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 118 */ Atom (*tk_InternAtom) (Tk_Window tkwin, const char *name); /* 119 */ int (*tk_IntersectTextLayout) (Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y, int width, int height); /* 120 */ void (*tk_MaintainGeometry) (Tk_Window window, Tk_Window container, int x, int y, int width, int height); /* 121 */ Tk_Window (*tk_MainWindow) (Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 122 */ void (*tk_MakeWindowExist) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 123 */ void (*tk_ManageGeometry) (Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_GeomMgr *mgrPtr, void *clientData); /* 124 */ void (*tk_MapWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 125 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 | const char * (*tk_NameOfImage) (Tk_ImageModel model); /* 137 */ const char * (*tk_NameOfJoinStyle) (int join); /* 138 */ const char * (*tk_NameOfJustify) (Tk_Justify justify); /* 139 */ const char * (*tk_NameOfRelief) (int relief); /* 140 */ Tk_Window (*tk_NameToWindow) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *pathName, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 141 */ void (*tk_OwnSelection) (Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Tk_LostSelProc *proc, void *clientData); /* 142 */ int (*tk_ParseArgv) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, int *argcPtr, const char **argv, const Tk_ArgvInfo *argTable, int flags); /* 143 */ | | | | | | | 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 | const char * (*tk_NameOfImage) (Tk_ImageModel model); /* 137 */ const char * (*tk_NameOfJoinStyle) (int join); /* 138 */ const char * (*tk_NameOfJustify) (Tk_Justify justify); /* 139 */ const char * (*tk_NameOfRelief) (int relief); /* 140 */ Tk_Window (*tk_NameToWindow) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *pathName, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 141 */ void (*tk_OwnSelection) (Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Tk_LostSelProc *proc, void *clientData); /* 142 */ int (*tk_ParseArgv) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, int *argcPtr, const char **argv, const Tk_ArgvInfo *argTable, int flags); /* 143 */ TCL_DEPRECATED_API("function signature changed") void (*tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height); /* 144 */ TCL_DEPRECATED_API("function signature changed") void (*tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int zoomX, int zoomY, int subsampleX, int subsampleY); /* 145 */ int (*tk_PhotoGetImage) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr); /* 146 */ void (*tk_PhotoBlank) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle); /* 147 */ TCL_DEPRECATED_API("function signature changed") void (*tk_PhotoExpand_Panic) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height); /* 148 */ void (*tk_PhotoGetSize) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr); /* 149 */ TCL_DEPRECATED_API("function signature changed") void (*tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height); /* 150 */ int (*tk_PointToChar) (Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y); /* 151 */ int (*tk_PostscriptFontName) (Tk_Font tkfont, Tcl_DString *dsPtr); /* 152 */ void (*tk_PreserveColormap) (Display *display, Colormap colormap); /* 153 */ void (*tk_QueueWindowEvent) (XEvent *eventPtr, Tcl_QueuePosition position); /* 154 */ void (*tk_RedrawImage) (Tk_Image image, int imageX, int imageY, int width, int height, Drawable drawable, int drawableX, int drawableY); /* 155 */ void (*tk_ResizeWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin, int width, int height); /* 156 */ int (*tk_RestackWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin, int aboveBelow, Tk_Window other); /* 157 */ Tk_RestrictProc * (*tk_RestrictEvents) (Tk_RestrictProc *proc, void *arg, void **prevArgPtr); /* 158 */ int (*tk_SafeInit) (Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 159 */ const char * (*tk_SetAppName) (Tk_Window tkwin, const char *name); /* 160 */ void (*tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_3DBorder border); /* 161 */ void (*tk_SetClass) (Tk_Window tkwin, const char *className); /* 162 */ void (*tk_SetGrid) (Tk_Window tkwin, int reqWidth, int reqHeight, int gridWidth, int gridHeight); /* 163 */ void (*tk_SetInternalBorder) (Tk_Window tkwin, int width); /* 164 */ void (*tk_SetWindowBackground) (Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned long pixel); /* 165 */ void (*tk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap) (Tk_Window tkwin, Pixmap pixmap); /* 166 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 | Tcl_Obj * (*tk_GetOptionValue) (Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionTable, Tcl_Obj *namePtr, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 205 */ int (*tk_GetJustifyFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Tk_Justify *justifyPtr); /* 206 */ int (*tk_GetMMFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, double *doublePtr); /* 207 */ int (*tk_GetPixelsFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *intPtr); /* 208 */ int (*tk_GetReliefFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *resultPtr); /* 209 */ int (*tk_GetScrollInfoObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], double *dblPtr, int *intPtr); /* 210 */ int (*tk_InitOptions) (Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionToken, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 211 */ | | | | 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 | Tcl_Obj * (*tk_GetOptionValue) (Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionTable, Tcl_Obj *namePtr, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 205 */ int (*tk_GetJustifyFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Tk_Justify *justifyPtr); /* 206 */ int (*tk_GetMMFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, double *doublePtr); /* 207 */ int (*tk_GetPixelsFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *intPtr); /* 208 */ int (*tk_GetReliefFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *resultPtr); /* 209 */ int (*tk_GetScrollInfoObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], double *dblPtr, int *intPtr); /* 210 */ int (*tk_InitOptions) (Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionToken, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 211 */ TCL_DEPRECATED_API("Don't use this function in a stub-enabled extension") void (*tk_MainEx) (Tcl_Size argc, char **argv, Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc, Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 212 */ void (*tk_RestoreSavedOptions) (Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr); /* 213 */ int (*tk_SetOptions) (Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionTable, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr, int *maskPtr); /* 214 */ void (*tk_InitConsoleChannels) (Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 215 */ int (*tk_CreateConsoleWindow) (Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 216 */ void (*tk_CreateSmoothMethod) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const Tk_SmoothMethod *method); /* 217 */ void (*reserved218)(void); void (*reserved219)(void); int (*tk_GetDash) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *value, Tk_Dash *dash); /* 220 */ void (*tk_CreateOutline) (Tk_Outline *outline); /* 221 */ void (*tk_DeleteOutline) (Display *display, Tk_Outline *outline); /* 222 */ int (*tk_ConfigOutlineGC) (XGCValues *gcValues, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *item, Tk_Outline *outline); /* 223 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 | void (*tk_CreateClientMessageHandler) (Tk_ClientMessageProc *proc); /* 239 */ void (*tk_DeleteClientMessageHandler) (Tk_ClientMessageProc *proc); /* 240 */ Tk_Window (*tk_CreateAnonymousWindow) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window parent, const char *screenName); /* 241 */ void (*tk_SetClassProcs) (Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ClassProcs *procs, void *instanceData); /* 242 */ void (*tk_SetInternalBorderEx) (Tk_Window tkwin, int left, int right, int top, int bottom); /* 243 */ void (*tk_SetMinimumRequestSize) (Tk_Window tkwin, int minWidth, int minHeight); /* 244 */ void (*tk_SetCaretPos) (Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int height); /* 245 */ | | | | | | | > > > > | 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 | void (*tk_CreateClientMessageHandler) (Tk_ClientMessageProc *proc); /* 239 */ void (*tk_DeleteClientMessageHandler) (Tk_ClientMessageProc *proc); /* 240 */ Tk_Window (*tk_CreateAnonymousWindow) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window parent, const char *screenName); /* 241 */ void (*tk_SetClassProcs) (Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ClassProcs *procs, void *instanceData); /* 242 */ void (*tk_SetInternalBorderEx) (Tk_Window tkwin, int left, int right, int top, int bottom); /* 243 */ void (*tk_SetMinimumRequestSize) (Tk_Window tkwin, int minWidth, int minHeight); /* 244 */ void (*tk_SetCaretPos) (Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int height); /* 245 */ TCL_DEPRECATED_API("function signature changed") void (*tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int compRule); /* 246 */ TCL_DEPRECATED_API("function signature changed") void (*tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int zoomX, int zoomY, int subsampleX, int subsampleY, int compRule); /* 247 */ int (*tk_CollapseMotionEvents) (Display *display, int collapse); /* 248 */ Tk_StyleEngine (*tk_RegisterStyleEngine) (const char *name, Tk_StyleEngine parent); /* 249 */ Tk_StyleEngine (*tk_GetStyleEngine) (const char *name); /* 250 */ int (*tk_RegisterStyledElement) (Tk_StyleEngine engine, Tk_ElementSpec *templatePtr); /* 251 */ int (*tk_GetElementId) (const char *name); /* 252 */ Tk_Style (*tk_CreateStyle) (const char *name, Tk_StyleEngine engine, void *clientData); /* 253 */ Tk_Style (*tk_GetStyle) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name); /* 254 */ void (*tk_FreeStyle) (Tk_Style style); /* 255 */ const char * (*tk_NameOfStyle) (Tk_Style style); /* 256 */ Tk_Style (*tk_AllocStyleFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 257 */ Tk_Style (*tk_GetStyleFromObj) (Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 258 */ void (*tk_FreeStyleFromObj) (Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 259 */ Tk_StyledElement (*tk_GetStyledElement) (Tk_Style style, Tcl_Size elementId, Tk_OptionTable optionTable); /* 260 */ void (*tk_GetElementSize) (Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element, void *recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, int width, int height, int inner, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr); /* 261 */ void (*tk_GetElementBox) (Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element, void *recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int width, int height, int inner, int *xPtr, int *yPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr); /* 262 */ int (*tk_GetElementBorderWidth) (Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element, void *recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 263 */ void (*tk_DrawElement) (Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element, void *recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, int x, int y, int width, int height, int state); /* 264 */ int (*tk_PhotoExpand) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height); /* 265 */ int (*tk_PhotoPutBlock) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int compRule); /* 266 */ int (*tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int zoomX, int zoomY, int subsampleX, int subsampleY, int compRule); /* 267 */ int (*tk_PhotoSetSize) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height); /* 268 */ long (*tk_GetUserInactiveTime) (Display *dpy); /* 269 */ void (*tk_ResetUserInactiveTime) (Display *dpy); /* 270 */ Tcl_Interp * (*tk_Interp) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 271 */ void (*tk_CreateOldImageType) (const Tk_ImageType *typePtr); /* 272 */ void (*tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat) (const Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr); /* 273 */ int (*tk_AlwaysShowSelection) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 274 */ unsigned (*tk_GetButtonMask) (unsigned button); /* 275 */ int (*tk_GetDoublePixelsFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, double *doublePtr); /* 276 */ Tcl_Obj * (*tk_NewWindowObj) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 277 */ void (*tk_SendVirtualEvent) (Tk_Window tkwin, const char *eventName, Tcl_Obj *detail); /* 278 */ Tcl_Obj * (*tk_FontGetDescription) (Tk_Font tkfont); /* 279 */ void (*tk_CreatePhotoImageFormatVersion3) (const Tk_PhotoImageFormatVersion3 *formatPtr); /* 280 */ void (*tk_DrawHighlightBorder) (Tk_Window tkwin, GC fgGC, GC bgGC, int highlightWidth, Drawable drawable); /* 281 */ void (*tk_SetMainMenubar) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *menuName); /* 282 */ void (*tk_SetWindowMenubar) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *oldMenuName, const char *menuName); /* 283 */ void (*tk_ClipDrawableToRect) (Display *display, Drawable d, int x, int y, int width, int height); /* 284 */ Tcl_Obj * (*tk_GetSystemDefault) (Tk_Window tkwin, const char *dbName, const char *className); /* 285 */ int (*tk_UseWindow) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *string); /* 286 */ void (*tk_MakeContainer) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 287 */ Tk_Window (*tk_GetOtherWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 288 */ void (*tk_Get3DBorderColors) (Tk_3DBorder border, XColor *bgColorPtr, XColor *darkColorPtr, XColor *lightColorPtr); /* 289 */ Window (*tk_MakeWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin, Window parent); /* 290 */ void (*tk_UnderlineCharsInContext) (Display *display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_Font tkfont, const char *string, Tcl_Size numBytes, int x, int y, Tcl_Size firstByte, Tcl_Size lastByte); /* 291 */ void (*tk_DrawCharsInContext) (Display *display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_Font tkfont, const char *string, Tcl_Size numBytes, Tcl_Size rangeStart, Tcl_Size rangeLength, int x, int y); /* 292 */ int (*tk_MeasureCharsInContext) (Tk_Font tkfont, const char *string, Tcl_Size numBytes, Tcl_Size rangeStart, Tcl_Size rangeLength, int maxPixels, int flags, int *lengthPtr); /* 293 */ void (*tkUnusedStubEntry) (void); /* 294 */ } TkStubs; extern const TkStubs *tkStubsPtr; #ifdef __cplusplus } #endif |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 1360 1361 | (tkStubsPtr->tk_FreeImage) /* 73 */ #define Tk_FreeOptions \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_FreeOptions) /* 74 */ #define Tk_FreePixmap \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_FreePixmap) /* 75 */ #define Tk_FreeTextLayout \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_FreeTextLayout) /* 76 */ | > | | 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 1422 1423 1424 1425 1426 1427 1428 1429 | (tkStubsPtr->tk_FreeImage) /* 73 */ #define Tk_FreeOptions \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_FreeOptions) /* 74 */ #define Tk_FreePixmap \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_FreePixmap) /* 75 */ #define Tk_FreeTextLayout \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_FreeTextLayout) /* 76 */ #define Tk_FreeXId \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_FreeXId) /* 77 */ #define Tk_GCForColor \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GCForColor) /* 78 */ #define Tk_GeometryRequest \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GeometryRequest) /* 79 */ #define Tk_Get3DBorder \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_Get3DBorder) /* 80 */ #define Tk_GetAllBindings \ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1436 1437 1438 1439 1440 1441 1442 | (tkStubsPtr->tk_Grab) /* 114 */ #define Tk_HandleEvent \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_HandleEvent) /* 115 */ #define Tk_IdToWindow \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_IdToWindow) /* 116 */ #define Tk_ImageChanged \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_ImageChanged) /* 117 */ | > | | 1496 1497 1498 1499 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 1510 1511 | (tkStubsPtr->tk_Grab) /* 114 */ #define Tk_HandleEvent \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_HandleEvent) /* 115 */ #define Tk_IdToWindow \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_IdToWindow) /* 116 */ #define Tk_ImageChanged \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_ImageChanged) /* 117 */ #define Tk_Init \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_Init) /* 118 */ #define Tk_InternAtom \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_InternAtom) /* 119 */ #define Tk_IntersectTextLayout \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_IntersectTextLayout) /* 120 */ #define Tk_MaintainGeometry \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_MaintainGeometry) /* 121 */ #define Tk_MainWindow \ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 1493 | (tkStubsPtr->tk_NameOfRelief) /* 140 */ #define Tk_NameToWindow \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_NameToWindow) /* 141 */ #define Tk_OwnSelection \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_OwnSelection) /* 142 */ #define Tk_ParseArgv \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_ParseArgv) /* 143 */ | > | > | > | > | > | | 1548 1549 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 1592 1593 | (tkStubsPtr->tk_NameOfRelief) /* 140 */ #define Tk_NameToWindow \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_NameToWindow) /* 141 */ #define Tk_OwnSelection \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_OwnSelection) /* 142 */ #define Tk_ParseArgv \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_ParseArgv) /* 143 */ #define Tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite) /* 144 */ #define Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite) /* 145 */ #define Tk_PhotoGetImage \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoGetImage) /* 146 */ #define Tk_PhotoBlank \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoBlank) /* 147 */ #define Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoExpand_Panic) /* 148 */ #define Tk_PhotoGetSize \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoGetSize) /* 149 */ #define Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic) /* 150 */ #define Tk_PointToChar \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PointToChar) /* 151 */ #define Tk_PostscriptFontName \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PostscriptFontName) /* 152 */ #define Tk_PreserveColormap \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PreserveColormap) /* 153 */ #define Tk_QueueWindowEvent \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_QueueWindowEvent) /* 154 */ #define Tk_RedrawImage \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_RedrawImage) /* 155 */ #define Tk_ResizeWindow \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_ResizeWindow) /* 156 */ #define Tk_RestackWindow \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_RestackWindow) /* 157 */ #define Tk_RestrictEvents \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_RestrictEvents) /* 158 */ #define Tk_SafeInit \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_SafeInit) /* 159 */ #define Tk_SetAppName \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_SetAppName) /* 160 */ #define Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder) /* 161 */ #define Tk_SetClass \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_SetClass) /* 162 */ #define Tk_SetGrid \ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 1623 1624 | (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetPixelsFromObj) /* 208 */ #define Tk_GetReliefFromObj \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetReliefFromObj) /* 209 */ #define Tk_GetScrollInfoObj \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetScrollInfoObj) /* 210 */ #define Tk_InitOptions \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_InitOptions) /* 211 */ | > | > | | 1684 1685 1686 1687 1688 1689 1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 1697 1698 1699 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 1705 1706 1707 | (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetPixelsFromObj) /* 208 */ #define Tk_GetReliefFromObj \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetReliefFromObj) /* 209 */ #define Tk_GetScrollInfoObj \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetScrollInfoObj) /* 210 */ #define Tk_InitOptions \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_InitOptions) /* 211 */ #define Tk_MainEx \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_MainEx) /* 212 */ #define Tk_RestoreSavedOptions \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_RestoreSavedOptions) /* 213 */ #define Tk_SetOptions \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_SetOptions) /* 214 */ #define Tk_InitConsoleChannels \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_InitConsoleChannels) /* 215 */ #define Tk_CreateConsoleWindow \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CreateConsoleWindow) /* 216 */ #define Tk_CreateSmoothMethod \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CreateSmoothMethod) /* 217 */ /* Slot 218 is reserved */ /* Slot 219 is reserved */ #define Tk_GetDash \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetDash) /* 220 */ #define Tk_CreateOutline \ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1682 1683 1684 1685 1686 1687 1688 | (tkStubsPtr->tk_SetClassProcs) /* 242 */ #define Tk_SetInternalBorderEx \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_SetInternalBorderEx) /* 243 */ #define Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_SetMinimumRequestSize) /* 244 */ #define Tk_SetCaretPos \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_SetCaretPos) /* 245 */ | > | > | > | > | | 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765 1766 1767 1768 1769 1770 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 1790 1791 | (tkStubsPtr->tk_SetClassProcs) /* 242 */ #define Tk_SetInternalBorderEx \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_SetInternalBorderEx) /* 243 */ #define Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_SetMinimumRequestSize) /* 244 */ #define Tk_SetCaretPos \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_SetCaretPos) /* 245 */ #define Tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic) /* 246 */ #define Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic) /* 247 */ #define Tk_CollapseMotionEvents \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CollapseMotionEvents) /* 248 */ #define Tk_RegisterStyleEngine \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_RegisterStyleEngine) /* 249 */ #define Tk_GetStyleEngine \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetStyleEngine) /* 250 */ #define Tk_RegisterStyledElement \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_RegisterStyledElement) /* 251 */ #define Tk_GetElementId \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetElementId) /* 252 */ #define Tk_CreateStyle \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CreateStyle) /* 253 */ #define Tk_GetStyle \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetStyle) /* 254 */ #define Tk_FreeStyle \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_FreeStyle) /* 255 */ #define Tk_NameOfStyle \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_NameOfStyle) /* 256 */ #define Tk_AllocStyleFromObj \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_AllocStyleFromObj) /* 257 */ #define Tk_GetStyleFromObj \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetStyleFromObj) /* 258 */ #define Tk_FreeStyleFromObj \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_FreeStyleFromObj) /* 259 */ #define Tk_GetStyledElement \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetStyledElement) /* 260 */ #define Tk_GetElementSize \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetElementSize) /* 261 */ #define Tk_GetElementBox \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetElementBox) /* 262 */ #define Tk_GetElementBorderWidth \ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 | (tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoSetSize) /* 268 */ #define Tk_GetUserInactiveTime \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetUserInactiveTime) /* 269 */ #define Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_ResetUserInactiveTime) /* 270 */ #define Tk_Interp \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_Interp) /* 271 */ | > | > | | 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 1816 1817 1818 1819 | (tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoSetSize) /* 268 */ #define Tk_GetUserInactiveTime \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetUserInactiveTime) /* 269 */ #define Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_ResetUserInactiveTime) /* 270 */ #define Tk_Interp \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_Interp) /* 271 */ #define Tk_CreateOldImageType \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CreateOldImageType) /* 272 */ #define Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat) /* 273 */ #define Tk_AlwaysShowSelection \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_AlwaysShowSelection) /* 274 */ #define Tk_GetButtonMask \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetButtonMask) /* 275 */ #define Tk_GetDoublePixelsFromObj \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetDoublePixelsFromObj) /* 276 */ #define Tk_NewWindowObj \ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1766 1767 1768 1769 1770 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 1783 | (tkStubsPtr->tk_MakeContainer) /* 287 */ #define Tk_GetOtherWindow \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetOtherWindow) /* 288 */ #define Tk_Get3DBorderColors \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_Get3DBorderColors) /* 289 */ #define Tk_MakeWindow \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_MakeWindow) /* 290 */ #endif /* defined(USE_TK_STUBS) */ /* !END!: Do not edit above this line. */ #define Tk_GetImageMasterData Tk_GetImageModelData #ifndef MAC_OSX_TK # undef Tk_ClipDrawableToRect #endif | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > < < | < < | > > | | | | | < < | > > | 1840 1841 1842 1843 1844 1845 1846 1847 1848 1849 1850 1851 1852 1853 1854 1855 1856 1857 1858 1859 1860 1861 1862 1863 1864 1865 1866 1867 1868 1869 1870 1871 1872 1873 1874 1875 1876 1877 1878 1879 1880 1881 1882 1883 1884 1885 1886 1887 1888 1889 1890 1891 1892 1893 1894 1895 1896 1897 1898 1899 1900 | (tkStubsPtr->tk_MakeContainer) /* 287 */ #define Tk_GetOtherWindow \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetOtherWindow) /* 288 */ #define Tk_Get3DBorderColors \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_Get3DBorderColors) /* 289 */ #define Tk_MakeWindow \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_MakeWindow) /* 290 */ #define Tk_UnderlineCharsInContext \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_UnderlineCharsInContext) /* 291 */ #define Tk_DrawCharsInContext \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_DrawCharsInContext) /* 292 */ #define Tk_MeasureCharsInContext \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_MeasureCharsInContext) /* 293 */ #define TkUnusedStubEntry \ (tkStubsPtr->tkUnusedStubEntry) /* 294 */ #endif /* defined(USE_TK_STUBS) */ /* !END!: Do not edit above this line. */ /* Functions that don't belong in the stub table */ #undef Tk_MainEx #undef Tk_Init #undef Tk_SafeInit #undef Tk_CreateConsoleWindow #undef Tk_FreeXId #define Tk_FreeXId(display,xid) #undef Tk_GetStyleFromObj #undef Tk_FreeStyleFromObj #define Tk_GetStyleFromObj(obj) Tk_AllocStyleFromObj(NULL, obj) #define Tk_FreeStyleFromObj(obj) /* no-op */ #define Tk_GetImageMasterData Tk_GetImageModelData #ifndef MAC_OSX_TK # undef Tk_ClipDrawableToRect #endif #if defined(_WIN32) && defined(UNICODE) # define Tk_MainEx Tk_MainExW EXTERN void Tk_MainExW(Tcl_Size argc, wchar_t **argv, Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc, Tcl_Interp *interp); #endif #if defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) || TCL_MAJOR_VERSION > 8 #undef Tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite #undef Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite #undef Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic #undef Tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic #undef Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic #undef Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic #undef Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat #endif /* TK_NO_DEPRECATED */ #undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS #define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT #undef TkUnusedStubEntry #endif /* _TKDECLS */ |
Changes to generic/tkEntry.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
70 71 72 73 74 75 76 | DEF_ENTRY_BG_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, normalBorder), 0, DEF_ENTRY_BG_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-borderwidth", 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-background", 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", | | | 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 | DEF_ENTRY_BG_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, normalBorder), 0, DEF_ENTRY_BG_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-borderwidth", 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-background", 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", DEF_ENTRY_BORDER_WIDTH, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, borderWidth), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor", DEF_ENTRY_CURSOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, cursor), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-disabledbackground", "disabledBackground", "DisabledBackground", DEF_ENTRY_DISABLED_BG_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, disabledBorder), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, DEF_ENTRY_DISABLED_BG_MONO, 0}, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
96 97 98 99 100 101 102 | DEF_ENTRY_FG, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, fgColorPtr), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground", "HighlightBackground", DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT_BG, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, highlightBgColorPtr), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor", DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, highlightColorPtr), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness", | | | | | | | 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 | DEF_ENTRY_FG, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, fgColorPtr), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground", "HighlightBackground", DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT_BG, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, highlightBgColorPtr), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor", DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, highlightColorPtr), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness", "HighlightThickness", DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, highlightWidth), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-insertbackground", "insertBackground", "Foreground", DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BG, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, insertBorder), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-insertborderwidth", "insertBorderWidth", "BorderWidth", DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BD_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, insertBorderWidth), 0, DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BD_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_INT, "-insertofftime", "insertOffTime", "OffTime", DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_OFF_TIME, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, insertOffTime), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_INT, "-insertontime", "insertOnTime", "OnTime", DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_ON_TIME, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, insertOnTime), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-insertwidth", "insertWidth", "InsertWidth", DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_WIDTH, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, insertWidth), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-invalidcommand", "invalidCommand", "InvalidCommand", DEF_ENTRY_INVALIDCMD, offsetof(Entry, invalidCmdObj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-invcmd", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-invalidcommand", 0}, {TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify", DEF_ENTRY_JUSTIFY, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, justify), TK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR, 0, 0}, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
134 135 136 137 138 139 140 | DEF_ENTRY_READONLY_BG_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief", DEF_ENTRY_RELIEF, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, relief), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-selectbackground", "selectBackground", "Foreground", DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, selBorder), 0, DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-selectborderwidth", "selectBorderWidth", | | | | 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 | DEF_ENTRY_READONLY_BG_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief", DEF_ENTRY_RELIEF, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, relief), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-selectbackground", "selectBackground", "Foreground", DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, selBorder), 0, DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-selectborderwidth", "selectBorderWidth", "BorderWidth", DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_BD_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, selBorderWidth), 0, DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_BD_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-selectforeground", "selectForeground", "Background", DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_FG_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, selFgColorPtr), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_FG_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-show", "show", "Show", DEF_ENTRY_SHOW, offsetof(Entry, showCharObj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-state", "state", "State", |
︙ | ︙ | |||
195 196 197 198 199 200 201 | DEF_ENTRY_BG_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, normalBorder), 0, DEF_ENTRY_BG_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-borderwidth", 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-background", 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", | | | 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 | DEF_ENTRY_BG_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, normalBorder), 0, DEF_ENTRY_BG_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-borderwidth", 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-background", 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", DEF_ENTRY_BORDER_WIDTH, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, borderWidth), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-buttonbackground", "buttonBackground", "Background", DEF_BUTTON_BG_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Spinbox, buttonBorder), 0, DEF_BUTTON_BG_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-buttoncursor", "buttonCursor", "Cursor", DEF_BUTTON_CURSOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Spinbox, bCursor), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-buttondownrelief", "buttonDownRelief", "Relief", |
︙ | ︙ | |||
239 240 241 242 243 244 245 | DEF_SPINBOX_FROM, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Spinbox, fromValue), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground", "HighlightBackground", DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT_BG, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, highlightBgColorPtr), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor", DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, highlightColorPtr), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness", | | | | | | | 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 | DEF_SPINBOX_FROM, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Spinbox, fromValue), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground", "HighlightBackground", DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT_BG, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, highlightBgColorPtr), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor", DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, highlightColorPtr), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness", "HighlightThickness", DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, highlightWidth), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-increment", "increment", "Increment", DEF_SPINBOX_INCREMENT, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Spinbox, increment), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-insertbackground", "insertBackground", "Foreground", DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BG, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, insertBorder), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-insertborderwidth", "insertBorderWidth", "BorderWidth", DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BD_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, insertBorderWidth), 0, DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BD_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_INT, "-insertofftime", "insertOffTime", "OffTime", DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_OFF_TIME, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, insertOffTime), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_INT, "-insertontime", "insertOnTime", "OnTime", DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_ON_TIME, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, insertOnTime), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-insertwidth", "insertWidth", "InsertWidth", DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_WIDTH, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, insertWidth), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-invalidcommand", "invalidCommand", "InvalidCommand", DEF_ENTRY_INVALIDCMD, offsetof(Entry, invalidCmdObj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-invcmd", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-invalidcommand", 0}, {TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify", DEF_ENTRY_JUSTIFY, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, justify), TK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR, 0, 0}, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
284 285 286 287 288 289 290 | {TK_OPTION_INT, "-repeatinterval", "repeatInterval", "RepeatInterval", DEF_SPINBOX_REPEAT_INTERVAL, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Spinbox, repeatInterval), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-selectbackground", "selectBackground", "Foreground", DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, selBorder), 0, DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-selectborderwidth", "selectBorderWidth", | | | | 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 | {TK_OPTION_INT, "-repeatinterval", "repeatInterval", "RepeatInterval", DEF_SPINBOX_REPEAT_INTERVAL, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Spinbox, repeatInterval), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-selectbackground", "selectBackground", "Foreground", DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, selBorder), 0, DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-selectborderwidth", "selectBorderWidth", "BorderWidth", DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_BD_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, selBorderWidth), 0, DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_BD_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-selectforeground", "selectForeground", "Background", DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_FG_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, selFgColorPtr), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_FG_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-state", "state", "State", DEF_ENTRY_STATE, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Entry, state), 0, stateStrings, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus", |
︙ | ︙ | |||
434 435 436 437 438 439 440 | const char *newValue); static void EntryVisibleRange(Entry *entryPtr, double *firstPtr, double *lastPtr); static Tcl_ObjCmdProc EntryWidgetObjCmd; static void EntryWorldChanged(void *instanceData); static int GetEntryIndex(Tcl_Interp *interp, Entry *entryPtr, Tcl_Obj *indexObj, Tcl_Size *indexPtr); | | | 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 | const char *newValue); static void EntryVisibleRange(Entry *entryPtr, double *firstPtr, double *lastPtr); static Tcl_ObjCmdProc EntryWidgetObjCmd; static void EntryWorldChanged(void *instanceData); static int GetEntryIndex(Tcl_Interp *interp, Entry *entryPtr, Tcl_Obj *indexObj, Tcl_Size *indexPtr); static int InsertChars(Entry *entryPtr, Tcl_Size index, const char *string); /* * These forward declarations are the spinbox specific ones: */ static Tcl_ObjCmdProc SpinboxWidgetObjCmd; static int GetSpinboxElement(Spinbox *sbPtr, int x, int y); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
746 747 748 749 750 751 752 | goto error; } if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[2], &index) != TCL_OK) { goto error; } if (entryPtr->state == STATE_NORMAL) { | | | 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 | goto error; } if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[2], &index) != TCL_OK) { goto error; } if (entryPtr->state == STATE_NORMAL) { code = InsertChars(entryPtr, index, Tcl_GetString(objv[3])); if (code != TCL_OK) { goto error; } } break; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 | Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *)memPtr; /* * Free up all the stuff that requires special handling, then let * Tk_FreeOptions handle all the standard option-related stuff. */ | | | | 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 | Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *)memPtr; /* * Free up all the stuff that requires special handling, then let * Tk_FreeOptions handle all the standard option-related stuff. */ ckfree((char *)entryPtr->string); if (entryPtr->textVarNameObj != NULL) { Tcl_UntraceVar2(entryPtr->interp, Tcl_GetString(entryPtr->textVarNameObj), NULL, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS, EntryTextVarProc, entryPtr); entryPtr->flags &= ~ENTRY_VAR_TRACED; } if (entryPtr->textGC != NULL) { Tk_FreeGC(entryPtr->display, entryPtr->textGC); } if (entryPtr->selTextGC != NULL) { Tk_FreeGC(entryPtr->display, entryPtr->selTextGC); } Tcl_DeleteTimerHandler(entryPtr->insertBlinkHandler); if (entryPtr->displayString != entryPtr->string) { ckfree((char *)entryPtr->displayString); } if (entryPtr->type == TK_SPINBOX) { Spinbox *sbPtr = (Spinbox *) entryPtr; if (sbPtr->listObj != NULL) { Tcl_DecrRefCount(sbPtr->listObj); sbPtr->listObj = NULL; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 | int error; int oldExport = 0; int valuesChanged = 0; double oldFrom = 0.0; double oldTo = 0.0; int code; size_t formatSpace = TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE; | < < | 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 | int error; int oldExport = 0; int valuesChanged = 0; double oldFrom = 0.0; double oldTo = 0.0; int code; size_t formatSpace = TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE; /* * Eliminate any existing trace on a variable monitored by the entry. */ if ((entryPtr->textVarNameObj != NULL) && (entryPtr->flags & ENTRY_VAR_TRACED)) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 | (entryPtr->readonlyBorder != NULL)) { border = entryPtr->readonlyBorder; } else { border = entryPtr->normalBorder; } Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(entryPtr->tkwin, border); | < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < | 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 | (entryPtr->readonlyBorder != NULL)) { border = entryPtr->readonlyBorder; } else { border = entryPtr->normalBorder; } Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(entryPtr->tkwin, border); if (entryPtr->borderWidth < 0) { entryPtr->borderWidth = 0; } if (entryPtr->highlightWidth < 0) { entryPtr->highlightWidth = 0; } if (entryPtr->insertBorderWidth < 0) { entryPtr->insertBorderWidth = 0; } if (entryPtr->insertWidth < 0) { entryPtr->insertWidth = 0; } if (entryPtr->selBorderWidth < 0) { entryPtr->selBorderWidth = 0; } if (entryPtr->type == TK_SPINBOX) { if (sbPtr->fromValue > sbPtr->toValue) { /* * Swap -from and -to values. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 1345 | /* * Recompute the window's geometry and arrange for it to be * redisplayed. */ Tk_SetInternalBorder(entryPtr->tkwin, | | | | | 1317 1318 1319 1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 | /* * Recompute the window's geometry and arrange for it to be * redisplayed. */ Tk_SetInternalBorder(entryPtr->tkwin, entryPtr->borderWidth + entryPtr->highlightWidth); entryPtr->inset = entryPtr->highlightWidth + entryPtr->borderWidth + XPAD; break; } if (!error) { Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions); } /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1646 1647 1648 1649 1650 1651 1652 | Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *)clientData; Tk_Window tkwin = entryPtr->tkwin; int baseY, selStartX, selEndX, cursorX; int showSelection, xBound; Tk_FontMetrics fm; Pixmap pixmap; Tk_3DBorder border; | < | 1624 1625 1626 1627 1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 | Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *)clientData; Tk_Window tkwin = entryPtr->tkwin; int baseY, selStartX, selEndX, cursorX; int showSelection, xBound; Tk_FontMetrics fm; Pixmap pixmap; Tk_3DBorder border; entryPtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_PENDING; if ((entryPtr->flags & ENTRY_DELETED) || !Tk_IsMapped(tkwin)) { return; } Tk_GetFontMetrics(entryPtr->tkfont, &fm); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 1731 1732 | (entryPtr->readonlyBorder != NULL)) { border = entryPtr->readonlyBorder; } else { border = entryPtr->normalBorder; } Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, border, 0, 0, Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT); | < | | | | | | < | | | < | | | | 1703 1704 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765 1766 1767 1768 1769 1770 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 | (entryPtr->readonlyBorder != NULL)) { border = entryPtr->readonlyBorder; } else { border = entryPtr->normalBorder; } Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, border, 0, 0, Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT); if (showSelection && (entryPtr->state != STATE_DISABLED) && (entryPtr->selectLast > entryPtr->leftIndex)) { if (entryPtr->selectFirst <= entryPtr->leftIndex) { selStartX = entryPtr->leftX; } else { Tk_CharBbox(entryPtr->textLayout, entryPtr->selectFirst, &selStartX, NULL, NULL, NULL); selStartX += entryPtr->layoutX; } if ((selStartX - entryPtr->selBorderWidth) < xBound) { Tk_CharBbox(entryPtr->textLayout, entryPtr->selectLast, &selEndX, NULL, NULL, NULL); selEndX += entryPtr->layoutX; Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, entryPtr->selBorder, selStartX - entryPtr->selBorderWidth, baseY - fm.ascent - entryPtr->selBorderWidth, (selEndX - selStartX) + 2 * entryPtr->selBorderWidth, (fm.ascent + fm.descent) + 2 * entryPtr->selBorderWidth, entryPtr->selBorderWidth, #ifndef MAC_OSX_TK TK_RELIEF_RAISED #else MAC_OSX_ENTRY_SELECT_RELIEF #endif ); } } /* * Draw a special background for the insertion cursor, overriding even the * selection background. As a special hack to keep the cursor visible when * the insertion cursor color is the same as the color for selected text * (e.g., on mono displays), write background in the cursor area (instead * of nothing) when the cursor isn't on. Otherwise the selection would * hide the cursor. */ if ((entryPtr->state == STATE_NORMAL) && (entryPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS)) { Tk_CharBbox(entryPtr->textLayout, entryPtr->insertPos, &cursorX, NULL, NULL, NULL); cursorX += entryPtr->layoutX; cursorX -= (entryPtr->insertWidth <= 1) ? 1 : (entryPtr->insertWidth)/2; Tk_SetCaretPos(entryPtr->tkwin, cursorX, baseY - fm.ascent, fm.ascent + fm.descent); if ((entryPtr->insertPos >= entryPtr->leftIndex) && cursorX < xBound) { if (entryPtr->flags & CURSOR_ON) { /* Take minimum of given insertBorderWidth and insertWidth/2 */ int insertBorderWidth = entryPtr->insertWidth/2; if (entryPtr->insertBorderWidth < insertBorderWidth) { insertBorderWidth = entryPtr->insertBorderWidth; } Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, entryPtr->insertBorder, cursorX, baseY - fm.ascent, entryPtr->insertWidth, fm.ascent + fm.descent, insertBorderWidth, TK_RELIEF_RAISED); } else if (entryPtr->insertBorder == entryPtr->selBorder) { Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, border, cursorX, baseY - fm.ascent, entryPtr->insertWidth, fm.ascent + fm.descent, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT); } } } if ((entryPtr->numChars == 0) && (entryPtr->placeholderChars != 0)) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1939 1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 | } /* * Draw the border and focus highlight last, so they will overwrite any * text that extends past the viewable part of the window. */ | < < | | | 1913 1914 1915 1916 1917 1918 1919 1920 1921 1922 1923 1924 1925 1926 1927 1928 1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 | } /* * Draw the border and focus highlight last, so they will overwrite any * text that extends past the viewable part of the window. */ if (!TkpDrawEntryBorderAndFocus(entryPtr, pixmap, (entryPtr->type == TK_SPINBOX))) { xBound = entryPtr->highlightWidth; if (entryPtr->relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT) { Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, border, xBound, xBound, Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2 * xBound, Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2 * xBound, entryPtr->borderWidth, entryPtr->relief); } if (xBound > 0) { GC fgGC, bgGC; bgGC = Tk_GCForColor(entryPtr->highlightBgColorPtr, pixmap); if (entryPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS) { fgGC = Tk_GCForColor(entryPtr->highlightColorPtr, pixmap); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 | int totalLength, overflow, rightX; Tcl_Size maxOffScreen; int height, width, i; Tk_FontMetrics fm; char *p; if (entryPtr->displayString != entryPtr->string) { | | | 1980 1981 1982 1983 1984 1985 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 | int totalLength, overflow, rightX; Tcl_Size maxOffScreen; int height, width, i; Tk_FontMetrics fm; char *p; if (entryPtr->displayString != entryPtr->string) { ckfree((char *)entryPtr->displayString); entryPtr->displayString = entryPtr->string; entryPtr->numDisplayBytes = entryPtr->numBytes; } /* * If we're displaying a special character instead of the value of the * entry, recompute the displayString. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2030 2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 2036 | /* * Normalize the special character so we can safely duplicate it in * the display string. If we didn't do this, then two malformed * characters might end up looking like one valid UTF character in the * resulting string. */ | | | | 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 | /* * Normalize the special character so we can safely duplicate it in * the display string. If we didn't do this, then two malformed * characters might end up looking like one valid UTF character in the * resulting string. */ TkUtfToUniChar(Tcl_GetString(entryPtr->showCharObj), &ch); size = TkUniCharToUtf(ch, buf); entryPtr->numDisplayBytes = entryPtr->numChars * size; p = (char *)ckalloc(entryPtr->numDisplayBytes + 1); entryPtr->displayString = p; for (i = entryPtr->numChars; i-- > 0; ) { memcpy(p, buf, size); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2188 2189 2190 2191 2192 2193 2194 | */ static int InsertChars( Entry *entryPtr, /* Entry that is to get the new elements. */ Tcl_Size index, /* Add the new elements before this character * index. */ | | > < | | | | 2160 2161 2162 2163 2164 2165 2166 2167 2168 2169 2170 2171 2172 2173 2174 2175 2176 2177 2178 2179 2180 2181 2182 2183 2184 2185 2186 2187 2188 2189 2190 2191 2192 2193 2194 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 2200 2201 2202 2203 2204 2205 2206 2207 2208 2209 2210 2211 2212 2213 2214 2215 | */ static int InsertChars( Entry *entryPtr, /* Entry that is to get the new elements. */ Tcl_Size index, /* Add the new elements before this character * index. */ const char *value) /* New characters to add (NULL-terminated * string). */ { size_t byteIndex, byteCount, newByteCount, oldChars, charsAdded; const char *string; char *newStr; string = entryPtr->string; byteIndex = TkUtfAtIndex(string, index) - string; byteCount = strlen(value); if (byteCount == 0) { return TCL_OK; } newByteCount = entryPtr->numBytes + byteCount + 1; newStr = (char *)ckalloc(newByteCount); memcpy(newStr, string, byteIndex); strcpy(newStr + byteIndex, value); strcpy(newStr + byteIndex + byteCount, string + byteIndex); if ((entryPtr->validate == VALIDATE_KEY || entryPtr->validate == VALIDATE_ALL) && EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, value, newStr, index, VALIDATE_INSERT) != TCL_OK) { ckfree(newStr); return TCL_OK; } ckfree((char *)string); entryPtr->string = newStr; /* * The following construction is used because inserting improperly formed * UTF-8 sequences between other improperly formed UTF-8 sequences could * result in actually forming valid UTF-8 sequences; the number of * characters added may not be Tcl_NumUtfChars(string, TCL_INDEX_NONE), because of * context. The actual number of characters added is how many characters * are in the string now minus the number that used to be there. */ oldChars = entryPtr->numChars; entryPtr->numChars = TkNumUtfChars(newStr, TCL_INDEX_NONE); charsAdded = entryPtr->numChars - oldChars; entryPtr->numBytes += byteCount; if (entryPtr->displayString == string) { entryPtr->displayString = newStr; entryPtr->numDisplayBytes = entryPtr->numBytes; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2300 2301 2302 2303 2304 2305 2306 | count = entryPtr->numChars - index; } if ((int)count <= 0) { return TCL_OK; } string = entryPtr->string; | | | | | 2272 2273 2274 2275 2276 2277 2278 2279 2280 2281 2282 2283 2284 2285 2286 2287 2288 2289 2290 2291 2292 2293 2294 2295 2296 2297 2298 2299 2300 2301 2302 2303 2304 2305 2306 2307 2308 | count = entryPtr->numChars - index; } if ((int)count <= 0) { return TCL_OK; } string = entryPtr->string; byteIndex = TkUtfAtIndex(string, index) - string; byteCount = TkUtfAtIndex(string + byteIndex, count) - (string+byteIndex); newByteCount = entryPtr->numBytes + 1 - byteCount; newStr = (char *)ckalloc(newByteCount); memcpy(newStr, string, (size_t) byteIndex); strcpy(newStr + byteIndex, string + byteIndex + byteCount); toDelete = (char *)ckalloc(byteCount + 1); memcpy(toDelete, string + byteIndex, (size_t) byteCount); toDelete[byteCount] = '\0'; if ((entryPtr->validate == VALIDATE_KEY || entryPtr->validate == VALIDATE_ALL) && EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, toDelete, newStr, index, VALIDATE_DELETE) != TCL_OK) { ckfree(newStr); ckfree(toDelete); return TCL_OK; } ckfree(toDelete); ckfree((char *)entryPtr->string); entryPtr->string = newStr; entryPtr->numChars -= count; entryPtr->numBytes -= byteCount; if (entryPtr->displayString == string) { entryPtr->displayString = newStr; entryPtr->numDisplayBytes = entryPtr->numBytes; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2512 2513 2514 2515 2516 2517 2518 | /* * If VALIDATE_ABORT has been set, then this operation should be * aborted because the validatecommand did something else instead */ if (entryPtr->flags & VALIDATE_ABORT) { entryPtr->flags &= ~VALIDATE_ABORT; | | | | | 2484 2485 2486 2487 2488 2489 2490 2491 2492 2493 2494 2495 2496 2497 2498 2499 2500 2501 2502 2503 2504 2505 2506 2507 2508 2509 2510 2511 2512 2513 2514 2515 | /* * If VALIDATE_ABORT has been set, then this operation should be * aborted because the validatecommand did something else instead */ if (entryPtr->flags & VALIDATE_ABORT) { entryPtr->flags &= ~VALIDATE_ABORT; ckfree((char *)value); return; } } oldSource = entryPtr->string; ckfree((char *)entryPtr->string); if (malloced) { entryPtr->string = value; } else { char *tmp = (char *)ckalloc(valueLen + 1); strcpy(tmp, value); entryPtr->string = tmp; } entryPtr->numBytes = valueLen; entryPtr->numChars = TkNumUtfChars(value, valueLen); if (entryPtr->displayString == oldSource) { entryPtr->displayString = entryPtr->string; entryPtr->numDisplayBytes = entryPtr->numBytes; } if (entryPtr->selectFirst != TCL_INDEX_NONE) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2959 2960 2961 2962 2963 2964 2965 | const char *selStart, *selEnd; if ((entryPtr->selectFirst < 0) || (!entryPtr->exportSelection) || Tcl_IsSafe(entryPtr->interp)) { return -1; } string = entryPtr->displayString; | | | | 2931 2932 2933 2934 2935 2936 2937 2938 2939 2940 2941 2942 2943 2944 2945 2946 | const char *selStart, *selEnd; if ((entryPtr->selectFirst < 0) || (!entryPtr->exportSelection) || Tcl_IsSafe(entryPtr->interp)) { return -1; } string = entryPtr->displayString; selStart = TkUtfAtIndex(string, entryPtr->selectFirst); selEnd = TkUtfAtIndex(selStart, entryPtr->selectLast - entryPtr->selectFirst); if (selEnd <= selStart + offset) { return 0; } byteCount = selEnd - selStart - offset; if (byteCount > maxBytes) { byteCount = maxBytes; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3612 3613 3614 3615 3616 3617 3618 | /* * There's a percent sequence here. Process it. */ before++; /* skip over % */ if (*before != '\0') { | | | | 3584 3585 3586 3587 3588 3589 3590 3591 3592 3593 3594 3595 3596 3597 3598 3599 3600 3601 3602 3603 3604 3605 3606 3607 3608 3609 3610 3611 3612 3613 3614 3615 3616 3617 3618 | /* * There's a percent sequence here. Process it. */ before++; /* skip over % */ if (*before != '\0') { before += TkUtfToUniChar(before, &ch); } else { ch = '%'; } if (type == VALIDATE_BUTTON) { /* * -command %-substitution */ switch (ch) { case 's': /* Current string value of spinbox */ string = entryPtr->string; break; case 'd': /* direction, up or down */ string = change; break; case 'W': /* widget name */ string = Tk_PathName(entryPtr->tkwin); break; default: length = TkUniCharToUtf(ch, numStorage); numStorage[length] = '\0'; string = numStorage; break; } } else { /* * -validatecommand / -invalidcommand %-substitution |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3692 3693 3694 3695 3696 3697 3698 | break; } break; case 'W': /* widget name */ string = Tk_PathName(entryPtr->tkwin); break; default: | | | 3664 3665 3666 3667 3668 3669 3670 3671 3672 3673 3674 3675 3676 3677 3678 | break; } break; case 'W': /* widget name */ string = Tk_PathName(entryPtr->tkwin); break; default: length = TkUniCharToUtf(ch, numStorage); numStorage[length] = '\0'; string = numStorage; break; } } spaceNeeded = Tcl_ScanCountedElement(string, TCL_INDEX_NONE, &cvtFlags); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4038 4039 4040 4041 4042 4043 4044 | goto error; } if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[2], &index) != TCL_OK) { goto error; } if (entryPtr->state == STATE_NORMAL) { | | | 4010 4011 4012 4013 4014 4015 4016 4017 4018 4019 4020 4021 4022 4023 4024 | goto error; } if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[2], &index) != TCL_OK) { goto error; } if (entryPtr->state == STATE_NORMAL) { code = InsertChars(entryPtr, index, Tcl_GetString(objv[3])); if (code != TCL_OK) { goto error; } } break; } |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkFont.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
572 573 574 575 576 577 578 | /* * The 'charPtr' arg must be a single Unicode. */ if (charPtr != NULL) { const char *string = Tcl_GetString(charPtr); | | | 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 | /* * The 'charPtr' arg must be a single Unicode. */ if (charPtr != NULL) { const char *string = Tcl_GetString(charPtr); size_t len = TkUtfToUniChar(string, &uniChar); if (len != (size_t)charPtr->length) { resultPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj( "expected a single character but got \"", TCL_INDEX_NONE); Tcl_AppendLimitedToObj(resultPtr, string, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 40, "..."); Tcl_AppendToObj(resultPtr, "\"", TCL_INDEX_NONE); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
644 645 646 647 648 649 650 | } else { result = ConfigAttributesObj(interp, tkwin, objc - 3, objv + 3, &nfPtr->fa); UpdateDependentFonts(fiPtr, tkwin, namedHashPtr); return result; } return GetAttributeInfoObj(interp, &nfPtr->fa, objPtr); | | | 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 | } else { result = ConfigAttributesObj(interp, tkwin, objc - 3, objv + 3, &nfPtr->fa); UpdateDependentFonts(fiPtr, tkwin, namedHashPtr); return result; } return GetAttributeInfoObj(interp, &nfPtr->fa, objPtr); } case FONT_CREATE: { int skip = 3, i; const char *name; char buf[16 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE]; TkFontAttributes fa; Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1729 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 | src = dest = Tcl_DStringValue(dsPtr) + len; upper = 1; for (; *src != '\0'; ) { while (isspace(UCHAR(*src))) { /* INTL: ISO space */ src++; upper = 1; } | | | | 1729 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 1750 | src = dest = Tcl_DStringValue(dsPtr) + len; upper = 1; for (; *src != '\0'; ) { while (isspace(UCHAR(*src))) { /* INTL: ISO space */ src++; upper = 1; } src += TkUtfToUniChar(src, &ch); if (upper) { ch = Tcl_UniCharToUpper(ch); upper = 0; } else { ch = Tcl_UniCharToLower(ch); } dest += TkUniCharToUtf(ch, dest); } *dest = '\0'; Tcl_DStringSetLength(dsPtr, dest - Tcl_DStringValue(dsPtr)); family = Tcl_DStringValue(dsPtr) + len; } if (family != Tcl_DStringValue(dsPtr) + len) { Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, family, TCL_INDEX_NONE); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1851 1852 1853 1854 1855 1856 1857 | Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, string, numBytes, -1, 0, &width); return width; } /* *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- * | | | 1851 1852 1853 1854 1855 1856 1857 1858 1859 1860 1861 1862 1863 1864 1865 | Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, string, numBytes, -1, 0, &width); return width; } /* *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- * * Tk_UnderlineChars, Tk_UnderlineCharsInContext -- * * These procedures draw an underline for a given range of characters in * a given string. They don't draw the characters (which are assumed to * have been displayed previously); they just draw the underline. These * procedures would mainly be used to quickly underline a few characters * without having to construct an underlined font. To produce properly * underlined text, the appropriate underlined font should be constructed |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1887 1888 1889 1890 1891 1892 1893 | * underlined or overstruck. */ int x, int y, /* Coordinates at which first character of * string is drawn. */ Tcl_Size firstByte, /* Index of first byte of first character. */ Tcl_Size lastByte) /* Index of first byte after the last * character. */ { | | | | | | 1887 1888 1889 1890 1891 1892 1893 1894 1895 1896 1897 1898 1899 1900 1901 1902 1903 1904 1905 1906 1907 1908 1909 1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 1916 1917 1918 1919 1920 1921 1922 1923 1924 1925 1926 1927 1928 | * underlined or overstruck. */ int x, int y, /* Coordinates at which first character of * string is drawn. */ Tcl_Size firstByte, /* Index of first byte of first character. */ Tcl_Size lastByte) /* Index of first byte after the last * character. */ { Tk_UnderlineCharsInContext(display, drawable, gc, tkfont, string, lastByte, x, y, firstByte, lastByte); } void Tk_UnderlineCharsInContext( Display *display, /* Display on which to draw. */ Drawable drawable, /* Window or pixmap in which to draw. */ GC gc, /* Graphics context for actually drawing * line. */ Tk_Font tkfont, /* Font used in GC; must have been allocated * by Tk_GetFont(). Used for character * dimensions, etc. */ const char *string, /* String containing characters to be * underlined or overstruck. */ Tcl_Size numBytes, /* Number of bytes in string. */ int x, int y, /* Coordinates at which the first character of * the whole string would be drawn. */ Tcl_Size firstByte, /* Index of first byte of first character. */ Tcl_Size lastByte) /* Index of first byte after the last * character. */ { TkFont *fontPtr = (TkFont *) tkfont; int startX, endX; Tk_MeasureCharsInContext(tkfont, string, numBytes, 0, firstByte, -1, 0, &startX); Tk_MeasureCharsInContext(tkfont, string, numBytes, 0, lastByte, -1, 0, &endX); XFillRectangle(display, drawable, gc, x + startX, y + fontPtr->underlinePos, (unsigned) (endX - startX), (unsigned) fontPtr->underlineHeight); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 | } fmPtr = &fontPtr->fm; height = fmPtr->ascent + fmPtr->descent; if (numChars < 0) { | | | 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 | } fmPtr = &fontPtr->fm; height = fmPtr->ascent + fmPtr->descent; if (numChars < 0) { numChars = TkNumUtfChars(string, TCL_INDEX_NONE); } if (wrapLength == 0) { wrapLength = -1; } maxChunks = 1; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 2026 | /* * Divide the string up into simple strings and measure each string. */ curX = 0; | | | 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034 | /* * Divide the string up into simple strings and measure each string. */ curX = 0; endp = TkUtfAtIndex(string, numChars); special = string; flags &= TK_IGNORE_TABS | TK_IGNORE_NEWLINES; flags |= TK_WHOLE_WORDS | TK_AT_LEAST_ONE; for (start = string; start < endp; ) { if (start >= special) { /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2137 2138 2139 2140 2141 2142 2143 | end = chunkPtr->start + chunkPtr->numBytes; bytesThisChunk = start - end; if (bytesThisChunk > 0) { bytesThisChunk = Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, end, bytesThisChunk, -1, 0, &chunkPtr->totalWidth); chunkPtr->numBytes += bytesThisChunk; | | | 2137 2138 2139 2140 2141 2142 2143 2144 2145 2146 2147 2148 2149 2150 2151 | end = chunkPtr->start + chunkPtr->numBytes; bytesThisChunk = start - end; if (bytesThisChunk > 0) { bytesThisChunk = Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, end, bytesThisChunk, -1, 0, &chunkPtr->totalWidth); chunkPtr->numBytes += bytesThisChunk; chunkPtr->numChars += TkNumUtfChars(end, bytesThisChunk); chunkPtr->totalWidth += curX; } } wrapLine: flags |= TK_AT_LEAST_ONE; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2329 2330 2331 2332 2333 2334 2335 | numDisplayChars = chunkPtr->numDisplayChars; if ((numDisplayChars > 0) && (firstChar < numDisplayChars)) { if (firstChar <= 0) { drawX = 0; firstChar = 0; firstByte = chunkPtr->start; } else { | | | | | 2329 2330 2331 2332 2333 2334 2335 2336 2337 2338 2339 2340 2341 2342 2343 2344 2345 2346 2347 2348 2349 2350 2351 2352 | numDisplayChars = chunkPtr->numDisplayChars; if ((numDisplayChars > 0) && (firstChar < numDisplayChars)) { if (firstChar <= 0) { drawX = 0; firstChar = 0; firstByte = chunkPtr->start; } else { firstByte = TkUtfAtIndex(chunkPtr->start, firstChar); Tk_MeasureChars(layoutPtr->tkfont, chunkPtr->start, firstByte - chunkPtr->start, -1, 0, &drawX); } if (lastChar < numDisplayChars) { numDisplayChars = lastChar; } lastByte = TkUtfAtIndex(chunkPtr->start, numDisplayChars); #ifdef TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT Tk_DrawCharsInContext(display, drawable, gc, layoutPtr->tkfont, chunkPtr->start, chunkPtr->numBytes, firstByte - chunkPtr->start, lastByte - firstByte, x+chunkPtr->x, y+chunkPtr->y); #else /* !TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT */ Tk_DrawChars(display, drawable, gc, layoutPtr->tkfont, firstByte, lastByte - firstByte, x+chunkPtr->x+drawX, y+chunkPtr->y); #endif /* TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2399 2400 2401 2402 2403 2404 2405 | double dx, dy; if (firstChar <= 0) { drawX = 0; firstChar = 0; firstByte = chunkPtr->start; } else { | | | | | 2399 2400 2401 2402 2403 2404 2405 2406 2407 2408 2409 2410 2411 2412 2413 2414 2415 2416 2417 2418 2419 2420 2421 2422 2423 2424 2425 | double dx, dy; if (firstChar <= 0) { drawX = 0; firstChar = 0; firstByte = chunkPtr->start; } else { firstByte = TkUtfAtIndex(chunkPtr->start, firstChar); Tk_MeasureChars(layoutPtr->tkfont, chunkPtr->start, firstByte - chunkPtr->start, -1, 0, &drawX); } if (lastChar < numDisplayChars) { numDisplayChars = lastChar; } lastByte = TkUtfAtIndex(chunkPtr->start, numDisplayChars); #ifdef TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT dx = cosA * (chunkPtr->x) + sinA * (chunkPtr->y); dy = -sinA * (chunkPtr->x) + cosA * (chunkPtr->y); if (angle == 0.0) { Tk_DrawCharsInContext(display, drawable, gc, layoutPtr->tkfont, chunkPtr->start, chunkPtr->numBytes, firstByte - chunkPtr->start, lastByte - firstByte, (int)(x + dx), (int)(y + dy)); } else { TkpDrawAngledCharsInContext(display, drawable, gc, layoutPtr->tkfont, chunkPtr->start, chunkPtr->numBytes, firstByte - chunkPtr->start, lastByte - firstByte, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2659 2660 2661 2662 2663 2664 2665 | * tab or newline char. */ return numChars; } n = Tk_MeasureChars((Tk_Font) fontPtr, chunkPtr->start, chunkPtr->numBytes, x - chunkPtr->x, 0, &dummy); | | | 2659 2660 2661 2662 2663 2664 2665 2666 2667 2668 2669 2670 2671 2672 2673 | * tab or newline char. */ return numChars; } n = Tk_MeasureChars((Tk_Font) fontPtr, chunkPtr->start, chunkPtr->numBytes, x - chunkPtr->x, 0, &dummy); return numChars + TkNumUtfChars(chunkPtr->start, n); } numChars += chunkPtr->numChars; lastPtr = chunkPtr; chunkPtr++; i++; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2768 2769 2770 2771 2772 2773 2774 | if (chunkPtr->numDisplayChars < 0) { if (index == 0) { x = chunkPtr->x; w = chunkPtr->totalWidth; goto check; } } else if (index < chunkPtr->numChars) { | | | | 2768 2769 2770 2771 2772 2773 2774 2775 2776 2777 2778 2779 2780 2781 2782 2783 2784 2785 2786 2787 2788 2789 2790 | if (chunkPtr->numDisplayChars < 0) { if (index == 0) { x = chunkPtr->x; w = chunkPtr->totalWidth; goto check; } } else if (index < chunkPtr->numChars) { end = TkUtfAtIndex(chunkPtr->start, index); if (xPtr != NULL) { Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, chunkPtr->start, end - chunkPtr->start, -1, 0, &x); x += chunkPtr->x; } if (widthPtr != NULL) { int ch; Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, end, TkUtfToUniChar(end, &ch), -1, 0, &w); } goto check; } index -= chunkPtr->numChars; chunkPtr++; } if (index != 0) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3322 3323 3324 3325 3326 3327 3328 | /* * INTL: We only handle symbols that have an encoding as a glyph * from the standard set defined by Adobe. The rest get punted. * Eventually this should be revised to handle more sophsticiated * international postscript fonts. */ | | | 3322 3323 3324 3325 3326 3327 3328 3329 3330 3331 3332 3333 3334 3335 3336 | /* * INTL: We only handle symbols that have an encoding as a glyph * from the standard set defined by Adobe. The rest get punted. * Eventually this should be revised to handle more sophsticiated * international postscript fonts. */ p += TkUtfToUniChar(p, &ch); if ((ch == '(') || (ch == ')') || (ch == '\\') || (ch < 0x20)) { /* * Tricky point: the "03" is necessary in the snprintf below, * so that a full three digits of octal are always generated. * Without the "03", a number following this sequence could be * interpreted by Postscript as part of this sequence. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3843 3844 3845 3846 3847 3848 3849 | maxChunks *= 2; s = offsetof(TextLayout, chunks) + (maxChunks * sizeof(LayoutChunk)); layoutPtr = (TextLayout *)ckrealloc(layoutPtr, s); *layoutPtrPtr = layoutPtr; *maxPtr = maxChunks; } | | | 3843 3844 3845 3846 3847 3848 3849 3850 3851 3852 3853 3854 3855 3856 3857 | maxChunks *= 2; s = offsetof(TextLayout, chunks) + (maxChunks * sizeof(LayoutChunk)); layoutPtr = (TextLayout *)ckrealloc(layoutPtr, s); *layoutPtrPtr = layoutPtr; *maxPtr = maxChunks; } numChars = TkNumUtfChars(start, numBytes); chunkPtr = &layoutPtr->chunks[layoutPtr->numChunks]; chunkPtr->start = start; chunkPtr->numBytes = numBytes; chunkPtr->numChars = numChars; chunkPtr->numDisplayChars = numChars; chunkPtr->x = curX; chunkPtr->y = y; |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkFrame.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
54 55 56 57 58 59 60 | * menubar. Malloc-ed, may be NULL. */ Colormap colormap; /* If not None, identifies a colormap * allocated for this window, which must be * freed when the window is deleted. */ Tk_3DBorder border; /* Structure used to draw 3-D border and * background. NULL means no background or * border. */ | | | | | | 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 | * menubar. Malloc-ed, may be NULL. */ Colormap colormap; /* If not None, identifies a colormap * allocated for this window, which must be * freed when the window is deleted. */ Tk_3DBorder border; /* Structure used to draw 3-D border and * background. NULL means no background or * border. */ int borderWidth; /* Width of 3-D border (if any). */ int relief; /* 3-d effect: TK_RELIEF_RAISED etc. */ int highlightWidth; /* Width in pixels of highlight to draw around * widget when it has the focus. 0 means don't * draw a highlight. */ XColor *highlightBgColorPtr; /* Color for drawing traversal highlight area * when highlight is off. */ XColor *highlightColorPtr; /* Color for drawing traversal highlight. */ int width; /* Width to request for window. <= 0 means * don't request any size. */ int height; /* Height to request for window. <= 0 means * don't request any size. */ Tk_Cursor cursor; /* Current cursor for window, or None. */ Tcl_Obj *takeFocusObj; /* Value of -takefocus option; not used in the * C code, but used by keyboard traversal * scripts. May be NULL. */ int isContainer; /* 1 means this window is a container, 0 means * that it isn't. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
191 192 193 194 195 196 197 | */ {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-container", "container", "Container", DEF_FRAME_CONTAINER, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Frame, isContainer), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor", DEF_FRAME_CURSOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Frame, cursor), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-height", "height", "Height", | | | | | | | | 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 | */ {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-container", "container", "Container", DEF_FRAME_CONTAINER, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Frame, isContainer), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor", DEF_FRAME_CURSOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Frame, cursor), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-height", "height", "Height", DEF_FRAME_HEIGHT, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Frame, height), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground", "HighlightBackground", DEF_FRAME_HIGHLIGHT_BG, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Frame, highlightBgColorPtr), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor", DEF_FRAME_HIGHLIGHT, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Frame, highlightColorPtr), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness", "HighlightThickness", DEF_FRAME_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Frame, highlightWidth), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", "padX", "Pad", DEF_FRAME_PADX, offsetof(Frame, padXObj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", "padY", "Pad", DEF_FRAME_PADY, offsetof(Frame, padYObj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus", DEF_FRAME_TAKE_FOCUS, offsetof(Frame, takeFocusObj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-visual", "visual", "Visual", DEF_FRAME_VISUAL, offsetof(Frame, visualNameObj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-width", "width", "Width", DEF_FRAME_WIDTH, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Frame, width), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0} }; static const Tk_OptionSpec frameOptSpec[] = { {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-backgroundimage", "backgroundImage", "BackgroundImage", DEF_FRAME_BG_IMAGE, offsetof(Frame, bgimgPtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-borderwidth", 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bgimg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-backgroundimage", 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", DEF_FRAME_BORDER_WIDTH, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Frame, borderWidth), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-class", "class", "Class", DEF_FRAME_CLASS, offsetof(Frame, classNameObj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief", DEF_FRAME_RELIEF, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Frame, relief), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-tile", "tile", "Tile", DEF_FRAME_BG_TILE, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Frame, tile), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, 0, commonOptSpec, 0} }; static const Tk_OptionSpec toplevelOptSpec[] = { {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-backgroundimage", "backgroundImage", "BackgroundImage", DEF_FRAME_BG_IMAGE, offsetof(Frame, bgimgPtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-borderwidth", 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bgimg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-backgroundimage", 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", DEF_FRAME_BORDER_WIDTH, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Frame, borderWidth), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-class", "class", "Class", DEF_TOPLEVEL_CLASS, offsetof(Frame, classNameObj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-menu", "menu", "Menu", DEF_TOPLEVEL_MENU, offsetof(Frame, menuNameObj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief", DEF_FRAME_RELIEF, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Frame, relief), 0, 0, 0}, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
269 270 271 272 273 274 275 | NULL, 0, 0, 0, commonOptSpec, 0} }; static const Tk_OptionSpec labelframeOptSpec[] = { {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-borderwidth", 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", | | | 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 | NULL, 0, 0, 0, commonOptSpec, 0} }; static const Tk_OptionSpec labelframeOptSpec[] = { {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-borderwidth", 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", DEF_LABELFRAME_BORDER_WIDTH, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Frame, borderWidth), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-class", "class", "Class", DEF_LABELFRAME_CLASS, offsetof(Frame, classNameObj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-foreground", 0}, {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font", DEF_LABELFRAME_FONT, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Labelframe, tkfont), 0, 0, 0}, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 | /* * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file: */ static void ComputeFrameGeometry(Frame *framePtr); static int ConfigureFrame(Tcl_Interp *interp, Frame *framePtr, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); static Tcl_FreeProc DestroyFrame; static void DestroyFramePartly(Frame *framePtr); static void DisplayFrame(void *clientData); static void DrawFrameBackground(Tk_Window tkwin, Pixmap pixmap, int highlightWidth, int borderWidth, Tk_Image bgimg, int bgtile); static void FrameBgImageProc(void *clientData, | > > > | 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 | /* * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file: */ static void ComputeFrameGeometry(Frame *framePtr); static int ConfigureFrame(Tcl_Interp *interp, Frame *framePtr, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); static int CreateFrame(void *clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], int type, const char *appName); static Tcl_FreeProc DestroyFrame; static void DestroyFramePartly(Frame *framePtr); static void DisplayFrame(void *clientData); static void DrawFrameBackground(Tk_Window tkwin, Pixmap pixmap, int highlightWidth, int borderWidth, Tk_Image bgimg, int bgtile); static void FrameBgImageProc(void *clientData, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
388 389 390 391 392 393 394 | int Tk_FrameObjCmd( void *clientData, /* Either NULL or pointer to option table. */ Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */ int objc, /* Number of arguments. */ Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */ { | | | | | 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 | int Tk_FrameObjCmd( void *clientData, /* Either NULL or pointer to option table. */ Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */ int objc, /* Number of arguments. */ Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */ { return CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv, TYPE_FRAME, NULL); } int Tk_ToplevelObjCmd( void *clientData, /* Either NULL or pointer to option table. */ Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */ int objc, /* Number of arguments. */ Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */ { return CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv, TYPE_TOPLEVEL, NULL); } int Tk_LabelframeObjCmd( void *clientData, /* Either NULL or pointer to option table. */ Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */ int objc, /* Number of arguments. */ Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */ { return CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv, TYPE_LABELFRAME, NULL); } /* *-------------------------------------------------------------- * * TkCreateFrame -- * |
︙ | ︙ | |||
432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 | * See the user documentation. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ int TkCreateFrame( TCL_UNUSED(void *), Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */ Tcl_Size objc, /* Number of arguments. */ Tcl_Obj *const objv[], /* Argument objects. */ int type, /* What widget type to create. */ const char *appName) /* Should only be non-NULL if there are no * Main window associated with the | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 | * See the user documentation. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ int TkCreateFrame( void *clientData, /* Either NULL or pointer to option table. */ Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */ Tcl_Size argc, /* Number of arguments. */ const char *const *argv, /* Argument strings. */ int toplevel, /* Non-zero means create a toplevel window, * zero means create a frame. */ const char *appName) /* Should only be non-NULL if there is no main * window associated with the interpreter. * Gives the base name to use for the new * application. */ { int result; Tcl_Size i; Tcl_Obj **objv = (Tcl_Obj **)ckalloc((argc+1) * sizeof(Tcl_Obj **)); for (i=0; i<argc; i++) { objv[i] = Tcl_NewStringObj(argv[i], TCL_INDEX_NONE); Tcl_IncrRefCount(objv[i]); } objv[argc] = NULL; result = CreateFrame(clientData, interp, argc, objv, toplevel ? TYPE_TOPLEVEL : TYPE_FRAME, appName); for (i=0; i<argc; i++) { Tcl_DecrRefCount(objv[i]); } ckfree(objv); return result; } int TkListCreateFrame( void *clientData, /* Either NULL or pointer to option table. */ Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */ Tcl_Obj *listObj, /* List of arguments. */ int toplevel, /* Non-zero means create a toplevel window, * zero means create a frame. */ Tcl_Obj *nameObj) /* Should only be non-NULL if there is no main * window associated with the interpreter. * Gives the base name to use for the new * application. */ { Tcl_Size objc; Tcl_Obj **objv; if (TCL_OK != Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, listObj, &objc, &objv)) { return TCL_ERROR; } return CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv, toplevel ? TYPE_TOPLEVEL : TYPE_FRAME, nameObj ? Tcl_GetString(nameObj) : NULL); } static int CreateFrame( TCL_UNUSED(void *), Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */ Tcl_Size objc, /* Number of arguments. */ Tcl_Obj *const objv[], /* Argument objects. */ int type, /* What widget type to create. */ const char *appName) /* Should only be non-NULL if there are no * Main window associated with the |
︙ | ︙ | |||
920 921 922 923 924 925 926 | Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Arguments. */ { Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions; Tcl_Obj *oldMenuNameObj; Tk_Window oldWindow = NULL; Labelframe *labelframePtr = (Labelframe *) framePtr; Tk_Image image = NULL; | | < | 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 | Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Arguments. */ { Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions; Tcl_Obj *oldMenuNameObj; Tk_Window oldWindow = NULL; Labelframe *labelframePtr = (Labelframe *) framePtr; Tk_Image image = NULL; int padX, padY; /* * Need the old menubar name for the menu code to delete it. */ oldMenuNameObj = framePtr->menuNameObj; if (oldMenuNameObj) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
982 983 984 985 986 987 988 | if (framePtr->border != NULL) { Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(framePtr->tkwin, framePtr->border); } else { Tk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap(framePtr->tkwin, None); } | < | < | < < | < | < < | < | < < | < | < | 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 | if (framePtr->border != NULL) { Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(framePtr->tkwin, framePtr->border); } else { Tk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap(framePtr->tkwin, None); } if (framePtr->width < 0) { framePtr->width = 0; } if (framePtr->height < 0) { framePtr->height = 0; } if (framePtr->borderWidth < 0) { framePtr->borderWidth = 0; } if (framePtr->highlightWidth < 0) { framePtr->highlightWidth = 0; } Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, framePtr->tkwin, framePtr->padXObj, &padX); if (padX < 0) { Tcl_DecrRefCount(framePtr->padXObj); framePtr->padXObj = Tcl_NewIntObj(0); Tcl_IncrRefCount(framePtr->padXObj); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 | Labelframe *labelframePtr = (Labelframe *)instanceData; Tk_Window tkwin = framePtr->tkwin; XGCValues gcValues; GC gc; int anyTextLabel, anyWindowLabel; int bWidthLeft, bWidthRight, bWidthTop, bWidthBottom; const char *labelText; | | < < | 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 | Labelframe *labelframePtr = (Labelframe *)instanceData; Tk_Window tkwin = framePtr->tkwin; XGCValues gcValues; GC gc; int anyTextLabel, anyWindowLabel; int bWidthLeft, bWidthRight, bWidthTop, bWidthBottom; const char *labelText; int padX, padY; anyTextLabel = (framePtr->type == TYPE_LABELFRAME) && (labelframePtr->textPtr != NULL) && (labelframePtr->labelWin == NULL); anyWindowLabel = (framePtr->type == TYPE_LABELFRAME) && (labelframePtr->labelWin != NULL); #ifndef TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING gcValues.graphics_exposures = False; gc = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, GCGraphicsExposures, &gcValues); if (framePtr->copyGC != NULL) { Tk_FreeGC(framePtr->display, framePtr->copyGC); } framePtr->copyGC = gc; #endif /* TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING */ if (framePtr->type == TYPE_LABELFRAME) { /* * The textGC is needed even in the labelWin case, so it's always * created for a labelframe. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 | * Make sure label size is at least as big as the border. This * simplifies later calculations and gives a better appearance with * thick borders. */ if ((labelframePtr->labelAnchor >= LABELANCHOR_N) && (labelframePtr->labelAnchor <= LABELANCHOR_SW)) { | | | | | < | | | | | | | | | | < < | | | 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 | * Make sure label size is at least as big as the border. This * simplifies later calculations and gives a better appearance with * thick borders. */ if ((labelframePtr->labelAnchor >= LABELANCHOR_N) && (labelframePtr->labelAnchor <= LABELANCHOR_SW)) { if (labelframePtr->labelReqHeight < framePtr->borderWidth) { labelframePtr->labelReqHeight = framePtr->borderWidth; } } else { if (labelframePtr->labelReqWidth < framePtr->borderWidth) { labelframePtr->labelReqWidth = framePtr->borderWidth; } } } /* * Calculate individual border widths. */ bWidthBottom = bWidthTop = bWidthRight = bWidthLeft = framePtr->borderWidth + framePtr->highlightWidth; Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, framePtr->tkwin, framePtr->padXObj, &padX); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, framePtr->tkwin, framePtr->padYObj, &padY); bWidthLeft += padX; bWidthRight += padX; bWidthTop += padY; bWidthBottom += padY; if (anyTextLabel || anyWindowLabel) { switch (labelframePtr->labelAnchor) { case LABELANCHOR_E: case LABELANCHOR_EN: case LABELANCHOR_ES: bWidthRight += labelframePtr->labelReqWidth - framePtr->borderWidth; break; case LABELANCHOR_N: case LABELANCHOR_NE: case LABELANCHOR_NW: bWidthTop += labelframePtr->labelReqHeight - framePtr->borderWidth; break; case LABELANCHOR_S: case LABELANCHOR_SE: case LABELANCHOR_SW: bWidthBottom += labelframePtr->labelReqHeight - framePtr->borderWidth; break; default: bWidthLeft += labelframePtr->labelReqWidth - framePtr->borderWidth; break; } } Tk_SetInternalBorderEx(tkwin, bWidthLeft, bWidthRight, bWidthTop, bWidthBottom); ComputeFrameGeometry(framePtr); /* * A labelframe should request size for its label. */ if (framePtr->type == TYPE_LABELFRAME) { int minwidth = labelframePtr->labelReqWidth; int minheight = labelframePtr->labelReqHeight; int padding = framePtr->highlightWidth; if (framePtr->borderWidth > 0) { padding += framePtr->borderWidth + LABELMARGIN; } padding *= 2; if ((labelframePtr->labelAnchor >= LABELANCHOR_N) && (labelframePtr->labelAnchor <= LABELANCHOR_SW)) { minwidth += padding; minheight += framePtr->borderWidth + framePtr->highlightWidth; } else { minheight += padding; minwidth += framePtr->borderWidth + framePtr->highlightWidth; } Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize(tkwin, minwidth, minheight); } if ((framePtr->width > 0) || (framePtr->height > 0)) { Tk_GeometryRequest(tkwin, framePtr->width, framePtr->height); } if (Tk_IsMapped(tkwin)) { if (!(framePtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) { Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayFrame, framePtr); } framePtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1299 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 | static void ComputeFrameGeometry( Frame *framePtr) /* Information about widget. */ { int otherWidth, otherHeight, otherWidthT, otherHeightT, padding; int maxWidth, maxHeight; Tk_Window tkwin; | < | 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 | static void ComputeFrameGeometry( Frame *framePtr) /* Information about widget. */ { int otherWidth, otherHeight, otherWidthT, otherHeightT, padding; int maxWidth, maxHeight; Tk_Window tkwin; Labelframe *labelframePtr = (Labelframe *) framePtr; /* * We have nothing to do here unless there is a label. */ if (framePtr->type != TYPE_LABELFRAME) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 | /* * Calculate the available size for the label */ labelframePtr->labelBox.width = labelframePtr->labelReqWidth; labelframePtr->labelBox.height = labelframePtr->labelReqHeight; | < < | | | | 1360 1361 1362 1363 1364 1365 1366 1367 1368 1369 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 1375 1376 | /* * Calculate the available size for the label */ labelframePtr->labelBox.width = labelframePtr->labelReqWidth; labelframePtr->labelBox.height = labelframePtr->labelReqHeight; padding = framePtr->highlightWidth; if (framePtr->borderWidth > 0) { padding += framePtr->borderWidth + LABELMARGIN; } padding *= 2; maxHeight = Tk_Height(tkwin); maxWidth = Tk_Width(tkwin); if ((labelframePtr->labelAnchor >= LABELANCHOR_N) && |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1362 1363 1364 1365 1366 1367 1368 | * text does not fit. */ otherWidth = Tk_Width(tkwin) - labelframePtr->labelBox.width; otherHeight = Tk_Height(tkwin) - labelframePtr->labelBox.height; otherWidthT = Tk_Width(tkwin) - labelframePtr->labelReqWidth; otherHeightT = Tk_Height(tkwin) - labelframePtr->labelReqHeight; | | | 1398 1399 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 | * text does not fit. */ otherWidth = Tk_Width(tkwin) - labelframePtr->labelBox.width; otherHeight = Tk_Height(tkwin) - labelframePtr->labelBox.height; otherWidthT = Tk_Width(tkwin) - labelframePtr->labelReqWidth; otherHeightT = Tk_Height(tkwin) - labelframePtr->labelReqHeight; padding = framePtr->highlightWidth; switch (labelframePtr->labelAnchor) { case LABELANCHOR_E: case LABELANCHOR_EN: case LABELANCHOR_ES: labelframePtr->labelTextX = otherWidthT - padding; labelframePtr->labelBox.x = otherWidth - padding; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1389 1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 1395 | break; default: labelframePtr->labelTextX = padding; labelframePtr->labelBox.x = padding; break; } | | | | 1425 1426 1427 1428 1429 1430 1431 1432 1433 1434 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 1440 | break; default: labelframePtr->labelTextX = padding; labelframePtr->labelBox.x = padding; break; } if (framePtr->borderWidth > 0) { padding += framePtr->borderWidth + LABELMARGIN; } switch (labelframePtr->labelAnchor) { case LABELANCHOR_NW: case LABELANCHOR_SW: labelframePtr->labelTextX = padding; labelframePtr->labelBox.x = padding; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1451 1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 1457 | void *clientData) /* Information about widget. */ { Frame *framePtr = (Frame *)clientData; Tk_Window tkwin = framePtr->tkwin; int bdX1, bdY1, bdX2, bdY2; Pixmap pixmap; Bool useClipping = False; | < < < | | | | 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 1493 1494 1495 1496 1497 1498 1499 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 1520 1521 1522 | void *clientData) /* Information about widget. */ { Frame *framePtr = (Frame *)clientData; Tk_Window tkwin = framePtr->tkwin; int bdX1, bdY1, bdX2, bdY2; Pixmap pixmap; Bool useClipping = False; framePtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_PENDING; if ((framePtr->tkwin == NULL) || !Tk_IsMapped(tkwin)) { return; } /* * Highlight shall always be drawn if it exists, so do that first. */ if (framePtr->highlightWidth > 0) { GC fgGC, bgGC; bgGC = Tk_GCForColor(framePtr->highlightBgColorPtr, Tk_WindowId(tkwin)); if (framePtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS) { fgGC = Tk_GCForColor(framePtr->highlightColorPtr, Tk_WindowId(tkwin)); Tk_DrawHighlightBorder(tkwin, fgGC, bgGC, framePtr->highlightWidth, Tk_WindowId(tkwin)); } else { Tk_DrawHighlightBorder(tkwin, bgGC, bgGC, framePtr->highlightWidth, Tk_WindowId(tkwin)); } } /* * If -background is set to "", no interior is drawn. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1507 1508 1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 | (Tk_Height(tkwin) > 0 ? Tk_Height(tkwin) : 1), Tk_Depth(tkwin)); #else pixmap = Tk_WindowId(tkwin); Tk_ClipDrawableToRect(Tk_Display(tkwin), pixmap, 0, 0, Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin)); #endif /* TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING */ | < | | | | 1540 1541 1542 1543 1544 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 1565 | (Tk_Height(tkwin) > 0 ? Tk_Height(tkwin) : 1), Tk_Depth(tkwin)); #else pixmap = Tk_WindowId(tkwin); Tk_ClipDrawableToRect(Tk_Display(tkwin), pixmap, 0, 0, Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin)); #endif /* TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING */ if (framePtr->type != TYPE_LABELFRAME) { /* * Pass to platform specific draw function. In general, it just draws * a simple rectangle, but it may "theme" the background. */ noLabel: TkpDrawFrameEx(tkwin, pixmap, framePtr->border, framePtr->highlightWidth, framePtr->borderWidth, framePtr->relief); if (framePtr->bgimg) { DrawFrameBackground(tkwin, pixmap, framePtr->highlightWidth, framePtr->borderWidth, framePtr->bgimg, framePtr->tile); } } else { Labelframe *labelframePtr = (Labelframe *) framePtr; if ((labelframePtr->textPtr == NULL) && (labelframePtr->labelWin == NULL)) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1541 1542 1543 1544 1545 1546 1547 | Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, framePtr->border, 0, 0, Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT); /* * Calculate how the label affects the border's position. */ | | | | | | | | | | 1573 1574 1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 1592 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 | Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, framePtr->border, 0, 0, Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT); /* * Calculate how the label affects the border's position. */ bdX1 = bdY1 = framePtr->highlightWidth; bdX2 = Tk_Width(tkwin) - framePtr->highlightWidth; bdY2 = Tk_Height(tkwin) - framePtr->highlightWidth; switch (labelframePtr->labelAnchor) { case LABELANCHOR_E: case LABELANCHOR_EN: case LABELANCHOR_ES: bdX2 -= (labelframePtr->labelBox.width - framePtr->borderWidth) / 2; break; case LABELANCHOR_N: case LABELANCHOR_NE: case LABELANCHOR_NW: /* * Since the glyphs of the text tend to be in the lower part we * favor a lower border position by rounding up. */ bdY1 += (labelframePtr->labelBox.height - framePtr->borderWidth+1)/2; break; case LABELANCHOR_S: case LABELANCHOR_SE: case LABELANCHOR_SW: bdY2 -= (labelframePtr->labelBox.height - framePtr->borderWidth) / 2; break; default: bdX1 += (labelframePtr->labelBox.width - framePtr->borderWidth) / 2; break; } /* * Draw border */ Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, framePtr->border, bdX1, bdY1, bdX2 - bdX1, bdY2 - bdY1, framePtr->borderWidth, framePtr->relief); if (labelframePtr->labelWin == NULL) { /* * Clear behind the label */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1647 1648 1649 1650 1651 1652 1653 | #ifndef TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING /* * Everything's been redisplayed; now copy the pixmap onto the screen and * free up the pixmap. */ XCopyArea(framePtr->display, pixmap, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), | | | | | | 1679 1680 1681 1682 1683 1684 1685 1686 1687 1688 1689 1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 | #ifndef TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING /* * Everything's been redisplayed; now copy the pixmap onto the screen and * free up the pixmap. */ XCopyArea(framePtr->display, pixmap, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), framePtr->copyGC, framePtr->highlightWidth, framePtr->highlightWidth, (unsigned) (Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2 * framePtr->highlightWidth), (unsigned) (Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2 * framePtr->highlightWidth), framePtr->highlightWidth, framePtr->highlightWidth); Tk_FreePixmap(framePtr->display, pixmap); #endif /* TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING */ } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1757 1758 1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 | if (framePtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING) { Tcl_CancelIdleCall(DisplayFrame, framePtr); } Tcl_CancelIdleCall(MapFrame, framePtr); Tcl_EventuallyFree(framePtr, DestroyFrame); } else if (eventPtr->type == FocusIn) { if (eventPtr->xfocus.detail != NotifyInferior) { | < < | < < | | 1789 1790 1791 1792 1793 1794 1795 1796 1797 1798 1799 1800 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 | if (framePtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING) { Tcl_CancelIdleCall(DisplayFrame, framePtr); } Tcl_CancelIdleCall(MapFrame, framePtr); Tcl_EventuallyFree(framePtr, DestroyFrame); } else if (eventPtr->type == FocusIn) { if (eventPtr->xfocus.detail != NotifyInferior) { framePtr->flags |= GOT_FOCUS; if (framePtr->highlightWidth > 0) { goto redraw; } } } else if (eventPtr->type == FocusOut) { if (eventPtr->xfocus.detail != NotifyInferior) { framePtr->flags &= ~GOT_FOCUS; if (framePtr->highlightWidth > 0) { goto redraw; } } } else if (eventPtr->type == ActivateNotify) { Tk_SetMainMenubar(framePtr->interp, framePtr->tkwin, (framePtr->menuNameObj ? Tcl_GetString(framePtr->menuNameObj) : NULL)); } |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkIcu.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
88 89 90 91 92 93 94 | locale = NULL; } } Tcl_DStringInit(&ds); str = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[1], &len); Tcl_UtfToChar16DString(str, len, &ds); len = Tcl_DStringLength(&ds)/2; | | > > | | 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 | locale = NULL; } } Tcl_DStringInit(&ds); str = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[1], &len); Tcl_UtfToChar16DString(str, len, &ds); len = Tcl_DStringLength(&ds)/2; Tcl_Size ulen = TkGetCharLength(objv[1]); if (TkGetIntForIndex(objv[2], ulen-1, 0, &idx) != TCL_OK) { Tcl_DStringFree(&ds); Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf("bad index \"%s\": must be integer?[+-]integer?, end?[+-]integer?, or \"\"", Tcl_GetString(objv[2]))); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "ICU", "INDEX", (char *)NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } it = icu_open((UBreakIteratorTypex)(flags&3), locale, NULL, -1, &errorCode); if (it != NULL) { errorCode = U_ZERO_ERRORZ; ustr = (const uint16_t *)Tcl_DStringValue(&ds); icu_setText(it, ustr, len, &errorCode); } if (it == NULL || errorCode != U_ZERO_ERRORZ) { Tcl_DStringFree(&ds); Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf("cannot open ICU iterator, errorcode: %d", (int)errorCode)); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "ICU", "CANNOTOPEN", (char *)NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } if (idx >= ulen) { idx = len; } else if (idx > 0 && len != ulen) { /* The string contains codepoints > \uFFFF. Determine UTF-16 index */ Tcl_Size newIdx = 0; for (Tcl_Size i = 0; i < idx; i++) { newIdx += 1 + (((newIdx < (Tcl_Size)len-1) && (ustr[newIdx]&0xFC00) == 0xD800) && ((ustr[newIdx+1]&0xFC00) == 0xDC00)); } idx = newIdx; } |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkImage.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
127 128 129 130 131 132 133 | ckfree(freePtr); } } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * | | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 | ckfree(freePtr); } } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * Tk_CreateOldImageType, Tk_CreateImageType -- * * This function is invoked by an image manager to tell Tk about a new * kind of image and the functions that manage the new type. The function * is typically invoked during Tcl_AppInit. * * Results: * None. * * Side effects: * The new image type is entered into a table used in the "image create" * command. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ void Tk_CreateOldImageType( const Tk_ImageType *typePtr) /* Structure describing the type. All of the * fields except "nextPtr" must be filled in * by caller. */ { Tk_ImageType *copyPtr; ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData)); if (!tsdPtr->initialized) { tsdPtr->initialized = 1; Tcl_CreateThreadExitHandler(ImageTypeThreadExitProc, NULL); } copyPtr = (Tk_ImageType *)ckalloc(sizeof(Tk_ImageType)); *copyPtr = *typePtr; copyPtr->nextPtr = tsdPtr->oldImageTypeList; tsdPtr->oldImageTypeList = copyPtr; } void Tk_CreateImageType( const Tk_ImageType *typePtr) /* Structure describing the type. All of the * fields except "nextPtr" must be filled in * by caller. */ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkImgBmap.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
236 237 238 239 240 241 242 | int flags) /* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget, such * as TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY. */ { BitmapInstance *instancePtr; int maskWidth, maskHeight, dummy1, dummy2; if (Tk_ConfigureWidget(modelPtr->interp, Tk_MainWindow(modelPtr->interp), | | | 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 | int flags) /* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget, such * as TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY. */ { BitmapInstance *instancePtr; int maskWidth, maskHeight, dummy1, dummy2; if (Tk_ConfigureWidget(modelPtr->interp, Tk_MainWindow(modelPtr->interp), configSpecs, objc, (const char **)objv, (char *)modelPtr, flags|TK_CONFIG_OBJS) != TCL_OK) { return TCL_ERROR; } /* * Parse the bitmap and/or mask to create binary data. Make sure that the * bitmap and mask have the same dimensions. */ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkImgPhoto.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 | NULL }; typedef struct { Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatList; /* Pointer to the first in the list of known * photo image formats.*/ Tk_PhotoImageFormatVersion3 *formatListVersion3; /* Pointer to the first in the list of known * photo image formats in Version3 format.*/ int initialized; /* Set to 1 if we've initialized the * structure. */ } ThreadSpecificData; static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey; | > > > > > | 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 | NULL }; typedef struct { Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatList; /* Pointer to the first in the list of known * photo image formats.*/ #if !defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) && TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 Tk_PhotoImageFormat *oldFormatList; /* Pointer to the first in the list of known * photo image formats.*/ #endif Tk_PhotoImageFormatVersion3 *formatListVersion3; /* Pointer to the first in the list of known * photo image formats in Version3 format.*/ int initialized; /* Set to 1 if we've initialized the * structure. */ } ThreadSpecificData; static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
158 159 160 161 162 163 164 | /* * Information used for parsing configuration specifications: */ static const Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = { {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-data", NULL, NULL, | | | | | | 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 | /* * Information used for parsing configuration specifications: */ static const Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = { {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-data", NULL, NULL, NULL, TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK|TK_CONFIG_OBJS, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-file", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(PhotoModel, fileObj), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK|TK_CONFIG_OBJS, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-format", NULL, NULL, NULL, TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK|TK_CONFIG_OBJS, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_DOUBLE, "-gamma", NULL, NULL, DEF_PHOTO_GAMMA, offsetof(PhotoModel, gamma), 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_INT, "-height", NULL, NULL, DEF_PHOTO_HEIGHT, offsetof(PhotoModel, userHeight), 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-metadata", NULL, NULL, NULL, TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK|TK_CONFIG_OBJS, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_UID, "-palette", NULL, NULL, DEF_PHOTO_PALETTE, offsetof(PhotoModel, palette), 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_INT, "-width", NULL, NULL, DEF_PHOTO_WIDTH, offsetof(PhotoModel, userWidth), 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, NULL} }; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 | TCL_UNUSED(void *)) /* not used */ { Tk_PhotoImageFormat *freePtr; Tk_PhotoImageFormatVersion3 *freePtrVersion3; ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData)); while (tsdPtr->formatList != NULL) { freePtr = tsdPtr->formatList; tsdPtr->formatList = tsdPtr->formatList->nextPtr; | > > > > > > > | | | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 | TCL_UNUSED(void *)) /* not used */ { Tk_PhotoImageFormat *freePtr; Tk_PhotoImageFormatVersion3 *freePtrVersion3; ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData)); #if !defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) && TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 while (tsdPtr->oldFormatList != NULL) { freePtr = tsdPtr->oldFormatList; tsdPtr->oldFormatList = tsdPtr->oldFormatList->nextPtr; ckfree(freePtr); } #endif while (tsdPtr->formatList != NULL) { freePtr = tsdPtr->formatList; tsdPtr->formatList = tsdPtr->formatList->nextPtr; ckfree((char *)freePtr->name); ckfree(freePtr); } while (tsdPtr->formatListVersion3 != NULL) { freePtrVersion3 = tsdPtr->formatListVersion3; tsdPtr->formatListVersion3 = tsdPtr->formatListVersion3->nextPtr; ckfree((char *)freePtrVersion3->name); ckfree(freePtrVersion3); } } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat, Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat, * Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormatVersion3 -- * * This function is invoked by an image file handler to register a new * photo image format and the functions that handle the new format. The * function is typically invoked during Tcl_AppInit. * * Results: * None. * * Side effects: * The new image file format is entered into a table used in the photo * image "read" and "write" subcommands. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ #if !defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) && TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 void Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat( const Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr) /* Structure describing the format. All of the * fields except "nextPtr" must be filled in * by caller. */ { Tk_PhotoImageFormat *copyPtr; ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData)); if (!tsdPtr->initialized) { tsdPtr->initialized = 1; Tcl_CreateThreadExitHandler(PhotoFormatThreadExitProc, NULL); } copyPtr = (Tk_PhotoImageFormat *)ckalloc(sizeof(Tk_PhotoImageFormat)); *copyPtr = *formatPtr; copyPtr->nextPtr = tsdPtr->oldFormatList; tsdPtr->oldFormatList = copyPtr; } #endif void Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat( const Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr) /* Structure describing the format. All of the * fields except "nextPtr" must be filled in * by caller. */ { Tk_PhotoImageFormat *copyPtr; ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData)); if (!tsdPtr->initialized) { tsdPtr->initialized = 1; Tcl_CreateThreadExitHandler(PhotoFormatThreadExitProc, NULL); } copyPtr = (Tk_PhotoImageFormat *)ckalloc(sizeof(Tk_PhotoImageFormat)); *copyPtr = *formatPtr; #if !defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) && TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 if (isupper((unsigned char) *formatPtr->name)) { copyPtr->nextPtr = tsdPtr->oldFormatList; tsdPtr->oldFormatList = copyPtr; } else #endif { /* for compatibility with aMSN: make a copy of formatPtr->name */ char *name = (char *)ckalloc(strlen(formatPtr->name) + 1); strcpy(name, formatPtr->name); copyPtr->name = name; copyPtr->nextPtr = tsdPtr->formatList; tsdPtr->formatList = copyPtr; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 | matched = 1; if (imageFormat->stringWriteProc != NULL) { stringWriteProc = imageFormat->stringWriteProc; break; } } } if (stringWriteProc == NULL) { oldformat = 0; for (imageFormatVersion3 = tsdPtr->formatListVersion3; imageFormatVersion3 != NULL; imageFormatVersion3 = imageFormatVersion3->nextPtr) { if ((strncasecmp(Tcl_GetString(options.format), imageFormatVersion3->name, | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 | matched = 1; if (imageFormat->stringWriteProc != NULL) { stringWriteProc = imageFormat->stringWriteProc; break; } } } #if !defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) && TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 if (stringWriteProc == NULL) { oldformat = 1; for (imageFormat = tsdPtr->oldFormatList; imageFormat != NULL; imageFormat = imageFormat->nextPtr) { if ((strncasecmp(Tcl_GetString(options.format), imageFormat->name, strlen(imageFormat->name)) == 0)) { matched = 1; if (imageFormat->stringWriteProc != NULL) { stringWriteProc = imageFormat->stringWriteProc; break; } } } } #endif if (stringWriteProc == NULL) { oldformat = 0; for (imageFormatVersion3 = tsdPtr->formatListVersion3; imageFormatVersion3 != NULL; imageFormatVersion3 = imageFormatVersion3->nextPtr) { if ((strncasecmp(Tcl_GetString(options.format), imageFormatVersion3->name, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1446 1447 1448 1449 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 1457 1458 1459 | strlen(imageFormat->name)) == 0)) { matched = 1; if (imageFormat->fileWriteProc != NULL) { break; } } } if (imageFormat == NULL) { oldformat = 0; for (imageFormatVersion3 = tsdPtr->formatListVersion3; imageFormatVersion3 != NULL; imageFormatVersion3 = imageFormatVersion3->nextPtr) { if ((fmtString == NULL) || (strncasecmp(fmtString, imageFormatVersion3->name, | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1504 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 1525 1526 1527 1528 1529 1530 1531 1532 1533 | strlen(imageFormat->name)) == 0)) { matched = 1; if (imageFormat->fileWriteProc != NULL) { break; } } } #if !defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) && TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 if (imageFormat == NULL) { oldformat = 1; for (imageFormat = tsdPtr->oldFormatList; imageFormat != NULL; imageFormat = imageFormat->nextPtr) { if ((fmtString == NULL) || (strncasecmp(fmtString, imageFormat->name, strlen(imageFormat->name)) == 0)) { matched = 1; if (imageFormat->fileWriteProc != NULL) { break; } } } } #endif if (imageFormat == NULL) { oldformat = 0; for (imageFormatVersion3 = tsdPtr->formatListVersion3; imageFormatVersion3 != NULL; imageFormatVersion3 = imageFormatVersion3->nextPtr) { if ((fmtString == NULL) || (strncasecmp(fmtString, imageFormatVersion3->name, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1966 1967 1968 1969 1970 1971 1972 | oldGamma = modelPtr->gamma; /* * Process the configuration options specified. */ if (Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp), configSpecs, | | | 2040 2041 2042 2043 2044 2045 2046 2047 2048 2049 2050 2051 2052 2053 2054 | oldGamma = modelPtr->gamma; /* * Process the configuration options specified. */ if (Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp), configSpecs, objc, (const char **)objv, (char *)modelPtr, flags|TK_CONFIG_OBJS) != TCL_OK) { goto errorExit; } /* * Regard the empty string for -file, -data, -format or -metadata as the null value. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2691 2692 2693 2694 2695 2696 2697 2698 2699 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704 | if (*heightPtr < 1) { *heightPtr = 1; } break; } } } /* * For old and not version 3 format, exit now with success */ if (formatPtr != NULL) { *imageFormatPtr = formatPtr; | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 2765 2766 2767 2768 2769 2770 2771 2772 2773 2774 2775 2776 2777 2778 2779 2780 2781 2782 2783 2784 2785 2786 2787 2788 2789 2790 2791 2792 2793 2794 2795 2796 2797 2798 2799 2800 2801 2802 2803 2804 2805 2806 2807 2808 2809 2810 2811 2812 2813 2814 | if (*heightPtr < 1) { *heightPtr = 1; } break; } } } #if !defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) && TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 if (formatPtr == NULL) { useoldformat = 1; for (formatPtr = tsdPtr->oldFormatList; formatPtr != NULL; formatPtr = formatPtr->nextPtr) { if (formatString != NULL) { if (strncasecmp(formatString, formatPtr->name, strlen(formatPtr->name)) != 0) { continue; } matched = 1; if (formatPtr->fileMatchProc == NULL) { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "-file option isn't supported for %s images", formatString)); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "PHOTO", "NOT_FILE_FORMAT", (char *)NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } } if (formatPtr->fileMatchProc != NULL) { (void) Tcl_Seek(chan, Tcl_LongAsWide(0L), SEEK_SET); if (formatPtr->fileMatchProc(chan, fileName, (Tcl_Obj *) formatString, widthPtr, heightPtr, interp)) { if (*widthPtr < 1) { *widthPtr = 1; } if (*heightPtr < 1) { *heightPtr = 1; } break; } } } } #endif /* * For old and not version 3 format, exit now with success */ if (formatPtr != NULL) { *imageFormatPtr = formatPtr; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2887 2888 2889 2890 2891 2892 2893 2894 2895 2896 2897 2898 2899 2900 | if ((formatPtr->stringMatchProc != NULL) && (formatPtr->stringReadProc != NULL) && formatPtr->stringMatchProc(data, formatObj, widthPtr, heightPtr, interp)) { break; } } if (formatPtr == NULL) { useoldformat = 0; for (formatVersion3Ptr = tsdPtr->formatListVersion3; formatVersion3Ptr != NULL; formatVersion3Ptr = formatVersion3Ptr->nextPtr) { if (formatObj != NULL) { | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 2997 2998 2999 3000 3001 3002 3003 3004 3005 3006 3007 3008 3009 3010 3011 3012 3013 3014 3015 3016 3017 3018 3019 3020 3021 3022 3023 3024 3025 3026 3027 3028 3029 3030 3031 3032 3033 3034 3035 3036 3037 3038 3039 3040 3041 3042 | if ((formatPtr->stringMatchProc != NULL) && (formatPtr->stringReadProc != NULL) && formatPtr->stringMatchProc(data, formatObj, widthPtr, heightPtr, interp)) { break; } } #if !defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) && TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 if (formatPtr == NULL) { useoldformat = 1; for (formatPtr = tsdPtr->oldFormatList; formatPtr != NULL; formatPtr = formatPtr->nextPtr) { if (formatObj != NULL) { if (strncasecmp(formatString, formatPtr->name, strlen(formatPtr->name)) != 0) { continue; } matched = 1; if (formatPtr->stringMatchProc == NULL) { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "-data option isn't supported for %s images", formatString)); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "PHOTO", "NOT_DATA_FORMAT", (char *)NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } } if ((formatPtr->stringMatchProc != NULL) && (formatPtr->stringReadProc != NULL) && formatPtr->stringMatchProc( (Tcl_Obj *) Tcl_GetString(data), (Tcl_Obj *) formatString, widthPtr, heightPtr, interp)) { break; } } } #endif if (formatPtr == NULL) { useoldformat = 0; for (formatVersion3Ptr = tsdPtr->formatListVersion3; formatVersion3Ptr != NULL; formatVersion3Ptr = formatVersion3Ptr->nextPtr) { if (formatObj != NULL) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4375 4376 4377 4378 4379 4380 4381 4382 4383 4384 4385 4386 4387 4388 4389 | Tk_PhotoGetImage(clientData, &block); block.pixelPtr += y * block.pitch + x * block.pixelSize; return Tk_PostscriptPhoto(interp, &block, psInfo, width, height); } /* * Local Variables: * mode: c * c-basic-offset: 4 * fill-column: 78 * tab-width: 8 * End: */ | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 4517 4518 4519 4520 4521 4522 4523 4524 4525 4526 4527 4528 4529 4530 4531 4532 4533 4534 4535 4536 4537 4538 4539 4540 4541 4542 4543 4544 4545 4546 4547 4548 4549 4550 4551 4552 4553 4554 4555 4556 4557 4558 4559 4560 4561 4562 4563 4564 4565 4566 4567 4568 4569 4570 4571 4572 4573 4574 4575 4576 4577 4578 4579 4580 4581 4582 4583 4584 4585 4586 4587 4588 4589 4590 4591 4592 4593 4594 4595 4596 4597 4598 4599 4600 4601 4602 4603 4604 4605 4606 4607 4608 4609 4610 4611 4612 4613 4614 4615 4616 4617 4618 4619 4620 4621 4622 4623 4624 4625 4626 4627 4628 4629 4630 4631 4632 | Tk_PhotoGetImage(clientData, &block); block.pixelPtr += y * block.pitch + x * block.pixelSize; return Tk_PostscriptPhoto(interp, &block, psInfo, width, height); } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * Tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite, Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite -- * * These backward-compatibility functions just exist to fill slots in stubs * table. For the behaviour of *_NoComposite, refer to the corresponding * function without the extra suffix, except that the compositing rule is * always "overlay" and the function always panics on memory-allocation * failure. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ #if !defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) && TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 void Tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite( Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height) { if (Tk_PhotoPutBlock(NULL, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height, TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_OVERLAY) != TCL_OK) { Tcl_Panic(TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE); } } void Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite( Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int zoomX, int zoomY, int subsampleX, int subsampleY) { if (Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock(NULL, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height, zoomX, zoomY, subsampleX, subsampleY, TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_OVERLAY) != TCL_OK) { Tcl_Panic(TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE); } } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic, Tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic, * Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic, Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic * * Backward compatibility functions for preserving the old behaviour (i.e. * panic on memory allocation failure) so that extensions do not need to be * significantly updated to take account of TIP #116. These call the new * interface (i.e. the interface without the extra suffix), but panic if an * error condition is returned. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ void Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic( Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height) { if (Tk_PhotoExpand(NULL, handle, width, height) != TCL_OK) { Tcl_Panic(TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE); } } void Tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic( Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int compRule) { if (Tk_PhotoPutBlock(NULL, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height, compRule) != TCL_OK) { Tcl_Panic(TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE); } } void Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic( Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int zoomX, int zoomY, int subsampleX, int subsampleY, int compRule) { if (Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock(NULL, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height, zoomX, zoomY, subsampleX, subsampleY, compRule) != TCL_OK) { Tcl_Panic(TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE); } } void Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic( Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height) { if (Tk_PhotoSetSize(NULL, handle, width, height) != TCL_OK) { Tcl_Panic(TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE); } } #endif /* TK_NO_DEPRECATED */ /* * Local Variables: * mode: c * c-basic-offset: 4 * fill-column: 78 * tab-width: 8 * End: */ |
Changes to generic/tkInt.decls.
︙ | ︙ | |||
64 65 66 67 68 69 70 | declare 12 { TkCursor *TkCreateCursorFromData(Tk_Window tkwin, const char *source, const char *mask, int width, int height, int xHot, int yHot, XColor fg, XColor bg) } declare 13 { int TkCreateFrame(void *clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, | | | 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 | declare 12 { TkCursor *TkCreateCursorFromData(Tk_Window tkwin, const char *source, const char *mask, int width, int height, int xHot, int yHot, XColor fg, XColor bg) } declare 13 { int TkCreateFrame(void *clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Size argc, const char *const *argv, int toplevel, const char *appName) } declare 14 { Tk_Window TkCreateMainWindow(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *screenName, const char *baseName) } declare 15 { Time TkCurrentTime(TkDisplay *dispPtr) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 | } declare 58 { void TkpDisplayWarning(const char *msg, const char *title) } declare 59 { void TkpGetAppName(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_DString *name) } declare 61 { TkWindow *TkpGetWrapperWindow(TkWindow *winPtr) } declare 62 { int TkpInit(Tcl_Interp *interp) } declare 63 { void TkpInitializeMenuBindings(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_BindingTable bindingTable) } declare 65 { void TkpMakeMenuWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, int transient) } declare 67 { void TkpMenuNotifyToplevelCreate(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *menuName) } declare 68 { TkDisplay *TkpOpenDisplay(const char *display_name) } declare 69 { | > > > > > > > > > | 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 | } declare 58 { void TkpDisplayWarning(const char *msg, const char *title) } declare 59 { void TkpGetAppName(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_DString *name) } declare 60 {deprecated {renamed to Tk_GetOtherWindow}} { TkWindow *TkpGetOtherWindow(TkWindow *winPtr) } declare 61 { TkWindow *TkpGetWrapperWindow(TkWindow *winPtr) } declare 62 { int TkpInit(Tcl_Interp *interp) } declare 63 { void TkpInitializeMenuBindings(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_BindingTable bindingTable) } declare 64 {deprecated {renamed to Tk_MakeContainer}} { void TkpMakeContainer(Tk_Window tkwin) } declare 65 { void TkpMakeMenuWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, int transient) } declare 66 {deprecated {renamed to Tk_MakeWindow}} { Window TkpMakeWindow(TkWindow *winPtr, Window parent) } declare 67 { void TkpMenuNotifyToplevelCreate(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *menuName) } declare 68 { TkDisplay *TkpOpenDisplay(const char *display_name) } declare 69 { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 | } declare 72 { int TkPositionInTree(TkWindow *winPtr, TkWindow *treePtr) } declare 73 { void TkpRedirectKeyEvent(TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr) } declare 77 { void TkQueueEventForAllChildren(TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr) } declare 78 { int TkReadBitmapFile(Display *display, Drawable d, const char *filename, unsigned int *width_return, unsigned int *height_return, Pixmap *bitmap_return, int *x_hot_return, int *y_hot_return) | > > > > > > > > > | 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 | } declare 72 { int TkPositionInTree(TkWindow *winPtr, TkWindow *treePtr) } declare 73 { void TkpRedirectKeyEvent(TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr) } declare 74 {deprecated {renamed to Tk_SetMainMenubar}} { void TkpSetMainMenubar(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *menuName) } declare 75 {deprecated {renamed to Tk_UseWindow}} { int TkpUseWindow(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *string) } # # Slot 76 unused (WAS: TkpWindowWasRecentlyDeleted) # declare 77 { void TkQueueEventForAllChildren(TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr) } declare 78 { int TkReadBitmapFile(Display *display, Drawable d, const char *filename, unsigned int *width_return, unsigned int *height_return, Pixmap *bitmap_return, int *x_hot_return, int *y_hot_return) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 | } declare 82 { void TkSelInit(Tk_Window tkwin) } declare 83 { void TkSelPropProc(XEvent *eventPtr) } declare 86 { KeySym TkStringToKeysym(const char *name) } declare 87 { int TkThickPolyLineToArea(double *coordPtr, int numPoints, double width, int capStyle, int joinStyle, double *rectPtr) } | > > > > > > > > > > | 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 | } declare 82 { void TkSelInit(Tk_Window tkwin) } declare 83 { void TkSelPropProc(XEvent *eventPtr) } # Exported publically as Tk_SetClassProcs in 8.4a2 #declare 84 { # void TkSetClassProcs(Tk_Window tkwin, # TkClassProcs *procs, void *instanceData) #} declare 85 {deprecated {renamed to Tk_SetWindowMenubar}} { void TkSetWindowMenuBar(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *oldMenuName, const char *menuName) } declare 86 { KeySym TkStringToKeysym(const char *name) } declare 87 { int TkThickPolyLineToArea(double *coordPtr, int numPoints, double width, int capStyle, int joinStyle, double *rectPtr) } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 | } declare 109 { const char *TkpGetString(TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr, Tcl_DString *dsPtr) } declare 110 { void TkpGetSubFonts(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Font tkfont) } declare 112 { void TkpMenuThreadInit(void) } declare 113 { int XClipBox(Region rgn, XRectangle *rect_return) } declare 114 { | > > > > | 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 | } declare 109 { const char *TkpGetString(TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr, Tcl_DString *dsPtr) } declare 110 { void TkpGetSubFonts(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Font tkfont) } declare 111 {deprecated {renamed to Tk_GetSystemDefault}} { Tcl_Obj *TkpGetSystemDefault(Tk_Window tkwin, const char *dbName, const char *className) } declare 112 { void TkpMenuThreadInit(void) } declare 113 { int XClipBox(Region rgn, XRectangle *rect_return) } declare 114 { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
388 389 390 391 392 393 394 | declare 118 { int XSetRegion(Display *display, GC gc, Region rgn) } declare 119 { int XUnionRectWithRegion(XRectangle *rect, Region src, Region dr_return) } | | | | > > > > | 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 | declare 118 { int XSetRegion(Display *display, GC gc, Region rgn) } declare 119 { int XUnionRectWithRegion(XRectangle *rect, Region src, Region dr_return) } declare 121 aqua { Pixmap TkpCreateNativeBitmap(Display *display, const void *source) } declare 122 aqua { void TkpDefineNativeBitmaps(void) } declare 124 aqua { Pixmap TkpGetNativeAppBitmap(Display *display, const char *name, int *width, int *height) } declare 135 {deprecated {renamed to Tk_DrawHighlightBorder}} { void TkpDrawHighlightBorder(Tk_Window tkwin, GC fgGC, GC bgGC, int highlightWidth, Drawable drawable) } declare 136 { void TkSetFocusWin(TkWindow *winPtr, int force) } declare 137 { void TkpSetKeycodeAndState(Tk_Window tkwin, KeySym keySym, XEvent *eventPtr) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 | declare 0 x11 { void TkCreateXEventSource(void) } declare 2 x11 { void TkGenerateActivateEvents(TkWindow *winPtr, int active) } declare 6 x11 { int TkpScanWindowId(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *string, Window *idPtr) } declare 9 x11 { int TkpWmSetState(TkWindow *winPtr, int state) } # only needed by tktest: declare 38 x11 { | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | | | | | | | | | 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 | declare 0 x11 { void TkCreateXEventSource(void) } declare 2 x11 { void TkGenerateActivateEvents(TkWindow *winPtr, int active) } declare 3 x11 { int TkpCmapStressed(Tk_Window tkwin, Colormap colormap) } declare 4 x11 { void TkpSync(Display *display) } declare 5 x11 { Window TkUnixContainerId(TkWindow *winPtr) } declare 6 x11 { int TkUnixDoOneXEvent(Tcl_Time *timePtr) } declare 7 x11 { void TkUnixSetMenubar(Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Window menubar) } declare 8 x11 { int TkpScanWindowId(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *string, Window *idPtr) } declare 9 x11 { void TkWmCleanup(TkDisplay *dispPtr) } declare 10 x11 { void TkSendCleanup(TkDisplay *dispPtr) } declare 12 x11 { int TkpWmSetState(TkWindow *winPtr, int state) } # only needed by tktest: declare 13 x11 { int TkpTestsendCmd_(void *clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) } declare 38 x11 { int TkpCmapStressed_(Tk_Window tkwin, Colormap colormap) } declare 39 x11 { void TkpSync_(Display *display) } declare 40 x11 { Window TkUnixContainerId_(TkWindow *winPtr) } declare 41 x11 { int TkUnixDoOneXEvent_(Tcl_Time *timePtr) } declare 42 x11 { void TkUnixSetMenubar_(Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Window menubar) } declare 43 x11 { void TkWmCleanup_(TkDisplay *dispPtr) } declare 44 x11 { void TkSendCleanup_(TkDisplay *dispPtr) } # only needed by tktest: declare 45 x11 { int TkpTestsendCmd(void *clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) } ################################ # Windows specific functions declare 0 win { char *TkAlignImageData(XImage *image, int alignment, int bitOrder) } declare 2 win { void TkGenerateActivateEvents(TkWindow *winPtr, int active) } declare 3 win { unsigned long TkpGetMS(void) } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
767 768 769 770 771 772 773 | void TkWinDialogDebug(int debug) } declare 32 win { Tcl_Obj *TkWinGetMenuSystemDefault(Tk_Window tkwin, const char *dbName, const char *className) } declare 33 win { | | > > > > | 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 | void TkWinDialogDebug(int debug) } declare 32 win { Tcl_Obj *TkWinGetMenuSystemDefault(Tk_Window tkwin, const char *dbName, const char *className) } declare 33 win { int TkWinGetPlatformId(void) } # new for 8.4.1 declare 34 win { void TkWinSetHINSTANCE(HINSTANCE hInstance) } declare 35 win { int TkWinGetPlatformTheme(void) } # Exported through stub table since Tk 8.4.20/8.5.9 declare 36 win { LRESULT __stdcall TkWinChildProc(HWND hwnd, UINT message, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam) } # new for 8.4.20+/8.5.12+, Cygwin only declare 37 win { void TkCreateXEventSource(void) } declare 38 win { int TkpCmapStressed(Tk_Window tkwin, Colormap colormap) } declare 39 win { void TkpSync(Display *display) } declare 40 win { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
819 820 821 822 823 824 825 | declare 47 win { Tk_Window TkpGetCapture(void) } ################################ # Aqua specific functions | | | | | | | | > | | < > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 | declare 47 win { Tk_Window TkpGetCapture(void) } ################################ # Aqua specific functions declare 0 aqua { void TkGenerateActivateEvents(TkWindow *winPtr, int active) } declare 2 aqua { void TkGenerateActivateEvents_(TkWindow *winPtr, int active) } declare 3 aqua { void TkPointerDeadWindow(TkWindow *winPtr) } declare 4 aqua { void TkpSetCapture(TkWindow *winPtr) } declare 5 aqua { void TkpSetCursor(TkpCursor cursor) } declare 6 aqua { void TkpWmSetState(TkWindow *winPtr, int state) } declare 7 aqua { void TkAboutDlg(void) } declare 8 aqua { unsigned int TkMacOSXButtonKeyState(void) } declare 9 aqua { void TkMacOSXClearMenubarActive(void) } declare 10 aqua { int TkMacOSXDispatchMenuEvent(int menuID, int index) } # Now a static function # declare 11 aqua { # void TkMacOSXInstallCursor(int resizeOverride) # } declare 12 aqua { void TkMacOSXHandleTearoffMenu(void) } declare 14 aqua { int TkMacOSXDoHLEvent(void *theEvent) } declare 16 aqua { Window TkMacOSXGetXWindow(void *macWinPtr) } declare 17 aqua { int TkMacOSXGrowToplevel(void *whichWindow, XPoint start) } declare 18 aqua { void TkMacOSXHandleMenuSelect(short theMenu, unsigned short theItem, int optionKeyPressed) } # removed duplicates from tkPlat table(tk.decls) #declare 19 aqua { # void TkMacOSXInitAppleEvents(Tcl_Interp *interp) #} # #declare 20 aqua { # void TkMacOSXInitMenus(Tcl_Interp *interp) #} declare 21 aqua { void TkMacOSXInvalidateWindow(MacDrawable *macWin, int flag) } declare 22 aqua { int TkMacOSXIsCharacterMissing(Tk_Font tkfont, unsigned int searchChar) } declare 23 aqua { void TkMacOSXMakeRealWindowExist(TkWindow *winPtr) } declare 24 aqua { void *TkMacOSXMakeStippleMap(Drawable d1, Drawable d2) } declare 25 aqua { void TkMacOSXMenuClick(void) } # The corresponding Unregister was not a stub, and this should be static. #declare 26 aqua { # void TkMacOSXRegisterOffScreenWindow(Window window, void *portPtr) #} declare 27 aqua { int TkMacOSXResizable(TkWindow *winPtr) } declare 28 aqua { void TkMacOSXSetHelpMenuItemCount(void) } declare 29 aqua { void TkMacOSXSetScrollbarGrow(TkWindow *winPtr, int flag) } declare 30 aqua { void TkMacOSXSetUpClippingRgn(Drawable drawable) } declare 31 aqua { void TkMacOSXSetUpGraphicsPort(GC gc, void *destPort) } declare 32 aqua { void TkMacOSXUpdateClipRgn(TkWindow *winPtr) } # This was not implemented. Perhaps meant to be OffScreen ? #declare 33 aqua { # void TkMacOSXUnregisterMacWindow(void *portPtr) #} declare 34 aqua { int TkMacOSXUseMenuID(short macID) } declare 35 aqua { Region TkMacOSXVisableClipRgn(TkWindow *winPtr) } declare 36 aqua { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
944 945 946 947 948 949 950 | } declare 50 aqua { int TkGenerateButtonEvent(int x, int y, Window window, unsigned int state) } declare 51 aqua { void TkGenWMDestroyEvent(Tk_Window tkwin) } | < > | < > | > > > | | < > > > > | 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 | } declare 50 aqua { int TkGenerateButtonEvent(int x, int y, Window window, unsigned int state) } declare 51 aqua { void TkGenWMDestroyEvent(Tk_Window tkwin) } declare 52 aqua { void TkMacOSXSetDrawingEnabled(TkWindow *winPtr, int flag) } declare 53 aqua { unsigned long TkpGetMS(void) } # For Canvas3d, requested by Sean Woods declare 54 aqua { void *TkMacOSXDrawable(Drawable drawable) } declare 55 aqua { int TkpScanWindowId(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *string, Window *idPtr) } ############################################################################## # Define the platform specific internal Xlib interfaces. These functions are # only available on the designated platform. interface tkIntXlib |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1494 1495 1496 1497 1498 1499 1500 | declare 5 macosx { char *XKeysymToString(KeySym k) } declare 6 macosx { Colormap XCreateColormap(Display *d, Window w, Visual *v, int i) } declare 7 macosx { | < < < < < < < < < < < < | | | | | < < < < < < < < < | | | | < < < | | | | | | | < < < | | | | | | | < < < | < < < | | | < < < | < < < | | | < < < < | | | < < < < < < < < < | < < < < | | | | | < < < | | | | | | | | | < < < < | | < < < | < < < < < < < < < < | < < < < | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | > > > > > > > | > > > > | > > | | | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | > > | > > | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | > < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1590 1591 1592 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 1623 1624 1625 1626 1627 1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 1645 1646 1647 1648 1649 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 1655 1656 1657 1658 1659 1660 1661 1662 1663 1664 1665 1666 1667 1668 1669 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 1676 1677 1678 1679 1680 1681 1682 1683 1684 1685 1686 1687 1688 1689 1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 1697 1698 1699 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765 1766 1767 1768 1769 1770 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 1790 1791 1792 1793 1794 1795 1796 1797 1798 1799 1800 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 1816 1817 1818 1819 1820 1821 1822 1823 1824 1825 1826 1827 1828 1829 1830 1831 1832 1833 1834 1835 1836 1837 1838 1839 1840 1841 1842 1843 1844 1845 1846 1847 1848 1849 1850 1851 1852 1853 1854 1855 1856 1857 1858 1859 1860 1861 1862 1863 1864 1865 1866 1867 1868 1869 1870 1871 1872 1873 1874 1875 1876 1877 1878 1879 1880 1881 1882 1883 1884 1885 1886 1887 1888 1889 1890 1891 1892 1893 1894 1895 1896 1897 1898 1899 1900 1901 1902 1903 1904 1905 1906 1907 1908 1909 1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 1916 1917 1918 1919 1920 1921 1922 1923 1924 1925 1926 1927 1928 1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 1936 1937 1938 1939 1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 1946 1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 1968 1969 1970 1971 1972 1973 1974 1975 1976 1977 1978 1979 1980 1981 1982 1983 1984 1985 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 | declare 5 macosx { char *XKeysymToString(KeySym k) } declare 6 macosx { Colormap XCreateColormap(Display *d, Window w, Visual *v, int i) } declare 7 macosx { GContext XGContextFromGC(GC g) } # second parameter was of type KeyCode declare 8 macosx { KeySym XKeycodeToKeysym(Display *d, unsigned int k, int i) } declare 9 macosx { KeySym XStringToKeysym(_Xconst char *c) } declare 10 macosx { Window XRootWindow(Display *d, int i) } declare 11 macosx { XErrorHandler XSetErrorHandler(XErrorHandler x) } declare 12 macosx { Status XAllocColor(Display *d, Colormap c, XColor *xp) } declare 13 macosx { int XBell(Display *d, int i) } declare 14 macosx { int XChangeProperty(Display *d, Window w, Atom a1, Atom a2, int i1, int i2, _Xconst unsigned char *c, int i3) } declare 15 macosx { int XChangeWindowAttributes(Display *d, Window w, unsigned long ul, XSetWindowAttributes *x) } declare 16 macosx { int XConfigureWindow(Display *d, Window w, unsigned int i, XWindowChanges *x) } declare 17 macosx { int XCopyArea(Display *d, Drawable dr1, Drawable dr2, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4) } declare 18 macosx { int XCopyPlane(Display *d, Drawable dr1, Drawable dr2, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4, unsigned long ul) } declare 19 macosx { Pixmap XCreateBitmapFromData(Display *display, Drawable d, _Xconst char *data, unsigned int width, unsigned int height) } declare 20 macosx { int XDefineCursor(Display *d, Window w, Cursor c) } declare 21 macosx { int XDestroyWindow(Display *d, Window w) } declare 22 macosx { int XDrawArc(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4) } declare 23 macosx { int XDrawLines(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, XPoint *x, int i1, int i2) } declare 24 macosx { int XDrawRectangle(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2) } declare 25 macosx { int XFillArc(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4) } declare 26 macosx { int XFillPolygon(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, XPoint *x, int i1, int i2, int i3) } declare 27 macosx { int XFillRectangles(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, XRectangle *x, int i) } declare 28 macosx { int XFreeColormap(Display *d, Colormap c) } declare 29 macosx { int XFreeColors(Display *d, Colormap c, unsigned long *ulp, int i, unsigned long ul) } declare 30 macosx { int XFreeModifiermap(XModifierKeymap *x) } declare 31 macosx { Status XGetGeometry(Display *d, Drawable dr, Window *w, int *i1, int *i2, unsigned int *ui1, unsigned int *ui2, unsigned int *ui3, unsigned int *ui4) } declare 32 macosx { int XGetWindowProperty(Display *d, Window w, Atom a1, long l1, long l2, Bool b, Atom a2, Atom *ap, int *ip, unsigned long *ulp1, unsigned long *ulp2, unsigned char **cpp) } declare 33 macosx { int XGrabKeyboard(Display *d, Window w, Bool b, int i1, int i2, Time t) } declare 34 macosx { int XGrabPointer(Display *d, Window w1, Bool b, unsigned int ui, int i1, int i2, Window w2, Cursor c, Time t) } declare 35 macosx { KeyCode XKeysymToKeycode(Display *d, KeySym k) } declare 36 macosx { int XMapWindow(Display *d, Window w) } declare 37 macosx { int XMoveResizeWindow(Display *d, Window w, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2) } declare 38 macosx { int XMoveWindow(Display *d, Window w, int i1, int i2) } declare 39 macosx { Bool XQueryPointer(Display *d, Window w1, Window *w2, Window *w3, int *i1, int *i2, int *i3, int *i4, unsigned int *ui) } declare 40 macosx { int XRaiseWindow(Display *d, Window w) } declare 41 macosx { int XRefreshKeyboardMapping(XMappingEvent *x) } declare 42 macosx { int XResizeWindow(Display *d, Window w, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2) } declare 43 macosx { int XSelectInput(Display *d, Window w, long l) } declare 44 macosx { Status XSendEvent(Display *d, Window w, Bool b, long l, XEvent *x) } declare 45 macosx { int XSetIconName(Display *d, Window w, _Xconst char *c) } declare 46 macosx { int XSetInputFocus(Display *d, Window w, int i, Time t) } declare 47 macosx { int XSetSelectionOwner(Display *d, Atom a, Window w, Time t) } declare 48 macosx { int XSetWindowBackground(Display *d, Window w, unsigned long ul) } declare 49 macosx { int XSetWindowBackgroundPixmap(Display *d, Window w, Pixmap p) } declare 50 macosx { int XSetWindowBorder(Display *d, Window w, unsigned long ul) } declare 51 macosx { int XSetWindowBorderPixmap(Display *d, Window w, Pixmap p) } declare 52 macosx { int XSetWindowBorderWidth(Display *d, Window w, unsigned int ui) } declare 53 macosx { int XSetWindowColormap(Display *d, Window w, Colormap c) } declare 54 macosx { int XUngrabKeyboard(Display *d, Time t) } declare 55 macosx { int XUngrabPointer(Display *d, Time t) } declare 56 macosx { int XUnmapWindow(Display *d, Window w) } declare 57 macosx { int TkPutImage(unsigned long *colors, int ncolors, Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, XImage *image, int src_x, int src_y, int dest_x, int dest_y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height) } declare 58 macosx { Status XParseColor(Display *display, Colormap map, _Xconst char *spec, XColor *colorPtr) } declare 59 macosx { GC XCreateGC(Display *display, Drawable d, unsigned long valuemask, XGCValues *values) } declare 60 macosx { int XFreeGC(Display *display, GC gc) } declare 61 macosx { Atom XInternAtom(Display *display, _Xconst char *atom_name, Bool only_if_exists) } declare 62 macosx { int XSetBackground(Display *display, GC gc, unsigned long foreground) } declare 63 macosx { int XSetForeground(Display *display, GC gc, unsigned long foreground) } declare 64 macosx { int XSetClipMask(Display *display, GC gc, Pixmap pixmap) } declare 65 macosx { int XSetClipOrigin(Display *display, GC gc, int clip_x_origin, int clip_y_origin) } declare 66 macosx { int XSetTSOrigin(Display *display, GC gc, int ts_x_origin, int ts_y_origin) } declare 67 macosx { int XChangeGC(Display *d, GC gc, unsigned long mask, XGCValues *values) } declare 68 macosx { int XSetFont(Display *display, GC gc, Font font) } declare 69 macosx { int XSetArcMode(Display *display, GC gc, int arc_mode) } declare 70 macosx { int XSetStipple(Display *display, GC gc, Pixmap stipple) } declare 71 macosx { int XSetFillRule(Display *display, GC gc, int fill_rule) } declare 72 macosx { int XSetFillStyle(Display *display, GC gc, int fill_style) } declare 73 macosx { int XSetFunction(Display *display, GC gc, int function) } declare 74 macosx { int XSetLineAttributes(Display *display, GC gc, unsigned int line_width, int line_style, int cap_style, int join_style) } declare 75 macosx { int _XInitImageFuncPtrs(XImage *image) } declare 76 macosx { XIC XCreateIC(XIM xim, ...) } declare 77 macosx { XVisualInfo *XGetVisualInfo(Display *display, long vinfo_mask, XVisualInfo *vinfo_template, int *nitems_return) } declare 78 macosx { void XSetWMClientMachine(Display *display, Window w, XTextProperty *text_prop) } declare 79 macosx { Status XStringListToTextProperty(char **list, int count, XTextProperty *text_prop_return) } declare 80 macosx { int XDrawSegments(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, XSegment *segments, int nsegments) } declare 81 macosx { int XForceScreenSaver(Display *display, int mode) } declare 82 macosx { int XDrawLine(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2) } declare 83 macosx { int XFillRectangle(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, int x, int y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height) } declare 84 macosx { int XClearWindow(Display *d, Window w) } declare 85 macosx { int XDrawPoint(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, int x, int y) } declare 86 macosx { int XDrawPoints(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, XPoint *points, int npoints, int mode) } declare 87 macosx { int XWarpPointer(Display *display, Window src_w, Window dest_w, int src_x, int src_y, unsigned int src_width, unsigned int src_height, int dest_x, int dest_y) } declare 88 macosx { int XQueryColor(Display *display, Colormap colormap, XColor *def_in_out) } declare 89 macosx { int XQueryColors(Display *display, Colormap colormap, XColor *defs_in_out, int ncolors) } declare 90 macosx { Status XQueryTree(Display *d, Window w1, Window *w2, Window *w3, Window **w4, unsigned int *ui) } declare 91 macosx { int XSync(Display *display, Bool discard) } declare 92 macosx { Bool XTranslateCoordinates(Display *d, Window w1, Window w2, int i1, int i2, int *i3, int *i4, Window *w3) } declare 93 macosx { int XDeleteProperty(Display *d, Window w, Atom a) } declare 94 macosx { int XFreeCursor(Display *d, Cursor c) } declare 95 macosx { int XGetInputFocus(Display *d, Window *w, int *i) } declare 96 macosx { int XmbLookupString(XIC xi, XKeyPressedEvent *xk, char *c, int i, KeySym *k, Status *s) } declare 97 macosx { int XNextEvent(Display *d, XEvent *x) } declare 98 macosx { int XPutBackEvent(Display *d, XEvent *x) } declare 99 macosx { int XSetCommand(Display *d, Window w, char **c, int i) } declare 100 macosx { int XWindowEvent(Display *d, Window w, long l, XEvent *x) } declare 101 macosx { Status XGetWindowAttributes(Display *d, Window w, XWindowAttributes *x) } declare 102 macosx { Status XGetWMColormapWindows(Display *d, Window w, Window **wpp, int *ip) } declare 103 macosx { Status XIconifyWindow(Display *d, Window w, int i) } declare 104 macosx { Status XWithdrawWindow(Display *d, Window w, int i) } declare 105 macosx { XHostAddress *XListHosts(Display *d, int *i, Bool *b) } declare 106 macosx { int XSetClipRectangles(Display *display, GC gc, int clip_x_origin, int clip_y_origin, XRectangle rectangles[], int n, int ordering) } declare 107 macosx { int XFlush(Display *display) } declare 108 macosx { int XGrabServer(Display *display) } declare 109 macosx { int XUngrabServer(Display *display) } declare 110 macosx { int XFree(void *data) } declare 111 macosx { int XNoOp(Display *display) } declare 112 macosx { XAfterFunction XSynchronize(Display *display, Bool onoff) } declare 113 macosx { Status XLookupColor(Display *d, Colormap c1, _Xconst char *c2, XColor *x1, XColor *x2) } declare 114 macosx { VisualID XVisualIDFromVisual(Visual *visual) } declare 120 macosx { int XOffsetRegion(Region rgn, int dx, int dy) } declare 121 macosx { int XUnionRegion(Region srca, Region srcb, Region dr_return) } declare 122 macosx { Window XCreateWindow(Display *display, Window parent, int x, int y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height, unsigned int border_width, int depth, unsigned int clazz, Visual *visual, unsigned long value_mask, XSetWindowAttributes *attributes) } declare 129 macosx { int XLowerWindow(Display *d, Window w) } declare 130 macosx { int XFillArcs(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC gc, XArc *a, int n) } declare 131 macosx { int XDrawArcs(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC gc, XArc *a, int n) } declare 132 macosx { int XDrawRectangles(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC gc, XRectangle *r, int n) } declare 136 macosx { int XReparentWindow(Display *d, Window w, Window p, int x, int y) } declare 137 macosx { int XPutImage(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC gc, XImage *im, int sx, int sy, int dx, int dy, unsigned int w, unsigned int h) } declare 138 macosx { Region XPolygonRegion(XPoint *pts, int n, int rule) } declare 139 macosx { int XPointInRegion(Region rgn, int x, int y) } declare 140 macosx { XVaNestedList XVaCreateNestedList(int dummy, ...) } declare 141 macosx { char *XSetICValues(XIC xic, ...) } declare 142 macosx { char *XGetICValues(XIC xic, ...) } declare 143 macosx { void XSetICFocus(XIC xic) } declare 144 macosx { void XDestroyIC(XIC xic) } declare 145 macosx { Cursor XCreatePixmapCursor(Display *d, Pixmap p1, Pixmap p2, XColor *x1, XColor *x2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2) } declare 146 macosx { Cursor XCreateGlyphCursor(Display *d, Font f1, Font f2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, XColor _Xconst *x1, XColor _Xconst *x2) } declare 147 macosx { void XFreeFontSet(Display *display, XFontSet fontset) } declare 148 macosx { int XCloseIM(XIM im) } declare 149 macosx { |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkInt.h.
︙ | ︙ | |||
70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 | # define TCL_UNUSED(T) T # elif defined(__GNUC__) && (__GNUC__ > 2) # define TCL_UNUSED(T) T JOIN(dummy, __LINE__) __attribute__((unused)) # else # define TCL_UNUSED(T) T JOIN(dummy, __LINE__) # endif #endif #if defined(__STDC_VERSION__) && (__STDC_VERSION__ >= 199901L) # define TKFLEXARRAY #elif defined(__GNUC__) && (__GNUC__ > 2) # define TKFLEXARRAY 0 #else # define TKFLEXARRAY 1 #endif /* * Macros used to cast between pointers and integers (e.g. when storing an int * in ClientData), on 64-bit architectures they avoid gcc warning about "cast * to/from pointer from/to integer of different size". */ | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 | # define TCL_UNUSED(T) T # elif defined(__GNUC__) && (__GNUC__ > 2) # define TCL_UNUSED(T) T JOIN(dummy, __LINE__) __attribute__((unused)) # else # define TCL_UNUSED(T) T JOIN(dummy, __LINE__) # endif #endif #if (TCL_MAJOR_VERSION == 8) && defined(TCL_MINOR_VERSION) && (TCL_MINOR_VERSION < 7) # define Tcl_WCharToUtfDString ((char * (*)(const WCHAR *, int, Tcl_DString *))Tcl_UniCharToUtfDString) # define Tcl_UtfToWCharDString ((WCHAR * (*)(const char *, int, Tcl_DString *))Tcl_UtfToUniCharDString) # define Tcl_Char16ToUtfDString Tcl_UniCharToUtfDString # define Tcl_UtfToChar16DString Tcl_UtfToUniCharDString # define TCL_COMBINE 0 #endif /* Make available UTF-32 versions of the API, even though we compile with TCL_UTF_MAX=3 */ #if TCL_MAJOR_VERSION > 8 # define TkUtfToUniChar (tclStubsPtr->tcl_UtfToUniChar) /* 646 */ # define TkUniCharToUtf (tclStubsPtr->tcl_UniCharToUtf) /* 324 (without TCL_COMBINE) */ # define TkNumUtfChars (tclStubsPtr->tcl_NumUtfChars) /* 669 */ # define TkGetCharLength (tclStubsPtr->tcl_GetCharLength) /* 670 */ # define TkUtfAtIndex (tclStubsPtr->tcl_UtfAtIndex) /* 671 */ #else MODULE_SCOPE Tcl_Size TkUtfToUniChar(const char *, int *); MODULE_SCOPE Tcl_Size TkUniCharToUtf(int, char *); # ifdef USE_TCL_STUBS # define TkNumUtfChars (((&tclStubsPtr->tcl_PkgProvideEx)[631]) ? \ ((Tcl_Size (*)(const char *, Tcl_Size))(void *)((&tclStubsPtr->tcl_PkgProvideEx)[669])) \ : (tclStubsPtr->tcl_NumUtfChars) /* 312 */) # define TkGetCharLength (((&tclStubsPtr->tcl_PkgProvideEx)[631]) ? \ ((Tcl_Size (*)(Tcl_Obj *))(void *)((&tclStubsPtr->tcl_PkgProvideEx)[670])) \ : (tclStubsPtr->tcl_GetCharLength) /* 380 */) # define TkUtfAtIndex (((&tclStubsPtr->tcl_PkgProvideEx)[631]) ? \ ((const char *(*)(const char *, Tcl_Size))(void *)((&tclStubsPtr->tcl_PkgProvideEx)[671])) \ : (tclStubsPtr->tcl_UtfAtIndex) /* 325 */) # else # define TkNumUtfChars TclNumUtfChars # define TkGetCharLength TclGetCharLength # define TkUtfAtIndex TclUtfAtIndex # endif #endif #if defined(__STDC_VERSION__) && (__STDC_VERSION__ >= 199901L) # define TKFLEXARRAY #elif defined(__GNUC__) && (__GNUC__ > 2) # define TKFLEXARRAY 0 #else # define TKFLEXARRAY 1 #endif #if !defined(Tcl_GetParent) && (TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9) && defined(TCL_MINOR_VERSION) && (TCL_MINOR_VERSION < 7) # define Tcl_GetParent Tcl_GetMaster #endif /* * Macros used to cast between pointers and integers (e.g. when storing an int * in ClientData), on 64-bit architectures they avoid gcc warning about "cast * to/from pointer from/to integer of different size". */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 | Tcl_HashTable winTable; /* Maps from X window ids to TkWindow ptrs. */ Tcl_Size refCount; /* Reference count of how many Tk applications * are using this display. Used to clean up * the display when we no longer have any Tk * applications using it. */ Tk_Window warpWindow; Tk_Window warpMainwin; /* For finding the root window for warping * purposes. */ int warpX; int warpY; /* | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 | Tcl_HashTable winTable; /* Maps from X window ids to TkWindow ptrs. */ Tcl_Size refCount; /* Reference count of how many Tk applications * are using this display. Used to clean up * the display when we no longer have any Tk * applications using it. */ /* * The following field were all added for Tk8.3 */ #if TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 #if !defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) int mouseButtonState; /* Current mouse button state for this * display. NOT USED as of 8.6.10 */ Window mouseButtonWindow; /* Window the button state was set in, added * in Tk 8.4. */ #else int notused1; XID notused2; #endif /* !TK_NO_DEPRECATED */ #endif Tk_Window warpWindow; Tk_Window warpMainwin; /* For finding the root window for warping * purposes. */ int warpX; int warpY; /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 | * Flags passed to TkpMakeMenuWindow's 'transient' argument. */ #define TK_MAKE_MENU_TEAROFF 0 /* Only non-transient case. */ #define TK_MAKE_MENU_POPUP 1 #define TK_MAKE_MENU_DROPDOWN 2 /* * The following structure is used with TkMakeEnsemble to create ensemble * commands and optionally to create sub-ensembles. */ #if (TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9) && !defined(Tcl_ObjCmdProc2) #define Tcl_ObjCmdProc2 Tcl_ObjCmdProc | > > > > > > > > > > > > | 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 | * Flags passed to TkpMakeMenuWindow's 'transient' argument. */ #define TK_MAKE_MENU_TEAROFF 0 /* Only non-transient case. */ #define TK_MAKE_MENU_POPUP 1 #define TK_MAKE_MENU_DROPDOWN 2 /* See TIP #494 */ #ifndef TCL_IO_FAILURE # define TCL_IO_FAILURE (-1) #endif /* See TIP #537 */ #ifndef TCL_INDEX_NONE # define TCL_INDEX_NONE (-1) #endif #ifndef TCL_INDEX_END # define TCL_INDEX_END ((Tcl_Size)-2) #endif /* * The following structure is used with TkMakeEnsemble to create ensemble * commands and optionally to create sub-ensembles. */ #if (TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9) && !defined(Tcl_ObjCmdProc2) #define Tcl_ObjCmdProc2 Tcl_ObjCmdProc |
︙ | ︙ | |||
987 988 989 990 991 992 993 | */ #define TK_GRAB_NONE 0 #define TK_GRAB_IN_TREE 1 #define TK_GRAB_ANCESTOR 2 #define TK_GRAB_EXCLUDED 3 | < < < < < < < < | 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 | */ #define TK_GRAB_NONE 0 #define TK_GRAB_IN_TREE 1 #define TK_GRAB_ANCESTOR 2 #define TK_GRAB_EXCLUDED 3 /* * The macro below is used to modify a "char" value (e.g. by casting it to an * unsigned character) so that it can be used safely with macros such as * isspace(). */ #define UCHAR(c) ((unsigned char) (c)) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 | #ifndef Button8 # define Button8 8 #endif #ifndef Button9 # define Button9 9 #endif #ifndef Button6Mask | > > > > > > > > | | | | | 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 | #ifndef Button8 # define Button8 8 #endif #ifndef Button9 # define Button9 9 #endif /* * The Button<B>Mask modifiers for <B> in {6 7 8 9} * are internally used by Tk. They must be above the * AnyModifier bit since anything below is reserved * for the X protocol. If a future X11 version * defines these, we adhere. */ #ifndef Button6Mask # define Button6Mask (AnyModifier<<6) #endif #ifndef Button7Mask # define Button7Mask (AnyModifier<<7) #endif #ifndef Button8Mask # define Button8Mask (AnyModifier<<8) #endif #ifndef Button9Mask # define Button9Mask (AnyModifier<<9) #endif /* * Mask that selects any of the state bits corresponding to buttons, plus * masks that select individual buttons' bits: */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 | * be properly registered with Tcl: */ typedef struct { Tcl_ObjType objType; size_t version; } TkObjType; MODULE_SCOPE const TkObjType tkBorderObjType; MODULE_SCOPE const TkObjType tkBitmapObjType; MODULE_SCOPE const TkObjType tkColorObjType; MODULE_SCOPE const TkObjType tkCursorObjType; MODULE_SCOPE const TkObjType tkFontObjType; MODULE_SCOPE const TkObjType tkStateKeyObjType; | > > > > > > > | 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 | * be properly registered with Tcl: */ typedef struct { Tcl_ObjType objType; size_t version; } TkObjType; #ifndef TCL_OBJTYPE_V0 # define TCL_OBJTYPE_V0 /* just empty */ #endif #ifndef TCL_OBJTYPE_V1 # define TCL_OBJTYPE_V1(lengthProc) /* just empty */ #endif MODULE_SCOPE const TkObjType tkBorderObjType; MODULE_SCOPE const TkObjType tkBitmapObjType; MODULE_SCOPE const TkObjType tkColorObjType; MODULE_SCOPE const TkObjType tkCursorObjType; MODULE_SCOPE const TkObjType tkFontObjType; MODULE_SCOPE const TkObjType tkStateKeyObjType; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 | MODULE_SCOPE void TkAppendPadAmount(Tcl_Obj *bufferObj, const char *buffer, int pad1, int pad2); MODULE_SCOPE int TkParsePadAmount(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *pad1Ptr, int *pad2Ptr); MODULE_SCOPE void TkFocusSplit(TkWindow *winPtr); MODULE_SCOPE void TkFocusJoin(TkWindow *winPtr); | < < < < < < < < < < < < | 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 1320 1321 1322 | MODULE_SCOPE void TkAppendPadAmount(Tcl_Obj *bufferObj, const char *buffer, int pad1, int pad2); MODULE_SCOPE int TkParsePadAmount(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *pad1Ptr, int *pad2Ptr); MODULE_SCOPE void TkFocusSplit(TkWindow *winPtr); MODULE_SCOPE void TkFocusJoin(TkWindow *winPtr); MODULE_SCOPE void TkpDrawAngledCharsInContext(Display * display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_Font tkfont, const char *source, Tcl_Size numBytes, Tcl_Size rangeStart, Tcl_Size rangeLength, double x, double y, double angle); MODULE_SCOPE void TkpGetFontAttrsForChar(Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Font tkfont, int c, struct TkFontAttributes *faPtr); MODULE_SCOPE void TkpDrawFrameEx(Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border, int highlightWidth, int borderWidth, int relief); MODULE_SCOPE void TkpShowBusyWindow(TkBusy busy); MODULE_SCOPE void TkpHideBusyWindow(TkBusy busy); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 | void *clientData); MODULE_SCOPE int TkInitFontchooser(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *clientData); MODULE_SCOPE void TkInitEmbeddedConfigurationInformation( Tcl_Interp *interp); MODULE_SCOPE void TkDoWarpWrtWin(TkDisplay *dispPtr); MODULE_SCOPE void TkpWarpPointer(TkDisplay *dispPtr); MODULE_SCOPE void TkRotatePoint(double originX, double originY, double sine, double cosine, double *xPtr, double *yPtr); MODULE_SCOPE int TkGetIntForIndex(Tcl_Obj *, Tcl_Size, int lastOK, Tcl_Size*); | > > > > > > > | | > | 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 1360 1361 1362 1363 1364 1365 1366 | void *clientData); MODULE_SCOPE int TkInitFontchooser(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *clientData); MODULE_SCOPE void TkInitEmbeddedConfigurationInformation( Tcl_Interp *interp); MODULE_SCOPE void TkDoWarpWrtWin(TkDisplay *dispPtr); MODULE_SCOPE void TkpWarpPointer(TkDisplay *dispPtr); MODULE_SCOPE int TkListCreateFrame(void *clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *listObj, int toplevel, Tcl_Obj *nameObj); MODULE_SCOPE void TkRotatePoint(double originX, double originY, double sine, double cosine, double *xPtr, double *yPtr); MODULE_SCOPE int TkGetIntForIndex(Tcl_Obj *, Tcl_Size, int lastOK, Tcl_Size*); #if !defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) && (TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9) # define TkNewIndexObj(value) Tcl_NewWideIntObj((Tcl_WideInt)(value + 1) - 1) # define TK_OPTION_UNDERLINE_DEF(type, field) "-1", TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(type, field), 0, NULL #else # define TkNewIndexObj(value) (((Tcl_Size)(value) == TCL_INDEX_NONE) ? Tcl_NewObj() : Tcl_NewWideIntObj((Tcl_WideInt)(value))) # define TK_OPTION_UNDERLINE_DEF(type, field) NULL, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(type, field), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL #endif #ifdef _WIN32 #define TkParseColor XParseColor #else MODULE_SCOPE Status TkParseColor (Display * display, Colormap map, const char* spec, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 1331 | MODULE_SCOPE void TkpCopyRegion(TkRegion dst, TkRegion src); #if !defined(__cplusplus) && !defined(c_plusplus) # define c_class class #endif | | > | 1394 1395 1396 1397 1398 1399 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 1422 1423 1424 | MODULE_SCOPE void TkpCopyRegion(TkRegion dst, TkRegion src); #if !defined(__cplusplus) && !defined(c_plusplus) # define c_class class #endif #if defined(_WIN32) && !defined(STATIC_BUILD) && TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 # define tcl_CreateFileHandler reserved9 #endif MODULE_SCOPE void Icu_Init(Tcl_Interp* interp); /* * Unsupported commands. */ MODULE_SCOPE Tcl_ObjCmdProc TkUnsupported1ObjCmd; /* * For Tktest. */ MODULE_SCOPE Tcl_ObjCmdProc SquareObjCmd; MODULE_SCOPE int TkOldTestInit(Tcl_Interp *interp); #if !(defined(_WIN32) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)) #define TkplatformtestInit(x) TCL_OK #else MODULE_SCOPE int TkplatformtestInit(Tcl_Interp *interp); #endif #ifdef __cplusplus |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkIntDecls.h.
︙ | ︙ | |||
76 77 78 79 80 81 82 | /* 12 */ EXTERN TkCursor * TkCreateCursorFromData(Tk_Window tkwin, const char *source, const char *mask, int width, int height, int xHot, int yHot, XColor fg, XColor bg); /* 13 */ EXTERN int TkCreateFrame(void *clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, | | | | 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 | /* 12 */ EXTERN TkCursor * TkCreateCursorFromData(Tk_Window tkwin, const char *source, const char *mask, int width, int height, int xHot, int yHot, XColor fg, XColor bg); /* 13 */ EXTERN int TkCreateFrame(void *clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Size argc, const char *const *argv, int toplevel, const char *appName); /* 14 */ EXTERN Tk_Window TkCreateMainWindow(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *screenName, const char *baseName); /* 15 */ EXTERN Time TkCurrentTime(TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 16 */ EXTERN void TkDeleteAllImages(TkMainInfo *mainPtr); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
198 199 200 201 202 203 204 | EXTERN void TkpCloseDisplay(TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 57 */ EXTERN void TkpClaimFocus(TkWindow *topLevelPtr, int force); /* 58 */ EXTERN void TkpDisplayWarning(const char *msg, const char *title); /* 59 */ EXTERN void TkpGetAppName(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_DString *name); | | > > | > > | > > | > > > | > > > | 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 | EXTERN void TkpCloseDisplay(TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 57 */ EXTERN void TkpClaimFocus(TkWindow *topLevelPtr, int force); /* 58 */ EXTERN void TkpDisplayWarning(const char *msg, const char *title); /* 59 */ EXTERN void TkpGetAppName(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_DString *name); /* 60 */ TK_DEPRECATED("renamed to Tk_GetOtherWindow") TkWindow * TkpGetOtherWindow(TkWindow *winPtr); /* 61 */ EXTERN TkWindow * TkpGetWrapperWindow(TkWindow *winPtr); /* 62 */ EXTERN int TkpInit(Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 63 */ EXTERN void TkpInitializeMenuBindings(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_BindingTable bindingTable); /* 64 */ TK_DEPRECATED("renamed to Tk_MakeContainer") void TkpMakeContainer(Tk_Window tkwin); /* 65 */ EXTERN void TkpMakeMenuWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, int transient); /* 66 */ TK_DEPRECATED("renamed to Tk_MakeWindow") Window TkpMakeWindow(TkWindow *winPtr, Window parent); /* 67 */ EXTERN void TkpMenuNotifyToplevelCreate(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *menuName); /* 68 */ EXTERN TkDisplay * TkpOpenDisplay(const char *display_name); /* 69 */ EXTERN int TkPointerEvent(XEvent *eventPtr, TkWindow *winPtr); /* 70 */ EXTERN int TkPolygonToArea(double *polyPtr, int numPoints, double *rectPtr); /* 71 */ EXTERN double TkPolygonToPoint(double *polyPtr, int numPoints, double *pointPtr); /* 72 */ EXTERN int TkPositionInTree(TkWindow *winPtr, TkWindow *treePtr); /* 73 */ EXTERN void TkpRedirectKeyEvent(TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 74 */ TK_DEPRECATED("renamed to Tk_SetMainMenubar") void TkpSetMainMenubar(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *menuName); /* 75 */ TK_DEPRECATED("renamed to Tk_UseWindow") int TkpUseWindow(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *string); /* Slot 76 is reserved */ /* 77 */ EXTERN void TkQueueEventForAllChildren(TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 78 */ EXTERN int TkReadBitmapFile(Display *display, Drawable d, const char *filename, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
254 255 256 257 258 259 260 | /* 81 */ EXTERN void TkSelEventProc(Tk_Window tkwin, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 82 */ EXTERN void TkSelInit(Tk_Window tkwin); /* 83 */ EXTERN void TkSelPropProc(XEvent *eventPtr); /* Slot 84 is reserved */ | | > > > > | 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 | /* 81 */ EXTERN void TkSelEventProc(Tk_Window tkwin, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 82 */ EXTERN void TkSelInit(Tk_Window tkwin); /* 83 */ EXTERN void TkSelPropProc(XEvent *eventPtr); /* Slot 84 is reserved */ /* 85 */ TK_DEPRECATED("renamed to Tk_SetWindowMenubar") void TkSetWindowMenuBar(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *oldMenuName, const char *menuName); /* 86 */ EXTERN KeySym TkStringToKeysym(const char *name); /* 87 */ EXTERN int TkThickPolyLineToArea(double *coordPtr, int numPoints, double width, int capStyle, int joinStyle, double *rectPtr); /* 88 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
315 316 317 318 319 320 321 | Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Tk_Window *windowPtr); /* 109 */ EXTERN const char * TkpGetString(TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr, Tcl_DString *dsPtr); /* 110 */ EXTERN void TkpGetSubFonts(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Font tkfont); | | > > > > > > > > > | > > > > | 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 | Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Tk_Window *windowPtr); /* 109 */ EXTERN const char * TkpGetString(TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr, Tcl_DString *dsPtr); /* 110 */ EXTERN void TkpGetSubFonts(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Font tkfont); /* 111 */ TK_DEPRECATED("renamed to Tk_GetSystemDefault") Tcl_Obj * TkpGetSystemDefault(Tk_Window tkwin, const char *dbName, const char *className); /* 112 */ EXTERN void TkpMenuThreadInit(void); /* 113 */ EXTERN int XClipBox(Region rgn, XRectangle *rect_return); /* 114 */ EXTERN Region XCreateRegion(void); /* 115 */ EXTERN int XDestroyRegion(Region rgn); /* 116 */ EXTERN int XIntersectRegion(Region sra, Region srcb, Region dr_return); /* 117 */ EXTERN int XRectInRegion(Region rgn, int x, int y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height); /* 118 */ EXTERN int XSetRegion(Display *display, GC gc, Region rgn); /* 119 */ EXTERN int XUnionRectWithRegion(XRectangle *rect, Region src, Region dr_return); /* Slot 120 is reserved */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ /* 121 */ EXTERN Pixmap TkpCreateNativeBitmap(Display *display, const void *source); #endif /* AQUA */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ /* 122 */ EXTERN void TkpDefineNativeBitmaps(void); #endif /* AQUA */ /* Slot 123 is reserved */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ /* 124 */ EXTERN Pixmap TkpGetNativeAppBitmap(Display *display, const char *name, int *width, int *height); #endif /* AQUA */ /* Slot 125 is reserved */ /* Slot 126 is reserved */ /* Slot 127 is reserved */ /* Slot 128 is reserved */ /* Slot 129 is reserved */ /* Slot 130 is reserved */ /* Slot 131 is reserved */ /* Slot 132 is reserved */ /* Slot 133 is reserved */ /* Slot 134 is reserved */ /* 135 */ TK_DEPRECATED("renamed to Tk_DrawHighlightBorder") void TkpDrawHighlightBorder(Tk_Window tkwin, GC fgGC, GC bgGC, int highlightWidth, Drawable drawable); /* 136 */ EXTERN void TkSetFocusWin(TkWindow *winPtr, int force); /* 137 */ EXTERN void TkpSetKeycodeAndState(Tk_Window tkwin, KeySym keySym, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 138 */ EXTERN KeySym TkpGetKeySym(TkDisplay *dispPtr, XEvent *eventPtr); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
559 560 561 562 563 564 565 | void (*tkBindInit) (TkMainInfo *mainPtr); /* 6 */ void (*tkChangeEventWindow) (XEvent *eventPtr, TkWindow *winPtr); /* 7 */ int (*tkClipInit) (Tcl_Interp *interp, TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 8 */ void (*tkComputeAnchor) (Tk_Anchor anchor, Tk_Window tkwin, int padX, int padY, int innerWidth, int innerHeight, int *xPtr, int *yPtr); /* 9 */ void (*reserved10)(void); void (*reserved11)(void); TkCursor * (*tkCreateCursorFromData) (Tk_Window tkwin, const char *source, const char *mask, int width, int height, int xHot, int yHot, XColor fg, XColor bg); /* 12 */ | | | 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 | void (*tkBindInit) (TkMainInfo *mainPtr); /* 6 */ void (*tkChangeEventWindow) (XEvent *eventPtr, TkWindow *winPtr); /* 7 */ int (*tkClipInit) (Tcl_Interp *interp, TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 8 */ void (*tkComputeAnchor) (Tk_Anchor anchor, Tk_Window tkwin, int padX, int padY, int innerWidth, int innerHeight, int *xPtr, int *yPtr); /* 9 */ void (*reserved10)(void); void (*reserved11)(void); TkCursor * (*tkCreateCursorFromData) (Tk_Window tkwin, const char *source, const char *mask, int width, int height, int xHot, int yHot, XColor fg, XColor bg); /* 12 */ int (*tkCreateFrame) (void *clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Size argc, const char *const *argv, int toplevel, const char *appName); /* 13 */ Tk_Window (*tkCreateMainWindow) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *screenName, const char *baseName); /* 14 */ Time (*tkCurrentTime) (TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 15 */ void (*tkDeleteAllImages) (TkMainInfo *mainPtr); /* 16 */ void (*tkDoConfigureNotify) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 17 */ void (*tkDrawInsetFocusHighlight) (Tk_Window tkwin, GC gc, int width, Drawable drawable, int padding); /* 18 */ void (*tkEventDeadWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 19 */ void (*tkFillPolygon) (Tk_Canvas canvas, double *coordPtr, int numPoints, Display *display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, GC outlineGC); /* 20 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
606 607 608 609 610 611 612 | int (*tkOvalToArea) (double *ovalPtr, double *rectPtr); /* 53 */ double (*tkOvalToPoint) (double ovalPtr[], double width, int filled, double pointPtr[]); /* 54 */ int (*tkpChangeFocus) (TkWindow *winPtr, int force); /* 55 */ void (*tkpCloseDisplay) (TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 56 */ void (*tkpClaimFocus) (TkWindow *topLevelPtr, int force); /* 57 */ void (*tkpDisplayWarning) (const char *msg, const char *title); /* 58 */ void (*tkpGetAppName) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_DString *name); /* 59 */ | | | | | | | | 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 | int (*tkOvalToArea) (double *ovalPtr, double *rectPtr); /* 53 */ double (*tkOvalToPoint) (double ovalPtr[], double width, int filled, double pointPtr[]); /* 54 */ int (*tkpChangeFocus) (TkWindow *winPtr, int force); /* 55 */ void (*tkpCloseDisplay) (TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 56 */ void (*tkpClaimFocus) (TkWindow *topLevelPtr, int force); /* 57 */ void (*tkpDisplayWarning) (const char *msg, const char *title); /* 58 */ void (*tkpGetAppName) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_DString *name); /* 59 */ TCL_DEPRECATED_API("renamed to Tk_GetOtherWindow") TkWindow * (*tkpGetOtherWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 60 */ TkWindow * (*tkpGetWrapperWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 61 */ int (*tkpInit) (Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 62 */ void (*tkpInitializeMenuBindings) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_BindingTable bindingTable); /* 63 */ TCL_DEPRECATED_API("renamed to Tk_MakeContainer") void (*tkpMakeContainer) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 64 */ void (*tkpMakeMenuWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin, int transient); /* 65 */ TCL_DEPRECATED_API("renamed to Tk_MakeWindow") Window (*tkpMakeWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr, Window parent); /* 66 */ void (*tkpMenuNotifyToplevelCreate) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *menuName); /* 67 */ TkDisplay * (*tkpOpenDisplay) (const char *display_name); /* 68 */ int (*tkPointerEvent) (XEvent *eventPtr, TkWindow *winPtr); /* 69 */ int (*tkPolygonToArea) (double *polyPtr, int numPoints, double *rectPtr); /* 70 */ double (*tkPolygonToPoint) (double *polyPtr, int numPoints, double *pointPtr); /* 71 */ int (*tkPositionInTree) (TkWindow *winPtr, TkWindow *treePtr); /* 72 */ void (*tkpRedirectKeyEvent) (TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 73 */ TCL_DEPRECATED_API("renamed to Tk_SetMainMenubar") void (*tkpSetMainMenubar) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *menuName); /* 74 */ TCL_DEPRECATED_API("renamed to Tk_UseWindow") int (*tkpUseWindow) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *string); /* 75 */ void (*reserved76)(void); void (*tkQueueEventForAllChildren) (TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 77 */ int (*tkReadBitmapFile) (Display *display, Drawable d, const char *filename, unsigned int *width_return, unsigned int *height_return, Pixmap *bitmap_return, int *x_hot_return, int *y_hot_return); /* 78 */ int (*tkScrollWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin, GC gc, int x, int y, int width, int height, int dx, int dy, Region damageRgn); /* 79 */ void (*tkSelDeadWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 80 */ void (*tkSelEventProc) (Tk_Window tkwin, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 81 */ void (*tkSelInit) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 82 */ void (*tkSelPropProc) (XEvent *eventPtr); /* 83 */ void (*reserved84)(void); TCL_DEPRECATED_API("renamed to Tk_SetWindowMenubar") void (*tkSetWindowMenuBar) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *oldMenuName, const char *menuName); /* 85 */ KeySym (*tkStringToKeysym) (const char *name); /* 86 */ int (*tkThickPolyLineToArea) (double *coordPtr, int numPoints, double width, int capStyle, int joinStyle, double *rectPtr); /* 87 */ void (*tkWmAddToColormapWindows) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 88 */ void (*tkWmDeadWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 89 */ TkWindow * (*tkWmFocusToplevel) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 90 */ void (*tkWmMapWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 91 */ void (*tkWmNewWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 92 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
657 658 659 660 661 662 663 | int (*tkFindStateNumObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *optionPtr, const TkStateMap *mapPtr, Tcl_Obj *keyPtr); /* 104 */ Tcl_HashTable * (*tkGetBitmapPredefTable) (void); /* 105 */ TkDisplay * (*tkGetDisplayList) (void); /* 106 */ TkMainInfo * (*tkGetMainInfoList) (void); /* 107 */ int (*tkGetWindowFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Tk_Window *windowPtr); /* 108 */ const char * (*tkpGetString) (TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr, Tcl_DString *dsPtr); /* 109 */ void (*tkpGetSubFonts) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Font tkfont); /* 110 */ | | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | | 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 | int (*tkFindStateNumObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *optionPtr, const TkStateMap *mapPtr, Tcl_Obj *keyPtr); /* 104 */ Tcl_HashTable * (*tkGetBitmapPredefTable) (void); /* 105 */ TkDisplay * (*tkGetDisplayList) (void); /* 106 */ TkMainInfo * (*tkGetMainInfoList) (void); /* 107 */ int (*tkGetWindowFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Tk_Window *windowPtr); /* 108 */ const char * (*tkpGetString) (TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr, Tcl_DString *dsPtr); /* 109 */ void (*tkpGetSubFonts) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Font tkfont); /* 110 */ TCL_DEPRECATED_API("renamed to Tk_GetSystemDefault") Tcl_Obj * (*tkpGetSystemDefault) (Tk_Window tkwin, const char *dbName, const char *className); /* 111 */ void (*tkpMenuThreadInit) (void); /* 112 */ int (*xClipBox) (Region rgn, XRectangle *rect_return); /* 113 */ Region (*xCreateRegion) (void); /* 114 */ int (*xDestroyRegion) (Region rgn); /* 115 */ int (*xIntersectRegion) (Region sra, Region srcb, Region dr_return); /* 116 */ int (*xRectInRegion) (Region rgn, int x, int y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height); /* 117 */ int (*xSetRegion) (Display *display, GC gc, Region rgn); /* 118 */ int (*xUnionRectWithRegion) (XRectangle *rect, Region src, Region dr_return); /* 119 */ void (*reserved120)(void); #if !(defined(_WIN32) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)) /* X11 */ void (*reserved121)(void); #endif /* X11 */ #if defined(_WIN32) /* WIN */ void (*reserved121)(void); #endif /* WIN */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ # if TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 void (*reserved121)(void); /* Dummy entry for stubs table backwards compatibility */ # endif /* TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 */ Pixmap (*tkpCreateNativeBitmap) (Display *display, const void *source); /* 121 */ #endif /* AQUA */ #if !(defined(_WIN32) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)) /* X11 */ void (*reserved122)(void); #endif /* X11 */ #if defined(_WIN32) /* WIN */ void (*reserved122)(void); #endif /* WIN */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ # if TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 void (*reserved122)(void); /* Dummy entry for stubs table backwards compatibility */ # endif /* TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 */ void (*tkpDefineNativeBitmaps) (void); /* 122 */ #endif /* AQUA */ void (*reserved123)(void); #if !(defined(_WIN32) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)) /* X11 */ void (*reserved124)(void); #endif /* X11 */ #if defined(_WIN32) /* WIN */ void (*reserved124)(void); #endif /* WIN */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ # if TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 void (*reserved124)(void); /* Dummy entry for stubs table backwards compatibility */ # endif /* TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 */ Pixmap (*tkpGetNativeAppBitmap) (Display *display, const char *name, int *width, int *height); /* 124 */ #endif /* AQUA */ void (*reserved125)(void); void (*reserved126)(void); void (*reserved127)(void); void (*reserved128)(void); void (*reserved129)(void); void (*reserved130)(void); void (*reserved131)(void); void (*reserved132)(void); void (*reserved133)(void); void (*reserved134)(void); TCL_DEPRECATED_API("renamed to Tk_DrawHighlightBorder") void (*tkpDrawHighlightBorder) (Tk_Window tkwin, GC fgGC, GC bgGC, int highlightWidth, Drawable drawable); /* 135 */ void (*tkSetFocusWin) (TkWindow *winPtr, int force); /* 136 */ void (*tkpSetKeycodeAndState) (Tk_Window tkwin, KeySym keySym, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 137 */ KeySym (*tkpGetKeySym) (TkDisplay *dispPtr, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 138 */ void (*tkpInitKeymapInfo) (TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 139 */ Region (*tkPhotoGetValidRegion) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle); /* 140 */ TkWindow ** (*tkWmStackorderToplevel) (TkWindow *parentPtr); /* 141 */ void (*tkFocusFree) (TkMainInfo *mainPtr); /* 142 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
865 866 867 868 869 870 871 | (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpCloseDisplay) /* 56 */ #define TkpClaimFocus \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpClaimFocus) /* 57 */ #define TkpDisplayWarning \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpDisplayWarning) /* 58 */ #define TkpGetAppName \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpGetAppName) /* 59 */ | | > | > < > > | > > | | > | 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 | (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpCloseDisplay) /* 56 */ #define TkpClaimFocus \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpClaimFocus) /* 57 */ #define TkpDisplayWarning \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpDisplayWarning) /* 58 */ #define TkpGetAppName \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpGetAppName) /* 59 */ #define TkpGetOtherWindow \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpGetOtherWindow) /* 60 */ #define TkpGetWrapperWindow \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpGetWrapperWindow) /* 61 */ #define TkpInit \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpInit) /* 62 */ #define TkpInitializeMenuBindings \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpInitializeMenuBindings) /* 63 */ #define TkpMakeContainer \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpMakeContainer) /* 64 */ #define TkpMakeMenuWindow \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpMakeMenuWindow) /* 65 */ #define TkpMakeWindow \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpMakeWindow) /* 66 */ #define TkpMenuNotifyToplevelCreate \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpMenuNotifyToplevelCreate) /* 67 */ #define TkpOpenDisplay \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpOpenDisplay) /* 68 */ #define TkPointerEvent \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkPointerEvent) /* 69 */ #define TkPolygonToArea \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkPolygonToArea) /* 70 */ #define TkPolygonToPoint \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkPolygonToPoint) /* 71 */ #define TkPositionInTree \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkPositionInTree) /* 72 */ #define TkpRedirectKeyEvent \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpRedirectKeyEvent) /* 73 */ #define TkpSetMainMenubar \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpSetMainMenubar) /* 74 */ #define TkpUseWindow \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpUseWindow) /* 75 */ /* Slot 76 is reserved */ #define TkQueueEventForAllChildren \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkQueueEventForAllChildren) /* 77 */ #define TkReadBitmapFile \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkReadBitmapFile) /* 78 */ #define TkScrollWindow \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkScrollWindow) /* 79 */ #define TkSelDeadWindow \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkSelDeadWindow) /* 80 */ #define TkSelEventProc \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkSelEventProc) /* 81 */ #define TkSelInit \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkSelInit) /* 82 */ #define TkSelPropProc \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkSelPropProc) /* 83 */ /* Slot 84 is reserved */ #define TkSetWindowMenuBar \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkSetWindowMenuBar) /* 85 */ #define TkStringToKeysym \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkStringToKeysym) /* 86 */ #define TkThickPolyLineToArea \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkThickPolyLineToArea) /* 87 */ #define TkWmAddToColormapWindows \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkWmAddToColormapWindows) /* 88 */ #define TkWmDeadWindow \ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
959 960 961 962 963 964 965 | (tkIntStubsPtr->tkGetMainInfoList) /* 107 */ #define TkGetWindowFromObj \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkGetWindowFromObj) /* 108 */ #define TkpGetString \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpGetString) /* 109 */ #define TkpGetSubFonts \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpGetSubFonts) /* 110 */ | > | > > > > > > > | | 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 | (tkIntStubsPtr->tkGetMainInfoList) /* 107 */ #define TkGetWindowFromObj \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkGetWindowFromObj) /* 108 */ #define TkpGetString \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpGetString) /* 109 */ #define TkpGetSubFonts \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpGetSubFonts) /* 110 */ #define TkpGetSystemDefault \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpGetSystemDefault) /* 111 */ #define TkpMenuThreadInit \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpMenuThreadInit) /* 112 */ #define XClipBox \ (tkIntStubsPtr->xClipBox) /* 113 */ #define XCreateRegion \ (tkIntStubsPtr->xCreateRegion) /* 114 */ #define XDestroyRegion \ (tkIntStubsPtr->xDestroyRegion) /* 115 */ #define XIntersectRegion \ (tkIntStubsPtr->xIntersectRegion) /* 116 */ #define XRectInRegion \ (tkIntStubsPtr->xRectInRegion) /* 117 */ #define XSetRegion \ (tkIntStubsPtr->xSetRegion) /* 118 */ #define XUnionRectWithRegion \ (tkIntStubsPtr->xUnionRectWithRegion) /* 119 */ /* Slot 120 is reserved */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ #define TkpCreateNativeBitmap \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpCreateNativeBitmap) /* 121 */ #endif /* AQUA */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ #define TkpDefineNativeBitmaps \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpDefineNativeBitmaps) /* 122 */ #endif /* AQUA */ /* Slot 123 is reserved */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ #define TkpGetNativeAppBitmap \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpGetNativeAppBitmap) /* 124 */ #endif /* AQUA */ /* Slot 125 is reserved */ /* Slot 126 is reserved */ /* Slot 127 is reserved */ /* Slot 128 is reserved */ /* Slot 129 is reserved */ /* Slot 130 is reserved */ /* Slot 131 is reserved */ /* Slot 132 is reserved */ /* Slot 133 is reserved */ /* Slot 134 is reserved */ #define TkpDrawHighlightBorder \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpDrawHighlightBorder) /* 135 */ #define TkSetFocusWin \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkSetFocusWin) /* 136 */ #define TkpSetKeycodeAndState \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpSetKeycodeAndState) /* 137 */ #define TkpGetKeySym \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpGetKeySym) /* 138 */ #define TkpInitKeymapInfo \ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 | #endif /* defined(USE_TK_STUBS) */ /* !END!: Do not edit above this line. */ #undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS #define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT #if !defined(MAC_OSX_TK) && !defined(USE_TK_STUBS) # undef TkpWillDrawWidget # undef TkpRedrawWidget | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > < < < < < < | 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 | #endif /* defined(USE_TK_STUBS) */ /* !END!: Do not edit above this line. */ #undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS #define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT #undef TkpCmapStressed_ #undef TkpSync_ #undef TkUnixContainerId_ #undef TkUnixDoOneXEvent_ #undef TkUnixSetMenubar_ #undef TkWmCleanup_ #undef TkSendCleanup_ #undef TkpTestsendCmd_ #undef TkSetWindowMenuBar #undef TkpDrawHighlightBorder #undef TkpUseWindow #undef TkpSetMainMenubar #undef TkpGetOtherWindow #undef TkpGetSystemDefault #undef TkpMakeContainer #undef TkpMakeWindow #if !defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) && (TCL_MAJOR_VERSION == 8) # define TkSetWindowMenuBar Tk_SetWindowMenubar # define TkpDrawHighlightBorder Tk_DrawHighlightBorder # define TkpUseWindow Tk_UseWindow # define TkpSetMainMenubar Tk_SetMainMenubar # define TkpGetOtherWindow ((TkWindow *(*)(TkWindow *))(void *)Tk_GetOtherWindow) # define TkpGetSystemDefault Tk_GetSystemDefault # define TkpMakeContainer Tk_MakeContainer # define TkpMakeWindow ((Window (*)(TkWindow *, Window))(void *)Tk_MakeWindow) #endif #if !defined(MAC_OSX_TK) && !defined(USE_TK_STUBS) # undef TkpWillDrawWidget # undef TkpRedrawWidget # define TkpWillDrawWidget(w) 0 # define TkpRedrawWidget(w) #endif #endif /* _TKINTDECLS */ |
Changes to generic/tkIntPlatDecls.h.
︙ | ︙ | |||
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 | /* * Exported function declarations: */ #if defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__) /* WIN */ /* 0 */ | | > | 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 | /* * Exported function declarations: */ #if defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__) /* WIN */ /* 0 */ EXTERN char * TkAlignImageData(XImage *image, int alignment, int bitOrder); /* Slot 1 is reserved */ /* 2 */ EXTERN void TkGenerateActivateEvents(TkWindow *winPtr, int active); /* 3 */ EXTERN unsigned long TkpGetMS(void); /* 4 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
109 110 111 112 113 114 115 | EXTERN void TkWinSetForegroundWindow(TkWindow *winPtr); /* 31 */ EXTERN void TkWinDialogDebug(int debug); /* 32 */ EXTERN Tcl_Obj * TkWinGetMenuSystemDefault(Tk_Window tkwin, const char *dbName, const char *className); /* 33 */ | | < | > | 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 | EXTERN void TkWinSetForegroundWindow(TkWindow *winPtr); /* 31 */ EXTERN void TkWinDialogDebug(int debug); /* 32 */ EXTERN Tcl_Obj * TkWinGetMenuSystemDefault(Tk_Window tkwin, const char *dbName, const char *className); /* 33 */ EXTERN int TkWinGetPlatformId(void); /* 34 */ EXTERN void TkWinSetHINSTANCE(HINSTANCE hInstance); /* 35 */ EXTERN int TkWinGetPlatformTheme(void); /* 36 */ EXTERN LRESULT __stdcall TkWinChildProc(HWND hwnd, UINT message, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam); /* 37 */ EXTERN void TkCreateXEventSource(void); /* 38 */ EXTERN int TkpCmapStressed(Tk_Window tkwin, Colormap colormap); /* 39 */ EXTERN void TkpSync(Display *display); /* 40 */ EXTERN Window TkUnixContainerId(TkWindow *winPtr); /* 41 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
141 142 143 144 145 146 147 | EXTERN int TkpTestsendCmd(void *clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); /* Slot 46 is reserved */ /* 47 */ EXTERN Tk_Window TkpGetCapture(void); #endif /* WIN */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ | < | | > > | | | | < | | < | > > | > | 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 | EXTERN int TkpTestsendCmd(void *clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); /* Slot 46 is reserved */ /* 47 */ EXTERN Tk_Window TkpGetCapture(void); #endif /* WIN */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ /* 0 */ EXTERN void TkGenerateActivateEvents(TkWindow *winPtr, int active); /* Slot 1 is reserved */ /* 2 */ EXTERN void TkGenerateActivateEvents_(TkWindow *winPtr, int active); /* 3 */ EXTERN void TkPointerDeadWindow(TkWindow *winPtr); /* 4 */ EXTERN void TkpSetCapture(TkWindow *winPtr); /* 5 */ EXTERN void TkpSetCursor(TkpCursor cursor); /* 6 */ EXTERN void TkpWmSetState(TkWindow *winPtr, int state); /* 7 */ EXTERN void TkAboutDlg(void); /* 8 */ EXTERN unsigned int TkMacOSXButtonKeyState(void); /* 9 */ EXTERN void TkMacOSXClearMenubarActive(void); /* 10 */ EXTERN int TkMacOSXDispatchMenuEvent(int menuID, int index); /* Slot 11 is reserved */ /* 12 */ EXTERN void TkMacOSXHandleTearoffMenu(void); /* Slot 13 is reserved */ /* 14 */ EXTERN int TkMacOSXDoHLEvent(void *theEvent); /* Slot 15 is reserved */ /* 16 */ EXTERN Window TkMacOSXGetXWindow(void *macWinPtr); /* 17 */ EXTERN int TkMacOSXGrowToplevel(void *whichWindow, XPoint start); /* 18 */ EXTERN void TkMacOSXHandleMenuSelect(short theMenu, unsigned short theItem, int optionKeyPressed); /* Slot 19 is reserved */ /* Slot 20 is reserved */ /* 21 */ EXTERN void TkMacOSXInvalidateWindow(MacDrawable *macWin, int flag); /* 22 */ EXTERN int TkMacOSXIsCharacterMissing(Tk_Font tkfont, unsigned int searchChar); /* 23 */ EXTERN void TkMacOSXMakeRealWindowExist(TkWindow *winPtr); /* 24 */ EXTERN void * TkMacOSXMakeStippleMap(Drawable d1, Drawable d2); /* 25 */ EXTERN void TkMacOSXMenuClick(void); /* Slot 26 is reserved */ /* 27 */ EXTERN int TkMacOSXResizable(TkWindow *winPtr); /* 28 */ EXTERN void TkMacOSXSetHelpMenuItemCount(void); /* 29 */ EXTERN void TkMacOSXSetScrollbarGrow(TkWindow *winPtr, int flag); /* 30 */ EXTERN void TkMacOSXSetUpClippingRgn(Drawable drawable); /* 31 */ EXTERN void TkMacOSXSetUpGraphicsPort(GC gc, void *destPort); /* 32 */ EXTERN void TkMacOSXUpdateClipRgn(TkWindow *winPtr); /* Slot 33 is reserved */ /* 34 */ EXTERN int TkMacOSXUseMenuID(short macID); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 | /* 49 */ EXTERN Tk_Window TkMacOSXGetContainer(TkWindow *winPtr); /* 50 */ EXTERN int TkGenerateButtonEvent(int x, int y, Window window, unsigned int state); /* 51 */ EXTERN void TkGenWMDestroyEvent(Tk_Window tkwin); #endif /* AQUA */ #if !(defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)) /* X11 */ /* 0 */ EXTERN void TkCreateXEventSource(void); /* Slot 1 is reserved */ /* 2 */ EXTERN void TkGenerateActivateEvents(TkWindow *winPtr, int active); | > > > > > > > > > | > | > | > > > > > < < | | > | > | > > | 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 | /* 49 */ EXTERN Tk_Window TkMacOSXGetContainer(TkWindow *winPtr); /* 50 */ EXTERN int TkGenerateButtonEvent(int x, int y, Window window, unsigned int state); /* 51 */ EXTERN void TkGenWMDestroyEvent(Tk_Window tkwin); /* 52 */ EXTERN void TkMacOSXSetDrawingEnabled(TkWindow *winPtr, int flag); /* 53 */ EXTERN unsigned long TkpGetMS(void); /* 54 */ EXTERN void * TkMacOSXDrawable(Drawable drawable); /* 55 */ EXTERN int TkpScanWindowId(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *string, Window *idPtr); #endif /* AQUA */ #if !(defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)) /* X11 */ /* 0 */ EXTERN void TkCreateXEventSource(void); /* Slot 1 is reserved */ /* 2 */ EXTERN void TkGenerateActivateEvents(TkWindow *winPtr, int active); /* 3 */ EXTERN int TkpCmapStressed(Tk_Window tkwin, Colormap colormap); /* 4 */ EXTERN void TkpSync(Display *display); /* 5 */ EXTERN Window TkUnixContainerId(TkWindow *winPtr); /* 6 */ EXTERN int TkUnixDoOneXEvent(Tcl_Time *timePtr); /* 7 */ EXTERN void TkUnixSetMenubar(Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Window menubar); /* 8 */ EXTERN int TkpScanWindowId(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *string, Window *idPtr); /* 9 */ EXTERN void TkWmCleanup(TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 10 */ EXTERN void TkSendCleanup(TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* Slot 11 is reserved */ /* 12 */ EXTERN int TkpWmSetState(TkWindow *winPtr, int state); /* 13 */ EXTERN int TkpTestsendCmd_(void *clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); /* Slot 14 is reserved */ /* Slot 15 is reserved */ /* Slot 16 is reserved */ /* Slot 17 is reserved */ /* Slot 18 is reserved */ /* Slot 19 is reserved */ /* Slot 20 is reserved */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
289 290 291 292 293 294 295 | /* Slot 32 is reserved */ /* Slot 33 is reserved */ /* Slot 34 is reserved */ /* Slot 35 is reserved */ /* Slot 36 is reserved */ /* Slot 37 is reserved */ /* 38 */ | | | | | | | | | | 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 | /* Slot 32 is reserved */ /* Slot 33 is reserved */ /* Slot 34 is reserved */ /* Slot 35 is reserved */ /* Slot 36 is reserved */ /* Slot 37 is reserved */ /* 38 */ EXTERN int TkpCmapStressed_(Tk_Window tkwin, Colormap colormap); /* 39 */ EXTERN void TkpSync_(Display *display); /* 40 */ EXTERN Window TkUnixContainerId_(TkWindow *winPtr); /* 41 */ EXTERN int TkUnixDoOneXEvent_(Tcl_Time *timePtr); /* 42 */ EXTERN void TkUnixSetMenubar_(Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Window menubar); /* 43 */ EXTERN void TkWmCleanup_(TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 44 */ EXTERN void TkSendCleanup_(TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 45 */ EXTERN int TkpTestsendCmd(void *clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); #endif /* X11 */ typedef struct TkIntPlatStubs { int magic; void *hooks; #if defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__) /* WIN */ char * (*tkAlignImageData) (XImage *image, int alignment, int bitOrder); /* 0 */ void (*reserved1)(void); void (*tkGenerateActivateEvents) (TkWindow *winPtr, int active); /* 2 */ unsigned long (*tkpGetMS) (void); /* 3 */ void (*tkPointerDeadWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 4 */ void (*tkpPrintWindowId) (char *buf, Window window); /* 5 */ int (*tkpScanWindowId) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *string, Window *idPtr); /* 6 */ void (*tkpSetCapture) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 7 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
345 346 347 348 349 350 351 | void (*tkWinSetWindowPos) (HWND hwnd, HWND siblingHwnd, int pos); /* 26 */ void (*tkWinWmCleanup) (HINSTANCE hInstance); /* 27 */ void (*tkWinXCleanup) (void *clientData); /* 28 */ void (*tkWinXInit) (HINSTANCE hInstance); /* 29 */ void (*tkWinSetForegroundWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 30 */ void (*tkWinDialogDebug) (int debug); /* 31 */ Tcl_Obj * (*tkWinGetMenuSystemDefault) (Tk_Window tkwin, const char *dbName, const char *className); /* 32 */ | | | > | < | < | > < | > | | | | 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 | void (*tkWinSetWindowPos) (HWND hwnd, HWND siblingHwnd, int pos); /* 26 */ void (*tkWinWmCleanup) (HINSTANCE hInstance); /* 27 */ void (*tkWinXCleanup) (void *clientData); /* 28 */ void (*tkWinXInit) (HINSTANCE hInstance); /* 29 */ void (*tkWinSetForegroundWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 30 */ void (*tkWinDialogDebug) (int debug); /* 31 */ Tcl_Obj * (*tkWinGetMenuSystemDefault) (Tk_Window tkwin, const char *dbName, const char *className); /* 32 */ int (*tkWinGetPlatformId) (void); /* 33 */ void (*tkWinSetHINSTANCE) (HINSTANCE hInstance); /* 34 */ int (*tkWinGetPlatformTheme) (void); /* 35 */ LRESULT (__stdcall *tkWinChildProc) (HWND hwnd, UINT message, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam); /* 36 */ void (*tkCreateXEventSource) (void); /* 37 */ int (*tkpCmapStressed) (Tk_Window tkwin, Colormap colormap); /* 38 */ void (*tkpSync) (Display *display); /* 39 */ Window (*tkUnixContainerId) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 40 */ int (*tkUnixDoOneXEvent) (Tcl_Time *timePtr); /* 41 */ void (*tkUnixSetMenubar) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Window menubar); /* 42 */ void (*tkWmCleanup) (TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 43 */ void (*tkSendCleanup) (TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 44 */ int (*tkpTestsendCmd) (void *clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); /* 45 */ void (*reserved46)(void); Tk_Window (*tkpGetCapture) (void); /* 47 */ #endif /* WIN */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ void (*tkGenerateActivateEvents) (TkWindow *winPtr, int active); /* 0 */ void (*reserved1)(void); void (*tkGenerateActivateEvents_) (TkWindow *winPtr, int active); /* 2 */ void (*tkPointerDeadWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 3 */ void (*tkpSetCapture) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 4 */ void (*tkpSetCursor) (TkpCursor cursor); /* 5 */ void (*tkpWmSetState) (TkWindow *winPtr, int state); /* 6 */ void (*tkAboutDlg) (void); /* 7 */ unsigned int (*tkMacOSXButtonKeyState) (void); /* 8 */ void (*tkMacOSXClearMenubarActive) (void); /* 9 */ int (*tkMacOSXDispatchMenuEvent) (int menuID, int index); /* 10 */ void (*reserved11)(void); void (*tkMacOSXHandleTearoffMenu) (void); /* 12 */ void (*reserved13)(void); int (*tkMacOSXDoHLEvent) (void *theEvent); /* 14 */ void (*reserved15)(void); Window (*tkMacOSXGetXWindow) (void *macWinPtr); /* 16 */ int (*tkMacOSXGrowToplevel) (void *whichWindow, XPoint start); /* 17 */ void (*tkMacOSXHandleMenuSelect) (short theMenu, unsigned short theItem, int optionKeyPressed); /* 18 */ void (*reserved19)(void); void (*reserved20)(void); void (*tkMacOSXInvalidateWindow) (MacDrawable *macWin, int flag); /* 21 */ int (*tkMacOSXIsCharacterMissing) (Tk_Font tkfont, unsigned int searchChar); /* 22 */ void (*tkMacOSXMakeRealWindowExist) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 23 */ void * (*tkMacOSXMakeStippleMap) (Drawable d1, Drawable d2); /* 24 */ void (*tkMacOSXMenuClick) (void); /* 25 */ void (*reserved26)(void); int (*tkMacOSXResizable) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 27 */ void (*tkMacOSXSetHelpMenuItemCount) (void); /* 28 */ void (*tkMacOSXSetScrollbarGrow) (TkWindow *winPtr, int flag); /* 29 */ void (*tkMacOSXSetUpClippingRgn) (Drawable drawable); /* 30 */ void (*tkMacOSXSetUpGraphicsPort) (GC gc, void *destPort); /* 31 */ void (*tkMacOSXUpdateClipRgn) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 32 */ void (*reserved33)(void); int (*tkMacOSXUseMenuID) (short macID); /* 34 */ Region (*tkMacOSXVisableClipRgn) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 35 */ void (*tkMacOSXWinBounds) (TkWindow *winPtr, void *geometry); /* 36 */ void (*tkMacOSXWindowOffset) (void *wRef, int *xOffset, int *yOffset); /* 37 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 | void (*tkMacOSXPreprocessMenu) (void); /* 45 */ int (*tkpIsWindowFloating) (void *window); /* 46 */ Tk_Window (*tkpGetCapture) (void); /* 47 */ void (*reserved48)(void); Tk_Window (*tkMacOSXGetContainer) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 49 */ int (*tkGenerateButtonEvent) (int x, int y, Window window, unsigned int state); /* 50 */ void (*tkGenWMDestroyEvent) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 51 */ #endif /* AQUA */ #if !(defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)) /* X11 */ void (*tkCreateXEventSource) (void); /* 0 */ void (*reserved1)(void); void (*tkGenerateActivateEvents) (TkWindow *winPtr, int active); /* 2 */ | > > > > | | > > | | | > | | < < < | | 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 | void (*tkMacOSXPreprocessMenu) (void); /* 45 */ int (*tkpIsWindowFloating) (void *window); /* 46 */ Tk_Window (*tkpGetCapture) (void); /* 47 */ void (*reserved48)(void); Tk_Window (*tkMacOSXGetContainer) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 49 */ int (*tkGenerateButtonEvent) (int x, int y, Window window, unsigned int state); /* 50 */ void (*tkGenWMDestroyEvent) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 51 */ void (*tkMacOSXSetDrawingEnabled) (TkWindow *winPtr, int flag); /* 52 */ unsigned long (*tkpGetMS) (void); /* 53 */ void * (*tkMacOSXDrawable) (Drawable drawable); /* 54 */ int (*tkpScanWindowId) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *string, Window *idPtr); /* 55 */ #endif /* AQUA */ #if !(defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)) /* X11 */ void (*tkCreateXEventSource) (void); /* 0 */ void (*reserved1)(void); void (*tkGenerateActivateEvents) (TkWindow *winPtr, int active); /* 2 */ int (*tkpCmapStressed) (Tk_Window tkwin, Colormap colormap); /* 3 */ void (*tkpSync) (Display *display); /* 4 */ Window (*tkUnixContainerId) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 5 */ int (*tkUnixDoOneXEvent) (Tcl_Time *timePtr); /* 6 */ void (*tkUnixSetMenubar) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Window menubar); /* 7 */ int (*tkpScanWindowId) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *string, Window *idPtr); /* 8 */ void (*tkWmCleanup) (TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 9 */ void (*tkSendCleanup) (TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 10 */ void (*reserved11)(void); int (*tkpWmSetState) (TkWindow *winPtr, int state); /* 12 */ int (*tkpTestsendCmd_) (void *clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); /* 13 */ void (*reserved14)(void); void (*reserved15)(void); void (*reserved16)(void); void (*reserved17)(void); void (*reserved18)(void); void (*reserved19)(void); void (*reserved20)(void); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
454 455 456 457 458 459 460 | void (*reserved31)(void); void (*reserved32)(void); void (*reserved33)(void); void (*reserved34)(void); void (*reserved35)(void); void (*reserved36)(void); void (*reserved37)(void); | | | | | | | | | | | 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 | void (*reserved31)(void); void (*reserved32)(void); void (*reserved33)(void); void (*reserved34)(void); void (*reserved35)(void); void (*reserved36)(void); void (*reserved37)(void); int (*tkpCmapStressed_) (Tk_Window tkwin, Colormap colormap); /* 38 */ void (*tkpSync_) (Display *display); /* 39 */ Window (*tkUnixContainerId_) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 40 */ int (*tkUnixDoOneXEvent_) (Tcl_Time *timePtr); /* 41 */ void (*tkUnixSetMenubar_) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Window menubar); /* 42 */ void (*tkWmCleanup_) (TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 43 */ void (*tkSendCleanup_) (TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 44 */ int (*tkpTestsendCmd) (void *clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); /* 45 */ #endif /* X11 */ } TkIntPlatStubs; extern const TkIntPlatStubs *tkIntPlatStubsPtr; #ifdef __cplusplus } #endif #if defined(USE_TK_STUBS) /* * Inline function declarations: */ #if defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__) /* WIN */ #define TkAlignImageData \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkAlignImageData) /* 0 */ /* Slot 1 is reserved */ #define TkGenerateActivateEvents \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkGenerateActivateEvents) /* 2 */ #define TkpGetMS \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkpGetMS) /* 3 */ #define TkPointerDeadWindow \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkPointerDeadWindow) /* 4 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
543 544 545 546 547 548 549 | (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkWinXInit) /* 29 */ #define TkWinSetForegroundWindow \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkWinSetForegroundWindow) /* 30 */ #define TkWinDialogDebug \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkWinDialogDebug) /* 31 */ #define TkWinGetMenuSystemDefault \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkWinGetMenuSystemDefault) /* 32 */ | | | | > | 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 | (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkWinXInit) /* 29 */ #define TkWinSetForegroundWindow \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkWinSetForegroundWindow) /* 30 */ #define TkWinDialogDebug \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkWinDialogDebug) /* 31 */ #define TkWinGetMenuSystemDefault \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkWinGetMenuSystemDefault) /* 32 */ #define TkWinGetPlatformId \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkWinGetPlatformId) /* 33 */ #define TkWinSetHINSTANCE \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkWinSetHINSTANCE) /* 34 */ #define TkWinGetPlatformTheme \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkWinGetPlatformTheme) /* 35 */ #define TkWinChildProc \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkWinChildProc) /* 36 */ #define TkCreateXEventSource \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkCreateXEventSource) /* 37 */ #define TkpCmapStressed \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkpCmapStressed) /* 38 */ #define TkpSync \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkpSync) /* 39 */ #define TkUnixContainerId \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkUnixContainerId) /* 40 */ #define TkUnixDoOneXEvent \ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
573 574 575 576 577 578 579 | #define TkpTestsendCmd \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkpTestsendCmd) /* 45 */ /* Slot 46 is reserved */ #define TkpGetCapture \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkpGetCapture) /* 47 */ #endif /* WIN */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ | < < < | > | | | | | | | | > > | < | > | > | 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 | #define TkpTestsendCmd \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkpTestsendCmd) /* 45 */ /* Slot 46 is reserved */ #define TkpGetCapture \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkpGetCapture) /* 47 */ #endif /* WIN */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ #define TkGenerateActivateEvents \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkGenerateActivateEvents) /* 0 */ /* Slot 1 is reserved */ #define TkGenerateActivateEvents_ \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkGenerateActivateEvents_) /* 2 */ #define TkPointerDeadWindow \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkPointerDeadWindow) /* 3 */ #define TkpSetCapture \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkpSetCapture) /* 4 */ #define TkpSetCursor \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkpSetCursor) /* 5 */ #define TkpWmSetState \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkpWmSetState) /* 6 */ #define TkAboutDlg \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkAboutDlg) /* 7 */ #define TkMacOSXButtonKeyState \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXButtonKeyState) /* 8 */ #define TkMacOSXClearMenubarActive \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXClearMenubarActive) /* 9 */ #define TkMacOSXDispatchMenuEvent \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXDispatchMenuEvent) /* 10 */ /* Slot 11 is reserved */ #define TkMacOSXHandleTearoffMenu \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXHandleTearoffMenu) /* 12 */ /* Slot 13 is reserved */ #define TkMacOSXDoHLEvent \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXDoHLEvent) /* 14 */ /* Slot 15 is reserved */ #define TkMacOSXGetXWindow \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXGetXWindow) /* 16 */ #define TkMacOSXGrowToplevel \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXGrowToplevel) /* 17 */ #define TkMacOSXHandleMenuSelect \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXHandleMenuSelect) /* 18 */ /* Slot 19 is reserved */ /* Slot 20 is reserved */ #define TkMacOSXInvalidateWindow \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXInvalidateWindow) /* 21 */ #define TkMacOSXIsCharacterMissing \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXIsCharacterMissing) /* 22 */ #define TkMacOSXMakeRealWindowExist \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXMakeRealWindowExist) /* 23 */ #define TkMacOSXMakeStippleMap \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXMakeStippleMap) /* 24 */ #define TkMacOSXMenuClick \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXMenuClick) /* 25 */ /* Slot 26 is reserved */ #define TkMacOSXResizable \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXResizable) /* 27 */ #define TkMacOSXSetHelpMenuItemCount \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXSetHelpMenuItemCount) /* 28 */ #define TkMacOSXSetScrollbarGrow \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXSetScrollbarGrow) /* 29 */ #define TkMacOSXSetUpClippingRgn \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXSetUpClippingRgn) /* 30 */ #define TkMacOSXSetUpGraphicsPort \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXSetUpGraphicsPort) /* 31 */ #define TkMacOSXUpdateClipRgn \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXUpdateClipRgn) /* 32 */ /* Slot 33 is reserved */ #define TkMacOSXUseMenuID \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXUseMenuID) /* 34 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 | /* Slot 48 is reserved */ #define TkMacOSXGetContainer \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXGetContainer) /* 49 */ #define TkGenerateButtonEvent \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkGenerateButtonEvent) /* 50 */ #define TkGenWMDestroyEvent \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkGenWMDestroyEvent) /* 51 */ #endif /* AQUA */ #if !(defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)) /* X11 */ #define TkCreateXEventSource \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkCreateXEventSource) /* 0 */ /* Slot 1 is reserved */ #define TkGenerateActivateEvents \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkGenerateActivateEvents) /* 2 */ | > > > > > > > > | | > | > > > > > > | > > > > | < | < < < < > > | 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 | /* Slot 48 is reserved */ #define TkMacOSXGetContainer \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXGetContainer) /* 49 */ #define TkGenerateButtonEvent \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkGenerateButtonEvent) /* 50 */ #define TkGenWMDestroyEvent \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkGenWMDestroyEvent) /* 51 */ #define TkMacOSXSetDrawingEnabled \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXSetDrawingEnabled) /* 52 */ #define TkpGetMS \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkpGetMS) /* 53 */ #define TkMacOSXDrawable \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXDrawable) /* 54 */ #define TkpScanWindowId \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkpScanWindowId) /* 55 */ #endif /* AQUA */ #if !(defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)) /* X11 */ #define TkCreateXEventSource \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkCreateXEventSource) /* 0 */ /* Slot 1 is reserved */ #define TkGenerateActivateEvents \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkGenerateActivateEvents) /* 2 */ #define TkpCmapStressed \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkpCmapStressed) /* 3 */ #define TkpSync \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkpSync) /* 4 */ #define TkUnixContainerId \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkUnixContainerId) /* 5 */ #define TkUnixDoOneXEvent \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkUnixDoOneXEvent) /* 6 */ #define TkUnixSetMenubar \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkUnixSetMenubar) /* 7 */ #define TkpScanWindowId \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkpScanWindowId) /* 8 */ #define TkWmCleanup \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkWmCleanup) /* 9 */ #define TkSendCleanup \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkSendCleanup) /* 10 */ /* Slot 11 is reserved */ #define TkpWmSetState \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkpWmSetState) /* 12 */ #define TkpTestsendCmd_ \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkpTestsendCmd_) /* 13 */ /* Slot 14 is reserved */ /* Slot 15 is reserved */ /* Slot 16 is reserved */ /* Slot 17 is reserved */ /* Slot 18 is reserved */ /* Slot 19 is reserved */ /* Slot 20 is reserved */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
710 711 712 713 714 715 716 | /* Slot 31 is reserved */ /* Slot 32 is reserved */ /* Slot 33 is reserved */ /* Slot 34 is reserved */ /* Slot 35 is reserved */ /* Slot 36 is reserved */ /* Slot 37 is reserved */ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | > | > > > > > > > | | > > > > | 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 | /* Slot 31 is reserved */ /* Slot 32 is reserved */ /* Slot 33 is reserved */ /* Slot 34 is reserved */ /* Slot 35 is reserved */ /* Slot 36 is reserved */ /* Slot 37 is reserved */ #define TkpCmapStressed_ \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkpCmapStressed_) /* 38 */ #define TkpSync_ \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkpSync_) /* 39 */ #define TkUnixContainerId_ \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkUnixContainerId_) /* 40 */ #define TkUnixDoOneXEvent_ \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkUnixDoOneXEvent_) /* 41 */ #define TkUnixSetMenubar_ \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkUnixSetMenubar_) /* 42 */ #define TkWmCleanup_ \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkWmCleanup_) /* 43 */ #define TkSendCleanup_ \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkSendCleanup_) /* 44 */ #define TkpTestsendCmd \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkpTestsendCmd) /* 45 */ #endif /* X11 */ #endif /* defined(USE_TK_STUBS) */ /* !END!: Do not edit above this line. */ #undef TkpCmapStressed_ #undef TkpSync_ #undef TkUnixContainerId_ #undef TkUnixDoOneXEvent_ #undef TkUnixSetMenubar_ #undef TkWmCleanup_ #undef TkSendCleanup_ #undef TkpTestsendCmd_ #undef TkGenerateActivateEvents_ #undef TkMacOSXSetUpClippingRgn #undef TkMacOSXIsCharacterMissing #define TkMacOSXIsCharacterMissing(tkfont) ((void)tkfont, 0) #undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS #define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT #undef TkWinGetPlatformId #define TkWinGetPlatformId() (2) /* VER_PLATFORM_WIN32_NT */ #endif /* _TKINTPLATDECLS */ |
Changes to generic/tkIntXlibDecls.h.
︙ | ︙ | |||
494 495 496 497 498 499 500 | EXTERN char * XGetAtomName(Display *d, Atom a); /* 5 */ EXTERN char * XKeysymToString(KeySym k); /* 6 */ EXTERN Colormap XCreateColormap(Display *d, Window w, Visual *v, int i); /* 7 */ | < < < < < < < < | < < | | | | < < < < < < < | | | | < < | | | | | < < | | | | | | | < < | | < < | | < < | < < < | | | < < < | | | < < < < < < < | < < < | | | | | < < | | | | | | | | | < < < < | | | < < < < < < < < < | < < < < | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | > > > > > | < < < < > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | > | 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 | EXTERN char * XGetAtomName(Display *d, Atom a); /* 5 */ EXTERN char * XKeysymToString(KeySym k); /* 6 */ EXTERN Colormap XCreateColormap(Display *d, Window w, Visual *v, int i); /* 7 */ EXTERN GContext XGContextFromGC(GC g); /* 8 */ EXTERN KeySym XKeycodeToKeysym(Display *d, unsigned int k, int i); /* 9 */ EXTERN KeySym XStringToKeysym(_Xconst char *c); /* 10 */ EXTERN Window XRootWindow(Display *d, int i); /* 11 */ EXTERN XErrorHandler XSetErrorHandler(XErrorHandler x); /* 12 */ EXTERN Status XAllocColor(Display *d, Colormap c, XColor *xp); /* 13 */ EXTERN int XBell(Display *d, int i); /* 14 */ EXTERN int XChangeProperty(Display *d, Window w, Atom a1, Atom a2, int i1, int i2, _Xconst unsigned char *c, int i3); /* 15 */ EXTERN int XChangeWindowAttributes(Display *d, Window w, unsigned long ul, XSetWindowAttributes *x); /* 16 */ EXTERN int XConfigureWindow(Display *d, Window w, unsigned int i, XWindowChanges *x); /* 17 */ EXTERN int XCopyArea(Display *d, Drawable dr1, Drawable dr2, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4); /* 18 */ EXTERN int XCopyPlane(Display *d, Drawable dr1, Drawable dr2, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4, unsigned long ul); /* 19 */ EXTERN Pixmap XCreateBitmapFromData(Display *display, Drawable d, _Xconst char *data, unsigned int width, unsigned int height); /* 20 */ EXTERN int XDefineCursor(Display *d, Window w, Cursor c); /* 21 */ EXTERN int XDestroyWindow(Display *d, Window w); /* 22 */ EXTERN int XDrawArc(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4); /* 23 */ EXTERN int XDrawLines(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, XPoint *x, int i1, int i2); /* 24 */ EXTERN int XDrawRectangle(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2); /* 25 */ EXTERN int XFillArc(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4); /* 26 */ EXTERN int XFillPolygon(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, XPoint *x, int i1, int i2, int i3); /* 27 */ EXTERN int XFillRectangles(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, XRectangle *x, int i); /* 28 */ EXTERN int XFreeColormap(Display *d, Colormap c); /* 29 */ EXTERN int XFreeColors(Display *d, Colormap c, unsigned long *ulp, int i, unsigned long ul); /* 30 */ EXTERN int XFreeModifiermap(XModifierKeymap *x); /* 31 */ EXTERN Status XGetGeometry(Display *d, Drawable dr, Window *w, int *i1, int *i2, unsigned int *ui1, unsigned int *ui2, unsigned int *ui3, unsigned int *ui4); /* 32 */ EXTERN int XGetWindowProperty(Display *d, Window w, Atom a1, long l1, long l2, Bool b, Atom a2, Atom *ap, int *ip, unsigned long *ulp1, unsigned long *ulp2, unsigned char **cpp); /* 33 */ EXTERN int XGrabKeyboard(Display *d, Window w, Bool b, int i1, int i2, Time t); /* 34 */ EXTERN int XGrabPointer(Display *d, Window w1, Bool b, unsigned int ui, int i1, int i2, Window w2, Cursor c, Time t); /* 35 */ EXTERN KeyCode XKeysymToKeycode(Display *d, KeySym k); /* 36 */ EXTERN int XMapWindow(Display *d, Window w); /* 37 */ EXTERN int XMoveResizeWindow(Display *d, Window w, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2); /* 38 */ EXTERN int XMoveWindow(Display *d, Window w, int i1, int i2); /* 39 */ EXTERN Bool XQueryPointer(Display *d, Window w1, Window *w2, Window *w3, int *i1, int *i2, int *i3, int *i4, unsigned int *ui); /* 40 */ EXTERN int XRaiseWindow(Display *d, Window w); /* 41 */ EXTERN int XRefreshKeyboardMapping(XMappingEvent *x); /* 42 */ EXTERN int XResizeWindow(Display *d, Window w, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2); /* 43 */ EXTERN int XSelectInput(Display *d, Window w, long l); /* 44 */ EXTERN Status XSendEvent(Display *d, Window w, Bool b, long l, XEvent *x); /* 45 */ EXTERN int XSetIconName(Display *d, Window w, _Xconst char *c); /* 46 */ EXTERN int XSetInputFocus(Display *d, Window w, int i, Time t); /* 47 */ EXTERN int XSetSelectionOwner(Display *d, Atom a, Window w, Time t); /* 48 */ EXTERN int XSetWindowBackground(Display *d, Window w, unsigned long ul); /* 49 */ EXTERN int XSetWindowBackgroundPixmap(Display *d, Window w, Pixmap p); /* 50 */ EXTERN int XSetWindowBorder(Display *d, Window w, unsigned long ul); /* 51 */ EXTERN int XSetWindowBorderPixmap(Display *d, Window w, Pixmap p); /* 52 */ EXTERN int XSetWindowBorderWidth(Display *d, Window w, unsigned int ui); /* 53 */ EXTERN int XSetWindowColormap(Display *d, Window w, Colormap c); /* 54 */ EXTERN int XUngrabKeyboard(Display *d, Time t); /* 55 */ EXTERN int XUngrabPointer(Display *d, Time t); /* 56 */ EXTERN int XUnmapWindow(Display *d, Window w); /* 57 */ EXTERN int TkPutImage(unsigned long *colors, int ncolors, Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, XImage *image, int src_x, int src_y, int dest_x, int dest_y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height); /* 58 */ EXTERN Status XParseColor(Display *display, Colormap map, _Xconst char *spec, XColor *colorPtr); /* 59 */ EXTERN GC XCreateGC(Display *display, Drawable d, unsigned long valuemask, XGCValues *values); /* 60 */ EXTERN int XFreeGC(Display *display, GC gc); /* 61 */ EXTERN Atom XInternAtom(Display *display, _Xconst char *atom_name, Bool only_if_exists); /* 62 */ EXTERN int XSetBackground(Display *display, GC gc, unsigned long foreground); /* 63 */ EXTERN int XSetForeground(Display *display, GC gc, unsigned long foreground); /* 64 */ EXTERN int XSetClipMask(Display *display, GC gc, Pixmap pixmap); /* 65 */ EXTERN int XSetClipOrigin(Display *display, GC gc, int clip_x_origin, int clip_y_origin); /* 66 */ EXTERN int XSetTSOrigin(Display *display, GC gc, int ts_x_origin, int ts_y_origin); /* 67 */ EXTERN int XChangeGC(Display *d, GC gc, unsigned long mask, XGCValues *values); /* 68 */ EXTERN int XSetFont(Display *display, GC gc, Font font); /* 69 */ EXTERN int XSetArcMode(Display *display, GC gc, int arc_mode); /* 70 */ EXTERN int XSetStipple(Display *display, GC gc, Pixmap stipple); /* 71 */ EXTERN int XSetFillRule(Display *display, GC gc, int fill_rule); /* 72 */ EXTERN int XSetFillStyle(Display *display, GC gc, int fill_style); /* 73 */ EXTERN int XSetFunction(Display *display, GC gc, int function); /* 74 */ EXTERN int XSetLineAttributes(Display *display, GC gc, unsigned int line_width, int line_style, int cap_style, int join_style); /* 75 */ EXTERN int _XInitImageFuncPtrs(XImage *image); /* 76 */ EXTERN XIC XCreateIC(XIM xim, ...); /* 77 */ EXTERN XVisualInfo * XGetVisualInfo(Display *display, long vinfo_mask, XVisualInfo *vinfo_template, int *nitems_return); /* 78 */ EXTERN void XSetWMClientMachine(Display *display, Window w, XTextProperty *text_prop); /* 79 */ EXTERN Status XStringListToTextProperty(char **list, int count, XTextProperty *text_prop_return); /* 80 */ EXTERN int XDrawSegments(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, XSegment *segments, int nsegments); /* 81 */ EXTERN int XForceScreenSaver(Display *display, int mode); /* 82 */ EXTERN int XDrawLine(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2); /* 83 */ EXTERN int XFillRectangle(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, int x, int y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height); /* 84 */ EXTERN int XClearWindow(Display *d, Window w); /* 85 */ EXTERN int XDrawPoint(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, int x, int y); /* 86 */ EXTERN int XDrawPoints(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, XPoint *points, int npoints, int mode); /* 87 */ EXTERN int XWarpPointer(Display *display, Window src_w, Window dest_w, int src_x, int src_y, unsigned int src_width, unsigned int src_height, int dest_x, int dest_y); /* 88 */ EXTERN int XQueryColor(Display *display, Colormap colormap, XColor *def_in_out); /* 89 */ EXTERN int XQueryColors(Display *display, Colormap colormap, XColor *defs_in_out, int ncolors); /* 90 */ EXTERN Status XQueryTree(Display *d, Window w1, Window *w2, Window *w3, Window **w4, unsigned int *ui); /* 91 */ EXTERN int XSync(Display *display, Bool discard); /* 92 */ EXTERN Bool XTranslateCoordinates(Display *d, Window w1, Window w2, int i1, int i2, int *i3, int *i4, Window *w3); /* 93 */ EXTERN int XDeleteProperty(Display *d, Window w, Atom a); /* 94 */ EXTERN int XFreeCursor(Display *d, Cursor c); /* 95 */ EXTERN int XGetInputFocus(Display *d, Window *w, int *i); /* 96 */ EXTERN int XmbLookupString(XIC xi, XKeyPressedEvent *xk, char *c, int i, KeySym *k, Status *s); /* 97 */ EXTERN int XNextEvent(Display *d, XEvent *x); /* 98 */ EXTERN int XPutBackEvent(Display *d, XEvent *x); /* 99 */ EXTERN int XSetCommand(Display *d, Window w, char **c, int i); /* 100 */ EXTERN int XWindowEvent(Display *d, Window w, long l, XEvent *x); /* 101 */ EXTERN Status XGetWindowAttributes(Display *d, Window w, XWindowAttributes *x); /* 102 */ EXTERN Status XGetWMColormapWindows(Display *d, Window w, Window **wpp, int *ip); /* 103 */ EXTERN Status XIconifyWindow(Display *d, Window w, int i); /* 104 */ EXTERN Status XWithdrawWindow(Display *d, Window w, int i); /* 105 */ EXTERN XHostAddress * XListHosts(Display *d, int *i, Bool *b); /* 106 */ EXTERN int XSetClipRectangles(Display *display, GC gc, int clip_x_origin, int clip_y_origin, XRectangle rectangles[], int n, int ordering); /* 107 */ EXTERN int XFlush(Display *display); /* 108 */ EXTERN int XGrabServer(Display *display); /* 109 */ EXTERN int XUngrabServer(Display *display); /* 110 */ EXTERN int XFree(void *data); /* 111 */ EXTERN int XNoOp(Display *display); /* 112 */ EXTERN XAfterFunction XSynchronize(Display *display, Bool onoff); /* 113 */ EXTERN Status XLookupColor(Display *d, Colormap c1, _Xconst char *c2, XColor *x1, XColor *x2); /* 114 */ EXTERN VisualID XVisualIDFromVisual(Visual *visual); /* Slot 115 is reserved */ /* Slot 116 is reserved */ /* Slot 117 is reserved */ /* Slot 118 is reserved */ /* Slot 119 is reserved */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
822 823 824 825 826 827 828 | int n); /* 131 */ EXTERN int XDrawArcs(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC gc, XArc *a, int n); /* 132 */ EXTERN int XDrawRectangles(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC gc, XRectangle *r, int n); | | < < | < < | < < | > | > > > | > > > | 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 | int n); /* 131 */ EXTERN int XDrawArcs(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC gc, XArc *a, int n); /* 132 */ EXTERN int XDrawRectangles(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC gc, XRectangle *r, int n); /* Slot 133 is reserved */ /* Slot 134 is reserved */ /* Slot 135 is reserved */ /* 136 */ EXTERN int XReparentWindow(Display *d, Window w, Window p, int x, int y); /* 137 */ EXTERN int XPutImage(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC gc, XImage *im, int sx, int sy, int dx, int dy, unsigned int w, unsigned int h); /* 138 */ EXTERN Region XPolygonRegion(XPoint *pts, int n, int rule); /* 139 */ EXTERN int XPointInRegion(Region rgn, int x, int y); /* 140 */ EXTERN XVaNestedList XVaCreateNestedList(int dummy, ...); /* 141 */ EXTERN char * XSetICValues(XIC xic, ...); /* 142 */ EXTERN char * XGetICValues(XIC xic, ...); /* 143 */ EXTERN void XSetICFocus(XIC xic); /* 144 */ EXTERN void XDestroyIC(XIC xic); /* 145 */ EXTERN Cursor XCreatePixmapCursor(Display *d, Pixmap p1, Pixmap p2, XColor *x1, XColor *x2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2); /* 146 */ EXTERN Cursor XCreateGlyphCursor(Display *d, Font f1, Font f2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, XColor _Xconst *x1, XColor _Xconst *x2); /* 147 */ EXTERN void XFreeFontSet(Display *display, XFontSet fontset); /* 148 */ EXTERN int XCloseIM(XIM im); /* 149 */ EXTERN Bool XRegisterIMInstantiateCallback(Display *dpy, struct _XrmHashBucketRec *rbd, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 | int (*xSetDashes) (Display *display, GC gc, int dash_offset, _Xconst char *dash_list, int n); /* 0 */ XModifierKeymap * (*xGetModifierMapping) (Display *d); /* 1 */ XImage * (*xCreateImage) (Display *d, Visual *v, unsigned int ui1, int i1, int i2, char *cp, unsigned int ui2, unsigned int ui3, int i3, int i4); /* 2 */ XImage * (*xGetImage) (Display *d, Drawable dr, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, unsigned long ul, int i3); /* 3 */ char * (*xGetAtomName) (Display *d, Atom a); /* 4 */ char * (*xKeysymToString) (KeySym k); /* 5 */ Colormap (*xCreateColormap) (Display *d, Window w, Visual *v, int i); /* 6 */ | < < | < | | | | < < < | | | | < | | | | | < | | | | | | | < | | < | | < | < | | | < | | | < < < | < | | | | | < | | | | | | | | | < | | | < < < < | < | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | > > | < | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | | | | | | | | 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 | int (*xSetDashes) (Display *display, GC gc, int dash_offset, _Xconst char *dash_list, int n); /* 0 */ XModifierKeymap * (*xGetModifierMapping) (Display *d); /* 1 */ XImage * (*xCreateImage) (Display *d, Visual *v, unsigned int ui1, int i1, int i2, char *cp, unsigned int ui2, unsigned int ui3, int i3, int i4); /* 2 */ XImage * (*xGetImage) (Display *d, Drawable dr, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, unsigned long ul, int i3); /* 3 */ char * (*xGetAtomName) (Display *d, Atom a); /* 4 */ char * (*xKeysymToString) (KeySym k); /* 5 */ Colormap (*xCreateColormap) (Display *d, Window w, Visual *v, int i); /* 6 */ GContext (*xGContextFromGC) (GC g); /* 7 */ KeySym (*xKeycodeToKeysym) (Display *d, unsigned int k, int i); /* 8 */ KeySym (*xStringToKeysym) (_Xconst char *c); /* 9 */ Window (*xRootWindow) (Display *d, int i); /* 10 */ XErrorHandler (*xSetErrorHandler) (XErrorHandler x); /* 11 */ Status (*xAllocColor) (Display *d, Colormap c, XColor *xp); /* 12 */ int (*xBell) (Display *d, int i); /* 13 */ int (*xChangeProperty) (Display *d, Window w, Atom a1, Atom a2, int i1, int i2, _Xconst unsigned char *c, int i3); /* 14 */ int (*xChangeWindowAttributes) (Display *d, Window w, unsigned long ul, XSetWindowAttributes *x); /* 15 */ int (*xConfigureWindow) (Display *d, Window w, unsigned int i, XWindowChanges *x); /* 16 */ int (*xCopyArea) (Display *d, Drawable dr1, Drawable dr2, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4); /* 17 */ int (*xCopyPlane) (Display *d, Drawable dr1, Drawable dr2, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4, unsigned long ul); /* 18 */ Pixmap (*xCreateBitmapFromData) (Display *display, Drawable d, _Xconst char *data, unsigned int width, unsigned int height); /* 19 */ int (*xDefineCursor) (Display *d, Window w, Cursor c); /* 20 */ int (*xDestroyWindow) (Display *d, Window w); /* 21 */ int (*xDrawArc) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4); /* 22 */ int (*xDrawLines) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, XPoint *x, int i1, int i2); /* 23 */ int (*xDrawRectangle) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2); /* 24 */ int (*xFillArc) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4); /* 25 */ int (*xFillPolygon) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, XPoint *x, int i1, int i2, int i3); /* 26 */ int (*xFillRectangles) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, XRectangle *x, int i); /* 27 */ int (*xFreeColormap) (Display *d, Colormap c); /* 28 */ int (*xFreeColors) (Display *d, Colormap c, unsigned long *ulp, int i, unsigned long ul); /* 29 */ int (*xFreeModifiermap) (XModifierKeymap *x); /* 30 */ Status (*xGetGeometry) (Display *d, Drawable dr, Window *w, int *i1, int *i2, unsigned int *ui1, unsigned int *ui2, unsigned int *ui3, unsigned int *ui4); /* 31 */ int (*xGetWindowProperty) (Display *d, Window w, Atom a1, long l1, long l2, Bool b, Atom a2, Atom *ap, int *ip, unsigned long *ulp1, unsigned long *ulp2, unsigned char **cpp); /* 32 */ int (*xGrabKeyboard) (Display *d, Window w, Bool b, int i1, int i2, Time t); /* 33 */ int (*xGrabPointer) (Display *d, Window w1, Bool b, unsigned int ui, int i1, int i2, Window w2, Cursor c, Time t); /* 34 */ KeyCode (*xKeysymToKeycode) (Display *d, KeySym k); /* 35 */ int (*xMapWindow) (Display *d, Window w); /* 36 */ int (*xMoveResizeWindow) (Display *d, Window w, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2); /* 37 */ int (*xMoveWindow) (Display *d, Window w, int i1, int i2); /* 38 */ Bool (*xQueryPointer) (Display *d, Window w1, Window *w2, Window *w3, int *i1, int *i2, int *i3, int *i4, unsigned int *ui); /* 39 */ int (*xRaiseWindow) (Display *d, Window w); /* 40 */ int (*xRefreshKeyboardMapping) (XMappingEvent *x); /* 41 */ int (*xResizeWindow) (Display *d, Window w, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2); /* 42 */ int (*xSelectInput) (Display *d, Window w, long l); /* 43 */ Status (*xSendEvent) (Display *d, Window w, Bool b, long l, XEvent *x); /* 44 */ int (*xSetIconName) (Display *d, Window w, _Xconst char *c); /* 45 */ int (*xSetInputFocus) (Display *d, Window w, int i, Time t); /* 46 */ int (*xSetSelectionOwner) (Display *d, Atom a, Window w, Time t); /* 47 */ int (*xSetWindowBackground) (Display *d, Window w, unsigned long ul); /* 48 */ int (*xSetWindowBackgroundPixmap) (Display *d, Window w, Pixmap p); /* 49 */ int (*xSetWindowBorder) (Display *d, Window w, unsigned long ul); /* 50 */ int (*xSetWindowBorderPixmap) (Display *d, Window w, Pixmap p); /* 51 */ int (*xSetWindowBorderWidth) (Display *d, Window w, unsigned int ui); /* 52 */ int (*xSetWindowColormap) (Display *d, Window w, Colormap c); /* 53 */ int (*xUngrabKeyboard) (Display *d, Time t); /* 54 */ int (*xUngrabPointer) (Display *d, Time t); /* 55 */ int (*xUnmapWindow) (Display *d, Window w); /* 56 */ int (*tkPutImage) (unsigned long *colors, int ncolors, Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, XImage *image, int src_x, int src_y, int dest_x, int dest_y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height); /* 57 */ Status (*xParseColor) (Display *display, Colormap map, _Xconst char *spec, XColor *colorPtr); /* 58 */ GC (*xCreateGC) (Display *display, Drawable d, unsigned long valuemask, XGCValues *values); /* 59 */ int (*xFreeGC) (Display *display, GC gc); /* 60 */ Atom (*xInternAtom) (Display *display, _Xconst char *atom_name, Bool only_if_exists); /* 61 */ int (*xSetBackground) (Display *display, GC gc, unsigned long foreground); /* 62 */ int (*xSetForeground) (Display *display, GC gc, unsigned long foreground); /* 63 */ int (*xSetClipMask) (Display *display, GC gc, Pixmap pixmap); /* 64 */ int (*xSetClipOrigin) (Display *display, GC gc, int clip_x_origin, int clip_y_origin); /* 65 */ int (*xSetTSOrigin) (Display *display, GC gc, int ts_x_origin, int ts_y_origin); /* 66 */ int (*xChangeGC) (Display *d, GC gc, unsigned long mask, XGCValues *values); /* 67 */ int (*xSetFont) (Display *display, GC gc, Font font); /* 68 */ int (*xSetArcMode) (Display *display, GC gc, int arc_mode); /* 69 */ int (*xSetStipple) (Display *display, GC gc, Pixmap stipple); /* 70 */ int (*xSetFillRule) (Display *display, GC gc, int fill_rule); /* 71 */ int (*xSetFillStyle) (Display *display, GC gc, int fill_style); /* 72 */ int (*xSetFunction) (Display *display, GC gc, int function); /* 73 */ int (*xSetLineAttributes) (Display *display, GC gc, unsigned int line_width, int line_style, int cap_style, int join_style); /* 74 */ int (*_XInitImageFuncPtrs) (XImage *image); /* 75 */ XIC (*xCreateIC) (XIM xim, ...); /* 76 */ XVisualInfo * (*xGetVisualInfo) (Display *display, long vinfo_mask, XVisualInfo *vinfo_template, int *nitems_return); /* 77 */ void (*xSetWMClientMachine) (Display *display, Window w, XTextProperty *text_prop); /* 78 */ Status (*xStringListToTextProperty) (char **list, int count, XTextProperty *text_prop_return); /* 79 */ int (*xDrawSegments) (Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, XSegment *segments, int nsegments); /* 80 */ int (*xForceScreenSaver) (Display *display, int mode); /* 81 */ int (*xDrawLine) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2); /* 82 */ int (*xFillRectangle) (Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, int x, int y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height); /* 83 */ int (*xClearWindow) (Display *d, Window w); /* 84 */ int (*xDrawPoint) (Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, int x, int y); /* 85 */ int (*xDrawPoints) (Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, XPoint *points, int npoints, int mode); /* 86 */ int (*xWarpPointer) (Display *display, Window src_w, Window dest_w, int src_x, int src_y, unsigned int src_width, unsigned int src_height, int dest_x, int dest_y); /* 87 */ int (*xQueryColor) (Display *display, Colormap colormap, XColor *def_in_out); /* 88 */ int (*xQueryColors) (Display *display, Colormap colormap, XColor *defs_in_out, int ncolors); /* 89 */ Status (*xQueryTree) (Display *d, Window w1, Window *w2, Window *w3, Window **w4, unsigned int *ui); /* 90 */ int (*xSync) (Display *display, Bool discard); /* 91 */ Bool (*xTranslateCoordinates) (Display *d, Window w1, Window w2, int i1, int i2, int *i3, int *i4, Window *w3); /* 92 */ int (*xDeleteProperty) (Display *d, Window w, Atom a); /* 93 */ int (*xFreeCursor) (Display *d, Cursor c); /* 94 */ int (*xGetInputFocus) (Display *d, Window *w, int *i); /* 95 */ int (*xmbLookupString) (XIC xi, XKeyPressedEvent *xk, char *c, int i, KeySym *k, Status *s); /* 96 */ int (*xNextEvent) (Display *d, XEvent *x); /* 97 */ int (*xPutBackEvent) (Display *d, XEvent *x); /* 98 */ int (*xSetCommand) (Display *d, Window w, char **c, int i); /* 99 */ int (*xWindowEvent) (Display *d, Window w, long l, XEvent *x); /* 100 */ Status (*xGetWindowAttributes) (Display *d, Window w, XWindowAttributes *x); /* 101 */ Status (*xGetWMColormapWindows) (Display *d, Window w, Window **wpp, int *ip); /* 102 */ Status (*xIconifyWindow) (Display *d, Window w, int i); /* 103 */ Status (*xWithdrawWindow) (Display *d, Window w, int i); /* 104 */ XHostAddress * (*xListHosts) (Display *d, int *i, Bool *b); /* 105 */ int (*xSetClipRectangles) (Display *display, GC gc, int clip_x_origin, int clip_y_origin, XRectangle rectangles[], int n, int ordering); /* 106 */ int (*xFlush) (Display *display); /* 107 */ int (*xGrabServer) (Display *display); /* 108 */ int (*xUngrabServer) (Display *display); /* 109 */ int (*xFree) (void *data); /* 110 */ int (*xNoOp) (Display *display); /* 111 */ XAfterFunction (*xSynchronize) (Display *display, Bool onoff); /* 112 */ Status (*xLookupColor) (Display *d, Colormap c1, _Xconst char *c2, XColor *x1, XColor *x2); /* 113 */ VisualID (*xVisualIDFromVisual) (Visual *visual); /* 114 */ void (*reserved115)(void); void (*reserved116)(void); void (*reserved117)(void); void (*reserved118)(void); void (*reserved119)(void); int (*xOffsetRegion) (Region rgn, int dx, int dy); /* 120 */ int (*xUnionRegion) (Region srca, Region srcb, Region dr_return); /* 121 */ Window (*xCreateWindow) (Display *display, Window parent, int x, int y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height, unsigned int border_width, int depth, unsigned int clazz, Visual *visual, unsigned long value_mask, XSetWindowAttributes *attributes); /* 122 */ void (*reserved123)(void); void (*reserved124)(void); void (*reserved125)(void); void (*reserved126)(void); void (*reserved127)(void); void (*reserved128)(void); int (*xLowerWindow) (Display *d, Window w); /* 129 */ int (*xFillArcs) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC gc, XArc *a, int n); /* 130 */ int (*xDrawArcs) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC gc, XArc *a, int n); /* 131 */ int (*xDrawRectangles) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC gc, XRectangle *r, int n); /* 132 */ void (*reserved133)(void); void (*reserved134)(void); void (*reserved135)(void); int (*xReparentWindow) (Display *d, Window w, Window p, int x, int y); /* 136 */ int (*xPutImage) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC gc, XImage *im, int sx, int sy, int dx, int dy, unsigned int w, unsigned int h); /* 137 */ Region (*xPolygonRegion) (XPoint *pts, int n, int rule); /* 138 */ int (*xPointInRegion) (Region rgn, int x, int y); /* 139 */ XVaNestedList (*xVaCreateNestedList) (int dummy, ...); /* 140 */ char * (*xSetICValues) (XIC xic, ...); /* 141 */ char * (*xGetICValues) (XIC xic, ...); /* 142 */ void (*xSetICFocus) (XIC xic); /* 143 */ void (*xDestroyIC) (XIC xic); /* 144 */ Cursor (*xCreatePixmapCursor) (Display *d, Pixmap p1, Pixmap p2, XColor *x1, XColor *x2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2); /* 145 */ Cursor (*xCreateGlyphCursor) (Display *d, Font f1, Font f2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, XColor _Xconst *x1, XColor _Xconst *x2); /* 146 */ void (*xFreeFontSet) (Display *display, XFontSet fontset); /* 147 */ int (*xCloseIM) (XIM im); /* 148 */ Bool (*xRegisterIMInstantiateCallback) (Display *dpy, struct _XrmHashBucketRec *rbd, char *res_name, char *res_class, XIDProc callback, XPointer client_data); /* 149 */ Bool (*xUnregisterIMInstantiateCallback) (Display *dpy, struct _XrmHashBucketRec *rbd, char *res_name, char *res_class, XIDProc callback, XPointer client_data); /* 150 */ char * (*xSetLocaleModifiers) (const char *modifier_list); /* 151 */ XIM (*xOpenIM) (Display *dpy, struct _XrmHashBucketRec *rdb, char *res_name, char *res_class); /* 152 */ char * (*xGetIMValues) (XIM im, ...); /* 153 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 | (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xGetImage) /* 3 */ #define XGetAtomName \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xGetAtomName) /* 4 */ #define XKeysymToString \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xKeysymToString) /* 5 */ #define XCreateColormap \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xCreateColormap) /* 6 */ | < < < < | < < | | | | < < < < < < | | | | < < | | | | | < < | | | | | | | < < | | < < | | < < | < < | | | < < | | | < < < < < < | < < | | | | | < < | | | | | | | | | < < | | | < < < < < < < < | < < | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | > > | | | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | | | 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 1592 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 1623 1624 1625 1626 1627 1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 1645 1646 1647 1648 1649 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 1655 1656 1657 1658 1659 1660 1661 1662 1663 1664 1665 1666 1667 1668 1669 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 1676 1677 1678 1679 1680 1681 1682 1683 1684 1685 1686 1687 1688 1689 1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 1697 1698 1699 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765 1766 1767 1768 1769 1770 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 | (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xGetImage) /* 3 */ #define XGetAtomName \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xGetAtomName) /* 4 */ #define XKeysymToString \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xKeysymToString) /* 5 */ #define XCreateColormap \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xCreateColormap) /* 6 */ #define XGContextFromGC \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xGContextFromGC) /* 7 */ #define XKeycodeToKeysym \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xKeycodeToKeysym) /* 8 */ #define XStringToKeysym \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xStringToKeysym) /* 9 */ #define XRootWindow \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xRootWindow) /* 10 */ #define XSetErrorHandler \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSetErrorHandler) /* 11 */ #define XAllocColor \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xAllocColor) /* 12 */ #define XBell \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xBell) /* 13 */ #define XChangeProperty \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xChangeProperty) /* 14 */ #define XChangeWindowAttributes \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xChangeWindowAttributes) /* 15 */ #define XConfigureWindow \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xConfigureWindow) /* 16 */ #define XCopyArea \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xCopyArea) /* 17 */ #define XCopyPlane \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xCopyPlane) /* 18 */ #define XCreateBitmapFromData \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xCreateBitmapFromData) /* 19 */ #define XDefineCursor \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xDefineCursor) /* 20 */ #define XDestroyWindow \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xDestroyWindow) /* 21 */ #define XDrawArc \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xDrawArc) /* 22 */ #define XDrawLines \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xDrawLines) /* 23 */ #define XDrawRectangle \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xDrawRectangle) /* 24 */ #define XFillArc \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xFillArc) /* 25 */ #define XFillPolygon \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xFillPolygon) /* 26 */ #define XFillRectangles \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xFillRectangles) /* 27 */ #define XFreeColormap \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xFreeColormap) /* 28 */ #define XFreeColors \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xFreeColors) /* 29 */ #define XFreeModifiermap \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xFreeModifiermap) /* 30 */ #define XGetGeometry \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xGetGeometry) /* 31 */ #define XGetWindowProperty \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xGetWindowProperty) /* 32 */ #define XGrabKeyboard \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xGrabKeyboard) /* 33 */ #define XGrabPointer \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xGrabPointer) /* 34 */ #define XKeysymToKeycode \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xKeysymToKeycode) /* 35 */ #define XMapWindow \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xMapWindow) /* 36 */ #define XMoveResizeWindow \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xMoveResizeWindow) /* 37 */ #define XMoveWindow \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xMoveWindow) /* 38 */ #define XQueryPointer \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xQueryPointer) /* 39 */ #define XRaiseWindow \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xRaiseWindow) /* 40 */ #define XRefreshKeyboardMapping \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xRefreshKeyboardMapping) /* 41 */ #define XResizeWindow \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xResizeWindow) /* 42 */ #define XSelectInput \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSelectInput) /* 43 */ #define XSendEvent \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSendEvent) /* 44 */ #define XSetIconName \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSetIconName) /* 45 */ #define XSetInputFocus \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSetInputFocus) /* 46 */ #define XSetSelectionOwner \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSetSelectionOwner) /* 47 */ #define XSetWindowBackground \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSetWindowBackground) /* 48 */ #define XSetWindowBackgroundPixmap \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSetWindowBackgroundPixmap) /* 49 */ #define XSetWindowBorder \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSetWindowBorder) /* 50 */ #define XSetWindowBorderPixmap \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSetWindowBorderPixmap) /* 51 */ #define XSetWindowBorderWidth \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSetWindowBorderWidth) /* 52 */ #define XSetWindowColormap \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSetWindowColormap) /* 53 */ #define XUngrabKeyboard \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xUngrabKeyboard) /* 54 */ #define XUngrabPointer \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xUngrabPointer) /* 55 */ #define XUnmapWindow \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xUnmapWindow) /* 56 */ #define TkPutImage \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->tkPutImage) /* 57 */ #define XParseColor \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xParseColor) /* 58 */ #define XCreateGC \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xCreateGC) /* 59 */ #define XFreeGC \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xFreeGC) /* 60 */ #define XInternAtom \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xInternAtom) /* 61 */ #define XSetBackground \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSetBackground) /* 62 */ #define XSetForeground \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSetForeground) /* 63 */ #define XSetClipMask \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSetClipMask) /* 64 */ #define XSetClipOrigin \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSetClipOrigin) /* 65 */ #define XSetTSOrigin \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSetTSOrigin) /* 66 */ #define XChangeGC \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xChangeGC) /* 67 */ #define XSetFont \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSetFont) /* 68 */ #define XSetArcMode \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSetArcMode) /* 69 */ #define XSetStipple \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSetStipple) /* 70 */ #define XSetFillRule \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSetFillRule) /* 71 */ #define XSetFillStyle \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSetFillStyle) /* 72 */ #define XSetFunction \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSetFunction) /* 73 */ #define XSetLineAttributes \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSetLineAttributes) /* 74 */ #define _XInitImageFuncPtrs \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->_XInitImageFuncPtrs) /* 75 */ #define XCreateIC \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xCreateIC) /* 76 */ #define XGetVisualInfo \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xGetVisualInfo) /* 77 */ #define XSetWMClientMachine \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSetWMClientMachine) /* 78 */ #define XStringListToTextProperty \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xStringListToTextProperty) /* 79 */ #define XDrawSegments \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xDrawSegments) /* 80 */ #define XForceScreenSaver \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xForceScreenSaver) /* 81 */ #define XDrawLine \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xDrawLine) /* 82 */ #define XFillRectangle \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xFillRectangle) /* 83 */ #define XClearWindow \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xClearWindow) /* 84 */ #define XDrawPoint \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xDrawPoint) /* 85 */ #define XDrawPoints \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xDrawPoints) /* 86 */ #define XWarpPointer \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xWarpPointer) /* 87 */ #define XQueryColor \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xQueryColor) /* 88 */ #define XQueryColors \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xQueryColors) /* 89 */ #define XQueryTree \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xQueryTree) /* 90 */ #define XSync \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSync) /* 91 */ #define XTranslateCoordinates \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xTranslateCoordinates) /* 92 */ #define XDeleteProperty \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xDeleteProperty) /* 93 */ #define XFreeCursor \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xFreeCursor) /* 94 */ #define XGetInputFocus \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xGetInputFocus) /* 95 */ #define XmbLookupString \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xmbLookupString) /* 96 */ #define XNextEvent \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xNextEvent) /* 97 */ #define XPutBackEvent \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xPutBackEvent) /* 98 */ #define XSetCommand \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSetCommand) /* 99 */ #define XWindowEvent \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xWindowEvent) /* 100 */ #define XGetWindowAttributes \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xGetWindowAttributes) /* 101 */ #define XGetWMColormapWindows \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xGetWMColormapWindows) /* 102 */ #define XIconifyWindow \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xIconifyWindow) /* 103 */ #define XWithdrawWindow \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xWithdrawWindow) /* 104 */ #define XListHosts \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xListHosts) /* 105 */ #define XSetClipRectangles \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSetClipRectangles) /* 106 */ #define XFlush \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xFlush) /* 107 */ #define XGrabServer \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xGrabServer) /* 108 */ #define XUngrabServer \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xUngrabServer) /* 109 */ #define XFree \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xFree) /* 110 */ #define XNoOp \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xNoOp) /* 111 */ #define XSynchronize \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSynchronize) /* 112 */ #define XLookupColor \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xLookupColor) /* 113 */ #define XVisualIDFromVisual \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xVisualIDFromVisual) /* 114 */ /* Slot 115 is reserved */ /* Slot 116 is reserved */ /* Slot 117 is reserved */ /* Slot 118 is reserved */ /* Slot 119 is reserved */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1795 1796 1797 1798 1799 1800 1801 | (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xLowerWindow) /* 129 */ #define XFillArcs \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xFillArcs) /* 130 */ #define XDrawArcs \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xDrawArcs) /* 131 */ #define XDrawRectangles \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xDrawRectangles) /* 132 */ | < | < | < | > | > | > | | 1798 1799 1800 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 1816 1817 1818 1819 1820 1821 1822 1823 1824 1825 1826 1827 1828 1829 1830 1831 1832 1833 1834 1835 1836 | (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xLowerWindow) /* 129 */ #define XFillArcs \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xFillArcs) /* 130 */ #define XDrawArcs \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xDrawArcs) /* 131 */ #define XDrawRectangles \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xDrawRectangles) /* 132 */ /* Slot 133 is reserved */ /* Slot 134 is reserved */ /* Slot 135 is reserved */ #define XReparentWindow \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xReparentWindow) /* 136 */ #define XPutImage \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xPutImage) /* 137 */ #define XPolygonRegion \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xPolygonRegion) /* 138 */ #define XPointInRegion \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xPointInRegion) /* 139 */ #define XVaCreateNestedList \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xVaCreateNestedList) /* 140 */ #define XSetICValues \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSetICValues) /* 141 */ #define XGetICValues \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xGetICValues) /* 142 */ #define XSetICFocus \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSetICFocus) /* 143 */ #define XDestroyIC \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xDestroyIC) /* 144 */ #define XCreatePixmapCursor \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xCreatePixmapCursor) /* 145 */ #define XCreateGlyphCursor \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xCreateGlyphCursor) /* 146 */ #define XFreeFontSet \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xFreeFontSet) /* 147 */ #define XCloseIM \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xCloseIM) /* 148 */ #define XRegisterIMInstantiateCallback \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xRegisterIMInstantiateCallback) /* 149 */ #define XUnregisterIMInstantiateCallback \ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkListbox.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
53 54 55 56 57 58 59 | /* * Information used when displaying widget: */ Tk_3DBorder normalBorder; /* Used for drawing border around whole * window, plus used for background. */ | | | | | 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 | /* * Information used when displaying widget: */ Tk_3DBorder normalBorder; /* Used for drawing border around whole * window, plus used for background. */ int borderWidth; /* Width of 3-D border around window. */ int relief; /* 3-D effect: TK_RELIEF_RAISED, etc. */ int highlightWidth; /* Width in pixels of highlight to draw around * widget when it has the focus. <= 0 means * don't draw a highlight. */ XColor *highlightBgColorPtr; /* Color for drawing traversal highlight area * when highlight is off. */ XColor *highlightColorPtr; /* Color for drawing traversal highlight. */ int inset; /* Total width of all borders, including * traversal highlight and 3-D border. * Indicates how much interior stuff must be * offset from outside edges to leave room for * borders. */ Tk_Font tkfont; /* Information about text font, or NULL. */ XColor *fgColorPtr; /* Text color in normal mode. */ XColor *dfgColorPtr; /* Text color in disabled mode. */ GC textGC; /* For drawing normal text. */ Tk_3DBorder selBorder; /* Borders and backgrounds for selected * elements. */ int selBorderWidth; /* Width of border around selection. */ XColor *selFgColorPtr; /* Foreground color for selected elements. */ GC selTextGC; /* For drawing selected text. */ int width; /* Desired width of window, in characters. */ int height; /* Desired height of window, in lines. */ int lineHeight; /* Number of pixels allocated for each line in * display. */ int topIndex; /* Index of top-most element visible in |
︙ | ︙ | |||
237 238 239 240 241 242 243 | DEF_LISTBOX_BG_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Listbox, normalBorder), 0, DEF_LISTBOX_BG_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-borderwidth", 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-background", 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", | | | 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 | DEF_LISTBOX_BG_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Listbox, normalBorder), 0, DEF_LISTBOX_BG_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-borderwidth", 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-background", 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", DEF_LISTBOX_BORDER_WIDTH, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Listbox, borderWidth), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor", DEF_LISTBOX_CURSOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Listbox, cursor), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-disabledforeground", "disabledForeground", "DisabledForeground", DEF_LISTBOX_DISABLED_FG, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Listbox, dfgColorPtr), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
264 265 266 267 268 269 270 | "HighlightBackground", DEF_LISTBOX_HIGHLIGHT_BG, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Listbox, highlightBgColorPtr), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor", DEF_LISTBOX_HIGHLIGHT, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Listbox, highlightColorPtr), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness", "HighlightThickness", DEF_LISTBOX_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH, | | | | | 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 | "HighlightBackground", DEF_LISTBOX_HIGHLIGHT_BG, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Listbox, highlightBgColorPtr), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor", DEF_LISTBOX_HIGHLIGHT, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Listbox, highlightColorPtr), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness", "HighlightThickness", DEF_LISTBOX_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Listbox, highlightWidth), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify", DEF_LISTBOX_JUSTIFY, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Listbox, justify), TK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief", DEF_LISTBOX_RELIEF, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Listbox, relief), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-selectbackground", "selectBackground", "Foreground", DEF_LISTBOX_SELECT_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Listbox, selBorder), 0, DEF_LISTBOX_SELECT_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-selectborderwidth", "selectBorderWidth", "BorderWidth", DEF_LISTBOX_SELECT_BD, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Listbox, selBorderWidth), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-selectforeground", "selectForeground", "Background", DEF_LISTBOX_SELECT_FG_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Listbox, selFgColorPtr), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, DEF_LISTBOX_SELECT_FG_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-selectmode", "selectMode", "SelectMode", DEF_LISTBOX_SELECT_MODE, offsetof(Listbox, selectModeObj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-setgrid", "setGrid", "SetGrid", |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 | if ((listPtr->topIndex <= index) && (index < lastVisibleIndex)) { Tcl_Obj *el, *results[4]; const char *stringRep; int pixelWidth, x, y, result; Tcl_Size stringLen; Tk_FontMetrics fm; | < < | | | | 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 | if ((listPtr->topIndex <= index) && (index < lastVisibleIndex)) { Tcl_Obj *el, *results[4]; const char *stringRep; int pixelWidth, x, y, result; Tcl_Size stringLen; Tk_FontMetrics fm; /* * Compute the pixel width of the requested element. */ result = Tcl_ListObjIndex(interp, listPtr->listObj, index, &el); if (result != TCL_OK) { return result; } stringRep = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(el, &stringLen); Tk_GetFontMetrics(listPtr->tkfont, &fm); pixelWidth = Tk_TextWidth(listPtr->tkfont, stringRep, stringLen); if (listPtr->justify == TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT) { x = (listPtr->inset + listPtr->selBorderWidth) - listPtr->xOffset; } else if (listPtr->justify == TK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT) { x = Tk_Width(tkwin) - (listPtr->inset + listPtr->selBorderWidth) - pixelWidth - listPtr->xOffset + GetMaxOffset(listPtr); } else { x = (Tk_Width(tkwin) - pixelWidth) / 2 - listPtr->xOffset + GetMaxOffset(listPtr) / 2; } y = ((index - listPtr->topIndex)*listPtr->lineHeight) + listPtr->inset + listPtr->selBorderWidth; results[0] = Tcl_NewWideIntObj(x); results[1] = Tcl_NewWideIntObj(y); results[2] = Tcl_NewWideIntObj(pixelWidth); results[3] = Tcl_NewWideIntObj(fm.linespace); Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewListObj(4, results)); } return TCL_OK; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 | Listbox *listPtr, /* Information about the listbox */ Tcl_Size objc, /* Number of arguments in the objv array */ Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Array of arguments to the procedure */ { int index, count, windowWidth, windowUnits; int offset = 0; /* Initialized to stop gcc warnings. */ double fraction; | < < | | 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 | Listbox *listPtr, /* Information about the listbox */ Tcl_Size objc, /* Number of arguments in the objv array */ Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Array of arguments to the procedure */ { int index, count, windowWidth, windowUnits; int offset = 0; /* Initialized to stop gcc warnings. */ double fraction; windowWidth = Tk_Width(listPtr->tkwin) - 2 * (listPtr->inset + listPtr->selBorderWidth); if (objc == 2) { Tcl_Obj *results[2]; if (listPtr->maxWidth == 0) { results[0] = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(0.0); results[1] = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(1.0); } else { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 | Tcl_Size objc, /* Number of valid entries in argv. */ Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Arguments. */ { Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions; Tcl_Obj *oldListObj = NULL; Tcl_Obj *errorResult = NULL; int oldExport, error; | < | 1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 1565 1566 1567 | Tcl_Size objc, /* Number of valid entries in argv. */ Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Arguments. */ { Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions; Tcl_Obj *oldListObj = NULL; Tcl_Obj *errorResult = NULL; int oldExport, error; oldExport = (listPtr->exportSelection) && (!Tcl_IsSafe(listPtr->interp)); if (listPtr->listVarNameObj != NULL) { Tcl_UntraceVar2(interp, Tcl_GetString(listPtr->listVarNameObj), NULL, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS, ListboxListVarProc, listPtr); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1595 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 | /* * A few options need special processing, such as setting the * background from a 3-D border. */ Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(listPtr->tkwin, listPtr->normalBorder); | < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < | | 1590 1591 1592 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 | /* * A few options need special processing, such as setting the * background from a 3-D border. */ Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(listPtr->tkwin, listPtr->normalBorder); if (listPtr->borderWidth < 0) { listPtr->borderWidth = 0; } if (listPtr->highlightWidth < 0) { listPtr->highlightWidth = 0; } if (listPtr->selBorderWidth < 0) { listPtr->selBorderWidth = 0; } listPtr->inset = listPtr->highlightWidth + listPtr->borderWidth; /* * Claim the selection if we've suddenly started exporting it and * there is a selection to export and this interp is unsafe. */ if (listPtr->exportSelection && (!oldExport) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1869 1870 1871 1872 1873 1874 1875 | XGCValues gcValues; unsigned long mask; int left, right; /* Non-zero values here indicate that the left * or right edge of the listbox is * off-screen. */ Pixmap pixmap; int textWidth; | < | 1852 1853 1854 1855 1856 1857 1858 1859 1860 1861 1862 1863 1864 1865 | XGCValues gcValues; unsigned long mask; int left, right; /* Non-zero values here indicate that the left * or right edge of the listbox is * off-screen. */ Pixmap pixmap; int textWidth; listPtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_PENDING; if (listPtr->flags & LISTBOX_DELETED) { return; } if (listPtr->flags & MAXWIDTH_IS_STALE) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1921 1922 1923 1924 1925 1926 1927 | Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, listPtr->normalBorder, 0, 0, Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT); /* * Display each item in the listbox. */ | < | | | | 1903 1904 1905 1906 1907 1908 1909 1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 1916 1917 1918 1919 1920 1921 1922 1923 1924 1925 1926 1927 | Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, listPtr->normalBorder, 0, 0, Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT); /* * Display each item in the listbox. */ limit = listPtr->topIndex + listPtr->fullLines + listPtr->partialLine - 1; if (limit >= (int)listPtr->nElements) { limit = listPtr->nElements-1; } left = right = 0; if (listPtr->xOffset > 0) { left = listPtr->selBorderWidth + 1; } if ((listPtr->maxWidth - listPtr->xOffset) > (Tk_Width(listPtr->tkwin) - 2 * (listPtr->inset + listPtr->selBorderWidth))) { right = listPtr->selBorderWidth + 1; } prevSelected = 0; for (i = listPtr->topIndex; i <= limit; i++) { int width = Tk_Width(tkwin); /* zeroth approx to silence warning */ x = listPtr->inset; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 2026 2027 | * values that extend the top and bottom bevels so that * the mitered corners are off-screen. */ /* Draw left bevel */ if (left == 0) { Tk_3DVerticalBevel(tkwin, pixmap, selectedBg, | | | | | | | | 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 2036 2037 2038 | * values that extend the top and bottom bevels so that * the mitered corners are off-screen. */ /* Draw left bevel */ if (left == 0) { Tk_3DVerticalBevel(tkwin, pixmap, selectedBg, x, y, listPtr->selBorderWidth, listPtr->lineHeight, 1, TK_RELIEF_RAISED); } /* Draw right bevel */ if (right == 0) { Tk_3DVerticalBevel(tkwin, pixmap, selectedBg, x + width - listPtr->selBorderWidth, y, listPtr->selBorderWidth, listPtr->lineHeight, 0, TK_RELIEF_RAISED); } /* Draw top bevel */ if (!prevSelected) { Tk_3DHorizontalBevel(tkwin, pixmap, selectedBg, x-left, y, width+left+right, listPtr->selBorderWidth, 1, 1, 1, TK_RELIEF_RAISED); } /* Draw bottom bevel */ if (i + 1 == (int)listPtr->nElements || !Tcl_FindHashEntry(listPtr->selection, KEY(i + 1))) { Tk_3DHorizontalBevel(tkwin, pixmap, selectedBg, x-left, y + listPtr->lineHeight - listPtr->selBorderWidth, width+left+right, listPtr->selBorderWidth, 0, 0, 0, TK_RELIEF_RAISED); } prevSelected = 1; } else { /* * If there is an item attributes record for this item, draw * the background box and set the foreground color accordingly. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2095 2096 2097 2098 2099 2100 2101 | */ Tcl_ListObjIndex(listPtr->interp, listPtr->listObj, i, &curElement); stringRep = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(curElement, &stringLen); textWidth = Tk_TextWidth(listPtr->tkfont, stringRep, stringLen); Tk_GetFontMetrics(listPtr->tkfont, &fm); | | | | | 2076 2077 2078 2079 2080 2081 2082 2083 2084 2085 2086 2087 2088 2089 2090 2091 2092 2093 2094 2095 | */ Tcl_ListObjIndex(listPtr->interp, listPtr->listObj, i, &curElement); stringRep = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(curElement, &stringLen); textWidth = Tk_TextWidth(listPtr->tkfont, stringRep, stringLen); Tk_GetFontMetrics(listPtr->tkfont, &fm); y += fm.ascent + listPtr->selBorderWidth; if (listPtr->justify == TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT) { x = (listPtr->inset + listPtr->selBorderWidth) - listPtr->xOffset; } else if (listPtr->justify == TK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT) { x = Tk_Width(tkwin) - (listPtr->inset + listPtr->selBorderWidth) - textWidth - listPtr->xOffset + GetMaxOffset(listPtr); } else { x = (Tk_Width(tkwin) - textWidth)/2 - listPtr->xOffset + GetMaxOffset(listPtr)/2; } Tk_DrawChars(disp, pixmap, gc, listPtr->tkfont, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2156 2157 2158 2159 2160 2161 2162 | } /* * Redraw the border for the listbox to make sure that it's on top of any * of the text of the listbox entries. */ | < < | | | | | | | | 2137 2138 2139 2140 2141 2142 2143 2144 2145 2146 2147 2148 2149 2150 2151 2152 2153 2154 2155 2156 2157 2158 2159 2160 2161 2162 2163 2164 2165 2166 | } /* * Redraw the border for the listbox to make sure that it's on top of any * of the text of the listbox entries. */ Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, listPtr->normalBorder, listPtr->highlightWidth, listPtr->highlightWidth, Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2 * listPtr->highlightWidth, Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2 * listPtr->highlightWidth, listPtr->borderWidth, listPtr->relief); if (listPtr->highlightWidth > 0) { GC fgGC, bgGC; bgGC = Tk_GCForColor(listPtr->highlightBgColorPtr, pixmap); if (listPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS) { fgGC = Tk_GCForColor(listPtr->highlightColorPtr, pixmap); Tk_DrawHighlightBorder(tkwin, fgGC, bgGC, listPtr->highlightWidth, pixmap); } else { Tk_DrawHighlightBorder(tkwin, bgGC, bgGC, listPtr->highlightWidth, pixmap); } } #ifndef TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING XCopyArea(disp, pixmap, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), listPtr->textGC, 0, 0, (unsigned) Tk_Width(tkwin), (unsigned) Tk_Height(tkwin), 0, 0); Tk_FreePixmap(disp, pixmap); #endif /* TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2222 2223 2224 2225 2226 2227 2228 | * window. */ { int width, height, pixelWidth, pixelHeight, i, result; Tcl_Size textLength; Tk_FontMetrics fm; Tcl_Obj *element; const char *text; | < | 2201 2202 2203 2204 2205 2206 2207 2208 2209 2210 2211 2212 2213 2214 | * window. */ { int width, height, pixelWidth, pixelHeight, i, result; Tcl_Size textLength; Tk_FontMetrics fm; Tcl_Obj *element; const char *text; if (fontChanged || maxIsStale) { listPtr->xScrollUnit = Tk_TextWidth(listPtr->tkfont, "0", 1); if (listPtr->xScrollUnit == 0) { listPtr->xScrollUnit = 1; } listPtr->maxWidth = 0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2250 2251 2252 2253 2254 2255 2256 | if (pixelWidth > listPtr->maxWidth) { listPtr->maxWidth = pixelWidth; } } } Tk_GetFontMetrics(listPtr->tkfont, &fm); | < | | | 2228 2229 2230 2231 2232 2233 2234 2235 2236 2237 2238 2239 2240 2241 2242 2243 2244 2245 2246 2247 2248 2249 2250 2251 2252 | if (pixelWidth > listPtr->maxWidth) { listPtr->maxWidth = pixelWidth; } } } Tk_GetFontMetrics(listPtr->tkfont, &fm); listPtr->lineHeight = fm.linespace + 1 + 2 * listPtr->selBorderWidth; width = listPtr->width; if (width <= 0) { width = (listPtr->maxWidth + listPtr->xScrollUnit - 1) / listPtr->xScrollUnit; if (width < 1) { width = 1; } } pixelWidth = width*listPtr->xScrollUnit + 2 * listPtr->inset + 2 * listPtr->selBorderWidth; height = listPtr->height; if (listPtr->height <= 0) { height = (int)listPtr->nElements; if (height < 1) { height = 1; } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3354 3355 3356 3357 3358 3359 3360 | Listbox *listPtr) /* Information about widget. */ { char firstStr[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE], lastStr[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE]; int result, windowWidth; double first, last; Tcl_Interp *interp; Tcl_DString buf; | < < | | 3331 3332 3333 3334 3335 3336 3337 3338 3339 3340 3341 3342 3343 3344 3345 3346 3347 3348 3349 3350 3351 | Listbox *listPtr) /* Information about widget. */ { char firstStr[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE], lastStr[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE]; int result, windowWidth; double first, last; Tcl_Interp *interp; Tcl_DString buf; if (listPtr->xScrollCmdObj == NULL) { return; } windowWidth = Tk_Width(listPtr->tkwin) - 2 * (listPtr->inset + listPtr->selBorderWidth); if (listPtr->maxWidth == 0) { first = 0; last = 1.0; } else { first = listPtr->xOffset / (double) listPtr->maxWidth; last = (listPtr->xOffset + windowWidth) / (double) listPtr->maxWidth; if (last > 1.0) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3633 3634 3635 3636 3637 3638 3639 | * None. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static int GetMaxOffset( Listbox *listPtr) { | | < | | 3608 3609 3610 3611 3612 3613 3614 3615 3616 3617 3618 3619 3620 3621 3622 3623 3624 3625 3626 | * None. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static int GetMaxOffset( Listbox *listPtr) { int maxOffset; maxOffset = listPtr->maxWidth - (Tk_Width(listPtr->tkwin) - 2 * listPtr->inset - 2 * listPtr->selBorderWidth) + listPtr->xScrollUnit - 1; if (maxOffset < 0) { /* * Listbox is larger in width than its largest width item. */ maxOffset = 0; |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkMain.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
159 160 161 162 163 164 165 | * This function initializes the Tk world and then starts interpreting * commands; almost anything could happen, depending on the script being * interpreted. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ | | | 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 | * This function initializes the Tk world and then starts interpreting * commands; almost anything could happen, depending on the script being * interpreted. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ TCL_NORETURN1 void Tk_MainEx( Tcl_Size argc, /* Number of arguments. */ TCHAR **argv, /* Array of argument strings. */ Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc, /* Application-specific initialization * function to call after most initialization * but before starting to execute commands. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
185 186 187 188 189 190 191 | ++i; } /* * Ensure that we are getting a compatible version of Tcl. */ | | | | 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 | ++i; } /* * Ensure that we are getting a compatible version of Tcl. */ if (Tcl_InitStubs(interp, "8.6-", 0) == NULL) { if (Tcl_InitStubs(interp, "8.1", 0) == NULL) { abort(); } else { Tcl_Panic("%s", Tcl_GetString(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp))); } } #if defined(_WIN32) && !defined(UNICODE) && !defined(STATIC_BUILD) if (tclStubsPtr->tcl_CreateFileHandler) { /* We are running win32 Tk under Cygwin, so let's check * whether the env("DISPLAY") variable or the -display * argument is set. If so, we really want to run the * Tk_MainEx function of libtk8.?.dll, not this one. */ if (Tcl_GetVar2(interp, "env", "DISPLAY", TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY)) { loadCygwinTk: TkCygwinMainEx(argc, argv, appInitProc, interp); /* Only returns when Tk_MainEx() was not found */ } else { Tcl_Size j; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 | /* * If the application has not already set a startup script, parse the * first few command line arguments to determine the script path and * encoding. */ if (NULL == Tcl_GetStartupScript(NULL)) { /* * Check whether first 3 args (argv[1] - argv[3]) look like * -encoding ENCODING FILENAME * or like * FILENAME * or like * -file FILENAME (ancient history support only, removed with Tcl 9.0) */ /* mind argc is being adjusted as we proceed */ if ((argc >= 3) && (0 == _tcscmp(TEXT("-encoding"), argv[1])) && ('-' != argv[3][0])) { Tcl_Obj *value = NewNativeObj(argv[2]); | > > > | < > > > > > > > > | | 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 | /* * If the application has not already set a startup script, parse the * first few command line arguments to determine the script path and * encoding. */ if (NULL == Tcl_GetStartupScript(NULL)) { #if !defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) && TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 size_t length; #endif /* * Check whether first 3 args (argv[1] - argv[3]) look like * -encoding ENCODING FILENAME * or like * FILENAME * or like * -file FILENAME (ancient history support only, removed with Tcl 9.0) */ /* mind argc is being adjusted as we proceed */ if ((argc >= 3) && (0 == _tcscmp(TEXT("-encoding"), argv[1])) && ('-' != argv[3][0])) { Tcl_Obj *value = NewNativeObj(argv[2]); Tcl_SetStartupScript(NewNativeObj(argv[3]), Tcl_GetString(value)); Tcl_DecrRefCount(value); argc -= 3; i += 3; } else if ((argc >= 1) && ('-' != argv[1][0])) { Tcl_SetStartupScript(NewNativeObj(argv[1]), NULL); argc--; i++; #if !defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) && TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 } else if ((argc >= 2) && (length = _tcslen(argv[1])) && (length > 1) && (0 == _tcsncmp(TEXT("-file"), argv[1], length)) && ('-' != argv[2][0])) { Tcl_SetStartupScript(NewNativeObj(argv[2]), NULL); argc -= 2; i += 2; #endif } } path = Tcl_GetStartupScript(&encodingName); if (path == NULL) { appName = NewNativeObj(argv[0]); } else { appName = path; } Tcl_SetVar2Ex(interp, "argv0", NULL, appName, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY); Tcl_SetVar2Ex(interp, "argc", NULL, Tcl_NewWideIntObj(argc), TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY); argvPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL); while (argc--) { Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, argvPtr, NewNativeObj(argv[i++])); } Tcl_SetVar2Ex(interp, "argv", NULL, argvPtr, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
304 305 306 307 308 309 310 | if (!is.tty) { struct stat st; nullStdin = fstat(0, &st) || (S_ISCHR(st.st_mode) && !st.st_blocks); } #endif Tcl_SetVar2Ex(interp, "tcl_interactive", NULL, | | | 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 | if (!is.tty) { struct stat st; nullStdin = fstat(0, &st) || (S_ISCHR(st.st_mode) && !st.st_blocks); } #endif Tcl_SetVar2Ex(interp, "tcl_interactive", NULL, Tcl_NewBooleanObj(!path && (is.tty || nullStdin)), TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY); /* * Invoke application-specific initialization. */ if (appInitProc(interp) != TCL_OK) { TkpDisplayWarning(Tcl_GetString(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp)), |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkMenu.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
256 257 258 259 260 261 262 | DEF_MENU_BG_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-borderwidth", 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-background", 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", DEF_MENU_BORDER_WIDTH, | | | | 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 | DEF_MENU_BG_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-borderwidth", 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-background", 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", DEF_MENU_BORDER_WIDTH, offsetof(TkMenu, borderWidthPtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, NULL, 0}, {TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor", DEF_MENU_CURSOR, offsetof(TkMenu, cursorPtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-disabledforeground", "disabledForeground", "DisabledForeground", DEF_MENU_DISABLED_FG_COLOR, offsetof(TkMenu, disabledFgPtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, DEF_MENU_DISABLED_FG_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-foreground", 0}, {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font", DEF_MENU_FONT, offsetof(TkMenu, fontPtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, NULL, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground", DEF_MENU_FG, offsetof(TkMenu, fgPtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, NULL, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-postcommand", "postCommand", "Command", DEF_MENU_POST_COMMAND, offsetof(TkMenu, postCommandPtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0}, {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief", DEF_MENU_RELIEF, offsetof(TkMenu, reliefPtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, NULL, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-selectcolor", "selectColor", "Background", DEF_MENU_SELECT_COLOR, offsetof(TkMenu, indicatorFgPtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, DEF_MENU_SELECT_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus", DEF_MENU_TAKE_FOCUS, offsetof(TkMenu, takeFocusPtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-tearoff", "tearOff", "TearOff", |
︙ | ︙ | |||
851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 | Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "string"); goto error; } if (GetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, objv[2], 0, &index) != TCL_OK) { goto error; } if (index < 0) { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewObj()); } else { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, TkNewIndexObj(index)); } break; } case MENU_INSERT: if (objc < 4) { | > > > > | 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 | Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "string"); goto error; } if (GetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, objv[2], 0, &index) != TCL_OK) { goto error; } if (index < 0) { #if defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewObj()); #else Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj("none", TCL_INDEX_NONE)); #endif } else { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, TkNewIndexObj(index)); } break; } case MENU_INSERT: if (objc < 4) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3052 3053 3054 3055 3056 3057 3058 | const char *p; const char *rest; int x2, borderwidth, max; TkRecomputeMenu(menuPtr); p = string + 1; Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, menuPtr->tkwin, | | | 3056 3057 3058 3059 3060 3061 3062 3063 3064 3065 3066 3067 3068 3069 3070 | const char *p; const char *rest; int x2, borderwidth, max; TkRecomputeMenu(menuPtr); p = string + 1; Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, menuPtr->tkwin, menuPtr->borderWidthPtr, &borderwidth); rest = strchr(p, ','); if (rest) { Tcl_DString ds; Tcl_DStringInit(&ds); Tcl_DStringAppend(&ds, p, rest - p); if (Tcl_GetInt(NULL, Tcl_DStringValue(&ds), &x) != TCL_OK) { |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkMenuDraw.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 | Tcl_Size index; int strictMotif; Tk_Font tkfont; Tk_FontMetrics menuMetrics; int width; int borderWidth; Tk_3DBorder border; menuPtr->menuFlags &= ~REDRAW_PENDING; if ((menuPtr->tkwin == NULL) || !Tk_IsMapped(tkwin)) { return; } | > | | 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 | Tcl_Size index; int strictMotif; Tk_Font tkfont; Tk_FontMetrics menuMetrics; int width; int borderWidth; Tk_3DBorder border; int relief; menuPtr->menuFlags &= ~REDRAW_PENDING; if ((menuPtr->tkwin == NULL) || !Tk_IsMapped(tkwin)) { return; } Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, menuPtr->tkwin, menuPtr->borderWidthPtr, &borderWidth); border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin, menuPtr->borderPtr); if (menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR) { Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), border, borderWidth, borderWidth, Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2 * borderWidth, Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2 * borderWidth, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 | * This has zero width except after menu resizing. */ Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), border, x, y, width, height, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT); } Tk_Draw3DRectangle(menuPtr->tkwin, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), border, 0, 0, Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), borderWidth, | > | | 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 | * This has zero width except after menu resizing. */ Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), border, x, y, width, height, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT); } Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, menuPtr->reliefPtr, &relief); Tk_Draw3DRectangle(menuPtr->tkwin, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), border, 0, 0, Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), borderWidth, relief); } /* *-------------------------------------------------------------- * * TkMenuEventProc -- * |
︙ | ︙ | |||
985 986 987 988 989 990 991 | { if (menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR) { *xPtr += mePtr->x; *yPtr += mePtr->y + mePtr->height; } else { int borderWidth, activeBorderWidth; | | | 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 | { if (menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR) { *xPtr += mePtr->x; *yPtr += mePtr->y + mePtr->height; } else { int borderWidth, activeBorderWidth; Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, menuPtr->tkwin, menuPtr->borderWidthPtr, &borderWidth); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, menuPtr->tkwin, menuPtr->activeBorderWidthPtr, &activeBorderWidth); *xPtr += Tk_Width(menuPtr->tkwin) - borderWidth - activeBorderWidth - 2; *yPtr += mePtr->y + activeBorderWidth + 2; } |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkMenubutton.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 | 0, "-borderwidth", 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-background", 0}, {TK_OPTION_BITMAP, "-bitmap", "bitmap", "Bitmap", DEF_MENUBUTTON_BITMAP, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkMenuButton, bitmap), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", | | | | 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 | 0, "-borderwidth", 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-background", 0}, {TK_OPTION_BITMAP, "-bitmap", "bitmap", "Bitmap", DEF_MENUBUTTON_BITMAP, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkMenuButton, bitmap), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", DEF_MENUBUTTON_BORDER_WIDTH, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkMenuButton, borderWidth), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor", DEF_MENUBUTTON_CURSOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkMenuButton, cursor), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-direction", "direction", "Direction", DEF_MENUBUTTON_DIRECTION, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkMenuButton, direction), TK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR, directionStrings, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-disabledforeground", "disabledForeground", |
︙ | ︙ | |||
87 88 89 90 91 92 93 | "HighlightBackground", DEF_MENUBUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_BG_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkMenuButton, highlightBgColorPtr), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor", DEF_MENUBUTTON_HIGHLIGHT, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkMenuButton, highlightColorPtr), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness", "HighlightThickness", DEF_MENUBUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH, | | | | | 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 | "HighlightBackground", DEF_MENUBUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_BG_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkMenuButton, highlightBgColorPtr), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor", DEF_MENUBUTTON_HIGHLIGHT, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkMenuButton, highlightColorPtr), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness", "HighlightThickness", DEF_MENUBUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkMenuButton, highlightWidth), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-image", "image", "Image", DEF_MENUBUTTON_IMAGE, offsetof(TkMenuButton, imageObj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-indicatoron", "indicatorOn", "IndicatorOn", DEF_MENUBUTTON_INDICATOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkMenuButton, indicatorOn), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify", DEF_MENUBUTTON_JUSTIFY, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkMenuButton, justify), TK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-menu", "menu", "Menu", DEF_MENUBUTTON_MENU, offsetof(TkMenuButton, menuNameObj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", "padX", "Pad", DEF_MENUBUTTON_PADX, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkMenuButton, padX), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", "padY", "Pad", DEF_MENUBUTTON_PADY, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkMenuButton, padY), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief", DEF_MENUBUTTON_RELIEF, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkMenuButton, relief), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-compound", "compound", "Compound", DEF_BUTTON_COMPOUND, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkMenuButton, compound), 0, tkCompoundStrings, 0}, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
128 129 130 131 132 133 134 | TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_INDEX, "-underline", "underline", "Underline", TK_OPTION_UNDERLINE_DEF(TkMenuButton, underline), 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-width", "width", "Width", DEF_MENUBUTTON_WIDTH, offsetof(TkMenuButton, widthObj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-wraplength", "wrapLength", "WrapLength", | | | | 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 | TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_INDEX, "-underline", "underline", "Underline", TK_OPTION_UNDERLINE_DEF(TkMenuButton, underline), 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-width", "width", "Width", DEF_MENUBUTTON_WIDTH, offsetof(TkMenuButton, widthObj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-wraplength", "wrapLength", "WrapLength", DEF_MENUBUTTON_WRAP_LENGTH, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkMenuButton, wrapLength), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, 0, NULL, 0} }; /* * The following tables define the menubutton widget commands and map the * indexes into the string tables into a single enumerated type used to * dispatch the scale widget command. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
243 244 245 246 247 248 249 | mbPtr->textVarNameObj = NULL; mbPtr->bitmap = None; mbPtr->imageObj = NULL; mbPtr->image = NULL; mbPtr->state = STATE_NORMAL; mbPtr->normalBorder = NULL; mbPtr->activeBorder = NULL; | | | | | | < < < < < | 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 | mbPtr->textVarNameObj = NULL; mbPtr->bitmap = None; mbPtr->imageObj = NULL; mbPtr->image = NULL; mbPtr->state = STATE_NORMAL; mbPtr->normalBorder = NULL; mbPtr->activeBorder = NULL; mbPtr->borderWidth = 0; mbPtr->relief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT; mbPtr->highlightWidth = 0; mbPtr->highlightBgColorPtr = NULL; mbPtr->highlightColorPtr = NULL; mbPtr->inset = 0; mbPtr->tkfont = NULL; mbPtr->normalFg = NULL; mbPtr->activeFg = NULL; mbPtr->disabledFg = NULL; mbPtr->normalTextGC = NULL; mbPtr->activeTextGC = NULL; mbPtr->gray = None; mbPtr->disabledGC = NULL; mbPtr->stippleGC = NULL; mbPtr->leftBearing = 0; mbPtr->rightBearing = 0; mbPtr->widthObj = NULL; mbPtr->heightObj = NULL; mbPtr->width = 0; mbPtr->height = 0; mbPtr->wrapLength = 0; mbPtr->padX = 0; mbPtr->padY = 0; mbPtr->anchor = TK_ANCHOR_CENTER; mbPtr->justify = TK_JUSTIFY_CENTER; mbPtr->textLayout = NULL; mbPtr->indicatorOn = 0; mbPtr->indicatorWidth = 0; mbPtr->indicatorHeight = 0; mbPtr->direction = DIRECTION_FLUSH; mbPtr->cursor = NULL; mbPtr->takeFocusObj = NULL; mbPtr->flags = 0; Tk_CreateEventHandler(mbPtr->tkwin, ExposureMask|StructureNotifyMask|FocusChangeMask, MenuButtonEventProc, mbPtr); if (Tk_InitOptions(interp, mbPtr, optionTable, tkwin) != TCL_OK) { Tk_DestroyWindow(mbPtr->tkwin); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
479 480 481 482 483 484 485 | int objc, /* Number of valid entries in objv. */ Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Arguments. */ { Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions; Tcl_Obj *errorResult = NULL; int error; Tk_Image image; | < < | 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 | int objc, /* Number of valid entries in objv. */ Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Arguments. */ { Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions; Tcl_Obj *errorResult = NULL; int error; Tk_Image image; /* * Eliminate any existing trace on variables monitored by the menubutton. */ if (mbPtr->textVarNameObj != NULL) { Tcl_UntraceVar2(interp, Tcl_GetString(mbPtr->textVarNameObj), NULL, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
533 534 535 536 537 538 539 | if ((mbPtr->state == STATE_ACTIVE) && !Tk_StrictMotif(mbPtr->tkwin)) { Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(mbPtr->tkwin, mbPtr->activeBorder); } else { Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(mbPtr->tkwin, mbPtr->normalBorder); } | < < < < | < < | < | < < | < | | < < < | | < < < | 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 | if ((mbPtr->state == STATE_ACTIVE) && !Tk_StrictMotif(mbPtr->tkwin)) { Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(mbPtr->tkwin, mbPtr->activeBorder); } else { Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(mbPtr->tkwin, mbPtr->normalBorder); } if (mbPtr->borderWidth < 0) { mbPtr->borderWidth = 0; } if (mbPtr->highlightWidth < 0) { mbPtr->highlightWidth = 0; } if (mbPtr->padX < 0) { mbPtr->padX = 0; } if (mbPtr->padY < 0) { mbPtr->padY = 0; } /* * Get the image for the widget, if there is one. Allocate the new * image before freeing the old one, so that the reference count * doesn't go to zero and cause image data to be discarded. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
776 777 778 779 780 781 782 | static void MenuButtonEventProc( void *clientData, /* Information about window. */ XEvent *eventPtr) /* Information about event. */ { TkMenuButton *mbPtr = (TkMenuButton *)clientData; | < < | < | | 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 | static void MenuButtonEventProc( void *clientData, /* Information about window. */ XEvent *eventPtr) /* Information about event. */ { TkMenuButton *mbPtr = (TkMenuButton *)clientData; if ((eventPtr->type == Expose) && (eventPtr->xexpose.count == 0)) { goto redraw; } else if (eventPtr->type == ConfigureNotify) { /* * Must redraw after size changes, since layout could have changed and * borders will need to be redrawn. */ goto redraw; } else if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) { DestroyMenuButton(mbPtr); } else if (eventPtr->type == FocusIn) { if (eventPtr->xfocus.detail != NotifyInferior) { mbPtr->flags |= GOT_FOCUS; if (mbPtr->highlightWidth > 0) { goto redraw; } } } else if (eventPtr->type == FocusOut) { if (eventPtr->xfocus.detail != NotifyInferior) { mbPtr->flags &= ~GOT_FOCUS; if (mbPtr->highlightWidth > 0) { goto redraw; } } } return; redraw: |
︙ | ︙ | |||
957 958 959 960 961 962 963 | * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void MenuButtonImageProc( void *clientData, /* Pointer to widget record. */ | | | | | | | | 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 | * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void MenuButtonImageProc( void *clientData, /* Pointer to widget record. */ TCL_UNUSED(int), /* x, Upper left pixel (within image) that must */ TCL_UNUSED(int), /* y, be redisplayed. */ TCL_UNUSED(int), /* width, Dimensions of area to redisplay (may be <= */ TCL_UNUSED(int), /* height, 0). */ TCL_UNUSED(int), /* imgWidth, New dimensions of image. */ TCL_UNUSED(int)) /* imgHeight) */ { TkMenuButton *mbPtr = (TkMenuButton *)clientData; if (mbPtr->tkwin != NULL) { TkpComputeMenuButtonGeometry(mbPtr); if (Tk_IsMapped(mbPtr->tkwin) && !(mbPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) { Tcl_DoWhenIdle(TkpDisplayMenuButton, mbPtr); |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkMessage.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 | Tcl_Obj *stringObj; /* String displayed in message. */ Tcl_Obj *textVarNameObj; /* Name of variable or NULL. * If non-NULL, message displays the contents * of this variable. */ Tk_3DBorder border; /* Structure used to draw 3-D border and * background. NULL means a border hasn't been * created yet. */ | | | | | | 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 | Tcl_Obj *stringObj; /* String displayed in message. */ Tcl_Obj *textVarNameObj; /* Name of variable or NULL. * If non-NULL, message displays the contents * of this variable. */ Tk_3DBorder border; /* Structure used to draw 3-D border and * background. NULL means a border hasn't been * created yet. */ int borderWidth; /* Width of border. */ int relief; /* 3-D effect: TK_RELIEF_RAISED, etc. */ int highlightWidth; /* Width in pixels of highlight to draw * around widget when it has the focus. * 0 means don't draw a highlight. */ XColor *highlightBgColorPtr; /* Color for drawing traversal highlight * area when highlight is off. */ XColor *highlightColorPtr; /* Color for drawing traversal highlight. */ Tk_Font tkfont; /* Information about text font, or NULL. */ XColor *fgColorPtr; /* Foreground color in normal mode. */ Tcl_Obj *padXObj, *padYObj; /* Tcl_Obj rep's of padX, padY values. */ int width; /* User-requested width, in pixels. 0 means * compute width using aspect ratio below. */ int aspect; /* Desired aspect ratio for window * (100*width/height). */ int msgWidth; /* Width in pixels needed to display * message. */ int msgHeight; /* Height in pixels needed to display * message. */ Tk_Anchor anchor; /* Where to position text within window region |
︙ | ︙ | |||
113 114 115 116 117 118 119 | DEF_MESSAGE_BG_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Message, border), 0, DEF_MESSAGE_BG_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-borderwidth", 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-background", 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", | | | | | | | 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 | DEF_MESSAGE_BG_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Message, border), 0, DEF_MESSAGE_BG_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-borderwidth", 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-background", 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", DEF_MESSAGE_BORDER_WIDTH, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Message, borderWidth), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor", DEF_MESSAGE_CURSOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Message, cursor), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-foreground", 0}, {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font", DEF_MESSAGE_FONT, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Message, tkfont), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground", DEF_MESSAGE_FG, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Message, fgColorPtr), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground", "HighlightBackground", DEF_MESSAGE_HIGHLIGHT_BG, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Message, highlightBgColorPtr), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor", DEF_MESSAGE_HIGHLIGHT, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Message, highlightColorPtr), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness", "HighlightThickness", DEF_MESSAGE_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Message, highlightWidth), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify", DEF_MESSAGE_JUSTIFY, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Message, justify), TK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", "padX", "Pad", DEF_MESSAGE_PADX, offsetof(Message, padXObj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", "padY", "Pad", DEF_MESSAGE_PADY, offsetof(Message, padYObj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief", DEF_MESSAGE_RELIEF, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Message, relief), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus", DEF_MESSAGE_TAKE_FOCUS, offsetof(Message, takeFocusObj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-text", "text", "Text", DEF_MESSAGE_TEXT, offsetof(Message, stringObj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-textvariable", "textVariable", "Variable", DEF_MESSAGE_TEXT_VARIABLE, offsetof(Message, textVarNameObj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-width", "width", "Width", DEF_MESSAGE_WIDTH, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Message, width), 0, 0 ,0}, {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0} }; /* * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file: */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
435 436 437 438 439 440 441 | Message *msgPtr, /* Information about widget; may or may not * already have values for some fields. */ int objc, /* Number of valid entries in argv. */ Tcl_Obj *const objv[], /* Arguments. */ TCL_UNUSED(int)) /* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */ { Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions; | | | 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 | Message *msgPtr, /* Information about widget; may or may not * already have values for some fields. */ int objc, /* Number of valid entries in argv. */ Tcl_Obj *const objv[], /* Arguments. */ TCL_UNUSED(int)) /* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */ { Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions; int padX, padY; /* * Eliminate any existing trace on a variable monitored by the message. */ if (msgPtr->textVarNameObj != NULL) { Tcl_UntraceVar2(interp, Tcl_GetString(msgPtr->textVarNameObj), NULL, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
484 485 486 487 488 489 490 | /* * A few other options need special processing, such as setting the * background from a 3-D border or handling special defaults that couldn't * be specified to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */ | < < | < < | < < < | < < | < < < | | | > | | < | | > | > | > > > | | > | > | 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 | /* * A few other options need special processing, such as setting the * background from a 3-D border or handling special defaults that couldn't * be specified to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */ if (msgPtr->width < 0) { msgPtr->width = 0; } if (msgPtr->borderWidth < 0) { msgPtr->borderWidth = 0; } if (msgPtr->highlightWidth < 0) { msgPtr->highlightWidth = 0; } if (!msgPtr->padXObj) { msgPtr->padXObj = Tcl_NewIntObj(-1); Tcl_IncrRefCount(msgPtr->padXObj); } Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, msgPtr->tkwin, msgPtr->padXObj, &padX); if (padX < 0) { if (strcmp(Tcl_GetString(msgPtr->padXObj), "-1")) { Tcl_DecrRefCount(msgPtr->padXObj); msgPtr->padXObj = Tcl_NewIntObj(-1); Tcl_IncrRefCount(msgPtr->padXObj); } } if (!msgPtr->padYObj) { msgPtr->padYObj = Tcl_NewIntObj(-1); Tcl_IncrRefCount(msgPtr->padYObj); } Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, msgPtr->tkwin, msgPtr->padYObj, &padY); if (padY < 0) { if (strcmp(Tcl_GetString(msgPtr->padYObj), "-1")) { Tcl_DecrRefCount(msgPtr->padYObj); msgPtr->padYObj = Tcl_NewIntObj(-1); Tcl_IncrRefCount(msgPtr->padYObj); } } Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions); MessageWorldChanged(msgPtr); return TCL_OK; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
604 605 606 607 608 609 610 | static void ComputeMessageGeometry( Message *msgPtr) /* Information about window. */ { int width, inc, height; int thisWidth, thisHeight, maxWidth; int aspect, lowerBound, upperBound, inset; | | < | < > < | < > < | < | | | 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 | static void ComputeMessageGeometry( Message *msgPtr) /* Information about window. */ { int width, inc, height; int thisWidth, thisHeight, maxWidth; int aspect, lowerBound, upperBound, inset; int padX, padY; Tk_FontMetrics fm; Tcl_Size numChars; Tk_FreeTextLayout(msgPtr->textLayout); Tk_GetFontMetrics(msgPtr->tkfont, &fm); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, msgPtr->tkwin, msgPtr->padXObj, &padX); if (padX < 0) { padX = fm.ascent / 2; } Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, msgPtr->tkwin, msgPtr->padYObj, &padY); if (padY < 0) { padY = fm.ascent / 4; } inset = msgPtr->borderWidth + msgPtr->highlightWidth; /* * Compute acceptable bounds for the final aspect ratio. */ aspect = msgPtr->aspect/10; if (aspect < 5) { aspect = 5; } lowerBound = msgPtr->aspect - aspect; upperBound = msgPtr->aspect + aspect; /* * Do the computation in multiple passes: start off with a very wide * window, and compute its height. Then change the width and try again. * Reduce the size of the change and iterate until dimensions are found * that approximate the desired aspect ratio. Or, if the user gave an * explicit width then just use that. */ width = msgPtr->width; if (width > 0) { inc = 0; } else { width = WidthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(msgPtr->tkwin))/2; inc = width/2; } numChars = TkGetCharLength(msgPtr->stringObj); for ( ; ; inc /= 2) { msgPtr->textLayout = Tk_ComputeTextLayout(msgPtr->tkfont, Tcl_GetString(msgPtr->stringObj), numChars, width, msgPtr->justify, 0, &thisWidth, &thisHeight); maxWidth = thisWidth + 2 * (inset + padX); height = thisHeight + 2 * (inset + padY); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
704 705 706 707 708 709 710 | static void DisplayMessage( void *clientData) /* Information about window. */ { Message *msgPtr = (Message *)clientData; Tk_Window tkwin = msgPtr->tkwin; int x, y; | | < < < | < > < | < > | | | | | | | | | | | | 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 | static void DisplayMessage( void *clientData) /* Information about window. */ { Message *msgPtr = (Message *)clientData; Tk_Window tkwin = msgPtr->tkwin; int x, y; int width, padX, padY; Tk_FontMetrics fm; Tk_GetFontMetrics(msgPtr->tkfont, &fm); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, msgPtr->tkwin, msgPtr->padXObj, &padX); if (padX < 0) { padX = fm.ascent / 2; } Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, msgPtr->tkwin, msgPtr->padYObj, &padY); if (padY < 0) { padY = fm.ascent / 4; } width = msgPtr->highlightWidth; msgPtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_PENDING; if ((msgPtr->tkwin == NULL) || !Tk_IsMapped(tkwin)) { return; } if (msgPtr->border != NULL) { width += msgPtr->borderWidth; } if (msgPtr->relief == TK_RELIEF_FLAT) { width = msgPtr->highlightWidth; } Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), msgPtr->border, width, width, Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2 * width, Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2 * width, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT); /* * Compute starting y-location for message based on message size and * anchor option. */ TkComputeAnchor(msgPtr->anchor, tkwin, padX, padY, msgPtr->msgWidth, msgPtr->msgHeight, &x, &y); Tk_DrawTextLayout(Tk_Display(tkwin), Tk_WindowId(tkwin), msgPtr->textGC, msgPtr->textLayout, x, y, 0, -1); if (width > msgPtr->highlightWidth) { Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), msgPtr->border, msgPtr->highlightWidth, msgPtr->highlightWidth, Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2 * msgPtr->highlightWidth, Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2 * msgPtr->highlightWidth, msgPtr->borderWidth, msgPtr->relief); } if (msgPtr->highlightWidth > 0) { GC fgGC, bgGC; bgGC = Tk_GCForColor(msgPtr->highlightBgColorPtr, Tk_WindowId(tkwin)); if (msgPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS) { fgGC = Tk_GCForColor(msgPtr->highlightColorPtr,Tk_WindowId(tkwin)); Tk_DrawHighlightBorder(tkwin, fgGC, bgGC, msgPtr->highlightWidth, Tk_WindowId(tkwin)); } else { Tk_DrawHighlightBorder(tkwin, bgGC, bgGC, msgPtr->highlightWidth, Tk_WindowId(tkwin)); } } } /* *-------------------------------------------------------------- |
︙ | ︙ | |||
794 795 796 797 798 799 800 | static void MessageEventProc( void *clientData, /* Information about window. */ XEvent *eventPtr) /* Information about event. */ { Message *msgPtr = (Message *)clientData; | < < | < | | 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 | static void MessageEventProc( void *clientData, /* Information about window. */ XEvent *eventPtr) /* Information about event. */ { Message *msgPtr = (Message *)clientData; if (((eventPtr->type == Expose) && (eventPtr->xexpose.count == 0)) || (eventPtr->type == ConfigureNotify)) { goto redraw; } else if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) { DestroyMessage(clientData); } else if (eventPtr->type == FocusIn) { if (eventPtr->xfocus.detail != NotifyInferior) { msgPtr->flags |= GOT_FOCUS; if (msgPtr->highlightWidth > 0) { goto redraw; } } } else if (eventPtr->type == FocusOut) { if (eventPtr->xfocus.detail != NotifyInferior) { msgPtr->flags &= ~GOT_FOCUS; if (msgPtr->highlightWidth > 0) { goto redraw; } } } return; redraw: |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkObj.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 | static void FreePixelInternalRep(Tcl_Obj *objPtr); static void FreeWindowInternalRep(Tcl_Obj *objPtr); static ThreadSpecificData *GetTypeCache(void); static void UpdateStringOfMM(Tcl_Obj *objPtr); static int SetMMFromAny(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); static int SetPixelFromAny(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); static int SetWindowFromAny(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* * The following structure defines the implementation of the "pixel" Tcl * object, used for measuring distances. The pixel object remembers its * initial display-independent settings. */ | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 | static void FreePixelInternalRep(Tcl_Obj *objPtr); static void FreeWindowInternalRep(Tcl_Obj *objPtr); static ThreadSpecificData *GetTypeCache(void); static void UpdateStringOfMM(Tcl_Obj *objPtr); static int SetMMFromAny(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); static int SetPixelFromAny(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); static int SetWindowFromAny(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); #if TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 #ifdef __cplusplus extern "C" { #endif #if defined(USE_TCL_STUBS) /* Little hack to eliminate the need for "tclInt.h" here: Just copy a small portion of TclIntStubs, just enough to make it work */ typedef struct TclIntStubs { int magic; void *hooks; void (*dummy[34]) (void); /* dummy entries 0-33, not used */ int (*tclGetIntForIndex) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int endValue, int *indexPtr); /* 34 */ } TclIntStubs; extern const TclIntStubs *tclIntStubsPtr; # undef Tcl_GetIntForIndex # define Tcl_GetIntForIndex(interp, obj, max, ptr) ((tclIntStubsPtr->tclGetIntForIndex == NULL)? \ ((int (*)(Tcl_Interp*, Tcl_Obj *, int, int*))(void *)((&(tclStubsPtr->tcl_PkgProvideEx))[645]))((interp), (obj), (max), (ptr)): \ tclIntStubsPtr->tclGetIntForIndex((interp), (obj), (max), (ptr))) #elif defined(TCL_MINOR_VERSION) && (TCL_MINOR_VERSION < 7) extern int TclGetIntForIndex(Tcl_Interp*, Tcl_Obj *, int, int*); # define Tcl_GetIntForIndex(interp, obj, max, ptr) TclGetIntForIndex(interp, obj, max, ptr) #endif #ifdef __cplusplus } #endif #endif /* * The following structure defines the implementation of the "pixel" Tcl * object, used for measuring distances. The pixel object remembers its * initial display-independent settings. */ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkOldConfig.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 | * a widget record with resources and other parameters. * * Results: * A standard Tcl return value. In case of an error, the interp's result * will hold an error message. * * Side effects: | | | | > | 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 | * a widget record with resources and other parameters. * * Results: * A standard Tcl return value. In case of an error, the interp's result * will hold an error message. * * Side effects: * The fields of widgRec get filled in with information from argc/argv * and the option database. Old information in widgRec's fields gets * recycled. A copy of the spec-table is taken with (some of) the char* * fields converted into Tk_Uid fields; this copy will be released when * the interpreter terminates. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ int Tk_ConfigureWidget( Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter for error reporting. */ Tk_Window tkwin, /* Window containing widget (needed to set up * X resources). */ const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, /* Describes legal options. */ Tcl_Size argc, /* Number of elements in argv. */ const char **argv, /* Command-line options. */ void *widgRec, /* Record whose fields are to be modified. * Values must be properly initialized. */ int flags) /* Used to specify additional flags that must * be present in config specs for them to be * considered. Also, may have * TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY set. */ { Tk_ConfigSpec *specPtr, *staticSpecs; Tk_Uid value; /* Value of option from database. */ int needFlags; /* Specs must contain this set of flags or * else they are not considered. */ int hateFlags; /* If a spec contains any bits here, it's not * considered. */ Tcl_Obj *obj; if (tkwin == NULL) { /* * Either we're not really in Tk, or the main window was destroyed and * we're on our way out of the application */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
121 122 123 124 125 126 127 | } /* * Pass one: scan through all of the arguments, processing those that * match entries in the specs. */ | | > | > > > > > > | > > > > > > > > > > > | | > > > > > > | 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 | } /* * Pass one: scan through all of the arguments, processing those that * match entries in the specs. */ for ( ; argc > 0; argc -= 2, argv += 2) { const char *arg; if (flags & TK_CONFIG_OBJS) { arg = Tcl_GetString((Tcl_Obj *)*argv); } else { arg = *argv; #if defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) || (TK_MAJOR_VERSION > 8) Tcl_Panic("Flag TK_CONFIG_OBJS is mandatory"); #endif } specPtr = FindConfigSpec(interp, staticSpecs, arg, needFlags, hateFlags); if (specPtr == NULL) { return TCL_ERROR; } /* * Process the entry. */ if (argc < 2) { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "value for \"%s\" missing", arg)); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "VALUE_MISSING", (char *)NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } if (flags & TK_CONFIG_OBJS) { obj = (Tcl_Obj *)argv[1]; arg = Tcl_GetString(obj); } else { arg = argv[1]; obj = Tcl_NewStringObj(arg, TCL_INDEX_NONE); Tcl_IncrRefCount(obj); #if defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) || (TK_MAJOR_VERSION > 8) Tcl_Panic("Flag TK_CONFIG_OBJS is mandatory"); #endif } if (DoConfig(interp, tkwin, specPtr, obj, widgRec) != TCL_OK) { Tcl_AppendObjToErrorInfo(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "\n (processing \"%.40s\" option)", specPtr->argvName)); if (!(flags & TK_CONFIG_OBJS)) { Tcl_DecrRefCount(obj); } return TCL_ERROR; } if (!(flags & TK_CONFIG_OBJS)) { Tcl_DecrRefCount(obj); } if (!(flags & TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY)) { specPtr->specFlags |= TK_CONFIG_OPTION_SPECIFIED; } } /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
515 516 517 518 519 520 521 | } break; case TK_CONFIG_JOIN_STYLE: if (Tk_GetJoinStyle(interp, value, (int *)ptr) != TCL_OK) { return TCL_ERROR; } break; | | > | > > > > > | | > | 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 | } break; case TK_CONFIG_JOIN_STYLE: if (Tk_GetJoinStyle(interp, value, (int *)ptr) != TCL_OK) { return TCL_ERROR; } break; case TK_CONFIG_PIXELS: { int nullOK = specPtr->specFlags & (TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK|TCL_NULL_OK|1); if (specPtr->specFlags & TK_CONFIG_OBJS) { int dummy; if (nullValue) { if (*(Tcl_Obj **)ptr != NULL) { Tcl_DecrRefCount(*(Tcl_Obj **)ptr); *(Tcl_Obj **)ptr = NULL; } } else if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj((nullOK ? NULL : interp), tkwin, arg, &dummy) != TCL_OK) { wrongPixel: if (interp && nullOK) { Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "expected screen distance or \"\" but got \"", Tcl_GetString(arg), "\"", (char *)NULL); } return TCL_ERROR; } else { Tcl_IncrRefCount(arg); if (*(Tcl_Obj **)ptr != NULL) { Tcl_DecrRefCount(*(Tcl_Obj **)ptr); } *(Tcl_Obj **)ptr = arg; } } else if (nullValue) { *(int *)ptr = INT_MIN; } else if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj((nullOK ? NULL : interp), tkwin, arg, (int *)ptr) != TCL_OK) { goto wrongPixel; } break; } case TK_CONFIG_MM: if (Tk_GetScreenMM(interp, tkwin, value, (double *)ptr) != TCL_OK) { return TCL_ERROR; } break; case TK_CONFIG_WINDOW: { Tk_Window tkwin2; |
︙ | ︙ |
Added generic/tkOldTest.c.
> > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 | /* * tkOldTest.c -- * * This file contains C command functions for additional Tcl * commands that are used to test Tk's support for legacy * interfaces. These commands are not normally included in Tcl/Tk * applications; they're only used for testing. * * Copyright © 1993-1994 The Regents of the University of California. * Copyright © 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. * Copyright © 1998-1999 Scriptics Corporation. * Contributions by Don Porter, NIST, 2007. (not subject to US copyright) * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #define USE_OLD_IMAGE #ifndef USE_TCL_STUBS # define USE_TCL_STUBS #endif #ifndef USE_TK_STUBS # define USE_TK_STUBS #endif #include "tkInt.h" #ifdef _WIN32 #include "tkWinInt.h" #endif #if !defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) && (TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9) /* * The following data structure represents the model for a test image: */ typedef struct TImageModel { Tk_ImageModel model; /* Tk's token for image model. */ Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Interpreter for application. */ int width, height; /* Dimensions of image. */ char *imageName; /* Name of image (malloc-ed). */ char *varName; /* Name of variable in which to log events for * image (malloc-ed). */ } TImageModel; /* * The following data structure represents a particular use of a particular * test image. */ typedef struct TImageInstance { TImageModel *modelPtr; /* Pointer to model for image. */ XColor *fg; /* Foreground color for drawing in image. */ GC gc; /* Graphics context for drawing in image. */ } TImageInstance; /* * The type record for test images: */ static int ImageCreate(Tcl_Interp *interp, char *name, Tcl_Size argc, char **argv, Tk_ImageType *typePtr, Tk_ImageModel model, void **clientDataPtr); static void *ImageGet(Tk_Window tkwin, void *clientData); static void ImageDisplay(void *clientData, Display *display, Drawable drawable, int imageX, int imageY, int width, int height, int drawableX, int drawableY); static void ImageFree(void *clientData, Display *display); static void ImageDelete(void *clientData); static Tk_ImageType imageType = { "oldtest", /* name */ (Tk_ImageCreateProc *) ImageCreate, /* createProc */ ImageGet, /* getProc */ ImageDisplay, /* displayProc */ ImageFree, /* freeProc */ ImageDelete, /* deleteProc */ NULL, /* postscriptPtr */ NULL, /* nextPtr */ NULL }; /* * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file: */ static Tcl_ObjCmdProc ImageObjCmd; #endif /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * TkOldTestInit -- * * This function performs initialization for the Tk test suite * extensions for testing support for legacy interfaces. * * Results: * Returns a standard Tcl completion code, and leaves an error message in * the interp's result if an error occurs. * * Side effects: * Creates several test commands. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ int TkOldTestInit( Tcl_Interp *dummy) { static int initialized = 0; (void)dummy; if (!initialized) { initialized = 1; #if !defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) && (TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9) Tk_CreateImageType(&imageType); #endif } return TCL_OK; } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * ImageCreate -- * * This function is called by the Tk image code to create "oldtest" images. * * Results: * A standard Tcl result. * * Side effects: * The data structure for a new image is allocated. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ #if !defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) && (TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9) static int ImageCreate( Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter for application containing * image. */ char *name, /* Name to use for image. */ Tcl_Size argc, /* Number of arguments. */ char **argv, /* Argument strings for options (doesn't * include image name or type). */ Tk_ImageType *typePtr, /* Pointer to our type record (not used). */ Tk_ImageModel model, /* Token for image, to be used by us in later * callbacks. */ void **clientDataPtr) /* Store manager's token for image here; it * will be returned in later callbacks. */ { TImageModel *timPtr; const char *varName; Tcl_Size i; (void)typePtr; varName = "log"; for (i = 0; i < argc; i += 2) { if (strcmp(argv[i], "-variable") != 0) { Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad option name \"", argv[i], "\"", NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } if ((i+1) == argc) { Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "no value given for \"", argv[i], "\" option", NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } varName = argv[i+1]; } timPtr = (TImageModel *)ckalloc(sizeof(TImageModel)); timPtr->model = model; timPtr->interp = interp; timPtr->width = 30; timPtr->height = 15; timPtr->imageName = (char *)ckalloc(strlen(name) + 1); strcpy(timPtr->imageName, name); timPtr->varName = (char *)ckalloc(strlen(varName) + 1); strcpy(timPtr->varName, varName); Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, name, ImageObjCmd, timPtr, NULL); *clientDataPtr = timPtr; Tk_ImageChanged(model, 0, 0, 30, 15, 30, 15); return TCL_OK; } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * ImageObjCmd -- * * This function implements the commands corresponding to individual * images. * * Results: * A standard Tcl result. * * Side effects: * Forces windows to be created. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static int ImageObjCmd( void *clientData, /* Main window for application. */ Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */ int objc, /* Number of arguments. */ Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument strings. */ { TImageModel *timPtr = (TImageModel *)clientData; int x, y, width, height; if (objc < 2) { Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option ?arg ...?"); return TCL_ERROR; } if (strcmp(Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), "changed") == 0) { if (objc != 8) { Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "changed x y width height" " imageWidth imageHeight"); return TCL_ERROR; } if ((Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &x) != TCL_OK) || (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &y) != TCL_OK) || (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[4], &width) != TCL_OK) || (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[5], &height) != TCL_OK) || (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[6], &timPtr->width) != TCL_OK) || (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[7], &timPtr->height) != TCL_OK)) { return TCL_ERROR; } Tk_ImageChanged(timPtr->model, x, y, width, height, timPtr->width, timPtr->height); } else { Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad option \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), "\": must be changed", NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } return TCL_OK; } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * ImageGet -- * * This function is called by Tk to set things up for using a test image * in a particular widget. * * Results: * The return value is a token for the image instance, which is used in * future callbacks to ImageDisplay and ImageFree. * * Side effects: * None. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void * ImageGet( Tk_Window tkwin, /* Token for window in which image will be * used. */ void *clientData) /* Pointer to TImageModel for image. */ { TImageModel *timPtr = (TImageModel *)clientData; TImageInstance *instPtr; char buffer[100]; XGCValues gcValues; snprintf(buffer, sizeof(buffer), "%s get", timPtr->imageName); Tcl_SetVar2(timPtr->interp, timPtr->varName, NULL, buffer, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_APPEND_VALUE|TCL_LIST_ELEMENT); instPtr = (TImageInstance *)ckalloc(sizeof(TImageInstance)); instPtr->modelPtr = timPtr; instPtr->fg = Tk_GetColor(timPtr->interp, tkwin, "#ff0000"); gcValues.foreground = instPtr->fg->pixel; instPtr->gc = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, GCForeground, &gcValues); return instPtr; } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * ImageDisplay -- * * This function is invoked to redisplay part or all of an image in a * given drawable. * * Results: * None. * * Side effects: * The image gets partially redrawn, as an "X" that shows the exact * redraw area. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void ImageDisplay( void *clientData, /* Pointer to TImageInstance for image. */ Display *display, /* Display to use for drawing. */ Drawable drawable, /* Where to redraw image. */ int imageX, int imageY, /* Origin of area to redraw, relative to * origin of image. */ int width, int height, /* Dimensions of area to redraw. */ int drawableX, int drawableY) /* Coordinates in drawable corresponding to * imageX and imageY. */ { TImageInstance *instPtr = (TImageInstance *)clientData; char buffer[200 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 6]; snprintf(buffer, sizeof(buffer), "%s display %d %d %d %d %d %d", instPtr->modelPtr->imageName, imageX, imageY, width, height, drawableX, drawableY); Tcl_SetVar2(instPtr->modelPtr->interp, instPtr->modelPtr->varName, NULL, buffer, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_APPEND_VALUE|TCL_LIST_ELEMENT); if (width > (instPtr->modelPtr->width - imageX)) { width = instPtr->modelPtr->width - imageX; } if (height > (instPtr->modelPtr->height - imageY)) { height = instPtr->modelPtr->height - imageY; } XDrawRectangle(display, drawable, instPtr->gc, drawableX, drawableY, (unsigned) (width-1), (unsigned) (height-1)); XDrawLine(display, drawable, instPtr->gc, drawableX, drawableY, (int) (drawableX + width - 1), (int) (drawableY + height - 1)); XDrawLine(display, drawable, instPtr->gc, drawableX, (int) (drawableY + height - 1), (int) (drawableX + width - 1), drawableY); } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * ImageFree -- * * This function is called when an instance of an image is no longer * used. * * Results: * None. * * Side effects: * Information related to the instance is freed. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void ImageFree( void *clientData, /* Pointer to TImageInstance for instance. */ Display *display) /* Display where image was to be drawn. */ { TImageInstance *instPtr = (TImageInstance *)clientData; char buffer[200]; snprintf(buffer, sizeof(buffer), "%s free", instPtr->modelPtr->imageName); Tcl_SetVar2(instPtr->modelPtr->interp, instPtr->modelPtr->varName, NULL, buffer, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_APPEND_VALUE|TCL_LIST_ELEMENT); Tk_FreeColor(instPtr->fg); Tk_FreeGC(display, instPtr->gc); ckfree(instPtr); } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * ImageDelete -- * * This function is called to clean up a test image when an application * goes away. * * Results: * None. * * Side effects: * Information about the image is deleted. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void ImageDelete( void *clientData) /* Pointer to TImageModel for image. When * this function is called, no more instances * exist. */ { TImageModel *timPtr = (TImageModel *)clientData; char buffer[100]; snprintf(buffer, sizeof(buffer), "%s delete", timPtr->imageName); Tcl_SetVar2(timPtr->interp, timPtr->varName, NULL, buffer, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_APPEND_VALUE|TCL_LIST_ELEMENT); Tcl_DeleteCommand(timPtr->interp, timPtr->imageName); ckfree(timPtr->imageName); ckfree(timPtr->varName); ckfree(timPtr); } #endif /* * Local Variables: * mode: c * c-basic-offset: 4 * fill-column: 78 * End: */ |
Changes to generic/tkOption.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 | TCL_INDEX_NONE, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL) == TCL_OK) { Tcl_Obj *xdefaults = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp); Tcl_IncrRefCount(xdefaults); Tcl_ResetResult(interp); result = ReadOptionFile(interp, (Tk_Window)winPtr, Tcl_GetString(xdefaults), TK_USER_DEFAULT_PRIO); Tcl_DecrRefCount(xdefaults); } return result; } /* * Local Variables: * mode: c | > > > > | 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 | TCL_INDEX_NONE, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL) == TCL_OK) { Tcl_Obj *xdefaults = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp); Tcl_IncrRefCount(xdefaults); Tcl_ResetResult(interp); result = ReadOptionFile(interp, (Tk_Window)winPtr, Tcl_GetString(xdefaults), TK_USER_DEFAULT_PRIO); Tcl_DecrRefCount(xdefaults); } else { Tcl_ResetResult(interp); result = ReadOptionFile(interp, (Tk_Window)winPtr, "~/.Xdefaults", TK_USER_DEFAULT_PRIO); } return result; } /* * Local Variables: * mode: c |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkPack.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 | */ static void ArrangePacking(void *clientData); static int ConfigureContent(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); static Tcl_FreeProc DestroyPacker; static Packer * GetPacker(Tk_Window tkwin); static void PackStructureProc(void *clientData, XEvent *eventPtr); static void Unlink(Packer *packPtr); static int XExpansion(Packer *contentPtr, int cavityWidth); static int YExpansion(Packer *contentPtr, int cavityHeight); /* | > > > > | 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 | */ static void ArrangePacking(void *clientData); static int ConfigureContent(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); static Tcl_FreeProc DestroyPacker; static Packer * GetPacker(Tk_Window tkwin); #ifndef TK_NO_DEPRECATED static int PackAfter(Tcl_Interp *interp, Packer *prevPtr, Packer *containerPtr, int objc,Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); #endif /* !TK_NO_DEPRECATED */ static void PackStructureProc(void *clientData, XEvent *eventPtr); static void Unlink(Packer *packPtr); static int XExpansion(Packer *contentPtr, int cavityWidth); static int YExpansion(Packer *contentPtr, int cavityHeight); /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 | Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */ int objc, /* Number of arguments. */ Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */ { Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window)clientData; const char *argv2; static const char *const optionStrings[] = { "configure", "content", "forget", "info", "propagate", "slaves", NULL }; static const char *const optionStringsNoDep[] = { "configure", "content", "forget", "info", "propagate", NULL }; enum options { PACK_CONFIGURE, PACK_CONTENT, PACK_FORGET, PACK_INFO, PACK_PROPAGATE, PACK_SLAVES }; int index; if (objc >= 2) { const char *string = Tcl_GetString(objv[1]); if (string[0] == '.') { | > > > > > > | 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 | Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */ int objc, /* Number of arguments. */ Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */ { Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window)clientData; const char *argv2; static const char *const optionStrings[] = { #ifndef TK_NO_DEPRECATED "after", "append", "before", "unpack", #endif /* !TK_NO_DEPRECATED */ "configure", "content", "forget", "info", "propagate", "slaves", NULL }; static const char *const optionStringsNoDep[] = { "configure", "content", "forget", "info", "propagate", NULL }; enum options { #ifndef TK_NO_DEPRECATED PACK_AFTER, PACK_APPEND, PACK_BEFORE, PACK_UNPACK, #endif /* !TK_NO_DEPRECATED */ PACK_CONFIGURE, PACK_CONTENT, PACK_FORGET, PACK_INFO, PACK_PROPAGATE, PACK_SLAVES }; int index; if (objc >= 2) { const char *string = Tcl_GetString(objv[1]); if (string[0] == '.') { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 | Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[1], optionStringsNoDep, "option", 0, &index); return TCL_ERROR; } argv2 = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]); switch ((enum options) index) { case PACK_CONFIGURE: if (argv2[0] != '.') { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "bad argument \"%s\": must be name of window", argv2)); | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | | 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 | Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[1], optionStringsNoDep, "option", 0, &index); return TCL_ERROR; } argv2 = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]); switch ((enum options) index) { #ifndef TK_NO_DEPRECATED case PACK_AFTER: { Packer *prevPtr; Tk_Window tkwin2; if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2], &tkwin2) != TCL_OK) { return TCL_ERROR; } if (!(prevPtr = GetPacker(tkwin2))) { return TCL_OK; } if (prevPtr->containerPtr == NULL) { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "window \"%s\" isn't packed", argv2)); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "PACK", "NOT_PACKED", (char *)NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } return PackAfter(interp, prevPtr, prevPtr->containerPtr, objc-3, objv+3); } case PACK_APPEND: { Packer *containerPtr; Packer *prevPtr; Tk_Window tkwin2; if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2], &tkwin2) != TCL_OK) { return TCL_ERROR; } if (!(containerPtr = GetPacker(tkwin2))) { return TCL_OK; } prevPtr = containerPtr->contentPtr; if (prevPtr != NULL) { while (prevPtr->nextPtr != NULL) { prevPtr = prevPtr->nextPtr; } } return PackAfter(interp, prevPtr, containerPtr, objc-3, objv+3); } case PACK_BEFORE: { Packer *packPtr, *containerPtr; Packer *prevPtr; Tk_Window tkwin2; if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2], &tkwin2) != TCL_OK) { return TCL_ERROR; } if (!(packPtr = GetPacker(tkwin2))) { return TCL_OK; } if (packPtr->containerPtr == NULL) { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "window \"%s\" isn't packed", argv2)); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "PACK", "NOT_PACKED", (char *)NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } containerPtr = packPtr->containerPtr; prevPtr = containerPtr->contentPtr; if (prevPtr == packPtr) { prevPtr = NULL; } else { for ( ; ; prevPtr = prevPtr->nextPtr) { if (prevPtr == NULL) { Tcl_Panic("\"pack before\" couldn't find predecessor"); } if (prevPtr->nextPtr == packPtr) { break; } } } return PackAfter(interp, prevPtr, containerPtr, objc-3, objv+3); } #endif /* !TK_NO_DEPRECATED */ case PACK_CONFIGURE: if (argv2[0] != '.') { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "bad argument \"%s\": must be name of window", argv2)); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "VALUE", "WINDOW_PATH", (char *)NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } return ConfigureContent(interp, tkwin, objc-2, objv+2); case PACK_FORGET: { Tk_Window content; Packer *contentPtr; int i; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
275 276 277 278 279 280 281 | } if (!(contentPtr = GetPacker(content))) { return TCL_OK; } if (contentPtr->containerPtr == NULL) { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "window \"%s\" isn't packed", argv2)); | | | 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 | } if (!(contentPtr = GetPacker(content))) { return TCL_OK; } if (contentPtr->containerPtr == NULL) { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "window \"%s\" isn't packed", argv2)); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "PACK", "NOT_PACKED", (char *)NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } infoObj = Tcl_NewObj(); Tcl_DictObjPut(NULL, infoObj, Tcl_NewStringObj("-in", TCL_INDEX_NONE), Tk_NewWindowObj(contentPtr->containerPtr->tkwin)); Tcl_DictObjPut(NULL, infoObj, Tcl_NewStringObj("-anchor", TCL_INDEX_NONE), |
︙ | ︙ | |||
395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 | contentPtr = contentPtr->nextPtr) { Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultObj, Tk_NewWindowObj(contentPtr->tkwin)); } Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObj); break; } } return TCL_OK; } /* *------------------------------------------------------------------------ | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 | contentPtr = contentPtr->nextPtr) { Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultObj, Tk_NewWindowObj(contentPtr->tkwin)); } Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObj); break; } #ifndef TK_NO_DEPRECATED case PACK_UNPACK: { Tk_Window tkwin2; Packer *packPtr; if (objc != 3) { Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window"); return TCL_ERROR; } if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2], &tkwin2) != TCL_OK) { return TCL_ERROR; } packPtr = GetPacker(tkwin2); if (packPtr && (packPtr->containerPtr != NULL)) { Tk_ManageGeometry(tkwin2, NULL, NULL); if (packPtr->containerPtr->tkwin != Tk_Parent(packPtr->tkwin)) { Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(packPtr->tkwin, packPtr->containerPtr->tkwin); } Unlink(packPtr); Tk_UnmapWindow(packPtr->tkwin); } break; } #endif /* !TK_NO_DEPRECATED */ } return TCL_OK; } /* *------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 | packPtr->flags = 0; Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, packPtr); Tk_CreateEventHandler(tkwin, StructureNotifyMask, PackStructureProc, packPtr); return packPtr; } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * Unlink -- * * Remove a packer from its container's list of content. * | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 | packPtr->flags = 0; Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, packPtr); Tk_CreateEventHandler(tkwin, StructureNotifyMask, PackStructureProc, packPtr); return packPtr; } /* *------------------------------------------------------------------------ * * PackAfter -- * * This function does most of the real work of adding one or more windows * into the packing order for its container. * * Results: * A standard Tcl return value. * * Side effects: * The geometry of the specified windows may change, both now and again * in the future. * *------------------------------------------------------------------------ */ #ifndef TK_NO_DEPRECATED static int PackAfter( Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter for error reporting. */ Packer *prevPtr, /* Pack windows in argv just after this * window; NULL means pack as first child of * containerPtr. */ Packer *containerPtr, /* Container in which to pack windows. */ int objc, /* Number of elements in objv. */ Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Array of lists, each containing 2 elements: * window name and side against which to * pack. */ { Packer *packPtr; Tk_Window tkwin, ancestor, parent; Tcl_Obj **options; int c; Tcl_Size index, optionCount; /* * Iterate over all of the window specifiers, each consisting of two * arguments. The first argument contains the window name and the * additional arguments contain options such as "top" or "padx 20". */ for ( ; objc > 0; objc -= 2, objv += 2, prevPtr = packPtr) { if (objc < 2) { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "wrong # args: window \"%s\" should be followed by options", Tcl_GetString(objv[0]))); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TCL", "WRONGARGS", (char *)NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } /* * Find the packer for the window to be packed, and make sure that the * window in which it will be packed is either its or a descendant of * its parent. */ if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, containerPtr->tkwin, objv[0], &tkwin) != TCL_OK) { return TCL_ERROR; } parent = Tk_Parent(tkwin); for (ancestor = containerPtr->tkwin; ; ancestor = Tk_Parent(ancestor)) { if (ancestor == parent) { break; } if (((Tk_FakeWin *) (ancestor))->flags & TK_TOP_HIERARCHY) { badWindow: Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "can't pack \"%s\" inside \"%s\"", Tcl_GetString(objv[0]), Tk_PathName(containerPtr->tkwin))); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "GEOMETRY", "HIERARCHY", (char *)NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } } if (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->flags & TK_TOP_HIERARCHY) { goto badWindow; } if (tkwin == containerPtr->tkwin) { goto badWindow; } if (!(packPtr = GetPacker(tkwin))) { return TCL_OK; } /* * Process options for this window. */ if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objv[1], &optionCount, &options) != TCL_OK) { return TCL_ERROR; } packPtr->side = TOP; packPtr->anchor = TK_ANCHOR_CENTER; packPtr->padX = packPtr->padY = 0; packPtr->padLeft = packPtr->padTop = 0; packPtr->iPadX = packPtr->iPadY = 0; packPtr->flags &= ~(FILLX|FILLY|EXPAND); packPtr->flags |= OLD_STYLE; for (index = 0 ; index < optionCount; index++) { Tcl_Obj *curOptPtr = options[index]; Tcl_Size length; const char *curOpt = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(curOptPtr, &length); c = curOpt[0]; if ((c == 't') && (strncmp(curOpt, "top", length)) == 0) { packPtr->side = TOP; } else if ((c == 'b') && (strncmp(curOpt, "bottom", length)) == 0) { packPtr->side = BOTTOM; } else if ((c == 'l') && (strncmp(curOpt, "left", length)) == 0) { packPtr->side = LEFT; } else if ((c == 'r') && (strncmp(curOpt, "right", length)) == 0) { packPtr->side = RIGHT; } else if ((c == 'e') && (strncmp(curOpt, "expand", length)) == 0) { packPtr->flags |= EXPAND; } else if ((c == 'f') && (strcmp(curOpt, "fill")) == 0) { packPtr->flags |= FILLX|FILLY; } else if ((length == 5) && (strcmp(curOpt, "fillx")) == 0) { packPtr->flags |= FILLX; } else if ((length == 5) && (strcmp(curOpt, "filly")) == 0) { packPtr->flags |= FILLY; } else if ((c == 'p') && (strcmp(curOpt, "padx")) == 0) { if (optionCount <= (index+1)) { missingPad: Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "wrong # args: \"%s\" option must be" " followed by screen distance", curOpt)); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "OLDPACK", "BAD_PARAMETER", (char *)NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } if (TkParsePadAmount(interp, tkwin, options[index+1], &packPtr->padLeft, &packPtr->padX) != TCL_OK) { return TCL_ERROR; } packPtr->padX /= 2; packPtr->padLeft /= 2; packPtr->iPadX = 0; index++; } else if ((c == 'p') && (strcmp(curOpt, "pady")) == 0) { if (optionCount <= (index+1)) { goto missingPad; } if (TkParsePadAmount(interp, tkwin, options[index+1], &packPtr->padTop, &packPtr->padY) != TCL_OK) { return TCL_ERROR; } packPtr->padY /= 2; packPtr->padTop /= 2; packPtr->iPadY = 0; index++; } else if ((c == 'f') && (length > 1) && (strncmp(curOpt, "frame", length) == 0)) { if (optionCount <= (index+1)) { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj( "wrong # args: \"frame\"" " option must be followed by anchor point", TCL_INDEX_NONE)); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "OLDPACK", "BAD_PARAMETER", (char *)NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } if (Tk_GetAnchorFromObj(interp, options[index+1], &packPtr->anchor) != TCL_OK) { return TCL_ERROR; } index++; } else { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "bad option \"%s\": should be top, bottom, left," " right, expand, fill, fillx, filly, padx, pady, or" " frame", curOpt)); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "OLDPACK", "BAD_PARAMETER", (char *)NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } } if (packPtr != prevPtr) { /* * Unpack this window if it's currently packed. */ if (packPtr->containerPtr != NULL) { if ((packPtr->containerPtr != containerPtr) && (packPtr->containerPtr->tkwin != Tk_Parent(packPtr->tkwin))) { Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(packPtr->tkwin, packPtr->containerPtr->tkwin); } Unlink(packPtr); } /* * Add the window in the correct place in its container's packing * order, then make sure that the window is managed by us. */ packPtr->containerPtr = containerPtr; if (prevPtr == NULL) { packPtr->nextPtr = containerPtr->contentPtr; containerPtr->contentPtr = packPtr; } else { packPtr->nextPtr = prevPtr->nextPtr; prevPtr->nextPtr = packPtr; } Tk_ManageGeometry(tkwin, &packerType, packPtr); if (!(containerPtr->flags & DONT_PROPAGATE)) { if (TkSetGeometryContainer(interp, containerPtr->tkwin, "pack") != TCL_OK) { Tk_ManageGeometry(tkwin, NULL, NULL); Unlink(packPtr); return TCL_ERROR; } containerPtr->flags |= ALLOCED_CONTAINER; } } } /* * Arrange for the container to be re-packed at the first idle moment. */ if (containerPtr->abortPtr != NULL) { *containerPtr->abortPtr = 1; } if (!(containerPtr->flags & REQUESTED_REPACK)) { containerPtr->flags |= REQUESTED_REPACK; Tcl_DoWhenIdle(ArrangePacking, containerPtr); } return TCL_OK; } #endif /* !TK_NO_DEPRECATED */ /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * Unlink -- * * Remove a packer from its container's list of content. * |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 | if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[j], &content) != TCL_OK) { return TCL_ERROR; } if (Tk_TopWinHierarchy(content)) { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "can't pack \"%s\": it's a top-level window", Tcl_GetString(objv[j]))); | | | 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 | if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[j], &content) != TCL_OK) { return TCL_ERROR; } if (Tk_TopWinHierarchy(content)) { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "can't pack \"%s\": it's a top-level window", Tcl_GetString(objv[j]))); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "GEOMETRY", "TOPLEVEL", (char *)NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } if (!(contentPtr = GetPacker(content))) { continue; } contentPtr->flags &= ~OLD_STYLE; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 | } for (i = numWindows; i < objc; i+=2) { if ((i+2) > objc) { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "extra option \"%s\" (option with no value?)", Tcl_GetString(objv[i]))); | | | 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 1645 1646 | } for (i = numWindows; i < objc; i+=2) { if ((i+2) > objc) { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "extra option \"%s\" (option with no value?)", Tcl_GetString(objv[i]))); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "PACK", "BAD_PARAMETER", (char *)NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[i], optionStrings, "option", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) { return TCL_ERROR; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 | } if (prevPtr->containerPtr == NULL) { notPacked: Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "window \"%s\" isn't packed", Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]))); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "PACK", "NOT_PACKED", | | | 1656 1657 1658 1659 1660 1661 1662 1663 1664 1665 1666 1667 1668 1669 1670 | } if (prevPtr->containerPtr == NULL) { notPacked: Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "window \"%s\" isn't packed", Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]))); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "PACK", "NOT_PACKED", (char *)NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } containerPtr = prevPtr->containerPtr; positionGiven = 1; } break; case CONF_ANCHOR: |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1365 1366 1367 1368 1369 1370 1371 | contentPtr->flags = (contentPtr->flags & ~FILLX) | FILLY; } else if (strcmp(string, "both") == 0) { contentPtr->flags |= FILLX|FILLY; } else { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "bad fill style \"%s\": must be " "none, x, y, or both", string)); | | | 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 | contentPtr->flags = (contentPtr->flags & ~FILLX) | FILLY; } else if (strcmp(string, "both") == 0) { contentPtr->flags |= FILLX|FILLY; } else { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "bad fill style \"%s\": must be " "none, x, y, or both", string)); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "VALUE", "FILL", (char *)NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } break; case CONF_IN: if (j == 0) { if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[i+1], &other) != TCL_OK) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1393 1394 1395 1396 1397 1398 1399 | break; case CONF_IPADX: if ((Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, content, objv[i+1], &tmp) != TCL_OK) || (tmp < 0)) { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "bad ipadx value \"%s\": must be positive screen" " distance", Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]))); | | | | 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765 1766 1767 1768 1769 | break; case CONF_IPADX: if ((Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, content, objv[i+1], &tmp) != TCL_OK) || (tmp < 0)) { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "bad ipadx value \"%s\": must be positive screen" " distance", Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]))); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "VALUE", "INT_PAD", (char *)NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } contentPtr->iPadX = tmp * 2; break; case CONF_IPADY: if ((Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, content, objv[i+1], &tmp) != TCL_OK) || (tmp < 0)) { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "bad ipady value \"%s\": must be positive screen" " distance", Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]))); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "VALUE", "INT_PAD", (char *)NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } contentPtr->iPadY = tmp * 2; break; case CONF_PADX: if (TkParsePadAmount(interp, content, objv[i+1], &contentPtr->padLeft, &contentPtr->padX) != TCL_OK) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 | if (ancestor == parent) { break; } if (Tk_TopWinHierarchy(ancestor)) { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "can't pack \"%s\" inside \"%s\"", Tcl_GetString(objv[j]), Tk_PathName(containerPtr->tkwin))); | | | | | 1837 1838 1839 1840 1841 1842 1843 1844 1845 1846 1847 1848 1849 1850 1851 1852 1853 1854 1855 1856 1857 1858 1859 1860 1861 1862 1863 1864 1865 1866 1867 1868 1869 1870 1871 1872 | if (ancestor == parent) { break; } if (Tk_TopWinHierarchy(ancestor)) { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "can't pack \"%s\" inside \"%s\"", Tcl_GetString(objv[j]), Tk_PathName(containerPtr->tkwin))); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "GEOMETRY", "HIERARCHY", (char *)NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } } if (content == containerPtr->tkwin) { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "can't pack \"%s\" inside itself", Tcl_GetString(objv[j]))); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "GEOMETRY", "SELF", (char *)NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } /* * Check for management loops. */ for (container = (TkWindow *)containerPtr->tkwin; container != NULL; container = (TkWindow *)TkGetContainer(container)) { if (container == (TkWindow *)content) { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "can't put \"%s\" inside \"%s\": would cause management loop", Tcl_GetString(objv[j]), Tk_PathName(containerPtr->tkwin))); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "GEOMETRY", "LOOP", (char *)NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } } if (containerPtr->tkwin != Tk_Parent(content)) { ((TkWindow *)content)->maintainerPtr = (TkWindow *)containerPtr->tkwin; } |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkPanedWindow.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | #include "tkInt.h" #include "default.h" /* * Flag values for "sticky"ness. The 16 combinations subsume the packer's * notion of anchor and fill. * | | | 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 | #include "tkInt.h" #include "default.h" /* * Flag values for "sticky"ness. The 16 combinations subsume the packer's * notion of anchor and fill. * * STICK_NORTH This window sticks to the top of its cavity. * STICK_EAST This window sticks to the right edge of its cavity. * STICK_SOUTH This window sticks to the bottom of its cavity. * STICK_WEST This window sticks to the left edge of its cavity. */ #define STICK_NORTH 1 #define STICK_EAST 2 |
︙ | ︙ | |||
76 77 78 79 80 81 82 | /* * One structure of the following type is kept for each window * managed by a paned window widget. */ typedef struct Pane { Tk_Window tkwin; /* Window being managed. */ | | | | | 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 | /* * One structure of the following type is kept for each window * managed by a paned window widget. */ typedef struct Pane { Tk_Window tkwin; /* Window being managed. */ int minSize; /* Minimum size of this pane, on the relevant * axis, in pixels. */ int padx; /* Additional padding requested for pane, in * the x dimension. */ int pady; /* Additional padding requested for pane, in * the y dimension. */ Tcl_Obj *widthObj, *heightObj; /* Tcl_Obj rep's of pane width/height, to * allow for null values. */ int width; /* Pane width. */ int height; /* Pane height. */ int sticky; /* Sticky string. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
102 103 104 105 106 107 108 | int handlex, handley; /* Coordinates of the sash handle. */ enum stretch stretch; /* Controls how pane grows/shrinks */ int hide; /* Controls visibility of pane */ struct PanedWindow *containerPtr; /* Paned window managing the window. */ Tk_Window after; /* Placeholder for parsing options. */ Tk_Window before; /* Placeholder for parsing options. */ | < < < < | 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 | int handlex, handley; /* Coordinates of the sash handle. */ enum stretch stretch; /* Controls how pane grows/shrinks */ int hide; /* Controls visibility of pane */ struct PanedWindow *containerPtr; /* Paned window managing the window. */ Tk_Window after; /* Placeholder for parsing options. */ Tk_Window before; /* Placeholder for parsing options. */ } Pane; /* * A data structure of the following type is kept for each paned window widget * managed by this file: */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
155 156 157 158 159 160 161 | Tcl_Obj *proxyBorderWidthPtr; /* Tcl_Obj rep for proxyBorderWidth */ int proxyBorderWidth; /* Borderwidth used to draw proxy. */ int proxyRelief; /* Relief used to draw proxy, if TK_RELIEF_NULL then use relief. */ Pane **panes; /* Pointer to array of Panes. */ int numPanes; /* Number of panes. */ int sizeofPanes; /* Number of elements in the panes array. */ int flags; /* Flags for widget; see below. */ | < < | 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 | Tcl_Obj *proxyBorderWidthPtr; /* Tcl_Obj rep for proxyBorderWidth */ int proxyBorderWidth; /* Borderwidth used to draw proxy. */ int proxyRelief; /* Relief used to draw proxy, if TK_RELIEF_NULL then use relief. */ Pane **panes; /* Pointer to array of Panes. */ int numPanes; /* Number of panes. */ int sizeofPanes; /* Number of elements in the panes array. */ int flags; /* Flags for widget; see below. */ } PanedWindow; /* * Flags used for paned windows: * * REDRAW_PENDING: Non-zero means a DoWhenIdle handler has been * queued to redraw this window. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
281 282 283 284 285 286 287 | DEF_PANEDWINDOW_BG_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(PanedWindow, background), 0, DEF_PANEDWINDOW_BG_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-borderwidth", 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-background", 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", | | | | 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 | DEF_PANEDWINDOW_BG_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(PanedWindow, background), 0, DEF_PANEDWINDOW_BG_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-borderwidth", 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-background", 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", DEF_PANEDWINDOW_BORDERWIDTH, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(PanedWindow, borderWidth), 0, 0, GEOMETRY}, {TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor", DEF_PANEDWINDOW_CURSOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(PanedWindow, cursor), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-handlepad", "handlePad", "HandlePad", DEF_PANEDWINDOW_HANDLEPAD, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(PanedWindow, handlePad), 0, 0, GEOMETRY}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-handlesize", "handleSize", "HandleSize", DEF_PANEDWINDOW_HANDLESIZE, offsetof(PanedWindow, handleSizePtr), offsetof(PanedWindow, handleSize), 0, 0, GEOMETRY}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-height", "height", "Height", DEF_PANEDWINDOW_HEIGHT, offsetof(PanedWindow, heightObj), offsetof(PanedWindow, height), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, GEOMETRY}, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
316 317 318 319 320 321 322 | TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief", DEF_PANEDWINDOW_RELIEF, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(PanedWindow, relief), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-sashcursor", "sashCursor", "Cursor", DEF_PANEDWINDOW_SASHCURSOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(PanedWindow, sashCursor), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-sashpad", "sashPad", "SashPad", | | | 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 | TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief", DEF_PANEDWINDOW_RELIEF, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(PanedWindow, relief), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-sashcursor", "sashCursor", "Cursor", DEF_PANEDWINDOW_SASHCURSOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(PanedWindow, sashCursor), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-sashpad", "sashPad", "SashPad", DEF_PANEDWINDOW_SASHPAD, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(PanedWindow, sashPad), 0, 0, GEOMETRY}, {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-sashrelief", "sashRelief", "Relief", DEF_PANEDWINDOW_SASHRELIEF, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(PanedWindow, sashRelief), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-sashwidth", "sashWidth", "Width", DEF_PANEDWINDOW_SASHWIDTH, offsetof(PanedWindow, sashWidthPtr), offsetof(PanedWindow, sashWidth), 0, 0, GEOMETRY}, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
346 347 348 349 350 351 352 | TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-height", NULL, NULL, DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_HEIGHT, offsetof(Pane, heightObj), offsetof(Pane, height), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-hide", "hide", "Hide", DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_HIDE, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Pane, hide), 0,0,GEOMETRY}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-minsize", NULL, NULL, | | | | | 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 | TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-height", NULL, NULL, DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_HEIGHT, offsetof(Pane, heightObj), offsetof(Pane, height), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-hide", "hide", "Hide", DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_HIDE, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Pane, hide), 0,0,GEOMETRY}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-minsize", NULL, NULL, DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_MINSIZE, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Pane, minSize), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", NULL, NULL, DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_PADX, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Pane, padx), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", NULL, NULL, DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_PADY, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Pane, pady), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-sticky", NULL, NULL, DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_STICKY, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Pane, sticky), 0, &stickyOption, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-stretch", "stretch", "Stretch", DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_STRETCH, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Pane, stretch), TK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR, stretchStrings, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-width", NULL, NULL, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
800 801 802 803 804 805 806 | return TCL_ERROR; } else if (tkwin == pwPtr->tkwin) { /* * A panedwindow cannot manage itself. */ Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( | | | | | 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 | return TCL_ERROR; } else if (tkwin == pwPtr->tkwin) { /* * A panedwindow cannot manage itself. */ Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "can't add %s to itself", arg)); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "GEOMETRY", "SELF", (char *)NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } else if (Tk_IsTopLevel(tkwin)) { /* * A panedwindow cannot manage a toplevel. */ Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "can't add toplevel %s to %s", arg, Tk_PathName(pwPtr->tkwin))); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "GEOMETRY", "TOPLEVEL", (char *)NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } else { /* * Make sure the panedwindow is the parent of the pane, * or a descendant of the pane's parent. */ parent = Tk_Parent(tkwin); for (ancestor = pwPtr->tkwin;;ancestor = Tk_Parent(ancestor)) { if (ancestor == parent) { break; } if (Tk_IsTopLevel(ancestor)) { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "can't add %s to %s", arg, Tk_PathName(pwPtr->tkwin))); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "GEOMETRY", "HIERARCHY", (char *)NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
951 952 953 954 955 956 957 | if (found) { continue; } /* * Make sure this pane wasn't already put into the inserts array, * i.e., when the user specifies the same window multiple times in a | | | 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 | if (found) { continue; } /* * Make sure this pane wasn't already put into the inserts array, * i.e., when the user specifies the same window multiple times in a * single add commaned. */ for (j = 0; j < insertIndex; j++) { if (inserts[j]->tkwin == tkwin) { found = 1; break; } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1796 1797 1798 1799 1800 1801 1802 | if (horizontal) { if (panePtr->width > 0) { paneSize = panePtr->width; } else { paneSize = panePtr->paneWidth; } | | | | 1790 1791 1792 1793 1794 1795 1796 1797 1798 1799 1800 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 | if (horizontal) { if (panePtr->width > 0) { paneSize = panePtr->width; } else { paneSize = panePtr->paneWidth; } stretchReserve -= paneSize + (2 * panePtr->padx); } else { if (panePtr->height > 0) { paneSize = panePtr->height; } else { paneSize = panePtr->paneHeight; } stretchReserve -= paneSize + (2 * panePtr->pady); } if (IsStretchable(panePtr->stretch,i,first,last) && Tk_IsMapped(pwPtr->tkwin)) { paneDynSize += paneSize; paneDynMinSize += panePtr->minSize; } if (i != last) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1901 1902 1903 1904 1905 1906 1907 | } else { paneSize += paneDynSize - paneDynMinSize + stretchReserve; stretchReserve = paneDynMinSize - paneDynSize; } } if (horizontal) { paneWidth = paneSize; | | | | 1895 1896 1897 1898 1899 1900 1901 1902 1903 1904 1905 1906 1907 1908 1909 1910 1911 | } else { paneSize += paneDynSize - paneDynMinSize + stretchReserve; stretchReserve = paneDynMinSize - paneDynSize; } } if (horizontal) { paneWidth = paneSize; paneHeight = pwHeight - (2 * panePtr->pady); } else { paneWidth = pwWidth - (2 * panePtr->padx); paneHeight = paneSize; } /* * Adjust for area reserved for sashes. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 | /* * Compute the location of the sash at the right or bottom of the * parcel and the location of the next parcel. */ if (horizontal) { | | | | | | 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 1946 1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 1968 1969 1970 1971 1972 1973 1974 1975 1976 1977 1978 1979 1980 1981 1982 1983 1984 1985 1986 | /* * Compute the location of the sash at the right or bottom of the * parcel and the location of the next parcel. */ if (horizontal) { x += paneWidth + (2 * panePtr->padx); if (x < internalBW) { x = internalBW; } panePtr->sashx = x + sashOffset; panePtr->sashy = y; panePtr->handlex = x + handleOffset; panePtr->handley = y + pwPtr->handlePad; x += sashWidth; } else { y += paneHeight + (2 * panePtr->pady); if (y < internalBW) { y = internalBW; } panePtr->sashx = x; panePtr->sashy = y + sashOffset; panePtr->handlex = x + pwPtr->handlePad; panePtr->handley = y + handleOffset; y += sashWidth; } /* * Compute the actual dimensions of the pane in the pane. */ paneX = panePtr->x; paneY = panePtr->y; AdjustForSticky(panePtr->sticky, paneWidth, paneHeight, &paneX, &paneY, &newPaneWidth, &newPaneHeight); paneX += panePtr->padx; paneY += panePtr->pady; /* * Now put the window in the proper spot. */ if (newPaneWidth <= 0 || newPaneHeight <= 0 || (horizontal ? paneX - internalBW > pwWidth : |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2260 2261 2262 2263 2264 2265 2266 | /* * Compute the location of the sash at the right or bottom of the * parcel. */ if (horizontal) { | | | | 2254 2255 2256 2257 2258 2259 2260 2261 2262 2263 2264 2265 2266 2267 2268 2269 2270 2271 2272 2273 2274 2275 | /* * Compute the location of the sash at the right or bottom of the * parcel. */ if (horizontal) { x += panePtr->paneWidth + (2 * panePtr->padx); panePtr->sashx = x + sashOffset; panePtr->sashy = y; panePtr->handlex = x + handleOffset; panePtr->handley = y + pwPtr->handlePad; x += sashWidth; } else { y += panePtr->paneHeight + (2 * panePtr->pady); panePtr->sashx = x; panePtr->sashy = y + sashOffset; panePtr->handlex = x + pwPtr->handlePad; panePtr->handley = y + handleOffset; y += sashWidth; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2292 2293 2294 2295 2296 2297 2298 | if (panePtr->height > 0) { dim = panePtr->height; } else { doubleBw = 2 * Tk_Changes(panePtr->tkwin)->border_width; dim = Tk_ReqHeight(panePtr->tkwin) + doubleBw; } | | | | 2286 2287 2288 2289 2290 2291 2292 2293 2294 2295 2296 2297 2298 2299 2300 2301 2302 2303 2304 2305 2306 2307 2308 2309 2310 2311 2312 2313 2314 2315 2316 | if (panePtr->height > 0) { dim = panePtr->height; } else { doubleBw = 2 * Tk_Changes(panePtr->tkwin)->border_width; dim = Tk_ReqHeight(panePtr->tkwin) + doubleBw; } dim += 2 * panePtr->pady; if (dim > reqHeight) { reqHeight = dim; } } else { /* * If the pane has an explicit width set use that; otherwise, use * the pane's requested width. */ if (panePtr->width > 0) { dim = panePtr->width; } else { doubleBw = 2 * Tk_Changes(panePtr->tkwin)->border_width; dim = Tk_ReqWidth(panePtr->tkwin) + doubleBw; } dim += 2 * panePtr->padx; if (dim > reqWidth) { reqWidth = dim; } } } /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2637 2638 2639 2640 2641 2642 2643 | for (i = 0; i < pwPtr->numPanes; i++) { panePtr = pwPtr->panes[i]; if (panePtr->hide) { continue; } if (horizontal) { panePtr->paneWidth = panePtr->width = panePtr->sashx | | | | 2631 2632 2633 2634 2635 2636 2637 2638 2639 2640 2641 2642 2643 2644 2645 2646 2647 2648 | for (i = 0; i < pwPtr->numPanes; i++) { panePtr = pwPtr->panes[i]; if (panePtr->hide) { continue; } if (horizontal) { panePtr->paneWidth = panePtr->width = panePtr->sashx - sashOffset - panePtr->x - (2 * panePtr->padx); } else { panePtr->paneHeight = panePtr->height = panePtr->sashy - sashOffset - panePtr->y - (2 * panePtr->pady); } } /* * There must be a next sash since it is only possible to enter this * routine when moving an actual sash which implies there exists a visible * pane to either side of the sash. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkPkgConfig.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 | * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ /* Note, the definitions in this module are influenced by the following C * preprocessor macros: * * - _WIN32 || __CYGWIN__ The value for the fontsytem key will be * MAC_OSX_TK chosen based on these macros/defines. | > > > > > > > > > > > | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 | * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ /* Note, the definitions in this module are influenced by the following C * preprocessor macros: * * OSCMa = shortcut for "old style configuration macro activates" * NSCMdt = shortcut for "new style configuration macro declares that" * * - TCL_THREADS OSCMa compilation as threaded. * - TCL_MEM_DEBUG OSCMa memory debugging. * * - TCL_CFG_DO64BIT NSCMdt tk is compiled for a 64bit system. * - NDEBUG NSCMdt tk is compiled with symbol info off. * - TCL_CFG_OPTIMIZED NSCMdt tk is compiled with cc optimizations on * - TCL_CFG_PROFILED NSCMdt tk is compiled with profiling info. * * - _WIN32 || __CYGWIN__ The value for the fontsytem key will be * MAC_OSX_TK chosen based on these macros/defines. * HAVE_XFT NSCMdt xft font support was requested. * * - CFG_RUNTIME_* Paths to various stuff at runtime. * - CFG_INSTALL_* Paths to various stuff at installation time. * * - TCL_CFGVAL_ENCODING string containing the encoding used for the * configuration values. */ #include "tkInt.h" #ifndef TCL_CFGVAL_ENCODING #define TCL_CFGVAL_ENCODING "utf-8" #endif /* * Use C preprocessor statements to define the various values for the embedded * configuration information. */ #ifdef TCL_THREADS # define CFG_THREADED "1" #else # define CFG_THREADED "0" #endif #ifdef TCL_MEM_DEBUG # define CFG_MEMDEBUG "1" #else # define CFG_MEMDEBUG "0" #endif #ifdef TCL_CFG_DO64BIT # define CFG_64 "1" #else # define CFG_64 "0" #endif #ifndef NDEBUG # define CFG_DEBUG "1" #else # define CFG_DEBUG "0" #endif #ifdef TCL_CFG_OPTIMIZED # define CFG_OPTIMIZED "1" #else # define CFG_OPTIMIZED "0" #endif #ifdef TCL_CFG_PROFILED # define CFG_PROFILED "1" #else # define CFG_PROFILED "0" #endif #if defined(_WIN32) # define CFG_FONTSYSTEM "gdi" #elif defined(MAC_OSX_TK) # define CFG_FONTSYSTEM "cocoa" #elif defined(HAVE_XFT) # define CFG_FONTSYSTEM "xft" #else # define CFG_FONTSYSTEM "x11" #endif static const Tcl_Config cfg[] = { #if !defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) && TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 {"debug", CFG_DEBUG}, {"threaded", CFG_THREADED}, {"profiled", CFG_PROFILED}, {"64bit", CFG_64}, {"optimized", CFG_OPTIMIZED}, {"mem_debug", CFG_MEMDEBUG}, #endif {"fontsystem", CFG_FONTSYSTEM}, /* Runtime paths to various stuff */ #ifdef CFG_RUNTIME_LIBDIR {"libdir,runtime", CFG_RUNTIME_LIBDIR}, #endif |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkPlatDecls.h.
︙ | ︙ | |||
42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 | EXTERN Window Tk_AttachHWND(Tk_Window tkwin, HWND hwnd); /* 1 */ EXTERN HINSTANCE Tk_GetHINSTANCE(void); /* 2 */ EXTERN HWND Tk_GetHWND(Window window); /* 3 */ EXTERN Tk_Window Tk_HWNDToWindow(HWND hwnd); #endif /* WIN */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ /* Slot 0 is reserved */ /* Slot 1 is reserved */ /* Slot 2 is reserved */ /* Slot 3 is reserved */ /* 4 */ EXTERN void TkMacOSXInitAppleEvents(Tcl_Interp *interp); | > > > > > > | > > | 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 | EXTERN Window Tk_AttachHWND(Tk_Window tkwin, HWND hwnd); /* 1 */ EXTERN HINSTANCE Tk_GetHINSTANCE(void); /* 2 */ EXTERN HWND Tk_GetHWND(Window window); /* 3 */ EXTERN Tk_Window Tk_HWNDToWindow(HWND hwnd); /* 4 */ EXTERN void Tk_PointerEvent(HWND hwnd, int x, int y); /* 5 */ EXTERN int Tk_TranslateWinEvent(HWND hwnd, UINT message, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam, LRESULT *result); #endif /* WIN */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ /* Slot 0 is reserved */ /* Slot 1 is reserved */ /* Slot 2 is reserved */ /* Slot 3 is reserved */ /* 4 */ EXTERN void TkMacOSXInitAppleEvents(Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 5 */ EXTERN void TkGenWMConfigureEvent_(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int width, int height, int flags); /* 6 */ EXTERN void TkMacOSXInvalClipRgns(Tk_Window tkwin); /* Slot 7 is reserved */ /* 8 */ EXTERN void * TkMacOSXGetRootControl(Drawable drawable); /* 9 */ EXTERN void Tk_MacOSXSetupTkNotifier(void); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 | void *hooks; #if defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__) /* WIN */ Window (*tk_AttachHWND) (Tk_Window tkwin, HWND hwnd); /* 0 */ HINSTANCE (*tk_GetHINSTANCE) (void); /* 1 */ HWND (*tk_GetHWND) (Window window); /* 2 */ Tk_Window (*tk_HWNDToWindow) (HWND hwnd); /* 3 */ #endif /* WIN */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ void (*reserved0)(void); void (*reserved1)(void); void (*reserved2)(void); void (*reserved3)(void); void (*tkMacOSXInitAppleEvents) (Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 4 */ | > > | | 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 | void *hooks; #if defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__) /* WIN */ Window (*tk_AttachHWND) (Tk_Window tkwin, HWND hwnd); /* 0 */ HINSTANCE (*tk_GetHINSTANCE) (void); /* 1 */ HWND (*tk_GetHWND) (Window window); /* 2 */ Tk_Window (*tk_HWNDToWindow) (HWND hwnd); /* 3 */ void (*tk_PointerEvent) (HWND hwnd, int x, int y); /* 4 */ int (*tk_TranslateWinEvent) (HWND hwnd, UINT message, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam, LRESULT *result); /* 5 */ #endif /* WIN */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ void (*reserved0)(void); void (*reserved1)(void); void (*reserved2)(void); void (*reserved3)(void); void (*tkMacOSXInitAppleEvents) (Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 4 */ void (*tkGenWMConfigureEvent_) (Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int width, int height, int flags); /* 5 */ void (*tkMacOSXInvalClipRgns) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 6 */ void (*reserved7)(void); void * (*tkMacOSXGetRootControl) (Drawable drawable); /* 8 */ void (*tk_MacOSXSetupTkNotifier) (void); /* 9 */ int (*tk_MacOSXIsAppInFront) (void); /* 10 */ Tk_Window (*tk_MacOSXGetTkWindow) (void *w); /* 11 */ void * (*tk_MacOSXGetCGContextForDrawable) (Drawable drawable); /* 12 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 | (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_AttachHWND) /* 0 */ #define Tk_GetHINSTANCE \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_GetHINSTANCE) /* 1 */ #define Tk_GetHWND \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_GetHWND) /* 2 */ #define Tk_HWNDToWindow \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_HWNDToWindow) /* 3 */ #endif /* WIN */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ /* Slot 0 is reserved */ /* Slot 1 is reserved */ /* Slot 2 is reserved */ /* Slot 3 is reserved */ #define TkMacOSXInitAppleEvents \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXInitAppleEvents) /* 4 */ | > > > > | > | 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 | (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_AttachHWND) /* 0 */ #define Tk_GetHINSTANCE \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_GetHINSTANCE) /* 1 */ #define Tk_GetHWND \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_GetHWND) /* 2 */ #define Tk_HWNDToWindow \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_HWNDToWindow) /* 3 */ #define Tk_PointerEvent \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_PointerEvent) /* 4 */ #define Tk_TranslateWinEvent \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_TranslateWinEvent) /* 5 */ #endif /* WIN */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ /* Slot 0 is reserved */ /* Slot 1 is reserved */ /* Slot 2 is reserved */ /* Slot 3 is reserved */ #define TkMacOSXInitAppleEvents \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXInitAppleEvents) /* 4 */ #define TkGenWMConfigureEvent_ \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tkGenWMConfigureEvent_) /* 5 */ #define TkMacOSXInvalClipRgns \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXInvalClipRgns) /* 6 */ /* Slot 7 is reserved */ #define TkMacOSXGetRootControl \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXGetRootControl) /* 8 */ #define Tk_MacOSXSetupTkNotifier \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_MacOSXSetupTkNotifier) /* 9 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 | #ifdef __cplusplus } #endif #undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS #define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT #define Tk_MacOSXGetNSViewForDrawable TkMacOSXGetRootControl #endif /* _TKPLATDECLS */ | > | 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 | #ifdef __cplusplus } #endif #undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS #define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT #undef TkGenWMConfigureEvent_ #define Tk_MacOSXGetNSViewForDrawable TkMacOSXGetRootControl #endif /* _TKPLATDECLS */ |
Changes to generic/tkPointer.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
412 413 414 415 416 417 418 | *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ int XGrabPointer( Display *display, Window grab_window, | | | | | | | | > > > > > > > | 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 | *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ int XGrabPointer( Display *display, Window grab_window, Bool owner_events, unsigned int event_mask, int pointer_mode, int keyboard_mode, Window confine_to, Cursor cursor, Time time) { ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData)); (void)owner_events; (void)event_mask; (void)pointer_mode; (void)keyboard_mode; (void)confine_to; (void)cursor; (void)time; LastKnownRequestProcessed(display)++; tsdPtr->grabWinPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_IdToWindow(display, grab_window); tsdPtr->restrictWinPtr = NULL; TkpSetCapture(tsdPtr->grabWinPtr); if (TkPositionInTree(tsdPtr->lastWinPtr, tsdPtr->grabWinPtr) != TK_GRAB_IN_TREE) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
453 454 455 456 457 458 459 | * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ int XUngrabPointer( Display *display, | | > | 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 | * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ int XUngrabPointer( Display *display, Time time) { ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData)); (void)time; LastKnownRequestProcessed(display)++; tsdPtr->grabWinPtr = NULL; tsdPtr->restrictWinPtr = NULL; TkpSetCapture(NULL); UpdateCursor(tsdPtr->lastWinPtr); return Success; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
576 577 578 579 580 581 582 | *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ int XDefineCursor( Display *display, Window w, | | > | 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 | *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ int XDefineCursor( Display *display, Window w, Cursor cursor) { TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_IdToWindow(display, w); ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData)); (void)cursor; if (tsdPtr->cursorWinPtr == winPtr) { UpdateCursor(winPtr); } LastKnownRequestProcessed(display)++; return Success; } |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkRectOval.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
75 76 77 78 79 80 81 | {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-activewidth", NULL, NULL, "0.0", offsetof(RectOvalItem, outline.activeWidth), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &pixelOption}, {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-dash", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(RectOvalItem, outline.dash), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &dashOption}, {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-dashoffset", NULL, NULL, | | | | 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 | {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-activewidth", NULL, NULL, "0.0", offsetof(RectOvalItem, outline.activeWidth), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &pixelOption}, {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-dash", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(RectOvalItem, outline.dash), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &dashOption}, {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-dashoffset", NULL, NULL, "0", offsetof(RectOvalItem, outline.offset), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-disableddash", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(RectOvalItem, outline.disabledDash), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &dashOption}, {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledfill", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(RectOvalItem, disabledFillColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledoutline", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(RectOvalItem, outline.disabledColor), |
︙ | ︙ | |||
167 168 169 170 171 172 173 | sizeof(RectOvalItem), /* itemSize */ CreateRectOval, /* createProc */ configSpecs, /* configSpecs */ ConfigureRectOval, /* configureProc */ RectOvalCoords, /* coordProc */ DeleteRectOval, /* deleteProc */ DisplayRectOval, /* displayProc */ | | | 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 | sizeof(RectOvalItem), /* itemSize */ CreateRectOval, /* createProc */ configSpecs, /* configSpecs */ ConfigureRectOval, /* configureProc */ RectOvalCoords, /* coordProc */ DeleteRectOval, /* deleteProc */ DisplayRectOval, /* displayProc */ TK_CONFIG_OBJS, /* flags */ RectToPoint, /* pointProc */ RectToArea, /* areaProc */ RectOvalToPostscript, /* postscriptProc */ ScaleRectOval, /* scaleProc */ TranslateRectOval, /* translateProc */ NULL, /* indexProc */ NULL, /* icursorProc */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
192 193 194 195 196 197 198 | sizeof(RectOvalItem), /* itemSize */ CreateRectOval, /* createProc */ configSpecs, /* configSpecs */ ConfigureRectOval, /* configureProc */ RectOvalCoords, /* coordProc */ DeleteRectOval, /* deleteProc */ DisplayRectOval, /* displayProc */ | | | 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 | sizeof(RectOvalItem), /* itemSize */ CreateRectOval, /* createProc */ configSpecs, /* configSpecs */ ConfigureRectOval, /* configureProc */ RectOvalCoords, /* coordProc */ DeleteRectOval, /* deleteProc */ DisplayRectOval, /* displayProc */ TK_CONFIG_OBJS, /* flags */ OvalToPoint, /* pointProc */ OvalToArea, /* areaProc */ RectOvalToPostscript, /* postscriptProc */ ScaleRectOval, /* scaleProc */ TranslateRectOval, /* translateProc */ NULL, /* indexProc */ NULL, /* cursorProc */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
412 413 414 415 416 417 418 | XColor *color; Pixmap stipple; Tk_State state; tkwin = Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas); if (TCL_OK != Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, tkwin, configSpecs, objc, | | | 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 | XColor *color; Pixmap stipple; Tk_State state; tkwin = Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas); if (TCL_OK != Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, tkwin, configSpecs, objc, (const char **)objv, (char *) rectOvalPtr, flags|TK_CONFIG_OBJS)) { return TCL_ERROR; } state = itemPtr->state; /* * A few of the options require additional processing, such as graphics * contexts. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkScale.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
45 46 47 48 49 50 51 | DEF_SCALE_BIG_INCREMENT, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkScale, bigIncrement), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-borderwidth", 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-background", 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", | | | 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 | DEF_SCALE_BIG_INCREMENT, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkScale, bigIncrement), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-borderwidth", 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-background", 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", DEF_SCALE_BORDER_WIDTH, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkScale, borderWidth), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-command", "command", "Command", DEF_SCALE_COMMAND, offsetof(TkScale, commandObj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor", DEF_SCALE_CURSOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkScale, cursor), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
73 74 75 76 77 78 79 | "HighlightBackground", DEF_SCALE_HIGHLIGHT_BG_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkScale, highlightBorder), 0, DEF_SCALE_HIGHLIGHT_BG_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor", DEF_SCALE_HIGHLIGHT, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkScale, highlightColorPtr), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness", | | | | | | 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 | "HighlightBackground", DEF_SCALE_HIGHLIGHT_BG_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkScale, highlightBorder), 0, DEF_SCALE_HIGHLIGHT_BG_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor", DEF_SCALE_HIGHLIGHT, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkScale, highlightColorPtr), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness", "HighlightThickness", DEF_SCALE_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkScale, highlightWidth), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-label", "label", "Label", DEF_SCALE_LABEL, offsetof(TkScale, labelObj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-length", "length", "Length", DEF_SCALE_LENGTH, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkScale, length), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-orient", "orient", "Orient", DEF_SCALE_ORIENT, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkScale, orient), TK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR, orientStrings, 0}, {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief", DEF_SCALE_RELIEF, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkScale, relief), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_INT, "-repeatdelay", "repeatDelay", "RepeatDelay", DEF_SCALE_REPEAT_DELAY, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkScale, repeatDelay), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_INT, "-repeatinterval", "repeatInterval", "RepeatInterval", DEF_SCALE_REPEAT_INTERVAL, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkScale, repeatInterval), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-resolution", "resolution", "Resolution", DEF_SCALE_RESOLUTION, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkScale, resolution), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-showvalue", "showValue", "ShowValue", DEF_SCALE_SHOW_VALUE, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkScale, showValue), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-sliderlength", "sliderLength", "SliderLength", DEF_SCALE_SLIDER_LENGTH, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkScale, sliderLength), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-sliderrelief", "sliderRelief", "SliderRelief", DEF_SCALE_SLIDER_RELIEF, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkScale, sliderRelief), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-state", "state", "State", DEF_SCALE_STATE, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkScale, state), TK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR, tkStateStrings, 0}, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
121 122 123 124 125 126 127 | {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-troughcolor", "troughColor", "Background", DEF_SCALE_TROUGH_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkScale, troughColorPtr), 0, DEF_SCALE_TROUGH_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-variable", "variable", "Variable", DEF_SCALE_VARIABLE, offsetof(TkScale, varNamePtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-width", "width", "Width", | | | 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 | {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-troughcolor", "troughColor", "Background", DEF_SCALE_TROUGH_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkScale, troughColorPtr), 0, DEF_SCALE_TROUGH_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-variable", "variable", "Variable", DEF_SCALE_VARIABLE, offsetof(TkScale, varNamePtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-width", "width", "Width", DEF_SCALE_WIDTH, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkScale, width), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, 0, 0} }; /* * The following tables define the scale widget commands and map the indexes * into the string tables into a single enumerated type used to dispatch the * scale widget command. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
147 148 149 150 151 152 153 | /* * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file: */ static void ComputeFormat(TkScale *scalePtr, int forTicks); static void ComputeScaleGeometry(TkScale *scalePtr); static int ConfigureScale(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkScale *scalePtr, | | | 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 | /* * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file: */ static void ComputeFormat(TkScale *scalePtr, int forTicks); static void ComputeScaleGeometry(TkScale *scalePtr); static int ConfigureScale(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkScale *scalePtr, Tcl_Size objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); static void DestroyScale(void *memPtr); static double MaxTickRoundingError(TkScale *scalePtr, double tickResolution); static void ScaleCmdDeletedProc(void *clientData); static void ScaleEventProc(void *clientData, XEvent *eventPtr); static char * ScaleVarProc(void *clientData, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
277 278 279 280 281 282 283 | scalePtr->display = Tk_Display(tkwin); scalePtr->interp = interp; scalePtr->widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, Tk_PathName(scalePtr->tkwin), ScaleWidgetObjCmd, scalePtr, ScaleCmdDeletedProc); scalePtr->optionTable = optionTable; scalePtr->orient = ORIENT_VERTICAL; | | | | | | < < | 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 | scalePtr->display = Tk_Display(tkwin); scalePtr->interp = interp; scalePtr->widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, Tk_PathName(scalePtr->tkwin), ScaleWidgetObjCmd, scalePtr, ScaleCmdDeletedProc); scalePtr->optionTable = optionTable; scalePtr->orient = ORIENT_VERTICAL; scalePtr->width = 0; scalePtr->length = 0; scalePtr->value = 0.0; scalePtr->varNamePtr = NULL; scalePtr->fromValue = 0.0; scalePtr->toValue = 0.0; scalePtr->tickInterval = 0.0; scalePtr->resolution = 1.0; scalePtr->digits = 0; scalePtr->bigIncrement = 0.0; scalePtr->commandObj = NULL; scalePtr->repeatDelay = 0; scalePtr->repeatInterval = 0; scalePtr->labelObj = NULL; scalePtr->state = STATE_NORMAL; scalePtr->borderWidth = 0; scalePtr->bgBorder = NULL; scalePtr->activeBorder = NULL; scalePtr->sliderRelief = TK_RELIEF_RAISED; scalePtr->troughColorPtr = NULL; scalePtr->troughGC = NULL; scalePtr->copyGC = NULL; scalePtr->tkfont = NULL; scalePtr->textColorPtr = NULL; scalePtr->textGC = NULL; scalePtr->relief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT; scalePtr->highlightWidth = 0; scalePtr->highlightBorder = NULL; scalePtr->highlightColorPtr = NULL; scalePtr->inset = 0; scalePtr->sliderLength = 0; scalePtr->showValue = 0; scalePtr->horizLabelY = 0; scalePtr->horizValueY = 0; scalePtr->horizTroughY = 0; scalePtr->horizTickY = 0; scalePtr->vertTickRightX = 0; scalePtr->vertValueRightX = 0; scalePtr->vertTroughX = 0; scalePtr->vertLabelX = 0; scalePtr->fontHeight = 0; scalePtr->cursor = NULL; scalePtr->takeFocusPtr = NULL; scalePtr->flags = NEVER_SET; Tk_SetClassProcs(scalePtr->tkwin, &scaleClass, scalePtr); Tk_CreateEventHandler(scalePtr->tkwin, ExposureMask|StructureNotifyMask|FocusChangeMask, ScaleEventProc, scalePtr); if ((Tk_InitOptions(interp, scalePtr, optionTable, tkwin) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
413 414 415 416 417 418 419 | } Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr); } else { result = ConfigureScale(interp, scalePtr, objc-2, objv+2); } break; case COMMAND_COORDS: { | | < < | | | | | 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 | } Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr); } else { result = ConfigureScale(interp, scalePtr, objc-2, objv+2); } break; case COMMAND_COORDS: { int x, y; double value; Tcl_Obj *coords[2]; if ((objc != 2) && (objc != 3)) { Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "coords ?value?"); goto error; } if (objc == 3) { if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[2], &value) != TCL_OK) { goto error; } } else { value = scalePtr->value; } if (scalePtr->orient == ORIENT_VERTICAL) { x = scalePtr->vertTroughX + scalePtr->width/2 + scalePtr->borderWidth; y = TkScaleValueToPixel(scalePtr, value); } else { x = TkScaleValueToPixel(scalePtr, value); y = scalePtr->horizTroughY + scalePtr->width/2 + scalePtr->borderWidth; } coords[0] = Tcl_NewWideIntObj(x); coords[1] = Tcl_NewWideIntObj(y); Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewListObj(2, coords)); break; } case COMMAND_GET: { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
589 590 591 592 593 594 595 | */ static int ConfigureScale( Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Used for error reporting. */ TkScale *scalePtr, /* Information about widget; may or may not * already have values for some fields. */ | | | | 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 | */ static int ConfigureScale( Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Used for error reporting. */ TkScale *scalePtr, /* Information about widget; may or may not * already have values for some fields. */ Tcl_Size objc, /* Number of valid entries in objv. */ Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument values. */ { Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions; Tcl_Obj *errorResult = NULL; int error; double varValue; /* * Eliminate any existing trace on a variable monitored by the scale. */ if (scalePtr->varNamePtr != NULL) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
670 671 672 673 674 675 676 | } ComputeFormat(scalePtr, 0); ComputeFormat(scalePtr, 1); Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(scalePtr->tkwin, scalePtr->bgBorder); | < < < | < < | < < | | 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 | } ComputeFormat(scalePtr, 0); ComputeFormat(scalePtr, 1); Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(scalePtr->tkwin, scalePtr->bgBorder); if (scalePtr->highlightWidth < 0) { scalePtr->highlightWidth = 0; } scalePtr->inset = scalePtr->highlightWidth + scalePtr->borderWidth; break; } if (!error) { Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions); } /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
761 762 763 764 765 766 767 | static void ScaleWorldChanged( void *instanceData) /* Information about widget. */ { XGCValues gcValues; GC gc; TkScale *scalePtr = (TkScale *)instanceData; | < | 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 | static void ScaleWorldChanged( void *instanceData) /* Information about widget. */ { XGCValues gcValues; GC gc; TkScale *scalePtr = (TkScale *)instanceData; gcValues.foreground = scalePtr->troughColorPtr->pixel; gc = Tk_GetGC(scalePtr->tkwin, GCForeground, &gcValues); if (scalePtr->troughGC != NULL) { Tk_FreeGC(scalePtr->display, scalePtr->troughGC); } scalePtr->troughGC = gc; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
783 784 785 786 787 788 789 | scalePtr->textGC = gc; if (scalePtr->copyGC == NULL) { gcValues.graphics_exposures = False; scalePtr->copyGC = Tk_GetGC(scalePtr->tkwin, GCGraphicsExposures, &gcValues); } | < < | | 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 | scalePtr->textGC = gc; if (scalePtr->copyGC == NULL) { gcValues.graphics_exposures = False; scalePtr->copyGC = Tk_GetGC(scalePtr->tkwin, GCGraphicsExposures, &gcValues); } scalePtr->inset = scalePtr->highlightWidth + scalePtr->borderWidth; /* * Recompute display-related information, and let the geometry manager * know how much space is needed now. */ ComputeScaleGeometry(scalePtr); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
938 939 940 941 942 943 944 | leastSigDigit = ScaleDigit(scalePtr->resolution); } else { /* * No resolution was specified, so compute the difference in * value between adjacent pixels and use it for the least * significant digit. */ | < < | | | 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 | leastSigDigit = ScaleDigit(scalePtr->resolution); } else { /* * No resolution was specified, so compute the difference in * value between adjacent pixels and use it for the least * significant digit. */ x = fabs(scalePtr->fromValue - scalePtr->toValue); if (scalePtr->length > 0) { x /= scalePtr->length; } if (x > 0) { leastSigDigit = ScaleDigit(x); } else { leastSigDigit = 0; } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 | static void ComputeScaleGeometry( TkScale *scalePtr) /* Information about widget. */ { char valueString[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE]; int tmp, valuePixels, tickPixels, x, y, extraSpace; Tk_FontMetrics fm; | < | 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 | static void ComputeScaleGeometry( TkScale *scalePtr) /* Information about widget. */ { char valueString[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE]; int tmp, valuePixels, tickPixels, x, y, extraSpace; Tk_FontMetrics fm; Tk_GetFontMetrics(scalePtr->tkfont, &fm); scalePtr->fontHeight = fm.linespace + SPACING; /* * Horizontal scales are simpler than vertical ones because all sizes are * the same (the height of a line of text); handle them first and then |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 | y += scalePtr->fontHeight; extraSpace = SPACING; } else { scalePtr->horizValueY = y; } y += extraSpace; scalePtr->horizTroughY = y; | < < < | | | 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 | y += scalePtr->fontHeight; extraSpace = SPACING; } else { scalePtr->horizValueY = y; } y += extraSpace; scalePtr->horizTroughY = y; y += scalePtr->width + 2*scalePtr->borderWidth; if (scalePtr->tickInterval != 0) { scalePtr->horizTickY = y + SPACING; y += scalePtr->fontHeight + SPACING; } Tk_GeometryRequest(scalePtr->tkwin, scalePtr->length + 2*scalePtr->inset, y + scalePtr->inset); Tk_SetInternalBorder(scalePtr->tkwin, scalePtr->inset); return; } /* * Vertical scale: compute the amount of space needed to display the * scales value by formatting strings for the two end points; use |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 | scalePtr->vertValueRightX = x + SPACING + valuePixels; x = scalePtr->vertValueRightX + SPACING; } else { scalePtr->vertTickRightX = x; scalePtr->vertValueRightX = x; } scalePtr->vertTroughX = x; | < < | < | | 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 | scalePtr->vertValueRightX = x + SPACING + valuePixels; x = scalePtr->vertValueRightX + SPACING; } else { scalePtr->vertTickRightX = x; scalePtr->vertValueRightX = x; } scalePtr->vertTroughX = x; x += 2*scalePtr->borderWidth + scalePtr->width; if (scalePtr->labelObj == NULL) { scalePtr->vertLabelX = 0; } else { Tcl_Size labelLength; const char *label= Tcl_GetStringFromObj(scalePtr->labelObj, &labelLength); scalePtr->vertLabelX = x + fm.ascent/2; x = scalePtr->vertLabelX + fm.ascent/2 + Tk_TextWidth(scalePtr->tkfont, label, labelLength); } Tk_GeometryRequest(scalePtr->tkwin, x + scalePtr->inset, scalePtr->length + 2*scalePtr->inset); Tk_SetInternalBorder(scalePtr->tkwin, scalePtr->inset); } /* *-------------------------------------------------------------- * * ScaleEventProc -- |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 | static void ScaleEventProc( void *clientData, /* Information about window. */ XEvent *eventPtr) /* Information about event. */ { TkScale *scalePtr = (TkScale *)clientData; | < < | < | | 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 | static void ScaleEventProc( void *clientData, /* Information about window. */ XEvent *eventPtr) /* Information about event. */ { TkScale *scalePtr = (TkScale *)clientData; if ((eventPtr->type == Expose) && (eventPtr->xexpose.count == 0)) { TkEventuallyRedrawScale(scalePtr, REDRAW_ALL); } else if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) { DestroyScale(clientData); } else if (eventPtr->type == ConfigureNotify) { ComputeScaleGeometry(scalePtr); TkEventuallyRedrawScale(scalePtr, REDRAW_ALL); } else if (eventPtr->type == FocusIn) { if (eventPtr->xfocus.detail != NotifyInferior) { scalePtr->flags |= GOT_FOCUS; if (scalePtr->highlightWidth > 0) { TkEventuallyRedrawScale(scalePtr, REDRAW_ALL); } } } else if (eventPtr->type == FocusOut) { if (eventPtr->xfocus.detail != NotifyInferior) { scalePtr->flags &= ~GOT_FOCUS; if (scalePtr->highlightWidth > 0) { TkEventuallyRedrawScale(scalePtr, REDRAW_ALL); } } } } /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 1550 1551 | double TkScalePixelToValue( TkScale *scalePtr, /* Information about widget. */ int x, int y) /* Coordinates of point within window. */ { double value, pixelRange; | < < < | | | | | | | 1519 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 1525 1526 1527 1528 1529 1530 1531 1532 1533 1534 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 1540 1541 1542 1543 1544 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 1550 1551 1552 1553 | double TkScalePixelToValue( TkScale *scalePtr, /* Information about widget. */ int x, int y) /* Coordinates of point within window. */ { double value, pixelRange; if (scalePtr->orient == ORIENT_VERTICAL) { pixelRange = Tk_Height(scalePtr->tkwin) - scalePtr->sliderLength - 2*scalePtr->inset - 2*scalePtr->borderWidth; value = y; } else { pixelRange = Tk_Width(scalePtr->tkwin) - scalePtr->sliderLength - 2*scalePtr->inset - 2*scalePtr->borderWidth; value = x; } if (pixelRange <= 0) { /* * Not enough room for the slider to actually slide: just return the * scale's current value. */ return scalePtr->value; } value -= scalePtr->sliderLength/2 + scalePtr->inset + scalePtr->borderWidth; value /= pixelRange; if (value < 0) { value = 0; } if (value > 1) { value = 1; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 | int TkScaleValueToPixel( TkScale *scalePtr, /* Information about widget. */ double value) /* Reading of the widget. */ { int y, pixelRange; double valueRange; | < < < | | | 1578 1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 1592 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 | int TkScaleValueToPixel( TkScale *scalePtr, /* Information about widget. */ double value) /* Reading of the widget. */ { int y, pixelRange; double valueRange; valueRange = scalePtr->toValue - scalePtr->fromValue; pixelRange = ((scalePtr->orient == ORIENT_VERTICAL) ? Tk_Height(scalePtr->tkwin) : Tk_Width(scalePtr->tkwin)) - scalePtr->sliderLength - 2*scalePtr->inset - 2*scalePtr->borderWidth; if (valueRange == 0) { y = 0; } else { y = ScaleRound((value - scalePtr->fromValue) * pixelRange / valueRange); if (y < 0) { y = 0; } else if (y > pixelRange) { y = pixelRange; } } y += scalePtr->sliderLength/2 + scalePtr->inset + scalePtr->borderWidth; return y; } /* * Local Variables: * mode: c * c-basic-offset: 4 * fill-column: 78 * End: */ |
Changes to generic/tkScrollbar.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
45 46 47 48 49 50 51 | TK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background", DEF_SCROLLBAR_BG_MONO, offsetof(TkScrollbar, bgBorder), TK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_SYNONYM, "-bd", "borderWidth", NULL, NULL, 0, 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_SYNONYM, "-bg", "background", NULL, NULL, 0, 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", | | | | | | | 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 | TK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background", DEF_SCROLLBAR_BG_MONO, offsetof(TkScrollbar, bgBorder), TK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_SYNONYM, "-bd", "borderWidth", NULL, NULL, 0, 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_SYNONYM, "-bg", "background", NULL, NULL, 0, 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", DEF_SCROLLBAR_BORDER_WIDTH, offsetof(TkScrollbar, borderWidth), 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-command", "command", "Command", DEF_SCROLLBAR_COMMAND, offsetof(TkScrollbar, commandObj), TK_CONFIG_OBJS|TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_ACTIVE_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor", DEF_SCROLLBAR_CURSOR, offsetof(TkScrollbar, cursor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-elementborderwidth", "elementBorderWidth", "BorderWidth", DEF_SCROLLBAR_EL_BORDER_WIDTH, offsetof(TkScrollbar, elementBorderWidth), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground", "HighlightBackground", DEF_SCROLLBAR_HIGHLIGHT_BG, offsetof(TkScrollbar, highlightBgColorPtr), 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor", DEF_SCROLLBAR_HIGHLIGHT, offsetof(TkScrollbar, highlightColorPtr), 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness", "HighlightThickness", DEF_SCROLLBAR_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH, offsetof(TkScrollbar, highlightWidth), 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_BOOLEAN, "-jump", "jump", "Jump", DEF_SCROLLBAR_JUMP, offsetof(TkScrollbar, jump), 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-orient", "orient", "Orient", DEF_SCROLLBAR_ORIENT, offsetof(TkScrollbar, vertical), 0, &orientOption}, {TK_CONFIG_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief", DEF_SCROLLBAR_RELIEF, offsetof(TkScrollbar, relief), 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_INT, "-repeatdelay", "repeatDelay", "RepeatDelay", DEF_SCROLLBAR_REPEAT_DELAY, offsetof(TkScrollbar, repeatDelay), 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_INT, "-repeatinterval", "repeatInterval", "RepeatInterval", DEF_SCROLLBAR_REPEAT_INTERVAL, offsetof(TkScrollbar, repeatInterval), 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus", DEF_SCROLLBAR_TAKE_FOCUS, offsetof(TkScrollbar, takeFocusObj), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK|TK_CONFIG_OBJS, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-troughcolor", "troughColor", "Background", DEF_SCROLLBAR_TROUGH_COLOR, offsetof(TkScrollbar, troughColorPtr), TK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-troughcolor", "troughColor", "Background", DEF_SCROLLBAR_TROUGH_MONO, offsetof(TkScrollbar, troughColorPtr), TK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-width", "width", "Width", tkDefScrollbarWidth, offsetof(TkScrollbar, width), 0, NULL}, {TK_CONFIG_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, NULL} }; /* * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file: */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
154 155 156 157 158 159 160 | scrollPtr->tkwin = newWin; scrollPtr->display = Tk_Display(newWin); scrollPtr->interp = interp; scrollPtr->widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, Tk_PathName(scrollPtr->tkwin), ScrollbarWidgetObjCmd, scrollPtr, ScrollbarCmdDeletedProc); scrollPtr->vertical = 0; | | | | | > > > > > > > > > > | 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 | scrollPtr->tkwin = newWin; scrollPtr->display = Tk_Display(newWin); scrollPtr->interp = interp; scrollPtr->widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, Tk_PathName(scrollPtr->tkwin), ScrollbarWidgetObjCmd, scrollPtr, ScrollbarCmdDeletedProc); scrollPtr->vertical = 0; scrollPtr->width = 0; scrollPtr->commandObj = NULL; scrollPtr->repeatDelay = 0; scrollPtr->repeatInterval = 0; scrollPtr->borderWidth = 0; scrollPtr->bgBorder = NULL; scrollPtr->activeBorder = NULL; scrollPtr->troughColorPtr = NULL; scrollPtr->relief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT; scrollPtr->highlightWidth = 0; scrollPtr->highlightBgColorPtr = NULL; scrollPtr->highlightColorPtr = NULL; scrollPtr->inset = 0; scrollPtr->elementBorderWidth = -1; scrollPtr->arrowLength = 0; scrollPtr->sliderFirst = 0; scrollPtr->sliderLast = 0; scrollPtr->activeField = 0; scrollPtr->activeRelief = TK_RELIEF_RAISED; #ifndef TK_NO_DEPRECATED #define totalUnits dummy1 #define windowUnits dummy2 #define firstUnit dummy3 #define lastUnit dummy4 scrollPtr->totalUnits = 0; scrollPtr->windowUnits = 0; scrollPtr->firstUnit = 0; scrollPtr->lastUnit = 0; #endif /* TK_NO_DEPRECATED */ scrollPtr->firstFraction = 0.0; scrollPtr->lastFraction = 0.0; scrollPtr->cursor = NULL; scrollPtr->takeFocusObj = NULL; scrollPtr->flags = 0; if (ConfigureScrollbar(interp, scrollPtr, objc-2, objv+2, 0) != TCL_OK) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 | case COMMAND_GET: { Tcl_Obj *resObjs[4]; if (objc != 2) { Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "get"); goto error; } resObjs[0] = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(scrollPtr->firstFraction); resObjs[1] = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(scrollPtr->lastFraction); Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewListObj(2, resObjs)); break; } case COMMAND_IDENTIFY: { int x, y; | > > > > > > > > > > > | 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 | case COMMAND_GET: { Tcl_Obj *resObjs[4]; if (objc != 2) { Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "get"); goto error; } #ifndef TK_NO_DEPRECATED # define OLD_STYLE_COMMANDS 2 if (scrollPtr->flags & OLD_STYLE_COMMANDS) { resObjs[0] = Tcl_NewWideIntObj(scrollPtr->totalUnits); resObjs[1] = Tcl_NewWideIntObj(scrollPtr->windowUnits); resObjs[2] = Tcl_NewWideIntObj(scrollPtr->firstUnit); resObjs[3] = Tcl_NewWideIntObj(scrollPtr->lastUnit); Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewListObj(4, resObjs)); break; } #endif /* TK_NO_DEPRECATED */ resObjs[0] = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(scrollPtr->firstFraction); resObjs[1] = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(scrollPtr->lastFraction); Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewListObj(2, resObjs)); break; } case COMMAND_IDENTIFY: { int x, y; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 | if (last < scrollPtr->firstFraction) { scrollPtr->lastFraction = scrollPtr->firstFraction; } else if (last > 1.0) { scrollPtr->lastFraction = 1.0; } else { scrollPtr->lastFraction = last; } } else { Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "set firstFraction lastFraction"); goto error; } TkpComputeScrollbarGeometry(scrollPtr); TkScrollbarEventuallyRedraw(scrollPtr); break; | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 | if (last < scrollPtr->firstFraction) { scrollPtr->lastFraction = scrollPtr->firstFraction; } else if (last > 1.0) { scrollPtr->lastFraction = 1.0; } else { scrollPtr->lastFraction = last; } #ifndef TK_NO_DEPRECATED scrollPtr->flags &= ~OLD_STYLE_COMMANDS; } else if (objc == 6) { int totalUnits, windowUnits, firstUnit, lastUnit; if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &totalUnits) != TCL_OK) { goto error; } if (totalUnits < 0) { totalUnits = 0; } if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &windowUnits) != TCL_OK) { goto error; } if (windowUnits < 0) { windowUnits = 0; } if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[4], &firstUnit) != TCL_OK) { goto error; } if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[5], &lastUnit) != TCL_OK) { goto error; } if (totalUnits > 0) { if (lastUnit < firstUnit) { lastUnit = firstUnit; } } else { firstUnit = lastUnit = 0; } scrollPtr->totalUnits = totalUnits; scrollPtr->windowUnits = windowUnits; scrollPtr->firstUnit = firstUnit; scrollPtr->lastUnit = lastUnit; if (scrollPtr->totalUnits == 0) { scrollPtr->firstFraction = 0.0; scrollPtr->lastFraction = 1.0; } else { scrollPtr->firstFraction = ((double) firstUnit)/totalUnits; scrollPtr->lastFraction = ((double) (lastUnit+1))/totalUnits; } scrollPtr->flags |= OLD_STYLE_COMMANDS; #endif /* !TK_NO_DEPRECATED */ } else { Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "set firstFraction lastFraction"); goto error; } TkpComputeScrollbarGeometry(scrollPtr); TkScrollbarEventuallyRedraw(scrollPtr); break; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
467 468 469 470 471 472 473 | TkScrollbar *scrollPtr, /* Information about widget; may or may not * already have values for some fields. */ Tcl_Size objc, /* Number of valid entries in argv. */ Tcl_Obj *const objv[], /* Arguments. */ int flags) /* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */ { | < < | < < < < < < < | < | < < < | < | | < < < | < | 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 | TkScrollbar *scrollPtr, /* Information about widget; may or may not * already have values for some fields. */ Tcl_Size objc, /* Number of valid entries in argv. */ Tcl_Obj *const objv[], /* Arguments. */ int flags) /* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */ { if (Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, scrollPtr->tkwin, configSpecs, objc, (const char **)objv, (char *)scrollPtr, flags|TK_CONFIG_OBJS) != TCL_OK) { return TCL_ERROR; } /* * A few options need special processing, such as setting the background * from a 3-D border. */ if (scrollPtr->highlightWidth < 0) { scrollPtr->highlightWidth = 0; } if (scrollPtr->borderWidth < 0) { scrollPtr->borderWidth = 0; } if (scrollPtr->elementBorderWidth < 0) { scrollPtr->elementBorderWidth = -1; } /* * Configure platform specific options. */ TkpConfigureScrollbar(scrollPtr); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
545 546 547 548 549 550 551 | void TkScrollbarEventProc( void *clientData, /* Information about window. */ XEvent *eventPtr) /* Information about event. */ { TkScrollbar *scrollPtr = (TkScrollbar *)clientData; | < | 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 | void TkScrollbarEventProc( void *clientData, /* Information about window. */ XEvent *eventPtr) /* Information about event. */ { TkScrollbar *scrollPtr = (TkScrollbar *)clientData; if ((eventPtr->type == Expose) && (eventPtr->xexpose.count == 0)) { TkScrollbarEventuallyRedraw(scrollPtr); } else if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) { TkpDestroyScrollbar(scrollPtr); if (scrollPtr->tkwin != NULL) { scrollPtr->tkwin = NULL; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
572 573 574 575 576 577 578 | Tcl_EventuallyFree(scrollPtr, TCL_DYNAMIC); } else if (eventPtr->type == ConfigureNotify) { TkpComputeScrollbarGeometry(scrollPtr); TkScrollbarEventuallyRedraw(scrollPtr); } else if (eventPtr->type == FocusIn) { if (eventPtr->xfocus.detail != NotifyInferior) { scrollPtr->flags |= GOT_FOCUS; | < | < | | 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 | Tcl_EventuallyFree(scrollPtr, TCL_DYNAMIC); } else if (eventPtr->type == ConfigureNotify) { TkpComputeScrollbarGeometry(scrollPtr); TkScrollbarEventuallyRedraw(scrollPtr); } else if (eventPtr->type == FocusIn) { if (eventPtr->xfocus.detail != NotifyInferior) { scrollPtr->flags |= GOT_FOCUS; if (scrollPtr->highlightWidth > 0) { TkScrollbarEventuallyRedraw(scrollPtr); } } } else if (eventPtr->type == FocusOut) { if (eventPtr->xfocus.detail != NotifyInferior) { scrollPtr->flags &= ~GOT_FOCUS; if (scrollPtr->highlightWidth > 0) { TkScrollbarEventuallyRedraw(scrollPtr); } } } else if (eventPtr->type == MapNotify) { TkScrollbarEventuallyRedraw(scrollPtr); } } |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkScrollbar.h.
︙ | ︙ | |||
101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 | * field. */ int activeRelief; /* Value of -activeRelief option: relief to * use for active element. */ /* * Information describing the application related to the scrollbar, which * is provided by the application by invoking the "set" widget command. */ #if TK_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 int dummy1, dummy2, dummy3, dummy4; /* deprecated, for "old" form. */ #endif double firstFraction; /* Position of first visible thing in window, * specified as a fraction between 0 and 1.0. */ | > > | 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 | * field. */ int activeRelief; /* Value of -activeRelief option: relief to * use for active element. */ /* * Information describing the application related to the scrollbar, which * is provided by the application by invoking the "set" widget command. * It can be provided in two ways: the "new" form (firstFraction * and lastFraction) or the "old" form. The "old" form is deprecated. */ #if TK_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 int dummy1, dummy2, dummy3, dummy4; /* deprecated, for "old" form. */ #endif double firstFraction; /* Position of first visible thing in window, * specified as a fraction between 0 and 1.0. */ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkSelect.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
1397 1398 1399 1400 1401 1402 1403 | /* * Update the partial character information for the next retrieval if * the command has not been deleted. */ if (cmdInfoPtr->interp != NULL) { if (length <= maxBytes) { | | | | | 1397 1398 1399 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 | /* * Update the partial character information for the next retrieval if * the command has not been deleted. */ if (cmdInfoPtr->interp != NULL) { if (length <= maxBytes) { cmdInfoPtr->charOffset += TkNumUtfChars(string, TCL_INDEX_NONE); cmdInfoPtr->buffer[0] = '\0'; } else { int ch = 0; p = string; string += count; numChars = 0; while (p < string) { p += TkUtfToUniChar(p, &ch); numChars++; } cmdInfoPtr->charOffset += numChars; length = p - string; if (length > 0) { strncpy(cmdInfoPtr->buffer, string, length); } |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkSquare.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | #ifndef USE_TCL_STUBS # define USE_TCL_STUBS #endif #ifndef USE_TK_STUBS # define USE_TK_STUBS #endif #include "tkInt.h" | < | 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 | #ifndef USE_TCL_STUBS # define USE_TCL_STUBS #endif #ifndef USE_TK_STUBS # define USE_TK_STUBS #endif #include "tkInt.h" /* * A data structure of the following type is kept for each square widget * managed by this file: */ typedef struct { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
50 51 52 53 54 55 56 | Tcl_Obj *borderWidthObj; /* Width of 3-D border around whole widget. */ Tcl_Obj *bgBorderPtr; Tcl_Obj *fgBorderPtr; Tcl_Obj *reliefPtr; GC gc; /* Graphics context for copying from * off-screen pixmap onto screen. */ | | | < | | | 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 | Tcl_Obj *borderWidthObj; /* Width of 3-D border around whole widget. */ Tcl_Obj *bgBorderPtr; Tcl_Obj *fgBorderPtr; Tcl_Obj *reliefPtr; GC gc; /* Graphics context for copying from * off-screen pixmap onto screen. */ int doubleBuffer; /* Non-zero means double-buffer redisplay with * pixmap; 0 means draw straight onto the display. */ int updatePending; /* Non-zero means a call to SquareDisplay has * already been scheduled. */ } Square; /* * Information used for argv parsing. */ static const Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = { {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background", "#d9d9d9", offsetof(Square, bgBorderPtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "white", 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-borderwidth", 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-background", 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", "2", offsetof(Square, borderWidthObj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, NULL, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-dbl", "doubleBuffer", "DoubleBuffer", "1", TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(Square, doubleBuffer), 0 , NULL, 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-foreground", 0}, {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground", "#b03060", offsetof(Square, fgBorderPtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "black", 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-posx", "posx", "PosX", "0", offsetof(Square, xPtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, NULL, 0}, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
276 277 278 279 280 281 282 | squarePtr->optionTable, objc - 2, objv + 2, squarePtr->tkwin, NULL, NULL); if (result == TCL_OK) { result = SquareConfigure(interp, squarePtr); } if (!squarePtr->updatePending) { Tcl_DoWhenIdle(SquareDisplay, squarePtr); | | | 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 | squarePtr->optionTable, objc - 2, objv + 2, squarePtr->tkwin, NULL, NULL); if (result == TCL_OK) { result = SquareConfigure(interp, squarePtr); } if (!squarePtr->updatePending) { Tcl_DoWhenIdle(SquareDisplay, squarePtr); squarePtr->updatePending = 1; } } if (resultObjPtr != NULL) { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObjPtr); } } Tcl_Release(squarePtr); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
347 348 349 350 351 352 353 | Tk_GeometryRequest(squarePtr->tkwin, 200, 150); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, squarePtr->tkwin, squarePtr->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth); Tk_SetInternalBorder(squarePtr->tkwin, borderWidth); if (!squarePtr->updatePending) { Tcl_DoWhenIdle(SquareDisplay, squarePtr); | | | 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 | Tk_GeometryRequest(squarePtr->tkwin, 200, 150); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, squarePtr->tkwin, squarePtr->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth); Tk_SetInternalBorder(squarePtr->tkwin, borderWidth); if (!squarePtr->updatePending) { Tcl_DoWhenIdle(SquareDisplay, squarePtr); squarePtr->updatePending = 1; } KeepInWindow(squarePtr); return TCL_OK; } /* *-------------------------------------------------------------- |
︙ | ︙ | |||
381 382 383 384 385 386 387 | XEvent *eventPtr) /* Information about event. */ { Square *squarePtr = (Square *)clientData; if (eventPtr->type == Expose) { if (!squarePtr->updatePending) { Tcl_DoWhenIdle(SquareDisplay, squarePtr); | | | | 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 | XEvent *eventPtr) /* Information about event. */ { Square *squarePtr = (Square *)clientData; if (eventPtr->type == Expose) { if (!squarePtr->updatePending) { Tcl_DoWhenIdle(SquareDisplay, squarePtr); squarePtr->updatePending = 1; } } else if (eventPtr->type == ConfigureNotify) { KeepInWindow(squarePtr); if (!squarePtr->updatePending) { Tcl_DoWhenIdle(SquareDisplay, squarePtr); squarePtr->updatePending = 1; } } else if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) { if (squarePtr->tkwin != NULL) { Tk_FreeConfigOptions(squarePtr, squarePtr->optionTable, squarePtr->tkwin); if (squarePtr->gc != NULL) { Tk_FreeGC(squarePtr->display, squarePtr->gc); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
473 474 475 476 477 478 479 | Square *squarePtr = (Square *)clientData; Tk_Window tkwin = squarePtr->tkwin; Pixmap pm = None; Drawable d; int borderWidth, size, relief; Tk_3DBorder bgBorder, fgBorder; | | | 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 | Square *squarePtr = (Square *)clientData; Tk_Window tkwin = squarePtr->tkwin; Pixmap pm = None; Drawable d; int borderWidth, size, relief; Tk_3DBorder bgBorder, fgBorder; squarePtr->updatePending = 0; if (!Tk_IsMapped(tkwin)) { return; } /* * Create a pixmap for double-buffering, if necessary. */ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkStubInit.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 | MODULE_SCOPE const TkStubs tkStubs; /* * Remove macro that might interfere with the definition below. */ #undef TkPutImage #undef XPutImage | > > > > > > > > > > > | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > < < < < < < | 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 | MODULE_SCOPE const TkStubs tkStubs; /* * Remove macro that might interfere with the definition below. */ #undef Tk_MainEx #undef Tk_FreeXId #undef Tk_FreeStyleFromObj #undef Tk_GetStyleFromObj #undef TkWinGetPlatformId #undef TkPutImage #undef XPutImage #define TkMacOSXSetUpClippingRgn (void (*)(Drawable))(void *)doNothing #undef TkMacOSXIsCharacterMissing #define TkMacOSXIsCharacterMissing (int (*)(Tk_Font, unsigned int))(void *)doNothing #undef TkMacOSXSetDrawingEnabled #define TkMacOSXSetDrawingEnabled (void (*)(TkWindow *, int))(void *)doNothing #define TkUnusedStubEntry 0 #if defined(_WIN32) && !defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) && TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 # define Tk_TranslateWinEvent TkTranslateWinEvent # define Tk_PointerEvent TkWinPointerEvent #define TkWinGetPlatformId winGetPlatformId static int TkWinGetPlatformId(void) { return 2; } #else # define Tk_TranslateWinEvent 0 # define Tk_PointerEvent 0 # define TkWinGetPlatformId 0 #endif #if defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) || (TCL_MAJOR_VERSION > 8) # define TkSetWindowMenuBar 0 # define TkpDrawHighlightBorder 0 # define TkpUseWindow 0 # define TkpSetMainMenubar 0 # define TkpGetOtherWindow 0 # define TkpGetSystemDefault 0 # define TkpMakeContainer 0 # define TkpMakeWindow 0 #endif static int doNothing(void) { /* dummy implementation, no need to do anything */ return 0; } #if defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) || TCL_MAJOR_VERSION > 8 #define Tk_MainEx 0 #define Tk_FreeXId 0 #define Tk_FreeStyleFromObj 0 #define Tk_GetStyleFromObj 0 #define TkWinGetPlatformId 0 #define Tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite 0 #define Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite 0 #define Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic 0 #define Tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic 0 #define Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic 0 #define Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic 0 #define Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat 0 #else #define Tk_FreeXId ((void (*)(Display *, XID))(void *)doNothing) #define Tk_FreeStyleFromObj ((void (*)(Tcl_Obj *))(void *)doNothing) #define Tk_GetStyleFromObj getStyleFromObj static Tk_Style Tk_GetStyleFromObj(Tcl_Obj *obj) { return Tk_AllocStyleFromObj(NULL, obj); } #endif /* !TK_NO_DEPRECATED */ #define TkpCmapStressed_ TkpCmapStressed #define TkpSync_ TkpSync #define TkUnixContainerId_ TkUnixContainerId #define TkUnixDoOneXEvent_ TkUnixDoOneXEvent #define TkUnixSetMenubar_ TkUnixSetMenubar #define TkWmCleanup_ TkWmCleanup #define TkSendCleanup_ TkSendCleanup #define TkpTestsendCmd_ TkpTestsendCmd #define TkGenWMConfigureEvent_ TkGenWMConfigureEvent #define TkGenerateActivateEvents_ TkGenerateActivateEvents #define TkMacOSXDrawable Tk_MacOSXGetNSWindowForDrawable #if !defined(MAC_OSX_TK) # undef TkpWillDrawWidget # undef TkpRedrawWidget # define TkpWillDrawWidget ((int (*)(Tk_Window))(void *)doNothing) # define TkpRedrawWidget ((void (*)(Tk_Window))(void *)doNothing) #endif #ifdef _WIN32 int TkpCmapStressed(Tk_Window tkwin, Colormap colormap) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
292 293 294 295 296 297 298 | TkOvalToArea, /* 53 */ TkOvalToPoint, /* 54 */ TkpChangeFocus, /* 55 */ TkpCloseDisplay, /* 56 */ TkpClaimFocus, /* 57 */ TkpDisplayWarning, /* 58 */ TkpGetAppName, /* 59 */ | | | | | | | | 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 | TkOvalToArea, /* 53 */ TkOvalToPoint, /* 54 */ TkpChangeFocus, /* 55 */ TkpCloseDisplay, /* 56 */ TkpClaimFocus, /* 57 */ TkpDisplayWarning, /* 58 */ TkpGetAppName, /* 59 */ TkpGetOtherWindow, /* 60 */ TkpGetWrapperWindow, /* 61 */ TkpInit, /* 62 */ TkpInitializeMenuBindings, /* 63 */ TkpMakeContainer, /* 64 */ TkpMakeMenuWindow, /* 65 */ TkpMakeWindow, /* 66 */ TkpMenuNotifyToplevelCreate, /* 67 */ TkpOpenDisplay, /* 68 */ TkPointerEvent, /* 69 */ TkPolygonToArea, /* 70 */ TkPolygonToPoint, /* 71 */ TkPositionInTree, /* 72 */ TkpRedirectKeyEvent, /* 73 */ TkpSetMainMenubar, /* 74 */ TkpUseWindow, /* 75 */ 0, /* 76 */ TkQueueEventForAllChildren, /* 77 */ TkReadBitmapFile, /* 78 */ TkScrollWindow, /* 79 */ TkSelDeadWindow, /* 80 */ TkSelEventProc, /* 81 */ TkSelInit, /* 82 */ TkSelPropProc, /* 83 */ 0, /* 84 */ TkSetWindowMenuBar, /* 85 */ TkStringToKeysym, /* 86 */ TkThickPolyLineToArea, /* 87 */ TkWmAddToColormapWindows, /* 88 */ TkWmDeadWindow, /* 89 */ TkWmFocusToplevel, /* 90 */ TkWmMapWindow, /* 91 */ TkWmNewWindow, /* 92 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
343 344 345 346 347 348 349 | TkFindStateNumObj, /* 104 */ TkGetBitmapPredefTable, /* 105 */ TkGetDisplayList, /* 106 */ TkGetMainInfoList, /* 107 */ TkGetWindowFromObj, /* 108 */ TkpGetString, /* 109 */ TkpGetSubFonts, /* 110 */ | | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | | 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 | TkFindStateNumObj, /* 104 */ TkGetBitmapPredefTable, /* 105 */ TkGetDisplayList, /* 106 */ TkGetMainInfoList, /* 107 */ TkGetWindowFromObj, /* 108 */ TkpGetString, /* 109 */ TkpGetSubFonts, /* 110 */ TkpGetSystemDefault, /* 111 */ TkpMenuThreadInit, /* 112 */ XClipBox, /* 113 */ XCreateRegion, /* 114 */ XDestroyRegion, /* 115 */ XIntersectRegion, /* 116 */ XRectInRegion, /* 117 */ XSetRegion, /* 118 */ XUnionRectWithRegion, /* 119 */ 0, /* 120 */ #if !(defined(_WIN32) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)) /* X11 */ 0, /* 121 */ #endif /* X11 */ #if defined(_WIN32) /* WIN */ 0, /* 121 */ #endif /* WIN */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ # if TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 0, /* 121 */ /* Dummy entry for stubs table backwards compatibility */ # endif /* TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 */ TkpCreateNativeBitmap, /* 121 */ #endif /* AQUA */ #if !(defined(_WIN32) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)) /* X11 */ 0, /* 122 */ #endif /* X11 */ #if defined(_WIN32) /* WIN */ 0, /* 122 */ #endif /* WIN */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ # if TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 0, /* 122 */ /* Dummy entry for stubs table backwards compatibility */ # endif /* TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 */ TkpDefineNativeBitmaps, /* 122 */ #endif /* AQUA */ 0, /* 123 */ #if !(defined(_WIN32) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)) /* X11 */ 0, /* 124 */ #endif /* X11 */ #if defined(_WIN32) /* WIN */ 0, /* 124 */ #endif /* WIN */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ # if TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 0, /* 124 */ /* Dummy entry for stubs table backwards compatibility */ # endif /* TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 */ TkpGetNativeAppBitmap, /* 124 */ #endif /* AQUA */ 0, /* 125 */ 0, /* 126 */ 0, /* 127 */ 0, /* 128 */ 0, /* 129 */ 0, /* 130 */ 0, /* 131 */ 0, /* 132 */ 0, /* 133 */ 0, /* 134 */ TkpDrawHighlightBorder, /* 135 */ TkSetFocusWin, /* 136 */ TkpSetKeycodeAndState, /* 137 */ TkpGetKeySym, /* 138 */ TkpInitKeymapInfo, /* 139 */ TkPhotoGetValidRegion, /* 140 */ TkWmStackorderToplevel, /* 141 */ TkFocusFree, /* 142 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
426 427 428 429 430 431 432 | TkDebugPhotoStringMatchDef, /* 187 */ }; static const TkIntPlatStubs tkIntPlatStubs = { TCL_STUB_MAGIC, 0, #if defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__) /* WIN */ | | | 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 | TkDebugPhotoStringMatchDef, /* 187 */ }; static const TkIntPlatStubs tkIntPlatStubs = { TCL_STUB_MAGIC, 0, #if defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__) /* WIN */ TkAlignImageData, /* 0 */ 0, /* 1 */ TkGenerateActivateEvents, /* 2 */ TkpGetMS, /* 3 */ TkPointerDeadWindow, /* 4 */ TkpPrintWindowId, /* 5 */ TkpScanWindowId, /* 6 */ TkpSetCapture, /* 7 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
459 460 461 462 463 464 465 | TkWinSetWindowPos, /* 26 */ TkWinWmCleanup, /* 27 */ TkWinXCleanup, /* 28 */ TkWinXInit, /* 29 */ TkWinSetForegroundWindow, /* 30 */ TkWinDialogDebug, /* 31 */ TkWinGetMenuSystemDefault, /* 32 */ | | | | | | < | > < | > | | | | 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 | TkWinSetWindowPos, /* 26 */ TkWinWmCleanup, /* 27 */ TkWinXCleanup, /* 28 */ TkWinXInit, /* 29 */ TkWinSetForegroundWindow, /* 30 */ TkWinDialogDebug, /* 31 */ TkWinGetMenuSystemDefault, /* 32 */ TkWinGetPlatformId, /* 33 */ TkWinSetHINSTANCE, /* 34 */ TkWinGetPlatformTheme, /* 35 */ TkWinChildProc, /* 36 */ TkCreateXEventSource, /* 37 */ TkpCmapStressed, /* 38 */ TkpSync, /* 39 */ TkUnixContainerId, /* 40 */ TkUnixDoOneXEvent, /* 41 */ TkUnixSetMenubar, /* 42 */ TkWmCleanup, /* 43 */ TkSendCleanup, /* 44 */ TkpTestsendCmd, /* 45 */ 0, /* 46 */ TkpGetCapture, /* 47 */ #endif /* WIN */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ TkGenerateActivateEvents, /* 0 */ 0, /* 1 */ TkGenerateActivateEvents_, /* 2 */ TkPointerDeadWindow, /* 3 */ TkpSetCapture, /* 4 */ TkpSetCursor, /* 5 */ TkpWmSetState, /* 6 */ TkAboutDlg, /* 7 */ TkMacOSXButtonKeyState, /* 8 */ TkMacOSXClearMenubarActive, /* 9 */ TkMacOSXDispatchMenuEvent, /* 10 */ 0, /* 11 */ TkMacOSXHandleTearoffMenu, /* 12 */ 0, /* 13 */ TkMacOSXDoHLEvent, /* 14 */ 0, /* 15 */ TkMacOSXGetXWindow, /* 16 */ TkMacOSXGrowToplevel, /* 17 */ TkMacOSXHandleMenuSelect, /* 18 */ 0, /* 19 */ 0, /* 20 */ TkMacOSXInvalidateWindow, /* 21 */ TkMacOSXIsCharacterMissing, /* 22 */ TkMacOSXMakeRealWindowExist, /* 23 */ TkMacOSXMakeStippleMap, /* 24 */ TkMacOSXMenuClick, /* 25 */ 0, /* 26 */ TkMacOSXResizable, /* 27 */ TkMacOSXSetHelpMenuItemCount, /* 28 */ TkMacOSXSetScrollbarGrow, /* 29 */ TkMacOSXSetUpClippingRgn, /* 30 */ TkMacOSXSetUpGraphicsPort, /* 31 */ TkMacOSXUpdateClipRgn, /* 32 */ 0, /* 33 */ TkMacOSXUseMenuID, /* 34 */ TkMacOSXVisableClipRgn, /* 35 */ TkMacOSXWinBounds, /* 36 */ TkMacOSXWindowOffset, /* 37 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 | TkMacOSXPreprocessMenu, /* 45 */ TkpIsWindowFloating, /* 46 */ TkpGetCapture, /* 47 */ 0, /* 48 */ TkMacOSXGetContainer, /* 49 */ TkGenerateButtonEvent, /* 50 */ TkGenWMDestroyEvent, /* 51 */ #endif /* AQUA */ #if !(defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)) /* X11 */ TkCreateXEventSource, /* 0 */ 0, /* 1 */ TkGenerateActivateEvents, /* 2 */ | > > > > | | | | | | | | | | | 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 | TkMacOSXPreprocessMenu, /* 45 */ TkpIsWindowFloating, /* 46 */ TkpGetCapture, /* 47 */ 0, /* 48 */ TkMacOSXGetContainer, /* 49 */ TkGenerateButtonEvent, /* 50 */ TkGenWMDestroyEvent, /* 51 */ TkMacOSXSetDrawingEnabled, /* 52 */ TkpGetMS, /* 53 */ TkMacOSXDrawable, /* 54 */ TkpScanWindowId, /* 55 */ #endif /* AQUA */ #if !(defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)) /* X11 */ TkCreateXEventSource, /* 0 */ 0, /* 1 */ TkGenerateActivateEvents, /* 2 */ TkpCmapStressed, /* 3 */ TkpSync, /* 4 */ TkUnixContainerId, /* 5 */ TkUnixDoOneXEvent, /* 6 */ TkUnixSetMenubar, /* 7 */ TkpScanWindowId, /* 8 */ TkWmCleanup, /* 9 */ TkSendCleanup, /* 10 */ 0, /* 11 */ TkpWmSetState, /* 12 */ TkpTestsendCmd_, /* 13 */ 0, /* 14 */ 0, /* 15 */ 0, /* 16 */ 0, /* 17 */ 0, /* 18 */ 0, /* 19 */ 0, /* 20 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
568 569 570 571 572 573 574 | 0, /* 31 */ 0, /* 32 */ 0, /* 33 */ 0, /* 34 */ 0, /* 35 */ 0, /* 36 */ 0, /* 37 */ | | | | | | | | | 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 | 0, /* 31 */ 0, /* 32 */ 0, /* 33 */ 0, /* 34 */ 0, /* 35 */ 0, /* 36 */ 0, /* 37 */ TkpCmapStressed_, /* 38 */ TkpSync_, /* 39 */ TkUnixContainerId_, /* 40 */ TkUnixDoOneXEvent_, /* 41 */ TkUnixSetMenubar_, /* 42 */ TkWmCleanup_, /* 43 */ TkSendCleanup_, /* 44 */ TkpTestsendCmd, /* 45 */ #endif /* X11 */ }; static const TkIntXlibStubs tkIntXlibStubs = { TCL_STUB_MAGIC, 0, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
751 752 753 754 755 756 757 | XSetDashes, /* 0 */ XGetModifierMapping, /* 1 */ XCreateImage, /* 2 */ XGetImage, /* 3 */ XGetAtomName, /* 4 */ XKeysymToString, /* 5 */ XCreateColormap, /* 6 */ | < < | < | | | | < < < | | | | < | | | | | < | | | | | | | < | | < | | < | < | | | < | | | > > > > > | > > > > > > > > | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 | XSetDashes, /* 0 */ XGetModifierMapping, /* 1 */ XCreateImage, /* 2 */ XGetImage, /* 3 */ XGetAtomName, /* 4 */ XKeysymToString, /* 5 */ XCreateColormap, /* 6 */ XGContextFromGC, /* 7 */ XKeycodeToKeysym, /* 8 */ XStringToKeysym, /* 9 */ XRootWindow, /* 10 */ XSetErrorHandler, /* 11 */ XAllocColor, /* 12 */ XBell, /* 13 */ XChangeProperty, /* 14 */ XChangeWindowAttributes, /* 15 */ XConfigureWindow, /* 16 */ XCopyArea, /* 17 */ XCopyPlane, /* 18 */ XCreateBitmapFromData, /* 19 */ XDefineCursor, /* 20 */ XDestroyWindow, /* 21 */ XDrawArc, /* 22 */ XDrawLines, /* 23 */ XDrawRectangle, /* 24 */ XFillArc, /* 25 */ XFillPolygon, /* 26 */ XFillRectangles, /* 27 */ XFreeColormap, /* 28 */ XFreeColors, /* 29 */ XFreeModifiermap, /* 30 */ XGetGeometry, /* 31 */ XGetWindowProperty, /* 32 */ XGrabKeyboard, /* 33 */ XGrabPointer, /* 34 */ XKeysymToKeycode, /* 35 */ XMapWindow, /* 36 */ XMoveResizeWindow, /* 37 */ XMoveWindow, /* 38 */ XQueryPointer, /* 39 */ XRaiseWindow, /* 40 */ XRefreshKeyboardMapping, /* 41 */ XResizeWindow, /* 42 */ XSelectInput, /* 43 */ XSendEvent, /* 44 */ XSetIconName, /* 45 */ XSetInputFocus, /* 46 */ XSetSelectionOwner, /* 47 */ XSetWindowBackground, /* 48 */ XSetWindowBackgroundPixmap, /* 49 */ XSetWindowBorder, /* 50 */ XSetWindowBorderPixmap, /* 51 */ XSetWindowBorderWidth, /* 52 */ XSetWindowColormap, /* 53 */ XUngrabKeyboard, /* 54 */ XUngrabPointer, /* 55 */ XUnmapWindow, /* 56 */ TkPutImage, /* 57 */ XParseColor, /* 58 */ XCreateGC, /* 59 */ XFreeGC, /* 60 */ XInternAtom, /* 61 */ XSetBackground, /* 62 */ XSetForeground, /* 63 */ XSetClipMask, /* 64 */ XSetClipOrigin, /* 65 */ XSetTSOrigin, /* 66 */ XChangeGC, /* 67 */ XSetFont, /* 68 */ XSetArcMode, /* 69 */ XSetStipple, /* 70 */ XSetFillRule, /* 71 */ XSetFillStyle, /* 72 */ XSetFunction, /* 73 */ XSetLineAttributes, /* 74 */ _XInitImageFuncPtrs, /* 75 */ XCreateIC, /* 76 */ XGetVisualInfo, /* 77 */ XSetWMClientMachine, /* 78 */ XStringListToTextProperty, /* 79 */ XDrawSegments, /* 80 */ XForceScreenSaver, /* 81 */ XDrawLine, /* 82 */ XFillRectangle, /* 83 */ XClearWindow, /* 84 */ XDrawPoint, /* 85 */ XDrawPoints, /* 86 */ XWarpPointer, /* 87 */ XQueryColor, /* 88 */ XQueryColors, /* 89 */ XQueryTree, /* 90 */ XSync, /* 91 */ XTranslateCoordinates, /* 92 */ XDeleteProperty, /* 93 */ XFreeCursor, /* 94 */ XGetInputFocus, /* 95 */ XmbLookupString, /* 96 */ XNextEvent, /* 97 */ XPutBackEvent, /* 98 */ XSetCommand, /* 99 */ XWindowEvent, /* 100 */ XGetWindowAttributes, /* 101 */ XGetWMColormapWindows, /* 102 */ XIconifyWindow, /* 103 */ XWithdrawWindow, /* 104 */ XListHosts, /* 105 */ XSetClipRectangles, /* 106 */ XFlush, /* 107 */ XGrabServer, /* 108 */ XUngrabServer, /* 109 */ XFree, /* 110 */ XNoOp, /* 111 */ XSynchronize, /* 112 */ XLookupColor, /* 113 */ XVisualIDFromVisual, /* 114 */ 0, /* 115 */ 0, /* 116 */ 0, /* 117 */ 0, /* 118 */ 0, /* 119 */ XOffsetRegion, /* 120 */ XUnionRegion, /* 121 */ XCreateWindow, /* 122 */ 0, /* 123 */ 0, /* 124 */ 0, /* 125 */ 0, /* 126 */ 0, /* 127 */ 0, /* 128 */ XLowerWindow, /* 129 */ XFillArcs, /* 130 */ XDrawArcs, /* 131 */ XDrawRectangles, /* 132 */ 0, /* 133 */ 0, /* 134 */ 0, /* 135 */ XReparentWindow, /* 136 */ XPutImage, /* 137 */ XPolygonRegion, /* 138 */ XPointInRegion, /* 139 */ XVaCreateNestedList, /* 140 */ XSetICValues, /* 141 */ XGetICValues, /* 142 */ XSetICFocus, /* 143 */ XDestroyIC, /* 144 */ XCreatePixmapCursor, /* 145 */ XCreateGlyphCursor, /* 146 */ XFreeFontSet, /* 147 */ XCloseIM, /* 148 */ XRegisterIMInstantiateCallback, /* 149 */ XUnregisterIMInstantiateCallback, /* 150 */ XSetLocaleModifiers, /* 151 */ XOpenIM, /* 152 */ XGetIMValues, /* 153 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 | TCL_STUB_MAGIC, 0, #if defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__) /* WIN */ Tk_AttachHWND, /* 0 */ Tk_GetHINSTANCE, /* 1 */ Tk_GetHWND, /* 2 */ Tk_HWNDToWindow, /* 3 */ #endif /* WIN */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ 0, /* 0 */ 0, /* 1 */ 0, /* 2 */ 0, /* 3 */ TkMacOSXInitAppleEvents, /* 4 */ | > > | | 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 | TCL_STUB_MAGIC, 0, #if defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__) /* WIN */ Tk_AttachHWND, /* 0 */ Tk_GetHINSTANCE, /* 1 */ Tk_GetHWND, /* 2 */ Tk_HWNDToWindow, /* 3 */ Tk_PointerEvent, /* 4 */ Tk_TranslateWinEvent, /* 5 */ #endif /* WIN */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ 0, /* 0 */ 0, /* 1 */ 0, /* 2 */ 0, /* 3 */ TkMacOSXInitAppleEvents, /* 4 */ TkGenWMConfigureEvent_, /* 5 */ TkMacOSXInvalClipRgns, /* 6 */ 0, /* 7 */ TkMacOSXGetRootControl, /* 8 */ Tk_MacOSXSetupTkNotifier, /* 9 */ Tk_MacOSXIsAppInFront, /* 10 */ Tk_MacOSXGetTkWindow, /* 11 */ Tk_MacOSXGetCGContextForDrawable, /* 12 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 | Tk_FreeCursor, /* 70 */ Tk_FreeFont, /* 71 */ Tk_FreeGC, /* 72 */ Tk_FreeImage, /* 73 */ Tk_FreeOptions, /* 74 */ Tk_FreePixmap, /* 75 */ Tk_FreeTextLayout, /* 76 */ | | | 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 | Tk_FreeCursor, /* 70 */ Tk_FreeFont, /* 71 */ Tk_FreeGC, /* 72 */ Tk_FreeImage, /* 73 */ Tk_FreeOptions, /* 74 */ Tk_FreePixmap, /* 75 */ Tk_FreeTextLayout, /* 76 */ Tk_FreeXId, /* 77 */ Tk_GCForColor, /* 78 */ Tk_GeometryRequest, /* 79 */ Tk_Get3DBorder, /* 80 */ Tk_GetAllBindings, /* 81 */ Tk_GetAnchor, /* 82 */ Tk_GetAtomName, /* 83 */ Tk_GetBinding, /* 84 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 | Tk_GetUid, /* 111 */ Tk_GetVisual, /* 112 */ Tk_GetVRootGeometry, /* 113 */ Tk_Grab, /* 114 */ Tk_HandleEvent, /* 115 */ Tk_IdToWindow, /* 116 */ Tk_ImageChanged, /* 117 */ | | | 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 | Tk_GetUid, /* 111 */ Tk_GetVisual, /* 112 */ Tk_GetVRootGeometry, /* 113 */ Tk_Grab, /* 114 */ Tk_HandleEvent, /* 115 */ Tk_IdToWindow, /* 116 */ Tk_ImageChanged, /* 117 */ Tk_Init, /* 118 */ Tk_InternAtom, /* 119 */ Tk_IntersectTextLayout, /* 120 */ Tk_MaintainGeometry, /* 121 */ Tk_MainWindow, /* 122 */ Tk_MakeWindowExist, /* 123 */ Tk_ManageGeometry, /* 124 */ Tk_MapWindow, /* 125 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 | Tk_NameOfImage, /* 137 */ Tk_NameOfJoinStyle, /* 138 */ Tk_NameOfJustify, /* 139 */ Tk_NameOfRelief, /* 140 */ Tk_NameToWindow, /* 141 */ Tk_OwnSelection, /* 142 */ Tk_ParseArgv, /* 143 */ | | | | | | | 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 | Tk_NameOfImage, /* 137 */ Tk_NameOfJoinStyle, /* 138 */ Tk_NameOfJustify, /* 139 */ Tk_NameOfRelief, /* 140 */ Tk_NameToWindow, /* 141 */ Tk_OwnSelection, /* 142 */ Tk_ParseArgv, /* 143 */ Tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite, /* 144 */ Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite, /* 145 */ Tk_PhotoGetImage, /* 146 */ Tk_PhotoBlank, /* 147 */ Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic, /* 148 */ Tk_PhotoGetSize, /* 149 */ Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic, /* 150 */ Tk_PointToChar, /* 151 */ Tk_PostscriptFontName, /* 152 */ Tk_PreserveColormap, /* 153 */ Tk_QueueWindowEvent, /* 154 */ Tk_RedrawImage, /* 155 */ Tk_ResizeWindow, /* 156 */ Tk_RestackWindow, /* 157 */ Tk_RestrictEvents, /* 158 */ Tk_SafeInit, /* 159 */ Tk_SetAppName, /* 160 */ Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder, /* 161 */ Tk_SetClass, /* 162 */ Tk_SetGrid, /* 163 */ Tk_SetInternalBorder, /* 164 */ Tk_SetWindowBackground, /* 165 */ Tk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap, /* 166 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 | Tk_GetOptionValue, /* 205 */ Tk_GetJustifyFromObj, /* 206 */ Tk_GetMMFromObj, /* 207 */ Tk_GetPixelsFromObj, /* 208 */ Tk_GetReliefFromObj, /* 209 */ Tk_GetScrollInfoObj, /* 210 */ Tk_InitOptions, /* 211 */ | | | | 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 | Tk_GetOptionValue, /* 205 */ Tk_GetJustifyFromObj, /* 206 */ Tk_GetMMFromObj, /* 207 */ Tk_GetPixelsFromObj, /* 208 */ Tk_GetReliefFromObj, /* 209 */ Tk_GetScrollInfoObj, /* 210 */ Tk_InitOptions, /* 211 */ Tk_MainEx, /* 212 */ Tk_RestoreSavedOptions, /* 213 */ Tk_SetOptions, /* 214 */ Tk_InitConsoleChannels, /* 215 */ Tk_CreateConsoleWindow, /* 216 */ Tk_CreateSmoothMethod, /* 217 */ 0, /* 218 */ 0, /* 219 */ Tk_GetDash, /* 220 */ Tk_CreateOutline, /* 221 */ Tk_DeleteOutline, /* 222 */ Tk_ConfigOutlineGC, /* 223 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 | Tk_CreateClientMessageHandler, /* 239 */ Tk_DeleteClientMessageHandler, /* 240 */ Tk_CreateAnonymousWindow, /* 241 */ Tk_SetClassProcs, /* 242 */ Tk_SetInternalBorderEx, /* 243 */ Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize, /* 244 */ Tk_SetCaretPos, /* 245 */ | | | | | | | > > > > | 1297 1298 1299 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 | Tk_CreateClientMessageHandler, /* 239 */ Tk_DeleteClientMessageHandler, /* 240 */ Tk_CreateAnonymousWindow, /* 241 */ Tk_SetClassProcs, /* 242 */ Tk_SetInternalBorderEx, /* 243 */ Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize, /* 244 */ Tk_SetCaretPos, /* 245 */ Tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic, /* 246 */ Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic, /* 247 */ Tk_CollapseMotionEvents, /* 248 */ Tk_RegisterStyleEngine, /* 249 */ Tk_GetStyleEngine, /* 250 */ Tk_RegisterStyledElement, /* 251 */ Tk_GetElementId, /* 252 */ Tk_CreateStyle, /* 253 */ Tk_GetStyle, /* 254 */ Tk_FreeStyle, /* 255 */ Tk_NameOfStyle, /* 256 */ Tk_AllocStyleFromObj, /* 257 */ Tk_GetStyleFromObj, /* 258 */ Tk_FreeStyleFromObj, /* 259 */ Tk_GetStyledElement, /* 260 */ Tk_GetElementSize, /* 261 */ Tk_GetElementBox, /* 262 */ Tk_GetElementBorderWidth, /* 263 */ Tk_DrawElement, /* 264 */ Tk_PhotoExpand, /* 265 */ Tk_PhotoPutBlock, /* 266 */ Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock, /* 267 */ Tk_PhotoSetSize, /* 268 */ Tk_GetUserInactiveTime, /* 269 */ Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime, /* 270 */ Tk_Interp, /* 271 */ Tk_CreateOldImageType, /* 272 */ Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat, /* 273 */ Tk_AlwaysShowSelection, /* 274 */ Tk_GetButtonMask, /* 275 */ Tk_GetDoublePixelsFromObj, /* 276 */ Tk_NewWindowObj, /* 277 */ Tk_SendVirtualEvent, /* 278 */ Tk_FontGetDescription, /* 279 */ Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormatVersion3, /* 280 */ Tk_DrawHighlightBorder, /* 281 */ Tk_SetMainMenubar, /* 282 */ Tk_SetWindowMenubar, /* 283 */ Tk_ClipDrawableToRect, /* 284 */ Tk_GetSystemDefault, /* 285 */ Tk_UseWindow, /* 286 */ Tk_MakeContainer, /* 287 */ Tk_GetOtherWindow, /* 288 */ Tk_Get3DBorderColors, /* 289 */ Tk_MakeWindow, /* 290 */ Tk_UnderlineCharsInContext, /* 291 */ Tk_DrawCharsInContext, /* 292 */ Tk_MeasureCharsInContext, /* 293 */ TkUnusedStubEntry, /* 294 */ }; /* !END!: Do not edit above this line. */ #ifdef __CYGWIN__ void *Tk_GetHINSTANCE(void) |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkTest.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
204 205 206 207 208 209 210 | int Tktest_Init( Tcl_Interp *interp) /* Interpreter for application. */ { static int initialized = 0; | | | 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 | int Tktest_Init( Tcl_Interp *interp) /* Interpreter for application. */ { static int initialized = 0; if (Tcl_InitStubs(interp, "8.6-", 0) == NULL) { return TCL_ERROR; } if (Tk_InitStubs(interp, TK_VERSION, 0) == NULL) { return TCL_ERROR; } /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 | * Create test image type. */ if (!initialized) { initialized = 1; Tk_CreateImageType(&imageType); } /* * And finally add any platform specific test commands. */ return TkplatformtestInit(interp); } | > > > > > > > > | 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 | * Create test image type. */ if (!initialized) { initialized = 1; Tk_CreateImageType(&imageType); } /* * Enable testing of legacy interfaces. */ if (TkOldTestInit(interp) != TCL_OK) { return TCL_ERROR; } /* * And finally add any platform specific test commands. */ return TkplatformtestInit(interp); } |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkText.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 | #define DInfo TkDInfo #endif #ifdef _WIN32 #include "tkWinInt.h" #endif #include "tkText.h" /* * Used to avoid having to allocate and deallocate arrays on the fly for * commonly used functions. Must be > 0. */ | > > > > > > > > > > | 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 | #define DInfo TkDInfo #endif #ifdef _WIN32 #include "tkWinInt.h" #endif /* * For compatibility with Tk 4.0 through 8.4.x, we allow tabs to be * mis-specified with non-increasing values. These are converted into tabs * which are the equivalent of at least a character width apart. */ #if (TK_MAJOR_VERSION < 9) #define _TK_ALLOW_DECREASING_TABS #endif #include "tkText.h" /* * Used to avoid having to allocate and deallocate arrays on the fly for * commonly used functions. Must be > 0. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
116 117 118 119 120 121 122 | TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-background", 0}, {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-blockcursor", "blockCursor", "BlockCursor", DEF_TEXT_BLOCK_CURSOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkText, insertCursorType), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 | TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-background", 0}, {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-blockcursor", "blockCursor", "BlockCursor", DEF_TEXT_BLOCK_CURSOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkText, insertCursorType), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", DEF_TEXT_BORDER_WIDTH, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkText, borderWidth), 0, 0, TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY}, {TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor", DEF_TEXT_CURSOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkText, cursor), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-endline", NULL, NULL, NULL, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkText, end), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &lineOption, TK_TEXT_LINE_RANGE}, {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-exportselection", "exportSelection", "ExportSelection", DEF_TEXT_EXPORT_SELECTION, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkText, exportSelection), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", NULL, NULL, 0, TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, "-foreground", 0}, {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font", DEF_TEXT_FONT, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkText, tkfont), 0, 0, TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground", DEF_TEXT_FG, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkText, fgColor), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-height", "height", "Height", DEF_TEXT_HEIGHT, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkText, height), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground", "HighlightBackground", DEF_TEXT_HIGHLIGHT_BG, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkText, highlightBgColorPtr), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor", DEF_TEXT_HIGHLIGHT, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkText, highlightColorPtr), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness", "HighlightThickness", DEF_TEXT_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkText, highlightWidth), 0, 0, TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY}, {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-inactiveselectbackground","inactiveSelectBackground", "Foreground", DEF_TEXT_INACTIVE_SELECT_BG_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkText, inactiveSelBorder), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, DEF_TEXT_SELECT_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-insertbackground", "insertBackground", "Foreground", DEF_TEXT_INSERT_BG, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkText, insertBorder), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-insertborderwidth", "insertBorderWidth", "BorderWidth", DEF_TEXT_INSERT_BD_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkText, insertBorderWidth), 0, DEF_TEXT_INSERT_BD_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_INT, "-insertofftime", "insertOffTime", "OffTime", DEF_TEXT_INSERT_OFF_TIME, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkText, insertOffTime), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_INT, "-insertontime", "insertOnTime", "OnTime", DEF_TEXT_INSERT_ON_TIME, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkText, insertOnTime), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-insertunfocussed", "insertUnfocussed", "InsertUnfocussed", DEF_TEXT_INSERT_UNFOCUSSED, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkText, insertUnfocussed), TK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR, insertUnfocussedStrings, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-insertwidth", "insertWidth", "InsertWidth", DEF_TEXT_INSERT_WIDTH, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkText, insertWidth), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_INT, "-maxundo", "maxUndo", "MaxUndo", DEF_TEXT_MAX_UNDO, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkText, maxUndo), TK_OPTION_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", "padX", "Pad", DEF_TEXT_PADX, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkText, padX), 0, 0, TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", "padY", "Pad", DEF_TEXT_PADY, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkText, padY), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief", DEF_TEXT_RELIEF, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkText, relief), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-selectbackground", "selectBackground", "Foreground", DEF_TEXT_SELECT_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkText, selBorder), 0, DEF_TEXT_SELECT_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-selectborderwidth", "selectBorderWidth", "BorderWidth", DEF_TEXT_SELECT_BD_COLOR, offsetof(TkText, selBorderWidthObj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, DEF_TEXT_SELECT_BD_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-selectforeground", "selectForeground", "Background", DEF_TEXT_SELECT_FG_COLOR, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkText, selFgColorPtr), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, DEF_TEXT_SELECT_FG_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-setgrid", "setGrid", "SetGrid", DEF_TEXT_SET_GRID, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkText, setGrid), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-spacing1", "spacing1", "Spacing", DEF_TEXT_SPACING1, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkText, spacing1), 0, 0, TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY }, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-spacing2", "spacing2", "Spacing", DEF_TEXT_SPACING2, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkText, spacing2), 0, 0, TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY }, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-spacing3", "spacing3", "Spacing", DEF_TEXT_SPACING3, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkText, spacing3), 0, 0, TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY }, {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-startline", NULL, NULL, NULL, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkText, start), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &lineOption, TK_TEXT_LINE_RANGE}, {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-state", "state", "State", DEF_TEXT_STATE, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkText, state), TK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR, &tkStateStrings[1], 0}, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1442 1443 1444 1445 1446 1447 1448 | */ int deleteInsertOffset, insertLength, indexFromLine, indexFromByteOffset; Tcl_Size j; insertLength = 0; for (j = 4; j < objc; j += 2) { | | | 1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 1457 1458 1459 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 1465 1466 | */ int deleteInsertOffset, insertLength, indexFromLine, indexFromByteOffset; Tcl_Size j; insertLength = 0; for (j = 4; j < objc; j += 2) { insertLength += TkGetCharLength(objv[j]); } /* * Calculate 'deleteInsertOffset' as an offset we will apply * to the insertion point after this operation. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2059 2060 2061 2062 2063 2064 2065 | * already have values for some fields. */ Tcl_Size objc, /* Number of arguments. */ Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */ { Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions; int oldExport = (textPtr->exportSelection) && (!Tcl_IsSafe(textPtr->interp)); int mask = 0; | < < | 2069 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 2079 2080 2081 2082 | * already have values for some fields. */ Tcl_Size objc, /* Number of arguments. */ Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */ { Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions; int oldExport = (textPtr->exportSelection) && (!Tcl_IsSafe(textPtr->interp)); int mask = 0; if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) textPtr, textPtr->optionTable, objc, objv, textPtr->tkwin, &savedOptions, &mask) != TCL_OK) { return TCL_ERROR; } /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2200 2201 2202 2203 2204 2205 2206 | } } /* * Don't allow negative spacings. */ | < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | | 2208 2209 2210 2211 2212 2213 2214 2215 2216 2217 2218 2219 2220 2221 2222 2223 2224 2225 2226 2227 2228 2229 2230 2231 2232 2233 2234 2235 2236 2237 2238 2239 2240 2241 | } } /* * Don't allow negative spacings. */ if (textPtr->spacing1 < 0) { textPtr->spacing1 = 0; } if (textPtr->spacing2 < 0) { textPtr->spacing2 = 0; } if (textPtr->spacing3 < 0) { textPtr->spacing3 = 0; } /* * Parse tab stops. */ if (textPtr->tabArrayPtr != NULL) { ckfree(textPtr->tabArrayPtr); textPtr->tabArrayPtr = NULL; } if (textPtr->tabOptionObj != NULL) { textPtr->tabArrayPtr = TkTextGetTabs(interp, textPtr, textPtr->tabOptionObj); if (textPtr->tabArrayPtr == NULL) { Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp,"\n (while processing -tabs option)"); Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions); return TCL_ERROR; } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2288 2289 2290 2291 2292 2293 2294 | if (textPtr->selTagPtr->selFgColor == NULL) { textPtr->selTagPtr->fgColor = textPtr->selFgColorPtr; } else { textPtr->selTagPtr->selFgColor = textPtr->selFgColorPtr; } textPtr->selTagPtr->affectsDisplay = 0; textPtr->selTagPtr->affectsDisplayGeometry = 0; | | | 2258 2259 2260 2261 2262 2263 2264 2265 2266 2267 2268 2269 2270 2271 2272 | if (textPtr->selTagPtr->selFgColor == NULL) { textPtr->selTagPtr->fgColor = textPtr->selFgColorPtr; } else { textPtr->selTagPtr->selFgColor = textPtr->selFgColorPtr; } textPtr->selTagPtr->affectsDisplay = 0; textPtr->selTagPtr->affectsDisplayGeometry = 0; if ((textPtr->selTagPtr->elideObj != NULL) || (textPtr->selTagPtr->tkfont != NULL) || (textPtr->selTagPtr->justify != TK_JUSTIFY_NULL) || (textPtr->selTagPtr->lMargin1Obj != NULL) || (textPtr->selTagPtr->lMargin2Obj != NULL) || (textPtr->selTagPtr->offsetObj != NULL) || (textPtr->selTagPtr->rMarginObj != NULL) || (textPtr->selTagPtr->spacing1Obj != NULL) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2314 2315 2316 2317 2318 2319 2320 | if ((textPtr->selTagPtr->border != NULL) || (textPtr->selTagPtr->selBorder != NULL) || (textPtr->selTagPtr->relief != TK_RELIEF_NULL) || (textPtr->selTagPtr->bgStipple != None) || (textPtr->selTagPtr->fgColor != NULL) || (textPtr->selTagPtr->selFgColor != NULL) || (textPtr->selTagPtr->fgStipple != None) | | | | 2284 2285 2286 2287 2288 2289 2290 2291 2292 2293 2294 2295 2296 2297 2298 2299 2300 | if ((textPtr->selTagPtr->border != NULL) || (textPtr->selTagPtr->selBorder != NULL) || (textPtr->selTagPtr->relief != TK_RELIEF_NULL) || (textPtr->selTagPtr->bgStipple != None) || (textPtr->selTagPtr->fgColor != NULL) || (textPtr->selTagPtr->selFgColor != NULL) || (textPtr->selTagPtr->fgStipple != None) || (textPtr->selTagPtr->overstrikeObj != NULL) || (textPtr->selTagPtr->overstrikeColor != NULL) || (textPtr->selTagPtr->underlineObj != NULL) || (textPtr->selTagPtr->underlineColor != NULL) || (textPtr->selTagPtr->lMarginColor != NULL) || (textPtr->selTagPtr->rMarginColor != NULL)) { textPtr->selTagPtr->affectsDisplay = 1; } TkTextRedrawTag(NULL, textPtr, NULL, NULL, textPtr->selTagPtr, 1); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2364 2365 2366 2367 2368 2369 2370 2371 2372 2373 2374 2375 2376 2377 | /* * Register the desired geometry for the window, and arrange for the * window to be redisplayed. */ if (textPtr->width <= 0) { textPtr->width = 1; } Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions); TextWorldChanged(textPtr, mask); return TCL_OK; } /* | > > > | 2334 2335 2336 2337 2338 2339 2340 2341 2342 2343 2344 2345 2346 2347 2348 2349 2350 | /* * Register the desired geometry for the window, and arrange for the * window to be redisplayed. */ if (textPtr->width <= 0) { textPtr->width = 1; } if (textPtr->height <= 0) { textPtr->height = 1; } Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions); TextWorldChanged(textPtr, mask); return TCL_OK; } /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2426 2427 2428 2429 2430 2431 2432 | static void TextWorldChanged( TkText *textPtr, /* Information about widget. */ int mask) /* OR'd collection of bits showing what has * changed. */ { Tk_FontMetrics fm; | | < < < < < < < | < < < < < < | | | | > | | 2399 2400 2401 2402 2403 2404 2405 2406 2407 2408 2409 2410 2411 2412 2413 2414 2415 2416 2417 2418 2419 2420 2421 2422 2423 2424 2425 2426 2427 2428 2429 2430 2431 2432 2433 2434 2435 2436 2437 2438 2439 | static void TextWorldChanged( TkText *textPtr, /* Information about widget. */ int mask) /* OR'd collection of bits showing what has * changed. */ { Tk_FontMetrics fm; int border; int oldCharHeight = textPtr->charHeight; textPtr->charWidth = Tk_TextWidth(textPtr->tkfont, "0", 1); if (textPtr->charWidth <= 0) { textPtr->charWidth = 1; } Tk_GetFontMetrics(textPtr->tkfont, &fm); textPtr->charHeight = fm.linespace; if (textPtr->charHeight <= 0) { textPtr->charHeight = 1; } if (textPtr->charHeight != oldCharHeight) { TkBTreeClientRangeChanged(textPtr, textPtr->charHeight); } border = textPtr->borderWidth + textPtr->highlightWidth; Tk_GeometryRequest(textPtr->tkwin, textPtr->width * textPtr->charWidth + 2 * textPtr->padX + 2 * border, textPtr->height * (fm.linespace + textPtr->spacing1 + textPtr->spacing3) + 2 * textPtr->padY + 2 * border); Tk_SetInternalBorderEx(textPtr->tkwin, border + textPtr->padX, border + textPtr->padX, border + textPtr->padY, border + textPtr->padY); if (textPtr->setGrid) { Tk_SetGrid(textPtr->tkwin, textPtr->width, textPtr->height, textPtr->charWidth, textPtr->charHeight); } else { Tk_UnsetGrid(textPtr->tkwin); } TkTextRelayoutWindow(textPtr, mask); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2499 2500 2501 2502 2503 2504 2505 | static void TextEventProc( void *clientData, /* Information about window. */ XEvent *eventPtr) /* Information about event. */ { TkText *textPtr = (TkText *)clientData; TkTextIndex index, index2; | < | 2460 2461 2462 2463 2464 2465 2466 2467 2468 2469 2470 2471 2472 2473 | static void TextEventProc( void *clientData, /* Information about window. */ XEvent *eventPtr) /* Information about event. */ { TkText *textPtr = (TkText *)clientData; TkTextIndex index, index2; if (eventPtr->type == Expose) { TkTextRedrawRegion(textPtr, eventPtr->xexpose.x, eventPtr->xexpose.y, eventPtr->xexpose.width, eventPtr->xexpose.height); } else if (eventPtr->type == ConfigureNotify) { if ((textPtr->prevWidth != Tk_Width(textPtr->tkwin)) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2576 2577 2578 2579 2580 2581 2582 | /* * While we wish to redisplay, no heights have changed, so no need * to call TkTextInvalidateLineMetrics. */ TkTextChanged(NULL, textPtr, &index, &index2); | < | | > | 2536 2537 2538 2539 2540 2541 2542 2543 2544 2545 2546 2547 2548 2549 2550 2551 2552 | /* * While we wish to redisplay, no heights have changed, so no need * to call TkTextInvalidateLineMetrics. */ TkTextChanged(NULL, textPtr, &index, &index2); if (textPtr->highlightWidth > 0) { TkTextRedrawRegion(textPtr, 0, 0, textPtr->highlightWidth, textPtr->highlightWidth); } } } } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3699 3700 3701 3702 3703 3704 3705 | textPtr->flags |= INSERT_ON; textPtr->insertBlinkHandler = Tcl_CreateTimerHandler( textPtr->insertOnTime, TextBlinkProc, textPtr); } redrawInsert: TkTextMarkSegToIndex(textPtr, textPtr->insertMarkPtr, &index); if (TkTextIndexBbox(textPtr, &index, &x, &y, &w, &h, &charWidth) == 0) { | < < | | | | 3659 3660 3661 3662 3663 3664 3665 3666 3667 3668 3669 3670 3671 3672 3673 3674 3675 3676 3677 3678 3679 3680 | textPtr->flags |= INSERT_ON; textPtr->insertBlinkHandler = Tcl_CreateTimerHandler( textPtr->insertOnTime, TextBlinkProc, textPtr); } redrawInsert: TkTextMarkSegToIndex(textPtr, textPtr->insertMarkPtr, &index); if (TkTextIndexBbox(textPtr, &index, &x, &y, &w, &h, &charWidth) == 0) { if (textPtr->insertCursorType) { /* Block cursor */ TkTextRedrawRegion(textPtr, x - textPtr->width / 2, y, charWidth + textPtr->insertWidth / 2, h); } else { /* I-beam cursor */ TkTextRedrawRegion(textPtr, x - textPtr->insertWidth / 2, y, textPtr->insertWidth, h); } } } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4124 4125 4126 4127 4128 4129 4130 | if ((segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) && (searchSpecPtr->searchElide || !TkTextIsElided(textPtr, &curIndex, NULL))) { if (leftToScan < segPtr->size) { if (searchSpecPtr->exact) { index += leftToScan; } else { | | | | 4082 4083 4084 4085 4086 4087 4088 4089 4090 4091 4092 4093 4094 4095 4096 4097 4098 4099 4100 4101 | if ((segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) && (searchSpecPtr->searchElide || !TkTextIsElided(textPtr, &curIndex, NULL))) { if (leftToScan < segPtr->size) { if (searchSpecPtr->exact) { index += leftToScan; } else { index += TkNumUtfChars(segPtr->body.chars, leftToScan); } } else if (searchSpecPtr->exact) { index += segPtr->size; } else { index += TkNumUtfChars(segPtr->body.chars, -1); } } leftToScan -= segPtr->size; } return index; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4254 4255 4256 4257 4258 4259 4260 | } if (lenPtr != NULL) { if (searchSpecPtr->exact) { Tcl_GetString(theLine); *lenPtr = theLine->length; } else { | | | 4212 4213 4214 4215 4216 4217 4218 4219 4220 4221 4222 4223 4224 4225 4226 | } if (lenPtr != NULL) { if (searchSpecPtr->exact) { Tcl_GetString(theLine); *lenPtr = theLine->length; } else { *lenPtr = TkGetCharLength(theLine); } } return linePtr; } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4324 4325 4326 4327 4328 4329 4330 | * Calculate the character count, which may need augmenting if there are * embedded windows or elided text. */ if (searchSpecPtr->exact) { const char *startOfLine = Tcl_GetString(theLine); | | | 4282 4283 4284 4285 4286 4287 4288 4289 4290 4291 4292 4293 4294 4295 4296 | * Calculate the character count, which may need augmenting if there are * embedded windows or elided text. */ if (searchSpecPtr->exact) { const char *startOfLine = Tcl_GetString(theLine); numChars = TkNumUtfChars(startOfLine + matchOffset, matchLength); } else { numChars = matchLength; } /* * If we're using strict limits checking, ensure that the match with its * full length fits inside the given range. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4383 4384 4385 4386 4387 4388 4389 | if (segPtr->typePtr != &tkTextCharType) { matchOffset += segPtr->size; } else if (!searchSpecPtr->searchElide && TkTextIsElided(textPtr, &curIndex, NULL)) { if (searchSpecPtr->exact) { matchOffset += segPtr->size; } else { | | | | 4341 4342 4343 4344 4345 4346 4347 4348 4349 4350 4351 4352 4353 4354 4355 4356 4357 4358 4359 4360 4361 | if (segPtr->typePtr != &tkTextCharType) { matchOffset += segPtr->size; } else if (!searchSpecPtr->searchElide && TkTextIsElided(textPtr, &curIndex, NULL)) { if (searchSpecPtr->exact) { matchOffset += segPtr->size; } else { matchOffset += TkNumUtfChars(segPtr->body.chars, -1); } } else { if (searchSpecPtr->exact) { leftToScan -= (int)segPtr->size; } else { leftToScan -= TkNumUtfChars(segPtr->body.chars, -1); } } curIndex.byteIndex += segPtr->size; } if (segPtr == NULL && leftToScan >= 0) { /* * This will only happen if we are eliding newlines. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4474 4475 4476 4477 4478 4479 4480 | * Anything we didn't count in the search needs adding. */ numChars += segPtr->size; continue; } else if (!searchSpecPtr->searchElide && TkTextIsElided(textPtr, &curIndex, NULL)) { | | | | 4432 4433 4434 4435 4436 4437 4438 4439 4440 4441 4442 4443 4444 4445 4446 4447 4448 4449 4450 4451 4452 | * Anything we didn't count in the search needs adding. */ numChars += segPtr->size; continue; } else if (!searchSpecPtr->searchElide && TkTextIsElided(textPtr, &curIndex, NULL)) { numChars += TkNumUtfChars(segPtr->body.chars, -1); continue; } if (searchSpecPtr->exact) { leftToScan -= segPtr->size; } else { leftToScan -= TkNumUtfChars(segPtr->body.chars, -1); } } /* * Now store the count result, if it is wanted. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4524 4525 4526 4527 4528 4529 4530 | * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ TkTextTabArray * TkTextGetTabs( Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Used for error reporting. */ | | | 4482 4483 4484 4485 4486 4487 4488 4489 4490 4491 4492 4493 4494 4495 4496 | * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ TkTextTabArray * TkTextGetTabs( Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Used for error reporting. */ const TkText *textPtr, /* Information about the text widget. */ Tcl_Obj *stringPtr) /* Description of the tab stops. See the text * manual entry for details. */ { Tcl_Size objc, i, count; Tcl_Obj **objv; TkTextTabArray *tabArrayPtr; TkTextTab *tabPtr; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4575 4576 4577 4578 4579 4580 4581 | int index; /* * This will round fractional pixels above 0.5 upwards, and otherwise * downwards, to find the right integer pixel position. */ | | | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | | 4533 4534 4535 4536 4537 4538 4539 4540 4541 4542 4543 4544 4545 4546 4547 4548 4549 4550 4551 4552 4553 4554 4555 4556 4557 4558 4559 4560 4561 4562 4563 4564 4565 4566 4567 4568 4569 4570 4571 4572 4573 4574 4575 4576 4577 4578 4579 4580 4581 4582 4583 4584 4585 4586 4587 4588 4589 4590 4591 4592 4593 4594 4595 4596 4597 4598 4599 4600 4601 4602 4603 4604 4605 4606 4607 4608 4609 4610 4611 | int index; /* * This will round fractional pixels above 0.5 upwards, and otherwise * downwards, to find the right integer pixel position. */ if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, textPtr->tkwin, objv[i], &tabPtr->location) != TCL_OK) { goto error; } if (tabPtr->location <= 0) { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "tab stop \"%s\" is not at a positive distance", Tcl_GetString(objv[i]))); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "VALUE", "TAB_STOP", (char *)NULL); goto error; } prevStop = lastStop; if (Tk_GetDoublePixelsFromObj(interp, textPtr->tkwin, objv[i], &lastStop) != TCL_OK) { goto error; } if (i > 0 && (tabPtr->location <= (tabPtr-1)->location)) { /* * This tab is actually to the left of the previous one, which is * illegal. */ #ifdef _TK_ALLOW_DECREASING_TABS /* * Force the tab to be a typical character width to the right of * the previous one, and update the 'lastStop' with the changed * position. */ if (textPtr->charWidth > 0) { tabPtr->location = (tabPtr-1)->location + textPtr->charWidth; } else { tabPtr->location = (tabPtr-1)->location + 8; } lastStop = tabPtr->location; #else Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "tabs must be monotonically increasing, but \"%s\" is " "smaller than or equal to the previous tab", Tcl_GetString(objv[i]))); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "VALUE", "TAB_STOP", (char *)NULL); goto error; #endif /* _TK_ALLOW_DECREASING_TABS */ } tabArrayPtr->numTabs++; /* * See if there is an explicit alignment in the next list element. * Otherwise just use "left". */ tabPtr->alignment = LEFT; if ((i+1) == objc) { continue; } /* * There may be a more efficient way of getting this. */ TkUtfToUniChar(Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]), &ch); if (!Tcl_UniCharIsAlpha(ch)) { continue; } i += 1; if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObjStruct(interp, objv[i], tabOptionStrings, sizeof(char *), "tab alignment", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6211 6212 6213 6214 6215 6216 6217 | if (searchSpecPtr->backwards) { alreadySearchOffset = p - startOfLine - 1; if (alreadySearchOffset < 0) { break; } } else { firstOffset = p - startOfLine + | | | 6184 6185 6186 6187 6188 6189 6190 6191 6192 6193 6194 6195 6196 6197 6198 | if (searchSpecPtr->backwards) { alreadySearchOffset = p - startOfLine - 1; if (alreadySearchOffset < 0) { break; } } else { firstOffset = p - startOfLine + TkUtfToUniChar(startOfLine+matchOffset,&ch); } } } while (searchSpecPtr->all); } else { int maxExtraLines = 0; int matches = 0; int lastNonOverlap = -1; |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkText.h.
︙ | ︙ | |||
1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 | Tcl_Obj *idxPtr, TkTextIndex *indexPtr); MODULE_SCOPE int TkTextSharedGetObjIndex(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr, Tcl_Obj *idxPtr, TkTextIndex *indexPtr); MODULE_SCOPE const TkTextIndex *TkTextGetIndexFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkText *textPtr, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); MODULE_SCOPE TkTextTabArray *TkTextGetTabs(Tcl_Interp *interp, | | | 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 | Tcl_Obj *idxPtr, TkTextIndex *indexPtr); MODULE_SCOPE int TkTextSharedGetObjIndex(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr, Tcl_Obj *idxPtr, TkTextIndex *indexPtr); MODULE_SCOPE const TkTextIndex *TkTextGetIndexFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkText *textPtr, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); MODULE_SCOPE TkTextTabArray *TkTextGetTabs(Tcl_Interp *interp, const TkText *textPtr, Tcl_Obj *stringPtr); MODULE_SCOPE void TkTextFindDisplayLineEnd(TkText *textPtr, TkTextIndex *indexPtr, int end, int *xOffset); MODULE_SCOPE void TkTextIndexBackChars(const TkText *textPtr, const TkTextIndex *srcPtr, int count, TkTextIndex *dstPtr, TkTextCountType type); MODULE_SCOPE int TkTextIndexCmp(const TkTextIndex *index1Ptr, const TkTextIndex *index2Ptr); |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkTextBTree.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
3556 3557 3558 3559 3560 3561 3562 | index = 0; linePtr = indexPtr->linePtr; segPtr = linePtr->segPtr; while ((index + (int)segPtr->size) <= indexPtr->byteIndex) { if ((segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType) || (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType)) { tagPtr = segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr; | | | 3556 3557 3558 3559 3560 3561 3562 3563 3564 3565 3566 3567 3568 3569 3570 | index = 0; linePtr = indexPtr->linePtr; segPtr = linePtr->segPtr; while ((index + (int)segPtr->size) <= indexPtr->byteIndex) { if ((segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType) || (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType)) { tagPtr = segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr; if (tagPtr->elideObj != NULL) { infoPtr->tagPtrs[tagPtr->priority] = tagPtr; infoPtr->tagCnts[tagPtr->priority]++; } } index += segPtr->size; segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3596 3597 3598 3599 3600 3601 3602 | siblingLinePtr != indexPtr->linePtr; siblingLinePtr = siblingLinePtr->nextPtr) { for (segPtr = siblingLinePtr->segPtr; segPtr != NULL; segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) { if ((segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType) || (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType)) { tagPtr = segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr; | | | 3596 3597 3598 3599 3600 3601 3602 3603 3604 3605 3606 3607 3608 3609 3610 | siblingLinePtr != indexPtr->linePtr; siblingLinePtr = siblingLinePtr->nextPtr) { for (segPtr = siblingLinePtr->segPtr; segPtr != NULL; segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) { if ((segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType) || (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType)) { tagPtr = segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr; if (tagPtr->elideObj != NULL) { infoPtr->tagPtrs[tagPtr->priority] = tagPtr; infoPtr->tagCnts[tagPtr->priority]++; } } } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3620 3621 3622 3623 3624 3625 3626 | for (siblingPtr = nodePtr->parentPtr->children.nodePtr; siblingPtr != nodePtr; siblingPtr = siblingPtr->nextPtr) { for (summaryPtr = siblingPtr->summaryPtr; summaryPtr != NULL; summaryPtr = summaryPtr->nextPtr) { if (summaryPtr->toggleCount & 1) { tagPtr = summaryPtr->tagPtr; | | | | 3620 3621 3622 3623 3624 3625 3626 3627 3628 3629 3630 3631 3632 3633 3634 3635 3636 3637 3638 3639 3640 3641 3642 3643 3644 3645 3646 3647 3648 3649 3650 3651 3652 | for (siblingPtr = nodePtr->parentPtr->children.nodePtr; siblingPtr != nodePtr; siblingPtr = siblingPtr->nextPtr) { for (summaryPtr = siblingPtr->summaryPtr; summaryPtr != NULL; summaryPtr = summaryPtr->nextPtr) { if (summaryPtr->toggleCount & 1) { tagPtr = summaryPtr->tagPtr; if (tagPtr->elideObj != NULL) { infoPtr->tagPtrs[tagPtr->priority] = tagPtr; infoPtr->tagCnts[tagPtr->priority] += summaryPtr->toggleCount; } } } } } /* * Now traverse from highest priority to lowest, take elided value from * first odd count (= on). */ infoPtr->elidePriority = -1; for (i = infoPtr->numTags-1; i >=0; i--) { if (infoPtr->tagCnts[i] & 1) { infoPtr->elide = infoPtr->tagPtrs[i]->elideObj && infoPtr->tagPtrs[i]->elide != 0; /* * Note: i == infoPtr->tagPtrs[i]->priority */ infoPtr->elidePriority = i; break; |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkTextDisp.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
800 801 802 803 804 805 806 | memset(&styleValues, 0, sizeof(StyleValues)); styleValues.relief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT; styleValues.fgColor = textPtr->fgColor; styleValues.underlineColor = textPtr->fgColor; styleValues.overstrikeColor = textPtr->fgColor; styleValues.tkfont = textPtr->tkfont; styleValues.justify = TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT; | | | | | 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 | memset(&styleValues, 0, sizeof(StyleValues)); styleValues.relief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT; styleValues.fgColor = textPtr->fgColor; styleValues.underlineColor = textPtr->fgColor; styleValues.overstrikeColor = textPtr->fgColor; styleValues.tkfont = textPtr->tkfont; styleValues.justify = TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT; styleValues.spacing1 = textPtr->spacing1; styleValues.spacing2 = textPtr->spacing2; styleValues.spacing3 = textPtr->spacing3; styleValues.tabArrayPtr = textPtr->tabArrayPtr; styleValues.tabStyle = textPtr->tabStyle; styleValues.wrapMode = textPtr->wrapMode; styleValues.elide = 0; isSelected = 0; for (i = 0 ; i < numTags; i++) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
911 912 913 914 915 916 917 | lMarginColorPrio = tagPtr->priority; } if ((tagPtr->offsetObj != NULL) && (tagPtr->priority > offsetPrio)) { Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, textPtr->tkwin, tagPtr->offsetObj, &styleValues.offset); offsetPrio = tagPtr->priority; } | | | | | | 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 | lMarginColorPrio = tagPtr->priority; } if ((tagPtr->offsetObj != NULL) && (tagPtr->priority > offsetPrio)) { Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, textPtr->tkwin, tagPtr->offsetObj, &styleValues.offset); offsetPrio = tagPtr->priority; } if ((tagPtr->overstrikeObj != NULL) && (tagPtr->priority > overstrikePrio)) { styleValues.overstrike = tagPtr->overstrike != 0; overstrikePrio = tagPtr->priority; if (tagPtr->overstrikeColor != NULL) { styleValues.overstrikeColor = tagPtr->overstrikeColor; } else if (fgColor != NULL) { styleValues.overstrikeColor = fgColor; } } if ((tagPtr->rMarginObj != NULL) && (tagPtr->priority > rMarginPrio)) { Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, textPtr->tkwin, tagPtr->rMarginObj, &styleValues.rMargin); rMarginPrio = tagPtr->priority; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
957 958 959 960 961 962 963 | } if (((tagPtr->tabStyle == TK_TEXT_TABSTYLE_TABULAR) || (tagPtr->tabStyle == TK_TEXT_TABSTYLE_WORDPROCESSOR)) && (tagPtr->priority > tabStylePrio)) { styleValues.tabStyle = tagPtr->tabStyle; tabStylePrio = tagPtr->priority; } | | | | | | 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 | } if (((tagPtr->tabStyle == TK_TEXT_TABSTYLE_TABULAR) || (tagPtr->tabStyle == TK_TEXT_TABSTYLE_WORDPROCESSOR)) && (tagPtr->priority > tabStylePrio)) { styleValues.tabStyle = tagPtr->tabStyle; tabStylePrio = tagPtr->priority; } if ((tagPtr->underlineObj != NULL) && (tagPtr->priority > underlinePrio)) { styleValues.underline = tagPtr->underline != 0; underlinePrio = tagPtr->priority; if (tagPtr->underlineColor != NULL) { styleValues.underlineColor = tagPtr->underlineColor; } else if (fgColor != NULL) { styleValues.underlineColor = fgColor; } } if ((tagPtr->elideObj != NULL) && (tagPtr->priority > elidePrio)) { styleValues.elide = tagPtr->elide != 0; elidePrio = tagPtr->priority; } if (((tagPtr->wrapMode == TEXT_WRAPMODE_CHAR) || (tagPtr->wrapMode == TEXT_WRAPMODE_NONE) || (tagPtr->wrapMode == TEXT_WRAPMODE_WORD)) && (tagPtr->priority > wrapPrio)) { styleValues.wrapMode = tagPtr->wrapMode; wrapPrio = tagPtr->priority; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 | /* * The elide state only changes if this tag is either the * current highest priority tag (and is therefore being * toggled off), or it's a new tag with higher priority. */ | | | 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 | /* * The elide state only changes if this tag is either the * current highest priority tag (and is therefore being * toggled off), or it's a new tag with higher priority. */ if (tagPtr->elideObj != NULL) { info.tagCnts[tagPtr->priority]++; if (info.tagCnts[tagPtr->priority] & 1) { info.tagPtrs[tagPtr->priority] = tagPtr; } if (tagPtr->priority >= info.elidePriority) { if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType) { /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 | * Find previous elide tag, if any (if not then * elide will be zero, of course). */ elide = 0; while (--info.elidePriority > 0) { if (info.tagCnts[info.elidePriority] & 1) { | | | | | 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 | * Find previous elide tag, if any (if not then * elide will be zero, of course). */ elide = 0; while (--info.elidePriority > 0) { if (info.tagCnts[info.elidePriority] & 1) { elide = info.tagPtrs[info.elidePriority]->elideObj && (info.tagPtrs[info.elidePriority]->elide != 0); break; } } } else { elide = tagPtr->elideObj && (tagPtr->elide != 0); info.elidePriority = tagPtr->priority; } } } } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1379 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 | /* * If have we have a tag toggle, there is a chance that * invisibility state changed, so bail out. */ } else if ((segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType) || (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType)) { | | | | 1379 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 1395 | /* * If have we have a tag toggle, there is a chance that * invisibility state changed, so bail out. */ } else if ((segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType) || (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType)) { if (segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr->elideObj) { elide = (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType) ^ (segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr->elide != 0); } } byteOffset = 0; segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr; if (segPtr == NULL) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4169 4170 4171 4172 4173 4174 4175 | DLine *dlPtr; DLine *prevPtr; Pixmap pixmap; int maxHeight, borders; int bottomY = 0; /* Initialization needed only to stop compiler * warnings. */ Tcl_Interp *interp; | < < | 4169 4170 4171 4172 4173 4174 4175 4176 4177 4178 4179 4180 4181 4182 | DLine *dlPtr; DLine *prevPtr; Pixmap pixmap; int maxHeight, borders; int bottomY = 0; /* Initialization needed only to stop compiler * warnings. */ Tcl_Interp *interp; if ((textPtr->tkwin == NULL) || (textPtr->flags & DESTROYED)) { /* * The widget has been deleted. Don't do anything. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4364 4365 4366 4367 4368 4369 4370 | * redisplaying, because the act of redisplaying could actually generate * more redisplays (e.g. in the case of a nested window with event * bindings triggered by redisplay). */ dInfoPtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_PENDING; | < < < < < | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 4362 4363 4364 4365 4366 4367 4368 4369 4370 4371 4372 4373 4374 4375 4376 4377 4378 4379 4380 4381 4382 4383 4384 4385 4386 4387 4388 4389 4390 4391 4392 4393 4394 4395 4396 4397 4398 4399 4400 4401 4402 4403 4404 4405 4406 4407 4408 4409 4410 4411 4412 4413 4414 4415 4416 4417 4418 4419 4420 4421 4422 4423 4424 4425 4426 4427 4428 4429 4430 4431 4432 4433 4434 4435 4436 | * redisplaying, because the act of redisplaying could actually generate * more redisplays (e.g. in the case of a nested window with event * bindings triggered by redisplay). */ dInfoPtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_PENDING; /* * Redraw the borders if that's needed. */ if (dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_BORDERS) { if (tkTextDebug) { LOG("tk_textRedraw", "borders"); } if (textPtr->tkwin == NULL) { /* * The widget has been deleted. Don't do anything. */ goto end; } Tk_Draw3DRectangle(textPtr->tkwin, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin), textPtr->border, textPtr->highlightWidth, textPtr->highlightWidth, Tk_Width(textPtr->tkwin) - 2 * textPtr->highlightWidth, Tk_Height(textPtr->tkwin) - 2 * textPtr->highlightWidth, textPtr->borderWidth, textPtr->relief); if (textPtr->highlightWidth > 0) { GC fgGC, bgGC; bgGC = Tk_GCForColor(textPtr->highlightBgColorPtr, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin)); if (textPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS) { fgGC = Tk_GCForColor(textPtr->highlightColorPtr, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin)); Tk_DrawHighlightBorder(textPtr->tkwin, fgGC, bgGC, textPtr->highlightWidth, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin)); } else { Tk_DrawHighlightBorder(textPtr->tkwin, bgGC, bgGC, textPtr->highlightWidth, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin)); } } borders = textPtr->borderWidth + textPtr->highlightWidth; if (textPtr->padY > 0) { Tk_Fill3DRectangle(textPtr->tkwin, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin), textPtr->border, borders, borders, Tk_Width(textPtr->tkwin) - 2 * borders, textPtr->padY, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT); Tk_Fill3DRectangle(textPtr->tkwin, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin), textPtr->border, borders, Tk_Height(textPtr->tkwin) - borders - textPtr->padY, Tk_Width(textPtr->tkwin) - 2 * borders, textPtr->padY, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT); } if (textPtr->padX > 0) { Tk_Fill3DRectangle(textPtr->tkwin, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin), textPtr->border, borders, borders + textPtr->padY, textPtr->padX, Tk_Height(textPtr->tkwin) - 2 * borders -2 * textPtr->padY, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT); Tk_Fill3DRectangle(textPtr->tkwin, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin), textPtr->border, Tk_Width(textPtr->tkwin) - borders - textPtr->padX, borders + textPtr->padY, textPtr->padX, Tk_Height(textPtr->tkwin) - 2 * borders -2 * textPtr->padY, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT); } dInfoPtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_BORDERS; } /* * Now we have to redraw the lines that couldn't be updated by scrolling. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4612 4613 4614 4615 4616 4617 4618 | * The widget has been deleted. Don't do anything. */ goto end; } Tk_Fill3DRectangle(textPtr->tkwin, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin), | | | | 4605 4606 4607 4608 4609 4610 4611 4612 4613 4614 4615 4616 4617 4618 4619 4620 | * The widget has been deleted. Don't do anything. */ goto end; } Tk_Fill3DRectangle(textPtr->tkwin, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin), textPtr->border, dInfoPtr->x - textPtr->padX, bottomY, dInfoPtr->maxX - (dInfoPtr->x - textPtr->padX), dInfoPtr->topOfEof-bottomY, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT); } dInfoPtr->topOfEof = bottomY; /* * Update the vertical scrollbar, if there is one. Note: it's important to * clear REDRAW_PENDING here, just in case the scroll function does |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4757 4758 4759 4760 4761 4762 4763 | TkText *textPtr, /* Widget record for text widget. */ TkRegion region) /* Region of area to redraw. */ { DLine *dlPtr; TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; int maxY, inset; XRectangle rect; | < < < < < | < | | | | | 4750 4751 4752 4753 4754 4755 4756 4757 4758 4759 4760 4761 4762 4763 4764 4765 4766 4767 4768 4769 4770 4771 4772 4773 4774 4775 4776 4777 4778 4779 4780 4781 4782 4783 4784 4785 4786 4787 4788 4789 | TkText *textPtr, /* Widget record for text widget. */ TkRegion region) /* Region of area to redraw. */ { DLine *dlPtr; TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; int maxY, inset; XRectangle rect; /* * Find all lines that overlap the given region and mark them for * redisplay. */ TkClipBox(region, &rect); maxY = rect.y + rect.height; for (dlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; dlPtr != NULL; dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr) { if ((!(dlPtr->flags & OLD_Y_INVALID)) && (TkRectInRegion(region, rect.x, dlPtr->y, rect.width, (unsigned int) dlPtr->height) != RectangleOut)) { dlPtr->flags |= OLD_Y_INVALID; } } if (dInfoPtr->topOfEof < maxY) { dInfoPtr->topOfEof = maxY; } inset = textPtr->borderWidth + textPtr->highlightWidth; if ((rect.x < (inset + textPtr->padX)) || (rect.y < (inset + textPtr->padY)) || ((int) (rect.x + rect.width) > (Tk_Width(textPtr->tkwin) - inset - textPtr->padX)) || (maxY > (Tk_Height(textPtr->tkwin) - inset - textPtr->padY))) { dInfoPtr->flags |= REDRAW_BORDERS; } } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5203 5204 5205 5206 5207 5208 5209 | int mask) /* OR'd collection of bits showing what has * changed. */ { TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; GC newGC; XGCValues gcValues; Bool inSync = 1; | < < | 5190 5191 5192 5193 5194 5195 5196 5197 5198 5199 5200 5201 5202 5203 | int mask) /* OR'd collection of bits showing what has * changed. */ { TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; GC newGC; XGCValues gcValues; Bool inSync = 1; /* * Schedule the window redisplay. See TkTextChanged for the reason why * this has to be done before any calls to FreeDLines. */ if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5242 5243 5244 5245 5246 5247 5248 | /* * Recompute some overall things for the layout. Even if the window gets * very small, pretend that there's at least one pixel of drawing space in * it. */ | < < < < | < < | < | > | > | | | | | 5227 5228 5229 5230 5231 5232 5233 5234 5235 5236 5237 5238 5239 5240 5241 5242 5243 5244 5245 5246 5247 5248 5249 5250 5251 5252 5253 5254 5255 5256 5257 5258 5259 | /* * Recompute some overall things for the layout. Even if the window gets * very small, pretend that there's at least one pixel of drawing space in * it. */ if (textPtr->highlightWidth < 0) { textPtr->highlightWidth = 0; } dInfoPtr->x = textPtr->highlightWidth + textPtr->borderWidth + textPtr->padX; dInfoPtr->y = textPtr->highlightWidth + textPtr->borderWidth + textPtr->padY; dInfoPtr->maxX = Tk_Width(textPtr->tkwin) - textPtr->highlightWidth - textPtr->borderWidth - textPtr->padX; if (dInfoPtr->maxX <= dInfoPtr->x) { dInfoPtr->maxX = dInfoPtr->x + 1; } /* * This is the only place where dInfoPtr->maxY is set. */ dInfoPtr->maxY = Tk_Height(textPtr->tkwin) - textPtr->highlightWidth - textPtr->borderWidth - textPtr->padY; if (dInfoPtr->maxY <= dInfoPtr->y) { dInfoPtr->maxY = dInfoPtr->y + 1; } dInfoPtr->topOfEof = dInfoPtr->maxY; /* * If the upper-left character isn't the first in a line, recompute it. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7694 7695 7696 7697 7698 7699 7700 | bytesThatFit = CharChunkMeasureChars(chunkPtr, p, maxBytes, 0, -1, chunkPtr->x, maxX, TK_ISOLATE_END, &nextX); #endif /* TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS */ if (bytesThatFit + 1 <= maxBytes) { if ((bytesThatFit == 0) && noCharsYet) { int ch; | | | 7674 7675 7676 7677 7678 7679 7680 7681 7682 7683 7684 7685 7686 7687 7688 | bytesThatFit = CharChunkMeasureChars(chunkPtr, p, maxBytes, 0, -1, chunkPtr->x, maxX, TK_ISOLATE_END, &nextX); #endif /* TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS */ if (bytesThatFit + 1 <= maxBytes) { if ((bytesThatFit == 0) && noCharsYet) { int ch; int chLen = TkUtfToUniChar(p, &ch); #ifdef TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS bytesThatFit = CharChunkMeasureChars(chunkPtr, line, lineOffset+chLen, lineOffset, -1, chunkPtr->x, -1, 0, &nextX); #else /* !TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS */ bytesThatFit = CharChunkMeasureChars(chunkPtr, p, chLen, 0, -1, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8052 8053 8054 8055 8056 8057 8058 | if ((len > 0) && (string[start + len - 1] == '\t')) { len--; } if (len <= 0) { return; } | | | | | 8032 8033 8034 8035 8036 8037 8038 8039 8040 8041 8042 8043 8044 8045 8046 8047 8048 8049 8050 8051 8052 8053 8054 8055 8056 8057 8058 8059 8060 8061 8062 | if ((len > 0) && (string[start + len - 1] == '\t')) { len--; } if (len <= 0) { return; } Tk_DrawCharsInContext(display, dst, stylePtr->fgGC, sValuePtr->tkfont, string, numBytes, start, len, ciPtr->baseChunkPtr->x + xDisplacement, y + baseline - sValuePtr->offset); if (sValuePtr->underline) { Tk_UnderlineCharsInContext(display, dst, stylePtr->ulGC, sValuePtr->tkfont, string, numBytes, ciPtr->baseChunkPtr->x + xDisplacement, y + baseline - sValuePtr->offset, start, start+len); } if (sValuePtr->overstrike) { Tk_FontMetrics fm; Tk_GetFontMetrics(sValuePtr->tkfont, &fm); Tk_UnderlineCharsInContext(display, dst, stylePtr->ovGC, sValuePtr->tkfont, string, numBytes, ciPtr->baseChunkPtr->x + xDisplacement, y + baseline - sValuePtr->offset - fm.descent - (fm.ascent * 3) / 10, start, start+len); } #else /* !TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8714 8715 8716 8717 8718 8719 8720 | * string). Process characters between start and special. */ if ((maxX >= 0) && (curX >= maxX)) { break; } #ifdef TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT | | | 8694 8695 8696 8697 8698 8699 8700 8701 8702 8703 8704 8705 8706 8707 8708 | * string). Process characters between start and special. */ if ((maxX >= 0) && (curX >= maxX)) { break; } #ifdef TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT start += Tk_MeasureCharsInContext(tkfont, source, maxBytes, start - source, special - start, maxX >= 0 ? maxX - curX : -1, flags, &width); #else (void) maxBytes; start += Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, start, special - start, maxX >= 0 ? maxX - curX : -1, flags, &width); #endif /* TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8998 8999 9000 9001 9002 9003 9004 | * IsSameFGStyle -- * * Compare the foreground attributes of two styles. Specifically must * consider: foreground color, font, font style and font decorations, * elide, "offset" and foreground stipple. Do *not* consider: background * color, border, relief or background stipple. * | | | 8978 8979 8980 8981 8982 8983 8984 8985 8986 8987 8988 8989 8990 8991 8992 | * IsSameFGStyle -- * * Compare the foreground attributes of two styles. Specifically must * consider: foreground color, font, font style and font decorations, * elide, "offset" and foreground stipple. Do *not* consider: background * color, border, relief or background stipple. * * If we use Tk_DrawCharsInContext(), we also don't need to check * foreground color, font decorations, elide, offset and foreground * stipple, so all that is left is font (including font size and font * style) and "offset". * * Results: * 1 if the two styles match, 0 otherwise. * |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkTextImage.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
80 81 82 83 84 85 86 | /* * Information used for parsing image configuration options: */ static const Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = { {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-align", NULL, NULL, "center", TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkTextEmbImage, align), | | | | | 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 | /* * Information used for parsing image configuration options: */ static const Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = { {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-align", NULL, NULL, "center", TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkTextEmbImage, align), TK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR, alignStrings, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", NULL, NULL, "0", TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkTextEmbImage, padX), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", NULL, NULL, "0", TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkTextEmbImage, padY), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-image", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(TkTextEmbImage, imageObj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-name", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(TkTextEmbImage, imageNameObj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0} |
︙ | ︙ | |||
248 249 250 251 252 253 254 | eiPtr->body.ei.sharedTextPtr = textPtr->sharedTextPtr; eiPtr->body.ei.linePtr = NULL; eiPtr->body.ei.imageNameObj = NULL; eiPtr->body.ei.imageObj = NULL; eiPtr->body.ei.name = NULL; eiPtr->body.ei.image = NULL; eiPtr->body.ei.align = TK_ALIGN_CENTER; | | | 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 | eiPtr->body.ei.sharedTextPtr = textPtr->sharedTextPtr; eiPtr->body.ei.linePtr = NULL; eiPtr->body.ei.imageNameObj = NULL; eiPtr->body.ei.imageObj = NULL; eiPtr->body.ei.name = NULL; eiPtr->body.ei.image = NULL; eiPtr->body.ei.align = TK_ALIGN_CENTER; eiPtr->body.ei.padX = eiPtr->body.ei.padY = 0; eiPtr->body.ei.chunkCount = 0; eiPtr->body.ei.optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, optionSpecs); /* * Link the segment into the text widget, then configure it (delete it * again if the configuration fails). */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
527 528 529 530 531 532 533 | * TEXT_WRAPMODE_WORD. */ TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr) /* Structure to fill in with information about * this chunk. The x field has already been * set by the caller. */ { int width, height; | < < < < < < < | | | | | 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 | * TEXT_WRAPMODE_WORD. */ TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr) /* Structure to fill in with information about * this chunk. The x field has already been * set by the caller. */ { int width, height; if (offset != 0) { Tcl_Panic("Non-zero offset in EmbImageLayoutProc"); } /* * See if there's room for this image on this line. */ if (eiPtr->body.ei.image == NULL) { width = 0; height = 0; } else { Tk_SizeOfImage(eiPtr->body.ei.image, &width, &height); width += 2 * eiPtr->body.ei.padX; height += 2 * eiPtr->body.ei.padY; } if ((width > (maxX - chunkPtr->x)) && !noCharsYet && (textPtr->wrapMode != TEXT_WRAPMODE_NONE)) { return 0; } /* * Fill in the chunk structure. */ chunkPtr->displayProc = EmbImageDisplayProc; chunkPtr->undisplayProc = NULL; chunkPtr->measureProc = NULL; chunkPtr->bboxProc = EmbImageBboxProc; chunkPtr->numBytes = 1; if (eiPtr->body.ei.align == TK_ALIGN_BASELINE) { chunkPtr->minAscent = height - eiPtr->body.ei.padY; chunkPtr->minDescent = eiPtr->body.ei.padY; chunkPtr->minHeight = 0; } else { chunkPtr->minAscent = 0; chunkPtr->minDescent = 0; chunkPtr->minHeight = height; } chunkPtr->width = width; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
697 698 699 700 701 702 703 | * None. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void EmbImageBboxProc( | | < < < < < < < | | | | 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 | * None. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void EmbImageBboxProc( TCL_UNUSED(TkText *), TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, /* Chunk containing desired char. */ TCL_UNUSED(Tcl_Size), /* Index of desired character within the * chunk. */ int y, /* Topmost pixel in area allocated for this * line. */ int lineHeight, /* Total height of line. */ int baseline, /* Location of line's baseline, in pixels * measured down from y. */ int *xPtr, int *yPtr, /* Gets filled in with coords of character's * upper-left pixel. */ int *widthPtr, /* Gets filled in with width of image, in * pixels. */ int *heightPtr) /* Gets filled in with height of image, in * pixels. */ { TkTextSegment *eiPtr = (TkTextSegment *)chunkPtr->clientData; Tk_Image image; image = eiPtr->body.ei.image; if (image != NULL) { Tk_SizeOfImage(image, widthPtr, heightPtr); } else { *widthPtr = 0; *heightPtr = 0; } *xPtr = chunkPtr->x + eiPtr->body.ei.padX; switch (eiPtr->body.ei.align) { case TK_ALIGN_BOTTOM: *yPtr = y + (lineHeight - *heightPtr - eiPtr->body.ei.padY); break; case TK_ALIGN_CENTER: *yPtr = y + (lineHeight - *heightPtr)/2; break; case TK_ALIGN_TOP: *yPtr = y + eiPtr->body.ei.padY; break; case TK_ALIGN_BASELINE: *yPtr = y + (baseline - *heightPtr); break; } } |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkTextIndex.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 | TkTextIndex *indexPtr); static int GetIndex(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkSharedText *sharedPtr, TkText *textPtr, const char *string, TkTextIndex *indexPtr, int *canCachePtr); static int IndexCountBytesOrdered(const TkText *textPtr, const TkTextIndex *indexPtr1, const TkTextIndex *indexPtr2); /* * The "textindex" Tcl_Obj definition: */ static void DupTextIndexInternalRep(Tcl_Obj *srcPtr, Tcl_Obj *copyPtr); | > > > > > > > > | 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 | TkTextIndex *indexPtr); static int GetIndex(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkSharedText *sharedPtr, TkText *textPtr, const char *string, TkTextIndex *indexPtr, int *canCachePtr); static int IndexCountBytesOrdered(const TkText *textPtr, const TkTextIndex *indexPtr1, const TkTextIndex *indexPtr2); #if defined(USE_TCL_STUBS) && (TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9) # undef Tcl_UtfPrev # define Tcl_UtfPrev (((&tclStubsPtr->tcl_PkgProvideEx)[631]) ? \ ((const char * (*)(const char *, const char *))(void *)((&tclStubsPtr->tcl_PkgProvideEx)[656])) \ : ((const char * (*)(const char *, const char *))(void *)((&tclStubsPtr->tcl_PkgProvideEx)[331]))) #endif /* * The "textindex" Tcl_Obj definition: */ static void DupTextIndexInternalRep(Tcl_Obj *srcPtr, Tcl_Obj *copyPtr); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
439 440 441 442 443 444 445 | * that byteIndex falls on a character boundary. If the index * falls in the middle of a UTF-8 character, it will be * adjusted to the end of that UTF-8 character. */ start = segPtr->body.chars + (byteIndex - index); p = Tcl_UtfPrev(start, segPtr->body.chars); | | | 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 | * that byteIndex falls on a character boundary. If the index * falls in the middle of a UTF-8 character, it will be * adjusted to the end of that UTF-8 character. */ start = segPtr->body.chars + (byteIndex - index); p = Tcl_UtfPrev(start, segPtr->body.chars); p += TkUtfToUniChar(p, &ch); indexPtr->byteIndex += p - start; } break; } index += segPtr->size; } return indexPtr; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
482 483 484 485 486 487 488 | * of text). */ int charIndex, /* Index of desired character. */ TkTextIndex *indexPtr) /* Structure to fill in. */ { TkTextSegment *segPtr; char *p, *start, *end; int index, offset; | | | 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 | * of text). */ int charIndex, /* Index of desired character. */ TkTextIndex *indexPtr) /* Structure to fill in. */ { TkTextSegment *segPtr; char *p, *start, *end; int index, offset; int ch = 0; indexPtr->tree = tree; if (lineIndex < 0) { lineIndex = 0; charIndex = 0; } if (charIndex < 0) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
529 530 531 532 533 534 535 | end = start + segPtr->size; for (p = start; p < end; p += offset) { if (charIndex == 0) { indexPtr->byteIndex = index; return indexPtr; } charIndex--; | | | 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 | end = start + segPtr->size; for (p = start; p < end; p += offset) { if (charIndex == 0) { indexPtr->byteIndex = index; return indexPtr; } charIndex--; offset = TkUtfToUniChar(p, &ch); index += offset; } } else { if (charIndex < (int)segPtr->size) { indexPtr->byteIndex = index; break; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 | linePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(NULL, linePtr); segPtr = linePtr->segPtr; } if (numBytes <= segPtr->size) { break; } if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) { | | | | 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 | linePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(NULL, linePtr); segPtr = linePtr->segPtr; } if (numBytes <= segPtr->size) { break; } if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) { charIndex += TkNumUtfChars(segPtr->body.chars, segPtr->size); } else { charIndex += segPtr->size; } numBytes -= segPtr->size; } if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) { charIndex += TkNumUtfChars(segPtr->body.chars, numBytes); } else { charIndex += numBytes; } return snprintf(string, TK_POS_CHARS, "%d.%" TCL_SIZE_MODIFIER "d", TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, indexPtr->linePtr) + 1, charIndex); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 | /* * The elide state only changes if this tag is either the * current highest priority tag (and is therefore being * toggled off), or it's a new tag with higher priority. */ | | | 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 1623 1624 1625 1626 1627 1628 1629 1630 1631 | /* * The elide state only changes if this tag is either the * current highest priority tag (and is therefore being * toggled off), or it's a new tag with higher priority. */ if (tagPtr->elideObj) { infoPtr->tagCnts[tagPtr->priority]++; if (infoPtr->tagCnts[tagPtr->priority] & 1) { infoPtr->tagPtrs[tagPtr->priority] = tagPtr; } if (tagPtr->priority >= infoPtr->elidePriority) { if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1636 1637 1638 1639 1640 1641 1642 | * elide will be zero, of course). */ elide = 0; while (--infoPtr->elidePriority > 0) { if (infoPtr->tagCnts[infoPtr->elidePriority] & 1) { | | | | | | 1644 1645 1646 1647 1648 1649 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 1655 1656 1657 1658 1659 1660 1661 1662 1663 1664 1665 1666 1667 1668 1669 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 | * elide will be zero, of course). */ elide = 0; while (--infoPtr->elidePriority > 0) { if (infoPtr->tagCnts[infoPtr->elidePriority] & 1) { elide = infoPtr->tagPtrs[infoPtr->elidePriority]->elideObj && infoPtr->tagPtrs[infoPtr->elidePriority]->elide != 0; break; } } } else { elide = tagPtr->elideObj && (tagPtr->elide != 0); infoPtr->elidePriority = tagPtr->priority; } } } } if (!elide) { if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) { start = segPtr->body.chars + byteOffset; end = segPtr->body.chars + segPtr->size; for (p = start; p < end; p += TkUtfToUniChar(p, &ch)) { if (charCount == 0) { dstPtr->byteIndex += (p - start); goto forwardCharDone; } charCount--; } } else if (type & COUNT_INDICES) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1859 1860 1861 1862 1863 1864 1865 | /* * The elide state only changes if this tag is either the * current highest priority tag (and is therefore being * toggled off), or it's a new tag with higher priority. */ | | | 1867 1868 1869 1870 1871 1872 1873 1874 1875 1876 1877 1878 1879 1880 1881 | /* * The elide state only changes if this tag is either the * current highest priority tag (and is therefore being * toggled off), or it's a new tag with higher priority. */ if (tagPtr->elideObj) { infoPtr->tagCnts[tagPtr->priority]++; if (infoPtr->tagCnts[tagPtr->priority] & 1) { infoPtr->tagPtrs[tagPtr->priority] = tagPtr; } if (tagPtr->priority >= infoPtr->elidePriority) { if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType) { /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1886 1887 1888 1889 1890 1891 1892 | * then elide will be zero, of course). */ elide = 0; while (--infoPtr->elidePriority > 0) { if (infoPtr->tagCnts[ infoPtr->elidePriority] & 1) { | | | | | 1894 1895 1896 1897 1898 1899 1900 1901 1902 1903 1904 1905 1906 1907 1908 1909 1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 | * then elide will be zero, of course). */ elide = 0; while (--infoPtr->elidePriority > 0) { if (infoPtr->tagCnts[ infoPtr->elidePriority] & 1) { elide = infoPtr->tagPtrs[infoPtr->elidePriority]->elideObj && (infoPtr->tagPtrs[infoPtr->elidePriority]->elide != 0); break; } } } else { elide = tagPtr->elideObj && (tagPtr->elide != 0); infoPtr->elidePriority = tagPtr->priority; } } } } if (elide) { if (segPtr == seg2Ptr) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1936 1937 1938 1939 1940 1941 1942 | while (i && (*str < 0xC0)) { i--; str++; } count += byteLen - i; if (i) { | | | 1944 1945 1946 1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 | while (i && (*str < 0xC0)) { i--; str++; } count += byteLen - i; if (i) { count += TkNumUtfChars(segPtr->body.chars + byteOffset + (byteLen - i), i); } } else { if (type & COUNT_INDICES) { Tcl_Size byteLen = segPtr->size - byteOffset; if (segPtr == seg2Ptr) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2148 2149 2150 2151 2152 2153 2154 | /* * The elide state only changes if this tag is either the current * highest priority tag (and is therefore being toggled off), or * it's a new tag with higher priority. */ | | | 2156 2157 2158 2159 2160 2161 2162 2163 2164 2165 2166 2167 2168 2169 2170 | /* * The elide state only changes if this tag is either the current * highest priority tag (and is therefore being toggled off), or * it's a new tag with higher priority. */ if (tagPtr->elideObj) { infoPtr->tagCnts[tagPtr->priority]++; if (infoPtr->tagCnts[tagPtr->priority] & 1) { infoPtr->tagPtrs[tagPtr->priority] = tagPtr; } if (tagPtr->priority >= infoPtr->elidePriority) { if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType) { /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2173 2174 2175 2176 2177 2178 2179 | * Find previous elide tag, if any (if not then elide * will be zero, of course). */ elide = 0; while (--infoPtr->elidePriority > 0) { if (infoPtr->tagCnts[infoPtr->elidePriority] & 1) { | | | | < < < | 2181 2182 2183 2184 2185 2186 2187 2188 2189 2190 2191 2192 2193 2194 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 2200 2201 2202 2203 2204 2205 2206 2207 2208 2209 2210 2211 2212 2213 2214 2215 2216 2217 2218 2219 | * Find previous elide tag, if any (if not then elide * will be zero, of course). */ elide = 0; while (--infoPtr->elidePriority > 0) { if (infoPtr->tagCnts[infoPtr->elidePriority] & 1) { elide = infoPtr->tagPtrs[infoPtr->elidePriority]->elideObj && (infoPtr->tagPtrs[infoPtr->elidePriority]->elide != 0); break; } } } else { elide = tagPtr->elideObj && (tagPtr->elide != 0); infoPtr->elidePriority = tagPtr->priority; } } } } if (!elide) { if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) { start = segPtr->body.chars; end = segPtr->body.chars + segSize; for (p = end; ; p = Tcl_UtfPrev(p, start)) { if (charCount == 0) { dstPtr->byteIndex -= (end - p); goto backwardCharDone; } if (p == start) { break; } if (charCount != 0) { charCount--; } } } else { if (type & COUNT_INDICES) { if (charCount <= segSize) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2385 2386 2387 2388 2389 2390 2391 | segPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(indexPtr, &offset); while (1) { int chSize = 1; if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) { int ch; | | | 2390 2391 2392 2393 2394 2395 2396 2397 2398 2399 2400 2401 2402 2403 2404 | segPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(indexPtr, &offset); while (1) { int chSize = 1; if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) { int ch; chSize = TkUtfToUniChar(segPtr->body.chars + offset, &ch); if (!Tcl_UniCharIsWordChar(ch)) { break; } firstChar = 0; } offset += chSize; indexPtr->byteIndex += chSize; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2430 2431 2432 2433 2434 2435 2436 | segPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(indexPtr, &offset); while (1) { int chSize = 1; if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) { int ch; | | | 2435 2436 2437 2438 2439 2440 2441 2442 2443 2444 2445 2446 2447 2448 2449 | segPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(indexPtr, &offset); while (1) { int chSize = 1; if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) { int ch; TkUtfToUniChar(segPtr->body.chars + offset, &ch); if (!Tcl_UniCharIsWordChar(ch)) { break; } if (offset + 1 > 1) { chSize = (segPtr->body.chars + offset - Tcl_UtfPrev(segPtr->body.chars + offset, segPtr->body.chars)); |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkTextMark.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
619 620 621 622 623 624 625 | { /* * We have no need for the clientData. */ /* TkText *textPtr = chunkPtr->clientData; */ TkTextIndex index; | | < < < | 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 | { /* * We have no need for the clientData. */ /* TkText *textPtr = chunkPtr->clientData; */ TkTextIndex index; int halfWidth = textPtr->insertWidth/2; int rightSideWidth; int ix = 0, iy = 0, iw = 0, ih = 0, charWidth = 0; if (textPtr->insertCursorType) { TkTextMarkSegToIndex(textPtr, textPtr->insertMarkPtr, &index); TkTextIndexBbox(textPtr, &index, &ix, &iy, &iw, &ih, &charWidth); rightSideWidth = charWidth + halfWidth; } else { rightSideWidth = halfWidth; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
657 658 659 660 661 662 663 | * nothing) when the cursor isn't on. Otherwise the selection might hide * the cursor. */ if (textPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS) { if (textPtr->flags & INSERT_ON) { Tk_Fill3DRectangle(textPtr->tkwin, dst, textPtr->insertBorder, | | | | | < < < < | > > > > | | | 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 | * nothing) when the cursor isn't on. Otherwise the selection might hide * the cursor. */ if (textPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS) { if (textPtr->flags & INSERT_ON) { Tk_Fill3DRectangle(textPtr->tkwin, dst, textPtr->insertBorder, x - halfWidth, y, charWidth + textPtr->insertWidth, height, textPtr->insertBorderWidth, TK_RELIEF_RAISED); } else if (textPtr->selBorder == textPtr->insertBorder) { Tk_Fill3DRectangle(textPtr->tkwin, dst, textPtr->border, x - halfWidth, y, charWidth + textPtr->insertWidth, height, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT); } } else if (textPtr->insertUnfocussed == TK_TEXT_INSERT_NOFOCUS_HOLLOW) { if (textPtr->insertBorderWidth < 1) { /* * Hack to work around the fact that a "solid" border always * paints in black. */ TkBorder *borderPtr = (TkBorder *) textPtr->insertBorder; XDrawRectangle(Tk_Display(textPtr->tkwin), dst, borderPtr->bgGC, x - halfWidth, y, charWidth + textPtr->insertWidth - 1, height - 1); } else { Tk_Draw3DRectangle(textPtr->tkwin, dst, textPtr->insertBorder, x - halfWidth, y, charWidth + textPtr->insertWidth, height, textPtr->insertBorderWidth, TK_RELIEF_RAISED); } } else if (textPtr->insertUnfocussed == TK_TEXT_INSERT_NOFOCUS_SOLID) { Tk_Fill3DRectangle(textPtr->tkwin, dst, textPtr->insertBorder, x - halfWidth, y, charWidth + textPtr->insertWidth, height, textPtr->insertBorderWidth, TK_RELIEF_RAISED); } } /* *-------------------------------------------------------------- * * InsertUndisplayProc -- |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkTextTag.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 | * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #include "tkInt.h" #include "tkText.h" #include "default.h" static const Tk_OptionSpec tagOptionSpecs[] = { {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", NULL, NULL, NULL, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkTextTag, border), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BITMAP, "-bgstipple", NULL, NULL, NULL, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkTextTag, bgStipple), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(TkTextTag, borderWidthObj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-elide", NULL, NULL, | > > > > > > > > > > > | | | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 | * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #include "tkInt.h" #include "tkText.h" #include "default.h" /* This struct can be used for booleans, relief and pixels */ typedef struct { char *string; int value; } IntStruct; typedef struct { char *string; Tk_Justify value; } JustifyStruct; static const Tk_OptionSpec tagOptionSpecs[] = { {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", NULL, NULL, NULL, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkTextTag, border), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BITMAP, "-bgstipple", NULL, NULL, NULL, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkTextTag, bgStipple), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(TkTextTag, borderWidthObj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-elide", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(TkTextTag, elideObj), offsetof(TkTextTag, elide), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BITMAP, "-fgstipple", NULL, NULL, NULL, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkTextTag, fgStipple), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", NULL, NULL, NULL, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkTextTag, tkfont), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", NULL, NULL, NULL, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkTextTag, fgColor), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", NULL, NULL, NULL, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkTextTag, justify), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0,0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-lmargin1", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(TkTextTag, lMargin1Obj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-lmargin2", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(TkTextTag, lMargin2Obj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0}, {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-lmargincolor", NULL, NULL, NULL, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkTextTag, lMarginColor), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-offset", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(TkTextTag, offsetObj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-overstrike", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(TkTextTag, overstrikeObj), offsetof(TkTextTag, overstrike), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-overstrikefg", NULL, NULL, NULL, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkTextTag, overstrikeColor), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", NULL, NULL, NULL, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkTextTag, relief), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-rmargin", NULL, NULL, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
67 68 69 70 71 72 73 | NULL, offsetof(TkTextTag, spacing3Obj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-tabs", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(TkTextTag, tabStringPtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-tabstyle", NULL, NULL, NULL, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkTextTag, tabStyle), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK|TK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR, tkTextTabStyleStrings, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-underline", NULL, NULL, | | | 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 | NULL, offsetof(TkTextTag, spacing3Obj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-tabs", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(TkTextTag, tabStringPtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-tabstyle", NULL, NULL, NULL, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkTextTag, tabStyle), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK|TK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR, tkTextTabStyleStrings, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-underline", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(TkTextTag, underlineObj), offsetof(TkTextTag, underline), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-underlinefg", NULL, NULL, NULL, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkTextTag, underlineColor), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-wrap", NULL, NULL, NULL, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkTextTag, wrapMode), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK|TK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR, tkTextWrapStrings, 0}, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
158 159 160 161 162 163 164 | } if (objc < 5) { Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagName index1 ?index2 index1 index2 ...?"); return TCL_ERROR; } tagPtr = TkTextCreateTag(textPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), NULL); | | | | | 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 | } if (objc < 5) { Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagName index1 ?index2 index1 index2 ...?"); return TCL_ERROR; } tagPtr = TkTextCreateTag(textPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), NULL); if (tagPtr->elideObj && (tagPtr->elide != 0)) { /* * Indices are potentially obsolete after adding or removing * elided character ranges, especially indices having "display" * or "any" submodifier, therefore increase the epoch. */ textPtr->sharedTextPtr->stateEpoch++; } for (i = 4; i < objc; i += 2) { if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[i], &index1) != TCL_OK) { return TCL_ERROR; } if (objc > (i+1)) { if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[i+1], &index2) != TCL_OK) { return TCL_ERROR; } if (TkTextIndexCmp(&index1, &index2) >= 0) { return TCL_OK; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
277 278 279 280 281 282 283 | |EnterWindowMask|LeaveWindowMask|KeyPressMask |KeyReleaseMask|PointerMotionMask|VirtualEventMask)) { Tk_DeleteBinding(interp, textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable, (void *) tagPtr->name, Tcl_GetString(objv[4])); Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj( "requested illegal events; only key, button, motion," " enter, leave, and virtual events may be used", TCL_INDEX_NONE)); | | | 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 | |EnterWindowMask|LeaveWindowMask|KeyPressMask |KeyReleaseMask|PointerMotionMask|VirtualEventMask)) { Tk_DeleteBinding(interp, textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable, (void *) tagPtr->name, Tcl_GetString(objv[4])); Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj( "requested illegal events; only key, button, motion," " enter, leave, and virtual events may be used", TCL_INDEX_NONE)); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "TEXT", "TAG_BIND_EVENT", (char *)NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } } else if (objc == 5) { const char *command; command = Tk_GetBinding(interp, textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
368 369 370 371 372 373 374 | Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, textPtr->tkwin, tagPtr->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth); if (borderWidth < 0) { borderWidth = 0; Tcl_DecrRefCount(tagPtr->borderWidthObj); tagPtr->borderWidthObj = Tcl_NewIntObj(0); Tcl_IncrRefCount(tagPtr->borderWidthObj); } | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | | | 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 | Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, textPtr->tkwin, tagPtr->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth); if (borderWidth < 0) { borderWidth = 0; Tcl_DecrRefCount(tagPtr->borderWidthObj); tagPtr->borderWidthObj = Tcl_NewIntObj(0); Tcl_IncrRefCount(tagPtr->borderWidthObj); } } if (tagPtr->tabArrayPtr != NULL) { ckfree(tagPtr->tabArrayPtr); tagPtr->tabArrayPtr = NULL; } if (tagPtr->tabStringPtr != NULL) { tagPtr->tabArrayPtr = TkTextGetTabs(interp, textPtr, tagPtr->tabStringPtr); if (tagPtr->tabArrayPtr == NULL) { return TCL_ERROR; } } if (tagPtr->elideObj) { /* * Indices are potentially obsolete after changing -elide, * especially those computed with "display" or "any" * submodifier, therefore increase the epoch. */ textPtr->sharedTextPtr->stateEpoch++; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
444 445 446 447 448 449 450 | } else { textPtr->selFgColorPtr = tagPtr->selFgColor; } } tagPtr->affectsDisplay = 0; tagPtr->affectsDisplayGeometry = 0; | | | 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 | } else { textPtr->selFgColorPtr = tagPtr->selFgColor; } } tagPtr->affectsDisplay = 0; tagPtr->affectsDisplayGeometry = 0; if ((tagPtr->elideObj) || (tagPtr->tkfont != NULL) || (tagPtr->justify != TK_JUSTIFY_NULL) || (tagPtr->lMargin1Obj != NULL) || (tagPtr->lMargin2Obj != NULL) || (tagPtr->offsetObj != NULL) || (tagPtr->rMarginObj != NULL) || (tagPtr->spacing1Obj != NULL) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
470 471 472 473 474 475 476 | if ((tagPtr->border != NULL) || (tagPtr->selBorder != NULL) || (tagPtr->relief != TK_RELIEF_NULL) || (tagPtr->bgStipple != None) || (tagPtr->fgColor != NULL) || (tagPtr->selFgColor != NULL) || (tagPtr->fgStipple != None) | | | | 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 | if ((tagPtr->border != NULL) || (tagPtr->selBorder != NULL) || (tagPtr->relief != TK_RELIEF_NULL) || (tagPtr->bgStipple != None) || (tagPtr->fgColor != NULL) || (tagPtr->selFgColor != NULL) || (tagPtr->fgStipple != None) || (tagPtr->overstrikeObj != NULL) || (tagPtr->overstrikeColor != NULL) || (tagPtr->underlineObj != NULL) || (tagPtr->underlineColor != NULL) || (tagPtr->lMarginColor != NULL) || (tagPtr->rMarginColor != NULL)) { tagPtr->affectsDisplay = 1; } if (!newTag) { /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
504 505 506 507 508 509 510 | case TAG_DELETE: { Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr; if (objc < 4) { Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagName ?tagName ...?"); return TCL_ERROR; } | | | 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 | case TAG_DELETE: { Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr; if (objc < 4) { Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagName ?tagName ...?"); return TCL_ERROR; } for (i = 3; i < objc; i++) { hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tagTable, Tcl_GetString(objv[i])); if (hPtr == NULL) { /* * Either this tag doesn't exist or it's the 'sel' tag (which * is not in the hash table). Either way we don't want to * delete it. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
608 609 610 611 612 613 614 | SortTags(arraySize, arrayPtr); listObj = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL); for (i = 0; i < arraySize; i++) { tagPtr = arrayPtr[i]; Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, | | | 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 | SortTags(arraySize, arrayPtr); listObj = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL); for (i = 0; i < arraySize; i++) { tagPtr = arrayPtr[i]; Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, Tcl_NewStringObj(tagPtr->name, TCL_INDEX_NONE)); } Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObj); ckfree(arrayPtr); break; } case TAG_NEXTRANGE: { TkTextIndex last; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
972 973 974 975 976 977 978 | tagPtr->lMargin1Obj = NULL; tagPtr->lMargin1 = 0; tagPtr->lMargin2Obj = NULL; tagPtr->lMargin2 = 0; tagPtr->lMarginColor = NULL; tagPtr->offsetObj = NULL; tagPtr->offset = 0; | | > | > | > | 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 | tagPtr->lMargin1Obj = NULL; tagPtr->lMargin1 = 0; tagPtr->lMargin2Obj = NULL; tagPtr->lMargin2 = 0; tagPtr->lMarginColor = NULL; tagPtr->offsetObj = NULL; tagPtr->offset = 0; tagPtr->overstrikeObj = NULL; tagPtr->overstrike = 0; tagPtr->overstrikeColor = NULL; tagPtr->rMarginObj = NULL; tagPtr->rMargin = 0; tagPtr->rMarginColor = NULL; tagPtr->selBorder = NULL; tagPtr->selFgColor = NULL; tagPtr->spacing1Obj = NULL; tagPtr->spacing2Obj = NULL; tagPtr->spacing3Obj = NULL; tagPtr->tabStringPtr = NULL; tagPtr->tabArrayPtr = NULL; tagPtr->tabStyle = TK_TEXT_TABSTYLE_NULL; tagPtr->underlineObj = NULL; tagPtr->underline = 0; tagPtr->underlineColor = NULL; tagPtr->elideObj = NULL; tagPtr->elide = 0; tagPtr->wrapMode = TEXT_WRAPMODE_NULL; tagPtr->affectsDisplay = 0; tagPtr->affectsDisplayGeometry = 0; textPtr->sharedTextPtr->numTags++; if (!strcmp(tagName, "sel")) { tagPtr->textPtr = textPtr; textPtr->refCount++; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 | return (TkTextTag *)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr); } if (interp != NULL) { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "tag \"%s\" isn't defined in text widget", Tcl_GetString(tagName))); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "LOOKUP", "TEXT_TAG", | | | 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 | return (TkTextTag *)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr); } if (interp != NULL) { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "tag \"%s\" isn't defined in text widget", Tcl_GetString(tagName))); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "LOOKUP", "TEXT_TAG", Tcl_GetString(tagName), (char *)NULL); } return NULL; } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkTextWind.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
92 93 94 95 96 97 98 | /* * Information used for parsing window configuration options: */ static const Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = { {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-align", NULL, NULL, "center", TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkTextEmbWindow, align), | | | | | 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 | /* * Information used for parsing window configuration options: */ static const Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = { {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-align", NULL, NULL, "center", TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkTextEmbWindow, align), TK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR, alignStrings, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-create", NULL, NULL, NULL, offsetof(TkTextEmbWindow, createObj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", NULL, NULL, "0", TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkTextEmbWindow, padX), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", NULL, NULL, "0", TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkTextEmbWindow, padY), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-stretch", NULL, NULL, "0", TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkTextEmbWindow, stretch), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_WINDOW, "-window", NULL, NULL, NULL, TCL_INDEX_NONE, offsetof(TkTextEmbWindow, tkwin), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0} }; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
288 289 290 291 292 293 294 | ewPtr->typePtr = &tkTextEmbWindowType; ewPtr->size = 1; ewPtr->body.ew.sharedTextPtr = textPtr->sharedTextPtr; ewPtr->body.ew.linePtr = NULL; ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin = NULL; ewPtr->body.ew.createObj = NULL; ewPtr->body.ew.align = TK_ALIGN_CENTER; | | | 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 | ewPtr->typePtr = &tkTextEmbWindowType; ewPtr->size = 1; ewPtr->body.ew.sharedTextPtr = textPtr->sharedTextPtr; ewPtr->body.ew.linePtr = NULL; ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin = NULL; ewPtr->body.ew.createObj = NULL; ewPtr->body.ew.align = TK_ALIGN_CENTER; ewPtr->body.ew.padX = ewPtr->body.ew.padY = 0; ewPtr->body.ew.stretch = 0; ewPtr->body.ew.optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, optionSpecs); client = (TkTextEmbWindowClient *)ckalloc(sizeof(TkTextEmbWindowClient)); client->next = NULL; client->textPtr = textPtr; client->tkwin = NULL; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
829 830 831 832 833 834 835 | TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr) /* Structure to fill in with information about * this chunk. The x field has already been * set by the caller. */ { int width, height; TkTextEmbWindowClient *client; | < | 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 | TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr) /* Structure to fill in with information about * this chunk. The x field has already been * set by the caller. */ { int width, height; TkTextEmbWindowClient *client; if (offset != 0) { Tcl_Panic("Non-zero offset in EmbWinLayoutProc"); } client = EmbWinGetClient(textPtr, ewPtr); if (client == NULL) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
985 986 987 988 989 990 991 | */ gotWindow: if (ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin == NULL) { width = 0; height = 0; } else { | < < < < < < | | | | | 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 | */ gotWindow: if (ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin == NULL) { width = 0; height = 0; } else { width = Tk_ReqWidth(ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin) + 2*ewPtr->body.ew.padX; height = Tk_ReqHeight(ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin) + 2*ewPtr->body.ew.padY; } if ((width > (maxX - chunkPtr->x)) && !noCharsYet && (textPtr->wrapMode != TEXT_WRAPMODE_NONE)) { return 0; } /* * Fill in the chunk structure. */ chunkPtr->displayProc = TkTextEmbWinDisplayProc; chunkPtr->undisplayProc = EmbWinUndisplayProc; chunkPtr->measureProc = NULL; chunkPtr->bboxProc = EmbWinBboxProc; chunkPtr->numBytes = 1; if (ewPtr->body.ew.align == TK_ALIGN_BASELINE) { chunkPtr->minAscent = height - ewPtr->body.ew.padY; chunkPtr->minDescent = ewPtr->body.ew.padY; chunkPtr->minHeight = 0; } else { chunkPtr->minAscent = 0; chunkPtr->minDescent = 0; chunkPtr->minHeight = height; } chunkPtr->width = width; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 | * pixels. */ int *heightPtr) /* Gets filled in with height of window, in * pixels. */ { Tk_Window tkwin; TkTextSegment *ewPtr = (TkTextSegment *)chunkPtr->clientData; TkTextEmbWindowClient *client = EmbWinGetClient(textPtr, ewPtr); | < < < < < < < | | | | | | 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 | * pixels. */ int *heightPtr) /* Gets filled in with height of window, in * pixels. */ { Tk_Window tkwin; TkTextSegment *ewPtr = (TkTextSegment *)chunkPtr->clientData; TkTextEmbWindowClient *client = EmbWinGetClient(textPtr, ewPtr); if (client == NULL) { tkwin = NULL; } else { tkwin = client->tkwin; } if (tkwin != NULL) { *widthPtr = Tk_ReqWidth(tkwin); *heightPtr = Tk_ReqHeight(tkwin); } else { *widthPtr = 0; *heightPtr = 0; } *xPtr = chunkPtr->x + ewPtr->body.ew.padX; if (ewPtr->body.ew.stretch) { if (ewPtr->body.ew.align == TK_ALIGN_BASELINE) { *heightPtr = baseline - ewPtr->body.ew.padY; } else { *heightPtr = lineHeight - 2*ewPtr->body.ew.padY; } } switch (ewPtr->body.ew.align) { case TK_ALIGN_BOTTOM: *yPtr = y + (lineHeight - *heightPtr - ewPtr->body.ew.padY); break; case TK_ALIGN_CENTER: *yPtr = y + (lineHeight - *heightPtr)/2; break; case TK_ALIGN_TOP: *yPtr = y + ewPtr->body.ew.padY; break; case TK_ALIGN_BASELINE: *yPtr = y + (baseline - *heightPtr); break; } } |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkUtil.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 | event.virt.name = Tk_GetUid(eventName); event.virt.user_data = detail; if (detail) Tcl_IncrRefCount(detail); // Event code will DecrRefCount Tk_QueueWindowEvent(&event.general, TCL_QUEUE_TAIL); } /* * Local Variables: * mode: c * c-basic-offset: 4 * fill-column: 78 * End: */ | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 1360 1361 1362 1363 1364 1365 1366 1367 1368 1369 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 1375 1376 1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 1390 1391 | event.virt.name = Tk_GetUid(eventName); event.virt.user_data = detail; if (detail) Tcl_IncrRefCount(detail); // Event code will DecrRefCount Tk_QueueWindowEvent(&event.general, TCL_QUEUE_TAIL); } #if TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 /* *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- * * TkUtfToUniChar -- * * Almost the same as Tcl_UtfToUniChar but using int instead of Tcl_UniChar. * This function is capable of collapsing a upper/lower surrogate pair to a * single unicode character. So, up to 6 bytes might be consumed. * * Results: * *chPtr is filled with the Tcl_UniChar, and the return value is the * number of bytes from the UTF-8 string that were consumed. * * Side effects: * None. * *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ Tcl_Size TkUtfToUniChar( const char *src, /* The UTF-8 string. */ int *chPtr) /* Filled with the Unicode value represented by * the UTF-8 string. */ { Tcl_UniChar uniChar = 0; Tcl_Size len = Tcl_UtfToUniChar(src, &uniChar); if ((uniChar & 0xFC00) == 0xD800) { Tcl_UniChar low = uniChar; /* This can only happen if src points to a character > U+FFFF */ Tcl_Size len2 = Tcl_UtfToUniChar(src+len, &low); if ((low & 0xFC00) == 0xDC00) { *chPtr = (((uniChar & 0x3FF) << 10) | (low & 0x3FF)) + 0x10000; return len + len2; } } *chPtr = uniChar; return len; } /* *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- * * TkUniCharToUtf -- * * Almost the same as Tcl_UniCharToUtf but producing 2 x 3-byte UTF-8 * sequences for out-of-bmp characters when TCL_UTF_MAX==3. * So, up to 6 bytes might be produced. * * Results: * *buf is filled with the UTF-8 string, and the return value is the * number of bytes produced. * * Side effects: * None. * *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ Tcl_Size TkUniCharToUtf(int ch, char *buf) { if ((unsigned)(ch - 0x10000) <= 0xFFFFF) { /* Spit out a 4-byte UTF-8 character (Tcl 8.7+) or * 2 x 3-byte UTF-8 characters (Tcl 8.6) */ Tcl_Size len = Tcl_UniCharToUtf(0xD800 | ((ch - 0x10000) >> 10), buf); return len + Tcl_UniCharToUtf(0xDC00 | (ch & 0x7FF), buf + len); } return Tcl_UniCharToUtf(ch, buf); } #endif /* * Local Variables: * mode: c * c-basic-offset: 4 * fill-column: 78 * End: */ |
Changes to generic/tkWindow.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
895 896 897 898 899 900 901 | Tcl_InitHashTable(&mainPtr->imageTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS); mainPtr->strictMotif = 0; mainPtr->alwaysShowSelection = 0; mainPtr->tclUpdateObjProc = NULL; #if TCL_MAJOR_VERSION > 8 mainPtr->tclUpdateObjProc2 = NULL; #endif | | | | 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 | Tcl_InitHashTable(&mainPtr->imageTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS); mainPtr->strictMotif = 0; mainPtr->alwaysShowSelection = 0; mainPtr->tclUpdateObjProc = NULL; #if TCL_MAJOR_VERSION > 8 mainPtr->tclUpdateObjProc2 = NULL; #endif if (Tcl_LinkVar(interp, "tk_strictMotif", (char *)&mainPtr->strictMotif, TCL_LINK_BOOLEAN) != TCL_OK) { Tcl_ResetResult(interp); } if (Tcl_CreateNamespace(interp, "::tk", NULL, NULL) == NULL) { Tcl_ResetResult(interp); } if (Tcl_LinkVar(interp, "::tk::AlwaysShowSelection", (char *)&mainPtr->alwaysShowSelection, TCL_LINK_BOOLEAN) != TCL_OK) { Tcl_ResetResult(interp); } mainPtr->nextPtr = tsdPtr->mainWindowList; tsdPtr->mainWindowList = mainPtr; winPtr->mainPtr = mainPtr; hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&mainPtr->nameTable, ".", &dummy); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2992 2993 2994 2995 2996 2997 2998 | } #if defined(_WIN32) && !defined(STATIC_BUILD) static HMODULE tkcygwindll = NULL; /* | | | | | | | 2992 2993 2994 2995 2996 2997 2998 2999 3000 3001 3002 3003 3004 3005 3006 3007 3008 3009 3010 3011 3012 3013 3014 3015 3016 3017 3018 3019 3020 3021 3022 3023 3024 3025 3026 3027 3028 3029 3030 3031 3032 3033 3034 3035 | } #if defined(_WIN32) && !defined(STATIC_BUILD) static HMODULE tkcygwindll = NULL; /* * Run Tk_MainEx from libtk8.?.dll * * This function is only ever called from wish8.?.exe, the cygwin port of Tcl. * This means that the system encoding is utf-8, so we don't have to do any * encoding conversions. */ MODULE_SCOPE void TkCygwinMainEx( Tcl_Size argc, /* Number of arguments. */ char **argv, /* Array of argument strings. */ Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc, /* Application-specific initialization * procedure to call after most initialization * but before starting to execute commands. */ Tcl_Interp *interp) { WCHAR name[MAX_PATH]; size_t len; void (*tkmainex)(Tcl_Size, char **, Tcl_AppInitProc *, Tcl_Interp *); /* construct "<path>/libtk8.?.dll", from "<path>/tk8?.dll" */ len = GetModuleFileNameW((HINSTANCE)Tk_GetHINSTANCE(), name, MAX_PATH); name[len-2] = '.'; name[len-1] = name[len-5]; wcscpy(name+len, L".dll"); #if TCL_MAJOR_VERSION > 8 memcpy(name+len-12, L"libtcl9tk8", 10 * sizeof(WCHAR)); #else memcpy(name+len-8, L"libtk8", 6 * sizeof(WCHAR)); #endif tkcygwindll = LoadLibraryW(name); if (tkcygwindll) { tkmainex = (void (*)(Tcl_Size, char **, Tcl_AppInitProc *, Tcl_Interp *)) (void *)GetProcAddress(tkcygwindll, "Tk_MainEx"); if (tkmainex) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3221 3222 3223 3224 3225 3226 3227 | TCL_ARGV_AUTO_REST, TCL_ARGV_AUTO_HELP, TCL_ARGV_TABLE_END }; /* * Ensure that we are getting a compatible version of Tcl. */ | | | 3221 3222 3223 3224 3225 3226 3227 3228 3229 3230 3231 3232 3233 3234 3235 | TCL_ARGV_AUTO_REST, TCL_ARGV_AUTO_HELP, TCL_ARGV_TABLE_END }; /* * Ensure that we are getting a compatible version of Tcl. */ if (Tcl_InitStubs(interp, "8.6-", 0) == NULL) { return TCL_ERROR; } /* * TIP #59: Make embedded configuration information available. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3421 3422 3423 3424 3425 3426 3427 | } if (visualObj) { Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, cmd, Tcl_NewStringObj("-visual", TCL_INDEX_NONE)); Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, cmd, visualObj); visualObj = NULL; } | < < < < < < | < | 3421 3422 3423 3424 3425 3426 3427 3428 3429 3430 3431 3432 3433 3434 3435 | } if (visualObj) { Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, cmd, Tcl_NewStringObj("-visual", TCL_INDEX_NONE)); Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, cmd, visualObj); visualObj = NULL; } code = TkListCreateFrame(NULL, interp, cmd, 1, nameObj); Tcl_DecrRefCount(cmd); if (code != TCL_OK) { goto done; } Tcl_ResetResult(interp); |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/ttk/ttk.decls.
︙ | ︙ | |||
139 140 141 142 143 144 145 | declare 35 { Tcl_Obj *Ttk_NewBoxObj(Ttk_Box box) } # # Utilities. # | | | | 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 | declare 35 { Tcl_Obj *Ttk_NewBoxObj(Ttk_Box box) } # # Utilities. # declare 40 {deprecated {}} { int Ttk_GetOrientFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *orient) } |
Changes to generic/ttk/ttkClamTheme.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
545 546 547 548 549 550 551 | * * TODO: factor this with ThumbElementDraw */ typedef struct { Tcl_Obj *lightColorObj; Tcl_Obj *borderColorObj; | | | | | > | > | 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 | * * TODO: factor this with ThumbElementDraw */ typedef struct { Tcl_Obj *lightColorObj; Tcl_Obj *borderColorObj; Tcl_Obj *gripCountObj; } GripElement; static const Ttk_ElementOptionSpec GripElementOptions[] = { { "-lightcolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR, offsetof(GripElement,lightColorObj), LIGHT_COLOR }, { "-bordercolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR, offsetof(GripElement,borderColorObj), DARKEST_COLOR }, { "-gripcount", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, offsetof(GripElement,gripCountObj), "5" }, { NULL, TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, 0, NULL } }; static void GripElementSize( void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, TCL_UNUSED(Ttk_Padding *)) { Ttk_Orient orient = (Ttk_Orient)PTR2INT(clientData); GripElement *grip = (GripElement *)elementRecord; int gripSize = 0; Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, grip->gripCountObj, &gripSize); gripSize *= 2; if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) { *widthPtr = gripSize; } else { *heightPtr = gripSize; } } static void GripElementDraw( void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, TCL_UNUSED(Ttk_State)) { const int w = WIN32_XDRAWLINE_HACK; Ttk_Orient orient = (Ttk_Orient)PTR2INT(clientData); GripElement *grip = (GripElement *)elementRecord; GC lightGC = Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,grip->lightColorObj,d); GC darkGC = Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,grip->borderColorObj,d); int gripPad = 1, gripSize = 0; int i; Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, grip->gripCountObj, &gripSize); gripSize *= 2; if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) { int x = b.x + (b.width - gripSize) / 2; int y1 = b.y + gripPad, y2 = b.y + b.height - gripPad - 1 + w; for (i=0; i<gripSize; ++i) { XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, (i&1)?lightGC:darkGC, x,y1, x,y2); ++x; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
631 632 633 634 635 636 637 | Tcl_Obj *backgroundObj; Tcl_Obj *borderColorObj; Tcl_Obj *troughColorObj; Tcl_Obj *lightColorObj; Tcl_Obj *darkColorObj; Tcl_Obj *arrowColorObj; Tcl_Obj *arrowSizeObj; | | | | | 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 | Tcl_Obj *backgroundObj; Tcl_Obj *borderColorObj; Tcl_Obj *troughColorObj; Tcl_Obj *lightColorObj; Tcl_Obj *darkColorObj; Tcl_Obj *arrowColorObj; Tcl_Obj *arrowSizeObj; Tcl_Obj *gripCountObj; Tcl_Obj *sliderlengthObj; } ScrollbarElement; static const Ttk_ElementOptionSpec ScrollbarElementOptions[] = { { "-orient", TK_OPTION_ANY, offsetof(ScrollbarElement, orientObj), "horizontal" }, { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER, offsetof(ScrollbarElement,backgroundObj), FRAME_COLOR }, { "-bordercolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR, offsetof(ScrollbarElement,borderColorObj), DARKEST_COLOR }, { "-troughcolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR, offsetof(ScrollbarElement,troughColorObj), DARKER_COLOR }, { "-lightcolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR, offsetof(ScrollbarElement,lightColorObj), LIGHT_COLOR }, { "-darkcolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR, offsetof(ScrollbarElement,darkColorObj), DARK_COLOR }, { "-arrowcolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR, offsetof(ScrollbarElement,arrowColorObj), "#000000" }, { "-arrowsize", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, offsetof(ScrollbarElement,arrowSizeObj), STR(SCROLLBAR_THICKNESS) }, { "-gripcount", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, offsetof(ScrollbarElement,gripCountObj), "5" }, { "-sliderlength", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, offsetof(ScrollbarElement,sliderlengthObj), "30" }, { NULL, TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, 0, NULL } }; static void TroughElementDraw( TCL_UNUSED(void *), /* clientData */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
722 723 724 725 726 727 728 | XFillRectangle( Tk_Display(tkwin), d, BackgroundGC(tkwin, sb->backgroundObj), b.x+2, b.y+2, b.width-4, b.height-4); /* * Draw grip: */ | | | > | 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 | XFillRectangle( Tk_Display(tkwin), d, BackgroundGC(tkwin, sb->backgroundObj), b.x+2, b.y+2, b.width-4, b.height-4); /* * Draw grip: */ TtkGetOrientFromObj(NULL, sb->orientObj, &orient); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, sb->gripCountObj, &gripSize); gripSize *= 2; lightGC = Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,sb->lightColorObj,d); darkGC = Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,sb->borderColorObj,d); if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) { dx = 1; dy = 0; x1 = x2 = b.x + (b.width - gripSize) / 2; y1 = b.y + 2; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
770 771 772 773 774 775 776 | TCL_UNUSED(Ttk_Padding *)) { ScrollbarElement *sb = (ScrollbarElement *)elementRecord; int length, thickness; Ttk_Orient orient; length = thickness = SCROLLBAR_THICKNESS; | | | 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 | TCL_UNUSED(Ttk_Padding *)) { ScrollbarElement *sb = (ScrollbarElement *)elementRecord; int length, thickness; Ttk_Orient orient; length = thickness = SCROLLBAR_THICKNESS; TtkGetOrientFromObj(NULL, sb->orientObj, &orient); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, sb->arrowSizeObj, &thickness); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, sb->sliderlengthObj, &length); if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL) { *heightPtr = length; *widthPtr = thickness; } else { *heightPtr = thickness; |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/ttk/ttkClassicTheme.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
230 231 232 233 234 235 236 | static const Ttk_ElementOptionSpec IndicatorElementOptions[] = { { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER, offsetof(IndicatorElement,backgroundObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND }, { "-indicatorcolor", TK_OPTION_BORDER, offsetof(IndicatorElement,colorObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND }, { "-indicatorrelief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF, offsetof(IndicatorElement,reliefObj), "raised" }, | | | 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 | static const Ttk_ElementOptionSpec IndicatorElementOptions[] = { { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER, offsetof(IndicatorElement,backgroundObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND }, { "-indicatorcolor", TK_OPTION_BORDER, offsetof(IndicatorElement,colorObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND }, { "-indicatorrelief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF, offsetof(IndicatorElement,reliefObj), "raised" }, { "-indicatordiameter", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, offsetof(IndicatorElement,sizeObj), "9p" }, { "-indicatormargin", TK_OPTION_STRING, offsetof(IndicatorElement,marginObj), "0 2 4 2" }, { "-borderwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, offsetof(IndicatorElement,borderWidthObj), DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH }, { NULL, TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, 0, NULL } }; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
590 591 592 593 594 595 596 | int *heightPtr, TCL_UNUSED(Ttk_Padding *)) { SliderElement *slider = (SliderElement *)elementRecord; Ttk_Orient orient; int length, thickness; | | | 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 | int *heightPtr, TCL_UNUSED(Ttk_Padding *)) { SliderElement *slider = (SliderElement *)elementRecord; Ttk_Orient orient; int length, thickness; TtkGetOrientFromObj(NULL, slider->orientObj, &orient); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, slider->lengthObj, &length); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, slider->thicknessObj, &thickness); switch (orient) { case TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL: *widthPtr = thickness; *heightPtr = length; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
623 624 625 626 627 628 629 | Tk_3DBorder border = NULL; int relief = TK_RELIEF_RAISED, borderWidth = 2; Ttk_Orient orient; border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, slider->borderObj); Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, slider->reliefObj, &relief); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, slider->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth); | | | 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 | Tk_3DBorder border = NULL; int relief = TK_RELIEF_RAISED, borderWidth = 2; Ttk_Orient orient; border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, slider->borderObj); Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, slider->reliefObj, &relief); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, slider->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth); TtkGetOrientFromObj(NULL, slider->orientObj, &orient); Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border, b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height, borderWidth, relief); if (relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT) { if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) { |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/ttk/ttkDecls.h.
︙ | ︙ | |||
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 | extern const char *TtkInitializeStubs( Tcl_Interp *, const char *version, int epoch, int revision); #define Ttk_InitStubs(interp) TtkInitializeStubs( \ interp, TTK_VERSION, TTK_STUBS_EPOCH, TTK_STUBS_REVISION) #else | > > > | > | 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 | extern const char *TtkInitializeStubs( Tcl_Interp *, const char *version, int epoch, int revision); #define Ttk_InitStubs(interp) TtkInitializeStubs( \ interp, TTK_VERSION, TTK_STUBS_EPOCH, TTK_STUBS_REVISION) #else #if !defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) && TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 # define Ttk_InitStubs(interp) Tcl_PkgRequireEx(interp, "Ttk", TTK_VERSION, 0, NULL) #else # define Ttk_InitStubs(interp) Tcl_PkgRequireEx(interp, "ttk", TTK_VERSION, 0, NULL) #endif #endif #if !defined(BUILD_tk) # define TTK_DEPRECATED(msg) TTKAPI TCL_DEPRECATED_API(msg) #elif defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) # define TTK_DEPRECATED(msg) MODULE_SCOPE |
︙ | ︙ | |||
135 136 137 138 139 140 141 | /* 35 */ TTKAPI Tcl_Obj * Ttk_NewBoxObj(Ttk_Box box); /* Slot 36 is reserved */ /* Slot 37 is reserved */ /* Slot 38 is reserved */ /* Slot 39 is reserved */ /* 40 */ | > | | | 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 | /* 35 */ TTKAPI Tcl_Obj * Ttk_NewBoxObj(Ttk_Box box); /* Slot 36 is reserved */ /* Slot 37 is reserved */ /* Slot 38 is reserved */ /* Slot 39 is reserved */ /* 40 */ TTK_DEPRECATED("") int Ttk_GetOrientFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *orient); typedef struct TtkStubs { int magic; int epoch; int revision; void *hooks; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
184 185 186 187 188 189 190 | Ttk_Box (*ttk_ExpandBox) (Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p); /* 33 */ Ttk_Box (*ttk_PlaceBox) (Ttk_Box *cavity, int w, int h, Ttk_Side side, Ttk_Sticky sticky); /* 34 */ Tcl_Obj * (*ttk_NewBoxObj) (Ttk_Box box); /* 35 */ void (*reserved36)(void); void (*reserved37)(void); void (*reserved38)(void); void (*reserved39)(void); | | | 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 | Ttk_Box (*ttk_ExpandBox) (Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p); /* 33 */ Ttk_Box (*ttk_PlaceBox) (Ttk_Box *cavity, int w, int h, Ttk_Side side, Ttk_Sticky sticky); /* 34 */ Tcl_Obj * (*ttk_NewBoxObj) (Ttk_Box box); /* 35 */ void (*reserved36)(void); void (*reserved37)(void); void (*reserved38)(void); void (*reserved39)(void); TCL_DEPRECATED_API("") int (*ttk_GetOrientFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *orient); /* 40 */ } TtkStubs; extern const TtkStubs *ttkStubsPtr; #ifdef __cplusplus } #endif |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/ttk/ttkDefaultTheme.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 | TCL_UNUSED(Ttk_Padding *)) { ThumbElement *thumb = (ThumbElement *)elementRecord; Ttk_Orient orient; int size; Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, thumb->sizeObj, &size); | | | 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 | TCL_UNUSED(Ttk_Padding *)) { ThumbElement *thumb = (ThumbElement *)elementRecord; Ttk_Orient orient; int size; Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, thumb->sizeObj, &size); TtkGetOrientFromObj(NULL, thumb->orientObj, &orient); if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL) { *widthPtr = size; *heightPtr = MIN_THUMB_SIZE; } else { *widthPtr = MIN_THUMB_SIZE; *heightPtr = size; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 | int *heightPtr, TCL_UNUSED(Ttk_Padding *)) { SliderElement *slider = (SliderElement *)elementRecord; Ttk_Orient orient; int thickness, borderWidth; | | | 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 | int *heightPtr, TCL_UNUSED(Ttk_Padding *)) { SliderElement *slider = (SliderElement *)elementRecord; Ttk_Orient orient; int thickness, borderWidth; TtkGetOrientFromObj(NULL, slider->orientObj, &orient); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, slider->thicknessObj, &thickness); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, slider->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth); switch (orient) { case TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL: *widthPtr = thickness + (borderWidth *2); *heightPtr = *widthPtr/2; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 | Tcl_Obj *marginObj; Tcl_Obj *sizeObj; } TreeitemIndicator; static const Ttk_ElementOptionSpec TreeitemIndicatorOptions[] = { { "-foreground", TK_OPTION_COLOR, offsetof(TreeitemIndicator,colorObj), DEFAULT_FOREGROUND }, | | | 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 | Tcl_Obj *marginObj; Tcl_Obj *sizeObj; } TreeitemIndicator; static const Ttk_ElementOptionSpec TreeitemIndicatorOptions[] = { { "-foreground", TK_OPTION_COLOR, offsetof(TreeitemIndicator,colorObj), DEFAULT_FOREGROUND }, { "-diameter", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, offsetof(TreeitemIndicator,sizeObj), "6.75p" }, { "-indicatormargins", TK_OPTION_STRING, offsetof(TreeitemIndicator,marginObj), "2 2 4 2" }, { NULL, TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, 0, NULL } }; static void TreeitemIndicatorSize( |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/ttk/ttkElements.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
521 522 523 524 525 526 527 | static void GeneralSeparatorElementDraw( void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, Ttk_State state) { SeparatorElement *separator = (SeparatorElement *)elementRecord; Ttk_Orient orient; | | | 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 | static void GeneralSeparatorElementDraw( void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, Ttk_State state) { SeparatorElement *separator = (SeparatorElement *)elementRecord; Ttk_Orient orient; TtkGetOrientFromObj(NULL, separator->orientObj, &orient); switch (orient) { case TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL: HorizontalSeparatorElementDraw( clientData, elementRecord, tkwin, d, b, state); break; case TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL: VerticalSeparatorElementDraw( |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 | int borderWidth = 1, grooveWidth = -1, relief = TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN; Ttk_Orient orient; TkMainInfo *mainInfoPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr; Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, troughPtr->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, troughPtr->grooveWidthObj, &grooveWidth); Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, troughPtr->reliefObj, &relief); | | | 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 | int borderWidth = 1, grooveWidth = -1, relief = TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN; Ttk_Orient orient; TkMainInfo *mainInfoPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr; Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, troughPtr->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, troughPtr->grooveWidthObj, &grooveWidth); Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, troughPtr->reliefObj, &relief); TtkGetOrientFromObj(NULL, troughPtr->orientObj, &orient); if (grooveWidth > 0 && grooveWidth < b.height && grooveWidth < b.width) { if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) { b.y += (b.height - grooveWidth) / 2; b.height = grooveWidth; } else { b.x += (b.width - grooveWidth) / 2; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 | TCL_UNUSED(Ttk_Padding *)) { ThumbElement *thumb = (ThumbElement *)elementRecord; Ttk_Orient orient; int thickness; Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, thumb->thicknessObj, &thickness); | | | 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 | TCL_UNUSED(Ttk_Padding *)) { ThumbElement *thumb = (ThumbElement *)elementRecord; Ttk_Orient orient; int thickness; Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, thumb->thicknessObj, &thickness); TtkGetOrientFromObj(NULL, thumb->orientObj, &orient); if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL) { *widthPtr = thickness; *heightPtr = MIN_THUMB_SIZE; } else { *widthPtr = MIN_THUMB_SIZE; *heightPtr = thickness; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1436 1437 1438 1439 1440 1441 1442 | } /* * Fill the thin trough area preceding the * slider's center with the inner color */ if (mainInfoPtr != NULL) { | | | 1436 1437 1438 1439 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 1445 1446 1447 1448 1449 1450 | } /* * Fill the thin trough area preceding the * slider's center with the inner color */ if (mainInfoPtr != NULL) { TtkGetOrientFromObj(NULL, slider->orientObj, &orient); switch (orient) { case TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL: XFillRectangle(disp, d, gc, mainInfoPtr->troughInnerX, mainInfoPtr->troughInnerY, b.x + dim/2 - 1, mainInfoPtr->troughInnerHeight); break; case TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL: |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 | int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, TCL_UNUSED(Ttk_Padding *)) { PbarElement *pbar = (PbarElement *)elementRecord; Ttk_Orient orient; int thickness = 15, length = 30, borderWidth = 2; | | | 1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588 1589 | int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, TCL_UNUSED(Ttk_Padding *)) { PbarElement *pbar = (PbarElement *)elementRecord; Ttk_Orient orient; int thickness = 15, length = 30, borderWidth = 2; TtkGetOrientFromObj(NULL, pbar->orientObj, &orient); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, pbar->thicknessObj, &thickness); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, pbar->lengthObj, &length); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, pbar->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth); switch (orient) { case TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL: *widthPtr = length + 2 * borderWidth; |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/ttk/ttkEntry.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
296 297 298 299 300 301 302 | static char *EntryDisplayString(const char *showChar, int numChars) { char *displayString, *p; int size; int ch; char buf[6]; | | | | 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 | static char *EntryDisplayString(const char *showChar, int numChars) { char *displayString, *p; int size; int ch; char buf[6]; TkUtfToUniChar(showChar, &ch); size = TkUniCharToUtf(ch, buf); p = displayString = (char *)ckalloc(numChars * size + 1); while (numChars--) { memcpy(p, buf, size); p += size; } *p = '\0'; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
365 366 367 368 369 370 371 | if (entryPtr->entry.selectFirst < 0 || (!entryPtr->entry.exportSelection) || Tcl_IsSafe(entryPtr->core.interp)) { return TCL_INDEX_NONE; } string = entryPtr->entry.displayString; | | | | 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 | if (entryPtr->entry.selectFirst < 0 || (!entryPtr->entry.exportSelection) || Tcl_IsSafe(entryPtr->core.interp)) { return TCL_INDEX_NONE; } string = entryPtr->entry.displayString; selStart = TkUtfAtIndex(string, entryPtr->entry.selectFirst); selEnd = TkUtfAtIndex(selStart, entryPtr->entry.selectLast - entryPtr->entry.selectFirst); if (selEnd <= selStart + offset) { return 0; } byteCount = selEnd - selStart - offset; if (byteCount > maxBytes) { /* @@@POSSIBLE BUG: Can transfer partial UTF-8 sequences. Is this OK? */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
454 455 456 457 458 459 460 | templ = string; } /* There's a percent sequence here. Process it. */ ++templ; /* skip over % */ if (*templ != '\0') { | | | 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 | templ = string; } /* There's a percent sequence here. Process it. */ ++templ; /* skip over % */ if (*templ != '\0') { templ += TkUtfToUniChar(templ, &ch); } else { ch = '%'; } stringLength = -1; switch (ch) { case 'd': /* Type of call that caused validation */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
484 485 486 487 488 489 490 | string = newValue; break; case 's': /* Current string value */ string = entryPtr->entry.string; break; case 'S': /* string to be inserted/deleted, if any */ if (reason == VALIDATE_INSERT) { | | | | | | | 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 | string = newValue; break; case 's': /* Current string value */ string = entryPtr->entry.string; break; case 'S': /* string to be inserted/deleted, if any */ if (reason == VALIDATE_INSERT) { string = TkUtfAtIndex(newValue, index); stringLength = TkUtfAtIndex(string, count) - string; } else if (reason == VALIDATE_DELETE) { string = TkUtfAtIndex(entryPtr->entry.string, index); stringLength = TkUtfAtIndex(string, count) - string; } else { string = ""; stringLength = 0; } break; case 'v': /* type of validation currently set */ string = validateStrings[entryPtr->entry.validate]; break; case 'V': /* type of validation in effect */ string = validateReasonStrings[reason]; break; case 'W': /* widget name */ string = Tk_PathName(entryPtr->core.tkwin); break; default: length = TkUniCharToUtf(ch, numStorage); numStorage[length] = '\0'; string = numStorage; break; } spaceNeeded = Tcl_ScanCountedElement(string, stringLength, &cvtFlags); length = Tcl_DStringLength(dsPtr); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
736 737 738 739 740 741 742 | * * See also: EntrySetValue(). */ static void EntryStoreValue(Entry *entryPtr, const char *value) { size_t numBytes = strlen(value); | | | 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 | * * See also: EntrySetValue(). */ static void EntryStoreValue(Entry *entryPtr, const char *value) { size_t numBytes = strlen(value); Tcl_Size numChars = TkNumUtfChars(value, numBytes); if (entryPtr->core.flags & VALIDATING) entryPtr->core.flags |= VALIDATION_SET_VALUE; /* Make sure all indices remain in bounds: */ if (numChars < entryPtr->entry.numChars) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
838 839 840 841 842 843 844 | /* InsertChars -- * Add new characters to an entry widget. */ static int InsertChars( Entry *entryPtr, /* Entry that is to get the new elements. */ Tcl_Size index, /* Insert before this index */ | | < | | | 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 | /* InsertChars -- * Add new characters to an entry widget. */ static int InsertChars( Entry *entryPtr, /* Entry that is to get the new elements. */ Tcl_Size index, /* Insert before this index */ const char *value) /* New characters to add */ { char *string = entryPtr->entry.string; size_t byteIndex = TkUtfAtIndex(string, index) - string; size_t byteCount = strlen(value); int charsAdded = TkNumUtfChars(value, byteCount); size_t newByteCount = entryPtr->entry.numBytes + byteCount + 1; char *newBytes; int code; if (byteCount == 0) { return TCL_OK; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
896 897 898 899 900 901 902 | if (count + index > entryPtr->entry.numChars) { count = entryPtr->entry.numChars - index; } if (count <= 0) { return TCL_OK; } | | | | 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 | if (count + index > entryPtr->entry.numChars) { count = entryPtr->entry.numChars - index; } if (count <= 0) { return TCL_OK; } byteIndex = TkUtfAtIndex(string, index) - string; byteCount = TkUtfAtIndex(string+byteIndex, count) - (string+byteIndex); newByteCount = entryPtr->entry.numBytes + 1 - byteCount; newBytes = (char *)ckalloc(newByteCount); memcpy(newBytes, string, byteIndex); strcpy(newBytes + byteIndex, string + byteIndex + byteCount); code = EntryValidateChange( |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1316 1317 1318 1319 1320 1321 1322 | } /* Draw the text: */ if ((*(entryPtr->entry.displayString) == '\0') && (entryPtr->entry.placeholderObj != NULL)) { /* No text displayed, but -placeholder is given */ | | | 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 | } /* Draw the text: */ if ((*(entryPtr->entry.displayString) == '\0') && (entryPtr->entry.placeholderObj != NULL)) { /* No text displayed, but -placeholder is given */ if (TkGetCharLength(es.placeholderForegroundObj) > 0) { foregroundObj = es.placeholderForegroundObj; } else { foregroundObj = es.foregroundObj; } /* Use placeholder text width */ leftIndex = 0; (void)Tcl_GetStringFromObj(entryPtr->entry.placeholderObj, &rightIndex); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 | Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index text"); return TCL_ERROR; } if (EntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[2], &index) != TCL_OK) { return TCL_ERROR; } if (EntryEditable(entryPtr)) { | | | 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 1623 1624 1625 1626 | Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index text"); return TCL_ERROR; } if (EntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[2], &index) != TCL_OK) { return TCL_ERROR; } if (EntryEditable(entryPtr)) { return InsertChars(entryPtr, index, Tcl_GetString(objv[3])); } return TCL_OK; } /* $entry selection clear -- * Clear selection. */ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/ttk/ttkInit.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 | * Legal values for the -orient option. * See also: enum Ttk_Orient. */ const char *const ttkOrientStrings[] = { "horizontal", "vertical", NULL }; int Ttk_GetOrientFromObj( Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Ttk_Orient *resultPtr) { int orient = (int)TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL; int result = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objPtr, ttkOrientStrings, "orientation", 0, &orient); *resultPtr = (Ttk_Orient)orient; | > > > > > > > > > > | 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 | * Legal values for the -orient option. * See also: enum Ttk_Orient. */ const char *const ttkOrientStrings[] = { "horizontal", "vertical", NULL }; #if !defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) && TK_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 int Ttk_GetOrientFromObj( Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *resultPtr) { *resultPtr = TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL; return Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objPtr, ttkOrientStrings, "orientation", 0, resultPtr); } #endif int TtkGetOrientFromObj( Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Ttk_Orient *resultPtr) { int orient = (int)TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL; int result = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objPtr, ttkOrientStrings, "orientation", 0, &orient); *resultPtr = (Ttk_Orient)orient; |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/ttk/ttkLabel.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 | { "-text", TK_OPTION_STRING, offsetof(TextElement,textObj), "" }, { "-font", TK_OPTION_FONT, offsetof(TextElement,fontObj), DEFAULT_FONT }, { "-foreground", TK_OPTION_COLOR, offsetof(TextElement,foregroundObj), "black" }, { "-underline", TK_OPTION_INDEX, offsetof(TextElement,underlineObj), NULL}, { "-width", TK_OPTION_INT, offsetof(TextElement,widthObj), "-1"}, { "-anchor", TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, offsetof(TextElement,anchorObj), "w"}, { "-justify", TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, offsetof(TextElement,justifyObj), "left" }, { "-wraplength", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, | > > > > | 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 | { "-text", TK_OPTION_STRING, offsetof(TextElement,textObj), "" }, { "-font", TK_OPTION_FONT, offsetof(TextElement,fontObj), DEFAULT_FONT }, { "-foreground", TK_OPTION_COLOR, offsetof(TextElement,foregroundObj), "black" }, { "-underline", TK_OPTION_INDEX, #if !defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) && (TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9) offsetof(TextElement,underlineObj), "-1"}, #else offsetof(TextElement,underlineObj), NULL}, #endif { "-width", TK_OPTION_INT, offsetof(TextElement,widthObj), "-1"}, { "-anchor", TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, offsetof(TextElement,anchorObj), "w"}, { "-justify", TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, offsetof(TextElement,justifyObj), "left" }, { "-wraplength", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 | { "-text", TK_OPTION_STRING, offsetof(LabelElement,text.textObj), "" }, { "-font", TK_OPTION_FONT, offsetof(LabelElement,text.fontObj), DEFAULT_FONT }, { "-foreground", TK_OPTION_COLOR, offsetof(LabelElement,text.foregroundObj), "black" }, { "-underline", TK_OPTION_INDEX, offsetof(LabelElement,text.underlineObj), "-1"}, { "-width", TK_OPTION_INT, offsetof(LabelElement,text.widthObj), ""}, { "-anchor", TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, offsetof(LabelElement,text.anchorObj), "w"}, { "-justify", TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, offsetof(LabelElement,text.justifyObj), "left" }, { "-wraplength", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, | > > > > | 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 | { "-text", TK_OPTION_STRING, offsetof(LabelElement,text.textObj), "" }, { "-font", TK_OPTION_FONT, offsetof(LabelElement,text.fontObj), DEFAULT_FONT }, { "-foreground", TK_OPTION_COLOR, offsetof(LabelElement,text.foregroundObj), "black" }, { "-underline", TK_OPTION_INDEX, #if !defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) && (TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9) offsetof(LabelElement,text.underlineObj), "-1"}, #else offsetof(LabelElement,text.underlineObj), NULL}, #endif { "-width", TK_OPTION_INT, offsetof(LabelElement,text.widthObj), ""}, { "-anchor", TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, offsetof(LabelElement,text.anchorObj), "w"}, { "-justify", TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, offsetof(LabelElement,text.justifyObj), "left" }, { "-wraplength", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/ttk/ttkNotebook.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 | if (element) { const char *elementName = Ttk_ElementName(element); Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(elementName, -1)); } break; case IDENTIFY_TAB: | > | > | < | 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 | if (element) { const char *elementName = Ttk_ElementName(element); Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(elementName, -1)); } break; case IDENTIFY_TAB: #if !defined TK_NO_DEPRECATED && (TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9) if (tabIndex >= 0) #endif Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, TkNewIndexObj(tabIndex)); break; } return TCL_OK; } /* $nb index $item -- * Returns the integer index of the tab specified by $item, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 | if (objc != 3) { Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "tab"); return TCL_ERROR; } status = FindTabIndex(interp, nb, objv[2], &index); if (status == TCL_OK) { | > | > | < | 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 | if (objc != 3) { Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "tab"); return TCL_ERROR; } status = FindTabIndex(interp, nb, objv[2], &index); if (status == TCL_OK) { #if !defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) && (TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9) if (index >= 0) #endif Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, TkNewIndexObj(index)); } return status; } /* $nb select ?$item? -- * Select the specified tab, or return the widget path of |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/ttk/ttkProgress.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
299 300 301 302 303 304 305 | Ttk_Orient orient = TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL; TtkWidgetSize(recordPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr); /* Override requested width (height) based on -length and -orient */ Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, pb->core.tkwin, pb->progress.lengthObj, &length); | | | 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 | Ttk_Orient orient = TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL; TtkWidgetSize(recordPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr); /* Override requested width (height) based on -length and -orient */ Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, pb->core.tkwin, pb->progress.lengthObj, &length); TtkGetOrientFromObj(NULL, pb->progress.orientObj, &orient); if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) { *widthPtr = length; } else { *heightPtr = length; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
372 373 374 375 376 377 378 | Ttk_PlaceLayout(corePtr->layout,corePtr->state,Ttk_WinBox(corePtr->tkwin)); /* Adjust the bar size: */ Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, pb->progress.valueObj, &value); Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, pb->progress.maximumObj, &maximum); | | | 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 | Ttk_PlaceLayout(corePtr->layout,corePtr->state,Ttk_WinBox(corePtr->tkwin)); /* Adjust the bar size: */ Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, pb->progress.valueObj, &value); Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, pb->progress.maximumObj, &maximum); TtkGetOrientFromObj(NULL, pb->progress.orientObj, &orient); if (pbar) { double fraction = value / maximum; Ttk_Box parcel = Ttk_ClientRegion(corePtr->layout, "trough"); if (pb->progress.mode == TTK_PROGRESSBAR_DETERMINATE) { ProgressbarDeterminateLayout( |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/ttk/ttkStubInit.c.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | /* * This file is (mostly) automatically generated from ttk.decls. * It is compiled and linked in with the ttk package proper. */ #include "tkInt.h" #include "ttkTheme.h" MODULE_SCOPE const TtkStubs ttkStubs; #ifdef __GNUC__ /* * The rest of this file shouldn't warn about deprecated functions; they're * there because we intend them to be so and know that this file is OK to * touch those fields. */ | > > > > | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 | /* * This file is (mostly) automatically generated from ttk.decls. * It is compiled and linked in with the ttk package proper. */ #include "tkInt.h" #include "ttkTheme.h" MODULE_SCOPE const TtkStubs ttkStubs; #if defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) || TK_MAJOR_VERSION > 8 #define Ttk_GetOrientFromObj 0 #endif #ifdef __GNUC__ /* * The rest of this file shouldn't warn about deprecated functions; they're * there because we intend them to be so and know that this file is OK to * touch those fields. */ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/ttk/ttkTheme.h.
︙ | ︙ | |||
362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 | TTKAPI int Ttk_GetCompoundFromObj(Tcl_Interp *, Tcl_Obj *, Ttk_Compound *); typedef enum { /* -orient option values */ TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL, TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL } Ttk_Orient; /*------------------------------------------------------------------------ * +++ Utilities. */ typedef struct TtkEnsemble { const char *name; /* subcommand name */ | > > > | 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 | TTKAPI int Ttk_GetCompoundFromObj(Tcl_Interp *, Tcl_Obj *, Ttk_Compound *); typedef enum { /* -orient option values */ TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL, TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL } Ttk_Orient; MODULE_SCOPE int TtkGetOrientFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Ttk_Orient *orient); /*------------------------------------------------------------------------ * +++ Utilities. */ typedef struct TtkEnsemble { const char *name; /* subcommand name */ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/ttk/ttkThemeInt.h.
︙ | ︙ | |||
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 | MODULE_SCOPE const char *Ttk_StyleName(Ttk_Style); MODULE_SCOPE void TtkSetBlinkCursorTimes(Tcl_Interp* interp); MODULE_SCOPE int TtkBoxEqual(Ttk_Box, Ttk_Box); | > > > | > | 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 | MODULE_SCOPE const char *Ttk_StyleName(Ttk_Style); MODULE_SCOPE void TtkSetBlinkCursorTimes(Tcl_Interp* interp); MODULE_SCOPE int TtkBoxEqual(Ttk_Box, Ttk_Box); #if !defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) && (TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9) # define TTK_OPTION_UNDERLINE_DEF(type, field) "-1", offsetof(type, field), TCL_INDEX_NONE, 0, NULL #else # define TTK_OPTION_UNDERLINE_DEF(type, field) NULL, offsetof(type, field), TCL_INDEX_NONE, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL #endif #endif /* _TTKTHEMEINT */ |
Changes to generic/ttk/ttkTreeview.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 | || row > tv->tree.yscroll.first + visibleRows) { /* not viewable, or off-screen */ return -1; } return row - tv->tree.yscroll.first + tv->tree.titleRows; } | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 1750 | || row > tv->tree.yscroll.first + visibleRows) { /* not viewable, or off-screen */ return -1; } return row - tv->tree.yscroll.first + tv->tree.titleRows; } /* + BoundingBox -- * Compute the parcel of the specified column of the specified item, * (or the entire item if column is NULL) * Returns: 0 if item or column is not viewable, 1 otherwise. */ static int BoundingBox( Treeview *tv, /* treeview widget */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1783 1784 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 | UpdatePositionTree(tv); } dispRow = DisplayRow(item->rowPos, tv); if (dispRow < 0) { /* not viewable, or off-screen */ return 0; } | < < < | 1763 1764 1765 1766 1767 1768 1769 1770 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 | UpdatePositionTree(tv); } dispRow = DisplayRow(item->rowPos, tv); if (dispRow < 0) { /* not viewable, or off-screen */ return 0; } bbox.y += dispRow * tv->tree.rowHeight; bbox.height = tv->tree.rowHeight * item->height; bbox.x -= tv->tree.xscroll.first; bbox.width = TreeWidth(tv); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3366 3367 3368 3369 3370 3371 3372 | tv->tree.rowPosNeedsUpdate = 1; TtkRedisplayWidget(&tv->core); ckfree(items); return TCL_OK; } | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 3343 3344 3345 3346 3347 3348 3349 3350 3351 3352 3353 3354 3355 3356 | tv->tree.rowPosNeedsUpdate = 1; TtkRedisplayWidget(&tv->core); ckfree(items); return TCL_OK; } /* + $tv delete $items -- * Delete each item in $items. * * Do this in two passes: * First detach the item and all its descendants and remove them * from the hash table. Free the items themselves in a second pass. * |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3579 3580 3581 3582 3583 3584 3585 | Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "item"); return TCL_ERROR; } if (!(item = FindItem(interp, tv, objv[2]))) { return TCL_ERROR; } | < < < < < < | 3519 3520 3521 3522 3523 3524 3525 3526 3527 3528 3529 3530 3531 3532 | Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "item"); return TCL_ERROR; } if (!(item = FindItem(interp, tv, objv[2]))) { return TCL_ERROR; } /* Make sure all ancestors are open: */ for (parent = item->parent; parent; parent = parent->parent) { if (!(parent->state & TTK_STATE_OPEN)) { parent->openObj = unshareObj(parent->openObj); Tcl_SetBooleanObj(parent->openObj, 1); parent->state |= TTK_STATE_OPEN; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4532 4533 4534 4535 4536 4537 4538 | { "cellselection", TreeviewCellSelectionCommand,0 }, { "children", TreeviewChildrenCommand,0 }, { "cget", TtkWidgetCgetCommand,0 }, { "column", TreeviewColumnCommand,0 }, { "configure", TtkWidgetConfigureCommand,0 }, { "delete", TreeviewDeleteCommand,0 }, { "detach", TreeviewDetachCommand,0 }, | < | 4466 4467 4468 4469 4470 4471 4472 4473 4474 4475 4476 4477 4478 4479 | { "cellselection", TreeviewCellSelectionCommand,0 }, { "children", TreeviewChildrenCommand,0 }, { "cget", TtkWidgetCgetCommand,0 }, { "column", TreeviewColumnCommand,0 }, { "configure", TtkWidgetConfigureCommand,0 }, { "delete", TreeviewDeleteCommand,0 }, { "detach", TreeviewDetachCommand,0 }, { "drag", TreeviewDragCommand,0 }, { "drop", TreeviewDropCommand,0 }, { "exists", TreeviewExistsCommand,0 }, { "focus", TreeviewFocusCommand,0 }, { "heading", TreeviewHeadingCommand,0 }, { "identify", TreeviewIdentifyCommand,0 }, { "index", TreeviewIndexCommand,0 }, |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/ttk/ttkWidget.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
478 479 480 481 482 483 484 | Ttk_Orient orient = TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL; Ttk_Layout layout; Tcl_DStringInit(&styleName); /* Prefix: */ | | | 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 | Ttk_Orient orient = TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL; Ttk_Layout layout; Tcl_DStringInit(&styleName); /* Prefix: */ TtkGetOrientFromObj(NULL, orientObj, &orient); if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) Tcl_DStringAppend(&styleName, "Horizontal.", TCL_INDEX_NONE); else Tcl_DStringAppend(&styleName, "Vertical.", TCL_INDEX_NONE); /* Add base style name: */ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/anilabel.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # anilabel.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window containing # several animated label widgets. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # anilabel.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window containing # several animated label widgets. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .anilabel catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Animated Label Demonstration" wm iconname $w "anilabel" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/aniwave.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 | # aniwave.tcl -- # # This demonstration script illustrates how to adjust canvas item # coordinates in a way that does something fairly similar to waveform # display. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 | # aniwave.tcl -- # # This demonstration script illustrates how to adjust canvas item # coordinates in a way that does something fairly similar to waveform # display. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .aniwave catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Animated Wave Demonstration" wm iconname $w "aniwave" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/arrow.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # arrow.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a canvas widget that displays a # large line with an arrowhead whose shape can be edited interactively. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # arrow.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a canvas widget that displays a # large line with an arrowhead whose shape can be edited interactively. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk # scl -- # Scales an integer according to the display's current scaling percentage. # # Arguments: # num - An integer. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/bind.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # bind.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a text widget with bindings set # up for hypertext-like effects. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # bind.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a text widget with bindings set # up for hypertext-like effects. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .bind catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Text Demonstration - Tag Bindings" wm iconname $w "bind" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/bitmap.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # bitmap.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window that displays # all of Tk's built-in bitmaps. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # bitmap.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window that displays # all of Tk's built-in bitmaps. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk # bitmapRow -- # Create a row of bitmap items in a window. # # Arguments: # w - The window that is to contain the row. # args - The names of one or more bitmaps, which will be displayed |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/browse.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | #!/bin/sh # the next line restarts using wish \ exec wish "$0" ${1+"$@"} # browse -- # This script generates a directory browser, which lists the working # directory and allows you to open files or subdirectories by # double-clicking. | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | #!/bin/sh # the next line restarts using wish \ exec wish "$0" ${1+"$@"} # browse -- # This script generates a directory browser, which lists the working # directory and allows you to open files or subdirectories by # double-clicking. package require Tk # Create a scrollbar on the right side of the main window and a listbox # on the left side. scrollbar .scroll -command ".list yview" pack .scroll -side right -fill y listbox .list -yscroll ".scroll set" -relief sunken -width 20 -height 20 \ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/button.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # button.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window containing # several button widgets. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # button.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window containing # several button widgets. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .button catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Button Demonstration" wm iconname $w "button" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/check.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # check.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window containing # several checkbuttons. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # check.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window containing # several checkbuttons. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .check catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Checkbutton Demonstration" wm iconname $w "check" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/clrpick.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | # clrpick.tcl -- # # This demonstration script prompts the user to select a color. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | # clrpick.tcl -- # # This demonstration script prompts the user to select a color. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .clrpick catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Color Selection Dialog" wm iconname $w "colors" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/colors.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 | # colors.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a listbox widget that displays # many of the colors from the X color database. You can click on # a color to change the application's palette. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 | # colors.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a listbox widget that displays # many of the colors from the X color database. You can click on # a color to change the application's palette. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .colors catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Listbox Demonstration (colors)" wm iconname $w "Listbox" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/combo.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | # combo.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates several combobox widgets. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | # combo.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates several combobox widgets. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .combo catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Combobox Demonstration" wm iconname $w "combo" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/cscroll.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # cscroll.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a simple canvas that can be # scrolled in two dimensions. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # cscroll.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a simple canvas that can be # scrolled in two dimensions. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .cscroll catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Scrollable Canvas Demonstration" wm iconname $w "cscroll" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/ctext.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # ctext.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a canvas widget with a text # item that can be edited and reconfigured in various ways. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # ctext.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a canvas widget with a text # item that can be edited and reconfigured in various ways. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .ctext catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Canvas Text Demonstration" wm iconname $w "Text" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/entry1.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # entry1.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates several entry widgets without # scrollbars. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # entry1.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates several entry widgets without # scrollbars. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .entry1 catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Entry Demonstration (no scrollbars)" wm iconname $w "entry1" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/entry2.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # entry2.tcl -- # # This demonstration script is the same as the entry1.tcl script # except that it creates scrollbars for the entries. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # entry2.tcl -- # # This demonstration script is the same as the entry1.tcl script # except that it creates scrollbars for the entries. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .entry2 catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Entry Demonstration (with scrollbars)" wm iconname $w "entry2" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/entry3.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 | # entry3.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates several entry widgets whose # permitted input is constrained in some way. It also shows off a # password entry. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 | # entry3.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates several entry widgets whose # permitted input is constrained in some way. It also shows off a # password entry. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .entry3 catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Constrained Entry Demonstration" wm iconname $w "entry3" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/filebox.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | # filebox.tcl -- # # This demonstration script prompts the user to select a file. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | # filebox.tcl -- # # This demonstration script prompts the user to select a file. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .filebox catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "File Selection Dialogs" wm iconname $w "filebox" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/floor.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # floor.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a canvas widet that displays the # floorplan for DEC's Western Research Laboratory. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # floor.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a canvas widet that displays the # floorplan for DEC's Western Research Laboratory. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk # floorDisplay -- # Recreate the floorplan display in the canvas given by "w". The # floor given by "active" is displayed on top with its office structure # visible. # # Arguments: |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/fontchoose.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | # fontchoose.tcl -- # # Show off the stock font selector dialog if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | # fontchoose.tcl -- # # Show off the stock font selector dialog if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .fontchoose catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Font Selection Dialog" wm iconname $w "fontchooser" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/form.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # form.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a simple form with a bunch # of entry widgets. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # form.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a simple form with a bunch # of entry widgets. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .form catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Form Demonstration" wm iconname $w "form" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/goldberg.tcl.
︙ | ︙ | |||
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 | # I could comment on the code, but it's just 26 state machines with # lots of canvas create and move calls. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 | # I could comment on the code, but it's just 26 state machines with # lots of canvas create and move calls. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .goldberg catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Tk Goldberg (demonstration)" wm iconname $w "goldberg" wm resizable $w 0 0 |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/hello.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | #!/bin/sh # the next line restarts using wish \ exec wish "$0" ${1+"$@"} # hello -- # Simple Tk script to create a button that prints "Hello, world". # Click on the button to terminate the program. | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | #!/bin/sh # the next line restarts using wish \ exec wish "$0" ${1+"$@"} # hello -- # Simple Tk script to create a button that prints "Hello, world". # Click on the button to terminate the program. package require Tk # The first line below creates the button, and the second line # asks the packer to shrink-wrap the application's main window # around the button. button .hello -text "Hello, world" -command { puts stdout "Hello, world"; destroy . |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/hscale.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | # hscale.tcl -- # # This demonstration script shows an example with a horizontal scale. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | # hscale.tcl -- # # This demonstration script shows an example with a horizontal scale. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .hscale catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Horizontal Scale Demonstration" wm iconname $w "hscale" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/icon.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # icon.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window containing # buttons that display bitmaps instead of text. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # icon.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window containing # buttons that display bitmaps instead of text. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .icon catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Iconic Button Demonstration" wm iconname $w "icon" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/image1.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | # image1.tcl -- # # This demonstration script displays two image widgets. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | # image1.tcl -- # # This demonstration script displays two image widgets. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .image1 catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Image Demonstration #1" wm iconname $w "Image1" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/image2.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # image2.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a simple collection of widgets # that allow you to select and view images in a Tk label. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # image2.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a simple collection of widgets # that allow you to select and view images in a Tk label. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk # loadDir -- # This procedure reloads the directory listbox from the directory # named in the demo's entry. # # Arguments: # w - Name of the toplevel window of the demo. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/images/Tcl.svg.
︙ | ︙ | |||
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 | inkscape:window-height="626" inkscape:window-x="5" inkscape:window-y="49" /> <metadata id="metadata2314"> <rdf:RDF> <cc:Work | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 | inkscape:window-height="626" inkscape:window-x="5" inkscape:window-y="49" /> <metadata id="metadata2314"> <rdf:RDF> <cc:Work rdf:about=""> <dc:format>image/svg+xml</dc:format> <dc:type rdf:resource="http://purl.org/dc/dcmitype/StillImage" /> </cc:Work> </rdf:RDF> </metadata> <g inkscape:label="Layer 1" inkscape:groupmode="layer" id="layer1" transform="translate(-311.79308,-365.73272)"> <g style="opacity:1;display:inline" id="g2244" transform="translate(308.95998,366.42022)"> <path id="path4426" d="M 445.52492,372.22514 C 445.90652,395.55723 445.21415,418.63757 425.02492,440.56889 L 424.27492,441.41264 L 425.39992,441.41264 L 433.64992,441.53764 C 420.24442,469.42405 411.52244,497.23134 392.24367,525.00639 L 391.55617,526.00639 L 392.74367,525.78764 L 402.93117,523.85014 C 395.71427,542.16045 383.37359,554.28293 369.99367,558.35014 C 366.31107,506.78151 392.04593,461.26308 413.89992,415.88139 C 413.92002,415.83965 413.94233,415.79813 413.96242,415.75639 L 413.14992,415.19389 C 377.36425,455.2074 361.23872,511.6427 355.14992,558.19389 C 343.02146,551.34666 338.97913,542.28079 334.86867,529.94389 L 343.33742,533.50639 L 344.21242,533.88139 L 344.02492,532.94389 C 337.58858,504.32416 347.5814,483.78143 357.27492,456.78764 L 364.24367,461.44389 L 365.05617,462.00639 L 365.02492,461.03764 C 364.47892,439.10645 379.24595,417.08983 398.83742,397.44389 L 401.55617,404.72514 L 401.93117,405.69389 L 402.46242,404.78764 L 408.43117,394.85014 L 408.46242,394.78764 C 418.31429,381.21812 428.72988,376.80082 445.52492,372.22514 z " style="fill:#c3b15f;fill-opacity:1;fill-rule:evenodd;stroke:none;stroke-width:1px;stroke-linecap:butt;stroke-linejoin:miter;stroke-opacity:1;display:inline" transform="translate(-324.02492,-364.63139)" /> <path sodipodi:nodetypes="ccccccccccccccccccccccc" id="path7600" d="M 121.54988,7.5808058 C 104.81215,12.147023 94.270242,16.613077 84.4375,30.15625 L 84.40625,30.21875 L 78.4375,40.15625 L 77.90625,41.0625 L 77.53125,40.09375 L 74.8125,32.8125 C 55.22103,52.45844 40.454,74.47506 41,96.40625 L 41.03125,97.375 L 40.21875,96.8125 L 33.25,92.15625 C 23.55648,119.15004 13.56366,139.69277 20,168.3125 L 20.1875,169.25 L 19.3125,168.875 L 10.9375,165.34375 C 10.96447,165.51523 11.003113,165.67421 11.03125,165.84375 C 15.080346,177.9015 19.176955,186.81713 31.125,193.5625 C 31.596616,189.95681 32.122231,186.27456 32.71875,182.5625 C 18.12816,148.39836 30.79293,123.2814 36.5625,100.6875 L 45.4375,105.8125 C 44.211577,84.657017 56.63174,61.842112 72.78125,41.9375 L 77.46875,50.1875 C 89.477498,25.486664 98.97512,15.57175 121.54988,7.5808058 z " style="opacity:1;fill:#eff1cb;fill-opacity:1;fill-rule:evenodd;stroke:#eff1cb;stroke-width:1px;stroke-linecap:butt;stroke-linejoin:miter;stroke-opacity:1;display:inline" /> <path style="fill:#000000;fill-opacity:1;fill-rule:evenodd;stroke:none;stroke-width:1px;stroke-linecap:butt;stroke-linejoin:miter;stroke-opacity:1;display:inline" d="M 126.9375,-0.6875 L 126.40625,-0.59375 C 106.72165,2.83976 87.4508,10.07244 79,27.375 L 75.4375,21.15625 L 75.125,20.59375 L 74.65625,21.0625 C 64.96254,30.33838 54.55574,42.35306 46.875,54.15625 C 39.66528,65.23562 34.88327,76.07934 35.40625,84.375 L 30.375,78.09375 L 29.875,77.46875 L 29.53125,78.1875 C 23.40732,91.41649 17.22694,107.69157 13.53125,122.625 C 10.02725,136.78385 8.77244,149.67206 12.03125,157.78125 L 3.75,152.96875 L 3.0625,152.5625 L 3,153.375 C 1.44089,176.99202 11.0382,188.26833 22.0625,199.15625 L 12.875,201.4375 L 11.03125,201.90625 L 12.875,202.40625 C 18.14953,203.83558 23.15023,205.44485 26.625,208.125 C 30.09977,210.80515 32.09598,214.49082 31.5,220.375 L 31.5,220.40625 L 31.5,245.90625 L 31.5,246.0625 L 31.59375,246.1875 L 43.09375,262.6875 L 44,264 L 44,262.40625 L 44,223.53125 C 45.52181,216.98735 47.30807,212.4833 49.875,209.5 C 52.44193,206.5167 55.78211,204.98483 60.5625,204.40625 L 62.28125,204.1875 L 60.71875,203.46875 L 54.65625,200.59375 C 69.11174,191.89001 85.3013,170.55445 89.5625,150.28125 L 89.75,149.46875 L 88.96875,149.6875 L 81.46875,151.71875 C 88.13174,145.46249 94.84392,133.06721 101.21875,118.625 C 107.9798,103.3078 114.29247,85.96032 119.46875,72.09375 L 119.75,71.34375 L 118.96875,71.40625 L 113.1875,71.8125 C 120.3346,64.22669 124.30703,51.6996 126.25,38.46875 C 128.27227,24.69793 128.13035,10.1977 127,-0.15625 L 126.9375,-0.6875 z M 121.5,7.59375 C 121.8816,30.92584 121.18923,54.00618 101,75.9375 L 100.25,76.78125 L 101.375,76.78125 L 109.625,76.90625 C 96.2195,104.79266 87.49752,132.59995 68.21875,160.375 L 67.53125,161.375 L 68.71875,161.15625 L 78.90625,159.21875 C 71.68935,177.52906 59.34867,189.65154 45.96875,193.71875 C 42.28615,142.15012 68.02101,96.63169 89.875,51.25 C 89.8951,51.20826 89.91741,51.16674 89.9375,51.125 L 89.125,50.5625 C 53.33933,90.57601 37.2138,147.01131 31.125,193.5625 C 18.99654,186.71527 14.95421,177.6494 10.84375,165.3125 L 19.3125,168.875 L 20.1875,169.25 L 20,168.3125 C 13.56366,139.69277 23.55648,119.15004 33.25,92.15625 L 40.21875,96.8125 L 41.03125,97.375 L 41,96.40625 C 40.454,74.47506 55.22103,52.45844 74.8125,32.8125 L 77.53125,40.09375 L 77.90625,41.0625 L 78.4375,40.15625 L 84.40625,30.21875 L 84.4375,30.15625 C 94.28937,16.58673 104.70496,12.16943 121.5,7.59375 z " id="path2177" /> </g> </g> </svg> |
Changes to library/demos/items.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # items.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a canvas that displays the # canvas item types. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # items.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a canvas that displays the # canvas item types. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .items catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Canvas Item Demonstration" wm iconname $w "Items" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/ixset.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 | #!/bin/sh # the next line restarts using wish \ exec wish "$0" ${1+"$@"} # ixset -- # A nice interface to "xset" to change X server settings # # History : # 91/11/23 : pda@masi.ibp.fr, jt@ratp.fr : design # 92/08/01 : pda@masi.ibp.fr : cleaning | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 | #!/bin/sh # the next line restarts using wish \ exec wish "$0" ${1+"$@"} # ixset -- # A nice interface to "xset" to change X server settings # # History : # 91/11/23 : pda@masi.ibp.fr, jt@ratp.fr : design # 92/08/01 : pda@masi.ibp.fr : cleaning package require Tk # # Button actions # proc quit {} { destroy . |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/knightstour.tcl.
︙ | ︙ | |||
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 | # If the call to the Edgemost function is commented out you can see # this occur. # # You can drag the knight to a specific square to start if you wish. # If you let it repeat then it will choose random start positions # for each new tour. | | | 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 | # If the call to the Edgemost function is commented out you can see # this occur. # # You can drag the knight to a specific square to start if you wish. # If you let it repeat then it will choose random start positions # for each new tour. package require Tk # Return a list of accessible squares from a given square proc ValidMoves {square} { set moves {} foreach pair {{-1 -2} {-2 -1} {-2 1} {-1 2} {1 2} {2 1} {2 -1} {1 -2}} { set col [expr {($square % 8) + [lindex $pair 0]}] set row [expr {($square / 8) + [lindex $pair 1]}] |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/label.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # label.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window containing # several label widgets. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # label.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window containing # several label widgets. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .label catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Label Demonstration" wm iconname $w "label" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/labelframe.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # labelframe.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window containing # several labelframe widgets. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # labelframe.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window containing # several labelframe widgets. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .labelframe catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Labelframe Demonstration" wm iconname $w "labelframe" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/mac_styles.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | # mac_styles.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window containing a notebook # whose pages provide examples of the various mac-specific widgets that are # provided via special values for the -style option. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } set w .mac_styles catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w | > > | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 | # mac_styles.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window containing a notebook # whose pages provide examples of the various mac-specific widgets that are # provided via special values for the -style option. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .mac_styles catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w package require Tk wm title $w "Tk Aqua Widgets" wm iconname $w "mac_styles" positionWindow $w ## # System images we use in our buttons set featherImg [file join $tk_demoDirectory images Tk_feather.png] |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/mac_tabs.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 | # mac_tabs.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates three tabbable windows and allows the # wm attributes tabbingid and tabbingmode to be manipulated for the third # window, to demonstrate the effects of those attributes. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | > | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 | # mac_tabs.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates three tabbable windows and allows the # wm attributes tabbingid and tabbingmode to be manipulated for the third # window, to demonstrate the effects of those attributes. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk catch {font create giant -family {Times New Roman} -size 64} set w .mac_tabs catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w package require Tk wm title $w "Tabbed Windows in Aqua" wm iconname $w "mac_tabs" positionWindow $w set suffix 0 set winlist {} ## |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/mac_wm.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 | # mac_window_styles.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window containing a notebook # whose pages provide examples of the various mac-specific widgets that are # provided via special values for the -style option. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | > | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 | # mac_window_styles.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window containing a notebook # whose pages provide examples of the various mac-specific widgets that are # provided via special values for the -style option. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .mac_wm catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w package require Tk wm title $w "Tk Aqua Window Styles" wm iconname $w "mac_wm" positionWindow $w set suffix 0 set winlist {} ## |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/mclist.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # mclist.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window containing a Ttk # tree widget configured as a multi-column listbox. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # mclist.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window containing a Ttk # tree widget configured as a multi-column listbox. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .mclist catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w -class MCList wm title $w "Multi-Column List" wm iconname $w "mclist" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/menu.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # menu.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a window with a bunch of menus # and cascaded menus using menubars. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # menu.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a window with a bunch of menus # and cascaded menus using menubars. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .menu catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Menu Demonstration" wm iconname $w "menu" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/menubu.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # menubu.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a window with a bunch of menus # and cascaded menus using menubuttons. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # menubu.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a window with a bunch of menus # and cascaded menus using menubuttons. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .menubu catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Menu Button Demonstration" wm iconname $w "menubutton" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/msgbox.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | # msgbox.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates message boxes of various type if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | # msgbox.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates message boxes of various type if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .msgbox catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Message Box Demonstration" wm iconname $w "messagebox" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/nl.msg.
︙ | ︙ | |||
62 63 64 65 66 67 68 | "Een eenvoudige user-interface voor het bekijken van plaatjes" ::msgcat::mcset nl "Labelled frames" \ "Kaders met bijschrift" ::msgcat::mcset nl "Listboxes" "Keuzelijsten" ::msgcat::mcset nl "The 50 states" "De 50 staten van de VS" ::msgcat::mcset nl "Colors: change the color scheme for the application" \ | | | | | 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 | "Een eenvoudige user-interface voor het bekijken van plaatjes" ::msgcat::mcset nl "Labelled frames" \ "Kaders met bijschrift" ::msgcat::mcset nl "Listboxes" "Keuzelijsten" ::msgcat::mcset nl "The 50 states" "De 50 staten van de VS" ::msgcat::mcset nl "Colors: change the color scheme for the application" \ "Kleuren: verander het kleurenschema voor het programma" ::msgcat::mcset nl "A collection of famous and infamous sayings" \ "Beroemde en beruchte citaten en gezegden" ::msgcat::mcset nl "Entries and Spin-boxes" "Invulvelden en Spinboxen" ::msgcat::mcset nl "Entries without scrollbars" "Invulvelden zonder schuifbalk" ::msgcat::mcset nl "Entries with scrollbars" "Invulvelden met schuifbalk" ::msgcat::mcset nl "Validated entries and password fields" \ "Invulvelden met controle of wachtwoorden" ::msgcat::mcset nl "Spin-boxes" "Spinboxen" ::msgcat::mcset nl "Simple Rolodex-like form" "Simpel kaartsysteem" ::msgcat::mcset nl "Text" "Tekst" ::msgcat::mcset nl "Basic editable text" "Voorbeeld met te wijzigen tekst" ::msgcat::mcset nl "Text display styles" "Tekst met verschillende stijlen" ::msgcat::mcset nl "Hypertext (tag bindings)" \ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/paned1.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # paned1.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window containing # a paned window that separates two windows horizontally. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # paned1.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window containing # a paned window that separates two windows horizontally. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .paned1 catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Horizontal Paned Window Demonstration" wm iconname $w "paned1" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/paned2.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # paned2.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window containing # a paned window that separates two windows vertically. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # paned2.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window containing # a paned window that separates two windows vertically. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .paned2 catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Vertical Paned Window Demonstration" wm iconname $w "paned2" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/pendulum.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # pendulum.tcl -- # # This demonstration illustrates how Tcl/Tk can be used to construct # simulations of physical systems. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # pendulum.tcl -- # # This demonstration illustrates how Tcl/Tk can be used to construct # simulations of physical systems. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .pendulum catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Pendulum Animation Demonstration" wm iconname $w "pendulum" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/plot.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # plot.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a canvas widget showing a 2-D # plot with data points that can be dragged with the mouse. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # plot.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a canvas widget showing a 2-D # plot with data points that can be dragged with the mouse. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .plot catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Plot Demonstration" wm iconname $w "Plot" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/puzzle.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # puzzle.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a 15-puzzle game using a collection # of buttons. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # puzzle.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a 15-puzzle game using a collection # of buttons. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk # puzzleSwitch -- # This procedure is invoked when the user clicks on a particular button; # if the button is next to the empty space, it moves the button into the # empty space. proc puzzleSwitch {w num} { |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/radio.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # radio.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window containing # several radiobutton widgets. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # radio.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window containing # several radiobutton widgets. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .radio catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Radiobutton Demonstration" wm iconname $w "radio" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/rmt.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | #!/bin/sh # the next line restarts using wish \ exec wish "$0" ${1+"$@"} # rmt -- # This script implements a simple remote-control mechanism for # Tk applications. It allows you to select an application and # then type commands to that application. | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | #!/bin/sh # the next line restarts using wish \ exec wish "$0" ${1+"$@"} # rmt -- # This script implements a simple remote-control mechanism for # Tk applications. It allows you to select an application and # then type commands to that application. package require Tk wm title . "Tk Remote Controller" wm iconname . "Tk Remote" wm minsize . 1 1 # The global variable below keeps track of the remote application # that we're sending to. If it's an empty string then we execute |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/rolodex.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 | #!/bin/sh # the next line restarts using wish \ exec wish "$0" ${1+"$@"} # rolodex -- # This script was written as an entry in Tom LaStrange's rolodex # benchmark. It creates something that has some of the look and # feel of a rolodex program, although it's lifeless and doesn't # actually do the rolodex application. | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 | #!/bin/sh # the next line restarts using wish \ exec wish "$0" ${1+"$@"} # rolodex -- # This script was written as an entry in Tom LaStrange's rolodex # benchmark. It creates something that has some of the look and # feel of a rolodex program, although it's lifeless and doesn't # actually do the rolodex application. package require Tk foreach i [winfo children .] { catch {destroy $i} } set version 1.2 |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/ruler.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # ruler.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a canvas widget that displays a ruler # with tab stops that can be set, moved, and deleted. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # ruler.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a canvas widget that displays a ruler # with tab stops that can be set, moved, and deleted. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk # rulerMkTab -- # This procedure creates a new triangular polygon in a canvas to # represent a tab stop. # # Arguments: # c - The canvas window. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/sayings.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 | # sayings.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a listbox that can be scrolled # both horizontally and vertically. It displays a collection of # well-known sayings. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 | # sayings.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a listbox that can be scrolled # both horizontally and vertically. It displays a collection of # well-known sayings. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .sayings catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Listbox Demonstration (well-known sayings)" wm iconname $w "sayings" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/search.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 | # search.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a collection of widgets that # allow you to load a file into a text widget, then perform searches # on that file. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 | # search.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a collection of widgets that # allow you to load a file into a text widget, then perform searches # on that file. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk # textLoadFile -- # This procedure below loads a file into a text widget, discarding # the previous contents of the widget. Tags for the old widget are # not affected, however. # # Arguments: |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/spin.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | # spin.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates several spinbox widgets. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | # spin.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates several spinbox widgets. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .spin catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Spinbox Demonstration" wm iconname $w "spin" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/states.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # states.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a listbox widget that displays # the names of the 50 states in the United States of America. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # states.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a listbox widget that displays # the names of the 50 states in the United States of America. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .states catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Listbox Demonstration (50 states)" wm iconname $w "states" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/style.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # style.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a text widget that illustrates the # various display styles that may be set for tags. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # style.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a text widget that illustrates the # various display styles that may be set for tags. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .style catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Text Demonstration - Display Styles" wm iconname $w "style" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/tcolor.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | #!/bin/sh # the next line restarts using wish \ exec wish "$0" ${1+"$@"} # tcolor -- # This script implements a simple color editor, where you can # create colors using either the RGB, HSB, or CYM color spaces # and apply the color to existing applications. | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | #!/bin/sh # the next line restarts using wish \ exec wish "$0" ${1+"$@"} # tcolor -- # This script implements a simple color editor, where you can # create colors using either the RGB, HSB, or CYM color spaces # and apply the color to existing applications. package require Tk wm title . "Color Editor" # Global variables that control the program: # # colorSpace - Color space currently being used for # editing. Must be "rgb", "cmy", or "hsb". # label1, label2, label3 - Labels for the scales. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/text.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # text.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a text widget that describes # the basic editing functions. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # text.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a text widget that describes # the basic editing functions. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .text catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Text Demonstration - Basic Facilities" wm iconname $w "text" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/textpeer.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 | # textpeer.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a pair of text widgets that can edit a # single logical buffer. This is particularly useful when editing related text # in two (or more) parts of the same file. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 | # textpeer.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a pair of text widgets that can edit a # single logical buffer. This is particularly useful when editing related text # in two (or more) parts of the same file. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .textpeer catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Text Widget Peering Demonstration" wm iconname $w "textpeer" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/timer.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | #!/bin/sh # the next line restarts using wish \ exec wish "$0" ${1+"$@"} # timer -- # This script generates a counter with start and stop buttons. | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 | #!/bin/sh # the next line restarts using wish \ exec wish "$0" ${1+"$@"} # timer -- # This script generates a counter with start and stop buttons. package require Tk label .counter -text 0.00 -relief raised -width 10 -padx 2m -pady 1m button .start -text Start -command { if {$stopped} { set stopped 0 set startMoment [clock clicks -milliseconds] tick |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/toolbar.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | # toolbar.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toolbar that can be torn off. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | # toolbar.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toolbar that can be torn off. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .toolbar destroy $w toplevel $w wm title $w "Toolbar Demonstration" wm iconname $w "toolbar" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/tree.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # tree.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window containing a Ttk # tree widget. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # tree.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window containing a Ttk # tree widget. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .tree catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Directory Browser" wm iconname $w "tree" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/ttkbut.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 | # ttkbut.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window containing several # simple Ttk widgets, such as labels, labelframes, buttons, checkbuttons and # radiobuttons. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 | # ttkbut.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window containing several # simple Ttk widgets, such as labels, labelframes, buttons, checkbuttons and # radiobuttons. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .ttkbut catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Simple Ttk Widgets" wm iconname $w "ttkbut" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/ttkmenu.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # ttkmenu.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window containing several Ttk # menubutton widgets. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # ttkmenu.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window containing several Ttk # menubutton widgets. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .ttkmenu catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Ttk Menu Buttons" wm iconname $w "ttkmenu" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/ttknote.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # ttknote.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window containing a Ttk # notebook widget. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # ttknote.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a toplevel window containing a Ttk # notebook widget. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .ttknote catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Ttk Notebook Widget" wm iconname $w "ttknote" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/ttkpane.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | # ttkpane.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a Ttk pane with some content. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | # ttkpane.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a Ttk pane with some content. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .ttkpane catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Themed Nested Panes" wm iconname $w "ttkpane" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/ttkprogress.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | # ttkprogress.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates several progress bar widgets. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | # ttkprogress.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates several progress bar widgets. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .ttkprogress catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Progress Bar Demonstration" wm iconname $w "ttkprogress" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/ttkscale.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | # ttkscale.tcl -- # # This demonstration script shows an example with a horizontal scale. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | # ttkscale.tcl -- # # This demonstration script shows an example with a horizontal scale. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .ttkscale catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w -bg [ttk::style lookup TLabel -background] wm title $w "Themed Scale Demonstration" wm iconname $w "ttkscale" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/ttkspin.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | # ttkspin.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates several Ttk spinbox widgets. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | # ttkspin.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates several Ttk spinbox widgets. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .ttkspin catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Themed Spinbox Demonstration" wm iconname $w "ttkspin" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/twind.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # twind.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a text widget with a bunch of # embedded windows. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # twind.tcl -- # # This demonstration script creates a text widget with a bunch of # embedded windows. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk # Make an Aqua button's fill color match its parent's background proc blend {bt} { if {[tk windowingsystem] eq "aqua"} { $bt configure -highlightbackground [[winfo parent $bt] cget -background] } return $bt |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/unicodeout.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | # unicodeout.tcl -- # # This demonstration script shows how you can produce output (in label # widgets) using many different alphabets. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | # unicodeout.tcl -- # # This demonstration script shows how you can produce output (in label # widgets) using many different alphabets. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .unicodeout catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Unicode Label Demonstration" wm iconname $w "unicodeout" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/vscale.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | # vscale.tcl -- # # This demonstration script shows an example with a vertical scale. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | # vscale.tcl -- # # This demonstration script shows an example with a vertical scale. if {![info exists widgetDemo]} { error "This script should be run from the \"widget\" demo." } package require Tk set w .vscale catch {destroy $w} toplevel $w wm title $w "Vertical Scale Demonstration" wm iconname $w "vscale" positionWindow $w |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/demos/widget.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 | #!/bin/sh # the next line restarts using wish \ exec wish "$0" ${1+"$@"} # widget -- # This script demonstrates the various widgets provided by Tk, along with many # of the features of the Tk toolkit. This file only contains code to generate # the main window for the application, which invokes individual # demonstrations. The code for the actual demonstrations is contained in # separate ".tcl" files is this directory, which are sourced by this script as # needed. | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 | #!/bin/sh # the next line restarts using wish \ exec wish "$0" ${1+"$@"} # widget -- # This script demonstrates the various widgets provided by Tk, along with many # of the features of the Tk toolkit. This file only contains code to generate # the main window for the application, which invokes individual # demonstrations. The code for the actual demonstrations is contained in # separate ".tcl" files is this directory, which are sourced by this script as # needed. package require Tk 8.7- package require msgcat destroy {*}[winfo children .] set tk_demoDirectory [file join [pwd] [file dirname [info script]]] ::msgcat::mcload $tk_demoDirectory namespace import ::msgcat::mc wm title . [mc "Widget Demonstration"] |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/menu.tcl.
︙ | ︙ | |||
483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 | } } else { $menu activate @$x,$y GenerateMenuSelect $menu } set index [$menu index @$x,$y] if {[info exists Priv(menuActivated)] \ && $index >= 0 \ && $index ne $activeindex} { set mode [option get $menu clickToFocus ClickToFocus] if {[string is false $mode]} { set delay [expr {[$menu cget -type] eq "menubar" ? 0 : 50}] if {[$menu type $index] eq "cascade"} { # Catch these postcascade commands since the menu could be | > | 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 | } } else { $menu activate @$x,$y GenerateMenuSelect $menu } set index [$menu index @$x,$y] if {[info exists Priv(menuActivated)] \ && $index ne "none" \ && $index >= 0 \ && $index ne $activeindex} { set mode [option get $menu clickToFocus ClickToFocus] if {[string is false $mode]} { set delay [expr {[$menu cget -type] eq "menubar" ? 0 : 50}] if {[$menu type $index] eq "cascade"} { # Catch these postcascade commands since the menu could be |
︙ | ︙ | |||
525 526 527 528 529 530 531 | proc ::tk::MenuButtonDown menu { variable ::tk::Priv if {![winfo viewable $menu]} { return } | | > | 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 | proc ::tk::MenuButtonDown menu { variable ::tk::Priv if {![winfo viewable $menu]} { return } set activeindex [$menu index active] if {($activeindex eq "none") || ($activeindex < 0)} { if {[$menu cget -type] ne "menubar" } { set Priv(window) {} } return } $menu postcascade active if {$Priv(postedMb) ne "" && [winfo viewable $Priv(postedMb)]} { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
583 584 585 586 587 588 589 | # menu - The menu window. # rootx, rooty - Root coordinates of mouse. # state - Modifier state. proc ::tk::MenuLeave {menu rootx rooty state} { variable ::tk::Priv set Priv(window) {} | | > | 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 | # menu - The menu window. # rootx, rooty - Root coordinates of mouse. # state - Modifier state. proc ::tk::MenuLeave {menu rootx rooty state} { variable ::tk::Priv set Priv(window) {} set activeindex [$menu index active] if {($activeindex eq "none") || ($activeindex < 0)} { return } if {[$menu type active] eq "cascade" \ && [winfo containing $rootx $rooty] eq \ [$menu entrycget active -menu]} { return } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
650 651 652 653 654 655 656 | # the use of checkbuttons/commands/etc. on menubars (which is legal, # but not recommended) if { !$isCascade } { uplevel #0 [list $w invoke $activeindex] } } else { | | > | 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 | # the use of checkbuttons/commands/etc. on menubars (which is legal, # but not recommended) if { !$isCascade } { uplevel #0 [list $w invoke $activeindex] } } else { set activeindex [$w index active] if {($Priv(popup) eq "") || (($activeindex ne "none") && ($activeindex >= 0))} { MenuUnpost $w } uplevel #0 [list $w invoke active] } } # ::tk::MenuEscape -- |
︙ | ︙ | |||
794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 | while {$i >= $length} { incr i -$length } set mb [lindex $buttons $i] if {[winfo class $mb] eq "Menubutton" \ && [$mb cget -state] ne "disabled" \ && [$mb cget -menu] ne "" \ && [[$mb cget -menu] index last] >= 0} { break } if {$mb eq $w} { return } incr i $count | > | 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 | while {$i >= $length} { incr i -$length } set mb [lindex $buttons $i] if {[winfo class $mb] eq "Menubutton" \ && [$mb cget -state] ne "disabled" \ && [$mb cget -menu] ne "" \ && [[$mb cget -menu] index last] ne "none" \ && [[$mb cget -menu] index last] >= 0} { break } if {$mb eq $w} { return } incr i $count |
︙ | ︙ | |||
817 818 819 820 821 822 823 | # Arguments: # menu - Menu window that received the keystroke. # count - 1 means go to the next lower entry, # -1 means go to the next higher entry. proc ::tk::MenuNextEntry {menu count} { set last [$menu index last] | | | | 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 | # Arguments: # menu - Menu window that received the keystroke. # count - 1 means go to the next lower entry, # -1 means go to the next higher entry. proc ::tk::MenuNextEntry {menu count} { set last [$menu index last] if {($last eq "none") || ($last < 0)} { return } set length [expr {$last+1}] set quitAfter $length set activeindex [$menu index active] if {($activeindex eq "none") || ($activeindex < 0)} { set i 0 } else { set i [expr {$activeindex + $count}] } while {1} { if {$quitAfter <= 0} { # We've tried every entry in the menu. Either there are |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 | proc ::tk::TraverseWithinMenu {w char} { if {$char eq ""} { return } set char [string tolower $char] set last [$w index last] for {set i 0} {$i <= $last} {incr i} { if {[catch {set char2 [string index \ [$w entrycget $i -label] [$w entrycget $i -underline]]}]} { continue } if {$char eq [string tolower $char2]} { if {[$w type $i] eq "cascade"} { | > > > | 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 | proc ::tk::TraverseWithinMenu {w char} { if {$char eq ""} { return } set char [string tolower $char] set last [$w index last] if {$last eq "none"} { return } for {set i 0} {$i <= $last} {incr i} { if {[catch {set char2 [string index \ [$w entrycget $i -label] [$w entrycget $i -underline]]}]} { continue } if {$char eq [string tolower $char2]} { if {[$w type $i] eq "cascade"} { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 | # menu - Name of the menu window (possibly empty). proc ::tk::MenuFirstEntry menu { if {$menu eq ""} { return } tk_menuSetFocus $menu | | > > > > | 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 | # menu - Name of the menu window (possibly empty). proc ::tk::MenuFirstEntry menu { if {$menu eq ""} { return } tk_menuSetFocus $menu set activeindex [$menu index active] if {($activeindex ne "none") && ($activeindex >= 0)} { return } set last [$menu index last] if {$last eq "none"} { return } for {set i 0} {$i <= $last} {incr i} { if {([catch {set state [$menu entrycget $i -state]}] == 0) \ && $state ne "disabled" && [$menu type $i] ne "tearoff"} { $menu activate $i GenerateMenuSelect $menu # Only post the cascade if the current menu is a menubar; # otherwise, if the first entry of the cascade is a cascade, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 | proc ::tk::MenuFindName {menu s} { set i "" if {![regexp {^active$|^last$|^none$|^[0-9]|^@} $s]} { catch {set i [$menu index $s]} return $i } set last [$menu index last] for {set i 0} {$i <= $last} {incr i} { if {![catch {$menu entrycget $i -label} label]} { if {$label eq $s} { return $i } } } | > > > | 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 | proc ::tk::MenuFindName {menu s} { set i "" if {![regexp {^active$|^last$|^none$|^[0-9]|^@} $s]} { catch {set i [$menu index $s]} return $i } set last [$menu index last] if {$last eq "none"} { return "" } for {set i 0} {$i <= $last} {incr i} { if {![catch {$menu entrycget $i -label} label]} { if {$label eq $s} { return $i } } } |
︙ | ︙ |
Added library/obsolete.tcl.
> > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 | # obsolete.tcl -- # # This file contains obsolete procedures that people really shouldn't # be using anymore, but which are kept around for backward compatibility. # # Copyright © 1994 The Regents of the University of California. # Copyright © 1994 Sun Microsystems, Inc. # # See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution # of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. # # The procedures below are here strictly for backward compatibility with # Tk version 3.6 and earlier. The procedures are no longer needed, so # they are no-ops. You should not use these procedures anymore, since # they may be removed in some future release. proc tk_menuBar args {} proc tk_bindForTraversal args {} # ::tk::classic::restore -- # # Restore the pre-8.5 (Tk classic) look as the widget defaults for classic # Tk widgets. # # The value following an 'option add' call is the new 8.5 value. # namespace eval ::tk::classic { # This may need to be adjusted for some window managers that are # more aggressive with their own Xdefaults (like KDE and CDE) variable prio "widgetDefault" } proc ::tk::classic::restore {args} { # Restore classic (8.4) look to classic Tk widgets variable prio if {[llength $args]} { foreach what $args { ::tk::classic::restore_$what } } else { foreach cmd [info procs restore_*] { $cmd } } } proc ::tk::classic::restore_font {args} { # Many widgets were adjusted from hard-coded defaults to using the # TIP#145 fonts defined in fonts.tcl (eg TkDefaultFont, TkFixedFont, ...) # For restoring compatibility, we only correct size and weighting changes, # as the fonts themselves remained mostly the same. if {[tk windowingsystem] eq "x11"} { font configure TkDefaultFont -weight bold ; # normal font configure TkFixedFont -size -12 ; # -10 } # Add these with prio 21 to override value in dialog/msgbox.tcl if {[tk windowingsystem] eq "aqua"} { option add *Dialog.msg.font system 21; # TkCaptionFont option add *Dialog.dtl.font system 21; # TkCaptionFont option add *ErrorDialog*Label.font system 21; # TkCaptionFont } else { option add *Dialog.msg.font {Times 12} 21; # TkCaptionFont option add *Dialog.dtl.font {Times 10} 21; # TkCaptionFont option add *ErrorDialog*Label.font {Times -18} 21; # TkCaptionFont } } proc ::tk::classic::restore_button {args} { variable prio if {[tk windowingsystem] eq "x11"} { foreach cls {Button Radiobutton Checkbutton} { option add *$cls.borderWidth 2 $prio; # 1 } } } proc ::tk::classic::restore_entry {args} { variable prio # Entry and Spinbox share core defaults foreach cls {Entry Spinbox} { if {[tk windowingsystem] ne "aqua"} { option add *$cls.borderWidth 2 $prio; # 1 } if {[tk windowingsystem] eq "x11"} { option add *$cls.background "#d9d9d9" $prio; # "white" option add *$cls.selectBorderWidth 1 $prio; # 0 } } } proc ::tk::classic::restore_listbox {args} { variable prio if {[tk windowingsystem] ne "win32"} { option add *Listbox.background "#d9d9d9" $prio; # "white" option add *Listbox.activeStyle "underline" $prio; # "dotbox" } if {[tk windowingsystem] ne "aqua"} { option add *Listbox.borderWidth 2 $prio; # 1 } if {[tk windowingsystem] eq "x11"} { option add *Listbox.selectBorderWidth 1 $prio; # 0 } # Remove focus into Listbox added for 8.5 bind Listbox <Button-1> { if {[winfo exists %W]} { tk::ListboxBeginSelect %W [%W index @%x,%y] } } } proc ::tk::classic::restore_menu {args} { variable prio if {[tk windowingsystem] eq "x11"} { option add *Menu.activeBorderWidth 2 $prio; # 1 option add *Menu.borderWidth 2 $prio; # 1 option add *Menu.clickToFocus true $prio option add *Menu.useMotifHelp true $prio } if {[tk windowingsystem] ne "aqua"} { option add *Menu.font "TkDefaultFont" $prio; # "TkMenuFont" } } proc ::tk::classic::restore_menubutton {args} { variable prio option add *Menubutton.borderWidth 2 $prio; # 1 } proc ::tk::classic::restore_message {args} { variable prio option add *Message.borderWidth 2 $prio; # 1 } proc ::tk::classic::restore_panedwindow {args} { variable prio option add *Panedwindow.borderWidth 2 $prio; # 1 option add *Panedwindow.sashWidth 2 $prio; # 3 option add *Panedwindow.sashPad 2 $prio; # 0 option add *Panedwindow.sashRelief raised $prio; # flat option add *Panedwindow.opaqueResize 0 $prio; # 1 if {[tk windowingsystem] ne "win32"} { option add *Panedwindow.showHandle 1 $prio; # 0 } } proc ::tk::classic::restore_scale {args} { variable prio option add *Scale.borderWidth 2 $prio; # 1 if {[tk windowingsystem] eq "x11"} { option add *Scale.troughColor "#c3c3c3" $prio; # "#b3b3b3" } } proc ::tk::classic::restore_scrollbar {args} { variable prio if {[tk windowingsystem] eq "x11"} { option add *Scrollbar.borderWidth 2 $prio; # 1 option add *Scrollbar.highlightThickness 1 $prio; # 0 option add *Scrollbar.width 15 $prio; # 11 option add *Scrollbar.troughColor "#c3c3c3" $prio; # "#b3b3b3" } } proc ::tk::classic::restore_text {args} { variable prio if {[tk windowingsystem] ne "aqua"} { option add *Text.borderWidth 2 $prio; # 1 } if {[tk windowingsystem] eq "win32"} { option add *Text.font "TkDefaultFont" $prio; # "TkFixedFont" } if {[tk windowingsystem] eq "x11"} { option add *Text.background "#d9d9d9" $prio; # white option add *Text.selectBorderWidth 1 $prio; # 0 } } |
Changes to library/tclIndex.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | # Tcl autoload index file, version 2.0 # This file is generated by the "auto_mkindex" command # and sourced to set up indexing information for one or # more commands. Typically each line is a command that # sets an element in the auto_index array, where the # element name is the name of a command and the value is # a script that loads the command. | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | > > > | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | > > | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 | # Tcl autoload index file, version 2.0 # This file is generated by the "auto_mkindex" command # and sourced to set up indexing information for one or # more commands. Typically each line is a command that # sets an element in the auto_index array, where the # element name is the name of a command and the value is # a script that loads the command. set auto_index(::tk::dialog::error::Return) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir bgerror.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::error::Details) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir bgerror.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::error::SaveToLog) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir bgerror.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::error::Destroy) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir bgerror.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::error::bgerror) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir bgerror.tcl]] set auto_index(bgerror) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir bgerror.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ButtonInvoke) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir button.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ButtonAutoInvoke) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir button.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::CheckRadioInvoke) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir button.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::file::chooseDir::) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir choosedir.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::file::chooseDir::Config) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir choosedir.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::file::chooseDir::OkCmd) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir choosedir.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::file::chooseDir::DblClick) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir choosedir.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::file::chooseDir::ListBrowse) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir choosedir.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::file::chooseDir::Done) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir choosedir.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::color::) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir clrpick.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::color::InitValues) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir clrpick.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::color::Config) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir clrpick.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::color::BuildDialog) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir clrpick.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::color::SetRGBValue) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir clrpick.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::color::XToRgb) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir clrpick.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::color::RgbToX) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir clrpick.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::color::DrawColorScale) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir clrpick.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::color::CreateSelector) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir clrpick.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::color::RedrawFinalColor) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir clrpick.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::color::RedrawColorBars) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir clrpick.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::color::StartMove) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir clrpick.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::color::MoveSelector) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir clrpick.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::color::ReleaseMouse) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir clrpick.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::color::ResizeColorBars) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir clrpick.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::color::HandleSelEntry) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir clrpick.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::color::HandleRGBEntry) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir clrpick.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::color::EnterColorBar) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir clrpick.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::color::LeaveColorBar) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir clrpick.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::color::OkCmd) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir clrpick.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::color::CancelCmd) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir clrpick.tcl]] set auto_index(tclParseConfigSpec) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir comdlg.tcl]] set auto_index(tclListValidFlags) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir comdlg.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::FocusGroup_Create) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir comdlg.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::FocusGroup_BindIn) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir comdlg.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::FocusGroup_BindOut) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir comdlg.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::FocusGroup_Destroy) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir comdlg.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::FocusGroup_In) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir comdlg.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::FocusGroup_Out) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir comdlg.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::FDGetFileTypes) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir comdlg.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ConsoleInit) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir console.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ConsoleSource) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir console.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ConsoleInvoke) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir console.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ConsoleHistory) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir console.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ConsolePrompt) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir console.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ConsoleBind) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir console.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ConsoleInsert) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir console.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ConsoleOutput) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir console.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ConsoleExit) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir console.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ConsoleAbout) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir console.tcl]] set auto_index(tk_dialog) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir dialog.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::EntryClosestGap) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir entry.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::EntryButton1) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir entry.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::EntryMouseSelect) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir entry.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::EntryPaste) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir entry.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::EntryAutoScan) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir entry.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::EntryKeySelect) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir entry.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::EntryInsert) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir entry.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::EntryBackspace) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir entry.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::EntrySeeInsert) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir entry.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::EntrySetCursor) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir entry.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::EntryTranspose) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir entry.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::EntryPreviousWord) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir entry.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::EntryGetSelection) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir entry.tcl]] set auto_index(tk_focusNext) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir focus.tcl]] set auto_index(tk_focusPrev) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir focus.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::FocusOK) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir focus.tcl]] set auto_index(tk_focusFollowsMouse) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir focus.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::IconList) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir iconlist.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ListboxBeginSelect) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir listbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ListboxMotion) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir listbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ListboxBeginExtend) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir listbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ListboxBeginToggle) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir listbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ListboxAutoScan) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir listbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ListboxUpDown) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir listbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ListboxExtendUpDown) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir listbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ListboxDataExtend) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir listbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ListboxCancel) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir listbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ListboxSelectAll) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir listbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::Megawidget) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir megawidget.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MbEnter) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir menu.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MbLeave) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir menu.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MbPost) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir menu.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MenuUnpost) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir menu.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MbMotion) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir menu.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MbButtonUp) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir menu.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MenuMotion) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir menu.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MenuButtonDown) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir menu.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MenuLeave) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir menu.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MenuInvoke) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir menu.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MenuEscape) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir menu.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MenuUpArrow) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir menu.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MenuDownArrow) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir menu.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MenuLeftArrow) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir menu.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MenuRightArrow) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir menu.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MenuNextMenu) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir menu.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MenuNextEntry) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir menu.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MenuFind) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir menu.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::TraverseToMenu) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir menu.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::FirstMenu) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir menu.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::TraverseWithinMenu) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir menu.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MenuFirstEntry) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir menu.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MenuFindName) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir menu.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::PostOverPoint) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir menu.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::SaveGrabInfo) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir menu.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::RestoreOldGrab) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir menu.tcl]] set auto_index(tk_menuSetFocus) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir menu.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::GenerateMenuSelect) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir menu.tcl]] set auto_index(tk_popup) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir menu.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ensure_psenc_is_loaded) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir mkpsenc.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MessageBox) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir msgbox.tcl]] set auto_index(tk_menuBar) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir obsolete.tcl]] set auto_index(tk_bindForTraversal) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir obsolete.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::classic::restore) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir obsolete.tcl]] set auto_index(tk_optionMenu) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir optMenu.tcl]] set auto_index(tk_setPalette) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir palette.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::RecolorTree) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir palette.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::Darken) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir palette.tcl]] set auto_index(tk_bisque) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir palette.tcl]] set auto_index(::safe::tkInterpInit) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir safetk.tcl]] set auto_index(::safe::loadTk) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir safetk.tcl]] set auto_index(::safe::TkInit) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir safetk.tcl]] set auto_index(::safe::allowTk) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir safetk.tcl]] set auto_index(::safe::disallowTk) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir safetk.tcl]] set auto_index(::safe::tkDelete) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir safetk.tcl]] set auto_index(::safe::tkTopLevel) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir safetk.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ScaleActivate) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir scale.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ScaleButtonDown) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir scale.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ScaleDrag) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir scale.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ScaleEndDrag) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir scale.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ScaleIncrement) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir scale.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ScaleControlPress) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir scale.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ScaleButton2Down) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir scale.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ScalingPct) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir scaling.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ScaleNum) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir scaling.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::FontScalingFactor) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir scaling.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ScanMonitorsFile) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir scaling.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ScrollButtonDown) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir scrlbar.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ScrollButtonUp) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir scrlbar.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ScrollSelect) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir scrlbar.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ScrollStartDrag) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir scrlbar.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ScrollDrag) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir scrlbar.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ScrollEndDrag) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir scrlbar.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ScrollByUnits) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir scrlbar.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ScrollByPages) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir scrlbar.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ScrollToPos) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir scrlbar.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ScrollTopBottom) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir scrlbar.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ScrollButton2Down) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir scrlbar.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::spinbox::Invoke) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir spinbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::spinbox::ClosestGap) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir spinbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::spinbox::ButtonDown) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir spinbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::spinbox::ButtonUp) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir spinbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::spinbox::MouseSelect) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir spinbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::spinbox::Paste) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir spinbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::spinbox::Motion) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir spinbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::spinbox::AutoScan) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir spinbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::spinbox::KeySelect) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir spinbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::spinbox::Insert) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir spinbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::spinbox::Backspace) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir spinbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::spinbox::SeeInsert) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir spinbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::spinbox::SetCursor) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir spinbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::spinbox::Transpose) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir spinbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::spinbox::PreviousWord) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir spinbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::spinbox::GetSelection) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir spinbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::TearOffMenu) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir tearoff.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MenuDup) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir tearoff.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::TextClosestGap) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir text.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::TextButton1) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir text.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::TextSelectTo) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir text.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::TextKeyExtend) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir text.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::TextPaste) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir text.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::TextAutoScan) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir text.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::TextSetCursor) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir text.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::TextKeySelect) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir text.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::TextResetAnchor) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir text.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::TextInsert) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir text.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::TextUpDownLine) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir text.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::TextPrevPara) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir text.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::TextNextPara) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir text.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::TextScrollPages) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir text.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::TextTranspose) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir text.tcl]] set auto_index(tk_textCopy) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir text.tcl]] set auto_index(tk_textCut) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir text.tcl]] set auto_index(tk_textPaste) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir text.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::TextNextPos) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir text.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::TextPrevPos) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir text.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::PlaceWindow) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir tk.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::SetFocusGrab) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir tk.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::RestoreFocusGrab) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir tk.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ScreenChanged) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir tk.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::EventMotifBindings) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir tk.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::CancelRepeat) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir tk.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MouseWheel) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir tk.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::TabToWindow) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir tk.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::file::) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir tkfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::file::Config) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir tkfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::file::Create) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir tkfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::file::SetSelectMode) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir tkfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::file::UpdateWhenIdle) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir tkfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::file::Update) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir tkfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::file::SetPathSilently) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir tkfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::file::SetPath) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir tkfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::file::SetFilter) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir tkfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::file::ResolveFile) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir tkfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::file::EntFocusIn) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir tkfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::file::EntFocusOut) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir tkfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::file::ActivateEnt) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir tkfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::file::VerifyFileName) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir tkfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::file::InvokeBtn) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir tkfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::file::UpDirCmd) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir tkfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::file::JoinFile) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir tkfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::file::OkCmd) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir tkfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::file::CancelCmd) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir tkfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::file::ListBrowse) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir tkfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::file::ListInvoke) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir tkfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::dialog::file::Done) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir tkfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MotifFDialog) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir xmfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MotifFDialog_Create) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir xmfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MotifFDialog_FileTypes) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir xmfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MotifFDialog_SetFilter) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir xmfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MotifFDialog_Config) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir xmfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MotifFDialog_BuildUI) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir xmfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MotifFDialog_SetListMode) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir xmfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MotifFDialog_MakeSList) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir xmfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MotifFDialog_InterpFilter) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir xmfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MotifFDialog_Update) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir xmfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MotifFDialog_LoadFiles) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir xmfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MotifFDialog_BrowseDList) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir xmfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MotifFDialog_ActivateDList) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir xmfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MotifFDialog_BrowseFList) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir xmfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MotifFDialog_ActivateFList) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir xmfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MotifFDialog_ActivateFEnt) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir xmfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MotifFDialog_ActivateSEnt) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir xmfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MotifFDialog_OkCmd) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir xmfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MotifFDialog_FilterCmd) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir xmfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::MotifFDialog_CancelCmd) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir xmfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ListBoxKeyAccel_Set) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir xmfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ListBoxKeyAccel_Unset) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir xmfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ListBoxKeyAccel_Key) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir xmfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ListBoxKeyAccel_Goto) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir xmfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::ListBoxKeyAccel_Reset) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir xmfbox.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::unsupported::ExposePrivateCommand) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir unsupported.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::unsupported::ExposePrivateVariable) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir unsupported.tcl]] set auto_index(::tk::fontchooser) [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $dir fontchooser.tcl]] |
Changes to library/tearoff.tcl.
︙ | ︙ | |||
134 135 136 137 138 139 140 | lappend cmd [lindex $option 0] [lindex $option 4] } eval $cmd # Copy the meny entries, if any set last [$src index last] | > | | | | | | > | 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 | lappend cmd [lindex $option 0] [lindex $option 4] } eval $cmd # Copy the meny entries, if any set last [$src index last] if {$last ne "none"} { for {set i [$src cget -tearoff]} {$i <= $last} {incr i} { set cmd [list $dst add [$src type $i] [$src id $i]] foreach option [$src entryconfigure $i] { lappend cmd [lindex $option 0] [lindex $option 4] } eval $cmd } } # Duplicate the binding tags from the source menu, replacing src with dst set tags [bindtags $src] set x [lsearch -exact $tags $src] if {$x >= 0} {lset tags $x $dst} |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to library/tk.tcl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | # tk.tcl -- # # Initialization script normally executed in the interpreter for each Tk-based # application. Arranges class bindings for widgets. # # Copyright © 1992-1994 The Regents of the University of California. # Copyright © 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. # Copyright © 1998-2000 Ajuba Solutions. # # See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of # this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. # Verify that we have Tk binary and script components from the same release | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 | # tk.tcl -- # # Initialization script normally executed in the interpreter for each Tk-based # application. Arranges class bindings for widgets. # # Copyright © 1992-1994 The Regents of the University of California. # Copyright © 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. # Copyright © 1998-2000 Ajuba Solutions. # # See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of # this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. # Verify that we have Tk binary and script components from the same release package require -exact tk 8.7b1 # Create a ::tk namespace namespace eval ::tk { # Set up the msgcat commands namespace eval msgcat { namespace export mc mcmax if {[interp issafe] || [catch {package require msgcat}]} { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
494 495 496 497 498 499 500 | # ---------------------------------------------------------------------- # Read in files that define all of the class bindings. # ---------------------------------------------------------------------- if {$::tk_library ne ""} { proc ::tk::SourceLibFile {file} { | | | 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 | # ---------------------------------------------------------------------- # Read in files that define all of the class bindings. # ---------------------------------------------------------------------- if {$::tk_library ne ""} { proc ::tk::SourceLibFile {file} { namespace eval :: [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join $::tk_library $file.tcl]] } namespace eval ::tk { SourceLibFile icons SourceLibFile iconbadges SourceLibFile button SourceLibFile entry SourceLibFile listbox |
︙ | ︙ | |||
709 710 711 712 713 714 715 | return $maxlen } if {[tk windowingsystem] eq "aqua"} { #stub procedures to respond to "do script" Apple Events proc ::tk::mac::DoScriptFile {file} { uplevel #0 $file | | | 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 | return $maxlen } if {[tk windowingsystem] eq "aqua"} { #stub procedures to respond to "do script" Apple Events proc ::tk::mac::DoScriptFile {file} { uplevel #0 $file source -encoding utf-8 $file } proc ::tk::mac::DoScriptText {script} { uplevel #0 $script eval $script } #This procedure is required to silence warnings generated #by inline AppleScript execution. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
837 838 839 840 841 842 843 | # Scale the default scrollbar width on X11 if {[tk windowingsystem] eq "x11"} { option add *Scrollbar.width 8.25p widgetDefault } # Run the Ttk themed widget set initialization if {$::ttk::library ne ""} { | | | 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 | # Scale the default scrollbar width on X11 if {[tk windowingsystem] eq "x11"} { option add *Scrollbar.width 8.25p widgetDefault } # Run the Ttk themed widget set initialization if {$::ttk::library ne ""} { uplevel \#0 [list source -encoding utf-8 $::ttk::library/ttk.tcl] } # Local Variables: # mode: tcl # fill-column: 78 # End: |
Changes to library/ttk/clamTheme.tcl.
︙ | ︙ | |||
147 148 149 150 151 152 153 | selected $colors(-selectfg)] \ -bordercolor [list focus $colors(-selectbg)] ttk::style configure TLabelframe \ -labeloutside true -labelmargins {0 0 0 3p} \ -borderwidth 2 -relief raised | | | | | 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 | selected $colors(-selectfg)] \ -bordercolor [list focus $colors(-selectbg)] ttk::style configure TLabelframe \ -labeloutside true -labelmargins {0 0 0 3p} \ -borderwidth 2 -relief raised ttk::style configure TScrollbar -gripcount 3.75p \ -arrowsize 10.5p -width 10.5p ttk::style configure TScale -gripcount 3.75p \ -arrowsize 10.5p -sliderlength 22.5p ttk::style configure TProgressbar -background $colors(-frame) \ -arrowsize 10.5p -sliderlength 22.5p ttk::style configure Sash -sashthickness 4.5p -gripcount 7.5p } } # ttk::theme::clam::configureNotebookStyle -- # # Sets theme-specific option values for the ttk::notebook tab style $style.Tab. # Invoked by ::ttk::configureNotebookStyle. |
︙ | ︙ |
Added library/unsupported.tcl.
> > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 | # unsupported.tcl -- # # Commands provided by Tk without official support. Use them at your # own risk. They may change or go away without notice. # # See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution # of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. # ---------------------------------------------------------------------- # Unsupported compatibility interface for folks accessing Tk's private # commands and variable against recommended usage. # ---------------------------------------------------------------------- namespace eval ::tk::unsupported { # Map from the old global names of Tk private commands to their # new namespace-encapsulated names. variable PrivateCommands array set PrivateCommands { tkButtonAutoInvoke ::tk::ButtonAutoInvoke tkButtonDown ::tk::ButtonDown tkButtonEnter ::tk::ButtonEnter tkButtonInvoke ::tk::ButtonInvoke tkButtonLeave ::tk::ButtonLeave tkButtonUp ::tk::ButtonUp tkCancelRepeat ::tk::CancelRepeat tkCheckRadioDown ::tk::CheckRadioDown tkCheckRadioEnter ::tk::CheckRadioEnter tkCheckRadioInvoke ::tk::CheckRadioInvoke tkColorDialog ::tk::dialog::color:: tkColorDialog_BuildDialog ::tk::dialog::color::BuildDialog tkColorDialog_CancelCmd ::tk::dialog::color::CancelCmd tkColorDialog_Config ::tk::dialog::color::Config tkColorDialog_CreateSelector ::tk::dialog::color::CreateSelector tkColorDialog_DrawColorScale ::tk::dialog::color::DrawColorScale tkColorDialog_EnterColorBar ::tk::dialog::color::EnterColorBar tkColorDialog_InitValues ::tk::dialog::color::InitValues tkColorDialog_HandleRGBEntry ::tk::dialog::color::HandleRGBEntry tkColorDialog_HandleSelEntry ::tk::dialog::color::HandleSelEntry tkColorDialog_LeaveColorBar ::tk::dialog::color::LeaveColorBar tkColorDialog_MoveSelector ::tk::dialog::color::MoveSelector tkColorDialog_OkCmd ::tk::dialog::color::OkCmd tkColorDialog_RedrawColorBars ::tk::dialog::color::RedrawColorBars tkColorDialog_RedrawFinalColor ::tk::dialog::color::RedrawFinalColor tkColorDialog_ReleaseMouse ::tk::dialog::color::ReleaseMouse tkColorDialog_ResizeColorBars ::tk::dialog::color::ResizeColorBars tkColorDialog_RgbToX ::tk::dialog::color::RgbToX tkColorDialog_SetRGBValue ::tk::dialog::color::SetRGBValue tkColorDialog_StartMove ::tk::dialog::color::StartMove tkColorDialog_XToRgb ::tk::dialog::color::XToRGB tkConsoleAbout ::tk::ConsoleAbout tkConsoleBind ::tk::ConsoleBind tkConsoleExit ::tk::ConsoleExit tkConsoleHistory ::tk::ConsoleHistory tkConsoleInit ::tk::ConsoleInit tkConsoleInsert ::tk::ConsoleInsert tkConsoleInvoke ::tk::ConsoleInvoke tkConsoleOutput ::tk::ConsoleOutput tkConsolePrompt ::tk::ConsolePrompt tkConsoleSource ::tk::ConsoleSource tkDarken ::tk::Darken tkEntryAutoScan ::tk::EntryAutoScan tkEntryBackspace ::tk::EntryBackspace tkEntryButton1 ::tk::EntryButton1 tkEntryClosestGap ::tk::EntryClosestGap tkEntryGetSelection ::tk::EntryGetSelection tkEntryInsert ::tk::EntryInsert tkEntryKeySelect ::tk::EntryKeySelect tkEntryMouseSelect ::tk::EntryMouseSelect tkEntryNextWord ::tk::EntryNextWord tkEntryPaste ::tk::EntryPaste tkEntryPreviousWord ::tk::EntryPreviousWord tkEntrySeeInsert ::tk::EntrySeeInsert tkEntrySetCursor ::tk::EntrySetCursor tkEntryTranspose ::tk::EntryTranspose tkEventMotifBindings ::tk::EventMotifBindings tkFDGetFileTypes ::tk::FDGetFileTypes tkFirstMenu ::tk::FirstMenu tkFocusGroup_BindIn ::tk::FocusGroup_BindIn tkFocusGroup_BindOut ::tk::FocusGroup_BindOut tkFocusGroup_Create ::tk::FocusGroup_Create tkFocusGroup_Destroy ::tk::FocusGroup_Destroy tkFocusGroup_In ::tk::FocusGroup_In tkFocusGroup_Out ::tk::FocusGroup_Out tkFocusOK ::tk::FocusOK tkGenerateMenuSelect ::tk::GenerateMenuSelect tkIconList ::tk::IconList tkListbox ::tk::Listbox tkListboxAutoScan ::tk::ListboxAutoScan tkListboxBeginExtend ::tk::ListboxBeginExtend tkListboxBeginSelect ::tk::ListboxBeginSelect tkListboxBeginToggle ::tk::ListboxBeginToggle tkListboxCancel ::tk::ListboxCancel tkListboxDataExtend ::tk::ListboxDataExtend tkListboxExtendUpDown ::tk::ListboxExtendUpDown tkListboxKeyAccel_Goto ::tk::ListboxKeyAccel_Goto tkListboxKeyAccel_Key ::tk::ListboxKeyAccel_Key tkListboxKeyAccel_Reset ::tk::ListboxKeyAccel_Reset tkListboxKeyAccel_Set ::tk::ListboxKeyAccel_Set tkListboxKeyAccel_Unset ::tk::ListboxKeyAccel_Unxet tkListboxMotion ::tk::ListboxMotion tkListboxSelectAll ::tk::ListboxSelectAll tkListboxUpDown ::tk::ListboxUpDown tkListboxBeginToggle ::tk::ListboxBeginToggle tkMbButtonUp ::tk::MbButtonUp tkMbEnter ::tk::MbEnter tkMbLeave ::tk::MbLeave tkMbMotion ::tk::MbMotion tkMbPost ::tk::MbPost tkMenuButtonDown ::tk::MenuButtonDown tkMenuDownArrow ::tk::MenuDownArrow tkMenuDup ::tk::MenuDup tkMenuEscape ::tk::MenuEscape tkMenuFind ::tk::MenuFind tkMenuFindName ::tk::MenuFindName tkMenuFirstEntry ::tk::MenuFirstEntry tkMenuInvoke ::tk::MenuInvoke tkMenuLeave ::tk::MenuLeave tkMenuLeftArrow ::tk::MenuLeftArrow tkMenuMotion ::tk::MenuMotion tkMenuNextEntry ::tk::MenuNextEntry tkMenuNextMenu ::tk::MenuNextMenu tkMenuRightArrow ::tk::MenuRightArrow tkMenuUnpost ::tk::MenuUnpost tkMenuUpArrow ::tk::MenuUpArrow tkMessageBox ::tk::MessageBox tkMotifFDialog ::tk::MotifFDialog tkMotifFDialog_ActivateDList ::tk::MotifFDialog_ActivateDList tkMotifFDialog_ActivateFList ::tk::MotifFDialog_ActivateFList tkMotifFDialog_ActivateFEnt ::tk::MotifFDialog_ActivateFEnt tkMotifFDialog_ActivateSEnt ::tk::MotifFDialog_ActivateSEnt tkMotifFDialog ::tk::MotifFDialog tkMotifFDialog_BrowseDList ::tk::MotifFDialog_BrowseDList tkMotifFDialog_BrowseFList ::tk::MotifFDialog_BrowseFList tkMotifFDialog_BuildUI ::tk::MotifFDialog_BuildUI tkMotifFDialog_CancelCmd ::tk::MotifFDialog_CancelCmd tkMotifFDialog_Config ::tk::MotifFDialog_Config tkMotifFDialog_Create ::tk::MotifFDialog_Create tkMotifFDialog_FileTypes ::tk::MotifFDialog_FileTypes tkMotifFDialog_FilterCmd ::tk::MotifFDialog_FilterCmd tkMotifFDialog_InterpFilter ::tk::MotifFDialog_InterpFilter tkMotifFDialog_LoadFiles ::tk::MotifFDialog_LoadFiles tkMotifFDialog_MakeSList ::tk::MotifFDialog_MakeSList tkMotifFDialog_OkCmd ::tk::MotifFDialog_OkCmd tkMotifFDialog_SetFilter ::tk::MotifFDialog_SetFilter tkMotifFDialog_SetListMode ::tk::MotifFDialog_SetListMode tkMotifFDialog_Update ::tk::MotifFDialog_Update tkPostOverPoint ::tk::PostOverPoint tkRecolorTree ::tk::RecolorTree tkRestoreOldGrab ::tk::RestoreOldGrab tkSaveGrabInfo ::tk::SaveGrabInfo tkScaleActivate ::tk::ScaleActivate tkScaleButtonDown ::tk::ScaleButtonDown tkScaleButton2Down ::tk::ScaleButton2Down tkScaleControlPress ::tk::ScaleControlPress tkScaleDrag ::tk::ScaleDrag tkScaleEndDrag ::tk::ScaleEndDrag tkScaleIncrement ::tk::ScaleIncrement tkScreenChanged ::tk::ScreenChanged tkScrollButtonDown ::tk::ScrollButtonDown tkScrollButton2Down ::tk::ScrollButton2Down tkScrollButtonDrag ::tk::ScrollButtonDrag tkScrollButtonUp ::tk::ScrollButtonUp tkScrollByPages ::tk::ScrollByPages tkScrollByUnits ::tk::ScrollByUnits tkScrollEndDrag ::tk::ScrollEndDrag tkScrollSelect ::tk::ScrollSelect tkScrollStartDrag ::tk::ScrollStartDrag tkScrollTopBottom ::tk::ScrollTopBottom tkScrollToPos ::tk::ScrollToPos tkTabToWindow ::tk::TabToWindow tkTearOffMenu ::tk::TearOffMenu tkTextAutoScan ::tk::TextAutoScan tkTextButton1 ::tk::TextButton1 tkTextClosestGap ::tk::TextClosestGap tkTextInsert ::tk::TextInsert tkTextKeyExtend ::tk::TextKeyExtend tkTextKeySelect ::tk::TextKeySelect tkTextNextPara ::tk::TextNextPara tkTextNextPos ::tk::TextNextPos tkTextNextWord ::tk::TextNextWord tkTextPaste ::tk::TextPaste tkTextPrevPara ::tk::TextPrevPara tkTextPrevPos ::tk::TextPrevPos tkTextPrevWord ::tk::TextPrevWord tkTextResetAnchor ::tk::TextResetAnchor tkTextScrollPages ::tk::TextScrollPages tkTextSelectTo ::tk::TextSelectTo tkTextSetCursor ::tk::TextSetCursor tkTextTranspose ::tk::TextTranspose tkTextUpDownLine ::tk::TextUpDownLine tkTraverseToMenu ::tk::TraverseToMenu tkTraverseWithinMenu ::tk::TraverseWithinMenu unsupported1 ::tk::unsupported::MacWindowStyle } # Map from the old global names of Tk private variable to their # new namespace-encapsulated names. variable PrivateVariables array set PrivateVariables { droped_to_start ::tk::mac::Droped_to_start histNum ::tk::HistNum stub_location ::tk::mac::Stub_location tkFocusIn ::tk::FocusIn tkFocusOut ::tk::FocusOut tkPalette ::tk::Palette tkPriv ::tk::Priv tkPrivMsgBox ::tk::PrivMsgBox } } # ::tk::unsupported::ExposePrivateCommand -- # # Expose one of Tk's private commands to be visible under its # old global name # # Arguments: # cmd Global name by which the command was once known, # or a glob-style pattern. # # Results: # None. # # Side effects: # The old command name in the global namespace is aliased to the # new private name. proc ::tk::unsupported::ExposePrivateCommand {cmd} { variable PrivateCommands set cmds [array get PrivateCommands $cmd] if {[llength $cmds] == 0} { return -code error -errorcode {TK EXPOSE_PRIVATE_COMMAND} \ "No compatibility support for \[$cmd]" } foreach {old new} $cmds { namespace eval :: [list interp alias {} $old {}] $new } } # ::tk::unsupported::ExposePrivateVariable -- # # Expose one of Tk's private variables to be visible under its # old global name # # Arguments: # var Global name by which the variable was once known, # or a glob-style pattern. # # Results: # None. # # Side effects: # The old variable name in the global namespace is aliased to the # new private name. proc ::tk::unsupported::ExposePrivateVariable {var} { variable PrivateVariables set vars [array get PrivateVariables $var] if {[llength $vars] == 0} { return -code error -errorcode {TK EXPOSE_PRIVATE_VARIABLE} \ "No compatibility support for \$$var" } namespace eval ::tk::mac {} foreach {old new} $vars { namespace eval :: [list upvar "#0" $new $old] } } |
Changes to macosx/README.
︙ | ︙ | |||
366 367 368 369 370 371 372 | ReleaseUniversal10.5SDK: build against the 10.5 SDK (with 10.5 deployment target). Note that the non-SDK configurations have their deployment target set to 10.6 (Tk.xcodeproj). The Xcode projects refer to the toplevel tcl and tk source directories via the the TCL_SRCROOT and TK_SRCROOT user build settings, by default these are set to the project-relative paths '../../tcl' and '../../tk', if your source | | | 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 | ReleaseUniversal10.5SDK: build against the 10.5 SDK (with 10.5 deployment target). Note that the non-SDK configurations have their deployment target set to 10.6 (Tk.xcodeproj). The Xcode projects refer to the toplevel tcl and tk source directories via the the TCL_SRCROOT and TK_SRCROOT user build settings, by default these are set to the project-relative paths '../../tcl' and '../../tk', if your source directories are named differently, e.g. '../../tcl8.7' and '../../tk8.7', you need to manually change the TCL_SRCROOT and TK_SRCROOT settings by editing your ${USER}.pbxuser file (located inside the Tk.xcodeproj bundle directory) with a text editor. Detailed Instructions for building with macosx/GNUmakefile ---------------------------------------------------------- |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to macosx/tkMacOSXButton.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
183 184 185 186 187 188 189 | { MacButton *macButtonPtr = (MacButton *)clientData; TkButton *butPtr = (TkButton *)clientData; Tk_Window tkwin = butPtr->tkwin; Pixmap pixmap; DrawParams* dpPtr = &macButtonPtr->drawParams; int needhighlight = 0; | < | | 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 | { MacButton *macButtonPtr = (MacButton *)clientData; TkButton *butPtr = (TkButton *)clientData; Tk_Window tkwin = butPtr->tkwin; Pixmap pixmap; DrawParams* dpPtr = &macButtonPtr->drawParams; int needhighlight = 0; butPtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_PENDING; if ((butPtr->tkwin == NULL) || !Tk_IsMapped(tkwin)) { return; } pixmap = (Pixmap) Tk_WindowId(tkwin); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, butPtr->highlightWidthPtr, &butPtr->highlightWidth); if (TkMacOSXComputeButtonDrawParams(butPtr, dpPtr)) { macButtonPtr->useTkText = 0; } else { macButtonPtr->useTkText = 1; } if (macButtonPtr->useTkText) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
224 225 226 227 228 229 230 | TkMacOSXDrawButton(macButtonPtr, dpPtr->gc, pixmap); /* * Ask for the highlight border, if needed. */ | | | | 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 | TkMacOSXDrawButton(macButtonPtr, dpPtr->gc, pixmap); /* * Ask for the highlight border, if needed. */ if (butPtr->highlightWidth < 3) { needhighlight = 1; } } /* * Draw highlight border, if needed. */ if (needhighlight) { GC gc = NULL; if ((butPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS) && butPtr->highlightColorPtr) { gc = Tk_GCForColor(butPtr->highlightColorPtr, pixmap); } else if (butPtr->type == TYPE_LABEL) { gc = Tk_GCForColor(Tk_3DBorderColor(butPtr->highlightBorder), pixmap); } if (gc) { TkMacOSXDrawSolidBorder(tkwin, gc, 0, butPtr->highlightWidth); } } } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * |
︙ | ︙ | |||
273 274 275 276 277 278 279 | TkButton *butPtr) /* Button whose geometry may have changed. */ { int width = 0, height = 0, charWidth = 1, haveImage = 0, haveText = 0; int txtWidth = 0, txtHeight = 0; MacButton *mbPtr = (MacButton *) butPtr; Tk_FontMetrics fm; char *text = Tcl_GetString(butPtr->textPtr); | < < < | 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 | TkButton *butPtr) /* Button whose geometry may have changed. */ { int width = 0, height = 0, charWidth = 1, haveImage = 0, haveText = 0; int txtWidth = 0, txtHeight = 0; MacButton *mbPtr = (MacButton *) butPtr; Tk_FontMetrics fm; char *text = Tcl_GetString(butPtr->textPtr); TkMacOSXComputeButtonParams(butPtr, &mbPtr->btnkind, &mbPtr->drawinfo); /* * If the indicator is on, get its size. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
315 316 317 318 319 320 321 | Tk_SizeOfImage(butPtr->image, &width, &height); haveImage = 1; } else if (butPtr->bitmap != None) { Tk_SizeOfBitmap(butPtr->display, butPtr->bitmap, &width, &height); haveImage = 1; } | | | | < < | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 | Tk_SizeOfImage(butPtr->image, &width, &height); haveImage = 1; } else if (butPtr->bitmap != None) { Tk_SizeOfBitmap(butPtr->display, butPtr->bitmap, &width, &height); haveImage = 1; } Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, butPtr->tkwin, butPtr->padXPtr, &butPtr->padX); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, butPtr->tkwin, butPtr->padYPtr, &butPtr->padY); if (haveImage == 0 || butPtr->compound != COMPOUND_NONE) { Tk_FreeTextLayout(butPtr->textLayout); butPtr->textLayout = Tk_ComputeTextLayout(butPtr->tkfont, text, TCL_INDEX_NONE, butPtr->wrapLength, butPtr->justify, 0, &butPtr->textWidth, &butPtr->textHeight); txtWidth = butPtr->textWidth + 2 * butPtr->padX; txtHeight = butPtr->textHeight + 2 * butPtr->padY; haveText = 1; } if (haveImage) { if (haveText) { /* Image and Text */ switch ((enum compound) butPtr->compound) { case COMPOUND_TOP: case COMPOUND_BOTTOM: /* * Image is above or below text. */ height += txtHeight + butPtr->padY; width = (width > txtWidth ? width : txtWidth); break; case COMPOUND_LEFT: case COMPOUND_RIGHT: /* * Image is left or right of text. */ width += txtWidth + 2 * butPtr->padX; height = (height > txtHeight ? height : txtHeight); break; case COMPOUND_CENTER: /* * Image and text are superimposed. */ width = (width > txtWidth ? width : txtWidth); height = (height > txtHeight ? height : txtHeight); break; default: break; } } /* Image with or without text */ width = butPtr->width > 0 ? butPtr->width : width + butPtr->indicatorSpace; height = butPtr->height > 0 ? butPtr->height : height; if (butPtr->type == TYPE_BUTTON) { /* * Allow room to shift the image. */ width += 2; height += 2; } } else { /* Text only */ width = txtWidth + butPtr->indicatorSpace; height = txtHeight; if (butPtr->width > 0) { charWidth = Tk_TextWidth(butPtr->tkfont, "0", 1); width = butPtr->width * charWidth + 2 * butPtr->padX; } if (butPtr->height > 0) { Tk_GetFontMetrics(butPtr->tkfont, &fm); height = butPtr->height * fm.linespace + 2 * butPtr->padY; } } /* * Now figure out the size of the border decorations for the button. */ Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, butPtr->tkwin, butPtr->borderWidthPtr, &butPtr->borderWidth); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, butPtr->tkwin, butPtr->highlightWidthPtr, &butPtr->highlightWidth); butPtr->inset = butPtr->borderWidth + butPtr->highlightWidth; width += butPtr->inset * 2; height += butPtr->inset * 2; if ([NSApp macOSVersion] == 100600) { width += 12; } if (mbPtr->btnkind == kThemePushButton) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
456 457 458 459 460 461 462 | Pixmap pixmap; int haveImage = 0, haveText = 0, pressed = 0; int imageWidth = 0, imageHeight = 0; int imageXOffset = 0, imageYOffset = 0; int textXOffset = 0, textYOffset = 0; int width = 0, height = 0; int fullWidth = 0, fullHeight = 0; | < | 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 | Pixmap pixmap; int haveImage = 0, haveText = 0, pressed = 0; int imageWidth = 0, imageHeight = 0; int imageXOffset = 0, imageYOffset = 0; int textXOffset = 0, textYOffset = 0; int width = 0, height = 0; int fullWidth = 0, fullHeight = 0; DrawParams *dpPtr = &mbPtr->drawParams; if (tkwin == NULL || !Tk_IsMapped(tkwin)) { return; } pixmap = (Pixmap) Tk_WindowId(tkwin); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
480 481 482 483 484 485 486 | imageWidth = width; imageHeight = height; if (mbPtr->drawinfo.state == kThemeStatePressed) { pressed = 1; } | | | | | | | | | | | | 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 | imageWidth = width; imageHeight = height; if (mbPtr->drawinfo.state == kThemeStatePressed) { pressed = 1; } Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, butPtr->padXPtr, &butPtr->padX); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, butPtr->padYPtr, &butPtr->padY); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, butPtr->borderWidthPtr, &butPtr->borderWidth); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, butPtr->highlightWidthPtr, &butPtr->highlightWidth); haveText = (butPtr->textWidth != 0 && butPtr->textHeight != 0); if (butPtr->compound != COMPOUND_NONE && haveImage && haveText) { /* Image and Text */ int x, y; switch ((enum compound) butPtr->compound) { case COMPOUND_TOP: case COMPOUND_BOTTOM: /* Image is above or below text */ if (butPtr->compound == COMPOUND_TOP) { textYOffset = height + butPtr->padY; } else { imageYOffset = butPtr->textHeight + butPtr->padY; } fullHeight = height + butPtr->textHeight + butPtr->padY; fullWidth = (width > butPtr->textWidth ? width : butPtr->textWidth); textXOffset = (fullWidth - butPtr->textWidth)/2; imageXOffset = (fullWidth - width)/2; break; case COMPOUND_LEFT: case COMPOUND_RIGHT: /* * Image is left or right of text */ if (butPtr->compound == COMPOUND_LEFT) { textXOffset = width + butPtr->padX; } else { imageXOffset = butPtr->textWidth + butPtr->padX; } fullWidth = butPtr->textWidth + butPtr->padX + width; fullHeight = (height > butPtr->textHeight ? height : butPtr->textHeight); textYOffset = (fullHeight - butPtr->textHeight)/2; imageYOffset = (fullHeight - height)/2; break; case COMPOUND_CENTER: /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
539 540 541 542 543 544 545 | imageYOffset = (fullHeight - height)/2; break; default: break; } TkComputeAnchor(butPtr->anchor, tkwin, | | > | 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 | imageYOffset = (fullHeight - height)/2; break; default: break; } TkComputeAnchor(butPtr->anchor, tkwin, butPtr->padX + butPtr->borderWidth, butPtr->padY + butPtr->borderWidth, fullWidth + butPtr->indicatorSpace, fullHeight, &x, &y); x += butPtr->indicatorSpace; if (dpPtr->relief == TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN) { x += dpPtr->offset; y += dpPtr->offset; } else if (dpPtr->relief == TK_RELIEF_RAISED) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
589 590 591 592 593 594 595 | butPtr->textLayout, x + textXOffset, y + textYOffset, butPtr->underline); } else if (haveImage) { /* Image only */ int x = 0, y; TkComputeAnchor(butPtr->anchor, tkwin, | | > | 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 | butPtr->textLayout, x + textXOffset, y + textYOffset, butPtr->underline); } else if (haveImage) { /* Image only */ int x = 0, y; TkComputeAnchor(butPtr->anchor, tkwin, butPtr->padX + butPtr->borderWidth, butPtr->padY + butPtr->borderWidth, width + butPtr->indicatorSpace, height, &x, &y); x += butPtr->indicatorSpace; if (pressed) { x += dpPtr->offset; y += dpPtr->offset; } imageXOffset += x; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
622 623 624 625 626 627 628 | 0, 0, (unsigned int) width, (unsigned int) height, imageXOffset, imageYOffset, 1); XSetClipOrigin(butPtr->display, dpPtr->gc, 0, 0); } } else { /* Text only */ int x, y; | | | 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 | 0, 0, (unsigned int) width, (unsigned int) height, imageXOffset, imageYOffset, 1); XSetClipOrigin(butPtr->display, dpPtr->gc, 0, 0); } } else { /* Text only */ int x, y; TkComputeAnchor(butPtr->anchor, tkwin, butPtr->padX, butPtr->padY, butPtr->textWidth + butPtr->indicatorSpace, butPtr->textHeight, &x, &y); x += butPtr->indicatorSpace; y += 1; /* Tweak to match native buttons */ Tk_DrawTextLayout(butPtr->display, pixmap, dpPtr->gc, butPtr->textLayout, x, y, 0, -1); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
673 674 675 676 677 678 679 | /* * Draw the border and traversal highlight last. This way, if the * button's contents overflow they'll be covered up by the border. */ if (dpPtr->relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT) { | | | | 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 | /* * Draw the border and traversal highlight last. This way, if the * button's contents overflow they'll be covered up by the border. */ if (dpPtr->relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT) { int inset = butPtr->highlightWidth; Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, dpPtr->border, inset, inset, Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2 * inset, Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2 * inset, butPtr->borderWidth, dpPtr->relief); } } } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * |
︙ | ︙ | |||
958 959 960 961 962 963 964 | static void TkMacOSXComputeButtonParams( TkButton *butPtr, ThemeButtonKind *btnkind, HIThemeButtonDrawInfo *drawinfo) { MacButton *mbPtr = (MacButton *) butPtr; | < | | | | | | | | | | 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 | static void TkMacOSXComputeButtonParams( TkButton *butPtr, ThemeButtonKind *btnkind, HIThemeButtonDrawInfo *drawinfo) { MacButton *mbPtr = (MacButton *) butPtr; Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, butPtr->tkwin, butPtr->borderWidthPtr, &butPtr->borderWidth); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, butPtr->tkwin, butPtr->highlightWidthPtr, &butPtr->highlightWidth); if (butPtr->borderWidth <= 2) { *btnkind = kThemeSmallBevelButton; } else if (butPtr->borderWidth == 3) { *btnkind = kThemeBevelButton; } else if (butPtr->borderWidth == 4) { *btnkind = kThemeRoundedBevelButton; } else { *btnkind = kThemePushButton; } if ((butPtr->image == NULL) && (butPtr->bitmap == None)) { switch (butPtr->type) { case TYPE_BUTTON: *btnkind = kThemePushButton; break; case TYPE_RADIO_BUTTON: if (butPtr->borderWidth <= 1) { *btnkind = kThemeSmallRadioButton; } else { *btnkind = kThemeRadioButton; } break; case TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON: if (butPtr->borderWidth <= 1) { *btnkind = kThemeSmallCheckBox; } else { *btnkind = kThemeCheckBox; } break; } } if (butPtr->indicatorOn) { switch (butPtr->type) { case TYPE_RADIO_BUTTON: if (butPtr->borderWidth <= 1) { *btnkind = kThemeSmallRadioButton; } else { *btnkind = kThemeRadioButton; } break; case TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON: if (butPtr->borderWidth <= 1) { *btnkind = kThemeSmallCheckBox; } else { *btnkind = kThemeCheckBox; } break; } } else { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 | /* * Older macOS systems (10.9 and earlier) use an animation to * indicate the active button. This is simulated by redrawing * the button periodically. */ | | | | 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 | /* * Older macOS systems (10.9 and earlier) use an animation to * indicate the active button. This is simulated by redrawing * the button periodically. */ if (!mbPtr->defaultPulseHandler && ([NSApp macOSVersion] < 101000)) { mbPtr->defaultPulseHandler = Tcl_CreateTimerHandler( PULSE_TIMER_MSECS, PulseDefaultButtonProc, butPtr); } } else if (mbPtr->defaultPulseHandler) { Tcl_DeleteTimerHandler(mbPtr->defaultPulseHandler); } if (butPtr->highlightWidth >= 3) { if ((butPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS)) { drawinfo->adornment |= kThemeAdornmentFocus; } } } /* |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to macosx/tkMacOSXColor.h.
︙ | ︙ | |||
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 | * or as an index into a table of color descriptions. */ enum colorType { rgbColor, /* The 24 bit value is an rgb color. */ clearColor, /* The unique rgba color with all channels 0. */ HIBrush, /* A HITheme brush color.*/ ttkBackground, /* A background color which indicates nesting level.*/ semantic, /* A semantic NSColor.*/ }; typedef struct xpixel_t { unsigned value: 24; /* Either RGB or an index into systemColorData. */ unsigned colortype: 8; } xpixel; typedef union MacPixel_t { unsigned long ulong; xpixel pixel; } MacPixel; /* * In TkMacOSXColor.c a Tk hash table is constructed from the static data * below to map system color names to CGColors. */ typedef struct { | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 | * or as an index into a table of color descriptions. */ enum colorType { rgbColor, /* The 24 bit value is an rgb color. */ clearColor, /* The unique rgba color with all channels 0. */ HIBrush, /* A HITheme brush color.*/ #if TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 HIText, /* A HITheme text color (32-bit only). */ HIBackground, /* A HITheme background color (32-bit only). */ #endif ttkBackground, /* A background color which indicates nesting level.*/ semantic, /* A semantic NSColor.*/ }; typedef struct xpixel_t { unsigned value: 24; /* Either RGB or an index into systemColorData. */ unsigned colortype: 8; } xpixel; typedef union MacPixel_t { unsigned long ulong; xpixel pixel; } MacPixel; /* * We maintain two colormaps, one for the LightAqua appearance and one for the * DarkAqua appearance. */ enum macColormap { noColormap, lightColormap, darkColormap, }; /* * In TkMacOSXColor.c a Tk hash table is constructed from the static data * below to map system color names to CGColors. */ typedef struct { |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to macosx/tkMacOSXDefault.h.
︙ | ︙ | |||
375 376 377 378 379 380 381 | #define DEF_MESSAGE_CURSOR "" #define DEF_MESSAGE_FG NORMAL_FG #define DEF_MESSAGE_FONT "TkDefaultFont" #define DEF_MESSAGE_HIGHLIGHT_BG NORMAL_BG #define DEF_MESSAGE_HIGHLIGHT NORMAL_FG #define DEF_MESSAGE_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH "0" #define DEF_MESSAGE_JUSTIFY "left" | | | | 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 | #define DEF_MESSAGE_CURSOR "" #define DEF_MESSAGE_FG NORMAL_FG #define DEF_MESSAGE_FONT "TkDefaultFont" #define DEF_MESSAGE_HIGHLIGHT_BG NORMAL_BG #define DEF_MESSAGE_HIGHLIGHT NORMAL_FG #define DEF_MESSAGE_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH "0" #define DEF_MESSAGE_JUSTIFY "left" #define DEF_MESSAGE_PADX "-1" #define DEF_MESSAGE_PADY "-1" #define DEF_MESSAGE_RELIEF "flat" #define DEF_MESSAGE_TAKE_FOCUS "0" #define DEF_MESSAGE_TEXT "" #define DEF_MESSAGE_TEXT_VARIABLE "" #define DEF_MESSAGE_WIDTH "0" /* * Defaults for panedwindows |
︙ | ︙ | |||
471 472 473 474 475 476 477 | #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_ACTIVE_BG_MONO BLACK #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_ACTIVE_RELIEF "raised" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_BG_COLOR NORMAL_BG #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_BG_MONO WHITE #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_BORDER_WIDTH "0" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_COMMAND "" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_CURSOR "" | | | 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 | #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_ACTIVE_BG_MONO BLACK #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_ACTIVE_RELIEF "raised" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_BG_COLOR NORMAL_BG #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_BG_MONO WHITE #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_BORDER_WIDTH "0" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_COMMAND "" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_CURSOR "" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_EL_BORDER_WIDTH "-1" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_HIGHLIGHT_BG NORMAL_BG #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_HIGHLIGHT NORMAL_FG #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH "0" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_JUMP "0" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_ORIENT "vertical" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_RELIEF "flat" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_REPEAT_DELAY "300" |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to macosx/tkMacOSXDialog.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
772 773 774 775 776 777 778 | [openpanel setTitle:title]; /* * From OSX 10.11, the title string is silently ignored in the open * panel. Prepend the title to the message in this case. */ | | | 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 | [openpanel setTitle:title]; /* * From OSX 10.11, the title string is silently ignored in the open * panel. Prepend the title to the message in this case. */ if ([NSApp macOSVersion] >= 101100) { if (message) { NSString *fullmessage = [[NSString alloc] initWithFormat:@"%@\n%@", title, message]; [message release]; [title release]; message = fullmessage; } else { |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to macosx/tkMacOSXDraw.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
82 83 84 85 86 87 88 | initialized = TRUE; if (Tcl_CreateNamespace(interp, "::tk::mac", NULL, NULL) == NULL) { Tcl_ResetResult(interp); } if (Tcl_LinkVar(interp, "::tk::mac::CGAntialiasLimit", | | | | | 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 | initialized = TRUE; if (Tcl_CreateNamespace(interp, "::tk::mac", NULL, NULL) == NULL) { Tcl_ResetResult(interp); } if (Tcl_LinkVar(interp, "::tk::mac::CGAntialiasLimit", (char *)&cgAntiAliasLimit, TCL_LINK_INT) != TCL_OK) { Tcl_ResetResult(interp); } cgAntiAliasLimit = limit; /* * Piggy-back the themed drawing var init here. */ if (Tcl_LinkVar(interp, "::tk::mac::useThemedToplevel", (char *)&useThemedToplevel, TCL_LINK_BOOLEAN) != TCL_OK) { Tcl_ResetResult(interp); } if (Tcl_LinkVar(interp, "::tk::mac::useThemedFrame", (char *)&useThemedFrame, TCL_LINK_BOOLEAN) != TCL_OK) { Tcl_ResetResult(interp); } transparentColor = TkMacOSXClearPixel(); } return TCL_OK; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1478 1479 1480 1481 1482 1483 1484 | dcPtr->clipRgn = NULL; } /* * Mark the view as needing to be redisplayed, since we have drawn on its * backing layer. */ | | | 1478 1479 1480 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 | dcPtr->clipRgn = NULL; } /* * Mark the view as needing to be redisplayed, since we have drawn on its * backing layer. */ [dcPtr->view setNeedsDisplay:YES]; #ifdef TK_MAC_DEBUG bzero(dcPtr, sizeof(TkMacOSXDrawingContext)); #endif } |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to macosx/tkMacOSXEntry.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
96 97 98 99 100 101 102 | const HIThemeFrameDrawInfo info = { .version = 0, .kind = kHIThemeFrameTextFieldSquare, .state = (entryPtr->state == STATE_DISABLED ? kThemeStateInactive : kThemeStateActive), .isFocused = (entryPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS ? 1 : 0), }; | < < < | | | 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 | const HIThemeFrameDrawInfo info = { .version = 0, .kind = kHIThemeFrameTextFieldSquare, .state = (entryPtr->state == STATE_DISABLED ? kThemeStateInactive : kThemeStateActive), .isFocused = (entryPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS ? 1 : 0), }; /* * I use 6 as the borderwidth. 2 of the 5 go into the actual frame the 3 * are because the Mac OS Entry widgets leave more space around the Text * than Tk does on X11. */ if (entryPtr->borderWidth != MAC_OSX_ENTRY_BORDER || entryPtr->highlightWidth != MAC_OSX_FOCUS_WIDTH || entryPtr->relief != MAC_OSX_ENTRY_RELIEF) { return 0; } /* * For the spinbox, we have to make the entry part smaller by the size of * the buttons. We also leave 2 pixels to the left (as per the HIG) and |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to macosx/tkMacOSXFont.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 | /* #ifdef TK_MAC_DEBUG #define TK_MAC_DEBUG_FONTS #endif */ | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 | /* #ifdef TK_MAC_DEBUG #define TK_MAC_DEBUG_FONTS #endif */ /* * The following structure represents our Macintosh-specific implementation * of a font object. */ typedef struct { TkFont font; /* Stuff used by generic font package. Must be |
︙ | ︙ | |||
472 473 474 475 476 477 478 | Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1 , objv, "str start ?locale?"); return TCL_ERROR; } stringArg = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[1], &len); if (stringArg == NULL) { return TCL_ERROR; } | | > > | | 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 | Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1 , objv, "str start ?locale?"); return TCL_ERROR; } stringArg = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[1], &len); if (stringArg == NULL) { return TCL_ERROR; } Tcl_Size ulen = TkGetCharLength(objv[1]); S = [[TKNSString alloc] initWithTclUtfBytes:stringArg length:len]; len = [S length]; if (TkGetIntForIndex(objv[2], ulen - 1, 0, &idx) != TCL_OK) { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "bad index \"%s\": must be integer?[+-]integer?, end?[+-]integer?, or \"\"", Tcl_GetString(objv[2]))); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "VALUE", "INDEX", NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } if (idx >= ulen) { idx = len; } else if (idx > 0 && len != ulen) { /* The string contains codepoints > \uFFFF. Determine UTF-16 index */ Tcl_Size newIdx = 0; for (Tcl_Size i = 0; i < idx; i++) { newIdx += 1 + (((newIdx < len-1) && ([S characterAtIndex:newIdx]&0xFC00) == 0xD800) && (([S characterAtIndex:newIdx+1]&0xFC00) == 0xDC00)); } idx = newIdx; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
529 530 531 532 533 534 535 | Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1 , objv, "str start ?locale?"); return TCL_ERROR; } stringArg = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[1], &len); if (stringArg == NULL) { return TCL_ERROR; } | | > > | | 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 | Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1 , objv, "str start ?locale?"); return TCL_ERROR; } stringArg = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[1], &len); if (stringArg == NULL) { return TCL_ERROR; } Tcl_Size ulen = TkGetCharLength(objv[1]); S = [[TKNSString alloc] initWithTclUtfBytes:stringArg length:len]; len = [S length]; if (TkGetIntForIndex(objv[2], ulen - 1, 0, &idx) != TCL_OK) { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf( "bad index \"%s\": must be integer?[+-]integer?, end?[+-]integer?, or \"\"", Tcl_GetString(objv[2]))); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "VALUE", "INDEX", NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } if (idx >= ulen) { idx = len; } else if (idx > 0 && len != ulen) { /* The string contains codepoints > \uFFFF. Determine UTF-16 index */ Tcl_Size newIdx = 0; for (Tcl_Size i = 0; i < idx; i++) { newIdx += 1 + (((newIdx < len-1) && ([S characterAtIndex:newIdx]&0xFC00) == 0xD800) && (([S characterAtIndex:newIdx+1]&0xFC00) == 0xDC00)); } idx = newIdx; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
950 951 952 953 954 955 956 | * * Determine the number of characters from the string that will fit in * the given horizontal span. The measurement is done under the * assumption that Tk_DrawChars() will be used to actually display the * characters. * * With ATSUI we need the line context to do this right, so we have the | | | 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 | * * Determine the number of characters from the string that will fit in * the given horizontal span. The measurement is done under the * assumption that Tk_DrawChars() will be used to actually display the * characters. * * With ATSUI we need the line context to do this right, so we have the * actual implementation in Tk_MeasureCharsInContext(). * * Results: * The return value is the number of bytes from source that fit into the * span that extends from 0 to maxLength. *lengthPtr is filled with the * x-coordinate of the right edge of the last character that did fit. * * Side effects: |
︙ | ︙ | |||
988 989 990 991 992 993 994 | * TK_WHOLE_WORDS means stop on a word * boundary, if possible. TK_AT_LEAST_ONE * means return at least one character even if * no characters fit. */ int *lengthPtr) /* Filled with x-location just after the * terminating character. */ { | | | | | | 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 | * TK_WHOLE_WORDS means stop on a word * boundary, if possible. TK_AT_LEAST_ONE * means return at least one character even if * no characters fit. */ int *lengthPtr) /* Filled with x-location just after the * terminating character. */ { return Tk_MeasureCharsInContext(tkfont, source, numBytes, 0, numBytes, maxLength, flags, lengthPtr); } /* *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- * * Tk_MeasureCharsInContext -- * * Determine the number of bytes from the string that will fit in the * given horizontal span. The measurement is done under the assumption * that Tk_DrawCharsInContext() will be used to actually display the * characters. * * This one is almost the same as Tk_MeasureChars(), but with access to * all the characters on the line for context. * * Results: * The return value is the number of bytes from source that fit into the * span that extends from 0 to maxLength. *lengthPtr is filled with the * x-coordinate of the right edge of the last character that did fit. * * Side effects: * None. * *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ int Tk_MeasureCharsInContext( Tk_Font tkfont, /* Font in which characters will be drawn. */ const char * source, /* UTF-8 string to be displayed. Need not be * '\0' terminated. */ Tcl_Size numBytes, /* Maximum number of bytes to consider from * source string in all. */ Tcl_Size rangeStart, /* Index of first byte to measure. */ Tcl_Size rangeLength, /* Length of range to measure in bytes. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 | fit = rangeLength; goto done; } attributedString = [[NSAttributedString alloc] initWithString:string attributes:fontPtr->nsAttributes]; typesetter = CTTypesetterCreateWithAttributedString( (CFAttributedStringRef)attributedString); | | | | 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 | fit = rangeLength; goto done; } attributedString = [[NSAttributedString alloc] initWithString:string attributes:fontPtr->nsAttributes]; typesetter = CTTypesetterCreateWithAttributedString( (CFAttributedStringRef)attributedString); start = Tcl_NumUtfChars(source, rangeStart); len = Tcl_NumUtfChars(source + rangeStart, rangeLength); if (start > 0) { range.length = start; line = CTTypesetterCreateLine(typesetter, range); offset = CTLineGetTypographicBounds(line, NULL, NULL, NULL); CFRelease(line); } if (maxLength < 0) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 | } } CFRelease(typesetter); [attributedString release]; [string release]; length = ceil(width - offset); | | | 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 | } } CFRelease(typesetter); [attributedString release]; [string release]; length = ceil(width - offset); fit = (Tcl_UtfAtIndex(source, index) - source) - rangeStart; done: #ifdef TK_MAC_DEBUG_FONTS TkMacOSXDbgMsg("measure: source=\"%s\" range=\"%.*s\" maxLength=%d " "flags='%s%s%s%s' -> width=%d bytesFit=%d\n", source, rangeLength, source+rangeStart, maxLength, flags & TK_PARTIAL_OK ? "partialOk " : "", flags & TK_WHOLE_WORDS ? "wholeWords " : "", |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 | TkpDrawAngledCharsInContext(display, drawable, gc, tkfont, source, numBytes, 0, numBytes, x, y, angle); } /* *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- * | | | | 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 | TkpDrawAngledCharsInContext(display, drawable, gc, tkfont, source, numBytes, 0, numBytes, x, y, angle); } /* *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- * * Tk_DrawCharsInContext -- * * Draw a string of characters on the screen like Tk_DrawChars(), with * access to all the characters on the line for context. * * Results: * None. * * Side effects: * Information gets drawn on the screen. * * Todo: * Stippled text drawing. * *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ void Tk_DrawCharsInContext( Display *display, /* Display on which to draw. */ Drawable drawable, /* Window or pixmap in which to draw. */ GC gc, /* Graphics context for drawing characters. */ Tk_Font tkfont, /* Font in which characters will be drawn; must * be the same as font used in GC. */ const char * source, /* UTF-8 string to be displayed. Need not be * '\0' terminated. All Tk meta-characters |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1379 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 | if (angle != 0.0) { t = CGAffineTransformTranslate( CGAffineTransformRotate( CGAffineTransformTranslate(t, textX, textY), angle*PI/180.0), -textX, -textY); } CGContextConcatCTM(context, t); | | | | 1363 1364 1365 1366 1367 1368 1369 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 1375 1376 1377 1378 | if (angle != 0.0) { t = CGAffineTransformTranslate( CGAffineTransformRotate( CGAffineTransformTranslate(t, textX, textY), angle*PI/180.0), -textX, -textY); } CGContextConcatCTM(context, t); start = Tcl_NumUtfChars(source, rangeStart); length = Tcl_NumUtfChars(source, rangeStart + rangeLength) - start; line = CTTypesetterCreateLine(typesetter, CFRangeMake(start, length)); if (start > 0) { /* * We are only drawing part of the string. To compute the x coordinate * of the part we are drawing we subtract its typographical length from * the typographical length of the full string. This accounts for the |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1548 1549 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 | if (!initialized) { initialized = TRUE; if (Tcl_CreateNamespace(interp, "::tk::mac", NULL, NULL) == NULL) { Tcl_ResetResult(interp); } if (Tcl_LinkVar(interp, "::tk::mac::antialiasedtext", | | | 1532 1533 1534 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 1540 1541 1542 1543 1544 1545 1546 | if (!initialized) { initialized = TRUE; if (Tcl_CreateNamespace(interp, "::tk::mac", NULL, NULL) == NULL) { Tcl_ResetResult(interp); } if (Tcl_LinkVar(interp, "::tk::mac::antialiasedtext", (char *)&antialiasedTextEnabled, TCL_LINK_INT) != TCL_OK) { Tcl_ResetResult(interp); } } antialiasedTextEnabled = enable; return TCL_OK; } |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to macosx/tkMacOSXInit.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
647 648 649 650 651 652 653 | if (winPtr && Tk_IsMapped(winPtr)) { /* * Ordering the root window front in an idle task allows * checking whether it was immediately withdrawn, and * therefore does not need to be placed on the screen. */ | | | 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 | if (winPtr && Tk_IsMapped(winPtr)) { /* * Ordering the root window front in an idle task allows * checking whether it was immediately withdrawn, and * therefore does not need to be placed on the screen. */ Tcl_DoWhenIdle(showRootWindow, window); break; } } # if defined(USE_CUSTOM_EXIT_PROC) |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to macosx/tkMacOSXInt.h.
︙ | ︙ | |||
84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 | #define TK_SCROLLBAR_GROW 0x01 #define TK_CLIP_INVALID 0x02 #define TK_HOST_EXISTS 0x04 #define TK_DRAWN_UNDER_MENU 0x08 #define TK_IS_PIXMAP 0x10 #define TK_IS_BW_PIXMAP 0x20 #define TTK_HAS_CONTRASTING_BG 0x80 /* * I am reserving TK_EMBEDDED = 0x100 in the MacDrawable flags * This is defined in tk.h. We need to duplicate the TK_EMBEDDED flag in the * TkWindow structure for the window, but in the MacWin. This way we can * still tell what the correct port is after the TKWindow structure has been | > | 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 | #define TK_SCROLLBAR_GROW 0x01 #define TK_CLIP_INVALID 0x02 #define TK_HOST_EXISTS 0x04 #define TK_DRAWN_UNDER_MENU 0x08 #define TK_IS_PIXMAP 0x10 #define TK_IS_BW_PIXMAP 0x20 #define TK_DO_NOT_DRAW 0x40 #define TTK_HAS_CONTRASTING_BG 0x80 /* * I am reserving TK_EMBEDDED = 0x100 in the MacDrawable flags * This is defined in tk.h. We need to duplicate the TK_EMBEDDED flag in the * TkWindow structure for the window, but in the MacWin. This way we can * still tell what the correct port is after the TKWindow structure has been |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to macosx/tkMacOSXMenu.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 | */ if (menuPtr->tkwin == NULL || menuPtr->mainMenuPtr != menuPtr) { return; } menuSize = [(NSMenu *) menuPtr->platformData size]; | | | 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 1422 1423 1424 1425 1426 | */ if (menuPtr->tkwin == NULL || menuPtr->mainMenuPtr != menuPtr) { return; } menuSize = [(NSMenu *) menuPtr->platformData size]; Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, menuPtr->tkwin, menuPtr->borderWidthPtr, &borderWidth); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, menuPtr->tkwin, menuPtr->activeBorderWidthPtr, &activeBorderWidth); x = y = borderWidth; windowHeight = maxWidth = 0; maxIndicatorSpace = 0; |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to macosx/tkMacOSXMenubutton.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
166 167 168 169 170 171 172 | void *clientData) /* Information about widget. */ { MacMenuButton *mbPtr = (MacMenuButton *)clientData; TkMenuButton *butPtr = (TkMenuButton *)clientData; Tk_Window tkwin = butPtr->tkwin; Pixmap pixmap; DrawParams *dpPtr = &mbPtr->drawParams; | < < | | | 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 | void *clientData) /* Information about widget. */ { MacMenuButton *mbPtr = (MacMenuButton *)clientData; TkMenuButton *butPtr = (TkMenuButton *)clientData; Tk_Window tkwin = butPtr->tkwin; Pixmap pixmap; DrawParams *dpPtr = &mbPtr->drawParams; butPtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_PENDING; if ((butPtr->tkwin == NULL) || !Tk_IsMapped(tkwin)) { return; } pixmap = (Pixmap) Tk_WindowId(tkwin); TkMacOSXComputeMenuButtonDrawParams(butPtr, dpPtr); /* * Draw the native portion of the buttons. */ TkMacOSXDrawMenuButton(mbPtr, dpPtr->gc, pixmap); /* * Draw highlight border, if needed. */ if (butPtr->highlightWidth < 3) { if (butPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS) { GC gc = Tk_GCForColor(butPtr->highlightColorPtr, pixmap); TkMacOSXDrawSolidBorder(tkwin, gc, 0, butPtr->highlightWidth); } } } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * |
︙ | ︙ | |||
244 245 246 247 248 249 250 | void TkpComputeMenuButtonGeometry( TkMenuButton *butPtr) /* Widget record for menu button. */ { int width, height, avgWidth, haveImage = 0, haveText = 0; int txtWidth, txtHeight; Tk_FontMetrics fm; | < < < < | < < < < | | | 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 | void TkpComputeMenuButtonGeometry( TkMenuButton *butPtr) /* Widget record for menu button. */ { int width, height, avgWidth, haveImage = 0, haveText = 0; int txtWidth, txtHeight; Tk_FontMetrics fm; /* * First compute the size of the contents of the button. */ width = 0; height = 0; txtWidth = 0; txtHeight = 0; avgWidth = 0; if (butPtr->image != NULL) { Tk_SizeOfImage(butPtr->image, &width, &height); haveImage = 1; } else if (butPtr->bitmap != None) { Tk_SizeOfBitmap(butPtr->display, butPtr->bitmap, &width, &height); haveImage = 1; } if (butPtr->textObj && Tcl_GetString(butPtr->textObj)[0]) { haveText = 1; Tk_FreeTextLayout(butPtr->textLayout); butPtr->textLayout = Tk_ComputeTextLayout(butPtr->tkfont, Tcl_GetString(butPtr->textObj), TCL_INDEX_NONE, butPtr->wrapLength, butPtr->justify, 0, &butPtr->textWidth, &butPtr->textHeight); txtWidth = butPtr->textWidth; txtHeight = butPtr->textHeight; avgWidth = Tk_TextWidth(butPtr->tkfont, "0", 1); Tk_GetFontMetrics(butPtr->tkfont, &fm); } /* * If the button is compound (ie, it shows both an image and text), the new * geometry is a combination of the image and text geometry. We only honor * the compound bit if the button has both text and an image, because * otherwise it is not really a compound button. */ if (haveImage && haveText) { switch ((enum compound) butPtr->compound) { case COMPOUND_TOP: case COMPOUND_BOTTOM: /* * Image is above or below text */ height += txtHeight + butPtr->padY; width = (width > txtWidth ? width : txtWidth); break; case COMPOUND_LEFT: case COMPOUND_RIGHT: /* * Image is left or right of text */ width += txtWidth + butPtr->padX; height = (height > txtHeight ? height : txtHeight); break; case COMPOUND_CENTER: /* * Image and text are superimposed */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
342 343 344 345 346 347 348 | if (butPtr->height > 0) { height = butPtr->height; } } else { /* Text only */ width = txtWidth; height = txtHeight; if (butPtr->width > 0) { | | | < < | | 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 | if (butPtr->height > 0) { height = butPtr->height; } } else { /* Text only */ width = txtWidth; height = txtHeight; if (butPtr->width > 0) { width = butPtr->width * avgWidth + 2 * butPtr->padX; } if (butPtr->height > 0) { height = butPtr->height * fm.linespace + 2 * butPtr->padY; } } } butPtr->inset = butPtr->highlightWidth + butPtr->borderWidth; width += LEFT_INSET + RIGHT_INSET + 2*butPtr->inset; height += 2*butPtr->inset; height = height < MIN_HEIGHT ? MIN_HEIGHT : height; Tk_GeometryRequest(butPtr->tkwin, width, height); Tk_SetInternalBorder(butPtr->tkwin, butPtr->inset); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
387 388 389 390 391 392 393 | Tk_Window tkwin = butPtr->tkwin; Pixmap pixmap; int haveImage = 0, haveText = 0; int imageXOffset = 0, imageYOffset = 0; int textXOffset = 0, textYOffset = 0; int width = 0, height = 0; int fullWidth = 0, fullHeight = 0; | < < < | | | | | | | 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 | Tk_Window tkwin = butPtr->tkwin; Pixmap pixmap; int haveImage = 0, haveText = 0; int imageXOffset = 0, imageYOffset = 0; int textXOffset = 0, textYOffset = 0; int width = 0, height = 0; int fullWidth = 0, fullHeight = 0; if (tkwin == NULL || !Tk_IsMapped(tkwin)) { return; } DrawParams *dpPtr = &mbPtr->drawParams; pixmap = (Pixmap) Tk_WindowId(tkwin); if (butPtr->image != NULL) { Tk_SizeOfImage(butPtr->image, &width, &height); haveImage = 1; } else if (butPtr->bitmap != None) { Tk_SizeOfBitmap(butPtr->display, butPtr->bitmap, &width, &height); haveImage = 1; } haveText = (butPtr->textWidth != 0 && butPtr->textHeight != 0); if (butPtr->compound != COMPOUND_NONE && haveImage && haveText) { int x = 0, y = 0; textXOffset = 0; textYOffset = 0; fullWidth = 0; fullHeight = 0; switch ((enum compound) butPtr->compound) { case COMPOUND_TOP: case COMPOUND_BOTTOM: /* * Image is above or below text. */ if (butPtr->compound == COMPOUND_TOP) { textYOffset = height + butPtr->padY; } else { imageYOffset = butPtr->textHeight + butPtr->padY; } fullHeight = height + butPtr->textHeight + butPtr->padY; fullWidth = (width > butPtr->textWidth ? width : butPtr->textWidth); textXOffset = (fullWidth - butPtr->textWidth)/2; imageXOffset = (fullWidth - width)/2; break; case COMPOUND_LEFT: case COMPOUND_RIGHT: /* * Image is left or right of text */ if (butPtr->compound == COMPOUND_LEFT) { textXOffset = width + butPtr->padX - 2; } else { imageXOffset = butPtr->textWidth + butPtr->padX; } fullWidth = butPtr->textWidth + butPtr->padX + width; fullHeight = (height > butPtr->textHeight ? height : butPtr->textHeight); textYOffset = (fullHeight - butPtr->textHeight)/2; imageYOffset = (fullHeight - height)/2; break; case COMPOUND_CENTER: /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
468 469 470 471 472 473 474 | imageYOffset = (fullHeight - height) / 2; break; case COMPOUND_NONE: break; } TkComputeAnchor(butPtr->anchor, tkwin, | | | 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 | imageYOffset = (fullHeight - height) / 2; break; case COMPOUND_NONE: break; } TkComputeAnchor(butPtr->anchor, tkwin, butPtr->padX + butPtr->inset, butPtr->padY + butPtr->inset, fullWidth, fullHeight, &x, &y); imageXOffset = LEFT_INSET; imageYOffset += y; textYOffset -= 1; if (butPtr->image != NULL) { Tk_RedrawImage(butPtr->image, 0, 0, width, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
496 497 498 499 500 501 502 | Tk_UnderlineTextLayout(butPtr->display, pixmap, dpPtr->gc, butPtr->textLayout, x + textXOffset, y + textYOffset, butPtr->underline); } else { int x, y; if (haveImage) { | < < < | | | | 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 | Tk_UnderlineTextLayout(butPtr->display, pixmap, dpPtr->gc, butPtr->textLayout, x + textXOffset, y + textYOffset, butPtr->underline); } else { int x, y; if (haveImage) { TkComputeAnchor(butPtr->anchor, tkwin, butPtr->padX + butPtr->borderWidth, butPtr->padY + butPtr->borderWidth, width, height, &x, &y); imageXOffset = LEFT_INSET; imageYOffset += y; if (butPtr->image != NULL) { Tk_RedrawImage(butPtr->image, 0, 0, width, height, pixmap, imageXOffset, imageYOffset); } else { XSetClipOrigin(butPtr->display, dpPtr->gc, x, y); XCopyPlane(butPtr->display, butPtr->bitmap, pixmap, dpPtr->gc, 0, 0, (unsigned int) width, (unsigned int) height, imageXOffset, imageYOffset, 1); XSetClipOrigin(butPtr->display, dpPtr->gc, 0, 0); } } else { textXOffset = LEFT_INSET; TkComputeAnchor(butPtr->anchor, tkwin, butPtr->padX, butPtr->padY, butPtr->textWidth, butPtr->textHeight, &x, &y); Tk_DrawTextLayout(butPtr->display, pixmap, dpPtr->gc, butPtr->textLayout, textXOffset, y, 0, -1); y += butPtr->textHeight/2; } } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
744 745 746 747 748 749 750 | static void TkMacOSXComputeMenuButtonParams( TkMenuButton *butPtr, ThemeButtonKind *btnkind, HIThemeButtonDrawInfo *drawinfo) { MacMenuButton *mbPtr = (MacMenuButton *) butPtr; | < | 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 | static void TkMacOSXComputeMenuButtonParams( TkMenuButton *butPtr, ThemeButtonKind *btnkind, HIThemeButtonDrawInfo *drawinfo) { MacMenuButton *mbPtr = (MacMenuButton *) butPtr; if (butPtr->image || butPtr->bitmap || butPtr->textObj) { /* TODO: allow for Small and Mini menubuttons. */ *btnkind = kThemePopupButton; } else { /* This should never happen. */ *btnkind = kThemeArrowButton; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
776 777 778 779 780 781 782 | } else if (butPtr->state == STATE_DISABLED) { drawinfo->state = kThemeStateUnavailable; } else { drawinfo->state = kThemeStateActive; } drawinfo->adornment = kThemeAdornmentNone; | < | | 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 | } else if (butPtr->state == STATE_DISABLED) { drawinfo->state = kThemeStateUnavailable; } else { drawinfo->state = kThemeStateActive; } drawinfo->adornment = kThemeAdornmentNone; if (butPtr->highlightWidth >= 3) { if ((butPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS)) { drawinfo->adornment |= kThemeAdornmentFocus; } } drawinfo->adornment |= kThemeAdornmentArrowDoubleArrow; } |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to macosx/tkMacOSXMenus.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
108 109 110 111 112 113 114 | target:nil], nil]; /* * On OS X 10.12 we get duplicate tab control items if we create them here. */ | | | 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 | target:nil], nil]; /* * On OS X 10.12 we get duplicate tab control items if we create them here. */ if ([NSApp macOSVersion] >= 101300) { _defaultWindowsMenuItems = [_defaultWindowsMenuItems arrayByAddingObjectsFromArray: [NSArray arrayWithObjects: [NSMenuItem separatorItem], [NSMenuItem itemWithTitle:@"Show Previous Tab" action:@selector(selectPreviousTab:) target:nil |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to macosx/tkMacOSXNotify.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #include "tkMacOSXPrivate.h" #include "tkMacOSXInt.h" #include "tkMacOSXConstants.h" #import <objc/objc-auto.h> /* This is not used for anything at the moment. */ typedef struct ThreadSpecificData { int initialized; } ThreadSpecificData; static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey; | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 | * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #include "tkMacOSXPrivate.h" #include "tkMacOSXInt.h" #include "tkMacOSXConstants.h" #if TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 #undef Tcl_MacOSXNotifierAddRunLoopMode #ifdef USE_TCL_STUBS #ifdef __cplusplus extern "C" { #endif /* Little hack to eliminate the need for "tclInt.h" here: Just copy a small portion of TclIntPlatStubs, just enough to make it work. See [600b72bfbc] */ typedef struct TclIntPlatStubs { int magic; void *hooks; void (*dummy[19]) (void); /* dummy entries 0-18, not used */ void (*tclMacOSXNotifierAddRunLoopMode) (const void *runLoopMode); /* 19 */ } TclIntPlatStubs; extern const TclIntPlatStubs *tclIntPlatStubsPtr; #ifdef __cplusplus } #endif #define Tcl_MacOSXNotifierAddRunLoopMode \ (tclIntPlatStubsPtr->tclMacOSXNotifierAddRunLoopMode) /* 19 */ #elif defined(TCL_MINOR_VERSION) && (TCL_MINOR_VERSION < 7) extern void TclMacOSXNotifierAddRunLoopMode(const void *runLoopMode); # define Tcl_MacOSXNotifierAddRunLoopMode TclMacOSXNotifierAddRunLoopMode #else extern void Tcl_MacOSXNotifierAddRunLoopMode(const void *runLoopMode); #endif #endif #import <objc/objc-auto.h> /* This is not used for anything at the moment. */ typedef struct ThreadSpecificData { int initialized; } ThreadSpecificData; static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey; |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to macosx/tkMacOSXScrlbr.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
244 245 246 247 248 249 250 | void *clientData) /* Information about window. */ { TkScrollbar *scrollPtr = (TkScrollbar *)clientData; MacScrollbar *msPtr = (MacScrollbar *) scrollPtr; Tk_Window tkwin = scrollPtr->tkwin; TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin; TkMacOSXDrawingContext dc; | < | 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 | void *clientData) /* Information about window. */ { TkScrollbar *scrollPtr = (TkScrollbar *)clientData; MacScrollbar *msPtr = (MacScrollbar *) scrollPtr; Tk_Window tkwin = scrollPtr->tkwin; TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin; TkMacOSXDrawingContext dc; scrollPtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_PENDING; if (tkwin == NULL || !Tk_IsMapped(tkwin)) { return; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
277 278 279 280 281 282 283 | CGContextConcatCTM(dc.context, t); /* * Draw a 3D rectangle to provide a base for the native scrollbar. */ | < | | < | | | | | | < < < | 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 | CGContextConcatCTM(dc.context, t); /* * Draw a 3D rectangle to provide a base for the native scrollbar. */ if (scrollPtr->highlightWidth > 0) { GC fgGC, bgGC; bgGC = Tk_GCForColor(scrollPtr->highlightBgColorPtr, (Pixmap) macWin); if (scrollPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS) { fgGC = Tk_GCForColor(scrollPtr->highlightColorPtr, (Pixmap) macWin); } else { fgGC = bgGC; } Tk_DrawHighlightBorder(tkwin, fgGC, bgGC, scrollPtr->highlightWidth, (Pixmap) macWin); } Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, (Pixmap) macWin, scrollPtr->bgBorder, scrollPtr->highlightWidth, scrollPtr->highlightWidth, Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2*scrollPtr->highlightWidth, Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2*scrollPtr->highlightWidth, scrollPtr->borderWidth, scrollPtr->relief); Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, (Pixmap) macWin, scrollPtr->bgBorder, scrollPtr->inset, scrollPtr->inset, Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2*scrollPtr->inset, Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2*scrollPtr->inset, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT); /* * Update values and then draw the native scrollbar over the rectangle. */ UpdateControlValues(scrollPtr); if (SNOW_LEOPARD_STYLE) { HIThemeDrawTrack(&msPtr->info, 0, dc.context, kHIThemeOrientationInverted); } else { /* * Switch back to NSView coordinates and draw a modern scrollbar. */ CGContextConcatCTM(dc.context, t); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
365 366 367 368 369 370 371 | * buttons at all. The case of no arrow buttons can be handled as a special * case of having both buttons at the end, but where scrollPtr->arrowLength * happens to be zero. To adjust for having both arrows at the same end we * shift the scrollbar up by the arrowLength. */ int fieldLength; | < < | | > | | | 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 | * buttons at all. The case of no arrow buttons can be handled as a special * case of having both buttons at the end, but where scrollPtr->arrowLength * happens to be zero. To adjust for having both arrows at the same end we * shift the scrollbar up by the arrowLength. */ int fieldLength; if (scrollPtr->highlightWidth < 0) { scrollPtr->highlightWidth = 0; } scrollPtr->inset = scrollPtr->highlightWidth + scrollPtr->borderWidth; if ([NSApp macOSVersion] == 100600) { scrollPtr->arrowLength = scrollPtr->width; } else { scrollPtr->arrowLength = 0; } fieldLength = (scrollPtr->vertical ? Tk_Height(scrollPtr->tkwin) : Tk_Width(scrollPtr->tkwin)) - 2 * (scrollPtr->arrowLength + scrollPtr->inset); if (fieldLength < 0) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
416 417 418 419 420 421 422 | * two arrows, if there are any arrows, plus a minimum-size slider, plus * border around the whole window, if any. Then arrange for the window to * be redisplayed. */ if (scrollPtr->vertical) { Tk_GeometryRequest(scrollPtr->tkwin, | | | | | | 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 | * two arrows, if there are any arrows, plus a minimum-size slider, plus * border around the whole window, if any. Then arrange for the window to * be redisplayed. */ if (scrollPtr->vertical) { Tk_GeometryRequest(scrollPtr->tkwin, scrollPtr->width + 2*scrollPtr->inset, 2 * (scrollPtr->arrowLength + scrollPtr->borderWidth + scrollPtr->inset) + metrics.minThumbHeight); } else { Tk_GeometryRequest(scrollPtr->tkwin, 2 * (scrollPtr->arrowLength + scrollPtr->borderWidth + scrollPtr->inset) + metrics.minThumbHeight, scrollPtr->width + 2 * scrollPtr->inset); } Tk_SetInternalBorder(scrollPtr->tkwin, scrollPtr->inset); } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to macosx/tkMacOSXWindowEvent.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
434 435 436 437 438 439 440 | if (dispPtr) { TkMacOSXDisplayChanged(dispPtr->display); } } @end #pragma mark - | | | 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 | if (dispPtr) { TkMacOSXDisplayChanged(dispPtr->display); } } @end #pragma mark - /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * TkpWillDrawWidget -- * * A widget display procedure can call this to determine whether it is * being run inside of the drawRect method. If not, it may be desirable |
︙ | ︙ | |||
466 467 468 469 470 471 472 | */ // This stub is no longer used, but is expected by the stub mechanism. int TkpWillDrawWidget(Tk_Window tkwin) { (void) tkwin; return false; } | | | 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 | */ // This stub is no longer used, but is expected by the stub mechanism. int TkpWillDrawWidget(Tk_Window tkwin) { (void) tkwin; return false; } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * GenerateUpdates -- * * Given an update rectangle and a Tk window, this function generates * an X Expose event for the window if it meets the update region. The |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to macosx/tkMacOSXWm.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
464 465 466 467 468 469 470 | int *minHeightPtr); static void GetMaxSize(TkWindow *winPtr, int *maxWidthPtr, int *maxHeightPtr); static void RemapWindows(TkWindow *winPtr, MacDrawable *parentWin); static void RemoveTransient(TkWindow *winPtr); | | | 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 | int *minHeightPtr); static void GetMaxSize(TkWindow *winPtr, int *maxWidthPtr, int *maxHeightPtr); static void RemapWindows(TkWindow *winPtr, MacDrawable *parentWin); static void RemoveTransient(TkWindow *winPtr); #if MAC_OS_X_VERSION_MAX_ALLOWED >= 101300 /* * Add a window as a tab in the group specified by its tabbingid, or * make it a standalone window if it is the only window with that * tabbingid. Adjust the window size if a tab bar appeared or * disappeared. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6281 6282 6283 6284 6285 6286 6287 | case TKMWS_STYLE: if ((objc < 3) || (objc > 5)) { Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window ?class attributes?"); return TCL_ERROR; } return WmWinStyle(interp, winPtr, objc, objv); case TKMWS_APPEARANCE: | < < < < < < | 6281 6282 6283 6284 6285 6286 6287 6288 6289 6290 6291 6292 6293 6294 | case TKMWS_STYLE: if ((objc < 3) || (objc > 5)) { Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window ?class attributes?"); return TCL_ERROR; } return WmWinStyle(interp, winPtr, objc, objv); case TKMWS_APPEARANCE: if ((objc < 3) || (objc > 4)) { Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window ?appearancename?"); return TCL_ERROR; } if (objc == 4 && [NSApp macOSVersion] < 101400) { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj( "Window appearances cannot be changed before OSX 10.14.", |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6534 6535 6536 6537 6538 6539 6540 | static int WmWinAppearance( Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */ TkWindow *winPtr, /* Window to be manipulated. */ Tcl_Size objc, /* Number of arguments. */ Tcl_Obj * const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */ { | | | 6528 6529 6530 6531 6532 6533 6534 6535 6536 6537 6538 6539 6540 6541 6542 | static int WmWinAppearance( Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */ TkWindow *winPtr, /* Window to be manipulated. */ Tcl_Size objc, /* Number of arguments. */ Tcl_Obj * const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */ { #if MAC_OS_X_VERSION_MAX_ALLOWED < 101000 (void) interp; (void) winPtr; (void) objc; (void) objv; return TCL_OK; #else Tcl_Obj *result = NULL; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6798 6799 6800 6801 6802 6803 6804 | //// ??????? } TKWindow *window = [[winClass alloc] initWithContentRect:contentRect styleMask:styleMask backing:NSBackingStoreBuffered defer:YES]; if (!window) { Tcl_Panic("couldn't allocate new Mac window"); } | | | 6792 6793 6794 6795 6796 6797 6798 6799 6800 6801 6802 6803 6804 6805 6806 | //// ??????? } TKWindow *window = [[winClass alloc] initWithContentRect:contentRect styleMask:styleMask backing:NSBackingStoreBuffered defer:YES]; if (!window) { Tcl_Panic("couldn't allocate new Mac window"); } #if MAC_OS_X_VERSION_MAX_ALLOWED >= 101300 if (tabbingId) { identifier = [NSString stringWithUTF8String:tabbingId]; } else { identifier = [NSString stringWithUTF8String:Tk_PathName(winPtr)]; } [window setTabbingIdentifier: identifier]; [window setTabbingMode: tabbingMode]; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7027 7028 7029 7030 7031 7032 7033 | * * Side effects: * May maximize, minimize, restore, or withdraw a window. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ | | | | 7021 7022 7023 7024 7025 7026 7027 7028 7029 7030 7031 7032 7033 7034 7035 7036 7037 7038 7039 7040 7041 7042 7043 7044 7045 7046 | * * Side effects: * May maximize, minimize, restore, or withdraw a window. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ void TkpWmSetState( TkWindow *winPtr, /* Toplevel window to operate on. */ int state) /* One of IconicState, ZoomState, NormalState, * or WithdrawnState. */ { WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr; NSWindow *macWin = nil; wmPtr->hints.initial_state = state; if (wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED) { return; } if (winPtr && winPtr->window) { macWin = TkMacOSXGetNSWindowForDrawable(winPtr->window); } /* * Make sure windows are updated before the state change. As an exception, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7083 7084 7085 7086 7087 7088 7089 | } /* * Make sure windows are updated after the state change too. */ while (Tcl_DoOneEvent(TCL_IDLE_EVENTS)){} | < < | 7077 7078 7079 7080 7081 7082 7083 7084 7085 7086 7087 7088 7089 7090 | } /* * Make sure windows are updated after the state change too. */ while (Tcl_DoOneEvent(TCL_IDLE_EVENTS)){} } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * TkpIsWindowFloating -- * |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to macosx/ttkMacOSXTheme.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
318 319 320 321 322 323 324 | containerPtr = (TkWindow *)TkGetContainer(containerPtr); } if (containerPtr && containerPtr->privatePtr) { for (int i = 0; i < 4; i++) { rgba[i] = containerPtr->privatePtr->fillRGBA[i]; } } else { | | | 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 | containerPtr = (TkWindow *)TkGetContainer(containerPtr); } if (containerPtr && containerPtr->privatePtr) { for (int i = 0; i < 4; i++) { rgba[i] = containerPtr->privatePtr->fillRGBA[i]; } } else { if ([NSApp macOSVersion] >= 101400) { NSColorSpace *deviceRGB = [NSColorSpace deviceRGBColorSpace]; NSColor *windowColor = [[NSColor windowBackgroundColor] colorUsingColorSpace: deviceRGB]; [windowColor getComponents: rgba]; } else { for (int i = 0; i < 4; i++) { rgba[i] = windowBackground[i]; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2466 2467 2468 2469 2470 2471 2472 | { TrackElementData *data = (TrackElementData *)clientData; TrackElement *elem = (TrackElement *)elementRecord; Ttk_Orient orientation = TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL; double from = 0, to = 100, value = 0, fraction, max; CGRect bounds = BoxToRect(d, b); | | | 2466 2467 2468 2469 2470 2471 2472 2473 2474 2475 2476 2477 2478 2479 2480 | { TrackElementData *data = (TrackElementData *)clientData; TrackElement *elem = (TrackElement *)elementRecord; Ttk_Orient orientation = TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL; double from = 0, to = 100, value = 0, fraction, max; CGRect bounds = BoxToRect(d, b); TtkGetOrientFromObj(NULL, elem->orientObj, &orientation); Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, elem->fromObj, &from); Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, elem->toObj, &to); Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, elem->valueObj, &value); fraction = (value - from) / (to - from); max = RangeToFactor(fabs(to - from)); HIThemeTrackDrawInfo info = { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2608 2609 2610 2611 2612 2613 2614 | Ttk_Orient orientation = TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL; int phase; double value = 0, maximum = 100, factor; CGRect bounds = BoxToRect(d, b); int isIndeterminate = !strcmp("indeterminate", Tcl_GetString(pbar->modeObj)); | | | 2608 2609 2610 2611 2612 2613 2614 2615 2616 2617 2618 2619 2620 2621 2622 | Ttk_Orient orientation = TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL; int phase; double value = 0, maximum = 100, factor; CGRect bounds = BoxToRect(d, b); int isIndeterminate = !strcmp("indeterminate", Tcl_GetString(pbar->modeObj)); TtkGetOrientFromObj(NULL, pbar->orientObj, &orientation); Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, pbar->valueObj, &value); Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, pbar->maximumObj, &maximum); Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, pbar->phaseObj, &phase); if (isIndeterminate) { /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2683 2684 2685 2686 2687 2688 2689 | int *minHeight, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr) { ScrollbarElement *scrollbar = (ScrollbarElement *)elementRecord; Ttk_Orient orientation = TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL; SInt32 thickness = 15; | | | 2683 2684 2685 2686 2687 2688 2689 2690 2691 2692 2693 2694 2695 2696 2697 | int *minHeight, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr) { ScrollbarElement *scrollbar = (ScrollbarElement *)elementRecord; Ttk_Orient orientation = TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL; SInt32 thickness = 15; TtkGetOrientFromObj(NULL, scrollbar->orientObj, &orientation); ChkErr(GetThemeMetric, kThemeMetricScrollBarWidth, &thickness); if (orientation == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) { *minHeight = thickness; if ([NSApp macOSVersion] > 100700) { *paddingPtr = Ttk_MakePadding(4, 4, 4, 3); } } else { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2711 2712 2713 2714 2715 2716 2717 | TCL_UNUSED(Ttk_State)) /* state */ { ScrollbarElement *scrollbar = (ScrollbarElement *)elementRecord; Ttk_Orient orientation = TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL; CGRect bounds = BoxToRect(d, b); GrayColor bgGray; | | | 2711 2712 2713 2714 2715 2716 2717 2718 2719 2720 2721 2722 2723 2724 2725 | TCL_UNUSED(Ttk_State)) /* state */ { ScrollbarElement *scrollbar = (ScrollbarElement *)elementRecord; Ttk_Orient orientation = TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL; CGRect bounds = BoxToRect(d, b); GrayColor bgGray; TtkGetOrientFromObj(NULL, scrollbar->orientObj, &orientation); if (orientation == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) { bounds = CGRectInset(bounds, 0, 1); } else { bounds = CGRectInset(bounds, 1, 0); } BEGIN_DRAWING(d) if ([NSApp macOSVersion] > 100800) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2747 2748 2749 2750 2751 2752 2753 | int *minWidth, int *minHeight, TCL_UNUSED(Ttk_Padding *)) /* paddingPtr */ { ScrollbarElement *scrollbar = (ScrollbarElement *)elementRecord; Ttk_Orient orientation = TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL; | | | | 2747 2748 2749 2750 2751 2752 2753 2754 2755 2756 2757 2758 2759 2760 2761 2762 2763 2764 2765 2766 2767 2768 2769 2770 2771 2772 2773 2774 2775 2776 2777 2778 2779 2780 2781 2782 | int *minWidth, int *minHeight, TCL_UNUSED(Ttk_Padding *)) /* paddingPtr */ { ScrollbarElement *scrollbar = (ScrollbarElement *)elementRecord; Ttk_Orient orientation = TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL; TtkGetOrientFromObj(NULL, scrollbar->orientObj, &orientation); if (orientation == TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL) { *minHeight = 18; *minWidth = 8; } else { *minHeight = 8; *minWidth = 18; } } static void ThumbElementDraw( TCL_UNUSED(void *), /* clientData */ void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, Ttk_State state) { ScrollbarElement *scrollbar = (ScrollbarElement *)elementRecord; Ttk_Orient orientation = TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL; TtkGetOrientFromObj(NULL, scrollbar->orientObj, &orientation); /* * In order to make ttk scrollbars work correctly it is necessary to be * able to display the thumb element at the size and location which the ttk * scrollbar widget requests. The algorithm that HIToolbox uses to * determine the thumb geometry from the input values of min, max, value * and viewSize is undocumented. A seemingly natural algorithm is |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/bind.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
2221 2222 2223 2224 2225 2226 2227 | list $x $y $z } -cleanup { destroy .t.e bind Entry <Key> $savedBind(Entry) bind all <Key> $savedBind(All) unset savedBind } -result {0 1 2} | | | 2221 2222 2223 2224 2225 2226 2227 2228 2229 2230 2231 2232 2233 2234 2235 | list $x $y $z } -cleanup { destroy .t.e bind Entry <Key> $savedBind(Entry) bind all <Key> $savedBind(All) unset savedBind } -result {0 1 2} test bind-16.47 {ExpandPercents procedure} -constraints {aquaOrWin32 needsTcl87} -setup { frame .t.f -class Test -width 150 -height 100 pack .t.f focus -force .t.f update } -body { bind .t.f <Key> {set x "%K"} set x none |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6034 6035 6036 6037 6038 6039 6040 | test bind-28.11 {keysym names, gcedilla} -body { frame .t.f -class Test -width 150 -height 100 bind .t.f <gcedilla> foo bind .t.f } -cleanup { destroy .t.f } -result <Key-gcedilla> | | | | 6034 6035 6036 6037 6038 6039 6040 6041 6042 6043 6044 6045 6046 6047 6048 6049 6050 6051 6052 6053 6054 6055 6056 6057 6058 6059 6060 6061 6062 6063 6064 6065 6066 6067 6068 6069 | test bind-28.11 {keysym names, gcedilla} -body { frame .t.f -class Test -width 150 -height 100 bind .t.f <gcedilla> foo bind .t.f } -cleanup { destroy .t.f } -result <Key-gcedilla> test bind-28.12 {keysym names, Greek_IOTAdiaeresis -> Greek_IOTAdieresis} -constraints {deprecated needsTcl87} -body { frame .t.f -class Test -width 150 -height 100 bind .t.f <Greek_IOTAdiaeresis> foo bind .t.f } -cleanup { destroy .t.f } -result <Key-Greek_IOTAdieresis> test bind-28.13 {keysym names, Unicode} -body { frame .t.f -class Test -width 150 -height 100 bind .t.f <€> foo bind .t.f } -cleanup { destroy .t.f } -result "<Key-€>" test bind-28.14 {keysym names, Emoji} -body { frame .t.f -class Test -width 150 -height 100 bind .t.f <\U1F44D> foo bind .t.f } -cleanup { destroy .t.f } -result "<Key-\U1F44D>" test bind-28.15 {keysym names, Emoji} -constraints needsTcl87 -body { frame .t.f -class Test -width 150 -height 100 bind .t.f <👍> foo bind .t.f } -cleanup { destroy .t.f } -result "<Key-👍>" |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/butGeom2.tcl.
︙ | ︙ | |||
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 | pack .t.control.left .t.control.right -side left -expand 1 -fill x label .t.anchorLabel -text "Color:" frame .t.control.left.f -width 6c -height 3c pack .t.anchorLabel .t.control.left.f -in .t.control.left -side top -anchor w foreach opt {activebackground activeforeground background disabledforeground foreground highlightbackground highlightcolor } { #button .t.color-$opt -text $opt -command "config -$opt \[tk_chooseColor]" menubutton .t.color-$opt -text $opt -menu .t.color-$opt.m -indicatoron 1 \ | | | | 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 | pack .t.control.left .t.control.right -side left -expand 1 -fill x label .t.anchorLabel -text "Color:" frame .t.control.left.f -width 6c -height 3c pack .t.anchorLabel .t.control.left.f -in .t.control.left -side top -anchor w foreach opt {activebackground activeforeground background disabledforeground foreground highlightbackground highlightcolor } { #button .t.color-$opt -text $opt -command "config -$opt \[tk_chooseColor]" menubutton .t.color-$opt -text $opt -menu .t.color-$opt.m -indicatoron 1 \ -relief raised -bd 2 menu .t.color-$opt.m -tearoff 0 .t.color-$opt.m add command -label Red -command "config -$opt red" .t.color-$opt.m add command -label Green -command "config -$opt green" .t.color-$opt.m add command -label Blue -command "config -$opt blue" .t.color-$opt.m add command -label Other... \ -command "config -$opt \[tk_chooseColor]" pack .t.color-$opt -in .t.control.left.f -fill x } set default disabled label .t.default -text Default: radiobutton .t.default-normal -text "Default normal" -relief flat \ -command "config-but -default normal" -variable default \ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/button.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 | update } -body { .b configure -overrelief "" .b cget -overrelief } -cleanup { destroy .b } -result {} | | | | | 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765 1766 1767 1768 1769 1770 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 1790 1791 1792 | update } -body { .b configure -overrelief "" .b cget -overrelief } -cleanup { destroy .b } -result {} test button-1.178 {configuration option: "overrelief" for button} -constraints needsTcl87 -setup { button .b -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12 bold} pack .b update } -body { .b configure -overrelief 1.5 } -cleanup { destroy .b } -returnCodes error -result {bad relief "1.5": must be flat, groove, raised, ridge, solid, sunken, or ""} test button-1.179 {configuration option: "overrelief" for checkbutton} -setup { checkbutton .c -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12 bold} pack .c update } -body { .c configure -overrelief "" .c cget -overrelief } -cleanup { destroy .c } -result {} test button-1.180 {configuration option: "overrelief" for checkbutton} -constraints needsTcl87 -setup { checkbutton .c -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12 bold} pack .c update } -body { .c configure -overrelief 1.5 } -cleanup { destroy .c } -returnCodes error -result {bad relief "1.5": must be flat, groove, raised, ridge, solid, sunken, or ""} test button-1.181 {configuration option: "overrelief" for radiobutton} -setup { radiobutton .r -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12 bold} pack .r update } -body { .r configure -overrelief "" .r cget -overrelief } -cleanup { destroy .r } -result {} test button-1.182 {configuration option: "overrelief" for radiobutton} -constraints needsTcl87 -setup { radiobutton .r -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12 bold} pack .r update } -body { .r configure -overrelief 1.5 } -cleanup { destroy .r |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2922 2923 2924 2925 2926 2927 2928 | checkbutton .c -variable checkvar -onvalue 1 -offvalue 0 set checkvar 1 trace add variable checkvar write bogusTrace .c deselect } -cleanup { destroy .c trace remove variable checkvar write bogusTrace | | | 2922 2923 2924 2925 2926 2927 2928 2929 2930 2931 2932 2933 2934 2935 2936 | checkbutton .c -variable checkvar -onvalue 1 -offvalue 0 set checkvar 1 trace add variable checkvar write bogusTrace .c deselect } -cleanup { destroy .c trace remove variable checkvar write bogusTrace } -returnCodes error -match glob -result {can*t set "checkvar": trace aborted} test button-3.25 {ButtonWidgetCmd procedure, "deselect" option} -body { checkbutton .c -variable checkvar -onvalue 1 -offvalue 0 set checkvar 1 trace add variable checkvar write bogusTrace catch {.c deselect} list $errorInfo $checkvar } -cleanup { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2944 2945 2946 2947 2948 2949 2950 | radiobutton .r -variable radiovar -value red set radiovar red trace add variable radiovar write bogusTrace .r deselect } -cleanup { destroy .r trace remove variable radiovar write bogusTrace | | | 2944 2945 2946 2947 2948 2949 2950 2951 2952 2953 2954 2955 2956 2957 2958 | radiobutton .r -variable radiovar -value red set radiovar red trace add variable radiovar write bogusTrace .r deselect } -cleanup { destroy .r trace remove variable radiovar write bogusTrace } -match glob -returnCodes error -result {can*t set "radiovar": trace aborted} test button-3.27 {ButtonWidgetCmd procedure, "deselect" option} -body { radiobutton .r -variable radiovar -value red set radiovar red trace add variable radiovar write bogusTrace catch {.r deselect} list $errorInfo $radiovar } -cleanup { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3082 3083 3084 3085 3086 3087 3088 | radiobutton .r -variable radiovar -value red set radiovar yellow trace add variable radiovar write bogusTrace .r select } -cleanup { destroy .r trace remove variable radiovar write bogusTrace | | | 3082 3083 3084 3085 3086 3087 3088 3089 3090 3091 3092 3093 3094 3095 3096 | radiobutton .r -variable radiovar -value red set radiovar yellow trace add variable radiovar write bogusTrace .r select } -cleanup { destroy .r trace remove variable radiovar write bogusTrace } -returnCodes error -match glob -result {can*t set "radiovar": trace aborted} test button-3.45 {ButtonWidgetCmd procedure, "select" option} -body { radiobutton .r -variable radiovar -value red set radiovar yellow trace add variable radiovar write bogusTrace catch {.r select} list $errorInfo $radiovar } -cleanup { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3143 3144 3145 3146 3147 3148 3149 | checkbutton .c -variable checkvar -onvalue xyz -offvalue abc set checkvar xyz trace add variable checkvar write bogusTrace .c toggle } -cleanup { destroy .c trace remove variable checkvar write bogusTrace | | | 3143 3144 3145 3146 3147 3148 3149 3150 3151 3152 3153 3154 3155 3156 3157 | checkbutton .c -variable checkvar -onvalue xyz -offvalue abc set checkvar xyz trace add variable checkvar write bogusTrace .c toggle } -cleanup { destroy .c trace remove variable checkvar write bogusTrace } -returnCodes error -match glob -result {can*t set "checkvar": trace aborted} test button-3.52 {ButtonWidgetCmd procedure, "toggle" option} -body { checkbutton .c -variable checkvar -onvalue xyz -offvalue abc set checkvar xyz trace add variable checkvar write bogusTrace catch {.c toggle} list $errorInfo $checkvar } -cleanup { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3165 3166 3167 3168 3169 3170 3171 | checkbutton .c -variable checkvar -onvalue xyz -offvalue abc set checkvar abc trace add variable checkvar write bogusTrace .c toggle } -cleanup { trace remove variable checkvar write bogusTrace destroy .c | | | 3165 3166 3167 3168 3169 3170 3171 3172 3173 3174 3175 3176 3177 3178 3179 | checkbutton .c -variable checkvar -onvalue xyz -offvalue abc set checkvar abc trace add variable checkvar write bogusTrace .c toggle } -cleanup { trace remove variable checkvar write bogusTrace destroy .c } -returnCodes error -match glob -result {can*t set "checkvar": trace aborted} test button-3.54 {ButtonWidgetCmd procedure, "toggle" option} -body { checkbutton .c -variable checkvar -onvalue xyz -offvalue abc set checkvar abc trace add variable checkvar write bogusTrace catch {.c toggle} list $errorInfo $checkvar } -cleanup { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3188 3189 3190 3191 3192 3193 3194 | } -body { checkbutton .c -variable checkvar -onvalue xyz -offvalue abc unset checkvar set checkvar(1) 1 .c toggle } -cleanup { destroy .c | | | | 3188 3189 3190 3191 3192 3193 3194 3195 3196 3197 3198 3199 3200 3201 3202 3203 3204 3205 3206 3207 3208 3209 3210 3211 3212 3213 | } -body { checkbutton .c -variable checkvar -onvalue xyz -offvalue abc unset checkvar set checkvar(1) 1 .c toggle } -cleanup { destroy .c } -returnCodes error -match glob -result {can*t set "checkvar": variable is *array} test button-3.56 {ButtonWidgetCmd procedure, "toggle" option} -setup { unset -nocomplain checkvar } -body { checkbutton .c -variable checkvar -onvalue xyz -offvalue abc unset checkvar set checkvar(1) 1 catch {.c toggle} return $errorInfo } -cleanup { destroy .c } -match glob -result {can*t set "checkvar": variable is *array while executing ".c toggle"} test button-4.1 {DestroyButton procedure} -constraints { testImageType } -setup { image create test image1 |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3316 3317 3318 3319 3320 3321 3322 | unset -nocomplain x } -body { trace add variable x write bogusTrace radiobutton .r -variable x } -cleanup { destroy .r trace remove variable x write bogusTrace | | | 3316 3317 3318 3319 3320 3321 3322 3323 3324 3325 3326 3327 3328 3329 3330 | unset -nocomplain x } -body { trace add variable x write bogusTrace radiobutton .r -variable x } -cleanup { destroy .r trace remove variable x write bogusTrace } -returnCodes error -match glob -result {can*t set "x": trace aborted} test button-5.11 {ConfigureButton - bad image name} -body { button .b -image bogus } -cleanup { destroy .b } -returnCodes error -result {image "bogus" does not exist} |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3349 3350 3351 3352 3353 3354 3355 | unset -nocomplain x } -body { trace add variable x write bogusTrace radiobutton .r -text foo -textvariable x } -cleanup { trace remove variable x write bogusTrace destroy .r | | | 3349 3350 3351 3352 3353 3354 3355 3356 3357 3358 3359 3360 3361 3362 3363 | unset -nocomplain x } -body { trace add variable x write bogusTrace radiobutton .r -text foo -textvariable x } -cleanup { trace remove variable x write bogusTrace destroy .r } -returnCodes error -match glob -result {can*t set "x": trace aborted} test button-5.15 {ConfigureButton - variable handling} -setup { unset -nocomplain x } -body { trace add variable x write bogusTrace catch {radiobutton .r -text foo -textvariable x} return $x } -cleanup { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3550 3551 3552 3553 3554 3555 3556 | } -body { checkbutton .c -variable x trace add variable x write bogusTrace .c invoke } -cleanup { destroy .c trace remove variable x write bogusTrace | | | | 3550 3551 3552 3553 3554 3555 3556 3557 3558 3559 3560 3561 3562 3563 3564 3565 3566 3567 3568 3569 3570 3571 3572 3573 3574 3575 3576 3577 3578 3579 3580 3581 3582 3583 3584 3585 | } -body { checkbutton .c -variable x trace add variable x write bogusTrace .c invoke } -cleanup { destroy .c trace remove variable x write bogusTrace } -returnCodes error -match glob -result {can*t set "x": trace aborted} test button-8.3 {TkInvokeButton procedure} -setup { set x 0 } -body { checkbutton .c -variable x trace add variable x write bogusTrace catch {.c invoke} return $x } -cleanup { destroy .c trace remove variable x write bogusTrace } -result 1 test button-8.4 {TkInvokeButton procedure} -setup { set x 1 } -body { checkbutton .c -variable x trace add variable x write bogusTrace .c invoke } -cleanup { destroy .c trace remove variable x write bogusTrace } -returnCodes error -match glob -result {can*t set "x": trace aborted} test button-8.5 {TkInvokeButton procedure} -setup { set x 1 } -body { checkbutton .c -variable x trace add variable x write bogusTrace catch {.c invoke} return $x |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3605 3606 3607 3608 3609 3610 3611 | radiobutton .r -variable x -value red set x green trace add variable x write bogusTrace .r invoke } -cleanup { destroy .r trace remove variable x write bogusTrace | | | 3605 3606 3607 3608 3609 3610 3611 3612 3613 3614 3615 3616 3617 3618 3619 | radiobutton .r -variable x -value red set x green trace add variable x write bogusTrace .r invoke } -cleanup { destroy .r trace remove variable x write bogusTrace } -returnCodes error -match glob -result {can*t set "x": trace aborted} test button-8.8 {TkInvokeButton procedure} -body { radiobutton .r -variable x -value red set x green trace add variable x write bogusTrace catch {.r invoke} list $errorInfo $x } -cleanup { |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/canvas.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 | } -result 4 test canvas-1.6 {configuration options: bad value for "bd"} -body { .c configure -bd badValue } -returnCodes error -result {expected screen distance but got "badValue"} test canvas-1.7 {configuration options: good value for "borderwidth"} -body { .c configure -borderwidth 1.3 .c cget -borderwidth | | | 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 | } -result 4 test canvas-1.6 {configuration options: bad value for "bd"} -body { .c configure -bd badValue } -returnCodes error -result {expected screen distance but got "badValue"} test canvas-1.7 {configuration options: good value for "borderwidth"} -body { .c configure -borderwidth 1.3 .c cget -borderwidth } -result 1 test canvas-1.8 {configuration options: bad value for "borderwidth"} -body { .c configure -borderwidth badValue } -returnCodes error -result {expected screen distance but got "badValue"} test canvas-1.9 {configuration options: good value for "closeenough"} -body { .c configure -closeenough 24 .c cget -closeenough } -result {24.0} |
︙ | ︙ | |||
68 69 70 71 72 73 74 | } -result {arrow} test canvas-1.14 {configuration options: bad value for "cursor"} -body { .c configure -cursor badValue } -returnCodes error -result {bad cursor spec "badValue"} test canvas-1.15 {configuration options: good value for "height"} -body { .c configure -height 2.1 .c cget -height | | | 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 | } -result {arrow} test canvas-1.14 {configuration options: bad value for "cursor"} -body { .c configure -cursor badValue } -returnCodes error -result {bad cursor spec "badValue"} test canvas-1.15 {configuration options: good value for "height"} -body { .c configure -height 2.1 .c cget -height } -result 2 test canvas-1.16 {configuration options: bad value for "height"} -body { .c configure -height x42 } -returnCodes error -result {expected screen distance but got "x42"} test canvas-1.17 {configuration options: good value for "highlightbackground"} -body { .c configure -highlightbackground #112233 .c cget -highlightbackground } -result {#112233} |
︙ | ︙ | |||
103 104 105 106 107 108 109 | } -result {#110022} test canvas-1.24 {configuration options: bad value for "insertbackground"} -body { .c configure -insertbackground bogus } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "bogus"} test canvas-1.25 {configuration options: good value for "insertborderwidth"} -body { .c configure -insertborderwidth 1.3 .c cget -insertborderwidth | | | | | 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 | } -result {#110022} test canvas-1.24 {configuration options: bad value for "insertbackground"} -body { .c configure -insertbackground bogus } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "bogus"} test canvas-1.25 {configuration options: good value for "insertborderwidth"} -body { .c configure -insertborderwidth 1.3 .c cget -insertborderwidth } -result 1 test canvas-1.26 {configuration options: bad value for "insertborderwidth"} -body { .c configure -insertborderwidth 2.6x } -returnCodes error -result {expected screen distance but got "2.6x"} test canvas-1.27 {configuration options: good value for "insertofftime"} -body { .c configure -insertofftime 100 .c cget -insertofftime } -result 100 test canvas-1.28 {configuration options: bad value for "insertofftime"} -body { .c configure -insertofftime 3.2 } -returnCodes error -result {expected integer but got "3.2"} test canvas-1.29 {configuration options: good value for "insertontime"} -body { .c configure -insertontime 100 .c cget -insertontime } -result 100 test canvas-1.30 {configuration options: bad value for "insertontime"} -body { .c configure -insertontime 3.2 } -returnCodes error -result {expected integer but got "3.2"} test canvas-1.31 {configuration options: good value for "insertwidth"} -body { .c configure -insertwidth 1.3 .c cget -insertwidth } -result 1 test canvas-1.32 {configuration options: bad value for "insertwidth"} -body { .c configure -insertwidth 6x } -returnCodes error -result {expected screen distance but got "6x"} test canvas-1.33 {configuration options: good value for "relief"} -body { .c configure -relief g .c cget -relief } -result {groove} test canvas-1.34 {configuration options: bad value for "relief"} -body { .c configure -relief r } -returnCodes error -result {ambiguous relief "r": must be flat, groove, raised, ridge, solid, or sunken} test canvas-1.35 {configuration options: good value for "selectbackground"} -body { .c configure -selectbackground #110022 .c cget -selectbackground } -result {#110022} test canvas-1.36 {configuration options: bad value for "selectbackground"} -body { .c configure -selectbackground bogus } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "bogus"} test canvas-1.37 {configuration options: good value for "selectborderwidth"} -body { .c configure -selectborderwidth 1.3 .c cget -selectborderwidth } -result 1 test canvas-1.38 {configuration options: bad value for "selectborderwidth"} -body { .c configure -selectborderwidth badValue } -returnCodes error -result {expected screen distance but got "badValue"} test canvas-1.39 {configuration options: good value for "selectforeground"} -body { .c configure -selectforeground #654321 .c cget -selectforeground } -result {#654321} |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/clrpick.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
145 146 147 148 149 150 151 | test clrpick-2.1 {tk_chooseColor command} -constraints { nonUnixUserInteraction colorsLeftover } -setup { set verylongstring [string repeat longstring: 100] } -body { ToPressButton . ok tk_chooseColor -title "Press Ok $verylongstring" -initialcolor #404040 \ | | | 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 | test clrpick-2.1 {tk_chooseColor command} -constraints { nonUnixUserInteraction colorsLeftover } -setup { set verylongstring [string repeat longstring: 100] } -body { ToPressButton . ok tk_chooseColor -title "Press Ok $verylongstring" -initialcolor #404040 \ -parent . } -result {#404040} test clrpick-2.2 {tk_chooseColor command} -constraints { nonUnixUserInteraction colorsLeftover } -body { set colors "128 128 64" ToChooseColorByKey . 128 128 64 tk_chooseColor -parent . -title "choose #808040" |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/cluster.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
118 119 120 121 122 123 124 | } -result 3 test cluster-4.7 {::tk::startOfPreviousWord} -body { ::tk::startOfPreviousWord "ab cd" end } -result 3 test cluster-4.8 {::tk::startOfPreviousWord} -body { ::tk::startOfPreviousWord "ab cd" {} } -result {} | | | 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 | } -result 3 test cluster-4.7 {::tk::startOfPreviousWord} -body { ::tk::startOfPreviousWord "ab cd" end } -result 3 test cluster-4.8 {::tk::startOfPreviousWord} -body { ::tk::startOfPreviousWord "ab cd" {} } -result {} test cluster-4.9 {::tk::startOfPreviousWord} -constraints needsTcl87 -body { ::tk::startOfPreviousWord "ab cd" end-1 } -result 0 test cluster-5.0 {::tk::startOfNextWord} -body { ::tk::startOfNextWord "ab cd" -1 } -result 3 test cluster-5.1 {::tk::startOfNextWord} -body { |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/config.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
454 455 456 457 458 459 460 | testobjconfig alltypes .foo -stringtable two .foo cget -stringtable rename .foo {} } -cleanup { killTables } -returnCodes ok test config-4.29 {DoObjConfig - invalid string table} -constraints { | | | | 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 | testobjconfig alltypes .foo -stringtable two .foo cget -stringtable rename .foo {} } -cleanup { killTables } -returnCodes ok test config-4.29 {DoObjConfig - invalid string table} -constraints { testobjconfig needsTcl87 } -body { testobjconfig alltypes .foo -stringtable foo } -cleanup { killTables } -returnCodes error -result {bad stringtable "foo": must be one, two, three, four, or ""} test config-4.29a {DoObjConfig - invalid string table} -constraints { testobjconfig needsTcl87 } -body { testobjconfig alltypes .foo -stringtable2 foo } -cleanup { killTables } -returnCodes error -result {bad stringtable2 "foo": must be one, two, or ""} test config-4.30 {DoObjConfig - new string table} -constraints { testobjconfig |
︙ | ︙ | |||
776 777 778 779 780 781 782 | test config-4.70 {DoObjConfig - relief} -constraints testobjconfig -body { testobjconfig alltypes .foo -relief flat .foo cget -relief } -cleanup { killTables } -returnCodes ok -result flat test config-4.71 {DoObjConfig - invalid relief} -constraints { | | | 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 | test config-4.70 {DoObjConfig - relief} -constraints testobjconfig -body { testobjconfig alltypes .foo -relief flat .foo cget -relief } -cleanup { killTables } -returnCodes ok -result flat test config-4.71 {DoObjConfig - invalid relief} -constraints { testobjconfig needsTcl87 } -body { testobjconfig alltypes .foo -relief foo } -cleanup { killTables } -returnCodes error -result {bad relief "foo": must be flat, groove, raised, ridge, solid, sunken, or ""} test config-4.72 {DoObjConfig - relief internal value} -constraints testobjconfig -setup { catch {rename .foo {}} |
︙ | ︙ | |||
870 871 872 873 874 875 876 | } -returnCodes ok -result .foo test config-4.84 {DoObjConfig - justify} -constraints testobjconfig -body { testobjconfig alltypes .foo -justify center .foo cget -justify } -cleanup { killTables } -returnCodes ok -result center | | | 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 | } -returnCodes ok -result .foo test config-4.84 {DoObjConfig - justify} -constraints testobjconfig -body { testobjconfig alltypes .foo -justify center .foo cget -justify } -cleanup { killTables } -returnCodes ok -result center test config-4.85 {DoObjConfig - invalid justify} -constraints {testobjconfig needsTcl87} -body { testobjconfig alltypes .foo -justify foo } -cleanup { killTables } -returnCodes error -result {bad justification "foo": must be left, right, center, or ""} test config-4.86 {DoObjConfig - new justify} -constraints testobjconfig -body { testobjconfig alltypes .foo -justify left .foo configure -justify right |
︙ | ︙ | |||
912 913 914 915 916 917 918 | testobjconfig alltypes .foo -anchor center .foo cget -anchor } -cleanup { killTables } -returnCodes ok -result center test config-4.91 {DoObjConfig - invalid anchor} -constraints testobjconfig -body { testobjconfig alltypes .foo -anchor foo | | | 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 | testobjconfig alltypes .foo -anchor center .foo cget -anchor } -cleanup { killTables } -returnCodes ok -result center test config-4.91 {DoObjConfig - invalid anchor} -constraints testobjconfig -body { testobjconfig alltypes .foo -anchor foo } -constraints needsTcl87 -cleanup { killTables } -returnCodes error -result {bad anchor "foo": must be n, ne, e, se, s, sw, w, nw, center, or ""} test config-4.92 {DoObjConfig - new anchor} -constraints testobjconfig -body { testobjconfig alltypes .foo -anchor e .foo configure -anchor n } -cleanup { killTables |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/constraints.tcl.
︙ | ︙ | |||
185 186 187 188 189 190 191 | # pointer has actually been moved to its new position after a Tk test issued: # # [event generate $w $event -warp 1 ...] # # It takes care of the following timing details of pointer warping: # # a. Allow pointer warping to happen if it was scheduled for execution at | > > > | | > > | 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 | # pointer has actually been moved to its new position after a Tk test issued: # # [event generate $w $event -warp 1 ...] # # It takes care of the following timing details of pointer warping: # # a. Allow pointer warping to happen if it was scheduled for execution at # idle time. # - In Tk releases 8.6 and older, pointer warping is scheduled for # execution at idle time # - In release 8.7 and newer this happens synchronously if $w refers to the # whole screen or if the -when option to [event generate] is "now". # The namespace variable idle_pointer_warping records which of these is # the case. # # b. Work around a race condition associated with OS notification of # mouse motion on Windows. # # When calling [event generate $w $event -warp 1 ...], the following # sequence occurs: # - At some point in the processing of this command, either via a |
︙ | ︙ | |||
229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 | # # Beware: there are cases, not (yet) exercised by the Tk test suite, where # [controlPointerWarpTiming] doesn't ensure the new position of the pointer. # For example, when issued under Tk8.7+, if the value for the -when option # to [event generate $w] is not "now", and $w refers to a Tk window, i.e. not # the whole screen. # proc controlPointerWarpTiming {{duration 50}} { | > > > | > < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 | # # Beware: there are cases, not (yet) exercised by the Tk test suite, where # [controlPointerWarpTiming] doesn't ensure the new position of the pointer. # For example, when issued under Tk8.7+, if the value for the -when option # to [event generate $w] is not "now", and $w refers to a Tk window, i.e. not # the whole screen. # variable idle_pointer_warping [expr {[package provide tk] != ""}] proc controlPointerWarpTiming {{duration 50}} { variable idle_pointer_warping if {$idle_pointer_warping} { update idletasks ;# see a. above } if {[tk windowingsystem] eq "win32"} { after $duration ;# see b. above } } namespace export controlPointerWarpTiming } } namespace import -force tk::test::* namespace import -force tcltest::testConstraint testConstraint notAqua [expr {[tk windowingsystem] ne "aqua"}] |
︙ | ︙ | |||
281 282 283 284 285 286 287 | ([testConstraint unix] && [testConstraint notAqua]) }] testConstraint haveDISPLAY [expr {[info exists env(DISPLAY)] && [testConstraint x11]}] testConstraint altDisplay [info exists env(TK_ALT_DISPLAY)] testConstraint noExceed [expr { ![testConstraint unix] || [catch {font actual "\{xyz"}] }] | | > > | 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 | ([testConstraint unix] && [testConstraint notAqua]) }] testConstraint haveDISPLAY [expr {[info exists env(DISPLAY)] && [testConstraint x11]}] testConstraint altDisplay [info exists env(TK_ALT_DISPLAY)] testConstraint noExceed [expr { ![testConstraint unix] || [catch {font actual "\{xyz"}] }] testConstraint deprecated [expr {![package vsatisfies [package provide Tcl] 8.7-] || ![::tk::build-info no-deprecate]}] testConstraint needsTcl87 [package vsatisfies [package provide Tcl] 8.7-] # constraint for running a test on all windowing system except aqua # where the test fails due to a known bug testConstraint aquaKnownBug [expr {[testConstraint notAqua] || [testConstraint knownBug]}] # constraints for testing facilities defined in the tktest executable... testConstraint testImageType [expr {"test" in [image types]}] testConstraint testOldImageType [expr {"oldtest" in [image types]}] testConstraint testbitmap [llength [info commands testbitmap]] testConstraint testborder [llength [info commands testborder]] testConstraint testcbind [llength [info commands testcbind]] testConstraint testclipboard [llength [info commands testclipboard]] testConstraint testcolor [llength [info commands testcolor]] testConstraint testcursor [llength [info commands testcursor]] testConstraint testembed [llength [info commands testembed]] |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/entry.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | namespace import ::tcltest::* eval tcltest::configure $argv tcltest::loadTestedCommands # For xscrollcommand set scrollInfo {} proc scroll args { | | | | | | | | | | | | | 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 | namespace import ::tcltest::* eval tcltest::configure $argv tcltest::loadTestedCommands # For xscrollcommand set scrollInfo {} proc scroll args { global scrollInfo set scrollInfo $args } # For trace add variable proc override args { global x set x 12345 } # Procedures used in widget VALIDATION tests proc doval {W d i P s S v V} { set ::vVals [list $W $d $i $P $s $S $v $V] return 1 } proc doval2 {W d i P s S v V} { set ::vVals [list $W $d $i $P $s $S $v $V] set ::e mydata return 1 } proc doval3 {W d i P s S v V} { set ::vVals [list $W $d $i $P $s $S $v $V] return 0 } set cy [font metrics {Courier -12} -linespace] test entry-1.1 {configuration option: "background" for entry} -setup { entry .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12 bold} |
︙ | ︙ | |||
106 107 108 109 110 111 112 | pack .e ; update idletasks update } -body { .e configure -borderwidth 1.3 .e cget -borderwidth } -cleanup { destroy .e | | | 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 | pack .e ; update idletasks update } -body { .e configure -borderwidth 1.3 .e cget -borderwidth } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result 1 test entry-1.8 {configuration option: "borderwidth" for entry} -setup { entry .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12 bold} pack .e ; update idletasks update } -body { .e configure -borderwidth badValue } -cleanup { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
356 357 358 359 360 361 362 | pack .e ; update idletasks update } -body { .e configure -insertborderwidth 1.3 .e cget -insertborderwidth } -cleanup { destroy .e | | | 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 | pack .e ; update idletasks update } -body { .e configure -insertborderwidth 1.3 .e cget -insertborderwidth } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result 1 test entry-1.33 {configuration option: "insertborderwidth" for entry} -setup { entry .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12 bold} pack .e ; update idletasks update } -body { .e configure -insertborderwidth 2.6x } -cleanup { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
509 510 511 512 513 514 515 | pack .e ; update idletasks update } -body { .e configure -selectborderwidth 1.3 .e cget -selectborderwidth } -cleanup { destroy .e | | | 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 | pack .e ; update idletasks update } -body { .e configure -selectborderwidth 1.3 .e cget -selectborderwidth } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result 1 test entry-1.48 {configuration option: "selectborderwidth" for entry} -setup { entry .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12 bold} pack .e ; update idletasks update } -body { .e configure -selectborderwidth badValue } -cleanup { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3528 3529 3530 3531 3532 3533 3534 | test entry-22.1 {lost namespaced textvar} -body { namespace eval test { variable foo {a b} } entry .e -textvariable ::test::foo namespace delete test set ::test::foo } -cleanup { destroy .e | | | | | | | | | | 3528 3529 3530 3531 3532 3533 3534 3535 3536 3537 3538 3539 3540 3541 3542 3543 3544 3545 3546 3547 3548 3549 3550 3551 3552 3553 3554 3555 3556 3557 3558 3559 3560 3561 3562 3563 3564 3565 3566 3567 3568 3569 3570 3571 3572 3573 3574 3575 3576 3577 3578 3579 | test entry-22.1 {lost namespaced textvar} -body { namespace eval test { variable foo {a b} } entry .e -textvariable ::test::foo namespace delete test set ::test::foo } -cleanup { destroy .e } -match glob -returnCodes error -result {can*t read "::test::foo": no such variable} test entry-22.2 {lost namespaced textvar} -body { namespace eval test { variable foo {a b} } entry .e -textvariable ::test::foo namespace delete test catch {.e insert end "more stuff"} result1 catch {.e delete 5 end } result2 catch {set ::test::foo} result3 list [.e get] [.e cget -textvar] $result1 $result2 $result3 } -cleanup { destroy .e } -match glob -result [list "a bmo" ::test::foo \ {can*t set "::test::foo": parent namespace does*t exist} \ {can*t set "::test::foo": parent namespace does*t exist} \ {can*t read "::test::foo": no such variable}] test entry-23.1 {error in trace proc attached to the textvariable} -setup { destroy .e } -body { trace add variable myvar write traceit proc traceit args {error "Intentional error here!"} entry .e -textvariable myvar catch {.e insert end mystring} result1 catch {.e delete 0} result2 list $result1 $result2 } -cleanup { destroy .e } -match glob -result [list {ca*t set "myvar": Intentional error here!} \ {can*t set "myvar": Intentional error here!}] test entry-24.1 {textvariable lives in a non-existing namespace} -setup { destroy .e } -body { catch {entry .e -textvariable thisnsdoesntexist::myvar} result1 set result1 } -cleanup { destroy .e } -match glob -result {can*t trace "thisnsdoesntexist::myvar": parent namespace does*t exist} test entry-25.1 {Bug [5d991b822e]} { # Want this not to segfault, or write to variable with empty name set var INIT entry .b -textvariable var trace add variable var unset {apply {args { .b configure -textvariable {} |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/event.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
820 821 822 823 824 825 826 | set EnterBind [bind . <Enter>] } -body { wm geometry . 200x200+300+300 wm deiconify . _pause 200 toplevel .top2 -width 200 -height 200 wm geometry .top2 +[expr {[winfo rootx .]+50}]+[expr {[winfo rooty .]+50}] | | < < < < < < | < < > < | 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 | set EnterBind [bind . <Enter>] } -body { wm geometry . 200x200+300+300 wm deiconify . _pause 200 toplevel .top2 -width 200 -height 200 wm geometry .top2 +[expr {[winfo rootx .]+50}]+[expr {[winfo rooty .]+50}] _pause 200 wm deiconify .top2 raise .top2 _pause 400 event generate .top2 <Motion> -warp 1 -x 50 -y 50 _pause 100 bind . <Enter> {lappend res %W} set res [list ] destroy .top2 _pause 200 set res } -cleanup { deleteWindows bind . <Enter> $EnterBind } -result {.} test event-9.2 {enter toplevel window by destroying a toplevel - bug b1d115fa60} -setup { set iconified false if {[winfo ismapped .]} { wm iconify . update set iconified true } } -body { toplevel .top1 wm geometry .top1 200x200+300+300 wm deiconify .top1 _pause 200 toplevel .top2 -width 200 -height 200 _pause 200 wm geometry .top2 +[expr {[winfo rootx .top1]+50}]+[expr {[winfo rooty .top1]+50}] _pause 200 wm deiconify .top2 raise .top2 _pause 400 event generate .top2 <Motion> -warp 1 -x 50 -y 50 _pause 100 bind .top1 <Enter> {lappend res %W} set res [list ] destroy .top2 |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/frame.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
209 210 211 212 213 214 215 | .f configure -bg non-existent } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "non-existent"} test frame-1.19 {frame configuration options} -body { .f configure -borderwidth 1.3 lindex [.f configure -borderwidth] 4 } -cleanup { .f configure -borderwidth [lindex [.f configure -borderwidth] 3] | | | 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 | .f configure -bg non-existent } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "non-existent"} test frame-1.19 {frame configuration options} -body { .f configure -borderwidth 1.3 lindex [.f configure -borderwidth] 4 } -cleanup { .f configure -borderwidth [lindex [.f configure -borderwidth] 3] } -result 1 test frame-1.20 {frame configuration options} -body { .f configure -borderwidth badValue } -returnCodes error -result {expected screen distance but got "badValue"} test frame-1.21 {frame configuration options} -body { .f configure -cursor arrow lindex [.f configure -cursor] 4 } -cleanup { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
510 511 512 513 514 515 516 | } -result "#00ff00" test frame-2.25 {toplevel configuration options} -body { .t configure -bg non-existent } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "non-existent"} test frame-2.26 {toplevel configuration options} -body { .t configure -borderwidth 1.3 lindex [.t configure -borderwidth] 4 | | | 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 | } -result "#00ff00" test frame-2.25 {toplevel configuration options} -body { .t configure -bg non-existent } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "non-existent"} test frame-2.26 {toplevel configuration options} -body { .t configure -borderwidth 1.3 lindex [.t configure -borderwidth] 4 } -result 1 test frame-2.27 {toplevel configuration options} -body { .t configure -borderwidth badValue } -returnCodes error -result {expected screen distance but got "badValue"} test frame-2.28 {toplevel configuration options} -body { .t configure -cursor arrow lindex [.t configure -cursor] 4 } -result {arrow} |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 | .f configure -bg non-existent } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "non-existent"} test frame-13.16 {labelframe configuration options} -body { .f configure -borderwidth 1.3 lindex [.f configure -borderwidth] 4 } -cleanup { .f configure -borderwidth [lindex [.f configure -borderwidth] 3] | | | 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 | .f configure -bg non-existent } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "non-existent"} test frame-13.16 {labelframe configuration options} -body { .f configure -borderwidth 1.3 lindex [.f configure -borderwidth] 4 } -cleanup { .f configure -borderwidth [lindex [.f configure -borderwidth] 3] } -result 1 test frame-13.17 {labelframe configuration options} -body { .f configure -borderwidth badValue } -returnCodes error -result {expected screen distance but got "badValue"} test frame-13.18 {labelframe configuration options} -body { .f configure -cursor arrow lindex [.f configure -cursor] 4 } -cleanup { |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/image.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 | image create test myimage .c create image 50 50 -image myimage image delete myimage image type myimage } -cleanup { imageCleanup } -returnCodes error -result {image "myimage" does not exist} test image-6.1 {Tk_ImageCmd procedure, "types" option} -constraints { testImageType } -body { image types x } -returnCodes error -result {wrong # args: should be "image types"} | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 | image create test myimage .c create image 50 50 -image myimage image delete myimage image type myimage } -cleanup { imageCleanup } -returnCodes error -result {image "myimage" does not exist} test image-5.6 {Tk_ImageCmd procedure, "type" option} -constraints { testOldImageType } -setup { imageCleanup } -body { image create oldtest myimage image type myimage } -cleanup { imageCleanup } -result {oldtest} test image-5.7 {Tk_ImageCmd procedure, "type" option} -constraints { testOldImageType } -setup { .c delete all imageCleanup } -body { image create oldtest myimage .c create image 50 50 -image myimage image delete myimage image type myimage } -cleanup { .c delete all imageCleanup } -returnCodes error -result {image "myimage" does not exist} test image-6.1 {Tk_ImageCmd procedure, "types" option} -constraints { testImageType } -body { image types x } -returnCodes error -result {wrong # args: should be "image types"} |
︙ | ︙ | |||
548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 | image create test foo -variable x .c create image 50 50 -image foo -tags i1 .c create image 90 100 -image foo -tags i2 set x {} image delete foo lappend x | [imageNames] | [catch {image delete foo} msg] | $msg | [imageNames] | } -cleanup { imageCleanup } -result {{foo free} {foo free} {foo delete} | {} | 1 | {image "foo" does not exist} | {} |} test image-14.1 {image command vs hidden commands} -body { catch {image delete hidden} set l [imageNames] set h [interp hidden] | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 | image create test foo -variable x .c create image 50 50 -image foo -tags i1 .c create image 90 100 -image foo -tags i2 set x {} image delete foo lappend x | [imageNames] | [catch {image delete foo} msg] | $msg | [imageNames] | } -cleanup { imageCleanup } -result {{foo free} {foo free} {foo delete} | {} | 1 | {image "foo" does not exist} | {} |} test image-13.3 {Tk_SizeOfImage procedure} -constraints testOldImageType -setup { imageCleanup } -body { image create oldtest foo -variable x set result [list [image width foo] [image height foo]] foo changed 0 0 0 0 85 60 lappend result [image width foo] [image height foo] } -cleanup { imageCleanup } -result {30 15 85 60} test image-13.4 {DeleteImage procedure} -constraints testOldImageType -setup { .c delete all imageCleanup } -body { image create oldtest foo -variable x .c create image 50 50 -image foo -tags i1 .c create image 90 100 -image foo -tags i2 set x {} image delete foo lappend x | [imageNames] | [catch {image delete foo} msg] | $msg | [imageNames] | } -cleanup { .c delete all imageCleanup } -result {{foo free} {foo free} {foo delete} | {} | 1 | {image "foo" does not exist} | {} |} test image-14.1 {image command vs hidden commands} -body { catch {image delete hidden} set l [imageNames] set h [interp hidden] |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/imgPPM.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
52 53 54 55 56 57 58 | } -returnCodes error -result {error reading PPM image file "test.ppm": not enough data} test imgPPM-1.8 {FileReadPPM procedure} -body { put test.ppm "P6\n5 4\n255\n01234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678" image create photo p1 -file test.ppm } -returnCodes error -result {error reading PPM image file "test.ppm": not enough data} test imgPPM-1.9 {FileReadPPM procedure} -body { put test.ppm "P6\n5 4\n150\n012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789" | | > | | | 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 | } -returnCodes error -result {error reading PPM image file "test.ppm": not enough data} test imgPPM-1.8 {FileReadPPM procedure} -body { put test.ppm "P6\n5 4\n255\n01234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678" image create photo p1 -file test.ppm } -returnCodes error -result {error reading PPM image file "test.ppm": not enough data} test imgPPM-1.9 {FileReadPPM procedure} -body { put test.ppm "P6\n5 4\n150\n012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789" list [image create photo p1 -file test.ppm] \ [image width p1] [image height p1] } -returnCodes ok -result {p1 5 4} test imgPPM-2.1 {FileWritePPM procedure} -setup { catch {image delete p1} } -body { put test.ppm "P6\n5 4\n255\n012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789" image create photo p1 -file test.ppm list [catch {p1 write not_a_dir/bar/baz/gorp} msg] [string tolower $msg] \ [string tolower $errorCode] } -cleanup { image delete p1 } -match glob -result {1 {c*t open "not_a_dir/bar/baz/gorp": no such file or directory} {posix enoent {no such file or directory}}} test imgPPM-2.2 {FileWritePPM procedure} -setup { catch {image delete p1} catch {unset data} } -body { put test.ppm "P6\n5 4\n255\n012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789" image create photo p1 -file test.ppm |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/imgPhoto.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
131 132 133 134 135 136 137 | [image width photo1] [image height photo1] } -cleanup { image delete photo1 } -result {79 83 79 83} test imgPhoto-1.2 {options for photo images} -body { list [catch {image create photo photo1 -file no.such.file} err] \ [string tolower $err] | | | 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 | [image width photo1] [image height photo1] } -cleanup { image delete photo1 } -result {79 83 79 83} test imgPhoto-1.2 {options for photo images} -body { list [catch {image create photo photo1 -file no.such.file} err] \ [string tolower $err] } -match glob -result {1 {c*t open "no.such.file": no such file or directory}} test imgPhoto-1.3 {options for photo images} -body { image create photo photo1 -file $teapotPhotoFile -format no.such.format } -returnCodes error -result {image file format "no.such.format" is not supported} test imgPhoto-1.4 {options for photo images} -body { image create photo photo1 -file $teapotPhotoFile list [image width photo1] [image height photo1] } -cleanup { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
224 225 226 227 228 229 230 | } -result {} test imgPhoto-3.2 {ImgPhotoConfigureModel procedure} -body { image create photo photo1 -file $teapotPhotoFile list [catch {photo1 configure -file bogus} err] [string tolower $err] \ [image width photo1] [image height photo1] } -cleanup { image delete photo1 | | | 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 | } -result {} test imgPhoto-3.2 {ImgPhotoConfigureModel procedure} -body { image create photo photo1 -file $teapotPhotoFile list [catch {photo1 configure -file bogus} err] [string tolower $err] \ [image width photo1] [image height photo1] } -cleanup { image delete photo1 } -match glob -result {1 {c*t open "bogus": no such file or directory} 256 256} test imgPhoto-3.3 {ImgPhotoConfigureModel procedure} -setup { destroy .c pack [canvas .c] update } -body { image create photo photo1 .c create image 10 10 -image photo1 -tags photo1.1 -anchor nw |
︙ | ︙ | |||
543 544 545 546 547 548 549 | } -result {unrecognized option "-zoom": must be -format, -from, -metadata, -shrink, or -to} test imgPhoto-4.32 {ImgPhotoCmd procedure: read option} -setup { image create photo photo1 } -body { list [catch {photo1 read bogus} err] [string tolower $err] } -cleanup { image delete photo1 | | | 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 | } -result {unrecognized option "-zoom": must be -format, -from, -metadata, -shrink, or -to} test imgPhoto-4.32 {ImgPhotoCmd procedure: read option} -setup { image create photo photo1 } -body { list [catch {photo1 read bogus} err] [string tolower $err] } -cleanup { image delete photo1 } -match glob -result {1 {c*t open "bogus": no such file or directory}} test imgPhoto-4.33 {ImgPhotoCmd procedure: read option} -setup { image create photo photo1 } -body { photo1 read $teapotPhotoFile -format bogus } -cleanup { image delete photo1 } -returnCodes error -result {image file format "bogus" is not supported} |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/imgSVGnano.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
204 205 206 207 208 209 210 | tcltest::makeFile $data(plus) tmpplus.svg image create photo foo -file [file join [tcltest::configure -tmpdir] tmpplus.svg] tcltest::removeFile tmpplus.svg } -body { foo configure -format "svg -scale 2" } -cleanup { rename foo "" | | | 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 | tcltest::makeFile $data(plus) tmpplus.svg image create photo foo -file [file join [tcltest::configure -tmpdir] tmpplus.svg] tcltest::removeFile tmpplus.svg } -body { foo configure -format "svg -scale 2" } -cleanup { rename foo "" } -returnCodes error -match glob -result {c*t open "*/tmpplus.svg": no such file or directory} # Special images test imgSVGnano-5.0 {image without any of "width", "height" and "viewbox"} -body { image create photo foo -data\ {<?xml version="1.0"?><!DOCTYPE svg PUBLIC\ "-//W3C//DTD SVG 1.0//EN\"\ "http://www.w3.org/TR/2001/REC-SVG-20010904/DTD/svg10.dtd">\ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/listbox.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
103 104 105 106 107 108 109 | .l configure -bg non-existent } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "non-existent"} test listbox-1.9 {configuration options} -body { .l configure -borderwidth 1.3 list [lindex [.l configure -borderwidth] 4] [.l cget -borderwidth] } -cleanup { .l configure -borderwidth [lindex [.l configure -borderwidth] 3] | | | 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 | .l configure -bg non-existent } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "non-existent"} test listbox-1.9 {configuration options} -body { .l configure -borderwidth 1.3 list [lindex [.l configure -borderwidth] 4] [.l cget -borderwidth] } -cleanup { .l configure -borderwidth [lindex [.l configure -borderwidth] 3] } -result {1 1} test listbox-1.10 {configuration options} -body { .l configure -borderwidth badValue } -returnCodes error -result {expected screen distance but got "badValue"} test listbox-1.11 {configuration options} -body { .l configure -cursor arrow list [lindex [.l configure -cursor] 4] [.l cget -cursor] } -cleanup { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
238 239 240 241 242 243 244 | .l configure -selectbackground bogus } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "bogus"} test listbox-1.37 {configuration options} -body { .l configure -selectborderwidth 1.3 list [lindex [.l configure -selectborderwidth] 4] [.l cget -selectborderwidth] } -cleanup { .l configure -selectborderwidth [lindex [.l configure -selectborderwidth] 3] | | | 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 | .l configure -selectbackground bogus } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "bogus"} test listbox-1.37 {configuration options} -body { .l configure -selectborderwidth 1.3 list [lindex [.l configure -selectborderwidth] 4] [.l cget -selectborderwidth] } -cleanup { .l configure -selectborderwidth [lindex [.l configure -selectborderwidth] 3] } -result {1 1} test listbox-1.38 {configuration options} -body { .l configure -selectborderwidth badValue } -returnCodes error -result {expected screen distance but got "badValue"} test listbox-1.39 {configuration options} -body { .l configure -selectforeground #654321 list [lindex [.l configure -selectforeground] 4] [.l cget -selectforeground] } -cleanup { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 | unset -nocomplain ::foo listbox .l2 -listvar foo .l2 insert end a b c d catch {.l2 configure -listvar ::zoo::bar::foo} result list [.l2 get 0 end] [.l2 cget -listvar] $foo $result } -cleanup { destroy .l2 | | | | 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 1493 1494 1495 1496 | unset -nocomplain ::foo listbox .l2 -listvar foo .l2 insert end a b c d catch {.l2 configure -listvar ::zoo::bar::foo} result list [.l2 get 0 end] [.l2 cget -listvar] $foo $result } -cleanup { destroy .l2 } -match glob -result [list [list a b c d] foo [list a b c d] \ {can*t set "::zoo::bar::foo": parent namespace does*t exist}] # No tests for DisplayListbox: I don't know how to test this procedure. test listbox-5.1 {ListboxComputeGeometry procedure} -constraints { fonts } -setup { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1683 1684 1685 1686 1687 1688 1689 | .l2 insert end c d .l2 delete end .l2 insert end e f catch {set ::test::foo} result list [.l2 get 0 end] [.l2 cget -listvar] $result } -cleanup { destroy .l2 | | | | 1683 1684 1685 1686 1687 1688 1689 1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 1697 1698 | .l2 insert end c d .l2 delete end .l2 insert end e f catch {set ::test::foo} result list [.l2 get 0 end] [.l2 cget -listvar] $result } -cleanup { destroy .l2 } -match glob -result [list [list a b c e f] ::test::foo \ {can*t read "::test::foo": no such variable}] test listbox-7.1 {DeleteEls procedure} -body { .l delete 0 end .l insert 0 a b c d e f g h i j .l selection set 1 6 .l delete 4 3 |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2699 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704 2705 | catch {unset x} listbox .l -listvar x set x [list a b c d] catch {set x "this is a \" bad list"} result set result } -cleanup { destroy .l | | | 2699 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704 2705 2706 2707 2708 2709 2710 2711 2712 2713 | catch {unset x} listbox .l -listvar x set x [list a b c d] catch {set x "this is a \" bad list"} result set result } -cleanup { destroy .l } -match glob -result {can*t set "x": invalid listvar value} test listbox-21.12 {ListboxListVarProc, cleanup item attributes} -setup { destroy .l } -body { set x [list a b c d e f g] listbox .l -listvar x .l itemconfigure end -fg red set x [list a b c d] |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/menu.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
1829 1830 1831 1832 1833 1834 1835 | } -cleanup { destroy .m1 } -result {} test menu-3.71 {MenuWidgetCmd procedure, "index end" option, bug [f3cd942e9e]} -setup { destroy .m1 } -body { menu .m1 | | | | 1829 1830 1831 1832 1833 1834 1835 1836 1837 1838 1839 1840 1841 1842 1843 1844 1845 1846 | } -cleanup { destroy .m1 } -result {} test menu-3.71 {MenuWidgetCmd procedure, "index end" option, bug [f3cd942e9e]} -setup { destroy .m1 } -body { menu .m1 expr {[.m1 index "end"] in [list {} none]} } -cleanup { destroy .m1 } -result 1 test menu-4.1 {TkInvokeMenu: disabled} -setup { destroy .m1 } -body { catch {unset foo} menu .m1 |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4094 4095 4096 4097 4098 4099 4100 4101 4102 4103 4104 4105 4106 4107 | } -body { # The following two lines caused Tk to read from and write to freed memory destroy .t.menubar.select.chain .t.menubar.select delete 1 } -cleanup { destroy .t } -result {} test menu-40.1 {Use-after-free if menu destroyed while posted - bug 09a11fb1228f} -setup { } -constraints {pressbutton} -body { set done false event generate {} <Motion> -x 100 -y 100 toplevel .t menu .t.m | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 4094 4095 4096 4097 4098 4099 4100 4101 4102 4103 4104 4105 4106 4107 4108 4109 4110 4111 4112 4113 4114 4115 4116 4117 4118 4119 4120 4121 4122 4123 4124 4125 4126 4127 4128 4129 4130 4131 4132 4133 4134 4135 4136 4137 4138 4139 4140 4141 4142 4143 4144 4145 4146 4147 4148 4149 4150 4151 4152 4153 4154 4155 4156 4157 4158 4159 4160 4161 4162 4163 4164 4165 4166 4167 4168 4169 4170 4171 4172 4173 4174 4175 4176 4177 4178 4179 4180 4181 4182 4183 4184 4185 4186 4187 4188 4189 4190 4191 4192 4193 4194 4195 4196 4197 4198 4199 4200 4201 4202 4203 4204 4205 4206 4207 4208 4209 4210 4211 4212 4213 4214 4215 4216 4217 4218 4219 4220 4221 4222 4223 4224 4225 4226 4227 4228 4229 4230 4231 4232 4233 4234 4235 4236 4237 4238 4239 4240 4241 4242 4243 4244 4245 4246 4247 4248 4249 4250 4251 4252 4253 4254 4255 4256 4257 4258 4259 | } -body { # The following two lines caused Tk to read from and write to freed memory destroy .t.menubar.select.chain .t.menubar.select delete 1 } -cleanup { destroy .t } -result {} test menu-40.1 {identifiers - auto generated} -setup { destroy .m } -body { menu .m list [.m add command -label 1] [.m add command -label 2] [.m add command -label 3] } -cleanup { destroy .m } -result {e001 e002 e003} test menu-40.2 {identifiers - out of sequence} -setup { destroy .m } -body { menu .m -tearoff 0 .m add command -label 1 .m insert 0 command -label 2 .m add command -label 3 list [.m index e001] [.m index e002] [.m index e003] } -cleanup { destroy .m } -result {1 0 2} test menu-40.3 {identifiers - out of sequence with tearoff} -setup { destroy .m } -body { menu .m -tearoff 1 .m add command -label 1 .m insert 0 command -label 2 .m add command -label 3 list [.m index e001] [.m index e002] [.m index e003] } -cleanup { destroy .m } -result {2 1 3} test menu-40.4 {identifiers - entry id} -setup { destroy .m } -body { menu .m -tearoff 1 .m add command -label 1 .m insert 0 command -label 2 .m add command -label 3 list [.m id 0] [.m id 1] [.m id 2] [.m id 3] } -cleanup { destroy .m } -result {{} e002 e001 e003} test menu-40.5 {identifiers - assigned} -setup { destroy .m } -body { menu .m list [.m add command cmd1 -label 1] [.m insert 0 command cmd2 -label 2] [.m add command cmd3 -label 3] } -cleanup { destroy .m } -result {cmd1 cmd2 cmd3} test menu-40.6 {identifiers - mixed} -setup { destroy .m } -body { menu .m list [.m add command -label 1] [.m insert 0 command cmd2 -label 2] [.m add command -label 3] } -cleanup { destroy .m } -result {e001 cmd2 e002} test menu-40.7 {identifiers - conflict} -setup { destroy .m } -body { menu .m list [.m add command e002 -label 1] [.m add command -label 2] [.m add command -label 3] } -cleanup { destroy .m } -result {e002 e001 e003} test menu-40.8 {identifiers - clone of complete menu} -setup { destroy .m1 .m2 } -body { menu .m1 -tearoff 0 .m1 add command -label 1 .m1 insert 0 command -label 2 .m1 add command cmd3 -label 3 .m1 clone .m2 list [.m2 index e001] [.m2 index e002] [.m2 index cmd3] } -cleanup { destroy .m1 .m2 } -result {1 0 2} test menu-40.9 {identifiers - modify after cloning} -setup { destroy .m1 .m2 } -body { menu .m1 -tearoff 0 .m1 clone .m2 .m1 add command -label 1 .m1 insert 0 command -label 2 .m1 add command cmd3 -label 3 list [.m2 index e001] [.m2 index e002] [.m2 index cmd3] } -cleanup { destroy .m1 .m2 } -result {1 0 2} test menu-40.10 {identifiers - modify clone} -setup { destroy .m1 .m2 } -body { menu .m1 -tearoff 0 .m1 clone .m2 .m2 add command -label 1 .m2 insert 0 command -label 2 .m2 add command cmd3 -label 3 list [.m1 index e001] [.m1 index e002] [.m1 index cmd3] } -cleanup { destroy .m1 .m2 } -result {1 0 2} test menu-40.11 {identifiers - entrycget by id} -setup { destroy .m } -body { menu .m .m add command -label 1 .m add command -label 2 .m add command cmd3 -label 3 list [.m entrycget e001 -label] [.m entrycget e002 -label] [.m entrycget cmd3 -label] } -cleanup { destroy .m } -result {1 2 3} test menu-40.12 {identifiers - delete by id} -setup { destroy .m } -body { menu .m .m add command -label 1 .m add command -label 2 .m add command -label 3 .m add command -label 4 .m add command -label 5 .m add command -label 6 .m add command -label 7 .m add command cmd8 -label 8 .m add command cmd9 -label 9 .m delete e003 cmd8 list [.m id 0] [.m id 1] [.m id 2] } -cleanup { destroy .m } -result {e001 e002 cmd9} test menu-40.13 {identifiers - duplicate} -setup { destroy .m } -body { menu .m .m add command foo -label 1 .m add command bar -label 2 .m add command foo -label 3 } -cleanup { destroy .m } -returnCodes error -result {entry "foo" already exists} test menu-40.14 {identifiers - reserved word} -setup { destroy .m } -body { menu .m -tearoff 0 .m add command last -label 1 .m add command -label 2 .m add command -label 3 .m index last } -cleanup { destroy .m } -result {2} test menu-40.1 {Use-after-free if menu destroyed while posted - bug 09a11fb1228f} -setup { } -constraints {pressbutton} -body { set done false event generate {} <Motion> -x 100 -y 100 toplevel .t menu .t.m |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4128 4129 4130 4131 4132 4133 4134 | after 3500 {movemouse 530 530} after 4000 pressbutton 530 530 after 4500 {set done true} tkwait variable done pressbutton 530 510 } | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 4280 4281 4282 4283 4284 4285 4286 4287 4288 4289 4290 4291 4292 4293 4294 4295 | after 3500 {movemouse 530 530} after 4000 pressbutton 530 530 after 4500 {set done true} tkwait variable done pressbutton 530 510 } # cleanup imageFinish deleteWindows cleanupTests return # Local variables: # mode: tcl # End: |
Changes to tests/menuDraw.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
554 555 556 557 558 559 560 | } -returnCodes ok -match glob -result * test menuDraw-15.2 {TkPostTearoffMenu - Deactivation} -setup { deleteWindows } -body { menu .m1 .m1 add command -label "foo" -state active set tearoff [tk::TearOffMenu .m1 40 40] | | | 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 | } -returnCodes ok -match glob -result * test menuDraw-15.2 {TkPostTearoffMenu - Deactivation} -setup { deleteWindows } -body { menu .m1 .m1 add command -label "foo" -state active set tearoff [tk::TearOffMenu .m1 40 40] expr {[$tearoff index active] in [list {} none]} } -cleanup { deleteWindows } -result 1 test menuDraw-15.3 {TkPostTearoffMenu - post command} -setup { deleteWindows } -body { catch {unset foo} |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/menubut.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
94 95 96 97 98 99 100 | .mb configure -bitmap badValue } -returnCodes error -result {bitmap "badValue" not defined} test menubutton-1.15 {configuration options} -body { .mb configure -borderwidth 1.3 .mb cget -borderwidth } -cleanup { .mb configure -borderwidth [lindex [.mb configure -borderwidth] 3] | | | 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 | .mb configure -bitmap badValue } -returnCodes error -result {bitmap "badValue" not defined} test menubutton-1.15 {configuration options} -body { .mb configure -borderwidth 1.3 .mb cget -borderwidth } -cleanup { .mb configure -borderwidth [lindex [.mb configure -borderwidth] 3] } -result 1 test menubutton-1.16 {configuration options} -body { .mb configure -borderwidth badValue } -returnCodes error -result {expected screen distance but got "badValue"} test menubutton-1.17 {configuration options} -body { .mb configure -cursor arrow .mb cget -cursor } -cleanup { |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/message.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
117 118 119 120 121 122 123 | pack .m update } -body { .m configure -borderwidth 1.3 .m cget -borderwidth } -cleanup { destroy .m | | | 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 | pack .m update } -body { .m configure -borderwidth 1.3 .m cget -borderwidth } -cleanup { destroy .m } -result 1 test message-1.12 {configuration option: "borderwidth"} -setup { message .m -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12 bold} pack .m update } -body { .m configure -borderwidth badValue } -cleanup { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
398 399 400 401 402 403 404 | pack .m update } -body { .m configure -padx -2 -pady -2 -width -2 list [.m cget -padx] [.m cget -pady] [.m cget -borderwidth] [.m cget -highlightthickness] [.m cget -width] } -cleanup { destroy .m | | | 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 | pack .m update } -body { .m configure -padx -2 -pady -2 -width -2 list [.m cget -padx] [.m cget -pady] [.m cget -borderwidth] [.m cget -highlightthickness] [.m cget -width] } -cleanup { destroy .m } -result {-1 -1 0 0 0} test message-2.1 {Tk_MessageObjCmd procedure} -body { message } -returnCodes error -result {wrong # args: should be "message pathName ?-option value ...?"} test message-2.2 {Tk_MessageObjCmd procedure} -body { |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/panedwindow.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
45 46 47 48 49 50 51 | .p configure -bg non-existent } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "non-existent"} test panedwindow-1.7 {configuration options: -borderwidth (good)} -body { .p configure -borderwidth 1.3 list [lindex [.p configure -borderwidth] 4] [.p cget -borderwidth] } -cleanup { .p configure -borderwidth [lindex [.p configure -borderwidth] 3] | | | 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 | .p configure -bg non-existent } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "non-existent"} test panedwindow-1.7 {configuration options: -borderwidth (good)} -body { .p configure -borderwidth 1.3 list [lindex [.p configure -borderwidth] 4] [.p cget -borderwidth] } -cleanup { .p configure -borderwidth [lindex [.p configure -borderwidth] 3] } -result {1 1} test panedwindow-1.8 {configuration options: -borderwidth (bad)} -body { .p configure -borderwidth badValue } -returnCodes error -result {expected screen distance but got "badValue"} test panedwindow-1.9 {configuration options: -cursor (good)} -body { .p configure -cursor arrow list [lindex [.p configure -cursor] 4] [.p cget -cursor] } -cleanup { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
118 119 120 121 122 123 124 | } -returnCodes error -result {expected screen distance but got "badValue"} test panedwindow-1.23 {configuration options: -proxyrelief (good)} -body { .p configure -proxyrelief groove list [lindex [.p configure -proxyrelief] 4] [.p cget -proxyrelief] } -cleanup { .p configure -proxyrelief [lindex [.p configure -proxyrelief] 3] } -result {groove groove} | | | 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 | } -returnCodes error -result {expected screen distance but got "badValue"} test panedwindow-1.23 {configuration options: -proxyrelief (good)} -body { .p configure -proxyrelief groove list [lindex [.p configure -proxyrelief] 4] [.p cget -proxyrelief] } -cleanup { .p configure -proxyrelief [lindex [.p configure -proxyrelief] 3] } -result {groove groove} test panedwindow-1.24 {configuration options: -proxyrelief (bad)} -constraints needsTcl87 -body { .p configure -proxyrelief 1.5 } -returnCodes error -result {bad relief "1.5": must be flat, groove, raised, ridge, solid, sunken, or ""} test panedwindow-1.25 {configuration options: -relief (good)} -body { .p configure -relief groove list [lindex [.p configure -relief] 4] [.p cget -relief] } -cleanup { .p configure -relief [lindex [.p configure -relief] 3] |
︙ | ︙ | |||
144 145 146 147 148 149 150 | .p configure -sashcursor badValue } -returnCodes error -result {bad cursor spec "badValue"} test panedwindow-1.29 {configuration options: -sashpad (good)} -body { .p configure -sashpad 1.3 list [lindex [.p configure -sashpad] 4] [.p cget -sashpad] } -cleanup { .p configure -sashpad [lindex [.p configure -sashpad] 3] | | | 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 | .p configure -sashcursor badValue } -returnCodes error -result {bad cursor spec "badValue"} test panedwindow-1.29 {configuration options: -sashpad (good)} -body { .p configure -sashpad 1.3 list [lindex [.p configure -sashpad] 4] [.p cget -sashpad] } -cleanup { .p configure -sashpad [lindex [.p configure -sashpad] 3] } -result {1 1} test panedwindow-1.30 {configuration options: -sashpad (bad)} -body { .p configure -sashpad badValue } -returnCodes error -result {expected screen distance but got "badValue"} test panedwindow-1.31 {configuration options: -sashrelief (good)} -body { .p configure -sashrelief groove list [lindex [.p configure -sashrelief] 4] [.p cget -sashrelief] } -cleanup { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
241 242 243 244 245 246 247 | } -returnCodes error -result {expected screen distance but got "badValue"} test panedwindow-1.49 {configuration options: -padx (good)} -body { .p paneconfigure .b -padx 1.3 list [lindex [.p paneconfigure .b -padx] 4] \ [.p panecget .b -padx] } -cleanup { .p paneconfig .b -padx [lindex [.p paneconfig .b -padx] 3] | | | | 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 | } -returnCodes error -result {expected screen distance but got "badValue"} test panedwindow-1.49 {configuration options: -padx (good)} -body { .p paneconfigure .b -padx 1.3 list [lindex [.p paneconfigure .b -padx] 4] \ [.p panecget .b -padx] } -cleanup { .p paneconfig .b -padx [lindex [.p paneconfig .b -padx] 3] } -result {1 1} test panedwindow-1.50 {configuration options: -padx (bad)} -body { .p paneconfigure .b -padx badValue } -returnCodes error -result {expected screen distance but got "badValue"} test panedwindow-1.51 {configuration options: -pady (good)} -body { .p paneconfigure .b -pady 1.3 list [lindex [.p paneconfigure .b -pady] 4] \ [.p panecget .b -pady] } -cleanup { .p paneconfig .b -pady [lindex [.p paneconfig .b -pady] 3] } -result {1 1} test panedwindow-1.52 {configuration options: -pady (bad)} -body { .p paneconfigure .b -pady badValue } -returnCodes error -result {expected screen distance but got "badValue"} test panedwindow-1.53 {configuration options: -sticky (good)} -body { .p paneconfigure .b -sticky nsew list [lindex [.p paneconfigure .b -sticky] 4] \ [.p panecget .b -sticky] |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4568 4569 4570 4571 4572 4573 4574 | test panedwindow-23.1 {ConfigurePanes, can't add panedwindow to itself} -setup { deleteWindows } -body { panedwindow .p .p add .p } -cleanup { deleteWindows | | | 4568 4569 4570 4571 4572 4573 4574 4575 4576 4577 4578 4579 4580 4581 4582 | test panedwindow-23.1 {ConfigurePanes, can't add panedwindow to itself} -setup { deleteWindows } -body { panedwindow .p .p add .p } -cleanup { deleteWindows } -returnCodes error -result {can't add .p to itself} test panedwindow-23.2 {ConfigurePanes, bad window throws error} -setup { deleteWindows } -body { panedwindow .p .p add .b } -cleanup { deleteWindows |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4859 4860 4861 4862 4863 4864 4865 | deleteWindows } -body { panedwindow .p toplevel .t .p add .t } -cleanup { deleteWindows | | | | 4859 4860 4861 4862 4863 4864 4865 4866 4867 4868 4869 4870 4871 4872 4873 4874 4875 4876 4877 4878 4879 4880 4881 4882 4883 | deleteWindows } -body { panedwindow .p toplevel .t .p add .t } -cleanup { deleteWindows } -returnCodes error -result {can't add toplevel .t to .p} test panedwindow-23.25 {ConfigurePanes, restrict possible panes} -setup { deleteWindows } -body { panedwindow .p frame .f button .f.b .p add .f.b } -cleanup { deleteWindows } -returnCodes error -result {can't add .f.b to .p} test panedwindow-23.26 {ConfigurePanes, restrict possible panes} -setup { deleteWindows } -body { frame .f panedwindow .f.p button .b .f.p add .b |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/scale.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
69 70 71 72 73 74 75 | .s configure -bg non-existent } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "non-existent"} test scale-1.11 {configuration options} -body { .s configure -borderwidth 1.3 .s cget -borderwidth } -cleanup { .s configure -borderwidth [lindex [.s configure -borderwidth] 3] | | | 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 | .s configure -bg non-existent } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "non-existent"} test scale-1.11 {configuration options} -body { .s configure -borderwidth 1.3 .s cget -borderwidth } -cleanup { .s configure -borderwidth [lindex [.s configure -borderwidth] 3] } -result 1 test scale-1.12 {configuration options} -body { .s configure -borderwidth badValue } -returnCodes error -result {expected screen distance but got "badValue"} test scale-1.13 {configuration options} -body { .s configure -command {set x} .s cget -command } -cleanup { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 | } -body { set y -130 scale .s -from -200 -to 0 -variable y -orient horizontal -length 150 pack .s set y 40q } -cleanup { deleteWindows | | | | 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 | } -body { set y -130 scale .s -from -200 -to 0 -variable y -orient horizontal -length 150 pack .s set y 40q } -cleanup { deleteWindows } -returnCodes error -match glob -result {can*t set "y": cannot assign a non-numeric value to a scale variable} test scale-15.4 {ScaleVarProc procedure} -setup { deleteWindows } -body { set y -130 scale .s -from -200 -to 0 -variable y -orient horizontal -length 150 pack .s catch {set y 40q} .s get } -cleanup { deleteWindows } -result -130 test scale-15.5 {ScaleVarProc procedure} -setup { deleteWindows } -body { set y 1 scale .s -from 1 -to 0 -variable y -orient horizontal -length 150 pack .s set y x } -cleanup { deleteWindows } -returnCodes error -match glob -result {can*t set "y": cannot assign a non-numeric value to a scale variable} test scale-15.6 {ScaleVarProc procedure} -setup { deleteWindows } -body { set y 1 scale .s -from 1 -to 0 -variable y -orient horizontal -length 150 pack .s catch {set y x} |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/scrollbar.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
74 75 76 77 78 79 80 | {-activerelief sunken sunken non-existent {bad relief "non-existent": must be flat, groove, raised, ridge, solid, or sunken}} {-background #ff0000 #ff0000 non-existent {unknown color name "non-existent"}} {-bd 4 4 badValue {expected screen distance but got "badValue"}} {-bg #ff0000 #ff0000 non-existent {unknown color name "non-existent"}} | | | | 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 | {-activerelief sunken sunken non-existent {bad relief "non-existent": must be flat, groove, raised, ridge, solid, or sunken}} {-background #ff0000 #ff0000 non-existent {unknown color name "non-existent"}} {-bd 4 4 badValue {expected screen distance but got "badValue"}} {-bg #ff0000 #ff0000 non-existent {unknown color name "non-existent"}} {-borderwidth 1.3 1 badValue {expected screen distance but got "badValue"}} {-command "set x" {set x} {} {}} {-elementborderwidth 4 4 badValue {expected screen distance or "" but got "badValue"}} {-cursor arrow arrow badValue {bad cursor spec "badValue"}} {-highlightbackground #112233 #112233 ugly {unknown color name "ugly"}} {-highlightcolor #123456 #123456 bogus {unknown color name "bogus"}} {-highlightthickness 6 6 bogus {expected screen distance but got "bogus"}} {-highlightthickness -2 0 {} {}} {-jump true 1 silly {expected boolean value but got "silly"}} {-orient horizontal horizontal badValue |
︙ | ︙ | |||
312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 | test scrollbar-3.42 {ScrollbarWidgetCmd procedure, "fraction" option} { format {%.6g} [.t.s fraction 100 0] } 0 destroy .t test scrollbar-3.43 {ScrollbarWidgetCmd procedure, "get" option} { list [catch {.s get a} msg] $msg } {1 {wrong # args: should be ".s get"}} test scrollbar-3.45 {ScrollbarWidgetCmd procedure, "get" option} { .s set 0.6 0.8 set result {} foreach element [.s get] { lappend result [format %.1f $element] } set result | > > > > | 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 | test scrollbar-3.42 {ScrollbarWidgetCmd procedure, "fraction" option} { format {%.6g} [.t.s fraction 100 0] } 0 destroy .t test scrollbar-3.43 {ScrollbarWidgetCmd procedure, "get" option} { list [catch {.s get a} msg] $msg } {1 {wrong # args: should be ".s get"}} test scrollbar-3.44 {ScrollbarWidgetCmd procedure, "get" option} {deprecated needsTcl87} { .s set 100 10 13 14 .s get } {100 10 13 14} test scrollbar-3.45 {ScrollbarWidgetCmd procedure, "get" option} { .s set 0.6 0.8 set result {} foreach element [.s get] { lappend result [format %.1f $element] } set result |
︙ | ︙ | |||
393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 | .s set .4 .3 set result {} foreach element [.s get] { lappend result [format %.1f $element] } set result } {0.4 0.4} test scrollbar-3.71 {ScrollbarWidgetCmd procedure, "set" option} { list [catch {.s set 1 2 3} msg] $msg } {1 {wrong # args: should be ".s set firstFraction lastFraction"}} test scrollbar-3.72 {ScrollbarWidgetCmd procedure, "set" option} { list [catch {.s set 1 2 3 4 5} msg] $msg } {1 {wrong # args: should be ".s set firstFraction lastFraction"}} test scrollbar-3.73 {ScrollbarWidgetCmd procedure} { | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 | .s set .4 .3 set result {} foreach element [.s get] { lappend result [format %.1f $element] } set result } {0.4 0.4} test scrollbar-3.64 {ScrollbarWidgetCmd procedure, "set" option} {deprecated needsTcl87} { list [catch {.s set abc def ghi jkl} msg] $msg } {1 {expected integer but got "abc"}} test scrollbar-3.65 {ScrollbarWidgetCmd procedure, "set" option} {deprecated needsTcl87} { list [catch {.s set 1 def ghi jkl} msg] $msg } {1 {expected integer but got "def"}} test scrollbar-3.66 {ScrollbarWidgetCmd procedure, "set" option} {deprecated needsTcl87} { list [catch {.s set 1 2 ghi jkl} msg] $msg } {1 {expected integer but got "ghi"}} test scrollbar-3.67 {ScrollbarWidgetCmd procedure, "set" option} {deprecated needsTcl87} { list [catch {.s set 1 2 3 jkl} msg] $msg } {1 {expected integer but got "jkl"}} test scrollbar-3.68 {ScrollbarWidgetCmd procedure, "set" option} {deprecated needsTcl87} { .s set -10 50 20 30 .s get } {0 50 0 0} test scrollbar-3.69 {ScrollbarWidgetCmd procedure, "set" option} {deprecated needsTcl87} { .s set 100 -10 20 30 .s get } {100 0 20 30} test scrollbar-3.70 {ScrollbarWidgetCmd procedure, "set" option} {deprecated needsTcl87} { .s set 100 50 30 20 .s get } {100 50 30 30} test scrollbar-3.71 {ScrollbarWidgetCmd procedure, "set" option} { list [catch {.s set 1 2 3} msg] $msg } {1 {wrong # args: should be ".s set firstFraction lastFraction"}} test scrollbar-3.72 {ScrollbarWidgetCmd procedure, "set" option} { list [catch {.s set 1 2 3 4 5} msg] $msg } {1 {wrong # args: should be ".s set firstFraction lastFraction"}} test scrollbar-3.73 {ScrollbarWidgetCmd procedure} { |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/spinbox.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | namespace import ::tcltest::* eval tcltest::configure $argv tcltest::loadTestedCommands # For xscrollcommand set scrollInfo {} proc scroll args { | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 | namespace import ::tcltest::* eval tcltest::configure $argv tcltest::loadTestedCommands # For xscrollcommand set scrollInfo {} proc scroll args { global scrollInfo set scrollInfo $args } # For trace add variable proc override args { global x set x 12345 } # Procedures used in widget VALIDATION tests proc doval {W d i P s S v V} { set ::vVals [list $W $d $i $P $s $S $v $V] return 1 } proc doval2 {W d i P s S v V} { set ::vVals [list $W $d $i $P $s $S $v $V] set ::e mydata return 1 } proc doval3 {W d i P s S v V} { set ::vVals [list $W $d $i $P $s $S $v $V] return 0 } set cy [font metrics {Courier -12} -linespace] test spinbox-1.1 {configuration option: "activebackground"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -activebackground #ff0000 .e cget -activebackground } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result {#ff0000} test spinbox-1.2 {configuration option: "activebackground" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -activebackground non-existent } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "non-existent"} test spinbox-1.3 {configuration option: "background"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -background #ff0000 .e cget -background } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result {#ff0000} test spinbox-1.4 {configuration option: "background" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -background non-existent } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "non-existent"} test spinbox-1.5 {configuration option: "bd"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -bd 4 .e cget -bd } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result 4 test spinbox-1.6 {configuration option: "bd" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -bd badValue } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {expected screen distance but got "badValue"} test spinbox-1.7 {configuration option: "bg"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -bg #ff0000 .e cget -bg } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result {#ff0000} test spinbox-1.8 {configuration option: "bg" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -bg non-existent } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "non-existent"} test spinbox-1.9 {configuration option: "borderwidth"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -borderwidth 1.3 .e cget -borderwidth } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result 1 test spinbox-1.10 {configuration option: "borderwidth" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -borderwidth badValue } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {expected screen distance but got "badValue"} test spinbox-1.11 {configuration option: "buttonbackground"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -buttonbackground #ff0000 .e cget -buttonbackground } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result {#ff0000} test spinbox-1.12 {configuration option: "buttonbackground" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -buttonbackground non-existent } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "non-existent"} test spinbox-1.13 {configuration option: "buttoncursor"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -buttoncursor arrow .e cget -buttoncursor } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result {arrow} test spinbox-1.14 {configuration option: "buttoncursor" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -buttoncursor badValue } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {bad cursor spec "badValue"} test spinbox-1.15 {configuration option: "command"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -command {a command} .e cget -command } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result {a command} test spinbox-1.16 {configuration option: "cursor"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -cursor arrow .e cget -cursor } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result {arrow} test spinbox-1.17 {configuration option: "cursor" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -cursor badValue } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {bad cursor spec "badValue"} test spinbox-1.18 {configuration option: "disabledbackground"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -disabledbackground green .e cget -disabledbackground } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result {green} test spinbox-1.19 {configuration option: "disabledbackground" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -disabledbackground non-existent } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "non-existent"} test spinbox-1.20 {configuration option: "disabledforeground"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -disabledforeground #110022 .e cget -disabledforeground } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result {#110022} test spinbox-1.21 {configuration option: "disabledforeground" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -disabledforeground bogus } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "bogus"} test spinbox-1.22 {configuration option: "exportselection"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -exportselection yes .e cget -exportselection } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result 1 test spinbox-1.23 {configuration option: "exportselection" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -exportselection xyzzy } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {expected boolean value but got "xyzzy"} test spinbox-1.24 {configuration option: "fg"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -fg #110022 .e cget -fg } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result {#110022} test spinbox-1.25 {configuration option: "fg" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -fg bogus } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "bogus"} test spinbox-1.26 {configuration option: "font"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -font -Adobe-Helvetica-Medium-R-Normal--*-120-*-*-*-*-*-* .e cget -font } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result {-Adobe-Helvetica-Medium-R-Normal--*-120-*-*-*-*-*-*} test spinbox-1.27 {configuration option: "font" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -font {} } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {font "" does not exist} test spinbox-1.28 {configuration option: "foreground"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -foreground #110022 .e cget -foreground } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result {#110022} test spinbox-1.29 {configuration option: "foreground" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -foreground bogus } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "bogus"} test spinbox-1.30 {configuration option: "format"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -format %0.5f .e cget -format } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result {%0.5f} test spinbox-1.31 {configuration option: "format" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -format %d } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {bad spinbox format specifier "%d"} test spinbox-1.32 {configuration option: "from"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -from -10 .e cget -from } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result {-10.0} test spinbox-1.33 {configuration option: "from" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -from bogus } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {expected floating-point number but got "bogus"} test spinbox-1.34 {configuration option: "highlightbackground"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -highlightbackground #123456 .e cget -highlightbackground } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result {#123456} test spinbox-1.35 {configuration option: "highlightbackground" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -highlightbackground ugly } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "ugly"} test spinbox-1.36 {configuration option: "highlightcolor"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -highlightcolor #123456 .e cget -highlightcolor } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result {#123456} test spinbox-1.37 {configuration option: "highlightcolor" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -highlightcolor bogus } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "bogus"} test spinbox-1.38 {configuration option: "highlightthickness"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -highlightthickness 6 .e cget -highlightthickness } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result 6 test spinbox-1.39 {configuration option: "highlightthickness" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -highlightthickness bogus } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {expected screen distance but got "bogus"} test spinbox-1.40 {configuration option: "highlightthickness"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -highlightthickness -2 .e cget -highlightthickness } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result 0 test spinbox-1.41 {configuration option: "increment"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -increment 1.0 .e cget -increment } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result {1.0} test spinbox-1.42 {configuration option: "increment" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -increment bogus } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {expected floating-point number but got "bogus"} test spinbox-1.43 {configuration option: "insertbackground"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -insertbackground #110022 .e cget -insertbackground } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result {#110022} test spinbox-1.44 {configuration option: "insertbackground" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -insertbackground bogus } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "bogus"} test spinbox-1.45 {configuration option: "insertborderwidth"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -insertwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -insertborderwidth 1.3 .e cget -insertborderwidth } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result 1 test spinbox-1.46 {configuration option: "insertborderwidth" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -insertborderwidth 2.6x } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {expected screen distance but got "2.6x"} test spinbox-1.47 {configuration option: "insertofftime"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -insertofftime 100 .e cget -insertofftime } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result 100 test spinbox-1.48 {configuration option: "insertofftime" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -insertofftime 3.2 } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {expected integer but got "3.2"} test spinbox-1.49 {configuration option: "insertontime"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -insertontime 100 .e cget -insertontime } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result 100 test spinbox-1.50 {configuration option: "insertontime" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -insertontime 3.2 } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {expected integer but got "3.2"} test spinbox-1.51 {configuration option: "invalidcommand"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -invalidcommand "a command" .e cget -invalidcommand } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result {a command} test spinbox-1.52 {configuration option: "invcmd"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -invcmd "a command" .e cget -invcmd } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result {a command} test spinbox-1.53 {configuration option: "justify"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -justify right .e cget -justify } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result {right} test spinbox-1.54 {configuration option: "justify" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -justify bogus } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {bad justification "bogus": must be left, right, or center} test spinbox-1.55 {configuration option: "readonlybackground"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -readonlybackground green .e cget -readonlybackground } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result {green} test spinbox-1.56 {configuration option: "readonlybackground" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -readonlybackground non-existent } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "non-existent"} test spinbox-1.57 {configuration option: "relief"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -relief groove .e cget -relief } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result {groove} test spinbox-1.58 {configuration option: "relief" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -relief 1.5 } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {bad relief "1.5": must be flat, groove, raised, ridge, solid, or sunken} test spinbox-1.59 {configuration option: "repeatdelay"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -repeatdelay 500 .e cget -repeatdelay } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result 500 test spinbox-1.60 {configuration option: "repeatdelay" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -repeatdelay 3p } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {expected integer but got "3p"} test spinbox-1.61 {configuration option: "repeatinterval"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -repeatinterval -500 .e cget -repeatinterval } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result -500 test spinbox-1.62 {configuration option: "repeatinterval" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -repeatinterval 3p } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {expected integer but got "3p"} test spinbox-1.63 {configuration option: "selectbackground"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -selectbackground #110022 .e cget -selectbackground } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result {#110022} test spinbox-1.64 {configuration option: "selectbackground" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -selectbackground bogus } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "bogus"} test spinbox-1.65 {configuration option: "selectborderwidth"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -selectborderwidth 1.3 .e cget -selectborderwidth } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result 1 test spinbox-1.66 {configuration option: "selectborderwidth" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -selectborderwidth badValue } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {expected screen distance but got "badValue"} test spinbox-1.67 {configuration option: "selectforeground"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -selectforeground #654321 .e cget -selectforeground } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result {#654321} test spinbox-1.68 {configuration option: "selectforeground" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -selectforeground bogus } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "bogus"} test spinbox-1.69 {configuration option: "state"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -state n .e cget -state } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result {normal} test spinbox-1.70 {configuration option: "state" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -state bogus } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {bad state "bogus": must be disabled, normal, or readonly} test spinbox-1.71 {configuration option: "takefocus"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -takefocus "any string" .e cget -takefocus } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result {any string} test spinbox-1.72 {configuration option: "textvariable"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -textvariable i .e cget -textvariable } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result {i} test spinbox-1.73 {configuration option: "to"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -to 14.9 .e cget -to } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result {14.9} test spinbox-1.74 {configuration option: "to" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -to bogus } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {expected floating-point number but got "bogus"} test spinbox-1.75 {configuration option: "validate"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -validate "key" .e cget -validate } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result {key} test spinbox-1.76 {configuration option: "validate" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -validate "bogus" } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {bad validate "bogus": must be all, key, focus, focusin, focusout, or none} test spinbox-1.77 {configuration option: "validatecommand"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -validatecommand "a command" .e cget -validatecommand } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result {a command} test spinbox-1.78 {configuration option: "values"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -values {mon tue wed thur} .e cget -values } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result {mon tue wed thur} test spinbox-1.79 {configuration option: "values" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -values {bad {}list} } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {list element in braces followed by "list" instead of space} test spinbox-1.80 {configuration option: "validatecommand"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -validatecommand "a command" .e cget -validatecommand } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result {a command} test spinbox-1.81 {configuration option: "width"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -width 402 .e cget -width } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result 402 test spinbox-1.82 {configuration option: "width" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -width 3p } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {expected integer but got "3p"} test spinbox-1.83 {configuration option: "wrap"} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -wrap yes .e cget -wrap } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result 1 test spinbox-1.84 {configuration option: "wrap" for spinbox} -setup { spinbox .e -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Helvetica -12} \ -relief sunken pack .e update } -body { .e configure -wrap xyzzy } -cleanup { destroy .e |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2894 2895 2896 2897 2898 2899 2900 | destroy .e } -result {1 6} test spinbox-13.10 {GetSpinboxIndex procedure} -constraints x11 -body { # On unix, when selection is cleared, spinbox widget's internal # selection range is reset. # Previous settings: | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 2894 2895 2896 2897 2898 2899 2900 2901 2902 2903 2904 2905 2906 2907 2908 2909 2910 2911 2912 2913 2914 2915 2916 2917 2918 2919 2920 2921 2922 2923 2924 2925 2926 2927 2928 2929 2930 2931 2932 2933 2934 2935 2936 2937 2938 2939 2940 2941 2942 2943 2944 2945 2946 2947 2948 2949 2950 2951 2952 2953 2954 2955 2956 2957 2958 2959 2960 2961 2962 2963 2964 2965 2966 2967 2968 2969 2970 2971 2972 2973 2974 2975 2976 2977 2978 2979 2980 2981 2982 2983 2984 2985 2986 2987 2988 2989 2990 2991 2992 2993 2994 2995 2996 2997 2998 2999 3000 3001 3002 3003 3004 3005 3006 3007 3008 3009 3010 3011 3012 3013 3014 3015 3016 3017 3018 3019 3020 3021 3022 3023 3024 | destroy .e } -result {1 6} test spinbox-13.10 {GetSpinboxIndex procedure} -constraints x11 -body { # On unix, when selection is cleared, spinbox widget's internal # selection range is reset. # Previous settings: spinbox .e -font {Courier -12} -width 5 -bd 2 -relief sunken pack .e .e insert 0 012345678901234567890 .e xview 4 update .e select from 1 .e select to 6 list [.e index sel.first] [.e index sel.last] # Testing: selection clear .e .e index sel.first } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {selection isn't in widget .e} test spinbox-13.11 {GetSpinboxIndex procedure} -constraints aquaOrWin32 -body { # On mac and pc, when selection is cleared, spinbox widget remembers # last selected range. When selection ownership is restored to # spinbox, the old range will be rehighlighted. # Previous settings: spinbox .e -font {Courier -12} -width 5 -bd 2 -relief sunken pack .e .e insert 0 012345678901234567890 .e xview 4 update .e select from 1 .e select to 6 list [.e index sel.first] [.e index sel.last] # Testing: selection clear .e catch {selection get} .e index sel.first } -cleanup { destroy .e } -result 1 test spinbox-13.12 {GetSpinboxIndex procedure} -constraints x11 -body { # Previous settings: spinbox .e -font {Courier -12} -width 5 -bd 2 -relief sunken pack .e .e insert 0 012345678901234567890 .e xview 4 update .e select from 1 .e select to 6 list [.e index sel.first] [.e index sel.last] # Testing: selection clear .e .e index sbogus } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {selection isn't in widget .e} test spinbox-13.12.1 {GetSpinboxIndex procedure} -constraints unix -body { # Previous settings: spinbox .e -font {Courier -12} -width 5 -bd 2 -relief sunken pack .e .e insert 0 012345678901234567890 .e xview 4 update .e select from 1 .e select to 6 list [.e index sel.first] [.e index sel.last] # Testing: selection clear .e .e index bogus } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {bad spinbox index "bogus"} test spinbox-13.13 {GetSpinboxIndex procedure} -constraints win -body { # Previous settings: spinbox .e -font {Courier -12} -width 5 -bd 2 -relief sunken pack .e .e insert 0 012345678901234567890 .e xview 4 update .e select from 1 .e select to 6 list [.e index sel.first] [.e index sel.last] # Testing: selection clear .e .e index sbogus } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -result {bad spinbox index "sbogus"} test spinbox-13.14 {GetSpinboxIndex procedure} -constraints win -body { # On mac and pc, when selection is cleared, spinbox widget remembers # last selected range. When selection ownership is restored to # spinbox, the old range will be rehighlighted. # Previous settings: spinbox .e -font {Courier -12} -width 5 -bd 2 -relief sunken pack .e .e insert 0 012345678901234567890 .e xview 4 update .e select from 1 .e select to 6 list [.e index sel.first] [.e index sel.last] # Testing: selection clear .e selection get } -cleanup { destroy .e } -returnCodes error -match glob -result {*} test spinbox-13.14.1 {GetSpinboxIndex procedure} -constraints win -body { # On mac and pc, when selection is cleared, spinbox widget remembers # last selected range. When selection ownership is restored to # spinbox, the old range will be rehighlighted. # Previous settings: spinbox .e -font {Courier -12} -width 5 -bd 2 -relief sunken pack .e .e insert 0 012345678901234567890 .e xview 4 update .e select from 1 .e select to 6 list [.e index sel.first] [.e index sel.last] # Testing: selection clear .e catch {selection get} .e index sbogus |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3871 3872 3873 3874 3875 3876 3877 | catch {.s set mystring} result1 catch {.s insert 0 mystring} result2 catch {.s delete 0} result3 catch {.s invoke buttonup} result4 list $result1 $result2 $result3 $result4 } -cleanup { destroy .s | | | | | | | 3871 3872 3873 3874 3875 3876 3877 3878 3879 3880 3881 3882 3883 3884 3885 3886 3887 3888 3889 3890 3891 3892 3893 3894 3895 3896 3897 | catch {.s set mystring} result1 catch {.s insert 0 mystring} result2 catch {.s delete 0} result3 catch {.s invoke buttonup} result4 list $result1 $result2 $result3 $result4 } -cleanup { destroy .s } -match glob -result [list {can*t set "myvar": Intentional error here!} \ {can*t set "myvar": Intentional error here!} \ {can*t set "myvar": Intentional error here!} \ {can*t set "myvar": Intentional error here!}] test spinbox-25.1 {textvariable lives in a non-existing namespace} -setup { destroy .s } -body { catch {spinbox .s -textvariable thisnsdoesntexist::myvar} result1 set result1 } -cleanup { destroy .s } -match glob -result {can*t trace "thisnsdoesntexist::myvar": parent namespace does*t exist} test spinbox-25.3 {Bugs [2a32225cd1] and [9fa3e08243]} -setup { destroy .s pack [spinbox .s] update set res {} } -body { .s insert end "A sample text" |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/text.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
413 414 415 416 417 418 419 | pack .t update } -body { .t configure -insertwidth 2.3 .t cget -insertwidth } -cleanup { destroy .t | | | 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 | pack .t update } -body { .t configure -insertwidth 2.3 .t cget -insertwidth } -cleanup { destroy .t } -result 2 test text-1.42 {configuration option: "insertwidth"} -setup { text .t -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Courier -12 bold} pack .t update } -body { .t configure -insertwidth 47d } -cleanup { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
460 461 462 463 464 465 466 | pack .t update } -body { .t configure -padx 3.4 .t cget -padx } -cleanup { destroy .t | | | 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 | pack .t update } -body { .t configure -padx 3.4 .t cget -padx } -cleanup { destroy .t } -result 3 test text-1.46 {configuration option: "padx"} -setup { text .t -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 -font {Courier -12 bold} pack .t update } -body { .t configure -padx 2.4. } -cleanup { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3374 3375 3376 3377 3378 3379 3380 | [lindex [.t tag config sel -background] 4] } -cleanup { destroy .t } -result {17 #332211 #abc} test text-14.10 {ConfigureText procedure} -setup { text .t -font {Courier -12} -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 } -body { | | | | | 3374 3375 3376 3377 3378 3379 3380 3381 3382 3383 3384 3385 3386 3387 3388 3389 3390 3391 3392 3393 3394 3395 3396 3397 3398 3399 | [lindex [.t tag config sel -background] 4] } -cleanup { destroy .t } -result {17 #332211 #abc} test text-14.10 {ConfigureText procedure} -setup { text .t -font {Courier -12} -borderwidth 2 -highlightthickness 2 } -body { .t configure -selectborderwidth {} .t tag cget sel -borderwidth } -cleanup { destroy .t } -result {} test text-14.11 {ConfigureText procedure} -setup { text .t } -body { .t configure -selectborderwidth foo } -cleanup { destroy .t } -returnCodes error -result {expected screen distance or "" but got "foo"} test text-14.12 {ConfigureText procedure} -body { text .t entry .t.e .t.e insert end abcdefg .t.e select from 0 .t.e select to 2 text .t2 -exportselection 1 |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4178 4179 4180 4181 4182 4183 4184 | } -result {2.13 {}} test text-22.22 {TextSearchCmd procedure, bad regular expression pattern} -body { text .t .t insert end "xxyz xyz x. the\nfoo -forward bar xxxxx BaR foo\nxyz xxyzx" .t search -regexp a( 1.0 } -cleanup { destroy .t | | | 4178 4179 4180 4181 4182 4183 4184 4185 4186 4187 4188 4189 4190 4191 4192 | } -result {2.13 {}} test text-22.22 {TextSearchCmd procedure, bad regular expression pattern} -body { text .t .t insert end "xxyz xyz x. the\nfoo -forward bar xxxxx BaR foo\nxyz xxyzx" .t search -regexp a( 1.0 } -cleanup { destroy .t } -returnCodes error -match glob -result {*t compile regular expression pattern: parentheses () not balanced} test text-22.23 {TextSearchCmd procedure, skip dummy last line} -body { text .t .t insert end "xxyz xyz x. the\nfoo -forward bar xxxxx BaR foo\nxyz xxyzx" .t search -backwards BaR end 1.0 } -cleanup { destroy .t } -result {2.23} |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4482 4483 4484 4485 4486 4487 4488 | test text-22.56 {TextSearchCmd procedure, error setting variable} -body { text .t .t insert end "xxyz xyz x. the\nfoo -forward bar xxxxx BaR foo\nxyz xxyzx" set a 44 .t search -count a(2) xyz 1.0 } -cleanup { destroy .t | | | 4482 4483 4484 4485 4486 4487 4488 4489 4490 4491 4492 4493 4494 4495 4496 | test text-22.56 {TextSearchCmd procedure, error setting variable} -body { text .t .t insert end "xxyz xyz x. the\nfoo -forward bar xxxxx BaR foo\nxyz xxyzx" set a 44 .t search -count a(2) xyz 1.0 } -cleanup { destroy .t } -returnCodes error -match glob -result {can*t set "a(2)": variable is* array} test text-22.57 {TextSearchCmd procedure, wrap-around} -body { text .t .t insert end "xxyz xyz x. the\nfoo -forward bar xxxxx BaR foo\nxyz xxyzx" .t search -backwards xyz 1.1 } -cleanup { destroy .t } -result {3.5} |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/textImage.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
202 203 204 205 206 207 208 | text .t -font test_font -bd 0 -highlightthickness 0 -padx 0 -pady 0 pack .t .t image create end -image small .t image configure small } -cleanup { destroy .t image delete small | | | | 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 | text .t -font test_font -bd 0 -highlightthickness 0 -padx 0 -pady 0 pack .t .t image create end -image small .t image configure small } -cleanup { destroy .t image delete small } -result {{-align {} {} center center} {-padx {} {} 0 0} {-pady {} {} 0 0} {-image {} {} {} small} {-name {} {} {} {}}} test textImage-1.17 {basic cget options} -setup { destroy .t set result "" } -body { catch { image create photo small -width 5 -height 5 small put red -to 0 0 4 4 } text .t -font test_font -bd 0 -highlightthickness 0 -padx 0 -pady 0 pack .t .t image create end -image small foreach i {align padx pady image name} { lappend result $i:[.t image cget small -$i] } return $result } -cleanup { destroy .t image delete small } -result {align:center padx:0 pady:0 image:small name:} test textImage-1.18 {basic configure options} -setup { destroy .t set result "" } -body { catch { image create photo small -width 5 -height 5 |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/textTag.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
109 110 111 112 113 114 115 | } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "silly color"} test textTag-1.12 {tag configuration options} -body { .t tag configure x -justify left .t tag cget x -justify } -cleanup { .t tag configure x -justify [lindex [.t tag configure x -justify] 3] } -result {left} | | | 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 | } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "silly color"} test textTag-1.12 {tag configuration options} -body { .t tag configure x -justify left .t tag cget x -justify } -cleanup { .t tag configure x -justify [lindex [.t tag configure x -justify] 3] } -result {left} test textTag-1.13 {configuration options, bug [026e2bb685]} -constraints needsTcl87 -body { .t tag configure x -justify right catch {.t tag configure x -justify middle} msg list $msg [.t tag configure x -justify] } -cleanup { .t tag configure x -justify [lindex [.t tag configure x -justify] 3] } -result {{bad justification "middle": must be left, right, center, or ""} {-justify {} {} {} right}} test textTag-1.14 {tag configuration options} -body { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
165 166 167 168 169 170 171 | .t tag configure x -offset [lindex [.t tag configure x -offset] 3] } -returnCodes error -result {expected screen distance or "" but got "100xyz"} test textTag-1.20 {tag configuration options} -body { .t tag configure x -overstrike on .t tag cget x -overstrike } -cleanup { .t tag configure x -overstrike [lindex [.t tag configure x -overstrike] 3] | | | 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 | .t tag configure x -offset [lindex [.t tag configure x -offset] 3] } -returnCodes error -result {expected screen distance or "" but got "100xyz"} test textTag-1.20 {tag configuration options} -body { .t tag configure x -overstrike on .t tag cget x -overstrike } -cleanup { .t tag configure x -overstrike [lindex [.t tag configure x -overstrike] 3] } -result {on} test textTag-1.21 {configuration options} -body { .t tag configure x -overstrike stupid } -cleanup { .t tag configure x -overstrike [lindex [.t tag configure x -overstrike] 3] } -returnCodes error -result {expected boolean value or "" but got "stupid"} test textTag-1.21a {tag configuration options} -body { .t tag configure x -overstrikefg red |
︙ | ︙ | |||
188 189 190 191 192 193 194 | } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "stupid"} test textTag-1.22 {tag configuration options} -body { .t tag configure x -relief raised .t tag cget x -relief } -cleanup { .t tag configure x -relief [lindex [.t tag configure x -relief] 3] } -result {raised} | | | 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 | } -returnCodes error -result {unknown color name "stupid"} test textTag-1.22 {tag configuration options} -body { .t tag configure x -relief raised .t tag cget x -relief } -cleanup { .t tag configure x -relief [lindex [.t tag configure x -relief] 3] } -result {raised} test textTag-1.23 {configuration options} -constraints needsTcl87 -body { .t tag configure x -relief stupid } -cleanup { .t tag configure x -relief [lindex [.t tag configure x -relief] 3] } -returnCodes error -result {bad relief "stupid": must be flat, groove, raised, ridge, solid, sunken, or ""} test textTag-1.24 {tag configuration options} -body { .t tag configure x -rmargin 10 .t tag cget x -rmargin |
︙ | ︙ | |||
287 288 289 290 291 292 293 | .t tag configure x -tabs [lindex [.t tag configure x -tabs] 3] } -returnCodes error -result {bad tab alignment "fork": must be left, right, center, or numeric} test textTag-1.34 {tag configuration options} -body { .t tag configure x -underline no .t tag cget x -underline } -cleanup { .t tag configure x -underline [lindex [.t tag configure x -underline] 3] | | | 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 | .t tag configure x -tabs [lindex [.t tag configure x -tabs] 3] } -returnCodes error -result {bad tab alignment "fork": must be left, right, center, or numeric} test textTag-1.34 {tag configuration options} -body { .t tag configure x -underline no .t tag cget x -underline } -cleanup { .t tag configure x -underline [lindex [.t tag configure x -underline] 3] } -result {no} test textTag-1.35 {configuration options} -body { .t tag configure x -underline stupid } -cleanup { .t tag configure x -underline [lindex [.t tag configure x -underline] 3] } -returnCodes error -result {expected boolean value or "" but got "stupid"} test textTag-1.36 {tag configuration options} -body { .t tag configure x -underlinefg red |
︙ | ︙ | |||
497 498 499 500 501 502 503 | } -returnCodes error -result {value for "-underline" missing} test textTag-5.4 {TkTextTagCmd - "configure" option} -body { .t tag delete x .t tag configure x -underline yes .t tag configure x -underline } -cleanup { .t tag delete x | | | | 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 | } -returnCodes error -result {value for "-underline" missing} test textTag-5.4 {TkTextTagCmd - "configure" option} -body { .t tag delete x .t tag configure x -underline yes .t tag configure x -underline } -cleanup { .t tag delete x } -result {-underline {} {} {} yes} test textTag-5.4a {TkTextTagCmd - "configure" option} -body { .t tag delete x .t tag configure x -underlinefg lightgreen .t tag configure x -underlinefg } -cleanup { .t tag delete x } -result {-underlinefg {} {} {} lightgreen} test textTag-5.5 {TkTextTagCmd - "configure" option} -body { .t tag delete x .t tag configure x -overstrike on .t tag cget x -overstrike } -cleanup { .t tag delete x } -result {on} test textTag-5.5a {TkTextTagCmd - "configure" option} -body { .t tag delete x .t tag configure x -overstrikefg lightgreen .t tag configure x -overstrikefg } -cleanup { .t tag delete x } -result {-overstrikefg {} {} {} lightgreen} |
︙ | ︙ | |||
537 538 539 540 541 542 543 | test textTag-5.8 {TkTextTagCmd - "configure" option} -body { .t tag delete x .t tag configure x -justify left .t tag configure x -justify } -cleanup { .t tag delete x } -result {-justify {} {} {} left} | | | | | 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 | test textTag-5.8 {TkTextTagCmd - "configure" option} -body { .t tag delete x .t tag configure x -justify left .t tag configure x -justify } -cleanup { .t tag delete x } -result {-justify {} {} {} left} test textTag-5.9 {TkTextTagCmd - "configure" option, bug [026e2bb685]} -constraints needsTcl87 -body { .t tag delete x catch {.t tag configure x -justify bogus} msg list $msg [.t tag configure x -justify] } -cleanup { .t tag delete x } -result {{bad justification "bogus": must be left, right, center, or ""} {-justify {} {} {} {}}} test textTag-5.10 {TkTextTagCmd - "configure" option} -constraints needsTcl87 -body { .t tag delete x .t tag configure x -justify fill } -cleanup { .t tag delete x } -returnCodes error -result {bad justification "fill": must be left, right, center, or ""} test textTag-5.11 {TkTextTagCmd - "configure" option} -body { .t tag delete x |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/textWind.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
283 284 285 286 287 288 289 | .t window create end -window .f .t index .f } -result {2.6} test textWind-2.17 {TkTextWindowCmd procedure} -setup { .t delete 1.0 end } -body { list [catch {.t window create 1.0} msg] $msg [.t window configure 1.0] | | | 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 | .t window create end -window .f .t index .f } -result {2.6} test textWind-2.17 {TkTextWindowCmd procedure} -setup { .t delete 1.0 end } -body { list [catch {.t window create 1.0} msg] $msg [.t window configure 1.0] } -result {0 {} {{-align {} {} center center} {-create {} {} {} {}} {-padx {} {} 0 0} {-pady {} {} 0 0} {-stretch {} {} 0 0} {-window {} {} {} {}}}} test textWind-2.18 {TkTextWindowCmd procedure} -setup { destroy .f frame .f -width 20 -height 10 -bg $color .t window create end -window .f .t delete 1.0 end } -body { frame .f -width 10 -height 6 -bg $color |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/ttk/entry.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 | test entry-1.7 "Deletion - insert cursor in the middle " -body { .e insert end abcde .e icursor 3 .e delete 0 end .e index insert } -result 0 | | | 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 | test entry-1.7 "Deletion - insert cursor in the middle " -body { .e insert end abcde .e icursor 3 .e delete 0 end .e index insert } -result 0 test entry-1.8 "Index is between 0 and end" -constraints deprecated -body { .e delete 0 end .e insert end abcde set res [list [.e index -1] [.e index -4] [.e index 999]] } -result {0 0 5} test entry-1.done "Cleanup" -body { destroy .e } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
298 299 300 301 302 303 304 | test entry-8.2 "Unset linked variable by deleting namespace" -body { namespace eval ::test { variable foo "bar" } pack [ttk::entry .e -textvariable ::test::foo] namespace delete ::test .e insert end "baz" ;# <== error here list [.e cget -textvariable] [.e get] [set foo] | | | 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 | test entry-8.2 "Unset linked variable by deleting namespace" -body { namespace eval ::test { variable foo "bar" } pack [ttk::entry .e -textvariable ::test::foo] namespace delete ::test .e insert end "baz" ;# <== error here list [.e cget -textvariable] [.e get] [set foo] } -returnCodes error -result {can*t set "::test::foo": parent namespace does*t exist} -match glob # '-result [list ::test::foo "baz" "baz"]' would also be sensible, # but Tcl namespaces don't work that way. test entry-8.2a "Followup to test 8.2" -body { .e cget -textvariable } -result ::test::foo -cleanup { destroy .e } # For 8.2a, -result {} would also be sensible. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/ttk/panedwindow.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
307 308 309 310 311 312 313 | test panedwindow-6.1 "style command" -body { # Contrary to ttk::scrollbar, ttk::progressbar and ttk::scale, # ttk::panedwindow has same style TPanedwindow whatever -orient is ttk::panedwindow .wv ; # default is -orient vertical ttk::panedwindow .wh -orient horizontal list [.wv cget -style] [.wv style] [winfo class .wv]\ | | | 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 | test panedwindow-6.1 "style command" -body { # Contrary to ttk::scrollbar, ttk::progressbar and ttk::scale, # ttk::panedwindow has same style TPanedwindow whatever -orient is ttk::panedwindow .wv ; # default is -orient vertical ttk::panedwindow .wh -orient horizontal list [.wv cget -style] [.wv style] [winfo class .wv]\ [.wh cget -style] [.wh style] [winfo class .wh] } -cleanup { destroy .wv .wh } -result {{} TPanedwindow TPanedwindow {} TPanedwindow TPanedwindow} test panedwindow-6.2 "style command" -body { ttk::style configure customStyle.TPanedwindow ttk::panedwindow .w -style customStyle.TPanedwindow list [.w cget -style] [.w style] [winfo class .w] |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/ttk/pb_image.svg.
︙ | ︙ | |||
45 46 47 48 49 50 51 | showguides="false" showborder="false" inkscape:pagecheckerboard="true" /> <metadata id="metadata5"> <rdf:RDF> <cc:Work | | | | | | | 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 | showguides="false" showborder="false" inkscape:pagecheckerboard="true" /> <metadata id="metadata5"> <rdf:RDF> <cc:Work rdf:about=""> <dc:format>image/svg+xml</dc:format> <dc:type rdf:resource="http://purl.org/dc/dcmitype/StillImage" /> <dc:title></dc:title> </cc:Work> </rdf:RDF> </metadata> <g inkscape:label="Layer 1" inkscape:groupmode="layer" id="layer1" |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/ttk/scale.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 | unset -nocomplain res } -result {0 normal 1 disabled 0 normal 1 normal {disabled readonly} normal} test scale-3.1 "style command" -body { ttk::scale .wh ; # default is -orient horizontal ttk::scale .wv -orient vertical list [.wh cget -style] [.wh style] [winfo class .wh] \ | | | 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 | unset -nocomplain res } -result {0 normal 1 disabled 0 normal 1 normal {disabled readonly} normal} test scale-3.1 "style command" -body { ttk::scale .wh ; # default is -orient horizontal ttk::scale .wv -orient vertical list [.wh cget -style] [.wh style] [winfo class .wh] \ [.wv cget -style] [.wv style] [winfo class .wv] } -cleanup { destroy .wh .wv } -result {{} Horizontal.TScale TScale {} Vertical.TScale TScale} test scale-3.2 "style command" -body { ttk::style configure customStyle.Vertical.TScale ttk::scale .w -orient vertical -style customStyle.Vertical.TScale list [.w cget -style] [.w style] [winfo class .w] |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/ttk/scrollbar.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
118 119 120 121 122 123 124 | destroy .t .s } -result {1.3} test scrollbar-11.1 "style command" -body { ttk::scrollbar .wv ; # default is -orient vertical ttk::scrollbar .wh -orient horizontal list [.wv cget -style] [.wv style] [winfo class .wv] \ | | | 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 | destroy .t .s } -result {1.3} test scrollbar-11.1 "style command" -body { ttk::scrollbar .wv ; # default is -orient vertical ttk::scrollbar .wh -orient horizontal list [.wv cget -style] [.wv style] [winfo class .wv] \ [.wh cget -style] [.wh style] [winfo class .wh] } -cleanup { destroy .wv .wh } -result {{} Vertical.TScrollbar TScrollbar {} Horizontal.TScrollbar TScrollbar} test scrollbar-11.2 "style command" -body { ttk::style configure customStyle.Horizontal.TScrollbar ttk::scrollbar .w -orient horizontal -style customStyle.Horizontal.TScrollbar list [.w cget -style] [.w style] [winfo class .w] |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/ttk/treetags.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
187 188 189 190 191 192 193 | # @@@ fragile test test treetags-3.2 "tag configure - enumerate" -body { $tv tag configure tag1 } -cleanup { treeConstraints $tv } -result [list \ | | < | 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 | # @@@ fragile test test treetags-3.2 "tag configure - enumerate" -body { $tv tag configure tag1 } -cleanup { treeConstraints $tv } -result [list \ -image {} -imageanchor {} -background red -stripedbackground {} -foreground blue -font {} -padding {}] test treetags-4.1 "tag cell add" -body { $tv tag cell add _thetag } -returnCodes 1 -result {wrong # args: should be ".tv tag cell add tagName cells"} test treetags-4.2 "tag cell remove" -body { $tv tag cell remove _thetag $tv tag cell remove |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/ttk/treeview.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
187 188 189 190 191 192 193 | foreach item [.tv children {}] { lappend result [.tv index $item] } set result } -result [list 0 1 2 3 4 5 6] test treeview-3.6 "detach" -body { | < | | | 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 | foreach item [.tv children {}] { lappend result [.tv index $item] } set result } -result [list 0 1 2 3 4 5 6] test treeview-3.6 "detach" -body { .tv detach newnode consistencyCheck .tv .tv children {} } -result [list newfirstone firstnode anotherone onemore lastnode newlastone] # XREF: treeview-2.13 test treeview-3.7 "detach didn't screw up internal links" -body { consistencyCheck .tv set result [list] foreach item [.tv children {}] { lappend result [.tv index $item] |
︙ | ︙ | |||
226 227 228 229 230 231 232 | .tv detach [list {}] } -cleanup { update consistencyCheck .tv } -returnCodes error -result "Cannot detach root item" test treeview-3.12 "Reattach" -body { | < | | < | | | 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 | .tv detach [list {}] } -cleanup { update consistencyCheck .tv } -returnCodes error -result "Cannot detach root item" test treeview-3.12 "Reattach" -body { .tv move newnode {} end consistencyCheck .tv .tv children {} } -result [list newfirstone firstnode anotherone onemore lastnode newlastone newnode] # Bug # ????? test treeview-3.13 "Re-reattach" -body { .tv move newnode {} end consistencyCheck .tv .tv children {} } -result [list newfirstone firstnode anotherone onemore lastnode newlastone newnode] catch { .tv insert newfirstone end -id x1 .tv insert newfirstone end -id x2 .tv insert newfirstone end -id x3 } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
684 685 686 687 688 689 690 | } update } -body { set before [lindex [.top.vs get] 1] .top.tree see e update idletasks set after [lindex [.top.vs get] 1] | | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 | } update } -body { set before [lindex [.top.vs get] 1] .top.tree see e update idletasks set after [lindex [.top.vs get] 1] expr $after < $before } -cleanup { destroy .top } -result 1 test treeview-10.0 "See command" -setup { # Setup common for all 10.* tests ttk::style configure Treeview -rowheight 20 tvSetupWithItems set ::baseBbY [lindex [.tv bbox nn "#1"] 1] proc bbY {item} { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
954 955 956 957 958 959 960 | } return $result } test treeview-identify-setup "identify series - setup" -body { destroy .tv ttk::setTheme default | | < | | | | < < < < < | | | | | | | | > < | | | < < | 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 | } return $result } test treeview-identify-setup "identify series - setup" -body { destroy .tv ttk::setTheme default ttk::style configure Treeview -rowheight 20 ttk::treeview .tv -columns [list A B C] .tv insert {} end -id branch -text branch -open true .tv insert branch end -id item1 -text item1 -height 2 .tv insert branch end -id item2 -text item2 .tv insert branch end -id item3 -text item3 .tv insert {} end -id item4 -text item4 .tv column #0 -width 50 ;# 0-50 .tv column A -width 50 ;# 50-100 .tv column B -width 50 ;# 100-150 .tv column C -width 50 ;# 150-200 (plus slop for margins) wm geometry . {} ; pack .tv ; update } test treeview-identify-1 "identify heading" -body { .tv configure -show {headings tree} update idletasks identify* .tv {region column} 10 10 } -result [list heading #0] test treeview-identify-2 "identify columns" -body { .tv configure -displaycolumns #all update idletasks columnids .tv [identify* .tv column 25 10 75 10 125 10 175 10] } -result [list \#0 A B C] test treeview-identify-3 "reordered columns" -body { .tv configure -displaycolumns {B A C} update idletasks columnids .tv [identify* .tv column 25 10 75 10 125 10 175 10] } -result [list \#0 B A C] test treeview-identify-4 "no tree column" -body { .tv configure -displaycolumns #all -show {headings} update idletasks identify* .tv {region column} 25 10 75 10 125 10 175 10 } -result [list heading #1 heading #2 heading #3 nothing {}] # Item height in default theme is 20px test treeview-identify-5 "vertical scan - no headings" -body { .tv configure -displaycolumns #all -show {tree} update idletasks identify* .tv {region item} 25 10 25 30 25 70 25 90 25 110 25 130 } -result [list tree branch tree item1 tree item2 tree item3 tree item4 nothing {}] test treeview-identify-6 "vertical scan - with headings" -body { .tv configure -displaycolumns #all -show {tree headings} update idletasks identify* .tv {region item} 25 10 25 30 25 50 25 90 25 110 } -result [list heading {} tree branch tree item1 tree item2 tree item3] test treeview-identify-7 "vertical scan - headings, no tree" -body { .tv configure -displaycolumns #all -show {headings} update idletasks identify* .tv {region item cell} 25 10 25 30 25 50 75 90 25 110 } -result [list heading {} {} cell branch {branch #1} cell item1 {item1 #1} cell item2 {item2 #2} cell item3 {item3 #1}] # In default theme, -indent and -itemheight both 20px # Disclosure element name is "Treeitem.indicator" set disclosure "*.indicator" test treeview-identify-8 "identify element" -body { .tv configure -show {tree} .tv insert branch 0 -id branch2 -open true .tv insert branch2 0 -id branch3 -open true .tv insert branch3 0 -id leaf3 update idletasks; identify* .tv {item element} 10 10 30 30 50 50 } -match glob -result [list \ branch $disclosure branch2 $disclosure branch3 $disclosure] test treeview-identify-8.1 "identify element" -body { .tv configure -show {tree headings} update identify* .tv element 1 1 10 10 25 25 # Heading elements are currently not reported } -result [list {} {} text] # See #2381555 test treeview-identify-9 "identify works when horizontally scrolled" -setup { .tv configure -show {tree headings} foreach column {#0 A B C} { .tv column $column -stretch 0 -width 50 } # Scrollable area is 200, visible is 100 |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/ttk/ttk.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
247 248 249 250 251 252 253 | test ttk-3.2 "Propagate errors from variable traces" -body { set A 0 trace add variable A write {error "failure" ;# } ttk::checkbutton .cb -variable A .cb invoke } -cleanup { unset ::A ; destroy .cb | | | 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 | test ttk-3.2 "Propagate errors from variable traces" -body { set A 0 trace add variable A write {error "failure" ;# } ttk::checkbutton .cb -variable A .cb invoke } -cleanup { unset ::A ; destroy .cb } -returnCodes error -match glob -result {can*t set "A": failure} test ttk-3.3 "Constructor failure with cursor" -body { ttk::button .b -cursor bottom_right_corner -style BadStyle } -returnCodes error -result "Layout BadStyle not found" test ttk-3.4 "SF#2009213" -body { ttk::style configure TScale -sliderrelief {} |
︙ | ︙ | |||
387 388 389 390 391 392 393 | icon blank } -cleanup { destroy .b } #------------------------------------------------------------------------ test ttk-9.1 "Traces on nonexistant namespaces" -body { ttk::checkbutton .tcb -variable foo::bar | | | | 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 | icon blank } -cleanup { destroy .b } #------------------------------------------------------------------------ test ttk-9.1 "Traces on nonexistant namespaces" -body { ttk::checkbutton .tcb -variable foo::bar } -returnCodes error -result "*parent namespace does*t exist" -match glob test ttk-9.2 "Traces on nonexistant namespaces II" -body { ttk::checkbutton .tcb -variable X .tcb configure -variable foo::bar } -returnCodes error -result "*parent namespace does*t exist" -match glob test ttk-9.3 "Restore saved options on configure error" -body { .tcb cget -variable } -result X test ttk-9.4 "Textvariable tests" -body { set tcbLabel "Testing..." |
︙ | ︙ | |||
581 582 583 584 585 586 587 | # # See #793909 # test ttk-14.1 "-variable in nonexistant namespace" -body { ttk::checkbutton .tw -variable ::nsn::foo | | | | | 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 | # # See #793909 # test ttk-14.1 "-variable in nonexistant namespace" -body { ttk::checkbutton .tw -variable ::nsn::foo } -returnCodes error -result {can*t trace "::nsn::foo": parent namespace does*t exist} \ -match glob -cleanup { destroy .tw } test ttk-14.2 "-textvariable in nonexistant namespace" -body { ttk::label .tw -textvariable ::nsn::foo } -returnCodes error -result {can*t trace "::nsn::foo": parent namespace does*t exist} \ -match glob -cleanup { destroy .tw } test ttk-14.3 "-textvariable in nonexistant namespace" -body { ttk::entry .tw -textvariable ::nsn::foo } -returnCodes error -result {can*t trace "::nsn::foo": parent namespace does*t exist} \ -match glob -cleanup { destroy .tw } test ttk-15.1 {Bug 3062331} -setup { destroy .b } -body { set Y {} ttk::button .b -textvariable Y |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/visual_bb.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | # Each menu entry invokes a visual test file proc runTest {file} { global testNum test "2.$testNum" "testing $file" {userInteraction} { | | | 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 | # Each menu entry invokes a visual test file proc runTest {file} { global testNum test "2.$testNum" "testing $file" {userInteraction} { uplevel #0 [list source -encoding utf-8 [file join [testsDirectory] $file]] concat "" } {} incr testNum } # The following procedure is invoked to print the contents of a canvas: |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to tests/wm.test.
︙ | ︙ | |||
1507 1508 1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 | set res {} toplevel .t tkwait visibility .t raiseDelay toplevel .t2 tkwait visibility .t2 raiseDelay | | | | 1507 1508 1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 | set res {} toplevel .t tkwait visibility .t raiseDelay toplevel .t2 tkwait visibility .t2 raiseDelay lappend res [wm stackorder .] raise . raiseDelay lappend res [wm stackorder .] raise .t2 raiseDelay lappend res [wm stackorder .] set res } -cleanup { destroy .t .t2 } -result {{. .t .t2} {.t .t2 .} {.t . .t2}} |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to unix/Makefile.in.
︙ | ︙ | |||
108 109 110 111 112 113 114 | # appropriate for this version of Tk: TCL_PLATFORM_DIR = $(TCLDIR)/unix # The directory containing the Tcl library archive file appropriate # for this version of Tk: TCL_BIN_DIR = @TCL_BIN_DIR@ | | | 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 | # appropriate for this version of Tk: TCL_PLATFORM_DIR = $(TCLDIR)/unix # The directory containing the Tcl library archive file appropriate # for this version of Tk: TCL_BIN_DIR = @TCL_BIN_DIR@ # The linker flags needed to link in the Tcl library (ex: -ltcl8.7) TCL_LIB_FLAG = @TCL_LIB_FLAG@ # Flag, 1: we're building a shared lib, 0 we're not TK_SHARED_BUILD = @TK_SHARED_BUILD@ # Subdirectory of $(libdir) containing the pkgIndex.tcl file for loadable Tk TK_PKG_DIR = @TK_PKG_DIR@ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
335 336 337 338 339 340 341 | CC = @CC@ CC_SWITCHES_NO_STUBS = -I${UNIX_DIR} -I${GENERIC_DIR} -I${BMAP_DIR} \ ${@TK_WINDOWINGSYSTEM@_INCLUDES} ${CFLAGS} ${CFLAGS_WARNING} \ ${SHLIB_CFLAGS} -I${TCL_GENERIC_DIR} -I${TCL_PLATFORM_DIR} ${AC_FLAGS} \ ${PROTO_FLAGS} ${SECURITY_FLAGS} ${MEM_DEBUG_FLAGS} ${KEYSYM_FLAGS} \ | | | | 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 | CC = @CC@ CC_SWITCHES_NO_STUBS = -I${UNIX_DIR} -I${GENERIC_DIR} -I${BMAP_DIR} \ ${@TK_WINDOWINGSYSTEM@_INCLUDES} ${CFLAGS} ${CFLAGS_WARNING} \ ${SHLIB_CFLAGS} -I${TCL_GENERIC_DIR} -I${TCL_PLATFORM_DIR} ${AC_FLAGS} \ ${PROTO_FLAGS} ${SECURITY_FLAGS} ${MEM_DEBUG_FLAGS} ${KEYSYM_FLAGS} \ ${NO_DEPRECATED_FLAGS} -DTCL_UTF_MAX=3 @EXTRA_CC_SWITCHES@ CC_SWITCHES = $(CC_SWITCHES_NO_STUBS) @TCL_STUB_FLAGS@ APP_CC_SWITCHES = $(CC_SWITCHES_NO_STUBS) @EXTRA_APP_CC_SWITCHES@ DEPEND_SWITCHES = -I${UNIX_DIR} -I${GENERIC_DIR} -I${BMAP_DIR} \ ${@TK_WINDOWINGSYSTEM@_INCLUDES} ${CFLAGS} -I${TCL_GENERIC_DIR} \ -I${TCL_PLATFORM_DIR} ${AC_FLAGS} ${PROTO_FLAGS} ${SECURITY_FLAGS} \ ${MEM_DEBUG_FLAGS} ${KEYSYM_FLAGS} @EXTRA_CC_SWITCHES@ WISH_OBJS = tkAppInit.o TKTEST_OBJS = tkTestInit.o tkTest.o tkSquare.o tkOldTest.o \ $(@TK_WINDOWINGSYSTEM@_TKTEST_OBJS) WIDG_OBJS = tkButton.o tkEntry.o tkFrame.o tkListbox.o \ tkMenu.o tkMenubutton.o tkMenuDraw.o tkMessage.o \ tkPanedWindow.o tkScale.o tkScrollbar.o CANV_OBJS = tkCanvas.o tkCanvArc.o tkCanvBmap.o tkCanvImg.o \ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
463 464 465 466 467 468 469 | $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgSVGnano.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgSVGnano.c \ $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgPhoto.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgPhInstance.c \ $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgListFormat.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkText.c \ $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextBTree.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextDisp.c \ $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextImage.c \ $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextIndex.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextMark.c \ $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextTag.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextWind.c \ | | | 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 | $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgSVGnano.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgSVGnano.c \ $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgPhoto.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgPhInstance.c \ $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgListFormat.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkText.c \ $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextBTree.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextDisp.c \ $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextImage.c \ $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextIndex.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextMark.c \ $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextTag.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextWind.c \ $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkOldConfig.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkOldTest.c \ $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkSquare.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTest.c \ $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkStubInit.c TTK_SRCS = \ $(TTK_DIR)/ttkBlink.c \ $(TTK_DIR)/ttkButton.c \ $(TTK_DIR)/ttkCache.c \ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
627 628 629 630 631 632 633 | rm -rf ${TK_VFS_PATH}/demos @find ${TK_VFS_ROOT} -type d -empty -delete @echo "creating ${TK_ZIP_FILE} from ${TK_VFS_PATH}" -@if test "${ZIPFS_BUILD}" = "2" ; then \ cp ${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclsh ${TK_VFS_ROOT}/../${TK_ZIP_FILE} || cp ${TCL_BIN_DIR}/../bin/tclsh${TCLVERSION} ${TK_VFS_ROOT}/../${TK_ZIP_FILE}; \ (zip=`(realpath '${NATIVE_ZIP}' || readlink -m '${NATIVE_ZIP}') 2>/dev/null || \ (echo '${NATIVE_ZIP}' | sed "s?^\./?$$(pwd)/?")`; \ | | < < | | | | 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 | rm -rf ${TK_VFS_PATH}/demos @find ${TK_VFS_ROOT} -type d -empty -delete @echo "creating ${TK_ZIP_FILE} from ${TK_VFS_PATH}" -@if test "${ZIPFS_BUILD}" = "2" ; then \ cp ${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclsh ${TK_VFS_ROOT}/../${TK_ZIP_FILE} || cp ${TCL_BIN_DIR}/../bin/tclsh${TCLVERSION} ${TK_VFS_ROOT}/../${TK_ZIP_FILE}; \ (zip=`(realpath '${NATIVE_ZIP}' || readlink -m '${NATIVE_ZIP}') 2>/dev/null || \ (echo '${NATIVE_ZIP}' | sed "s?^\./?$$(pwd)/?")`; \ cd ${TK_VFS_ROOT} && $$zip -A ../${TK_ZIP_FILE} && $$zip -J ../${TK_ZIP_FILE}) \ fi @(zip=`(realpath '${NATIVE_ZIP}' || readlink -m '${NATIVE_ZIP}' || \ echo '${NATIVE_ZIP}' | sed "s?^\./?$$(pwd)/?") 2>/dev/null`; \ echo 'cd ${TK_VFS_ROOT} &&' $$zip '${ZIP_PROG_OPTIONS} ../${TK_ZIP_FILE} ${ZIP_PROG_VFSSEARCH}'; \ cd ${TK_VFS_ROOT} && \ $$zip ${ZIP_PROG_OPTIONS} ../${TK_ZIP_FILE} ${ZIP_PROG_VFSSEARCH} >/dev/null) # The following target is configured by autoconf to generate either # a shared library or non-shared library for Tk. ${LIB_FILE}: ${STUB_LIB_FILE} @LIB_RSRC_FILE@ ${OBJS} ${TK_ZIP_FILE} rm -f $@ @MAKE_LIB@ @if test "${ZIPFS_BUILD}" = "1" ; then \ if test "x$(MACHER)" = "x" ; then \ cat ${TK_ZIP_FILE} >> ${LIB_FILE}; \ else $(MACHER) append ${LIB_FILE} ${TK_ZIP_FILE} /tmp/macher_output; \ mv /tmp/macher_output ${LIB_FILE}; chmod u+x ${LIB_FILE}; \ fi; \ fi ${STUB_LIB_FILE}: ${STUB_LIB_OBJS} @if test "x${LIB_FILE}" = "xlibtk${MAJOR_VERSION}.${MINOR_VERSION}.dll"; then \ (cd ${TOP_DIR}/win; ${MAKE} tk${MAJOR_VERSION}${MINOR_VERSION}.dll); \ cp "${TOP_DIR}/win/tk${MAJOR_VERSION}${MINOR_VERSION}.dll" .; \ fi rm -f $@ @MAKE_STUB_LIB@ # Build Aqua resource files ${TK_RSRC_FILE}: $(AQUA_RESOURCES) rm -f $@ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
688 689 690 691 692 693 694 | $(WISH_LIBS) $(CC_SEARCH_FLAGS) -o ${WISH_EXE} @if test "${ZIPFS_BUILD}" = "2" ; then \ if test "x$(MACHER)" = "x" ; then \ cat ${TK_ZIP_FILE} >> ${WISH_EXE}; \ else $(MACHER) append ${WISH_EXE} ${TK_ZIP_FILE} /tmp/macher_output; \ mv /tmp/macher_output ${LIB_FILE}; chmod u+x ${LIB_FILE}; \ fi; \ | < < | 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 | $(WISH_LIBS) $(CC_SEARCH_FLAGS) -o ${WISH_EXE} @if test "${ZIPFS_BUILD}" = "2" ; then \ if test "x$(MACHER)" = "x" ; then \ cat ${TK_ZIP_FILE} >> ${WISH_EXE}; \ else $(MACHER) append ${WISH_EXE} ${TK_ZIP_FILE} /tmp/macher_output; \ mv /tmp/macher_output ${LIB_FILE}; chmod u+x ${LIB_FILE}; \ fi; \ fi # Resetting the LIB_RUNTIME_DIR below is required so that # the generated tktest executable gets the build directory # burned into its ld search path. This keeps tktest from # picking up an already installed version of the Tcl or # Tk shared libraries. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 | tkImgPhoto.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgPhoto.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgPhoto.h $(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgPhoto.c tkImgPhInstance.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgPhInstance.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgPhoto.h $(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgPhInstance.c tkTest.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTest.c tkUuid.h $(CC) -c $(APP_CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTest.c tkText.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkText.c $(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkText.c tkTextBTree.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextBTree.c | > > > | 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 | tkImgPhoto.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgPhoto.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgPhoto.h $(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgPhoto.c tkImgPhInstance.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgPhInstance.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgPhoto.h $(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgPhInstance.c tkOldTest.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkOldTest.c $(CC) -c $(APP_CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkOldTest.c tkTest.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTest.c tkUuid.h $(CC) -c $(APP_CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTest.c tkText.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkText.c $(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkText.c tkTextBTree.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextBTree.c |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1695 1696 1697 1698 1699 1700 1701 | printf "git-" >$(TOP_DIR)/manifest.uuid (cd $(TOP_DIR); git rev-parse HEAD >>$(TOP_DIR)/manifest.uuid || printf "unknown" >$(TOP_DIR)/manifest.uuid) dist: $(UNIX_DIR)/configure $(UNIX_DIR)/tkConfig.h.in $(UNIX_DIR)/tk.pc.in $(MAC_OSX_DIR)/configure $(TOP_DIR)/doc/man.macros $(TOP_DIR)/manifest.uuid rm -rf $(DISTDIR) $(INSTALL_DATA_DIR) $(DISTDIR)/unix $(DIST_INSTALL_DATA) $(TOP_DIR)/manifest.uuid $(DISTDIR) | | > | 1694 1695 1696 1697 1698 1699 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 | printf "git-" >$(TOP_DIR)/manifest.uuid (cd $(TOP_DIR); git rev-parse HEAD >>$(TOP_DIR)/manifest.uuid || printf "unknown" >$(TOP_DIR)/manifest.uuid) dist: $(UNIX_DIR)/configure $(UNIX_DIR)/tkConfig.h.in $(UNIX_DIR)/tk.pc.in $(MAC_OSX_DIR)/configure $(TOP_DIR)/doc/man.macros $(TOP_DIR)/manifest.uuid rm -rf $(DISTDIR) $(INSTALL_DATA_DIR) $(DISTDIR)/unix $(DIST_INSTALL_DATA) $(TOP_DIR)/manifest.uuid $(DISTDIR) $(DIST_INSTALL_DATA) $(UNIX_DIR)/*.c $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixDefault.h \ $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixInt.h $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixPort.h $(DISTDIR)/unix $(DIST_INSTALL_DATA) $(TOP_DIR)/license.terms $(UNIX_DIR)/Makefile.in $(DISTDIR)/unix $(DIST_INSTALL_DATA) $(UNIX_DIR)/configure.ac $(UNIX_DIR)/tk.spec \ $(UNIX_DIR)/aclocal.m4 $(UNIX_DIR)/tcl.m4 \ $(UNIX_DIR)/tkConfig.sh.in $(UNIX_DIR)/install-sh \ $(UNIX_DIR)/README $(UNIX_DIR)/installManPage \ $(UNIX_DIR)/tkConfig.h.in $(UNIX_DIR)/tk.pc.in $(DISTDIR)/unix $(DIST_INSTALL_SCRIPT) $(UNIX_DIR)/configure $(DISTDIR)/unix |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 | $(INSTALL_DATA_DIR) $(DISTDIR)/generic/ttk $(DIST_INSTALL_DATA) $(TTK_DIR)/*.[ch] $(TTK_DIR)/ttk.decls \ $(DISTDIR)/generic/ttk $(INSTALL_DATA_DIR) $(DISTDIR)/win $(DIST_INSTALL_DATA) $(TOP_DIR)/win/*.in $(DISTDIR)/win $(DIST_INSTALL_DATA) $(TOP_DIR)/win/configure.ac \ $(TOP_DIR)/win/aclocal.m4 $(TOP_DIR)/win/tcl.m4 \ | | > > > | 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 | $(INSTALL_DATA_DIR) $(DISTDIR)/generic/ttk $(DIST_INSTALL_DATA) $(TTK_DIR)/*.[ch] $(TTK_DIR)/ttk.decls \ $(DISTDIR)/generic/ttk $(INSTALL_DATA_DIR) $(DISTDIR)/win $(DIST_INSTALL_DATA) $(TOP_DIR)/win/*.in $(DISTDIR)/win $(DIST_INSTALL_DATA) $(TOP_DIR)/win/configure.ac \ $(TOP_DIR)/win/aclocal.m4 $(TOP_DIR)/win/tcl.m4 \ $(TOP_DIR)/win/*.c $(TOP_DIR)/win/*.bat \ $(TOP_DIR)/win/tkWin.h $(TOP_DIR)/win/tkWinDefault.h \ $(TOP_DIR)/win/tkWinIco.h $(TOP_DIR)/win/tkWinInt.h \ $(TOP_DIR)/win/tkWinPort.h $(TOP_DIR)/win/tkWinSendCom.h \ $(TOP_DIR)/win/*.vc $(TOP_DIR)/win/README \ $(TOP_DIR)/license.terms \ $(DISTDIR)/win $(DIST_INSTALL_SCRIPT) $(TOP_DIR)/win/configure $(DISTDIR)/win $(INSTALL_DATA_DIR) $(DISTDIR)/win/rc $(DIST_INSTALL_DATA) $(TOP_DIR)/win/rc/*.{rc,cur,ico} $(DISTDIR)/win/rc $(INSTALL_DATA_DIR) $(DISTDIR)/macosx |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1806 1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 | cd $(DISTROOT); tar cf $(DISTNAME)-src.tar $(DISTNAME); \ gzip -9 $(DISTNAME)-src.tar; zip -qr8 $(ZIPNAME) $(DISTNAME) # # This target creates the HTML folder for Tcl & Tk and places it # in DISTDIR/html. It uses the tcltk-man2html.tcl tool from # the Tcl group's tool workspace. It depends on the Tcl & Tk being | | | 1809 1810 1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 1816 1817 1818 1819 1820 1821 1822 1823 | cd $(DISTROOT); tar cf $(DISTNAME)-src.tar $(DISTNAME); \ gzip -9 $(DISTNAME)-src.tar; zip -qr8 $(ZIPNAME) $(DISTNAME) # # This target creates the HTML folder for Tcl & Tk and places it # in DISTDIR/html. It uses the tcltk-man2html.tcl tool from # the Tcl group's tool workspace. It depends on the Tcl & Tk being # in directories called tcl8.3 & tk8.3 up two directories from the # TOOL_DIR. # html: $(BUILD_HTML) @EXTRA_BUILD_HTML@ html-tcl: |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to unix/configure.
1 2 | #! /bin/sh # Guess values for system-dependent variables and create Makefiles. | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 | #! /bin/sh # Guess values for system-dependent variables and create Makefiles. # Generated by GNU Autoconf 2.72 for tk 8.7. # # # Copyright (C) 1992-1996, 1998-2017, 2020-2023 Free Software Foundation, # Inc. # # # This configure script is free software; the Free Software Foundation |
︙ | ︙ | |||
597 598 599 600 601 602 603 | subdirs= MFLAGS= MAKEFLAGS= # Identity of this package. PACKAGE_NAME='tk' PACKAGE_TARNAME='tk' | | | | 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 | subdirs= MFLAGS= MAKEFLAGS= # Identity of this package. PACKAGE_NAME='tk' PACKAGE_TARNAME='tk' PACKAGE_VERSION='8.7' PACKAGE_STRING='tk 8.7' PACKAGE_BUGREPORT='' PACKAGE_URL='' # Factoring default headers for most tests. ac_includes_default="\ #include <stddef.h> #ifdef HAVE_STDIO_H |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1372 1373 1374 1375 1376 1377 1378 | # # Report the --help message. # if test "$ac_init_help" = "long"; then # Omit some internal or obsolete options to make the list less imposing. # This message is too long to be a string in the A/UX 3.1 sh. cat <<_ACEOF | | | 1372 1373 1374 1375 1376 1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 | # # Report the --help message. # if test "$ac_init_help" = "long"; then # Omit some internal or obsolete options to make the list less imposing. # This message is too long to be a string in the A/UX 3.1 sh. cat <<_ACEOF 'configure' configures tk 8.7 to adapt to many kinds of systems. Usage: $0 [OPTION]... [VAR=VALUE]... To assign environment variables (e.g., CC, CFLAGS...), specify them as VAR=VALUE. See below for descriptions of some of the useful variables. Defaults for the options are specified in brackets. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1438 1439 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 | --x-includes=DIR X include files are in DIR --x-libraries=DIR X library files are in DIR _ACEOF fi if test -n "$ac_init_help"; then case $ac_init_help in | | | 1438 1439 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 1445 1446 1447 1448 1449 1450 1451 1452 | --x-includes=DIR X include files are in DIR --x-libraries=DIR X library files are in DIR _ACEOF fi if test -n "$ac_init_help"; then case $ac_init_help in short | recursive ) echo "Configuration of tk 8.7:";; esac cat <<\_ACEOF Optional Features: --disable-option-checking ignore unrecognized --enable/--with options --disable-FEATURE do not include FEATURE (same as --enable-FEATURE=no) --enable-FEATURE[=ARG] include FEATURE [ARG=yes] |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 | cd "$ac_pwd" || { ac_status=$?; break; } done fi test -n "$ac_init_help" && exit $ac_status if $ac_init_version; then cat <<\_ACEOF | | | 1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 | cd "$ac_pwd" || { ac_status=$?; break; } done fi test -n "$ac_init_help" && exit $ac_status if $ac_init_version; then cat <<\_ACEOF tk configure 8.7 generated by GNU Autoconf 2.72 Copyright (C) 2023 Free Software Foundation, Inc. This configure script is free software; the Free Software Foundation gives unlimited permission to copy, distribute and modify it. _ACEOF exit |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1921 1922 1923 1924 1925 1926 1927 | ac_configure_args_raw=` printf "%s\n" "$ac_configure_args_raw" | sed "$ac_safe_unquote"`;; esac cat >config.log <<_ACEOF This file contains any messages produced by compilers while running configure, to aid debugging if configure makes a mistake. | | | 1921 1922 1923 1924 1925 1926 1927 1928 1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 | ac_configure_args_raw=` printf "%s\n" "$ac_configure_args_raw" | sed "$ac_safe_unquote"`;; esac cat >config.log <<_ACEOF This file contains any messages produced by compilers while running configure, to aid debugging if configure makes a mistake. It was created by tk $as_me 8.7, which was generated by GNU Autoconf 2.72. Invocation command line was $ $0$ac_configure_args_raw _ACEOF exec 5>>config.log { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2600 2601 2602 2603 2604 2605 2606 | ac_compiler_gnu=$ac_cv_c_compiler_gnu | | | | | | 2600 2601 2602 2603 2604 2605 2606 2607 2608 2609 2610 2611 2612 2613 2614 2615 2616 2617 | ac_compiler_gnu=$ac_cv_c_compiler_gnu TK_VERSION=8.7 TK_MAJOR_VERSION=8 TK_MINOR_VERSION=7 TK_PATCH_LEVEL="b1" VERSION=${TK_VERSION} LOCALES="cs da de el en en_gb eo es fr hu it nl pl pt ru sv" #-------------------------------------------------------------------- # Find and load the tclConfig.sh file #-------------------------------------------------------------------- |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2696 2697 2698 2699 2700 2701 2702 | if test x"${ac_cv_c_tclconfig}" = x ; then for i in `ls -d ${libdir} 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d ${exec_prefix}/lib 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d ${prefix}/lib 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d /usr/local/lib 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d /usr/contrib/lib 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d /usr/pkg/lib 2>/dev/null` \ | | | | | 2696 2697 2698 2699 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704 2705 2706 2707 2708 2709 2710 2711 2712 2713 2714 | if test x"${ac_cv_c_tclconfig}" = x ; then for i in `ls -d ${libdir} 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d ${exec_prefix}/lib 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d ${prefix}/lib 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d /usr/local/lib 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d /usr/contrib/lib 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d /usr/pkg/lib 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d /usr/lib/tcl8.7 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d /usr/lib 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d /usr/lib64 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d /usr/local/lib/tcl8.7 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d /usr/local/lib/tcl/tcl8.7 2>/dev/null` \ ; do if test -f "$i/tclConfig.sh" ; then ac_cv_c_tclconfig="`(cd $i; pwd)`" break fi done fi |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2799 2800 2801 2802 2803 2804 2805 | if test "${TCL_MAJOR_VERSION}" -lt 9 ; then | > > > > | | | 2799 2800 2801 2802 2803 2804 2805 2806 2807 2808 2809 2810 2811 2812 2813 2814 2815 2816 2817 2818 | if test "${TCL_MAJOR_VERSION}" -lt 9 ; then if test "${TCL_MAJOR_VERSION}" -ne 8 ; then as_fn_error $? "${PACKAGE_NAME} ${PACKAGE_VERSION} requires Tcl 8.6+ Found config for Tcl ${TCL_VERSION}" "$LINENO" 5 fi if test "${TCL_MINOR_VERSION}" -lt 6 ; then as_fn_error $? "${PACKAGE_NAME} ${PACKAGE_VERSION} requires Tcl 8.6+ Found config for Tcl ${TCL_VERSION}" "$LINENO" 5 fi fi { printf "%s\n" "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for tclsh" >&5 printf %s "checking for tclsh... " >&6; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5219 5220 5221 5222 5223 5224 5225 | SHLIB_LD='${CC} ${CFLAGS} ${LDFLAGS} -shared' DL_OBJS="tclLoadDl.o" DL_LIBS="-ldl" LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -Wl,--export-dynamic" case $system in DragonFly-*|FreeBSD-*) | > > > | | | | > | 5223 5224 5225 5226 5227 5228 5229 5230 5231 5232 5233 5234 5235 5236 5237 5238 5239 5240 5241 5242 5243 5244 | SHLIB_LD='${CC} ${CFLAGS} ${LDFLAGS} -shared' DL_OBJS="tclLoadDl.o" DL_LIBS="-ldl" LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -Wl,--export-dynamic" case $system in DragonFly-*|FreeBSD-*) if test "${TCL_THREADS}" = "1" then : # The -pthread needs to go in the LDFLAGS, not LIBS LIBS=`echo $LIBS | sed s/-pthread//` CFLAGS="$CFLAGS $PTHREAD_CFLAGS" LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS $PTHREAD_LIBS" fi ;; esac if test $doRpath = yes then : CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='"-Wl,-rpath,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}"' |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6557 6558 6559 6560 6561 6562 6563 | if test "x${tcl_cv_flag__isoc99_source}" = "xyes" ; then printf "%s\n" "#define _ISOC99_SOURCE 1" >>confdefs.h tcl_flags="$tcl_flags _ISOC99_SOURCE" fi | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 6565 6566 6567 6568 6569 6570 6571 6572 6573 6574 6575 6576 6577 6578 | if test "x${tcl_cv_flag__isoc99_source}" = "xyes" ; then printf "%s\n" "#define _ISOC99_SOURCE 1" >>confdefs.h tcl_flags="$tcl_flags _ISOC99_SOURCE" fi if test ${tcl_cv_flag__largefile64_source+y} then : printf %s "(cached) " >&6 else case e in #( e) cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext /* end confdefs.h. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6715 6716 6717 6718 6719 6720 6721 | { printf "%s\n" "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: yes" >&5 printf "%s\n" "yes" >&6; } else { printf "%s\n" "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5 printf "%s\n" "no" >&6; } # Now check for auxiliary declarations | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 6670 6671 6672 6673 6674 6675 6676 6677 6678 6679 6680 6681 6682 6683 | { printf "%s\n" "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: yes" >&5 printf "%s\n" "yes" >&6; } else { printf "%s\n" "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5 printf "%s\n" "no" >&6; } # Now check for auxiliary declarations { printf "%s\n" "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for struct dirent64" >&5 printf %s "checking for struct dirent64... " >&6; } if test ${tcl_cv_struct_dirent64+y} then : printf %s "(cached) " >&6 else case e in #( e) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6859 6860 6861 6862 6863 6864 6865 6866 6867 6868 6869 6870 6871 6872 | fi { printf "%s\n" "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $tcl_cv_DIR64" >&5 printf "%s\n" "$tcl_cv_DIR64" >&6; } if test "x${tcl_cv_DIR64}" = "xyes" ; then printf "%s\n" "#define HAVE_DIR64 1" >>confdefs.h fi ac_fn_c_check_func "$LINENO" "open64" "ac_cv_func_open64" if test "x$ac_cv_func_open64" = xyes then : printf "%s\n" "#define HAVE_OPEN64 1" >>confdefs.h | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 6743 6744 6745 6746 6747 6748 6749 6750 6751 6752 6753 6754 6755 6756 6757 6758 6759 6760 6761 6762 6763 6764 6765 6766 6767 6768 6769 6770 6771 6772 6773 6774 6775 6776 6777 6778 6779 6780 6781 6782 6783 6784 6785 6786 6787 6788 6789 6790 6791 6792 6793 | fi { printf "%s\n" "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $tcl_cv_DIR64" >&5 printf "%s\n" "$tcl_cv_DIR64" >&6; } if test "x${tcl_cv_DIR64}" = "xyes" ; then printf "%s\n" "#define HAVE_DIR64 1" >>confdefs.h fi { printf "%s\n" "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for struct stat64" >&5 printf %s "checking for struct stat64... " >&6; } if test ${tcl_cv_struct_stat64+y} then : printf %s "(cached) " >&6 else case e in #( e) cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext /* end confdefs.h. */ #include <sys/stat.h> int main (void) { struct stat64 p; ; return 0; } _ACEOF if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO" then : tcl_cv_struct_stat64=yes else case e in #( e) tcl_cv_struct_stat64=no ;; esac fi rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.beam conftest.$ac_ext ;; esac fi { printf "%s\n" "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $tcl_cv_struct_stat64" >&5 printf "%s\n" "$tcl_cv_struct_stat64" >&6; } if test "x${tcl_cv_struct_stat64}" = "xyes" ; then printf "%s\n" "#define HAVE_STRUCT_STAT64 1" >>confdefs.h fi ac_fn_c_check_func "$LINENO" "open64" "ac_cv_func_open64" if test "x$ac_cv_func_open64" = xyes then : printf "%s\n" "#define HAVE_OPEN64 1" >>confdefs.h |
︙ | ︙ | |||
9151 9152 9153 9154 9155 9156 9157 9158 9159 9160 9161 9162 9163 9164 9165 9166 | #-------------------------------------------------------------------- # The statements below define various symbols relating to Tk # stub support. #-------------------------------------------------------------------- # Replace ${VERSION} with contents of ${TK_VERSION} TK_STUB_LIB_FILE="libtkstub.a" TK_STUB_LIB_FLAG="-ltkstub" eval "TK_STUB_LIB_DIR=\"${libdir}\"" TK_BUILD_STUB_LIB_SPEC="-L`pwd | sed -e 's/ /\\\\ /g'` ${TK_STUB_LIB_FLAG}" TK_STUB_LIB_SPEC="-L${TK_STUB_LIB_DIR} ${TK_STUB_LIB_FLAG}" TK_BUILD_STUB_LIB_PATH="`pwd`/${TK_STUB_LIB_FILE}" TK_STUB_LIB_PATH="${TK_STUB_LIB_DIR}/${TK_STUB_LIB_FILE}" | > > > > > > > > > | 9072 9073 9074 9075 9076 9077 9078 9079 9080 9081 9082 9083 9084 9085 9086 9087 9088 9089 9090 9091 9092 9093 9094 9095 9096 | #-------------------------------------------------------------------- # The statements below define various symbols relating to Tk # stub support. #-------------------------------------------------------------------- # Replace ${VERSION} with contents of ${TK_VERSION} if test "${TCL_MAJOR_VERSION}" -gt 8 ; then TK_STUB_LIB_FILE="libtkstub.a" TK_STUB_LIB_FLAG="-ltkstub" else eval "TK_STUB_LIB_FILE=libtkstub${TK_UNSHARED_LIB_SUFFIX}" if test "${TCL_LIB_VERSIONS_OK}" = "ok"; then TK_STUB_LIB_FLAG="-ltkstub${TK_VERSION}" else TK_STUB_LIB_FLAG="-ltkstub`echo ${TK_VERSION} | tr -d .`" fi fi eval "TK_STUB_LIB_DIR=\"${libdir}\"" TK_BUILD_STUB_LIB_SPEC="-L`pwd | sed -e 's/ /\\\\ /g'` ${TK_STUB_LIB_FLAG}" TK_STUB_LIB_SPEC="-L${TK_STUB_LIB_DIR} ${TK_STUB_LIB_FLAG}" TK_BUILD_STUB_LIB_PATH="`pwd`/${TK_STUB_LIB_FILE}" TK_STUB_LIB_PATH="${TK_STUB_LIB_DIR}/${TK_STUB_LIB_FILE}" |
︙ | ︙ | |||
9774 9775 9776 9777 9778 9779 9780 | test $as_write_fail = 0 && chmod +x $CONFIG_STATUS || ac_write_fail=1 cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1 # Save the log message, to keep $0 and so on meaningful, and to # report actual input values of CONFIG_FILES etc. instead of their # values after options handling. ac_log=" | | | 9704 9705 9706 9707 9708 9709 9710 9711 9712 9713 9714 9715 9716 9717 9718 | test $as_write_fail = 0 && chmod +x $CONFIG_STATUS || ac_write_fail=1 cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1 # Save the log message, to keep $0 and so on meaningful, and to # report actual input values of CONFIG_FILES etc. instead of their # values after options handling. ac_log=" This file was extended by tk $as_me 8.7, which was generated by GNU Autoconf 2.72. Invocation command line was CONFIG_FILES = $CONFIG_FILES CONFIG_HEADERS = $CONFIG_HEADERS CONFIG_LINKS = $CONFIG_LINKS CONFIG_COMMANDS = $CONFIG_COMMANDS $ $0 $@ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
9833 9834 9835 9836 9837 9838 9839 | _ACEOF ac_cs_config=`printf "%s\n" "$ac_configure_args" | sed "$ac_safe_unquote"` ac_cs_config_escaped=`printf "%s\n" "$ac_cs_config" | sed "s/^ //; s/'/'\\\\\\\\''/g"` cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1 ac_cs_config='$ac_cs_config_escaped' ac_cs_version="\\ | | | 9763 9764 9765 9766 9767 9768 9769 9770 9771 9772 9773 9774 9775 9776 9777 | _ACEOF ac_cs_config=`printf "%s\n" "$ac_configure_args" | sed "$ac_safe_unquote"` ac_cs_config_escaped=`printf "%s\n" "$ac_cs_config" | sed "s/^ //; s/'/'\\\\\\\\''/g"` cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1 ac_cs_config='$ac_cs_config_escaped' ac_cs_version="\\ tk config.status 8.7 configured by $0, generated by GNU Autoconf 2.72, with options \\"\$ac_cs_config\\" Copyright (C) 2023 Free Software Foundation, Inc. This config.status script is free software; the Free Software Foundation gives unlimited permission to copy, distribute and modify it." |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to unix/configure.ac.
1 2 3 4 5 | ! /bin/bash -norc dnl This file is an input file used by the GNU "autoconf" program to dnl generate the file "configure", which is run during Tk installation dnl to configure the system for the local environment. | | | | | | > > > > | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 | ! /bin/bash -norc dnl This file is an input file used by the GNU "autoconf" program to dnl generate the file "configure", which is run during Tk installation dnl to configure the system for the local environment. AC_INIT([tk],[8.7]) AC_PREREQ([2.69]) dnl This is only used when included from macosx/configure.ac m4_ifdef([SC_USE_CONFIG_HEADERS], [ AC_CONFIG_HEADERS([tkConfig.h:../unix/tkConfig.h.in]) AC_CONFIG_COMMANDS_PRE([DEFS="-DHAVE_TK_CONFIG_H -imacros tkConfig.h"]) AH_TOP([ #ifndef _TKCONFIG #define _TKCONFIG]) AH_BOTTOM([ /* Undef unused package specific autoheader defines so that we can * include both tclConfig.h and tkConfig.h at the same time: */ /* override */ #undef PACKAGE_NAME /* override */ #undef PACKAGE_TARNAME /* override */ #undef PACKAGE_VERSION /* override */ #undef PACKAGE_STRING #endif /* _TKCONFIG */]) ]) TK_VERSION=8.7 TK_MAJOR_VERSION=8 TK_MINOR_VERSION=7 TK_PATCH_LEVEL="b1" VERSION=${TK_VERSION} LOCALES="cs da de el en en_gb eo es fr hu it nl pl pt ru sv" #-------------------------------------------------------------------- # Find and load the tclConfig.sh file #-------------------------------------------------------------------- SC_PATH_TCLCONFIG SC_LOAD_TCLCONFIG if test "${TCL_MAJOR_VERSION}" -lt 9 ; then if test "${TCL_MAJOR_VERSION}" -ne 8 ; then AC_MSG_ERROR([${PACKAGE_NAME} ${PACKAGE_VERSION} requires Tcl 8.6+ Found config for Tcl ${TCL_VERSION}]) fi if test "${TCL_MINOR_VERSION}" -lt 6 ; then AC_MSG_ERROR([${PACKAGE_NAME} ${PACKAGE_VERSION} requires Tcl 8.6+ Found config for Tcl ${TCL_VERSION}]) fi fi SC_PROG_TCLSH SC_BUILD_TCLSH |
︙ | ︙ | |||
714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 | #-------------------------------------------------------------------- # The statements below define various symbols relating to Tk # stub support. #-------------------------------------------------------------------- # Replace ${VERSION} with contents of ${TK_VERSION} TK_STUB_LIB_FILE="libtkstub.a" TK_STUB_LIB_FLAG="-ltkstub" eval "TK_STUB_LIB_DIR=\"${libdir}\"" TK_BUILD_STUB_LIB_SPEC="-L`pwd | sed -e 's/ /\\\\ /g'` ${TK_STUB_LIB_FLAG}" TK_STUB_LIB_SPEC="-L${TK_STUB_LIB_DIR} ${TK_STUB_LIB_FLAG}" TK_BUILD_STUB_LIB_PATH="`pwd`/${TK_STUB_LIB_FILE}" TK_STUB_LIB_PATH="${TK_STUB_LIB_DIR}/${TK_STUB_LIB_FILE}" | > > > > > > > > > | 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 | #-------------------------------------------------------------------- # The statements below define various symbols relating to Tk # stub support. #-------------------------------------------------------------------- # Replace ${VERSION} with contents of ${TK_VERSION} if test "${TCL_MAJOR_VERSION}" -gt 8 ; then TK_STUB_LIB_FILE="libtkstub.a" TK_STUB_LIB_FLAG="-ltkstub" else eval "TK_STUB_LIB_FILE=libtkstub${TK_UNSHARED_LIB_SUFFIX}" if test "${TCL_LIB_VERSIONS_OK}" = "ok"; then TK_STUB_LIB_FLAG="-ltkstub${TK_VERSION}" else TK_STUB_LIB_FLAG="-ltkstub`echo ${TK_VERSION} | tr -d .`" fi fi eval "TK_STUB_LIB_DIR=\"${libdir}\"" TK_BUILD_STUB_LIB_SPEC="-L`pwd | sed -e 's/ /\\\\ /g'` ${TK_STUB_LIB_FLAG}" TK_STUB_LIB_SPEC="-L${TK_STUB_LIB_DIR} ${TK_STUB_LIB_FLAG}" TK_BUILD_STUB_LIB_PATH="`pwd`/${TK_STUB_LIB_FILE}" TK_STUB_LIB_PATH="${TK_STUB_LIB_DIR}/${TK_STUB_LIB_FILE}" |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to unix/tcl.m4.
︙ | ︙ | |||
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 | if test x"${ac_cv_c_tclconfig}" = x ; then for i in `ls -d ${libdir} 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d ${exec_prefix}/lib 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d ${prefix}/lib 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d /usr/local/lib 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d /usr/contrib/lib 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d /usr/pkg/lib 2>/dev/null` \ | | | | | 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 | if test x"${ac_cv_c_tclconfig}" = x ; then for i in `ls -d ${libdir} 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d ${exec_prefix}/lib 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d ${prefix}/lib 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d /usr/local/lib 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d /usr/contrib/lib 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d /usr/pkg/lib 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d /usr/lib/tcl8.7 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d /usr/lib 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d /usr/lib64 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d /usr/local/lib/tcl8.7 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d /usr/local/lib/tcl/tcl8.7 2>/dev/null` \ ; do if test -f "$i/tclConfig.sh" ; then ac_cv_c_tclconfig="`(cd $i; pwd)`" break fi done fi |
︙ | ︙ | |||
222 223 224 225 226 227 228 | if test x"${ac_cv_c_tkconfig}" = x ; then for i in `ls -d ${libdir} 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d ${exec_prefix}/lib 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d ${prefix}/lib 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d /usr/local/lib 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d /usr/contrib/lib 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d /usr/pkg/lib 2>/dev/null` \ | | | | | 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 | if test x"${ac_cv_c_tkconfig}" = x ; then for i in `ls -d ${libdir} 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d ${exec_prefix}/lib 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d ${prefix}/lib 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d /usr/local/lib 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d /usr/contrib/lib 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d /usr/pkg/lib 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d /usr/lib/tk8.7 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d /usr/lib 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d /usr/lib64 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d /usr/local/lib/tk8.7 2>/dev/null` \ `ls -d /usr/local/lib/tcl/tk8.7 2>/dev/null` \ ; do if test -f "$i/tkConfig.sh" ; then ac_cv_c_tkconfig="`(cd $i; pwd)`" break fi done fi |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 | SHLIB_LD='${CC} ${CFLAGS} ${LDFLAGS} -shared' DL_OBJS="tclLoadDl.o" DL_LIBS="-ldl" LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -Wl,--export-dynamic" case $system in DragonFly-*|FreeBSD-*) | > | | | | | 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290 | SHLIB_LD='${CC} ${CFLAGS} ${LDFLAGS} -shared' DL_OBJS="tclLoadDl.o" DL_LIBS="-ldl" LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -Wl,--export-dynamic" case $system in DragonFly-*|FreeBSD-*) AS_IF([test "${TCL_THREADS}" = "1"], [ # The -pthread needs to go in the LDFLAGS, not LIBS LIBS=`echo $LIBS | sed s/-pthread//` CFLAGS="$CFLAGS $PTHREAD_CFLAGS" LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS $PTHREAD_LIBS"]) ;; esac AS_IF([test $doRpath = yes], [ CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='"-Wl,-rpath,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}"']) LD_SEARCH_FLAGS=${CC_SEARCH_FLAGS} AS_IF([test "`uname -m`" = "alpha"], [CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -mieee"]) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2272 2273 2274 2275 2276 2277 2278 | # Arguments: # None # # Results: # # Might define the following vars: # _ISOC99_SOURCE | < | 2273 2274 2275 2276 2277 2278 2279 2280 2281 2282 2283 2284 2285 2286 | # Arguments: # None # # Results: # # Might define the following vars: # _ISOC99_SOURCE # _LARGEFILE64_SOURCE # #-------------------------------------------------------------------- AC_DEFUN([SC_TCL_EARLY_FLAG],[ AC_CACHE_VAL([tcl_cv_flag_]translit($1,[A-Z],[a-z]), AC_COMPILE_IFELSE([AC_LANG_PROGRAM([[$2]], [[$3]])], |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2295 2296 2297 2298 2299 2300 2301 | ]) AC_DEFUN([SC_TCL_EARLY_FLAGS],[ AC_MSG_CHECKING([for required early compiler flags]) tcl_flags="" SC_TCL_EARLY_FLAG(_ISOC99_SOURCE,[#include <stdlib.h>], [char *p = (char *)strtoll; char *q = (char *)strtoull;]) | < < | 2295 2296 2297 2298 2299 2300 2301 2302 2303 2304 2305 2306 2307 2308 | ]) AC_DEFUN([SC_TCL_EARLY_FLAGS],[ AC_MSG_CHECKING([for required early compiler flags]) tcl_flags="" SC_TCL_EARLY_FLAG(_ISOC99_SOURCE,[#include <stdlib.h>], [char *p = (char *)strtoll; char *q = (char *)strtoull;]) SC_TCL_EARLY_FLAG(_LARGEFILE64_SOURCE,[#include <sys/stat.h>], [struct stat64 buf; int i = stat64("/", &buf);]) if test "x${tcl_flags}" = "x" ; then AC_MSG_RESULT([none]) else AC_MSG_RESULT([${tcl_flags}]) fi |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2319 2320 2321 2322 2323 2324 2325 2326 | # None # # Results: # # Might define the following vars: # TCL_WIDE_INT_IS_LONG # HAVE_STRUCT_DIRENT64, HAVE_DIR64 # HAVE_TYPE_OFF64_T | > < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < > > > > > > > > | 2317 2318 2319 2320 2321 2322 2323 2324 2325 2326 2327 2328 2329 2330 2331 2332 2333 2334 2335 2336 2337 2338 2339 2340 2341 2342 2343 2344 2345 2346 2347 2348 2349 2350 2351 2352 2353 2354 2355 2356 2357 2358 2359 2360 2361 2362 2363 2364 2365 2366 2367 2368 2369 2370 2371 2372 2373 2374 2375 | # None # # Results: # # Might define the following vars: # TCL_WIDE_INT_IS_LONG # HAVE_STRUCT_DIRENT64, HAVE_DIR64 # HAVE_STRUCT_STAT64 # HAVE_TYPE_OFF64_T # #-------------------------------------------------------------------- AC_DEFUN([SC_TCL_64BIT_FLAGS], [ AC_MSG_CHECKING([if 'long' and 'long long' have the same size (64-bit)?]) AC_CACHE_VAL(tcl_cv_type_64bit,[ tcl_cv_type_64bit=none # See if we could use long anyway Note that we substitute in the # type that is our current guess for a 64-bit type inside this check # program, so it should be modified only carefully... AC_COMPILE_IFELSE([AC_LANG_PROGRAM([[]], [[switch (0) { case 1: case (sizeof(long long)==sizeof(long)): ; }]])],[tcl_cv_type_64bit="long long"],[])]) if test "${tcl_cv_type_64bit}" = none ; then AC_DEFINE(TCL_WIDE_INT_IS_LONG, 1, [Do 'long' and 'long long' have the same size (64-bit)?]) AC_MSG_RESULT([yes]) else AC_MSG_RESULT([no]) # Now check for auxiliary declarations AC_CACHE_CHECK([for struct dirent64], tcl_cv_struct_dirent64,[ AC_COMPILE_IFELSE([AC_LANG_PROGRAM([[#include <sys/types.h> #include <dirent.h>]], [[struct dirent64 p;]])], [tcl_cv_struct_dirent64=yes],[tcl_cv_struct_dirent64=no])]) if test "x${tcl_cv_struct_dirent64}" = "xyes" ; then AC_DEFINE(HAVE_STRUCT_DIRENT64, 1, [Is 'struct dirent64' in <sys/types.h>?]) fi AC_CACHE_CHECK([for DIR64], tcl_cv_DIR64,[ AC_COMPILE_IFELSE([AC_LANG_PROGRAM([[#include <sys/types.h> #include <dirent.h>]], [[struct dirent64 *p; DIR64 d = opendir64("."); p = readdir64(d); rewinddir64(d); closedir64(d);]])], [tcl_cv_DIR64=yes], [tcl_cv_DIR64=no])]) if test "x${tcl_cv_DIR64}" = "xyes" ; then AC_DEFINE(HAVE_DIR64, 1, [Is 'DIR64' in <sys/types.h>?]) fi AC_CACHE_CHECK([for struct stat64], tcl_cv_struct_stat64,[ AC_COMPILE_IFELSE([AC_LANG_PROGRAM([[#include <sys/stat.h>]], [[struct stat64 p; ]])], [tcl_cv_struct_stat64=yes], [tcl_cv_struct_stat64=no])]) if test "x${tcl_cv_struct_stat64}" = "xyes" ; then AC_DEFINE(HAVE_STRUCT_STAT64, 1, [Is 'struct stat64' in <sys/stat.h>?]) fi AC_CHECK_FUNCS(open64 lseek64) AC_MSG_CHECKING([for off64_t]) AC_CACHE_VAL(tcl_cv_type_off64_t,[ AC_COMPILE_IFELSE([AC_LANG_PROGRAM([[#include <sys/types.h>]], [[off64_t offset; ]])], [tcl_cv_type_off64_t=yes], [tcl_cv_type_off64_t=no])]) |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to unix/tk.spec.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | # This file is the basis for a binary Tk Linux RPM. %{!?directory:%define directory /usr/local} Name: tk Summary: Tk graphical toolkit for the Tcl scripting language. | | | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | # This file is the basis for a binary Tk Linux RPM. %{!?directory:%define directory /usr/local} Name: tk Summary: Tk graphical toolkit for the Tcl scripting language. Version: 8.7b1 Release: 2 License: BSD Group: Development/Languages Source: http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/tcl/tk%{version}-src.tar.gz URL: https://www.tcl-lang.org/ Buildroot: /var/tmp/%{name}%{version} Buildrequires: XFree86-devel tcl >= 8.7b1 Requires: tcl >= 8.7b1 %description The Tcl (Tool Command Language) provides a powerful platform for creating integration applications that tie together diverse applications, protocols, devices, and frameworks. When paired with the Tk toolkit, Tcl provides the fastest and most powerful way to create GUI applications that run on PCs, Unix, and Mac OS X. Tcl |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to unix/tkAppInit.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | * Copyright © 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. * Copyright © 1998-1999 Scriptics Corporation. * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 | * Copyright © 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. * Copyright © 1998-1999 Scriptics Corporation. * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #undef BUILD_tk #undef STATIC_BUILD #include "tk.h" #include "tkPort.h" #if TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 && TCL_MINOR_VERSION < 7 # define Tcl_LibraryInitProc Tcl_PackageInitProc # define Tcl_StaticLibrary Tcl_StaticPackage #endif #ifdef TK_TEST #ifdef __cplusplus extern "C" { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
103 104 105 106 107 108 109 | int main( int argc, /* Number of command-line arguments. */ char **argv) /* Values of command-line arguments. */ { #ifdef TK_LOCAL_MAIN_HOOK TK_LOCAL_MAIN_HOOK(&argc, &argv); | | | 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 | int main( int argc, /* Number of command-line arguments. */ char **argv) /* Values of command-line arguments. */ { #ifdef TK_LOCAL_MAIN_HOOK TK_LOCAL_MAIN_HOOK(&argc, &argv); #elif (TCL_MAJOR_VERSION > 8) || (TCL_MINOR_VERSION > 6) /* This doesn't work with Tcl 8.6 */ TclZipfs_AppHook(&argc, &argv); #endif Tk_Main(argc, argv, TK_LOCAL_APPINIT); return 0; /* Needed only to prevent compiler warning. */ } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 | /* * Specify a user-specific startup file to invoke if the application is * run interactively. Typically the startup file is "~/.apprc" where "app" * is the name of the application. If this line is deleted then no * user-specific startup file will be run under any conditions. */ (void) Tcl_EvalEx(interp, "set tcl_rcFileName [file tildeexpand ~/.wishrc]", -1, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL); return TCL_OK; } /* * Local Variables: * mode: c * c-basic-offset: 4 * fill-column: 78 * End: */ | > > > > > | 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 | /* * Specify a user-specific startup file to invoke if the application is * run interactively. Typically the startup file is "~/.apprc" where "app" * is the name of the application. If this line is deleted then no * user-specific startup file will be run under any conditions. */ #if TCL_MAJOR_VERSION > 8 (void) Tcl_EvalEx(interp, "set tcl_rcFileName [file tildeexpand ~/.wishrc]", -1, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL); #else Tcl_ObjSetVar2(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj("tcl_rcFileName", -1), NULL, Tcl_NewStringObj("~/.wishrc", -1), TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY); #endif return TCL_OK; } /* * Local Variables: * mode: c * c-basic-offset: 4 * fill-column: 78 * End: */ |
Changes to unix/tkConfig.h.in.
︙ | ︙ | |||
62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 | #undef HAVE_STRINGS_H /* Define to 1 if you have the <string.h> header file. */ #undef HAVE_STRING_H /* Is 'struct dirent64' in <sys/types.h>? */ #undef HAVE_STRUCT_DIRENT64 /* Should we include <sys/select.h>? */ #undef HAVE_SYS_SELECT_H /* Define to 1 if you have the <sys/stat.h> header file. */ #undef HAVE_SYS_STAT_H | > > > | 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 | #undef HAVE_STRINGS_H /* Define to 1 if you have the <string.h> header file. */ #undef HAVE_STRING_H /* Is 'struct dirent64' in <sys/types.h>? */ #undef HAVE_STRUCT_DIRENT64 /* Is 'struct stat64' in <sys/stat.h>? */ #undef HAVE_STRUCT_STAT64 /* Should we include <sys/select.h>? */ #undef HAVE_SYS_SELECT_H /* Define to 1 if you have the <sys/stat.h> header file. */ #undef HAVE_SYS_STAT_H |
︙ | ︙ | |||
182 183 184 185 186 187 188 | # undef WORDS_BIGENDIAN # endif #endif /* Are we building with zipfs enabled? */ #undef ZIPFS_BUILD | < < < < < < | 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 | # undef WORDS_BIGENDIAN # endif #endif /* Are we building with zipfs enabled? */ #undef ZIPFS_BUILD /* Add the _ISOC99_SOURCE flag when building */ #undef _ISOC99_SOURCE /* Add the _LARGEFILE64_SOURCE flag when building */ #undef _LARGEFILE64_SOURCE /* # needed in sys/socket.h Should OS/390 do the right thing with sockets? */ #undef _OE_SOCKETS /* Do we really want to follow the standard? Yes we do! */ #undef _POSIX_PTHREAD_SEMANTICS /* Do we want the reentrant OS API? */ #undef _REENTRANT /* Do we want to use the XOPEN network library? */ #undef _XOPEN_SOURCE /* Do we want to use the XOPEN network library? */ #undef _XOPEN_SOURCE_EXTENDED /* Define to 1 if type 'char' is unsigned and your compiler does not |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to unix/tkUnix.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
131 132 133 134 135 136 137 | * * Side effects: * None. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ | < < | 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 | * * Side effects: * None. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ void TkpCopyRegion( TkRegion dst, TkRegion src) { /* XUnionRegion() in Xlib is optimized to detect copying */ XUnionRegion((Region)src, (Region)src, (Region)dst); |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to unix/tkUnixButton.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
445 446 447 448 449 450 451 | int width = 0, height = 0, fullWidth, fullHeight; int textXOffset, textYOffset; int haveImage = 0, haveText = 0; int imageWidth, imageHeight; int imageXOffset = 0, imageYOffset = 0; /* image information that will be used to * restrict disabled pixmap as well */ | < | 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 | int width = 0, height = 0, fullWidth, fullHeight; int textXOffset, textYOffset; int haveImage = 0, haveText = 0; int imageWidth, imageHeight; int imageXOffset = 0, imageYOffset = 0; /* image information that will be used to * restrict disabled pixmap as well */ butPtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_PENDING; if ((butPtr->tkwin == NULL) || !Tk_IsMapped(tkwin)) { return; } border = butPtr->normalBorder; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
530 531 532 533 534 535 536 | } else if (butPtr->bitmap != None) { Tk_SizeOfBitmap(butPtr->display, butPtr->bitmap, &width, &height); haveImage = 1; } imageWidth = width; imageHeight = height; | | | | | | | | | | | | 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 | } else if (butPtr->bitmap != None) { Tk_SizeOfBitmap(butPtr->display, butPtr->bitmap, &width, &height); haveImage = 1; } imageWidth = width; imageHeight = height; Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, butPtr->padXPtr, &butPtr->padX); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, butPtr->padYPtr, &butPtr->padY); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, butPtr->borderWidthPtr, &butPtr->borderWidth); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, butPtr->highlightWidthPtr, &butPtr->highlightWidth); haveText = (butPtr->textWidth != 0 && butPtr->textHeight != 0); if (butPtr->compound != COMPOUND_NONE && haveImage && haveText) { textXOffset = 0; textYOffset = 0; fullWidth = 0; fullHeight = 0; switch ((enum compound) butPtr->compound) { case COMPOUND_TOP: case COMPOUND_BOTTOM: /* * Image is above or below text. */ if (butPtr->compound == COMPOUND_TOP) { textYOffset = height + butPtr->padY; } else { imageYOffset = butPtr->textHeight + butPtr->padY; } fullHeight = height + butPtr->textHeight + butPtr->padY; fullWidth = (width > butPtr->textWidth ? width : butPtr->textWidth); textXOffset = (fullWidth - butPtr->textWidth)/2; imageXOffset = (fullWidth - width)/2; break; case COMPOUND_LEFT: case COMPOUND_RIGHT: /* * Image is left or right of text. */ if (butPtr->compound == COMPOUND_LEFT) { textXOffset = width + butPtr->padX; } else { imageXOffset = butPtr->textWidth + butPtr->padX; } fullWidth = butPtr->textWidth + butPtr->padX + width; fullHeight = (height > butPtr->textHeight ? height : butPtr->textHeight); textYOffset = (fullHeight - butPtr->textHeight)/2; imageYOffset = (fullHeight - height)/2; break; case COMPOUND_CENTER: /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
596 597 598 599 600 601 602 | textYOffset = (fullHeight - butPtr->textHeight)/2; imageYOffset = (fullHeight - height)/2; break; case COMPOUND_NONE: break; } | | | 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 | textYOffset = (fullHeight - butPtr->textHeight)/2; imageYOffset = (fullHeight - height)/2; break; case COMPOUND_NONE: break; } TkComputeAnchor(butPtr->anchor, tkwin, butPtr->padX, butPtr->padY, butPtr->indicatorSpace + fullWidth, fullHeight, &x, &y); x += butPtr->indicatorSpace; ShiftByOffset(butPtr, relief, &x, &y, width, height); imageXOffset += x; imageYOffset += y; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
706 707 708 709 710 711 712 | XSetClipOrigin(butPtr->display, gc, x, y); XCopyPlane(butPtr->display, butPtr->bitmap, pixmap, gc, 0, 0, (unsigned int) width, (unsigned int) height, x, y, 1); XSetClipOrigin(butPtr->display, gc, 0, 0); } y += height/2; } else { | | | | 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 | XSetClipOrigin(butPtr->display, gc, x, y); XCopyPlane(butPtr->display, butPtr->bitmap, pixmap, gc, 0, 0, (unsigned int) width, (unsigned int) height, x, y, 1); XSetClipOrigin(butPtr->display, gc, 0, 0); } y += height/2; } else { TkComputeAnchor(butPtr->anchor, tkwin, butPtr->padX, butPtr->padY, butPtr->indicatorSpace + butPtr->textWidth, butPtr->textHeight, &x, &y); x += butPtr->indicatorSpace; ShiftByOffset(butPtr, relief, &x, &y, width, height); Tk_DrawTextLayout(butPtr->display, pixmap, gc, butPtr->textLayout, x, y, 0, -1); Tk_UnderlineTextLayout(butPtr->display, pixmap, gc, butPtr->textLayout, x, y, butPtr->underline); y += butPtr->textHeight/2; } } /* * Draw the indicator for check buttons and radio buttons. At this point, * x and y refer to the top-left corner of the text or image or bitmap. */ if ((butPtr->type == TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON || butPtr->type == TYPE_RADIO_BUTTON) && butPtr->indicatorOn && butPtr->indicatorDiameter > 2 * butPtr->borderWidth) { TkBorder *selBorder = (TkBorder *) butPtr->selectBorder; XColor *selColor = NULL; int btype = (butPtr->type == TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON ? CHECK_BUTTON : RADIO_BUTTON); if (selBorder != NULL) { selColor = selBorder->bgColorPtr; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
789 790 791 792 793 794 795 | * contents overflow they'll be covered up by the border. This code is * complicated by the possible combinations of focus highlight and default * rings. We draw the focus and highlight rings using the highlight border * and highlight foreground color. */ if (relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT) { | | | 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 | * contents overflow they'll be covered up by the border. This code is * complicated by the possible combinations of focus highlight and default * rings. We draw the focus and highlight rings using the highlight border * and highlight foreground color. */ if (relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT) { int inset = butPtr->highlightWidth; if (butPtr->defaultState == DEFAULT_ACTIVE) { /* * Draw the default ring with 2 pixels of space between the * default ring and the button and the default ring and the focus * ring. Note that we need to explicitly draw the space in the * highlightBorder color to ensure that we overwrite any overflow |
︙ | ︙ | |||
830 831 832 833 834 835 836 | /* * Draw the button border. */ Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, border, inset, inset, Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2 * inset, Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2 * inset, | | | | | | 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 | /* * Draw the button border. */ Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, border, inset, inset, Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2 * inset, Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2 * inset, butPtr->borderWidth, relief); } if (butPtr->highlightWidth > 0) { if (butPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS) { gc = Tk_GCForColor(butPtr->highlightColorPtr, pixmap); } else { gc = Tk_GCForColor(Tk_3DBorderColor(butPtr->highlightBorder), pixmap); } /* * Make sure the focus ring shrink-wraps the actual button, not the * padding space left for a default ring. */ if (butPtr->defaultState == DEFAULT_NORMAL) { TkDrawInsetFocusHighlight(tkwin, gc, butPtr->highlightWidth, pixmap, 5); } else { Tk_DrawFocusHighlight(tkwin, gc, butPtr->highlightWidth, pixmap); } } /* * Copy the information from the off-screen pixmap onto the screen, then * delete the pixmap. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
889 890 891 892 893 894 895 | void TkpComputeButtonGeometry( TkButton *butPtr) /* Button whose geometry may have changed. */ { int width, height, avgWidth, txtWidth, txtHeight; int haveImage = 0, haveText = 0; Tk_FontMetrics fm; | < < | | | | < < < | | 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 | void TkpComputeButtonGeometry( TkButton *butPtr) /* Button whose geometry may have changed. */ { int width, height, avgWidth, txtWidth, txtHeight; int haveImage = 0, haveText = 0; Tk_FontMetrics fm; Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, butPtr->tkwin, butPtr->highlightWidthPtr, &butPtr->highlightWidth); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, butPtr->tkwin, butPtr->borderWidthPtr, &butPtr->borderWidth); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, butPtr->tkwin, butPtr->padXPtr, &butPtr->padX); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, butPtr->tkwin, butPtr->padYPtr, &butPtr->padY); butPtr->inset = butPtr->highlightWidth + butPtr->borderWidth; /* * Leave room for the default ring if needed. */ if (butPtr->defaultState != DEFAULT_DISABLED) { butPtr->inset += 5; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
929 930 931 932 933 934 935 | haveImage = 1; } if (haveImage == 0 || butPtr->compound != COMPOUND_NONE) { Tk_FreeTextLayout(butPtr->textLayout); butPtr->textLayout = Tk_ComputeTextLayout(butPtr->tkfont, | | | 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 | haveImage = 1; } if (haveImage == 0 || butPtr->compound != COMPOUND_NONE) { Tk_FreeTextLayout(butPtr->textLayout); butPtr->textLayout = Tk_ComputeTextLayout(butPtr->tkfont, Tcl_GetString(butPtr->textPtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, butPtr->wrapLength, butPtr->justify, 0, &butPtr->textWidth, &butPtr->textHeight); txtWidth = butPtr->textWidth; txtHeight = butPtr->textHeight; avgWidth = Tk_TextWidth(butPtr->tkfont, "0", 1); Tk_GetFontMetrics(butPtr->tkfont, &fm); haveText = (txtWidth != 0 && txtHeight != 0); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
954 955 956 957 958 959 960 | switch ((enum compound) butPtr->compound) { case COMPOUND_TOP: case COMPOUND_BOTTOM: /* * Image is above or below text. */ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 | switch ((enum compound) butPtr->compound) { case COMPOUND_TOP: case COMPOUND_BOTTOM: /* * Image is above or below text. */ height += txtHeight + butPtr->padY; width = (width > txtWidth ? width : txtWidth); break; case COMPOUND_LEFT: case COMPOUND_RIGHT: /* * Image is left or right of text. */ width += txtWidth + butPtr->padX; height = (height > txtHeight ? height : txtHeight); break; case COMPOUND_CENTER: /* * Image and text are superimposed. */ width = (width > txtWidth ? width : txtWidth); height = (height > txtHeight ? height : txtHeight); break; case COMPOUND_NONE: break; } if (butPtr->width > 0) { width = butPtr->width; } if (butPtr->height > 0) { height = butPtr->height; } if ((butPtr->type >= TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON) && butPtr->indicatorOn) { butPtr->indicatorSpace = height; if (butPtr->type == TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON) { butPtr->indicatorDiameter = (65*height)/100; } else { butPtr->indicatorDiameter = (75*height)/100; } } width += 2 * butPtr->padX; height += 2 * butPtr->padY; } else { if (haveImage) { if (butPtr->width > 0) { width = butPtr->width; } if (butPtr->height > 0) { height = butPtr->height; } if ((butPtr->type >= TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON) && butPtr->indicatorOn) { butPtr->indicatorSpace = height; if (butPtr->type == TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON) { butPtr->indicatorDiameter = (65*height)/100; } else { butPtr->indicatorDiameter = (75*height)/100; } } } else { width = txtWidth; height = txtHeight; if (butPtr->width > 0) { width = butPtr->width * avgWidth; } if (butPtr->height > 0) { height = butPtr->height * fm.linespace; } if ((butPtr->type >= TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON) && butPtr->indicatorOn) { butPtr->indicatorDiameter = fm.linespace; butPtr->indicatorSpace = butPtr->indicatorDiameter + avgWidth; } } } /* * When issuing the geometry request, add extra space for the indicator, * if any, and for the border and padding, plus two extra pixels so the * display can be offset by 1 pixel in either direction for the raised or * lowered effect. */ if ((butPtr->image == NULL) && (butPtr->bitmap == None)) { width += 2 * butPtr->padX; height += 2 * butPtr->padY; } if ((butPtr->type == TYPE_BUTTON) && !Tk_StrictMotif(butPtr->tkwin)) { width += 2; height += 2; } Tk_GeometryRequest(butPtr->tkwin, (int) (width + butPtr->indicatorSpace + 2 * butPtr->inset), (int) (height + 2 * butPtr->inset)); |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to unix/tkUnixDefault.h.
︙ | ︙ | |||
248 249 250 251 252 253 254 | #define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_ACTIVE_BG NULL #define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_ACTIVE_FG NULL #define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_ACCELERATOR NULL #define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_BG NULL #define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_BITMAP NULL #define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_COLUMN_BREAK "0" #define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_COMMAND NULL | | | 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 | #define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_ACTIVE_BG NULL #define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_ACTIVE_FG NULL #define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_ACCELERATOR NULL #define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_BG NULL #define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_BITMAP NULL #define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_COLUMN_BREAK "0" #define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_COMMAND NULL #define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_COMPOUND "none" #define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_FG NULL #define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_FONT NULL #define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_HIDE_MARGIN "0" #define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_IMAGE NULL #define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_INDICATOR "1" #define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_LABEL NULL #define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_MENU NULL |
︙ | ︙ | |||
347 348 349 350 351 352 353 | #define DEF_MESSAGE_CURSOR "" #define DEF_MESSAGE_FG BLACK #define DEF_MESSAGE_FONT "TkDefaultFont" #define DEF_MESSAGE_HIGHLIGHT_BG NORMAL_BG #define DEF_MESSAGE_HIGHLIGHT BLACK #define DEF_MESSAGE_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH "0" #define DEF_MESSAGE_JUSTIFY "left" | | | | 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 | #define DEF_MESSAGE_CURSOR "" #define DEF_MESSAGE_FG BLACK #define DEF_MESSAGE_FONT "TkDefaultFont" #define DEF_MESSAGE_HIGHLIGHT_BG NORMAL_BG #define DEF_MESSAGE_HIGHLIGHT BLACK #define DEF_MESSAGE_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH "0" #define DEF_MESSAGE_JUSTIFY "left" #define DEF_MESSAGE_PADX "-1" #define DEF_MESSAGE_PADY "-1" #define DEF_MESSAGE_RELIEF "flat" #define DEF_MESSAGE_TAKE_FOCUS "0" #define DEF_MESSAGE_TEXT "" #define DEF_MESSAGE_TEXT_VARIABLE "" #define DEF_MESSAGE_WIDTH "0" /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
444 445 446 447 448 449 450 | #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_ACTIVE_BG_MONO BLACK #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_ACTIVE_RELIEF "raised" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_BG_COLOR NORMAL_BG #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_BG_MONO WHITE #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_BORDER_WIDTH "1" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_COMMAND "" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_CURSOR "" | | | 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 | #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_ACTIVE_BG_MONO BLACK #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_ACTIVE_RELIEF "raised" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_BG_COLOR NORMAL_BG #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_BG_MONO WHITE #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_BORDER_WIDTH "1" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_COMMAND "" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_CURSOR "" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_EL_BORDER_WIDTH "-1" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_HIGHLIGHT_BG NORMAL_BG #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_HIGHLIGHT BLACK #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH "0" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_JUMP "0" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_ORIENT "vertical" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_RELIEF "sunken" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_REPEAT_DELAY "300" |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to unix/tkUnixFont.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 | static char ** ListFontOrAlias(Display *display, const char*faceName, int *numNamesPtr); static unsigned RankAttributes(FontAttributes *wantPtr, FontAttributes *gotPtr); static void ReleaseFont(UnixFont *fontPtr); static void ReleaseSubFont(Display *display, SubFont *subFontPtr); static int SeenName(const char *name, Tcl_DString *dsPtr); /* *------------------------------------------------------------------------- * * XLoadQueryFontNoXError -- * * This function is XLoadQueryFont wrapped in a NULL error handler. | > > > > > > > > > > | 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 | static char ** ListFontOrAlias(Display *display, const char*faceName, int *numNamesPtr); static unsigned RankAttributes(FontAttributes *wantPtr, FontAttributes *gotPtr); static void ReleaseFont(UnixFont *fontPtr); static void ReleaseSubFont(Display *display, SubFont *subFontPtr); static int SeenName(const char *name, Tcl_DString *dsPtr); #if TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 static int Ucs2beToUtfProc(void *clientData, const char*src, int srcLen, int flags, Tcl_EncodingState*statePtr, char *dst, int dstLen, int *srcReadPtr, int *dstWrotePtr, int *dstCharsPtr); static int UtfToUcs2beProc(void *clientData, const char*src, int srcLen, int flags, Tcl_EncodingState*statePtr, char *dst, int dstLen, int *srcReadPtr, int *dstWrotePtr, int *dstCharsPtr); #endif /* *------------------------------------------------------------------------- * * XLoadQueryFontNoXError -- * * This function is XLoadQueryFont wrapped in a NULL error handler. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 | TkpFontPkgInit( TCL_UNUSED(TkMainInfo *)) /* The application being created. */ { ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData)); SubFont dummy; int i; if (tsdPtr->controlFamily.encoding == NULL) { Tcl_EncodingType type = {"X11ControlChars", ControlUtfProc, ControlUtfProc, NULL, NULL, 0}; tsdPtr->controlFamily.refCount = 2; tsdPtr->controlFamily.encoding = Tcl_CreateEncoding(&type); tsdPtr->controlFamily.isTwoByteFont = 0; dummy.familyPtr = &tsdPtr->controlFamily; dummy.fontMap = tsdPtr->controlFamily.fontMap; for (i = 0x00; i < 0x20; i++) { FontMapInsert(&dummy, i); FontMapInsert(&dummy, i + 0x80); } /* * UCS-2BE is unicode (UCS-2) in big-endian format. Define this if * if it doesn't exist yet. It is used in iso10646 fonts. */ Tcl_CreateThreadExitHandler(FontPkgCleanup, NULL); } } /* *------------------------------------------------------------------------- * | > > > > > > > > > > > > | 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 | TkpFontPkgInit( TCL_UNUSED(TkMainInfo *)) /* The application being created. */ { ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData)); SubFont dummy; int i; #if TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 Tcl_Encoding ucs2; #endif if (tsdPtr->controlFamily.encoding == NULL) { Tcl_EncodingType type = {"X11ControlChars", ControlUtfProc, ControlUtfProc, NULL, NULL, 0}; tsdPtr->controlFamily.refCount = 2; tsdPtr->controlFamily.encoding = Tcl_CreateEncoding(&type); tsdPtr->controlFamily.isTwoByteFont = 0; dummy.familyPtr = &tsdPtr->controlFamily; dummy.fontMap = tsdPtr->controlFamily.fontMap; for (i = 0x00; i < 0x20; i++) { FontMapInsert(&dummy, i); FontMapInsert(&dummy, i + 0x80); } /* * UCS-2BE is unicode (UCS-2) in big-endian format. Define this if * if it doesn't exist yet. It is used in iso10646 fonts. */ #if TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 ucs2 = Tcl_GetEncoding(NULL, "ucs-2be"); if (ucs2 == NULL) { Tcl_EncodingType ucs2type = {"ucs-2be", Ucs2beToUtfProc, UtfToUcs2beProc, NULL, NULL, 2}; Tcl_CreateEncoding(&ucs2type); } else { Tcl_FreeEncoding(ucs2); } #endif Tcl_CreateThreadExitHandler(FontPkgCleanup, NULL); } } /* *------------------------------------------------------------------------- * |
︙ | ︙ | |||
416 417 418 419 420 421 422 | dstEnd = dst + dstLen - 6; for ( ; src < srcEnd; ) { if (dst > dstEnd) { result = TCL_CONVERT_NOSPACE; break; } | | | 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 | dstEnd = dst + dstLen - 6; for ( ; src < srcEnd; ) { if (dst > dstEnd) { result = TCL_CONVERT_NOSPACE; break; } src += TkUtfToUniChar(src, &ch); dst[0] = '\\'; if (((size_t)ch < sizeof(mapChars)) && (mapChars[ch] != 0)) { dst[1] = mapChars[ch]; dst += 2; } else if ((size_t)ch < 256) { dst[1] = 'x'; dst[2] = hexChars[(ch >> 4) & 0xF]; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 | } *srcReadPtr = src - srcStart; *dstWrotePtr = dst - dstStart; *dstCharsPtr = dst - dstStart; return result; } /* *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- * * TkpGetNativeFont -- * * Map a platform-specific native font name to a TkFont. * | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 | } *srcReadPtr = src - srcStart; *dstWrotePtr = dst - dstStart; *dstCharsPtr = dst - dstStart; return result; } /* *------------------------------------------------------------------------- * * Ucs2beToUtfProc -- * * Convert from UCS-2BE (big-endian 16-bit Unicode) to UTF-8. * * Results: * Returns TCL_OK if conversion was successful. * * Side effects: * None. * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ #if TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 static int Ucs2beToUtfProc( TCL_UNUSED(void *), /* Not used. */ const char *src, /* Source string in Unicode. */ int srcLen, /* Source string length in bytes. */ int flags, /* Conversion control flags. */ TCL_UNUSED(Tcl_EncodingState *),/* Place for conversion routine to store state * information used during a piecewise * conversion. Contents of statePtr are * initialized and/or reset by conversion * routine under control of flags argument. */ char *dst, /* Output buffer in which converted string is * stored. */ int dstLen, /* The maximum length of output buffer in * bytes. */ int *srcReadPtr, /* Filled with the number of bytes from the * source string that were converted. This may * be less than the original source length if * there was a problem converting some source * characters. */ int *dstWrotePtr, /* Filled with the number of bytes that were * stored in the output buffer as a result of * the conversion. */ int *dstCharsPtr) /* Filled with the number of characters that * correspond to the bytes stored in the * output buffer. */ { const char *srcStart, *srcEnd; const char *dstEnd, *dstStart; int result, numChars, charLimit = INT_MAX; unsigned short ch; if (flags & TCL_ENCODING_CHAR_LIMIT) { charLimit = *dstCharsPtr; } result = TCL_OK; /* check alignment with ucs-2 (2 == sizeof(UCS-2)) */ if ((srcLen % 2) != 0) { result = TCL_CONVERT_MULTIBYTE; srcLen--; } /* If last code point is a high surrogate, we cannot handle that yet */ if ((srcLen >= 2) && ((src[srcLen - 2] & 0xFC) == 0xD8)) { result = TCL_CONVERT_MULTIBYTE; srcLen -= 2; } srcStart = src; srcEnd = src + srcLen; dstStart = dst; dstEnd = dst + dstLen - 4; for (numChars = 0; src < srcEnd && numChars <= charLimit; numChars++) { if (dst > dstEnd) { result = TCL_CONVERT_NOSPACE; break; } ch = (src[0] & 0xFF) << 8 | (src[1] & 0xFF); src += 2 /* sizeof(UTF-16) */; /* * Special case for 1-byte utf chars for speed. Make sure we work with * unsigned short-size data. */ if (ch && ch < 0x80) { *dst++ = (ch & 0xFF); } else { dst += Tcl_UniCharToUtf(ch, dst); } } *srcReadPtr = src - srcStart; *dstWrotePtr = dst - dstStart; *dstCharsPtr = numChars; return result; } /* *------------------------------------------------------------------------- * * UtfToUcs2beProc -- * * Convert from UTF-8 to UCS-2BE (fixed 2-byte encoding). * * Results: * Returns TCL_OK if conversion was successful. * * Side effects: * None. * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ #if defined(USE_TCL_STUBS) /* Since the UCS-2BE encoding is only used when Tk is dynamically loaded in Tcl 8.6, * make sure that Tcl_UtfCharComplete is ALWAYS the pre-TIP #575 version, * even though Tk is being compiled with -DTCL_NO_DEPRECATED! */ # undef Tcl_UtfCharComplete # define Tcl_UtfCharComplete ((int (*)(const char *, int))(void *)((&tclStubsPtr->tcl_PkgProvideEx)[326])) #endif static int UtfToUcs2beProc( TCL_UNUSED(void *), /* TableEncodingData that specifies * encoding. */ const char *src, /* Source string in UTF-8. */ int srcLen, /* Source string length in bytes. */ int flags, /* Conversion control flags. */ TCL_UNUSED(Tcl_EncodingState *),/* Place for conversion routine to store state * information used during a piecewise * conversion. Contents of statePtr are * initialized and/or reset by conversion * routine under control of flags argument. */ char *dst, /* Output buffer in which converted string is * stored. */ int dstLen, /* The maximum length of output buffer in * bytes. */ int *srcReadPtr, /* Filled with the number of bytes from the * source string that were converted. This may * be less than the original source length if * there was a problem converting some source * characters. */ int *dstWrotePtr, /* Filled with the number of bytes that were * stored in the output buffer as a result of * the conversion. */ int *dstCharsPtr) /* Filled with the number of characters that * correspond to the bytes stored in the * output buffer. */ { const char *srcStart, *srcEnd, *srcClose, *dstStart, *dstEnd; int result, numChars; int ch; srcStart = src; srcEnd = src + srcLen; srcClose = srcEnd; if (!(flags & TCL_ENCODING_END)) { srcClose -= 6; } dstStart = dst; dstEnd = dst + dstLen - 2 /* sizeof(UCS-2) */; result = TCL_OK; for (numChars = 0; src < srcEnd; numChars++) { if ((src > srcClose) && (!Tcl_UtfCharComplete(src, srcEnd - src))) { /* * If there is more string to follow, this will ensure that the * last UTF-8 character in the source buffer hasn't been cut off. */ result = TCL_CONVERT_MULTIBYTE; break; } if (dst > dstEnd) { result = TCL_CONVERT_NOSPACE; break; } src += TkUtfToUniChar(src, &ch); if (ch > 0xFFFF) { ch = 0xFFFD; } /* * Ensure big-endianness (store big bits first). */ *dst++ = (char)((ch >> 8) & 0xFF); *dst++ = (char)(ch & 0xFF); } *srcReadPtr = src - srcStart; *dstWrotePtr = dst - dstStart; *dstCharsPtr = numChars; return result; } #endif /* *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- * * TkpGetNativeFont -- * * Map a platform-specific native font name to a TkFont. * |
︙ | ︙ | |||
866 867 868 869 870 871 872 | * 2. Convert those chars to the encoding of that font. * 3. Measure converted chars. */ curX = 0; end = source + numBytes; for (p = source; p < end; ) { | | | | | 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 | * 2. Convert those chars to the encoding of that font. * 3. Measure converted chars. */ curX = 0; end = source + numBytes; for (p = source; p < end; ) { next = p + TkUtfToUniChar(p, &ch); thisSubFontPtr = FindSubFontForChar(fontPtr, ch, &lastSubFontPtr); if (thisSubFontPtr != lastSubFontPtr) { familyPtr = lastSubFontPtr->familyPtr; Tcl_UtfToExternalDString(familyPtr->encoding, source, p - source, &runString); if (familyPtr->isTwoByteFont) { curX += XTextWidth16(lastSubFontPtr->fontStructPtr, (XChar2b *) Tcl_DStringValue(&runString), Tcl_DStringLength(&runString) / 2); } else { curX += XTextWidth(lastSubFontPtr->fontStructPtr, Tcl_DStringValue(&runString), Tcl_DStringLength(&runString)); } Tcl_DStringFree(&runString); lastSubFontPtr = thisSubFontPtr; source = p; } p = next; } familyPtr = lastSubFontPtr->familyPtr; Tcl_UtfToExternalDString(familyPtr->encoding, source, p - source, &runString); if (familyPtr->isTwoByteFont) { curX += XTextWidth16(lastSubFontPtr->fontStructPtr, (XChar2b *) Tcl_DStringValue(&runString), Tcl_DStringLength(&runString) >> 1); } else { curX += XTextWidth(lastSubFontPtr->fontStructPtr, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
913 914 915 916 917 918 919 | /* * How many chars will fit in the space allotted? This first version * may be inefficient because it measures every character * individually. */ | | | 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 | /* * How many chars will fit in the space allotted? This first version * may be inefficient because it measures every character * individually. */ next = source + TkUtfToUniChar(source, &ch); newX = curX = termX = 0; term = source; end = source + numBytes; sawNonSpace = (ch > 255) || !isspace(ch); familyPtr = lastSubFontPtr->familyPtr; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
948 949 950 951 952 953 954 | p = next; if (p >= end) { term = end; termX = curX; break; } | | | 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 | p = next; if (p >= end) { term = end; termX = curX; break; } next += TkUtfToUniChar(next, &ch); if ((ch < 256) && isspace(ch)) { if (sawNonSpace) { term = p; termX = curX; sawNonSpace = 0; } } else { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
973 974 975 976 977 978 979 | /* * Include the first character that didn't quite fit in the * desired span. The width returned will include the width of that * extra character. */ curX = newX; | | | | | | | 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 | /* * Include the first character that didn't quite fit in the * desired span. The width returned will include the width of that * extra character. */ curX = newX; p += TkUtfToUniChar(p, &ch); } if ((flags & TK_AT_LEAST_ONE) && (term == source) && (p < end)) { term = p; termX = curX; if (term == source) { term += TkUtfToUniChar(term, &ch); termX = newX; } } else if ((p >= end) || !(flags & TK_WHOLE_WORDS)) { term = p; termX = curX; } curX = termX; curByte = term - source; } *lengthPtr = curX; return curByte; } /* *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- * * Tk_MeasureCharsInContext -- * * Determine the number of bytes from the string that will fit in the * given horizontal span. The measurement is done under the assumption * that Tk_MeasureCharsInContext() will be used to actually display the * characters. * * This one is almost the same as Tk_MeasureChars(), but with access to * all the characters on the line for context. On X11 this context isn't * consulted, so we just call Tk_MeasureChars(). * * Results: * The return value is the number of bytes from source that fit into the * span that extends from 0 to maxLength. *lengthPtr is filled with the * x-coordinate of the right edge of the last character that did fit. * * Side effects: * None. * *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ int Tk_MeasureCharsInContext( Tk_Font tkfont, /* Font in which characters will be drawn. */ const char *source, /* UTF-8 string to be displayed. Need not be * '\0' terminated. */ TCL_UNUSED(Tcl_Size), /* Maximum number of bytes to consider from * source string in all. */ Tcl_Size rangeStart, /* Index of first byte to measure. */ Tcl_Size rangeLength, /* Length of range to measure in bytes. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 | window_width = 32768; #endif end = source + numBytes; needWidth = fontPtr->font.fa.underline + fontPtr->font.fa.overstrike; for (p = source; p <= end; ) { if (p < end) { | | | | 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 1360 1361 1362 1363 1364 1365 1366 1367 1368 1369 | window_width = 32768; #endif end = source + numBytes; needWidth = fontPtr->font.fa.underline + fontPtr->font.fa.overstrike; for (p = source; p <= end; ) { if (p < end) { next = p + TkUtfToUniChar(p, &ch); thisSubFontPtr = FindSubFontForChar(fontPtr, ch, &lastSubFontPtr); } else { next = p + 1; thisSubFontPtr = lastSubFontPtr; } if ((thisSubFontPtr != lastSubFontPtr) || (p == end) || (p-source > 200)) { if (p > source) { do_width = (needWidth || (p != end)) ? 1 : 0; familyPtr = lastSubFontPtr->familyPtr; Tcl_UtfToExternalDString(familyPtr->encoding, source, p - source, &runString); if (familyPtr->isTwoByteFont) { XDrawString16(display, drawable, gc, x, y, (XChar2b *) Tcl_DStringValue(&runString), Tcl_DStringLength(&runString) / 2); if (do_width) { x += XTextWidth16(lastSubFontPtr->fontStructPtr, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 | (unsigned) (x - xStart), (unsigned) fontPtr->barHeight); } } /* *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- * | | | | | 1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 1422 1423 1424 1425 1426 1427 1428 1429 1430 1431 1432 1433 1434 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 1440 | (unsigned) (x - xStart), (unsigned) fontPtr->barHeight); } } /* *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- * * Tk_DrawCharsInContext -- * * Draw a string of characters on the screen like Tk_DrawChars(), but * with access to all the characters on the line for context. On X11 this * context isn't consulted, so we just call Tk_DrawChars(). * * Note: TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT being currently defined only on macOS, this * function is unused. * * Results: * None. * * Side effects: * Information gets drawn on the screen. * *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ void Tk_DrawCharsInContext( Display *display, /* Display on which to draw. */ Drawable drawable, /* Window or pixmap in which to draw. */ GC gc, /* Graphics context for drawing characters. */ Tk_Font tkfont, /* Font in which characters will be drawn; * must be the same as font used in GC. */ const char *source, /* UTF-8 string to be displayed. Need not be * '\0' terminated. All Tk meta-characters |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2102 2103 2104 2105 2106 2107 2108 | } } end = (row + 1) << FONTMAP_SHIFT; for (i = row << FONTMAP_SHIFT; i < end; i++) { int hi, lo; | | | | 2320 2321 2322 2323 2324 2325 2326 2327 2328 2329 2330 2331 2332 2333 2334 2335 | } } end = (row + 1) << FONTMAP_SHIFT; for (i = row << FONTMAP_SHIFT; i < end; i++) { int hi, lo; if (Tcl_UtfToExternal(NULL, encoding, src, TkUniCharToUtf(i, src), TCL_ENCODING_STOPONERROR, NULL, buf, sizeof(buf), NULL, NULL, NULL) != TCL_OK) { continue; } if (isTwoByteFont) { hi = ((unsigned char *) buf)[0]; lo = ((unsigned char *) buf)[1]; } else { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2298 2299 2300 2301 2302 2303 2304 | display = fontPtr->display; nameList = ListFonts(display, faceName, &numNames); if (numNames == 0) { return NULL; } nameListOrig = nameList; | | | 2516 2517 2518 2519 2520 2521 2522 2523 2524 2525 2526 2527 2528 2529 2530 | display = fontPtr->display; nameList = ListFonts(display, faceName, &numNames); if (numNames == 0) { return NULL; } nameListOrig = nameList; srcLen = TkUniCharToUtf(ch, src); want.fa = fontPtr->font.fa; want.xa = fontPtr->xa; want.fa.family = Tk_GetUid(faceName); want.fa.size = (double)-fontPtr->pixelSize; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2377 2378 2379 2380 2381 2382 2383 | } Tcl_DStringAppend(&dsEncodings, (char *) &encoding, sizeof(encoding)); numEncodings++; } Tcl_UtfToExternal(NULL, encoding, src, srcLen, | | | 2595 2596 2597 2598 2599 2600 2601 2602 2603 2604 2605 2606 2607 2608 2609 | } Tcl_DStringAppend(&dsEncodings, (char *) &encoding, sizeof(encoding)); numEncodings++; } Tcl_UtfToExternal(NULL, encoding, src, srcLen, TCL_ENCODING_STOPONERROR, NULL, dst, sizeof(dst), &srcRead, &dstWrote, NULL); if (dstWrote == 0) { goto crossout; } /* * D. Rank each name and pick the best match. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to unix/tkUnixKey.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
192 193 194 195 196 197 198 | Tcl_DStringInit(&buf); Tcl_DStringSetLength(&buf, TCL_DSTRING_STATIC_SIZE-1); len = (Tcl_Size)XLookupString(&eventPtr->xkey, Tcl_DStringValue(&buf), TCL_DSTRING_STATIC_SIZE, &kePtr->keysym, 0); Tcl_DStringValue(&buf)[len] = '\0'; if (len == 1) { | | | 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 | Tcl_DStringInit(&buf); Tcl_DStringSetLength(&buf, TCL_DSTRING_STATIC_SIZE-1); len = (Tcl_Size)XLookupString(&eventPtr->xkey, Tcl_DStringValue(&buf), TCL_DSTRING_STATIC_SIZE, &kePtr->keysym, 0); Tcl_DStringValue(&buf)[len] = '\0'; if (len == 1) { len = TkUniCharToUtf((unsigned char) Tcl_DStringValue(&buf)[0], Tcl_DStringValue(dsPtr)); Tcl_DStringSetLength(dsPtr, len); } else { /* * len > 1 should only happen if someone has called XRebindKeysym. * Assume UTF-8. */ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to unix/tkUnixMenu.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
349 350 351 352 353 354 355 | INT2PTR((80 * mePtr->height) / 100); } else { mePtr->platformEntryData = (TkMenuPlatformEntryData) INT2PTR(mePtr->height); } } } else { | | | | 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 | INT2PTR((80 * mePtr->height) / 100); } else { mePtr->platformEntryData = (TkMenuPlatformEntryData) INT2PTR(mePtr->height); } } } else { Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, menuPtr->tkwin, menuPtr->borderWidthPtr, &borderWidth); *heightPtr = 0; *widthPtr = borderWidth; } } else { Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, menuPtr->tkwin, menuPtr->borderWidthPtr, &borderWidth); *heightPtr = 0; *widthPtr = borderWidth; } } /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
497 498 499 500 501 502 503 | * Draw accelerator or cascade arrow. */ if (menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR) { return; } | | | 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 | * Draw accelerator or cascade arrow. */ if (menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR) { return; } Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, menuPtr->tkwin, menuPtr->borderWidthPtr, &borderWidth); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, menuPtr->tkwin, menuPtr->activeBorderWidthPtr, &activeBorderWidth); if ((mePtr->type == CASCADE_ENTRY) && drawArrow) { arrowWidth *= scalingLevel; arrowHeight *= scalingLevel; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
856 857 858 859 860 861 862 | const Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,/* The precalculated font metrics */ int x, int y, TCL_UNUSED(int), int height) { if (mePtr->labelPtr != NULL) { int len; | | | | | 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 | const Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,/* The precalculated font metrics */ int x, int y, TCL_UNUSED(int), int height) { if (mePtr->labelPtr != NULL) { int len; len = TkGetCharLength(mePtr->labelPtr); if (mePtr->underline < len && mePtr->underline >= -len) { int activeBorderWidth, leftEdge, ch; const char *label, *start, *end; label = Tcl_GetString(mePtr->labelPtr); start = TkUtfAtIndex(label, (mePtr->underline < 0) ? mePtr->underline + len : mePtr->underline); end = start + TkUtfToUniChar(start, &ch); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, menuPtr->tkwin, menuPtr->activeBorderWidthPtr, &activeBorderWidth); leftEdge = x + mePtr->indicatorSpace + activeBorderWidth; if (menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR) { leftEdge += 5; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 | int borderWidth; maxWindowWidth = Tk_Width(menuPtr->tkwin); if (maxWindowWidth == 1) { maxWindowWidth = 0x7FFFFFF; } currentRowHeight = 0; | | | 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 | int borderWidth; maxWindowWidth = Tk_Width(menuPtr->tkwin); if (maxWindowWidth == 1) { maxWindowWidth = 0x7FFFFFF; } currentRowHeight = 0; Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, menuPtr->tkwin, menuPtr->borderWidthPtr, &borderWidth); x = y = borderWidth; lastRowBreak = 0; /* * On the Mac especially, getting font metrics can be quite slow, so * we want to do it intelligently. We are going to precalculate them |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 1697 | TkMenuEntry *mePtr; int borderWidth, activeBorderWidth; if (menuPtr->tkwin == NULL) { return; } | | | 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 1697 1698 1699 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 1705 | TkMenuEntry *mePtr; int borderWidth, activeBorderWidth; if (menuPtr->tkwin == NULL) { return; } Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, menuPtr->tkwin, menuPtr->borderWidthPtr, &borderWidth); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, menuPtr->tkwin, menuPtr->activeBorderWidthPtr, &activeBorderWidth); x = y = borderWidth; indicatorSpace = labelWidth = accelWidth = 0; windowHeight = windowWidth = 0; |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to unix/tkUnixMenubu.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
70 71 72 73 74 75 76 | int textXOffset, textYOffset; int imageWidth, imageHeight; int imageXOffset, imageYOffset; int width = 0, height = 0; /* Image information that will be used to * restrict disabled pixmap as well */ int haveImage = 0, haveText = 0; | < < | 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 | int textXOffset, textYOffset; int imageWidth, imageHeight; int imageXOffset, imageYOffset; int width = 0, height = 0; /* Image information that will be used to * restrict disabled pixmap as well */ int haveImage = 0, haveText = 0; mbPtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_PENDING; if ((mbPtr->tkwin == NULL) || !Tk_IsMapped(tkwin)) { return; } if ((mbPtr->state == STATE_DISABLED) && (mbPtr->disabledFg != NULL)) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
121 122 123 124 125 126 127 | imageXOffset = 0; imageYOffset = 0; textXOffset = 0; textYOffset = 0; fullWidth = 0; fullHeight = 0; | < < | | | | | | | 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 | imageXOffset = 0; imageYOffset = 0; textXOffset = 0; textYOffset = 0; fullWidth = 0; fullHeight = 0; if (mbPtr->compound != COMPOUND_NONE && haveImage && haveText) { switch ((enum compound) mbPtr->compound) { case COMPOUND_TOP: case COMPOUND_BOTTOM: /* * Image is above or below text. */ if (mbPtr->compound == COMPOUND_TOP) { textYOffset = height + mbPtr->padY; } else { imageYOffset = mbPtr->textHeight + mbPtr->padY; } fullHeight = height + mbPtr->textHeight + mbPtr->padY; fullWidth = (width > mbPtr->textWidth ? width : mbPtr->textWidth); textXOffset = (fullWidth - mbPtr->textWidth)/2; imageXOffset = (fullWidth - width)/2; break; case COMPOUND_LEFT: case COMPOUND_RIGHT: /* * Image is left or right of text. */ if (mbPtr->compound == COMPOUND_LEFT) { textXOffset = width + mbPtr->padX; } else { imageXOffset = mbPtr->textWidth + mbPtr->padX; } fullWidth = mbPtr->textWidth + mbPtr->padX + width; fullHeight = (height > mbPtr->textHeight ? height : mbPtr->textHeight); textYOffset = (fullHeight - mbPtr->textHeight)/2; imageYOffset = (fullHeight - height)/2; break; case COMPOUND_CENTER: /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
211 212 213 214 215 216 217 | XSetClipOrigin(mbPtr->display, gc, x, y); XCopyPlane(mbPtr->display, mbPtr->bitmap, pixmap, gc, 0, 0, (unsigned) width, (unsigned) height, x, y, 1); XSetClipOrigin(mbPtr->display, gc, 0, 0); } } else { | | | 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 | XSetClipOrigin(mbPtr->display, gc, x, y); XCopyPlane(mbPtr->display, mbPtr->bitmap, pixmap, gc, 0, 0, (unsigned) width, (unsigned) height, x, y, 1); XSetClipOrigin(mbPtr->display, gc, 0, 0); } } else { TkComputeAnchor(mbPtr->anchor, tkwin, mbPtr->padX, mbPtr->padY, mbPtr->textWidth + mbPtr->indicatorWidth, mbPtr->textHeight, &x, &y); Tk_DrawTextLayout(mbPtr->display, pixmap, gc, mbPtr->textLayout, x + textXOffset, y + textYOffset, 0, -1); Tk_UnderlineTextLayout(mbPtr->display, pixmap, gc, mbPtr->textLayout, x + textXOffset, y + textYOffset, mbPtr->underline); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
272 273 274 275 276 277 278 | /* * Draw the border and traversal highlight last. This way, if the menu * button's contents overflow onto the border they'll be covered up by the * border. */ | < < | | | | | | | 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 | /* * Draw the border and traversal highlight last. This way, if the menu * button's contents overflow onto the border they'll be covered up by the * border. */ if (mbPtr->relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT) { Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, border, mbPtr->highlightWidth, mbPtr->highlightWidth, Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2*mbPtr->highlightWidth, Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2*mbPtr->highlightWidth, mbPtr->borderWidth, mbPtr->relief); } if (mbPtr->highlightWidth > 0) { if (mbPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS) { gc = Tk_GCForColor(mbPtr->highlightColorPtr, pixmap); } else { gc = Tk_GCForColor(mbPtr->highlightBgColorPtr, pixmap); } Tk_DrawFocusHighlight(tkwin, gc, mbPtr->highlightWidth, pixmap); } /* * Copy the information from the off-screen pixmap onto the screen, then * delete the pixmap. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
349 350 351 352 353 354 355 | TkpComputeMenuButtonGeometry( TkMenuButton *mbPtr) /* Widget record for menu button. */ { int width, height, mm, pixels; int avgWidth, txtWidth, txtHeight; int haveImage = 0, haveText = 0; Tk_FontMetrics fm; | < < < < < < < | | | 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 | TkpComputeMenuButtonGeometry( TkMenuButton *mbPtr) /* Widget record for menu button. */ { int width, height, mm, pixels; int avgWidth, txtWidth, txtHeight; int haveImage = 0, haveText = 0; Tk_FontMetrics fm; mbPtr->inset = mbPtr->highlightWidth + mbPtr->borderWidth; width = 0; height = 0; txtWidth = 0; txtHeight = 0; avgWidth = 0; if (mbPtr->image != NULL) { Tk_SizeOfImage(mbPtr->image, &width, &height); haveImage = 1; } else if (mbPtr->bitmap != None) { Tk_SizeOfBitmap(mbPtr->display, mbPtr->bitmap, &width, &height); haveImage = 1; } if (haveImage == 0 || mbPtr->compound != COMPOUND_NONE) { Tk_FreeTextLayout(mbPtr->textLayout); mbPtr->textLayout = Tk_ComputeTextLayout(mbPtr->tkfont, mbPtr->textObj ? Tcl_GetString(mbPtr->textObj) : "", TCL_INDEX_NONE, mbPtr->wrapLength, mbPtr->justify, 0, &mbPtr->textWidth, &mbPtr->textHeight); txtWidth = mbPtr->textWidth; txtHeight = mbPtr->textHeight; avgWidth = Tk_TextWidth(mbPtr->tkfont, "0", 1); Tk_GetFontMetrics(mbPtr->tkfont, &fm); haveText = (txtWidth != 0 && txtHeight != 0); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
401 402 403 404 405 406 407 | switch ((enum compound) mbPtr->compound) { case COMPOUND_TOP: case COMPOUND_BOTTOM: /* * Image is above or below text. */ | | | | | | 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 | switch ((enum compound) mbPtr->compound) { case COMPOUND_TOP: case COMPOUND_BOTTOM: /* * Image is above or below text. */ height += txtHeight + mbPtr->padY; width = (width > txtWidth ? width : txtWidth); break; case COMPOUND_LEFT: case COMPOUND_RIGHT: /* * Image is left or right of text. */ width += txtWidth + mbPtr->padX; height = (height > txtHeight ? height : txtHeight); break; case COMPOUND_CENTER: /* * Image and text are superimposed. */ width = (width > txtWidth ? width : txtWidth); height = (height > txtHeight ? height : txtHeight); break; case COMPOUND_NONE: break; } if (mbPtr->width > 0) { width = mbPtr->width; } if (mbPtr->height > 0) { height = mbPtr->height; } width += 2*mbPtr->padX; height += 2*mbPtr->padY; } else { if (haveImage) { if (mbPtr->width > 0) { width = mbPtr->width; } if (mbPtr->height > 0) { height = mbPtr->height; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
453 454 455 456 457 458 459 | if (mbPtr->height > 0) { height = mbPtr->height * fm.linespace; } } } if (! haveImage) { | | | | | | | 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 | if (mbPtr->height > 0) { height = mbPtr->height * fm.linespace; } } } if (! haveImage) { width += 2*mbPtr->padX; height += 2*mbPtr->padY; } if (mbPtr->indicatorOn) { mm = WidthMMOfScreen(Tk_Screen(mbPtr->tkwin)); pixels = WidthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(mbPtr->tkwin)); mbPtr->indicatorHeight= (INDICATOR_HEIGHT * pixels)/(10*mm); mbPtr->indicatorWidth = (INDICATOR_WIDTH * pixels)/(10*mm) + 2*mbPtr->indicatorHeight; width += mbPtr->indicatorWidth; } else { mbPtr->indicatorHeight = 0; mbPtr->indicatorWidth = 0; } Tk_GeometryRequest(mbPtr->tkwin, (int) (width + 2*mbPtr->inset), (int) (height + 2*mbPtr->inset)); Tk_SetInternalBorder(mbPtr->tkwin, mbPtr->inset); } /* * Local Variables: * mode: c * c-basic-offset: 4 * fill-column: 78 * End: */ |
Changes to unix/tkUnixPort.h.
︙ | ︙ | |||
141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 | #define TkpButtonSetDefaults() {} #define TkpDestroyButton(butPtr) {} #define TkSelUpdateClipboard(a,b) {} #ifndef __CYGWIN__ #define TkSetPixmapColormap(p,c) {} #endif /* * This macro stores a representation of the window handle in a string. * This should perhaps use the real size of an XID. */ #ifndef __CYGWIN__ #define TkpPrintWindowId(buf,w) \ | > > > > > > > > > | 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 | #define TkpButtonSetDefaults() {} #define TkpDestroyButton(butPtr) {} #define TkSelUpdateClipboard(a,b) {} #ifndef __CYGWIN__ #define TkSetPixmapColormap(p,c) {} #endif /* * These calls implement native bitmaps which are not supported under * UNIX. The macros eliminate the calls. */ #define TkpDefineNativeBitmaps() #define TkpCreateNativeBitmap(display, source) None #define TkpGetNativeAppBitmap(display, name, w, h) None /* * This macro stores a representation of the window handle in a string. * This should perhaps use the real size of an XID. */ #ifndef __CYGWIN__ #define TkpPrintWindowId(buf,w) \ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to unix/tkUnixRFont.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
86 87 88 89 90 91 92 | * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static Tcl_Size utf8ToUcs4(const char *source, FcChar32 *c, Tcl_Size numBytes) { if (numBytes >= 6) { | | | 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 | * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static Tcl_Size utf8ToUcs4(const char *source, FcChar32 *c, Tcl_Size numBytes) { if (numBytes >= 6) { return TkUtfToUniChar(source, (int *)c); } return FcUtf8ToUcs4((const FcChar8 *)source, c, numBytes); } void TkpFontPkgInit( TCL_UNUSED(TkMainInfo *)) /* The application being created. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
750 751 752 753 754 755 756 | -1, -1, -1, InitFontErrorProc, &errorFlag); curX = 0; curByte = 0; sawNonSpace = 0; while (numBytes > 0) { int unichar; | | | 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 | -1, -1, -1, InitFontErrorProc, &errorFlag); curX = 0; curByte = 0; sawNonSpace = 0; while (numBytes > 0) { int unichar; clen = TkUtfToUniChar(source, &unichar); c = (FcChar32) unichar; if (clen <= 0) { /* * This can't happen (but see #1185640) */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
826 827 828 829 830 831 832 | DEBUG(("MeasureChars: %s length %d bytes %d\n", string, curX, curByte)); #endif /* DEBUG_FONTSEL */ *lengthPtr = curX; return curByte; } int | | | 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 | DEBUG(("MeasureChars: %s length %d bytes %d\n", string, curX, curByte)); #endif /* DEBUG_FONTSEL */ *lengthPtr = curX; return curByte; } int Tk_MeasureCharsInContext( Tk_Font tkfont, const char *source, TCL_UNUSED(Tcl_Size), Tcl_Size rangeStart, Tcl_Size rangeLength, int maxLength, int flags, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 | } } } /* *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- * | | | | | 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 1360 1361 1362 1363 1364 1365 1366 1367 1368 1369 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 1375 1376 1377 | } } } /* *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- * * Tk_DrawCharsInContext -- * * Draw a string of characters on the screen like Tk_DrawChars(), but * with access to all the characters on the line for context. On X11 this * context isn't consulted, so we just call Tk_DrawChars(). * * Note: TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT being currently defined only on macOS, this * function is unused. * * Results: * None. * * Side effects: * Information gets drawn on the screen. * *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ void Tk_DrawCharsInContext( Display *display, /* Display on which to draw. */ Drawable drawable, /* Window or pixmap in which to draw. */ GC gc, /* Graphics context for drawing characters. */ Tk_Font tkfont, /* Font in which characters will be drawn; * must be the same as font used in GC. */ const char *source, /* UTF-8 string to be displayed. Need not be * '\0' terminated. All Tk meta-characters |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to unix/tkUnixScale.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 | * to reflect the part of the window that was * redrawn. */ { Tk_Window tkwin = scalePtr->tkwin; int x, y, width, height, shadowWidth; double tickValue, tickInterval = scalePtr->tickInterval; Tk_3DBorder sliderBorder; | < < < < | | | 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 | * to reflect the part of the window that was * redrawn. */ { Tk_Window tkwin = scalePtr->tkwin; int x, y, width, height, shadowWidth; double tickValue, tickInterval = scalePtr->tickInterval; Tk_3DBorder sliderBorder; /* * Display the information from left to right across the window. */ if (!(scalePtr->flags & REDRAW_OTHER)) { drawnAreaPtr->x = scalePtr->vertTickRightX; drawnAreaPtr->y = scalePtr->inset; drawnAreaPtr->width = scalePtr->vertTroughX + scalePtr->width + 2 * scalePtr->borderWidth - scalePtr->vertTickRightX; drawnAreaPtr->height -= 2 * scalePtr->inset; } Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, drawable, scalePtr->bgBorder, drawnAreaPtr->x, drawnAreaPtr->y, drawnAreaPtr->width, drawnAreaPtr->height, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT); if (scalePtr->flags & REDRAW_OTHER) { /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
187 188 189 190 191 192 193 | /* * Display the trough and the slider. */ Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, drawable, scalePtr->bgBorder, scalePtr->vertTroughX, scalePtr->inset, | | | | | | | | | | | | | > | 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 | /* * Display the trough and the slider. */ Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, drawable, scalePtr->bgBorder, scalePtr->vertTroughX, scalePtr->inset, scalePtr->width + 2 * scalePtr->borderWidth, Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2 * scalePtr->inset, scalePtr->borderWidth, TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN); XFillRectangle(scalePtr->display, drawable, scalePtr->troughGC, scalePtr->vertTroughX + scalePtr->borderWidth, scalePtr->inset + scalePtr->borderWidth, (unsigned) scalePtr->width, (unsigned) (Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2 * scalePtr->inset - 2 * scalePtr->borderWidth)); if (scalePtr->state == STATE_ACTIVE) { sliderBorder = scalePtr->activeBorder; } else { sliderBorder = scalePtr->bgBorder; } width = scalePtr->width; height = scalePtr->sliderLength / 2; x = scalePtr->vertTroughX + scalePtr->borderWidth; y = TkScaleValueToPixel(scalePtr, scalePtr->value) - height; shadowWidth = scalePtr->borderWidth / 2; if (shadowWidth == 0) { shadowWidth = 1; } Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, drawable, sliderBorder, x, y, width, 2*height, shadowWidth, scalePtr->sliderRelief); x += shadowWidth; y += shadowWidth; width -= 2 * shadowWidth; height -= shadowWidth; Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, drawable, sliderBorder, x, y, width, height, shadowWidth, scalePtr->sliderRelief); Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, drawable, sliderBorder, x, y+height, width, height, shadowWidth, scalePtr->sliderRelief); /* * Draw the label to the right of the scale. */ if ((scalePtr->flags & REDRAW_OTHER) && (scalePtr->labelObj != NULL)) { Tk_FontMetrics fm; Tcl_Size labelLength; const char *label = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(scalePtr->labelObj, &labelLength); Tk_GetFontMetrics(scalePtr->tkfont, &fm); Tk_DrawChars(scalePtr->display, drawable, scalePtr->textGC, scalePtr->tkfont, label, labelLength, scalePtr->vertLabelX, scalePtr->inset + (3 * fm.ascent) / 2); } } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * |
︙ | ︙ | |||
330 331 332 333 334 335 336 | * to reflect the part of the window that was * redrawn. */ { Tk_Window tkwin = scalePtr->tkwin; int x, y, width, height, shadowWidth; double tickInterval = scalePtr->tickInterval; Tk_3DBorder sliderBorder; | < < < < | | | 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 | * to reflect the part of the window that was * redrawn. */ { Tk_Window tkwin = scalePtr->tkwin; int x, y, width, height, shadowWidth; double tickInterval = scalePtr->tickInterval; Tk_3DBorder sliderBorder; /* * Display the information from bottom to top across the window. */ if (!(scalePtr->flags & REDRAW_OTHER)) { drawnAreaPtr->x = scalePtr->inset; drawnAreaPtr->y = scalePtr->horizValueY; drawnAreaPtr->width -= 2*scalePtr->inset; drawnAreaPtr->height = scalePtr->horizTroughY + scalePtr->width + 2 * scalePtr->borderWidth - scalePtr->horizValueY; } Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, drawable, scalePtr->bgBorder, drawnAreaPtr->x, drawnAreaPtr->y, drawnAreaPtr->width, drawnAreaPtr->height, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT); if (scalePtr->flags & REDRAW_OTHER) { /* * Display the tick marks. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
416 417 418 419 420 421 422 | * Display the trough and the slider. */ y = scalePtr->horizTroughY; Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, drawable, scalePtr->bgBorder, scalePtr->inset, y, Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2 * scalePtr->inset, | | | | | | | | | | | | 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 | * Display the trough and the slider. */ y = scalePtr->horizTroughY; Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, drawable, scalePtr->bgBorder, scalePtr->inset, y, Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2 * scalePtr->inset, scalePtr->width + 2 * scalePtr->borderWidth, scalePtr->borderWidth, TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN); XFillRectangle(scalePtr->display, drawable, scalePtr->troughGC, scalePtr->inset + scalePtr->borderWidth, y + scalePtr->borderWidth, (unsigned) (Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2 * scalePtr->inset - 2 * scalePtr->borderWidth), (unsigned) scalePtr->width); if (scalePtr->state == STATE_ACTIVE) { sliderBorder = scalePtr->activeBorder; } else { sliderBorder = scalePtr->bgBorder; } width = scalePtr->sliderLength / 2; height = scalePtr->width; x = TkScaleValueToPixel(scalePtr, scalePtr->value) - width; y += scalePtr->borderWidth; shadowWidth = scalePtr->borderWidth / 2; if (shadowWidth == 0) { shadowWidth = 1; } Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, drawable, sliderBorder, x, y, 2*width, height, shadowWidth, scalePtr->sliderRelief); x += shadowWidth; y += shadowWidth; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
560 561 562 563 564 565 566 | Tk_Window tkwin = scalePtr->tkwin; Tcl_Interp *interp = scalePtr->interp; Pixmap pixmap; int result; char string[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE]; XRectangle drawnArea; Tcl_DString buf; | < | | 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 | Tk_Window tkwin = scalePtr->tkwin; Tcl_Interp *interp = scalePtr->interp; Pixmap pixmap; int result; char string[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE]; XRectangle drawnArea; Tcl_DString buf; scalePtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_PENDING; if ((scalePtr->tkwin == NULL) || !Tk_IsMapped(scalePtr->tkwin)) { goto done; } /* * Invoke the scale's command if needed. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
631 632 633 634 635 636 637 | } /* * Now handle the part of redisplay that is the same for horizontal and * vertical scales: border and traversal highlight. */ | < < | | | | | | | 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 | } /* * Now handle the part of redisplay that is the same for horizontal and * vertical scales: border and traversal highlight. */ if (scalePtr->flags & REDRAW_OTHER) { if (scalePtr->relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT) { Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, scalePtr->bgBorder, scalePtr->highlightWidth, scalePtr->highlightWidth, Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2 * scalePtr->highlightWidth, Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2 * scalePtr->highlightWidth, scalePtr->borderWidth, scalePtr->relief); } if (scalePtr->highlightWidth > 0) { GC gc; if (scalePtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS) { gc = Tk_GCForColor(scalePtr->highlightColorPtr, pixmap); } else { gc = Tk_GCForColor( Tk_3DBorderColor(scalePtr->highlightBorder), pixmap); } Tk_DrawFocusHighlight(tkwin, gc, scalePtr->highlightWidth, pixmap); } } #ifndef TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING /* * Copy the information from the off-screen pixmap onto the screen, then * delete the pixmap. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
693 694 695 696 697 698 699 | */ int TkpScaleElement( TkScale *scalePtr, /* Widget record for scale. */ int x, int y) /* Coordinates within scalePtr's window. */ { | | < < < | | | | | | | | | 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 | */ int TkpScaleElement( TkScale *scalePtr, /* Widget record for scale. */ int x, int y) /* Coordinates within scalePtr's window. */ { int sliderFirst; if (scalePtr->orient == ORIENT_VERTICAL) { if ((x < scalePtr->vertTroughX) || (x >= (scalePtr->vertTroughX + 2 * scalePtr->borderWidth + scalePtr->width))) { return OTHER; } if ((y < scalePtr->inset) || (y >= (Tk_Height(scalePtr->tkwin) - scalePtr->inset))) { return OTHER; } sliderFirst = TkScaleValueToPixel(scalePtr, scalePtr->value) - scalePtr->sliderLength/2; if (y < sliderFirst) { return TROUGH1; } if (y < sliderFirst + scalePtr->sliderLength) { return SLIDER; } return TROUGH2; } if ((y < scalePtr->horizTroughY) || (y >= (scalePtr->horizTroughY + 2 * scalePtr->borderWidth + scalePtr->width))) { return OTHER; } if ((x < scalePtr->inset) || (x >= (Tk_Width(scalePtr->tkwin) - scalePtr->inset))) { return OTHER; } sliderFirst = TkScaleValueToPixel(scalePtr, scalePtr->value) - scalePtr->sliderLength/2; if (x < sliderFirst) { return TROUGH1; } if (x < sliderFirst + scalePtr->sliderLength) { return SLIDER; } return TROUGH2; } /* * Local Variables: * mode: c * c-basic-offset: 4 * fill-column: 78 * End: */ |
Changes to unix/tkUnixScrlbr.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
98 99 100 101 102 103 104 | void *clientData) /* Information about window. */ { TkScrollbar *scrollPtr = (TkScrollbar *)clientData; Tk_Window tkwin = scrollPtr->tkwin; XPoint points[7]; Tk_3DBorder border; int relief, width, elementBorderWidth; | < | | < | | < | < | | | | | | | | | 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 | void *clientData) /* Information about window. */ { TkScrollbar *scrollPtr = (TkScrollbar *)clientData; Tk_Window tkwin = scrollPtr->tkwin; XPoint points[7]; Tk_3DBorder border; int relief, width, elementBorderWidth; Pixmap pixmap; if ((scrollPtr->tkwin == NULL) || !Tk_IsMapped(tkwin)) { goto done; } if (scrollPtr->vertical) { width = Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2*scrollPtr->inset; } else { width = Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2*scrollPtr->inset; } elementBorderWidth = scrollPtr->elementBorderWidth; if (elementBorderWidth < 0) { elementBorderWidth = scrollPtr->borderWidth; } /* * In order to avoid screen flashes, this procedure redraws the scrollbar * in a pixmap, then copies the pixmap to the screen in a single * operation. This means that there's no point in time where the on-sreen * image has been cleared. */ pixmap = Tk_GetPixmap(scrollPtr->display, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), Tk_Depth(tkwin)); if (scrollPtr->highlightWidth > 0) { GC gc; if (scrollPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS) { gc = Tk_GCForColor(scrollPtr->highlightColorPtr, pixmap); } else { gc = Tk_GCForColor(scrollPtr->highlightBgColorPtr, pixmap); } Tk_DrawFocusHighlight(tkwin, gc, scrollPtr->highlightWidth, pixmap); } Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, scrollPtr->bgBorder, scrollPtr->highlightWidth, scrollPtr->highlightWidth, Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2*scrollPtr->highlightWidth, Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2*scrollPtr->highlightWidth, scrollPtr->borderWidth, scrollPtr->relief); XFillRectangle(scrollPtr->display, pixmap, ((UnixScrollbar*)scrollPtr)->troughGC, scrollPtr->inset, scrollPtr->inset, (unsigned) (Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2*scrollPtr->inset), (unsigned) (Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2*scrollPtr->inset)); /* * Draw the top or left arrow. The coordinates of the polygon points * probably seem odd, but they were carefully chosen with respect to X's * rules for filling polygons. These point choices cause the arrows to * just fill the narrow dimension of the scrollbar and be properly * centered. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
282 283 284 285 286 287 288 | extern void TkpComputeScrollbarGeometry( TkScrollbar *scrollPtr) /* Scrollbar whose geometry may have * changed. */ { int width, fieldLength; | < < < | | | | 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 | extern void TkpComputeScrollbarGeometry( TkScrollbar *scrollPtr) /* Scrollbar whose geometry may have * changed. */ { int width, fieldLength; scrollPtr->inset = scrollPtr->highlightWidth + scrollPtr->borderWidth; width = (scrollPtr->vertical) ? Tk_Width(scrollPtr->tkwin) : Tk_Height(scrollPtr->tkwin); /* * Next line assumes that the arrow area is a square. */ scrollPtr->arrowLength = width - 2*scrollPtr->inset + 1; fieldLength = (scrollPtr->vertical ? Tk_Height(scrollPtr->tkwin) : Tk_Width(scrollPtr->tkwin)) - 2*(scrollPtr->arrowLength + scrollPtr->inset); if (fieldLength < 0) { fieldLength = 0; } scrollPtr->sliderFirst = fieldLength*scrollPtr->firstFraction; scrollPtr->sliderLast = fieldLength*scrollPtr->lastFraction; /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
331 332 333 334 335 336 337 | /* * Register the desired geometry for the window (leave enough space for * the two arrows plus a minimum-size slider, plus border around the whole * window, if any). Then arrange for the window to be redisplayed. */ | < | | | | | 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 | /* * Register the desired geometry for the window (leave enough space for * the two arrows plus a minimum-size slider, plus border around the whole * window, if any). Then arrange for the window to be redisplayed. */ if (scrollPtr->vertical) { Tk_GeometryRequest(scrollPtr->tkwin, scrollPtr->width + 2*scrollPtr->inset, 2*(scrollPtr->arrowLength + scrollPtr->borderWidth + scrollPtr->inset)); } else { Tk_GeometryRequest(scrollPtr->tkwin, 2*(scrollPtr->arrowLength + scrollPtr->borderWidth + scrollPtr->inset), scrollPtr->width + 2*scrollPtr->inset); } Tk_SetInternalBorder(scrollPtr->tkwin, scrollPtr->inset); } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to win/Makefile.in.
︙ | ︙ | |||
257 258 259 260 261 262 263 | ZIP_INSTALL_OBJS = @ZIP_INSTALL_OBJS@ CC_SWITCHES = ${CFLAGS} ${CFLAGS_WARNING} ${SHLIB_CFLAGS} \ -I"${GENERIC_DIR_NATIVE}" -I"${WIN_DIR_NATIVE}" \ -I"${XLIB_DIR_NATIVE}" -I"${BITMAP_DIR_NATIVE}" \ -I"${TCL_GENERIC_NATIVE}" -I"${TCL_PLATFORM_NATIVE}" \ | | > | 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 | ZIP_INSTALL_OBJS = @ZIP_INSTALL_OBJS@ CC_SWITCHES = ${CFLAGS} ${CFLAGS_WARNING} ${SHLIB_CFLAGS} \ -I"${GENERIC_DIR_NATIVE}" -I"${WIN_DIR_NATIVE}" \ -I"${XLIB_DIR_NATIVE}" -I"${BITMAP_DIR_NATIVE}" \ -I"${TCL_GENERIC_NATIVE}" -I"${TCL_PLATFORM_NATIVE}" \ ${AC_FLAGS} $(NO_DEPRECATED_FLAGS) -DTCL_UTF_MAX=3 -DUSE_TCL_STUBS CC_OBJNAME = @CC_OBJNAME@ CC_EXENAME = @CC_EXENAME@ # Tk used to let the configure script choose which program to use # for installing, but there are just too many different versions of # "install" around; better to use the install-sh script that comes # with the distribution, which is slower but guaranteed to work. INSTALL = cp INSTALL_PROGRAM = ${INSTALL} INSTALL_DATA = ${INSTALL} WISH_OBJS = \ winMain.$(OBJEXT) TKTEST_OBJS = \ tkSquare.$(OBJEXT) \ tkTest.$(OBJEXT) \ tkOldTest.$(OBJEXT) \ tkWinTest.$(OBJEXT) XLIB_OBJS = \ xcolors.$(OBJEXT) \ xdraw.$(OBJEXT) \ xgc.$(OBJEXT) \ ximage.$(OBJEXT) \ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
669 670 671 672 673 674 675 | $(WISH): $(WISH_OBJS) @LIBRARIES@ $(TK_STUB_LIB_FILE) wish.$(RES) ${TK_ZIP_FILE} $(CC) $(CFLAGS) $(WISH_OBJS) $(TK_LIB_FILE) \ $(TK_STUB_LIB_FILE) $(TCL_LIB_FILE) $(LIBS) \ wish.$(RES) $(CC_EXENAME) $(LDFLAGS_WINDOW) @VC_MANIFEST_EMBED_EXE@ @if test "${ZIPFS_BUILD}" = "2" ; then \ cat ${TK_ZIP_FILE} >> ${WISH}; \ | < < | 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 | $(WISH): $(WISH_OBJS) @LIBRARIES@ $(TK_STUB_LIB_FILE) wish.$(RES) ${TK_ZIP_FILE} $(CC) $(CFLAGS) $(WISH_OBJS) $(TK_LIB_FILE) \ $(TK_STUB_LIB_FILE) $(TCL_LIB_FILE) $(LIBS) \ wish.$(RES) $(CC_EXENAME) $(LDFLAGS_WINDOW) @VC_MANIFEST_EMBED_EXE@ @if test "${ZIPFS_BUILD}" = "2" ; then \ cat ${TK_ZIP_FILE} >> ${WISH}; \ fi tktest: $(TKTEST) $(TKTEST): testMain.$(OBJEXT) $(TEST_DLL_FILE) @LIBRARIES@ $(TK_STUB_LIB_FILE) wish.$(RES) $(CC) $(CFLAGS) testMain.$(OBJEXT) $(TEST_LIB_FILE) $(TK_LIB_FILE) \ $(TK_STUB_LIB_FILE) $(TCL_LIB_FILE) $(LIBS) \ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
716 717 718 719 720 721 722 | $(COPY) -a $(TOP_DIR)/library/* ${TK_VFS_PATH}; \ ) @$(RMDIR) $(TK_VFS_PATH)/demos -@if test "${ZIPFS_BUILD}" = "2" ; then \ cp ${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclsh${TCLVER}s.exe ${TK_VFS_ROOT}/../${TK_ZIP_FILE} || cp ${TCL_BIN_DIR}/../bin/tclsh${TCLVER}s.exe ${TK_VFS_ROOT}/../${TK_ZIP_FILE}; \ (zip=`(realpath '${NATIVE_ZIP}' || readlink -m '${NATIVE_ZIP}') 2>/dev/null || \ (echo '${NATIVE_ZIP}' | sed "s?^\./?$$(pwd)/?")`; \ | | | 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 | $(COPY) -a $(TOP_DIR)/library/* ${TK_VFS_PATH}; \ ) @$(RMDIR) $(TK_VFS_PATH)/demos -@if test "${ZIPFS_BUILD}" = "2" ; then \ cp ${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclsh${TCLVER}s.exe ${TK_VFS_ROOT}/../${TK_ZIP_FILE} || cp ${TCL_BIN_DIR}/../bin/tclsh${TCLVER}s.exe ${TK_VFS_ROOT}/../${TK_ZIP_FILE}; \ (zip=`(realpath '${NATIVE_ZIP}' || readlink -m '${NATIVE_ZIP}') 2>/dev/null || \ (echo '${NATIVE_ZIP}' | sed "s?^\./?$$(pwd)/?")`; \ cd ${TK_VFS_ROOT} && $$zip -A ../${TK_ZIP_FILE} && $$zip -J ../${TK_ZIP_FILE}) \ fi (zip=`(realpath '${NATIVE_ZIP}' || readlink -m '${NATIVE_ZIP}') 2>/dev/null || \ (echo '${NATIVE_ZIP}' | sed "s?^\./?$$(pwd)/?")`; \ cd ${TK_VFS_ROOT} && \ $$zip ${ZIP_PROG_OPTIONS} ../${TK_ZIP_FILE} ${ZIP_PROG_VFSSEARCH} >/dev/null && \ echo "${TK_ZIP_FILE} successful created with $$zip" && \ cd ..) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
740 741 742 743 744 745 746 | ${TK_DLL_FILE}: ${TK_OBJS} $(TK_RES) ${TK_ZIP_FILE} @$(RM) ${TK_DLL_FILE} @MAKE_DLL@ ${TK_OBJS} $(TK_RES) $(SHLIB_LD_LIBS) @VC_MANIFEST_EMBED_DLL@ @if test "${ZIPFS_BUILD}" = "1" ; then \ cat ${TK_ZIP_FILE} >> ${TK_DLL_FILE}; \ | < < > > > | 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 | ${TK_DLL_FILE}: ${TK_OBJS} $(TK_RES) ${TK_ZIP_FILE} @$(RM) ${TK_DLL_FILE} @MAKE_DLL@ ${TK_OBJS} $(TK_RES) $(SHLIB_LD_LIBS) @VC_MANIFEST_EMBED_DLL@ @if test "${ZIPFS_BUILD}" = "1" ; then \ cat ${TK_ZIP_FILE} >> ${TK_DLL_FILE}; \ fi ${TK_LIB_FILE}: ${TK_OBJS} @$(RM) ${TK_LIB_FILE} @MAKE_LIB@ ${TK_OBJS} @POST_MAKE_LIB@ # Special case object file targets winMain.$(OBJEXT): winMain.c $(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) -DUNICODE=1 -D_UNICODE=1 @DEPARG@ $(CC_OBJNAME) testMain.$(OBJEXT): winMain.c $(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) -DTK_TEST -DUNICODE=1 -D_UNICODE=1 @DEPARG@ $(CC_OBJNAME) tkTest.$(OBJEXT): tkTest.c $(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) @DEPARG@ $(CC_OBJNAME) tkOldTest.$(OBJEXT): tkOldTest.c $(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) @DEPARG@ $(CC_OBJNAME) tkWinTest.$(OBJEXT): tkWinTest.c $(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) @DEPARG@ $(CC_OBJNAME) tkSquare.$(OBJEXT): tkSquare.c $(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) @DEPARG@ $(CC_OBJNAME) tkStubLib.$(OBJEXT): tkStubLib.c |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to win/README.
|
| | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | Tk 8.7 for Windows Originally by Scott Stanton while at Sun Microsystems Labs This is the directory where you configure and compile the Windows version of Tk. This directory also contains source files for Tk that are specific to Microsoft Windows. The rest of this file contains information specific to the Windows version of Tk. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to win/configure.
1 2 | #! /bin/sh # Guess values for system-dependent variables and create Makefiles. | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 | #! /bin/sh # Guess values for system-dependent variables and create Makefiles. # Generated by GNU Autoconf 2.72 for tk 8.7. # # # Copyright (C) 1992-1996, 1998-2017, 2020-2023 Free Software Foundation, # Inc. # # # This configure script is free software; the Free Software Foundation |
︙ | ︙ | |||
597 598 599 600 601 602 603 | subdirs= MFLAGS= MAKEFLAGS= # Identity of this package. PACKAGE_NAME='tk' PACKAGE_TARNAME='tk' | | | | 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 | subdirs= MFLAGS= MAKEFLAGS= # Identity of this package. PACKAGE_NAME='tk' PACKAGE_TARNAME='tk' PACKAGE_VERSION='8.7' PACKAGE_STRING='tk 8.7' PACKAGE_BUGREPORT='' PACKAGE_URL='' ac_unique_file="../generic/tk.h" # Factoring default headers for most tests. ac_includes_default="\ #include <stddef.h> |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356 1357 | # # Report the --help message. # if test "$ac_init_help" = "long"; then # Omit some internal or obsolete options to make the list less imposing. # This message is too long to be a string in the A/UX 3.1 sh. cat <<_ACEOF | | | 1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 1360 1361 1362 1363 1364 1365 | # # Report the --help message. # if test "$ac_init_help" = "long"; then # Omit some internal or obsolete options to make the list less imposing. # This message is too long to be a string in the A/UX 3.1 sh. cat <<_ACEOF 'configure' configures tk 8.7 to adapt to many kinds of systems. Usage: $0 [OPTION]... [VAR=VALUE]... To assign environment variables (e.g., CC, CFLAGS...), specify them as VAR=VALUE. See below for descriptions of some of the useful variables. Defaults for the options are specified in brackets. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 | cat <<\_ACEOF _ACEOF fi if test -n "$ac_init_help"; then case $ac_init_help in | | | 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 1422 1423 1424 1425 1426 1427 | cat <<\_ACEOF _ACEOF fi if test -n "$ac_init_help"; then case $ac_init_help in short | recursive ) echo "Configuration of tk 8.7:";; esac cat <<\_ACEOF Optional Features: --disable-option-checking ignore unrecognized --enable/--with options --disable-FEATURE do not include FEATURE (same as --enable-FEATURE=no) --enable-FEATURE[=ARG] include FEATURE [ARG=yes] |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 | cd "$ac_pwd" || { ac_status=$?; break; } done fi test -n "$ac_init_help" && exit $ac_status if $ac_init_version; then cat <<\_ACEOF | | | 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 1525 | cd "$ac_pwd" || { ac_status=$?; break; } done fi test -n "$ac_init_help" && exit $ac_status if $ac_init_version; then cat <<\_ACEOF tk configure 8.7 generated by GNU Autoconf 2.72 Copyright (C) 2023 Free Software Foundation, Inc. This configure script is free software; the Free Software Foundation gives unlimited permission to copy, distribute and modify it. _ACEOF exit |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 | ac_configure_args_raw=` printf "%s\n" "$ac_configure_args_raw" | sed "$ac_safe_unquote"`;; esac cat >config.log <<_ACEOF This file contains any messages produced by compilers while running configure, to aid debugging if configure makes a mistake. | | | 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 | ac_configure_args_raw=` printf "%s\n" "$ac_configure_args_raw" | sed "$ac_safe_unquote"`;; esac cat >config.log <<_ACEOF This file contains any messages produced by compilers while running configure, to aid debugging if configure makes a mistake. It was created by tk $as_me 8.7, which was generated by GNU Autoconf 2.72. Invocation command line was $ $0$ac_configure_args_raw _ACEOF exec 5>>config.log { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2403 2404 2405 2406 2407 2408 2409 | # The following define is needed when building with Cygwin since newer # versions of autoconf incorrectly set SHELL to /bin/bash instead of # /bin/sh. The bash shell seems to suffer from some strange failures. SHELL=/bin/sh | | | | | | 2403 2404 2405 2406 2407 2408 2409 2410 2411 2412 2413 2414 2415 2416 2417 2418 2419 2420 | # The following define is needed when building with Cygwin since newer # versions of autoconf incorrectly set SHELL to /bin/bash instead of # /bin/sh. The bash shell seems to suffer from some strange failures. SHELL=/bin/sh TK_VERSION=8.7 TK_MAJOR_VERSION=8 TK_MINOR_VERSION=7 TK_PATCH_LEVEL="b1" VER=$TK_MAJOR_VERSION$TK_MINOR_VERSION #------------------------------------------------------------------------ # Handle the --prefix=... option #------------------------------------------------------------------------ if test "${prefix}" = "NONE"; then |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4087 4088 4089 4090 4091 4092 4093 | if test "${TCL_MAJOR_VERSION}" -lt 9 ; then | > > > > > | | | | 4087 4088 4089 4090 4091 4092 4093 4094 4095 4096 4097 4098 4099 4100 4101 4102 4103 4104 4105 4106 4107 4108 4109 | if test "${TCL_MAJOR_VERSION}" -lt 9 ; then if test "${TCL_MAJOR_VERSION}" != "${TK_MAJOR_VERSION}"; then as_fn_error $? "${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclConfig.sh is for Tcl ${TCL_VERSION}. Tk ${TK_VERSION}${TK_PATCH_LEVEL} needs Tcl 8.6+. Use --with-tcl= option to indicate location of tclConfig.sh file for Tcl 8.6 or better." "$LINENO" 5 fi if test "${TCL_MINOR_VERSION}" -lt 6; then as_fn_error $? "${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclConfig.sh is for Tcl ${TCL_VERSION}. Tk ${TK_VERSION}${TK_PATCH_LEVEL} needs Tcl 8.6+. Use --with-tcl= option to indicate location of tclConfig.sh file for Tcl 8.6 or better." "$LINENO" 5 fi fi #-------------------------------------------------------------------- # The statements below define a collection of compile flags. This # macro depends on the value of SHARED_BUILD, and should be called # after SC_ENABLE_SHARED checks the configure switches. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6560 6561 6562 6563 6564 6565 6566 | test $as_write_fail = 0 && chmod +x $CONFIG_STATUS || ac_write_fail=1 cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1 # Save the log message, to keep $0 and so on meaningful, and to # report actual input values of CONFIG_FILES etc. instead of their # values after options handling. ac_log=" | | | 6565 6566 6567 6568 6569 6570 6571 6572 6573 6574 6575 6576 6577 6578 6579 | test $as_write_fail = 0 && chmod +x $CONFIG_STATUS || ac_write_fail=1 cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1 # Save the log message, to keep $0 and so on meaningful, and to # report actual input values of CONFIG_FILES etc. instead of their # values after options handling. ac_log=" This file was extended by tk $as_me 8.7, which was generated by GNU Autoconf 2.72. Invocation command line was CONFIG_FILES = $CONFIG_FILES CONFIG_HEADERS = $CONFIG_HEADERS CONFIG_LINKS = $CONFIG_LINKS CONFIG_COMMANDS = $CONFIG_COMMANDS $ $0 $@ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6615 6616 6617 6618 6619 6620 6621 | _ACEOF ac_cs_config=`printf "%s\n" "$ac_configure_args" | sed "$ac_safe_unquote"` ac_cs_config_escaped=`printf "%s\n" "$ac_cs_config" | sed "s/^ //; s/'/'\\\\\\\\''/g"` cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1 ac_cs_config='$ac_cs_config_escaped' ac_cs_version="\\ | | | 6620 6621 6622 6623 6624 6625 6626 6627 6628 6629 6630 6631 6632 6633 6634 | _ACEOF ac_cs_config=`printf "%s\n" "$ac_configure_args" | sed "$ac_safe_unquote"` ac_cs_config_escaped=`printf "%s\n" "$ac_cs_config" | sed "s/^ //; s/'/'\\\\\\\\''/g"` cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1 ac_cs_config='$ac_cs_config_escaped' ac_cs_version="\\ tk config.status 8.7 configured by $0, generated by GNU Autoconf 2.72, with options \\"\$ac_cs_config\\" Copyright (C) 2023 Free Software Foundation, Inc. This config.status script is free software; the Free Software Foundation gives unlimited permission to copy, distribute and modify it." |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to win/configure.ac.
1 2 3 4 5 | #! /bin/bash -norc # This file is an input file used by the GNU "autoconf" program to # generate the file "configure", which is run during Tk installation # to configure the system for the local environment. | | | | | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | #! /bin/bash -norc # This file is an input file used by the GNU "autoconf" program to # generate the file "configure", which is run during Tk installation # to configure the system for the local environment. AC_INIT([tk],[8.7]) AC_CONFIG_SRCDIR([../generic/tk.h]) AC_PREREQ([2.69]) # The following define is needed when building with Cygwin since newer # versions of autoconf incorrectly set SHELL to /bin/bash instead of # /bin/sh. The bash shell seems to suffer from some strange failures. SHELL=/bin/sh TK_VERSION=8.7 TK_MAJOR_VERSION=8 TK_MINOR_VERSION=7 TK_PATCH_LEVEL="b1" VER=$TK_MAJOR_VERSION$TK_MINOR_VERSION #------------------------------------------------------------------------ # Handle the --prefix=... option #------------------------------------------------------------------------ if test "${prefix}" = "NONE"; then |
︙ | ︙ | |||
73 74 75 76 77 78 79 | # Locate and source the tclConfig.sh file. #-------------------------------------------------------------------- SC_PATH_TCLCONFIG($TK_PATCH_LEVEL) SC_LOAD_TCLCONFIG if test "${TCL_MAJOR_VERSION}" -lt 9 ; then | > > > > > | | | | 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 | # Locate and source the tclConfig.sh file. #-------------------------------------------------------------------- SC_PATH_TCLCONFIG($TK_PATCH_LEVEL) SC_LOAD_TCLCONFIG if test "${TCL_MAJOR_VERSION}" -lt 9 ; then if test "${TCL_MAJOR_VERSION}" != "${TK_MAJOR_VERSION}"; then AC_MSG_ERROR([${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclConfig.sh is for Tcl ${TCL_VERSION}. Tk ${TK_VERSION}${TK_PATCH_LEVEL} needs Tcl 8.6+. Use --with-tcl= option to indicate location of tclConfig.sh file for Tcl 8.6 or better.]) fi if test "${TCL_MINOR_VERSION}" -lt 6; then AC_MSG_ERROR([${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclConfig.sh is for Tcl ${TCL_VERSION}. Tk ${TK_VERSION}${TK_PATCH_LEVEL} needs Tcl 8.6+. Use --with-tcl= option to indicate location of tclConfig.sh file for Tcl 8.6 or better.]) fi fi #-------------------------------------------------------------------- # The statements below define a collection of compile flags. This # macro depends on the value of SHARED_BUILD, and should be called # after SC_ENABLE_SHARED checks the configure switches. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to win/makefile.vc.
︙ | ︙ | |||
147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 | !endif $(TMP_DIR)\wish.res TKTESTOBJS = \ $(TMP_DIR)\testMain.obj \ $(TMP_DIR)\tkSquare.obj \ $(TMP_DIR)\tkTest.obj \ $(TMP_DIR)\tkWinTest.obj \ $(TMP_DIR)\tktest.res XLIBOBJS = \ $(TMP_DIR)\xcolors.obj \ $(TMP_DIR)\xdraw.obj \ $(TMP_DIR)\xgc.obj \ | > | 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 | !endif $(TMP_DIR)\wish.res TKTESTOBJS = \ $(TMP_DIR)\testMain.obj \ $(TMP_DIR)\tkSquare.obj \ $(TMP_DIR)\tkTest.obj \ $(TMP_DIR)\tkOldTest.obj \ $(TMP_DIR)\tkWinTest.obj \ $(TMP_DIR)\tktest.res XLIBOBJS = \ $(TMP_DIR)\xcolors.obj \ $(TMP_DIR)\xdraw.obj \ $(TMP_DIR)\xgc.obj \ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
332 333 334 335 336 337 338 | # Additional include and C macro definitions for the implicit rules # defined in rules.vc PRJ_INCLUDES = -I"$(BITMAPDIR)" -I"$(XLIBDIR)" CONFIG_DEFS =/DHAVE_SYS_TYPES_H=1 /DHAVE_SYS_STAT_H=1 \ /DHAVE_STRING_H=1 /DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 \ | | | 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 | # Additional include and C macro definitions for the implicit rules # defined in rules.vc PRJ_INCLUDES = -I"$(BITMAPDIR)" -I"$(XLIBDIR)" CONFIG_DEFS =/DHAVE_SYS_TYPES_H=1 /DHAVE_SYS_STAT_H=1 \ /DHAVE_STRING_H=1 /DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 \ /DHAVE_STRINGS_H=1 /DTCL_UTF_MAX=3 \ !if $(TTK_SQUARE_WIDGET) /DTTK_SQUARE_WIDGET=1 \ !endif !if $(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) /DTK_NO_DEPRECATED=1 !endif |
︙ | ︙ | |||
617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 | git rev-parse HEAD >>$(ROOT)\manifest.uuid $(TMP_DIR)\tkUuid.h: $(ROOT)\manifest.uuid copy $(WIN_DIR)\tkUuid.h.in+$(ROOT)\manifest.uuid $(TMP_DIR)\tkUuid.h $(TMP_DIR)\tkTest.obj: $(GENERICDIR)\tkTest.c $(cc32) $(appcflags_nostubs) -Fo$@ $? $(TMP_DIR)\tkWinTest.obj: $(WIN_DIR)\tkWinTest.c $(cc32) $(appcflags_nostubs) -Fo$@ $? $(TMP_DIR)\tkSquare.obj: $(GENERICDIR)\tkSquare.c $(cc32) $(appcflags_nostubs) -Fo$@ $? | > > > | 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 | git rev-parse HEAD >>$(ROOT)\manifest.uuid $(TMP_DIR)\tkUuid.h: $(ROOT)\manifest.uuid copy $(WIN_DIR)\tkUuid.h.in+$(ROOT)\manifest.uuid $(TMP_DIR)\tkUuid.h $(TMP_DIR)\tkTest.obj: $(GENERICDIR)\tkTest.c $(cc32) $(appcflags_nostubs) -Fo$@ $? $(TMP_DIR)\tkOldTest.obj: $(GENERICDIR)\tkOldTest.c $(cc32) $(appcflags_nostubs) -Fo$@ $? $(TMP_DIR)\tkWinTest.obj: $(WIN_DIR)\tkWinTest.c $(cc32) $(appcflags_nostubs) -Fo$@ $? $(TMP_DIR)\tkSquare.obj: $(GENERICDIR)\tkSquare.c $(cc32) $(appcflags_nostubs) -Fo$@ $? |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to win/rc/tktest.rc.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | // // Version Resource Script // #include <windows.h> #include <tk.h> // // build-up the name suffix that defines the type of build this is. // #if STATIC_BUILD #define SUFFIX_STATIC "s" #else #define SUFFIX_STATIC "" #endif #if DEBUG && !UNCHECKED #define SUFFIX_DEBUG "g" #else #define SUFFIX_DEBUG "" #endif | > > > > > > | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 | // // Version Resource Script // #include <windows.h> #include <tk.h> // // build-up the name suffix that defines the type of build this is. // #if TCL_THREADS #define SUFFIX_THREADS "t" #else #define SUFFIX_THREADS "" #endif #if STATIC_BUILD #define SUFFIX_STATIC "s" #else #define SUFFIX_STATIC "" #endif #if DEBUG && !UNCHECKED #define SUFFIX_DEBUG "g" #else #define SUFFIX_DEBUG "" #endif #define SUFFIX SUFFIX_THREADS SUFFIX_STATIC SUFFIX_DEBUG VS_VERSION_INFO VERSIONINFO FILEVERSION TK_MAJOR_VERSION,TK_MINOR_VERSION,TK_RELEASE_LEVEL,TK_RELEASE_SERIAL PRODUCTVERSION TK_MAJOR_VERSION,TK_MINOR_VERSION,TK_RELEASE_LEVEL,TK_RELEASE_SERIAL FILEFLAGSMASK 0x3fL #ifdef DEBUG |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to win/tcl.m4.
︙ | ︙ | |||
981 982 983 984 985 986 987 | # --with-tcl=... # # Defines the following vars: # TCL_BIN_DIR Full path to the tcl build dir. #------------------------------------------------------------------------ AC_DEFUN([SC_WITH_TCL], [ | | | | | | 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 | # --with-tcl=... # # Defines the following vars: # TCL_BIN_DIR Full path to the tcl build dir. #------------------------------------------------------------------------ AC_DEFUN([SC_WITH_TCL], [ if test -d ../../tcl8.7$1/win; then TCL_BIN_DEFAULT=../../tcl8.7$1/win else TCL_BIN_DEFAULT=../../tcl8.7/win fi AC_ARG_WITH(tcl, [ --with-tcl=DIR use Tcl 8.7 binaries from DIR], TCL_BIN_DIR=$withval, TCL_BIN_DIR=`cd $TCL_BIN_DEFAULT; pwd`) if test ! -d $TCL_BIN_DIR; then AC_MSG_ERROR(Tcl directory $TCL_BIN_DIR does not exist) fi if test ! -f $TCL_BIN_DIR/Makefile; then AC_MSG_ERROR(There is no Makefile in $TCL_BIN_DIR: perhaps you did not specify the Tcl *build* directory (not the toplevel Tcl directory) or you forgot to configure Tcl?) else |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to win/tkWinButton.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
551 552 553 554 555 556 557 | int textXOffset = 0, textYOffset = 0; /* Text offsets for use with compound buttons * and focus ring. */ int imageWidth, imageHeight; int imageXOffset = 0, imageYOffset = 0; /* Image information that will be used to * restrict disabled pixmap as well. */ | < | | | | | 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 | int textXOffset = 0, textYOffset = 0; /* Text offsets for use with compound buttons * and focus ring. */ int imageWidth, imageHeight; int imageXOffset = 0, imageYOffset = 0; /* Image information that will be used to * restrict disabled pixmap as well. */ ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData)); butPtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_PENDING; if ((butPtr->tkwin == NULL) || !Tk_IsMapped(tkwin)) { return; } Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, butPtr->borderWidthPtr, &butPtr->borderWidth); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, butPtr->highlightWidthPtr, &butPtr->highlightWidth); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, butPtr->padXPtr, &butPtr->padX); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, butPtr->padYPtr, &butPtr->padY); border = butPtr->normalBorder; if ((butPtr->state == STATE_DISABLED) && (butPtr->disabledFg != NULL)) { gc = butPtr->disabledGC; } else if ((butPtr->state == STATE_ACTIVE) && !Tk_StrictMotif(butPtr->tkwin)) { gc = butPtr->activeTextGC; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
623 624 625 626 627 628 629 | } /* * Compute width of default ring and offset for pushed buttons. */ if (butPtr->type == TYPE_LABEL) { | | | | 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 | } /* * Compute width of default ring and offset for pushed buttons. */ if (butPtr->type == TYPE_LABEL) { defaultWidth = butPtr->highlightWidth; offset = 0; } else if (butPtr->type == TYPE_BUTTON) { defaultWidth = ((butPtr->defaultState == DEFAULT_ACTIVE) ? butPtr->highlightWidth : 0); offset = 1; } else { defaultWidth = 0; if ((butPtr->type >= TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON) && !butPtr->indicatorOn) { offset = 1; } else { offset = 0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
677 678 679 680 681 682 683 | case COMPOUND_TOP: case COMPOUND_BOTTOM: /* * Image is above or below text. */ if (butPtr->compound == COMPOUND_TOP) { | | | | | | | | 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 | case COMPOUND_TOP: case COMPOUND_BOTTOM: /* * Image is above or below text. */ if (butPtr->compound == COMPOUND_TOP) { textYOffset = height + butPtr->padY; } else { imageYOffset = butPtr->textHeight + butPtr->padY; } fullHeight = height + butPtr->textHeight + butPtr->padY; fullWidth = (width > butPtr->textWidth ? width : butPtr->textWidth); textXOffset = (fullWidth - butPtr->textWidth)/2; imageXOffset = (fullWidth - width)/2; break; case COMPOUND_LEFT: case COMPOUND_RIGHT: /* * Image is left or right of text. */ if (butPtr->compound == COMPOUND_LEFT) { textXOffset = width + butPtr->padX; } else { imageXOffset = butPtr->textWidth + butPtr->padX; } fullWidth = butPtr->textWidth + butPtr->padX + width; fullHeight = (height > butPtr->textHeight ? height : butPtr->textHeight); textYOffset = (fullHeight - butPtr->textHeight)/2; imageYOffset = (fullHeight - height)/2; break; case COMPOUND_CENTER: |
︙ | ︙ | |||
723 724 725 726 727 728 729 | imageXOffset = (fullWidth - width)/2; textYOffset = (fullHeight - butPtr->textHeight)/2; imageYOffset = (fullHeight - height)/2; break; case COMPOUND_NONE: break; } | | | 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 | imageXOffset = (fullWidth - width)/2; textYOffset = (fullHeight - butPtr->textHeight)/2; imageYOffset = (fullHeight - height)/2; break; case COMPOUND_NONE: break; } TkComputeAnchor(butPtr->anchor, tkwin, butPtr->padX, butPtr->padY, butPtr->indicatorSpace + fullWidth, fullHeight, &x, &y); x += butPtr->indicatorSpace; if (relief == TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN) { x += offset; y += offset; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
808 809 810 811 812 813 814 | } else { XSetClipOrigin(butPtr->display, gc, x, y); XCopyPlane(butPtr->display, butPtr->bitmap, pixmap, gc, 0, 0, (unsigned int) width, (unsigned int) height, x, y, 1); XSetClipOrigin(butPtr->display, gc, 0, 0); } } else { | | | 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 | } else { XSetClipOrigin(butPtr->display, gc, x, y); XCopyPlane(butPtr->display, butPtr->bitmap, pixmap, gc, 0, 0, (unsigned int) width, (unsigned int) height, x, y, 1); XSetClipOrigin(butPtr->display, gc, 0, 0); } } else { TkComputeAnchor(butPtr->anchor, tkwin, butPtr->padX, butPtr->padY, butPtr->indicatorSpace + butPtr->textWidth, butPtr->textHeight, &x, &y); x += butPtr->indicatorSpace; if (relief == TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN) { x += offset; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
849 850 851 852 853 854 855 | * around the inner edge of the border, otherwise we put it around the * text. The text offsets are only non-zero when this is a compound * button. */ if (drawRing && butPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS && butPtr->type != TYPE_LABEL) { if (butPtr->type == TYPE_BUTTON || !butPtr->indicatorOn) { | | | 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 | * around the inner edge of the border, otherwise we put it around the * text. The text offsets are only non-zero when this is a compound * button. */ if (drawRing && butPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS && butPtr->type != TYPE_LABEL) { if (butPtr->type == TYPE_BUTTON || !butPtr->indicatorOn) { int dottedWidth = butPtr->borderWidth + 1 + defaultWidth; TkWinDrawDottedRect(butPtr->display, pixmap, gc->foreground, dottedWidth, dottedWidth, Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2*dottedWidth, Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2*dottedWidth); } else { TkWinDrawDottedRect(butPtr->display, pixmap, gc->foreground, x-1 + textXOffset, y-1 + textYOffset, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
921 922 923 924 925 926 927 | */ if (relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT) { Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, border, defaultWidth, defaultWidth, Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2 * defaultWidth, Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2 * defaultWidth, | | | 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 | */ if (relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT) { Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, border, defaultWidth, defaultWidth, Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2 * defaultWidth, Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2 * defaultWidth, butPtr->borderWidth, relief); } if (defaultWidth != 0) { int highlightColor; dc = TkWinGetDrawableDC(butPtr->display, pixmap, &state); if (butPtr->type == TYPE_LABEL) { highlightColor = (int) Tk_3DBorderColor(butPtr->highlightBorder)->pixel; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
991 992 993 994 995 996 997 | int width = 0, height = 0; /* Width and height of button */ int haveImage, haveText; int avgWidth; int minWidth; /* Vertical and horizontal dialog units size in pixels. */ double vDLU, hDLU; Tk_FontMetrics fm; | < < < | | < < < | | 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 | int width = 0, height = 0; /* Width and height of button */ int haveImage, haveText; int avgWidth; int minWidth; /* Vertical and horizontal dialog units size in pixels. */ double vDLU, hDLU; Tk_FontMetrics fm; ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData)); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, butPtr->tkwin, butPtr->highlightWidthPtr, &butPtr->highlightWidth); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, butPtr->tkwin, butPtr->borderWidthPtr, &butPtr->borderWidth); butPtr->inset = butPtr->highlightWidth + butPtr->borderWidth; butPtr->indicatorSpace = 0; if (!tsdPtr->initialized) { InitBoxes(butPtr->tkwin); } /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 | /* * Figure out font metrics (even if we don't have text because we need * DLUs (based on font, not text) for some spacing calculations below). */ Tk_FreeTextLayout(butPtr->textLayout); butPtr->textLayout = Tk_ComputeTextLayout(butPtr->tkfont, | | | 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 | /* * Figure out font metrics (even if we don't have text because we need * DLUs (based on font, not text) for some spacing calculations below). */ Tk_FreeTextLayout(butPtr->textLayout); butPtr->textLayout = Tk_ComputeTextLayout(butPtr->tkfont, Tcl_GetString(butPtr->textPtr), TCL_INDEX_NONE, butPtr->wrapLength, butPtr->justify, 0, &butPtr->textWidth, &butPtr->textHeight); txtWidth = butPtr->textWidth; txtHeight = butPtr->textHeight; haveText = (*(Tcl_GetString(butPtr->textPtr)) != '\0'); avgWidth = (Tk_TextWidth(butPtr->tkfont, "abcdefghijklmnopqurstuvwzyABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQURSTUVWZY", |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 | * fact that button text is 8 DLUs high and buttons are 14 DLUs high.) * * The width is specified in characters. A character is, by * definition, 4 DLUs wide. 11 char * 4 DLU is 44 DLU + 6 DLU padding * = 50 DLU. Therefore, width = -11 -> MWUE compliant buttons. */ | | | | | 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 | * fact that button text is 8 DLUs high and buttons are 14 DLUs high.) * * The width is specified in characters. A character is, by * definition, 4 DLUs wide. 11 char * 4 DLU is 44 DLU + 6 DLU padding * = 50 DLU. Therefore, width = -11 -> MWUE compliant buttons. */ if (butPtr->width < 0) { minWidth = -(butPtr->width); /* Min width in chars */ width = avgWidth * minWidth; /* Allow for characters */ width += (int)(0.5 + (6 * hDLU)); /* Add for padding */ } /* * If shrink-wrapping was requested (width = 0) or if the text is * wider than the default button width, adjust the button width up to * suit. */ if (butPtr->width == 0 || (txtWidth + (int)(0.5 + (6 * hDLU)) > width)) { width = txtWidth + (int)(0.5 + (6 * hDLU)); } /* * The User Experience says 14 DLUs. Since text is, by definition, 8 * DLU/line, this allows for multi-line text while working perfectly |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 | /* * If the button is compound (i.e., it shows both an image and text), the * new geometry is a combination of the image and text geometry. We only * honor the compound bit if the button has both text and an image, * because otherwise it is not really a compound button. */ | | | | | | | 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 | /* * If the button is compound (i.e., it shows both an image and text), the * new geometry is a combination of the image and text geometry. We only * honor the compound bit if the button has both text and an image, * because otherwise it is not really a compound button. */ Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, butPtr->tkwin, butPtr->padXPtr, &butPtr->padX); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, butPtr->tkwin, butPtr->padYPtr, &butPtr->padY); if (butPtr->compound != COMPOUND_NONE && haveImage && haveText) { switch ((enum compound) butPtr->compound) { case COMPOUND_TOP: case COMPOUND_BOTTOM: /* * Image is above or below text. */ if (imgWidth > width) { width = imgWidth; } height += imgHeight + butPtr->padY; break; case COMPOUND_LEFT: case COMPOUND_RIGHT: /* * Image is left or right of text. * * Only increase width of button if image doesn't fit in slack * space of default button width */ if ((imgWidth + txtWidth + butPtr->padX) > width) { width = imgWidth + txtWidth + butPtr->padX; } if (imgHeight > height) { height = imgHeight; } break; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 | break; } /* switch */ /* * Fix up for minimum width. */ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 | break; } /* switch */ /* * Fix up for minimum width. */ if (butPtr->width < 0) { /* * minWidth in pixels (because there's an image. */ minWidth = -(butPtr->width); if (width < minWidth) { width = minWidth; } } else if (butPtr->width > 0) { width = butPtr->width; } if (butPtr->height > 0) { height = butPtr->height; } width += 2 * butPtr->padX; height += 2 * butPtr->padY; } else if (haveImage) { if (butPtr->width > 0) { width = butPtr->width; } else { width = imgWidth; } if (butPtr->height > 0) { height = butPtr->height; } else { height = imgHeight; } } else { /* * No image. May or may not be text. May or may not be compound. */ /* * butPtr->width is in characters. We need to allow for that many * characters on the face, not in the over-all button width */ if (butPtr->width > 0) { width = butPtr->width * avgWidth; } /* * butPtr->height is in lines of text. We need to allow for that many * lines on the face, not in the over-all button height. */ if (butPtr->height > 0) { height = butPtr->height * fm.linespace; /* * Make the same adjustments as above to get same height for e.g. * a one line text with -height 0 or 1. [Bug #565485] */ switch (butPtr->type) { case TYPE_BUTTON: { height += (int)(0.5 + (6 * vDLU)) - 10; break; } case TYPE_RADIO_BUTTON: case TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON: { height += (int)(0.5 + (2.0 * vDLU)) - 4; break; } } } width += 2 * butPtr->padX; height += 2 * butPtr->padY; } /* * Fix up width and height for indicator sizing and spacing. */ if (butPtr->type == TYPE_RADIO_BUTTON |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to win/tkWinColor.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
176 177 178 179 180 181 182 | &color)) { winColPtr = (WinColor *)ckalloc(sizeof(WinColor)); winColPtr->info.color = color; winColPtr->index = index; XAllocColor(Tk_Display(tkwin), Tk_Colormap(tkwin), &winColPtr->info.color); | | | | 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 | &color)) { winColPtr = (WinColor *)ckalloc(sizeof(WinColor)); winColPtr->info.color = color; winColPtr->index = index; XAllocColor(Tk_Display(tkwin), Tk_Colormap(tkwin), &winColPtr->info.color); return (TkColor *)winColPtr; } return (TkColor *)NULL; } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * TkpGetColorByValue -- * |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to win/tkWinDefault.h.
︙ | ︙ | |||
349 350 351 352 353 354 355 | #define DEF_MESSAGE_CURSOR "" #define DEF_MESSAGE_FG NORMAL_FG #define DEF_MESSAGE_FONT "TkDefaultFont" #define DEF_MESSAGE_HIGHLIGHT_BG NORMAL_BG #define DEF_MESSAGE_HIGHLIGHT HIGHLIGHT #define DEF_MESSAGE_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH "0" #define DEF_MESSAGE_JUSTIFY "left" | | | | 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 | #define DEF_MESSAGE_CURSOR "" #define DEF_MESSAGE_FG NORMAL_FG #define DEF_MESSAGE_FONT "TkDefaultFont" #define DEF_MESSAGE_HIGHLIGHT_BG NORMAL_BG #define DEF_MESSAGE_HIGHLIGHT HIGHLIGHT #define DEF_MESSAGE_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH "0" #define DEF_MESSAGE_JUSTIFY "left" #define DEF_MESSAGE_PADX "-1" #define DEF_MESSAGE_PADY "-1" #define DEF_MESSAGE_RELIEF "flat" #define DEF_MESSAGE_TAKE_FOCUS "0" #define DEF_MESSAGE_TEXT "" #define DEF_MESSAGE_TEXT_VARIABLE "" #define DEF_MESSAGE_WIDTH "0" /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
446 447 448 449 450 451 452 | #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_ACTIVE_BG_MONO BLACK #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_ACTIVE_RELIEF "raised" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_BG_COLOR NORMAL_BG #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_BG_MONO WHITE #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_BORDER_WIDTH "0" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_COMMAND "" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_CURSOR "" | | | 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 | #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_ACTIVE_BG_MONO BLACK #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_ACTIVE_RELIEF "raised" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_BG_COLOR NORMAL_BG #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_BG_MONO WHITE #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_BORDER_WIDTH "0" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_COMMAND "" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_CURSOR "" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_EL_BORDER_WIDTH "-1" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_HIGHLIGHT_BG NORMAL_BG #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_HIGHLIGHT HIGHLIGHT #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH "0" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_JUMP "0" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_ORIENT "vertical" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_RELIEF "sunken" #define DEF_SCROLLBAR_REPEAT_DELAY "300" |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to win/tkWinDialog.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
2162 2163 2164 2165 2166 2167 2168 | */ static void FreeFilterVista(DWORD count, TCLCOMDLG_FILTERSPEC *dlgFilterPtr) { if (dlgFilterPtr != NULL) { DWORD dw; for (dw = 0; dw < count; ++dw) { if (dlgFilterPtr[dw].pszName != NULL) | | | | 2162 2163 2164 2165 2166 2167 2168 2169 2170 2171 2172 2173 2174 2175 2176 2177 2178 | */ static void FreeFilterVista(DWORD count, TCLCOMDLG_FILTERSPEC *dlgFilterPtr) { if (dlgFilterPtr != NULL) { DWORD dw; for (dw = 0; dw < count; ++dw) { if (dlgFilterPtr[dw].pszName != NULL) ckfree((char *)dlgFilterPtr[dw].pszName); if (dlgFilterPtr[dw].pszSpec != NULL) ckfree((char *)dlgFilterPtr[dw].pszSpec); } ckfree(dlgFilterPtr); } } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to win/tkWinFont.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
841 842 843 844 845 846 847 | */ moretomeasure = 0; curX = 0; start = source; end = start + numBytes; for (p = start; p < end; ) { | | | 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 | */ moretomeasure = 0; curX = 0; start = source; end = start + numBytes; for (p = start; p < end; ) { next = p + TkUtfToUniChar(p, &ch); thisSubFontPtr = FindSubFontForChar(fontPtr, ch, &lastSubFontPtr); if (thisSubFontPtr != lastSubFontPtr) { familyPtr = lastSubFontPtr->familyPtr; WCHAR *wstr = (WCHAR *)Tcl_UtfToExternalDString(familyPtr->encoding, start, p - start, &runString); size.cx = 0; familyPtr->getTextExtentPoint32Proc(hdc, wstr, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
902 903 904 905 906 907 908 | char buf[16]; int dstWrote; int lastSize = 0; familyPtr = lastSubFontPtr->familyPtr; Tcl_DStringInit(&runString); for (p = start; p < end; ) { | | | 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 | char buf[16]; int dstWrote; int lastSize = 0; familyPtr = lastSubFontPtr->familyPtr; Tcl_DStringInit(&runString); for (p = start; p < end; ) { next = p + TkUtfToUniChar(p, &ch); Tcl_UtfToExternal(NULL, familyPtr->encoding, p, (int) (next - p), TCL_ENCODING_PROFILE_TCL8, NULL, buf, sizeof(buf), NULL, &dstWrote, NULL); Tcl_DStringAppend(&runString,buf,dstWrote); size.cx = 0; familyPtr->getTextExtentPoint32Proc(hdc, (WCHAR *) Tcl_DStringValue(&runString), |
︙ | ︙ | |||
957 958 959 960 961 962 963 | const char *lastWordBreak = NULL; int ch2; end = p; p = source; ch = ' '; while (p < end) { | | | 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 | const char *lastWordBreak = NULL; int ch2; end = p; p = source; ch = ' '; while (p < end) { next = p + TkUtfToUniChar(p, &ch2); if ((ch != ' ') && (ch2 == ' ')) { lastWordBreak = p; } p = next; ch = ch2; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
984 985 986 987 988 989 990 | *lengthPtr = curX; return (int)(p - source); } /* *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- * | | | | | 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 | *lengthPtr = curX; return (int)(p - source); } /* *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- * * Tk_MeasureCharsInContext -- * * Determine the number of bytes from the string that will fit in the * given horizontal span. The measurement is done under the assumption * that Tk_MeasureCharsInContext() will be used to actually display the * characters. * * This one is almost the same as Tk_MeasureChars(), but with access to * all the characters on the line for context. On Windows this context * isn't consulted, so we just call Tk_MeasureChars(). * * Results: * The return value is the number of bytes from source that fit into the * span that extends from 0 to maxLength. *lengthPtr is filled with the * x-coordinate of the right edge of the last character that did fit. * * Side effects: * None. * *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ int Tk_MeasureCharsInContext( Tk_Font tkfont, /* Font in which characters will be drawn. */ const char *source, /* UTF-8 string to be displayed. Need not be * '\0' terminated. */ TCL_UNUSED(Tcl_Size), /* Maximum number of bytes to consider from * source string in all. */ Tcl_Size rangeStart, /* Index of first byte to measure. */ Tcl_Size rangeLength, /* Length of range to measure in bytes. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356 1357 | } TkWinReleaseDrawableDC(drawable, dc, &state); } /* *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- * | | | | | 1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 1360 1361 1362 1363 1364 1365 1366 1367 1368 1369 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 1375 1376 1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 | } TkWinReleaseDrawableDC(drawable, dc, &state); } /* *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- * * Tk_DrawCharsInContext -- * * Draw a string of characters on the screen like Tk_DrawChars(), but * with access to all the characters on the line for context. On Windows * this context isn't consulted, so we just call Tk_DrawChars(). * * Note: TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT being currently defined only on macOS, this * function is unused. * * Results: * None. * * Side effects: * Information gets drawn on the screen. * *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ void Tk_DrawCharsInContext( Display *display, /* Display on which to draw. */ Drawable drawable, /* Window or pixmap in which to draw. */ GC gc, /* Graphics context for drawing characters. */ Tk_Font tkfont, /* Font in which characters will be drawn; * must be the same as font used in GC. */ const char *source, /* UTF-8 string to be displayed. Need not be * '\0' terminated. All Tk meta-characters |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1474 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 1480 | lastSubFontPtr = &fontPtr->subFontArray[0]; oldFont = SelectFont(hdc, fontPtr, lastSubFontPtr, angle); GetTextMetricsW(hdc, &tm); end = source + numBytes; for (p = source; p < end; ) { | | | 1474 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 1480 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 | lastSubFontPtr = &fontPtr->subFontArray[0]; oldFont = SelectFont(hdc, fontPtr, lastSubFontPtr, angle); GetTextMetricsW(hdc, &tm); end = source + numBytes; for (p = source; p < end; ) { next = p + TkUtfToUniChar(p, &ch); thisSubFontPtr = FindSubFontForChar(fontPtr, ch, &lastSubFontPtr); /* * The drawing API has a limit of 32767 pixels in one go. * To avoid spending time on a rare case we do not measure each char, * instead we limit to drawing chunks of 200 bytes since that works * well in practice. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2257 2258 2259 2260 2261 2262 2263 | * we don't know the proper Unicode -> symbol font mapping, we can * install the symbol font as the base font and access its glyphs. */ end = (row + 1) << FONTMAP_SHIFT; for (i = row << FONTMAP_SHIFT; i < end; i++) { if (Tcl_UtfToExternal(NULL, encoding, src, | | | 2257 2258 2259 2260 2261 2262 2263 2264 2265 2266 2267 2268 2269 2270 2271 | * we don't know the proper Unicode -> symbol font mapping, we can * install the symbol font as the base font and access its glyphs. */ end = (row + 1) << FONTMAP_SHIFT; for (i = row << FONTMAP_SHIFT; i < end; i++) { if (Tcl_UtfToExternal(NULL, encoding, src, TkUniCharToUtf(i, src), TCL_ENCODING_STOPONERROR, NULL, buf, sizeof(buf), NULL, NULL, NULL) != TCL_OK) { continue; } bitOffset = i & (FONTMAP_BITSPERPAGE - 1); subFontPtr->fontMap[row][bitOffset >> 3] |= 1 << (bitOffset & 7); } } |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to win/tkWinGDI.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
3646 3647 3648 3649 3650 3651 3652 | */ if (localPrinterName != NULL) { char* varlink1 = (char*)ckalloc(100 * sizeof(char)); char** varlink2 = (char**)ckalloc(sizeof(char*)); *varlink2 = varlink1; WideCharToMultiByte(CP_UTF8, 0, localPrinterName, -1, varlink1, 0, NULL, NULL); | | | | | | | | 3646 3647 3648 3649 3650 3651 3652 3653 3654 3655 3656 3657 3658 3659 3660 3661 3662 3663 3664 3665 3666 3667 3668 3669 3670 | */ if (localPrinterName != NULL) { char* varlink1 = (char*)ckalloc(100 * sizeof(char)); char** varlink2 = (char**)ckalloc(sizeof(char*)); *varlink2 = varlink1; WideCharToMultiByte(CP_UTF8, 0, localPrinterName, -1, varlink1, 0, NULL, NULL); Tcl_LinkVar(interp, "::tk::print::printer_name", (char*)varlink2, TCL_LINK_STRING | TCL_LINK_READ_ONLY); Tcl_LinkVar(interp, "::tk::print::copies", (char*)&copies, TCL_LINK_INT | TCL_LINK_READ_ONLY); Tcl_LinkVar(interp, "::tk::print::dpi_x", (char*)&dpi_x, TCL_LINK_INT | TCL_LINK_READ_ONLY); Tcl_LinkVar(interp, "::tk::print::dpi_y", (char*)&dpi_y, TCL_LINK_INT | TCL_LINK_READ_ONLY); Tcl_LinkVar(interp, "::tk::print::paper_width", (char*)&paper_width, TCL_LINK_INT | TCL_LINK_READ_ONLY); Tcl_LinkVar(interp, "::tk::print::paper_height", (char*)&paper_height, TCL_LINK_INT | TCL_LINK_READ_ONLY); } return TCL_OK; } /* |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to win/tkWinKey.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
109 110 111 112 113 114 115 | } } else if (keyEv->send_event == -3) { /* * Special case for WM_UNICHAR and win2000 multilingual IME input */ | | | | 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 | } } else if (keyEv->send_event == -3) { /* * Special case for WM_UNICHAR and win2000 multilingual IME input */ len = TkUniCharToUtf(keyEv->keycode, buf); Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, buf, len); } else { /* * This is an event generated from generic code. It has no nchars or * trans_chars members. */ KeySym keysym = KeycodeToKeysym(keyEv->keycode, keyEv->state, 0); if (((keysym != NoSymbol) && (keysym > 0) && (keysym < 256)) || (keysym == XK_Return) || (keysym == XK_Tab)) { len = TkUniCharToUtf(keysym & 255, buf); Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, buf, len); } } return Tcl_DStringValue(dsPtr); } /* |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to win/tkWinMenu.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
505 506 507 508 509 510 511 | int i; const char *label = (mePtr->labelPtr == NULL) ? "" : Tcl_GetString(mePtr->labelPtr); const char *accel = ((menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR) || (mePtr->accelPtr == NULL)) ? "" : Tcl_GetString(mePtr->accelPtr); const char *p, *next; Tcl_DString itemString; | | | | | | | 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 | int i; const char *label = (mePtr->labelPtr == NULL) ? "" : Tcl_GetString(mePtr->labelPtr); const char *accel = ((menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR) || (mePtr->accelPtr == NULL)) ? "" : Tcl_GetString(mePtr->accelPtr); const char *p, *next; Tcl_DString itemString; int ch = 0; /* * We have to construct the string with an ampersand preceding the * underline character, and a tab separating the text and the accel * text. We have to be careful with ampersands in the string. */ Tcl_DStringInit(&itemString); for (p = label, i = 0; *p != '\0'; i++, p = next) { if (i == mePtr->underline) { Tcl_DStringAppend(&itemString, "&", 1); } if (*p == '&') { Tcl_DStringAppend(&itemString, "&", 1); } next = p + TkUtfToUniChar(p, &ch); Tcl_DStringAppend(&itemString, p, (int) (next - p)); } ch = 0; if (mePtr->accelLength > 0) { Tcl_DStringAppend(&itemString, "\t", 1); for (p = accel, i = 0; *p != '\0'; i++, p = next) { if (*p == '&') { Tcl_DStringAppend(&itemString, "&", 1); } next = p + TkUtfToUniChar(p, &ch); Tcl_DStringAppend(&itemString, p, (int) (next - p)); } } itemText = (char *)ckalloc(Tcl_DStringLength(&itemString) + 1); strcpy(itemText, Tcl_DStringValue(&itemString)); Tcl_DStringFree(&itemString); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 1602 | *heightPtr = indicatorDimensions[0]; if (mePtr->hideMargin) { *widthPtr = 0; } else { int borderWidth; Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(menuPtr->interp, menuPtr->tkwin, | | | 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 | *heightPtr = indicatorDimensions[0]; if (mePtr->hideMargin) { *widthPtr = 0; } else { int borderWidth; Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(menuPtr->interp, menuPtr->tkwin, menuPtr->borderWidthPtr, &borderWidth); *widthPtr = indicatorDimensions[1] - borderWidth; /* * Quite dubious about the above (why would borderWidth play a role?) * and about how indicatorDimensions[1] is obtained in SetDefaults(). * At least don't let the result be negative! */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1840 1841 1842 1843 1844 1845 1846 | } else { whichGC = indicatorGC; } rect.top = y; rect.bottom = y + mePtr->height; Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(menuPtr->interp, menuPtr->tkwin, | | | 1840 1841 1842 1843 1844 1845 1846 1847 1848 1849 1850 1851 1852 1853 1854 | } else { whichGC = indicatorGC; } rect.top = y; rect.bottom = y + mePtr->height; Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(menuPtr->interp, menuPtr->tkwin, menuPtr->borderWidthPtr, &borderWidth); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(menuPtr->interp, menuPtr->tkwin, menuPtr->activeBorderWidthPtr, &activeBorderWidth); rect.left = borderWidth + activeBorderWidth + x; rect.right = mePtr->indicatorSpace + x; if ((mePtr->state == ENTRY_DISABLED) && (menuPtr->disabledFgPtr != NULL)) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 2105 2106 | int y, /* Top Edge */ TCL_UNUSED(int), /* Width of entry */ int height) /* Height of entry */ { if ((mePtr->underline >= 0) && (mePtr->labelPtr != NULL)) { int len; | | | | | > > | | 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 2105 2106 2107 2108 2109 2110 2111 2112 2113 2114 2115 2116 2117 2118 2119 2120 2121 2122 2123 2124 2125 | int y, /* Top Edge */ TCL_UNUSED(int), /* Width of entry */ int height) /* Height of entry */ { if ((mePtr->underline >= 0) && (mePtr->labelPtr != NULL)) { int len; len = TkGetCharLength(mePtr->labelPtr); if (mePtr->underline < len) { const char *label, *start, *end; int activeBorderWidth, ch; label = Tcl_GetString(mePtr->labelPtr); start = TkUtfAtIndex(label, mePtr->underline); end = start + TkUtfToUniChar(start, &ch); Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, menuPtr->tkwin, menuPtr->activeBorderWidthPtr, &activeBorderWidth); Tk_UnderlineChars(menuPtr->display, d, gc, tkfont, label, x + mePtr->indicatorSpace + activeBorderWidth, y + (height + fmPtr->ascent - fmPtr->descent) / 2, (int) (start - label), (int) (end - label)); } } } /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2986 2987 2988 2989 2990 2991 2992 | int activeBorderWidth, borderWidth; if (menuPtr->tkwin == NULL) { return; } Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(menuPtr->interp, menuPtr->tkwin, | | | 2988 2989 2990 2991 2992 2993 2994 2995 2996 2997 2998 2999 3000 3001 3002 | int activeBorderWidth, borderWidth; if (menuPtr->tkwin == NULL) { return; } Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(menuPtr->interp, menuPtr->tkwin, menuPtr->borderWidthPtr, &borderWidth); x = y = borderWidth; indicatorSpace = labelWidth = accelWidth = 0; windowHeight = 0; /* * On the Mac especially, getting font metrics can be quite slow, so we * want to do it intelligently. We are going to precalculate them and pass |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to win/tkWinPort.h.
︙ | ︙ | |||
120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 | /* * The following Tk functions are implemented as macros under Windows. */ #define TkpGetPixel(p) (((((p)->red >> 8) & 0xff) \ | ((p)->green & 0xff00) | (((p)->blue << 8) & 0xff0000)) | 0x20000000) #endif /* _WINPORT */ | > > > > > > > > > | 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 | /* * The following Tk functions are implemented as macros under Windows. */ #define TkpGetPixel(p) (((((p)->red >> 8) & 0xff) \ | ((p)->green & 0xff00) | (((p)->blue << 8) & 0xff0000)) | 0x20000000) /* * These calls implement native bitmaps which are not currently * supported under Windows. The macros eliminate the calls. */ #define TkpDefineNativeBitmaps() #define TkpCreateNativeBitmap(display, source) None #define TkpGetNativeAppBitmap(display, name, w, h) None #endif /* _WINPORT */ |
Changes to win/tkWinScrlbr.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
384 385 386 387 388 389 390 | void TkpComputeScrollbarGeometry( TkScrollbar *scrollPtr) /* Scrollbar whose geometry may have * changed. */ { int fieldLength, minThumbSize; | < | 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 | void TkpComputeScrollbarGeometry( TkScrollbar *scrollPtr) /* Scrollbar whose geometry may have * changed. */ { int fieldLength, minThumbSize; /* * Windows doesn't use focus rings on scrollbars, but we still perform * basic sanity checks to appease backwards compatibility. */ if (scrollPtr->vertical) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
437 438 439 440 441 442 443 | /* * Register the desired geometry for the window (leave enough space for * the two arrows plus a minimum-size slider, plus border around the whole * window, if any). Then arrange for the window to be redisplayed. */ | < | | | 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 | /* * Register the desired geometry for the window (leave enough space for * the two arrows plus a minimum-size slider, plus border around the whole * window, if any). Then arrange for the window to be redisplayed. */ if (scrollPtr->vertical) { Tk_GeometryRequest(scrollPtr->tkwin, scrollPtr->width, 2 * scrollPtr->arrowLength + minThumbSize); } else { Tk_GeometryRequest(scrollPtr->tkwin, 2 * scrollPtr->arrowLength + minThumbSize, scrollPtr->width); } Tk_SetInternalBorder(scrollPtr->tkwin, 0); } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to win/tkWinX.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
657 658 659 660 661 662 663 | ckfree(display->display_name); } if (ScreenOfDisplay(display, 0) != NULL) { if (DefaultVisualOfScreen(ScreenOfDisplay(display, 0)) != NULL) { ckfree(DefaultVisualOfScreen(ScreenOfDisplay(display, 0))); } if (RootWindowOfScreen(ScreenOfDisplay(display, 0)) != None) { | | | 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 | ckfree(display->display_name); } if (ScreenOfDisplay(display, 0) != NULL) { if (DefaultVisualOfScreen(ScreenOfDisplay(display, 0)) != NULL) { ckfree(DefaultVisualOfScreen(ScreenOfDisplay(display, 0))); } if (RootWindowOfScreen(ScreenOfDisplay(display, 0)) != None) { ckfree((char *)RootWindowOfScreen(ScreenOfDisplay(display, 0))); } if (DefaultColormapOfScreen(ScreenOfDisplay(display, 0)) != None) { XFreeColormap(display, DefaultColormapOfScreen(ScreenOfDisplay(display, 0))); } ckfree(ScreenOfDisplay(display, 0)); } ckfree(display); |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to win/ttkWinTheme.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
611 612 613 614 615 616 617 | int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, TCL_UNUSED(Ttk_Padding *)) { ThumbElement *thumbPtr = (ThumbElement *)elementRecord; Ttk_Orient orient; | | | 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 | int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, TCL_UNUSED(Ttk_Padding *)) { ThumbElement *thumbPtr = (ThumbElement *)elementRecord; Ttk_Orient orient; TtkGetOrientFromObj(NULL, thumbPtr->orientObj, &orient); if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) { *widthPtr = GetSystemMetrics(SM_CXHTHUMB); *heightPtr = GetSystemMetrics(SM_CYHSCROLL); } else { *widthPtr = GetSystemMetrics(SM_CXVSCROLL); *heightPtr = GetSystemMetrics(SM_CYVTHUMB); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
676 677 678 679 680 681 682 | int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, TCL_UNUSED(Ttk_Padding *)) { SliderElement *slider = (SliderElement *)elementRecord; Ttk_Orient orient; | | | 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 | int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, TCL_UNUSED(Ttk_Padding *)) { SliderElement *slider = (SliderElement *)elementRecord; Ttk_Orient orient; TtkGetOrientFromObj(NULL, slider->orientObj, &orient); if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) { *widthPtr = (GetSystemMetrics(SM_CXHTHUMB) / 2) | 1; *heightPtr = GetSystemMetrics(SM_CYHSCROLL); } else { *widthPtr = GetSystemMetrics(SM_CXVSCROLL); *heightPtr = (GetSystemMetrics(SM_CYVTHUMB) / 2) | 1; } |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to win/ttkWinXPTheme.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
422 423 424 425 426 427 428 | * then the info member is dynamically allocated. Otherwise it was * static data from the C object and only the ElementData needs freeing. */ static void DestroyElementData(void *clientData) { ElementData *elementData = (ElementData *)clientData; if (elementData->info->flags & HEAP_ELEMENT) { | | | | | | 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 | * then the info member is dynamically allocated. Otherwise it was * static data from the C object and only the ElementData needs freeing. */ static void DestroyElementData(void *clientData) { ElementData *elementData = (ElementData *)clientData; if (elementData->info->flags & HEAP_ELEMENT) { ckfree((char *)elementData->info->statemap); ckfree((char *)elementData->info->className); ckfree((char *)elementData->info->elementName); ckfree((char *)elementData->info); } ckfree(clientData); } /* * InitElementData -- * Looks up theme handle. If Drawable argument is non-NULL, |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to win/winMain.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | * Copyright © 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. * Copyright © 1998-1999 Scriptics Corporation. * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | | | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 | * Copyright © 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. * Copyright © 1998-1999 Scriptics Corporation. * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #include "tk.h" #define WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN #include <windows.h> #undef WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN #include <locale.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <tchar.h> #if TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 && TCL_MINOR_VERSION < 7 # define Tcl_LibraryInitProc Tcl_PackageInitProc # define Tcl_StaticLibrary Tcl_StaticPackage #endif #if defined(__GNUC__) int _CRT_glob = 0; #endif /* __GNUC__ */ #ifdef __cplusplus extern "C" { #endif #ifdef TK_TEST extern Tcl_LibraryInitProc Tktest_Init; #endif /* TK_TEST */ #if !defined(TCL_USE_STATIC_PACKAGES) # if TCL_MAJOR_VERSION > 8 || TCL_MINOR_VERSION > 6 # define TCL_USE_STATIC_PACKAGES 1 # else # define TCL_USE_STATIC_PACKAGES 0 # endif #endif #if defined(STATIC_BUILD) && TCL_USE_STATIC_PACKAGES |
︙ | ︙ | |||
187 188 189 190 191 192 193 | if (*p == '\\') { *p = '/'; } } #ifdef TK_LOCAL_MAIN_HOOK TK_LOCAL_MAIN_HOOK(&argc, &argv); | | | 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 | if (*p == '\\') { *p = '/'; } } #ifdef TK_LOCAL_MAIN_HOOK TK_LOCAL_MAIN_HOOK(&argc, &argv); #elif defined(UNICODE) && ((TCL_MAJOR_VERSION > 8) || (TCL_MINOR_VERSION > 6)) /* This doesn't work on Windows without UNICODE, neither does it work with Tcl 8.6 */ TclZipfs_AppHook(&argc, &argv); #endif Tk_Main(argc, argv, TK_LOCAL_APPINIT); return 0; /* Needed only to prevent compiler warning. */ } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 | /* * Specify a user-specific startup file to invoke if the application is * run interactively. Typically the startup file is "~/.apprc" where "app" * is the name of the application. If this line is deleted then no * user-specific startup file will be run under any conditions. */ (void) Tcl_EvalEx(interp, "set tcl_rcFileName [file tildeexpand ~/wishrc.tcl]", -1, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL); return TCL_OK; } #if defined(TK_TEST) /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * | > > > > > | 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 | /* * Specify a user-specific startup file to invoke if the application is * run interactively. Typically the startup file is "~/.apprc" where "app" * is the name of the application. If this line is deleted then no * user-specific startup file will be run under any conditions. */ #if TCL_MAJOR_VERSION > 8 (void) Tcl_EvalEx(interp, "set tcl_rcFileName [file tildeexpand ~/wishrc.tcl]", -1, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL); #else Tcl_ObjSetVar2(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj("tcl_rcFileName", -1), NULL, Tcl_NewStringObj("~/wishrc.tcl", -1), TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY); #endif return TCL_OK; } #if defined(TK_TEST) /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to xlib/X11/keysymdef.h.
︙ | ︙ | |||
253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 | #define XK_Prior 0xff55 /* Prior, previous */ #define XK_Page_Up 0xff55 /* deprecated alias for Prior */ #define XK_Next 0xff56 /* Next */ #define XK_Page_Down 0xff56 /* deprecated alias for Next */ #define XK_End 0xff57 /* EOL */ #define XK_Begin 0xff58 /* BOL */ /* Misc functions */ #define XK_Select 0xff60 /* Select, mark */ #define XK_Print 0xff61 #define XK_Execute 0xff62 /* Execute, run, do */ #define XK_Insert 0xff63 /* Insert, insert here */ | > > > > > > > > > | 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 | #define XK_Prior 0xff55 /* Prior, previous */ #define XK_Page_Up 0xff55 /* deprecated alias for Prior */ #define XK_Next 0xff56 /* Next */ #define XK_Page_Down 0xff56 /* deprecated alias for Next */ #define XK_End 0xff57 /* EOL */ #define XK_Begin 0xff58 /* BOL */ #ifndef TK_NO_DEPRECATED /* Special Windows keyboard keys */ #define XK_Win_L 0xFF5B /* Left-hand Windows */ #define XK_Win_R 0xFF5C /* Right-hand Windows */ #define XK_App 0xFF5D /* Menu key */ #endif /* Misc functions */ #define XK_Select 0xff60 /* Select, mark */ #define XK_Print 0xff61 #define XK_Execute 0xff62 /* Execute, run, do */ #define XK_Insert 0xff63 /* Insert, insert here */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2578 2579 2580 2581 2582 2583 2584 | #define XK_Sinh_oo2 0x1000ddd /* U+0DDD SINHALA VOWEL SIGN KOMBUVA HAA DIGA AELA-PILLA */ #define XK_Sinh_au2 0x1000dde /* U+0DDE SINHALA VOWEL SIGN KOMBUVA HAA GAYANUKITTA */ #define XK_Sinh_lu2 0x1000ddf /* U+0DDF SINHALA VOWEL SIGN GAYANUKITTA */ #define XK_Sinh_ruu2 0x1000df2 /* U+0DF2 SINHALA VOWEL SIGN DIGA GAETTA-PILLA */ #define XK_Sinh_luu2 0x1000df3 /* U+0DF3 SINHALA VOWEL SIGN DIGA GAYANUKITTA */ #define XK_Sinh_kunddaliya 0x1000df4 /* U+0DF4 SINHALA PUNCTUATION KUNDDALIYA */ #endif /* XK_SINHALA */ | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 2587 2588 2589 2590 2591 2592 2593 2594 2595 2596 2597 2598 2599 2600 2601 2602 2603 2604 2605 2606 2607 2608 | #define XK_Sinh_oo2 0x1000ddd /* U+0DDD SINHALA VOWEL SIGN KOMBUVA HAA DIGA AELA-PILLA */ #define XK_Sinh_au2 0x1000dde /* U+0DDE SINHALA VOWEL SIGN KOMBUVA HAA GAYANUKITTA */ #define XK_Sinh_lu2 0x1000ddf /* U+0DDF SINHALA VOWEL SIGN GAYANUKITTA */ #define XK_Sinh_ruu2 0x1000df2 /* U+0DF2 SINHALA VOWEL SIGN DIGA GAETTA-PILLA */ #define XK_Sinh_luu2 0x1000df3 /* U+0DF3 SINHALA VOWEL SIGN DIGA GAYANUKITTA */ #define XK_Sinh_kunddaliya 0x1000df4 /* U+0DF4 SINHALA PUNCTUATION KUNDDALIYA */ #endif /* XK_SINHALA */ /* Multimedia keys, defined same as on Linux * /usr/include/pkg/libxkbcommon/xkbcommon/xkbcommon-keysyms.h */ #ifndef TK_NO_DEPRECATED #define XK_XF86AudioLowerVolume 0x1008FF11 /* Volume control down */ #define XK_XF86AudioMute 0x1008FF12 /* Mute sound from the system */ #define XK_XF86AudioRaiseVolume 0x1008FF13 /* Volume control up */ #define XK_XF86AudioPlay 0x1008FF14 /* Start playing of audio > */ #define XK_XF86AudioStop 0x1008FF15 /* Stop playing audio */ #define XK_XF86AudioPrev 0x1008FF16 /* Previous track */ #define XK_XF86AudioNext 0x1008FF17 /* Next track */ #endif /* !TK_NO_DEPRECATED */ |